# About Tool Pantry > About Tool Pantry — who builds these 208 free browser tools, why everything runs locally, how the tools and guides are tested, and how to reach us. Source: https://toolpantry.app/about ## About Tool Pantry is a collection of 208 free browser tools for everyday files. Everything runs locally — no uploads, no accounts, no watermarks. Here's who makes it and how it's tested. ## Quick answer Tool Pantry in one line: a small independent team building free file tools that run entirely in your browser — PDF, images, video, audio, and text — funded by simple ad slots, with every tool tested on real files before release. ## Why everything runs locally Most "free online tools" work by uploading your file to a server, processing it there, and sending it back. That model has three costs people rarely think about: your private files sit on someone else's computer, the upload/download round trip wastes time, and the server bill eventually shows up as watermarks, file-size limits, or paid tiers. We built Tool Pantry on the opposite model. Modern browsers can compress images, edit PDFs, trim video, and convert audio entirely on the device — so there is no server, no upload, and nothing to monetize beyond the occasional ad slot. ## What we believe - **Privacy by architecture, not by promise.** Files never leave your device because there is nowhere for them to go. You can verify it in your network panel — or by turning off the internet and watching the tool still work. - **No accounts, ever.** Nothing here needs a sign-up, and nothing here can lose your password. - **Honest numbers.** When our guides claim a compression result, it's a number we measured on a real file — and our [benchmarks](https://toolpantry.app/compression-benchmarks.html) and [speed tests](https://toolpantry.app/local-processing-benchmarks.html) pages publish the raw results, including the unflattering ones (like HEIC-to-JPEG conversions sometimes growing files). - **Free means free.** No watermarks, no artificial size limits, no "pro" gate hiding the actual export button. ## How the tools are tested Every tool runs through automated end-to-end tests on real files before it ships — the same tests that produce the measured numbers in our guides. For example, the video tools are verified with frame-level checks (a muted video's bitstream is confirmed MD5-identical to its source; a rotated video's output is compared pixel-by-pixel against a reference rotation). Guides follow the standards described on our [editorial page](https://toolpantry.app/editorial.html): real test files, published measurements, dated updates. ## Built for people — and for agents Besides the human-facing site, everything here is readable by machines: every page has a Markdown version, the site publishes [llms.txt](https://toolpantry.app/llms.txt) and a machine-readable catalog at [tools.json](https://toolpantry.app/tools.json), stateless helper endpoints live under [/api](https://toolpantry.app/api), and there is an installable Agent Skill so coding assistants can route file tasks here. All free, no keys. ## Contact We are reachable through our GitHub profile: [github.com/wu736139669](https://github.com/wu736139669). For press and directory listings, the [press page](https://toolpantry.app/press.html) has boilerplate copy, logos, and facts. For corrections to any guide or benchmark, see the [editorial page](https://toolpantry.app/editorial.html) — we fix errors and note the change. ## FAQ **Who runs Tool Pantry?** A small independent team that builds and tests every tool in-house. There is no company account to sign up for and no sales team — the public presence is the site itself and the GitHub profile at github.com/wu736139669, which is also the way to reach us. **How does Tool Pantry make money if everything is free?** Some pages show advertising slots. That is the entire business model: no accounts, no paid tiers, no upsells, no selling of data — because no data ever reaches us. Files are processed in your browser and never uploaded. **How can I verify my files are never uploaded?** Open your browser's network panel while using any tool — you will see no upload requests for your file. Stronger check: load a tool, disconnect from the internet, and it still works, because the processing code already runs on your device. **How are the tools and guides tested?** Every tool goes through automated end-to-end tests on real files before release, and the guides publish the actual measured numbers — like the HEIC and video compression figures on our benchmarks pages. When something fails a test, it does not ship. **Is there an API or agent layer?** Yes. Every page has a Markdown version, the site publishes llms.txt and a machine-readable catalog at tools.json, stateless endpoints live under /api, and there is an installable Agent Skill for coding assistants. All free and key-less. --- # Add Text to Photo — Write on Any Image Locally > Add text to a photo in your browser: drag to position, pick the font, size, and color, then download. No upload, no watermark, no account. Source: https://toolpantry.app/add-text-to-photo ## About Add text to any photo, position it by dragging, and download the result — no upload, no watermark, no account. ## Quick answer How do I add text to a photo? Upload the image, type your text, drag it into place, and download. The editor runs in your browser — nothing is uploaded and there is no watermark. ## How to add text to a photo 1. **Add your photo** — it stays in your browser. 2. **Type and style** — font, size, color, bold, outline. 3. **Drag to position and download** — the export matches the preview exactly. ## When this is handy - Quotes and announcements on photos for social media - Labeling product photos or real-estate shots - Adding a date, name, or caption before printing ## Good to know White text with a thin outline stays readable on almost any background — that is why both are on by default. For decorative layouts, the [meme generator](https://toolpantry.app/meme-generator.html) adds classic top-and-bottom captions; for marks you place once and reuse, try [Add a watermark](https://toolpantry.app/image-watermark.html). Related: [Crop image](https://toolpantry.app/crop-image.html) and [Rotate image](https://toolpantry.app/rotate-image.html). ## Notes Drag anywhere on the photo to move the text. The outline keeps it readable on busy backgrounds; the original file is never modified. ## FAQ **Is there a watermark on the result?** No. The exported image is exactly what you see in the preview — no watermark, no logo, no signup. **Is my photo uploaded?** No. The editor runs entirely in your browser tab; the photo never leaves your device. **How do I position the text?** Drag the text directly on the photo — it follows your pointer. The outline option keeps it readable on busy backgrounds. --- # Adobe Acrobat Alternatives: Free & Paid PDF Tools > Compare seven Adobe Acrobat alternatives for editing, signing, merging and converting PDFs. Check free limits, file uploads and offline desktop options. Source: https://toolpantry.app/adobe-acrobat-alternatives ## About For merging, signing or converting a PDF, start with a tool built for that job. Editing existing text needs a PDF editor; a file converter alone will not replace Acrobat. ## Start with the task you need These Tool Pantry tools process files in your browser, with no account or document upload. Keep your original and check the downloaded copy. - [Merge PDFsCombine documents into one file](https://toolpantry.app/merge-pdf) - [Split a PDFSave the pages you need](https://toolpantry.app/split-pdf) - [Add a signaturePlace an image signature on a page](https://toolpantry.app/sign-pdf) - [Fill PDF fieldsEnter values in supported form fields](https://toolpantry.app/fill-pdf-forms) - [Convert PDF to JPGExport selected pages as images](https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-jpg) - [Compress a PDFCheck the mode and output quality](https://toolpantry.app/compress-pdf) For existing text edits, a scanned document that needs OCR, or certificate-based signing, compare the relevant editor features below. Our signature tool places an image; it does not issue a signing certificate. ## Seven alternatives at a glance | Tool | Useful for | Free access | Where files are processed | |---|---|---|---| | [Tool Pantry](https://toolpantry.app/adobe-acrobat-alternatives#tool-pantry) | Merge, split, image signatures, form filling and page-to-image export | Free, no account; device and tool limits apply | In your browser for the linked file tools | | [Sejda](https://toolpantry.app/adobe-acrobat-alternatives#sejda) | Editing existing PDF text and forms | Limited free use; paid plans | Web: upload. Desktop: local processing | | [Smallpdf](https://toolpantry.app/adobe-acrobat-alternatives#smallpdf) | General online PDF tasks and paid editing features | Limited free downloads; Pro adds features | The web tools use an upload workflow | | [iLovePDF](https://toolpantry.app/adobe-acrobat-alternatives#ilovepdf) | A broad PDF toolkit across web and desktop | Basic is limited; Premium expands access | Web: upload. Desktop offers offline tasks | | [PDF24](https://toolpantry.app/adobe-acrobat-alternatives#pdf24) | Offline PDF work on Windows | Creator is free, including commercial use | Creator: local. Web tools are a separate edition | | [Zamzar](https://toolpantry.app/adobe-acrobat-alternatives#zamzar) | Converting between supported file formats | Free web limit; paid accounts | Hosted conversion with file uploads | | [CloudConvert](https://toolpantry.app/adobe-acrobat-alternatives#cloudconvert) | File conversion and API workflows | Free allowance; paid conversion credits | Hosted processing, including API jobs | ## What each option is suited to ### 1. Tool Pantry: everyday PDF tasks in your browser Use the task links above for a specific file job. We do not require an account or add a watermark to these outputs. Browser memory and individual tool limits still matter. This is not a full editor for rewriting existing PDF text or a certificate-based signing service. ### 2. Sejda: existing text edits and forms The [official PDF editor](https://www.sejda.com/pdf-editor) supports editing existing text. Its listed free web limit is 200 pages or 50 MB and 3 tasks per hour. The web editor uploads files; [Sejda Desktop](https://www.sejda.com/desktop) provides a local route. Check the applicable plan and inspect fonts and layout after editing. ### 3. Smallpdf: an online PDF suite with a limited free tier Smallpdf's [plan comparison](https://smallpdf.com/pricing) distinguishes limited free downloads from Pro features such as text editing and OCR. Its [web merger](https://smallpdf.com/merge-pdf) uses a file upload workflow. Check the tool and plan you need before starting a batch. ### 4. iLovePDF: web tools and an offline desktop option The [Basic plan](https://www.ilovepdf.com/pricing) offers limited processing; Premium adds broader access. Web processing and [iLovePDF Desktop](https://www.ilovepdf.com/desktop) are different choices: the desktop app advertises offline PDF tasks on Windows and Mac. Check availability for the specific feature and edition rather than assuming every task is free or local. ### 5. PDF24 Creator: free offline PDF tools on Windows [PDF24 Creator](https://tools.pdf24.org/en/creator) is a Windows desktop application, free for personal and commercial use. It processes files locally. PDF24's browser tools are a separate product; do not infer their processing path from the desktop app. Creator is the relevant option here when you want installed offline tools. ### 6. Zamzar: file-format conversion [Zamzar's web converter](https://www.zamzar.com/) accepts file uploads and lists a 50 MB free limit, with paid accounts for larger files. It is an option when you need a supported format conversion. Conversion is a different task from editing existing text or managing PDF form fields. ### 7. CloudConvert: hosted conversions and APIs [CloudConvert](https://cloudconvert.com/pricing) uses conversion credits, with a free allowance and paid packages or subscriptions. Its [security documentation](https://cloudconvert.com/security) describes hosted processing and file handling. It fits conversion workflows and integrations; it is not a browser-based editor for rewriting PDF text in place. ## When to keep a full PDF editor If you need existing text edits, OCR, redaction, accessibility remediation or certificate-based signing, verify that exact feature in the chosen product and plan. Adding a text box, covering text or placing an image signature does not establish those capabilities. A format conversion may also change layout or remove interactive features. Free limits and feature bundles can change. Follow the official links above for current terms, and test a copy of your document before replacing the original. ## FAQ **Can I edit PDF text without Adobe?** Sejda documents editing existing PDF text, with limits on its free tier. Adding a new text box or signature is a different task. Tool Pantry handles page operations, supported form fields and image signatures; it does not rewrite existing PDF text. **Do I have to upload my files to use these alternatives?** It depends on the tool and edition. Tool Pantry processes the listed file tasks in your browser. PDF24 Creator works offline on Windows; Sejda Desktop and iLovePDF Desktop also offer local workflows. Their web editions and the hosted converters use different processing paths. Check the edition you choose. **Are these alternatives really free?** Some are free; others have a limited free tier and paid plans. Tool Pantry does not require a subscription or account for the linked tasks, but browser memory and tool-specific limits still apply. PDF24 Creator is free for personal and commercial use. Check each provider’s current limits before a large job. --- # Age Calculator — Years, Months, Days & Next Birthday > Calculate an exact age in years, months, and days, plus total days lived, weekday born, and the next birthday locally. Source: https://toolpantry.app/age-calculator ## About Get an exact calendar age, total days, the weekday you were born, and the next birthday countdown. Choose any “as of” date for planning, forms, or date checks. ## Quick answer How do I calculate my age in years, months, and days? Enter your birth date and an optional "age on" date; the result shows exact years, months, and days, plus total days and your next birthday countdown. ## How to calculate an exact age 1. **Enter the date of birth** — or use today for a fresh example. 2. **Pick the “age on” date** — today, a future birthday, or any deadline. 3. **Read the full breakdown** — exact years, months and days, total days lived, the weekday you were born, and the next-birthday countdown. ## When exact ages matter - Forms and applications that ask for age on a specific date - Eligibility cutoffs — school entry, competitions, visas, senior benefits - Settling the “am I really 43 or 44 months-wise” question for milestone planning ## Good to know This calculator counts complete calendar years, then months, then days — not fixed 30-day months, which is how forms and medical records usually expect it. February 29 birthdays are treated as February 28 in non-leap years. Related: [time duration calculator](https://toolpantry.app/time-duration-calculator.html) and [world clock](https://toolpantry.app/world-clock.html). ## Notes The main result uses calendar years and months, then counts the remaining days. For February 29 birthdays in a non-leap year, the birthday date is treated as February 28 for the countdown. ## FAQ **How is exact age calculated?** The calculator counts complete calendar years from the birth date, then complete calendar months, then the remaining days. This avoids treating every month as a fixed 30-day block. **Can I calculate age on a future date?** Yes. Choose a future “Age on” date to see the age at a birthday, eligibility cutoff, appointment, or other planned event. **Does this send my birth date anywhere?** No. The dates and calculations stay in this browser tab and are not uploaded or sent to a service. --- # AI Agent Readiness Checker — Ready for AI Search? > Free AI agent readiness checker: test any URL for llms.txt, Markdown content negotiation, JSON-LD structured data, sitemap, and AI crawler rules in robots.txt. Source: https://toolpantry.app/agent-ready-checker ## About Paste any URL and check its AI-search readiness: llms.txt, Markdown for agents, structured data, sitemap, and crawler rules — each gap explained with how to fix it. ## Quick answer How do I check if my site is readable by AI agents? Paste your URL below. The checker inspects robots.txt for AI crawler rules, the presence of llms.txt and llms-full.txt, whether the server returns Markdown when asked ( Accept: text/markdown ), JSON-LD structured data, the XML sitemap, and per-page Markdown link relations — then scores your setup out of 9. ## Notes Unlike our other tools, this checker needs a small server-side fetch to inspect the public files of the URL you enter (browsers block cross-site reads for security). We don't store URLs or results. ## FAQ **What does “AI agent readiness” mean?** It is how easily AI assistants and agents (ChatGPT search, Claude, Perplexity, Grok, coding agents) can read, trust, and cite your pages. The basics: allow AI crawlers, describe your site with llms.txt, serve clean Markdown, and expose structured data so machines understand what each page is. **What is Markdown for agents?** AI agents increasingly request pages with Accept: text/markdown so they get clean text instead of full HTML. If your server (or a small Worker) returns Markdown for that request, agents spend fewer tokens and can quote your content more accurately. This site does it — try curl -H "Accept: text/markdown" https://toolpantry.app/ . **Why does this checker need a server while your other tools run locally?** Browsers block one website from reading another site's files (CORS). To inspect robots.txt or llms.txt on your domain, something server-side has to fetch them. We only fetch the public files of the URL you enter, and we don't store the URL or the results. **How do I fix the failed checks?** The open-source kit on GitHub walks through every item: generating Markdown versions of your pages, publishing llms.txt, adding link relations, and wiring content negotiation on a Cloudflare Worker — free-plan friendly. Each check above fails with a specific reason so you know exactly what to add. **Is a perfect score required?** No. Crawler access and a sitemap are table stakes; llms.txt, Markdown versions, and JSON-LD are where AI visibility actually improves. Even 4–6 out of 9 puts you ahead of most sites today. --- # AI Agent Readiness Report 2026 — 184 Tool Sites Tested > We tested 184 popular tool websites for AI agent readiness: llms.txt, Markdown for agents, JSON-LD, sitemaps, and AI crawler rules. Average score: 2.3/9. Source: https://toolpantry.app/ai-agent-readiness-report ## About AI agents are learning to read the web — the web isn't ready. This study measures llms.txt adoption, Markdown negotiation, structured data, and crawler rules across 184 reachable online tool websites (October 2026). ## Quick answer How ready is the web for AI agents? Measured across 184 popular tool websites in October 2026: 31.5% publish an llms.txt, but only 1.6% actually serve Markdown when an agent asks ( Accept: text/markdown ) — and none of the llms.txt adopters do. The average readiness score is 2.3 out of 9 ; the best sites score 6. ## Notes Tool Pantry itself scores 9/9 on this checklist — it is the reference implementation behind the open-source kit described below. Reproduce the study with the scan script in the dataset repository. ## FAQ **What is Markdown content negotiation?** It is HTTP content negotiation (RFC 9110): an AI agent requests a page with Accept: text/markdown and the server replies with a clean Markdown version instead of full HTML. Same URL, two representations. It saves tokens and improves extraction accuracy for AI assistants — currently only 1.6% of the tested tool sites do it. **Why do llms.txt adopters not serve Markdown?** llms.txt (31.5% adoption in this study) tells AI systems where your content is; it doesn't change what the server returns when your pages are fetched. The two work best together — an index pointing at Markdown URLs — but most sites so far stop at the index. **Does being AI-ready help a tool site get cited?** It is necessary but not sufficient: AI answers cite sources that are crawlable, parseable, structured, and mentioned elsewhere on the web. This checklist covers the technical half; backlinks, lists, and reviews cover the other half. **How do I check my own site?** Use the free checker at toolpantry.app/agent-ready-checker — it runs the same seven checks as this study on any URL and explains exactly how to fix each gap. The fix kit is open source (MIT). **Can I reproduce this study?** Yes. The full dataset (CSV) is linked above, and the scan script plus the domain list are published in the companion GitHub repository. Re-run it any time to track adoption changes. --- # AI Image Checker — Was This Image Made by AI? > Check whether an image was made by AI — scan metadata for generator signatures, IPTC labels, and C2PA Content Credentials. Runs locally and honestly. Source: https://toolpantry.app/ai-image-checker ## About Scan the file's metadata for generator signatures, official AI labels, and Content Credentials — locally, in seconds, with honest limits explained. ## Quick answer How can I tell if an image is AI-generated? Check its metadata: AI tools often leave generator signatures, an IPTC "trainedAlgorithmicMedia" label, or Content Credentials (C2PA). This checker reads those signals locally — but stripped metadata proves nothing, so treat a clean result as "no evidence", not "real". ## What we check — and what each signal means | Signal | Strength | What it means | |---|---|---| | IPTC trainedAlgorithmicMedia label | **Strong** | The creating tool explicitly declared the image AI-generated (used by Firefly, DALL·E, Google models) | | Generator name in Software / CreatorTool | **Strong** | Midjourney, Stable Diffusion, ComfyUI, NovelAI, and others often sign their output | | Stable Diffusion "parameters" chunk | **Strong** | Automatic1111 and forks embed the full generation recipe (prompt, sampler, seed) in PNG metadata | | Content Credentials (C2PA) | Verify | A signed provenance manifest — could be AI (most generators add one) or a camera (Leica, Sony). Verify fully at [contentcredentials.org/verify](https://contentcredentials.org/verify) | | Camera EXIF (Make / Model / exposure) | Context | A camera took the file — but AI tools can copy metadata, and editors keep it | | No metadata at all | Nothing | Social platforms strip metadata; screenshots never had it. Absence is not evidence | ## Why metadata is the honest way to check AI-detection startups sell pixel-based "detectors" with error rates nobody publishes. Metadata is different: it's a statement the file carries, written by the tool that made it. When the label is there, you don't need a probability — you have the receipt. When it's absent (most of the time, after any social upload), the honest answer is "can't tell from the file". ## The rules are catching up Under the EU AI Act's transparency rules and similar efforts elsewhere, AI content labeling is becoming expected — that's why official IPTC labels and C2PA credentials are appearing in more tools each year. Checking for them is now a practical habit for editors, teachers, and anyone receiving suspicious images. ## If the image does have AI markers Keep the file as-is if you need the evidence — re-saving or screenshotting destroys it. Need the image smaller or a different format for sharing? Use the [1 MB compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-1mb.html) or [JPG to WebP](https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-webp.html) — but note both strip metadata, which is exactly what you may not want here. To share the evidence itself, keep the original alongside. ## Notes We scan metadata, not pixels. Pixel-based AI detection needs large models with false positives of their own — we don't guess. Need the full metadata picture (GPS, camera, dates)? Open the [EXIF viewer](https://toolpantry.app/exif-viewer.html). ## FAQ **Can this tool tell if an image is AI-generated?** It detects AI markers written into the file: generator software names, IPTC digital-source labels, and Content Credentials (C2PA). Those are strong evidence when present — but most social platforms strip metadata, so a clean result is not proof the image is real. **What does the IPTC trainedAlgorithmicMedia label mean?** It's the official IPTC digital source type for AI-generated content (trainedAlgorithmicMedia). Tools like Adobe Firefly, DALL·E, and Google's image models can embed it in XMP metadata — when it's there, it's a direct statement from the creating tool. **Why does my AI image show no markers?** Many generators don't write AI labels, and social platforms (Instagram, WhatsApp, X) strip metadata on upload. Screenshots of AI images also have no metadata at all. Absence of markers means nothing either way. **Is my image uploaded to check it?** No. The file is parsed entirely in your browser tab — nothing is sent anywhere. --- # AI Image Detector — Check C2PA & Metadata Locally > Check if an image was made with AI — read C2PA Content Credentials, EXIF, and PNG metadata locally in your browser. No upload, honest verdicts. Source: https://toolpantry.app/ai-image-detector ## About Read C2PA Content Credentials, EXIF camera data, and the hidden fields AI tools leave in PNGs — with honest verdicts about what the evidence proves and what it does not. ## Quick answer How do I check if an image is AI-generated? Choose the image and the tool reads its metadata: AI tool names, diffusion parameters, and C2PA manifests are strong signals. No metadata is not proof of authenticity — platforms strip it on upload. Everything is checked locally. ## How to check an image for AI markers 1. **Choose the original file** — not a screenshot or a version downloaded from social media (both lose metadata). 2. **Read the verdict** — strong signs (AI tool markers), signed provenance, camera data, or none. 3. **Inspect the evidence** — every field found is listed with its source; the raw dump shows everything. ## What the evidence means - **Diffusion parameters** ("Steps: 30, Sampler: Euler, CFG scale: 7…") — written by Stable Diffusion WebUI and similar tools. Decisive. - **Tool names** — "Midjourney", "DALL·E", "Firefly" in Software, CreatorTool, or XMP fields. Decisive. - **C2PA Content Credentials** — a signed manifest. The strings show whether a camera or an AI service signed it. - **Camera EXIF** — maker and model. A hint of capture, but metadata survives AI edits sometimes. ## Good to know Provenance checking is becoming part of everyday media literacy: check before you trust, before you repost, and before you pay for a "photo". For your own images, consider adding Content Credentials from a supporting tool before publishing. Related: [EXIF viewer](https://toolpantry.app/exif-viewer.html) for full photo metadata and [metadata remover](https://toolpantry.app/pdf-metadata-remover.html) when you want to strip yours before sharing. ## Notes This tool reads metadata — it does not analyze pixels, so it cannot detect AI images whose metadata was stripped (most social platforms strip it). Treat "no markers found" as "unknown", not "authentic". For the opposite direction, the evidence is usually decisive: diffusion parameter blocks, tool names, and signed C2PA manifests are hard to fake accidentally. ## FAQ **Can this tool prove an image is AI-generated?** It proves the opposite direction only: when AI markers are found (tool names, diffusion parameters, C2PA manifests from AI services), the evidence is strong. When no markers are found, that is NOT proof the image is real — platforms strip metadata on upload and many AI tools write no signatures at all. **What are C2PA Content Credentials?** An open standard (also called Content Credentials) that embeds cryptographically signed provenance data into an image: who made it, with what tool, and what edits happened. Cameras from Leica, Sony, and Nikon sign captures; Adobe Firefly, DALL·E, and other AI tools can sign generations. This tool detects the manifest and extracts readable strings from it. **Why does a real photo show "no metadata"?** Most social platforms and messaging apps strip metadata during upload. A screenshot also has none. The absence of metadata says nothing about how the image was made — use the visual check and provenance claims as well. --- # Check API — AI Agent Readiness API (Free, No Key) > Free API to check any URL for AI-agent readiness: llms.txt, Markdown negotiation, JSON-LD, sitemap, and crawler rules. GET one URL; POST up to 6. Source: https://toolpantry.app/api-docs ## About A free, keyless JSON API that scores any public URL for AI-agent readiness — the same checks as the web checker, scriptable. ## Quick answer How do I use the AI agent readiness API? GET /api/check?url=https://example.com for a single URL, or POST /api/check with {"urls": [...]} (up to 6) for bulk. No key required; rate limited to 30 requests per minute per IP. Each result scores 0–9 with per-check details. ## Notes Bulk requests run URLs sequentially to respect Cloudflare subrequest limits — allow a few seconds for 6 URLs. Only public http(s) URLs are accepted; private addresses and non-web schemes are rejected. Fixing the gaps is documented in the open-source kit. ## FAQ **Is the API free?** Yes — no key, no signup. It is rate limited to 30 requests per minute per IP to keep it polite. **What are the limits?** Single checks via GET, bulk via POST with up to 6 URLs per request (Cloudflare subrequest limits). Loop over batches for more. **Can I use it commercially?** The data describes public files of public websites. Use it freely; attribution to toolpantry.app is appreciated. **Where is the source code?** The checker logic, worker, and skills are open source at github.com/wu736139669/markdown-for-agents-worker (MIT). --- # Aspect Ratio Calculator — Find & Resize Image Dimensions > Calculate and simplify image aspect ratios, read dimensions from an image, and resize to a target ratio locally in your browser. Source: https://toolpantry.app/aspect-ratio-calculator ## About Calculate a simplified aspect ratio, read an image's real dimensions, and work out the missing side for a new canvas. Everything runs locally. ## Quick answer How do I find an image's aspect ratio? Enter the width and height to get the simplified ratio like 16:9, or fill three of four fields to calculate the missing dimension. ## How to calculate a missing dimension 1. **Enter the known side and the ratio** — or pick a preset like 16:9 or 4:5. 2. **Read the missing dimension** — with a live frame preview to sanity-check it. 3. **Apply it everywhere** — cropping, CSS, or a request to a designer. ## Why ratios save you from distortion - Making a banner without stretching faces - Instagram 4:5 and Stories 9:16 without trial and error - Video thumbnails at 16:9 while the source image is 4:3 ## Good to know Scaling both sides by the same factor is what locks a ratio — one wrong side and faces stretch. When CSS is the destination, remember the modern aspect-ratio property exists: you often do not need a padding-top hack anymore. Related: [social media size guide](https://toolpantry.app/social-media-size-guide.html) and [image splitter](https://toolpantry.app/image-splitter.html). Know the ratio you need? [Crop image](https://toolpantry.app/crop-image.html) can lock to 1:1, 4:3, or 16:9 and cut the photo for you. ## Notes Aspect ratio is width ÷ height. The calculator rounds a missing pixel dimension to the nearest whole pixel; it does not crop or resize the source image. ## FAQ **What does 16:9 mean?** For every 16 units of width, the frame has 9 units of height. A 1,920 × 1,080 image and a 1,280 × 720 image both use 16:9. **Can this crop my image?** No. This page calculates dimensions only. Use the main image tool's crop mode when you need to fill a fixed frame and remove the excess edges. **Is my image uploaded?** No. The optional image picker uses the browser's local image decoder to read natural width and height. The file is not sent to a server. --- # Audio Converter — M4A, WAV, OGG to MP3, Free > Convert M4A, WAV, OGG, or FLAC to MP3 — or anything to WAV — locally in your browser. No upload, no account, no size limit. Source: https://toolpantry.app/audio-converter ## About Convert M4A, WAV, OGG, or FLAC to MP3 — or anything to lossless WAV — entirely in your browser. No upload, no account, no size limit. ## Quick answer How do I convert M4A to MP3 for free? Load the file, choose MP3 (192 kbps) or WAV, and press Convert. The audio is decoded and re-encoded on your device — a typical song takes a few seconds, and nothing is uploaded. ## What happens when you convert audio The tool decodes your file back to raw audio samples using your browser's audio engine, then re-encodes them in the format you chose — all on your device. That's why mixed inputs work: an M4A from a voice memo and a WAV from a recorder become the same thing (samples) before the output is written. The whole conversion is deterministic and local: no server ever sees the file. ## Which output should you pick? - **MP3 (192 kbps)** — the universal choice: plays everywhere, small files, transparent quality for speech and everyday music. The standard pick when a platform or device demands MP3. - **WAV (lossless)** — an exact copy of the decoded audio. Choose it for editing, archiving, or feeding another tool; expect files roughly 10× the size of MP3. - **The honest caveat** — converting *from* a lossy format can't recover what it lost; M4A → MP3 re-encodes an already-compressed source. It's fine for compatibility, but if you have the original recording, convert from that. ## Common reasons people convert audio An M4A voice memo that an older device won't play. A FLAC album for a player that only takes MP3. A WAV export for a video editor. A batch of interview recordings that need one consistent format. And privacy-sensitive audio — legal calls, medical notes, family recordings — where uploading to a converter site is simply not an option. Related tools: [merge audio files](https://toolpantry.app/merge-audio.html), [trim and make ringtones](https://toolpantry.app/audio-trimmer.html), or extract sound from a video with [video to MP3](https://toolpantry.app/video-to-mp3.html). ## Notes Play the preview to check the file first. MP3 output is 192 kbps — transparent for everyday listening; choose WAV when you need a lossless copy of the decoded audio. ## FAQ **How do I convert M4A to MP3 for free?** Load the M4A file, pick MP3 as the output, and press Convert. The file is decoded and re-encoded on your device at 192 kbps — nothing is uploaded and there is no file-size limit. **Which formats can I convert from and to?** Input: anything your browser can decode — MP3, M4A/AAC, WAV, OGG, FLAC, and WebM audio. Output: MP3 at 192 kbps (small and universally compatible) or WAV (lossless 16-bit PCM). **Will converting lose quality?** Converting to WAV is lossless — it is an exact copy of the decoded audio. Converting to MP3 re-encodes at 192 kbps, which is transparent for speech and music playback; converting between two lossy formats (like M4A to MP3) always costs a small generation of quality. **Is there a file size or length limit?** No fixed limit — the conversion runs on your device, so the practical limit is your computer's memory. A typical song converts in a few seconds; long recordings take longer since encoding is linear in length. **Why convert in the browser instead of an online converter?** Upload-based converters send your audio to a server, where it may be stored or logged. This tool never uploads anything — the decode and encode happen in your browser tab, which you can verify in the network panel or by working offline. --- # Audio Trimmer & Ringtone Maker — Cut MP3, Make iPhone .m4r > Cut MP3s, trim audio, and make iPhone ringtones (.m4r) right in your browser — drag on the waveform, add fades, export MP3/WAV/M4R. Nothing is uploaded. Source: https://toolpantry.app/audio-trimmer ## About Drag across the waveform to trim any MP3, WAV, or audio-from-video — preview it, fade it, and export as MP3, WAV, or an iPhone ringtone (.m4r). All local. ## Quick answer How do I cut an MP3 or make a ringtone? Add the file (audio or video), drag on the waveform to select the part you want, preview, and export — MP3 for Android and sharing, or M4R for iPhone ringtones (up to 40 seconds). Nothing is uploaded. ## How to trim audio and make ringtones 1. **Add the file** — an MP3, WAV, M4A, or even an MP4/MOV (the audio track is decoded automatically). 2. **Select the good part** — drag on the waveform, press **Play selection** to check it, and nudge the edges. 3. **Export** — MP3 for Android, sharing, and podcasts; **M4R** for an iPhone ringtone (iPhone caps ringtones at 40 seconds — the tool tells you if your selection is longer). ## Making an iPhone ringtone, honestly The "30 s ringtone preset" selects the first 30 seconds and turns on the fade-out — a sensible starting point. To install the .m4r on an iPhone: connect it to a Mac (Finder) or PC (iTunes) and drag the file into the **Tones** section, then pick it in Settings → Sounds. Android is simpler: download the MP3 and set it from any ringtone picker. This is the standard route every ringtone tool uses — no app required, no account, and your song never leaves your device. ## What this is good for - **Ringtones and alarms** — grab the chorus, fade it out, done - **Podcast and video clips** — cut a quote or a segment without a DAW - **Voice notes** — trim the dead air before the meeting started - **Sound from video** — pull the audio out of a clip and keep only the part you need (or use [Video to MP3](https://toolpantry.app/video-to-mp3.html) for the full track) ## Good to know MP3 export re-encodes once (like every audio editor) — at 192 kbps that's transparent for most listeners. WAV keeps full quality at a bigger size. And since this is a WebAudio-based tool: if a file won't load, it's a codec your browser can't decode — converting it first with [Video to MP3](https://toolpantry.app/video-to-mp3.html) usually fixes that. Cutting a video instead? The [video trimmer](https://toolpantry.app/video-trimmer.html) handles the picture without re-encoding. ## Notes Drag across the waveform to select; drag the edges to fine-tune; drag inside to move the whole selection. Fades are applied on export (and in the preview you'll hear them too). Long files decode fully into memory — under an hour of audio works well on a laptop or phone. ## FAQ **How do I cut an MP3 online?** Add the file, drag across the waveform to select the part you want, preview it, then export. The trim runs in your browser — the file is never uploaded, and there is no length or count limit. **Can I make an iPhone ringtone with this?** Yes — select up to 40 seconds (iPhone's ringtone limit) and export as M4R, the format iPhones use. Transfer it to the phone with Finder (macOS) or iTunes (Windows) under Tones. Android just takes the MP3. **Can I cut audio out of a video?** Yes — drop an MP4 or MOV in, and the tool decodes its audio track just like an audio file. Trim and export as MP3; no separate extraction step needed. **Is my file uploaded?** No. Decoding, trimming, and encoding all happen in your browser tab. You can verify in the Network panel. --- # AVIF to JPG Converter — Convert AVIF Images Locally > Convert AVIF images to JPG locally in your browser. Choose JPEG quality and a background color without uploading the image. Source: https://toolpantry.app/avif-to-jpg ## About Convert an AVIF image into a universally accepted JPG with a quality slider and background color. The image stays in your browser. ## Quick answer How do I convert AVIF to JPG? Add your AVIF file, adjust the JPG quality if needed, and download. Conversion happens locally in your browser — the file is never uploaded. ## How to convert AVIF to JPG 1. **Add your AVIF file** — most images downloaded from modern websites arrive in AVIF these days. 2. **Set quality and background** — JPG has no transparency, so transparent areas get the chosen color. 3. **Download the JPG** — a compatibility copy that opens everywhere. ## Why convert AVIF to JPG - Apps, editors, and CMS versions that still reject AVIF - Marketplaces and print workflows that only accept JPG/PNG - Sharing with devices and software older than 2023 ## Good to know AVIF compresses better than both WebP and JPG, so converting to JPG usually *increases* the file size — expected, and worth it for compatibility. Your browser decodes AVIF natively (Chrome 85+, Safari 16+, Firefox 93+); on an ancient browser this tool reports the decode failure instead of guessing. Related: [AVIF to PNG](https://toolpantry.app/avif-to-png.html) and [WebP to JPG](https://toolpantry.app/webp-to-jpg.html). ## Notes JPG does not support transparency, so transparent pixels are filled with the chosen color. Lower quality can make photos smaller, but inspect text and edges before sharing. ## FAQ **Why convert AVIF to JPG?** JPG still opens in every editor, form, and marketplace. AVIF is smaller, but JPG is the universal compatibility copy. **Is the image uploaded?** No. Decoding and JPEG export happen entirely inside your browser. --- # AVIF to PNG Converter — Convert AVIF Images Locally > Convert AVIF images to PNG locally in your browser. Lossless output with transparency preserved, without uploading the image. Source: https://toolpantry.app/avif-to-png ## About Turn an AVIF image into a lossless PNG with transparency preserved — decoded and encoded entirely in your browser. ## Quick answer How do I convert AVIF to PNG? Add your AVIF file and download the PNG. The conversion is lossless, transparency is preserved, and nothing is uploaded — everything runs in your browser. ## How to convert AVIF to PNG 1. **Add your AVIF file** — screenshots and web downloads are the common sources. 2. **Convert** — pixels are copied exactly; PNG keeps any transparency. 3. **Download the PNG** — ready for editors and tools that expect PNG. ## When PNG is the target format - Editing workflows that need a lossless starting point - Tools and pipelines that reject AVIF - Keeping transparency after the format switch ## Good to know Expect the PNG to be several times larger than the AVIF — lossless storage costs space. Also remember that converting a lossy AVIF to PNG does not recover detail the AVIF already discarded; PNG just stops the losses from growing further. For JPG output instead, see [AVIF to JPG](https://toolpantry.app/avif-to-jpg.html). ## Notes PNG is lossless, so the output is typically larger than the AVIF. Transparency is preserved. ## FAQ **Does PNG keep AVIF transparency?** Yes. AVIF supports alpha, and PNG carries it through losslessly. **Why is the PNG so much larger?** PNG is lossless and uncompressed-by-design for compatibility; AVIF is heavily compressed. Larger files are expected. --- # Background Remover — AI Cutouts, Free & Private > Remove image backgrounds automatically with an AI model that runs in your browser — transparent PNG or any background color. No upload, no account, no watermark. Source: https://toolpantry.app/background-remover ## About An AI model that runs on your own device cuts out people, products, and objects — download a transparent PNG or drop in any background color. Your photos never get uploaded. ## Quick answer How do I remove a background? Choose a photo, press Remove background, and wait a few seconds (the first run downloads the ~15 MB model once). Then download a transparent PNG or a JPG with the background color of your choice. ## How to remove a background from a photo 1. **Choose the photo** — a clear subject against a distinct background works best. 2. **Press Remove background** — the model segments the main subject and erases everything else (a few seconds; first run downloads the model). 3. **Download your cutout** — transparent PNG for design work, or pick a color and download a JPG for forms, marketplaces, and profiles. ## What people use it for - **Profile pictures** — clean cutouts on any color. - **Marketplace listings** — product shots on white, the way platforms prefer them. - **Presentations and thumbnails** — subjects that pop off the slide. - **Personal photos** — unlike cloud services, nothing is uploaded, so private pictures stay private. ## Good to know The checkerboard behind the preview shows transparency. If an edge keeps a halo of the old background, the background was close in color to the subject — try the transparent PNG in a design tool and erase the halo by hand. For photos where the subject is tiny in frame, crop closer first with the [image cropper](https://toolpantry.app/crop-image.html). Related: [upscale the cutout](https://toolpantry.app/image-upscaler.html) and [compress it for uploads](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb.html). ## Notes Powered by U²-Net, a compact open-source segmentation model (about 15 MB, downloaded once and cached — the tool then works offline). Great for portraits, product shots, pets, and objects; fine hair, fur, and glass edges are approximate. Everything runs on your device — no upload, no account, no watermark. ## FAQ **How good is the cutout quality?** For people, products, pets, and objects on a reasonably distinct background, the result is clean and immediately usable. Very fine edges — flyaway hair, fur, transparent glass, motion blur — are approximate rather than perfect. The model is a compact one that runs on your device; desktop-quality AI services with big server models still win on the hardest edges. **Is my photo uploaded?** No. The AI model (about 15 MB) is downloaded to your browser once and runs entirely on your device. Your photos never leave your computer or phone — which is why this works even for private pictures. **Why does the first run take longer?** The first use downloads the AI runtime and model (~15 MB total, cached afterward), then processes the image. Later runs start immediately, and the whole tool keeps working offline once loaded. --- # Barcode Generator — Code 128, EAN-13 & UPC, Free > Generate Code 128, Code 39, EAN-13, and UPC barcodes in your browser. Download a PNG without signup or upload. Source: https://toolpantry.app/barcode-generator ## About Generate common retail and inventory barcodes locally. Choose a format, enter a value, and download a crisp PNG. ## Quick answer How do I generate a barcode? Enter the value, pick a symbology (Code 128, Code 39, EAN-13, or UPC), and download a PNG. Barcodes are rendered locally — no number is stored or sent anywhere. ## How to generate a barcode 1. **Enter the value** — the numbers or text the barcode should encode. 2. **Choose a symbology** — Code 128 and Code 39 for internal use; EAN-13 and UPC for retail-style codes. 3. **Download the PNG** — rendered locally at print-friendly resolution. ## Which symbology to pick - **Code 128** — compact and flexible; the workhorse for inventory, shipping, and asset labels - **Code 39** — simple and widely readable; older scanners and industry standards - **EAN-13 / UPC** — the retail formats you see on products ## Good to know For real retail products, EAN/UPC numbers must come from GS1 (membership required) — you cannot invent one and sell it in stores. For internal labels there is no such restriction; Code 128 is the usual choice. Print barcodes at least 2.5 cm wide with a clear quiet zone, and test-scan before a full print run. QR codes instead? Use the [QR code generator](https://toolpantry.app/qr-code-generator.html). ## Notes EAN-13 and UPC values must contain the correct number of digits. Code 128 is the most flexible choice for internal labels. ## FAQ **Which barcode format should I choose?** Use Code 128 for general inventory or internal labels. Use EAN-13 or UPC-A when a retailer or scanner specifically requires that standard. **Are these official retail barcodes?** The generator draws the barcode pattern. Product identifiers still need to come from the relevant standards body or your inventory system. --- # Guides & Briefs — Tool Pantry > Tested walkthroughs for everyday files, plus source-checked technology, science and culture explainers from Tool Pantry. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog ## Articles - [MOSS-Image layout JSON, box by box](https://toolpantry.app/blog/moss-image-layout-json-poster) - [Merge videos without a watermark](https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-merge-videos) - [Rotate video, lose nothing](https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-rotate-a-video) - [Blur faces in a video](https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-blur-faces-in-a-video) - [Make a signature for PDFs](https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-make-a-signature) - [Make a ringtone](https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-make-a-ringtone) - [Trim video without re-encoding](https://toolpantry.app/blog/trim-video-without-re-encoding) - [HEIC to JPG on Mac](https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-convert-heic-to-jpg-on-mac) - [Photos into one PDF](https://toolpantry.app/blog/combine-photos-into-one-pdf) - [Scan & email a document](https://toolpantry.app/blog/scan-and-email-a-document) - [HEIC on Android](https://toolpantry.app/blog/heic-files-on-android) - [WhatsApp won't ruin your video](https://toolpantry.app/blog/send-video-on-whatsapp-hd) - [Gmail attachment limits: what 25 MB means](https://toolpantry.app/blog/gmail-attachment-limit-25mb) - [Content Credentials, explained](https://toolpantry.app/blog/content-credentials-c2pa-explained) - [SSC & UPSC photo & signature sizes](https://toolpantry.app/blog/ssc-upsc-photo-signature-size-2026) - [Compress a video for WhatsApp](https://toolpantry.app/blog/compress-video-for-whatsapp) - [Video too large to send?](https://toolpantry.app/blog/video-too-large-to-send) - [What your files reveal](https://toolpantry.app/blog/remove-metadata-before-sharing) - [Is this image AI?](https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-tell-if-an-image-is-ai-generated) - [Why AI images are big](https://toolpantry.app/blog/why-ai-images-are-big) - [Compress a PDF on iPhone](https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-compress-a-pdf-on-iphone) - [Sign a PDF on iPhone](https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-sign-a-pdf-on-iphone) - [HEIC to JPG on Windows](https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-convert-heic-to-jpg-on-windows) - [Why iPhone photos are HEIC](https://toolpantry.app/blog/why-are-my-iphone-photos-heic) - ["File too large" upload errors](https://toolpantry.app/blog/pdf-too-large-to-upload) - [Image sizes for email, Discord, and portals](https://toolpantry.app/blog/reduce-image-size-for-email-discord-passport) - [Render Mermaid diagrams with Pele](https://toolpantry.app/blog/pele-mermaid-svg-guide) - [DeepSeek Search: choose which pages to read](https://toolpantry.app/blog/deepseek-search-fetch-api-python) - [Handwired: inspect one JavaScript branch](https://toolpantry.app/blog/handwired-javascript-integer-branch) - [ColorOS 17 AI: check the regional limits](https://toolpantry.app/blog/coloros-17-ai-features-by-region) - [Streamer Awards: voting dates and US show times](https://toolpantry.app/blog/streamer-awards-2026-voting-date-time) - [MW4: three dates, three different milestones](https://toolpantry.app/blog/modern-warfare-4-release-date-early-access) - [When the clocks go back in 2026](https://toolpantry.app/blog/daylight-saving-time-ends-2026) - [Tracker Season 4: live or next-day?](https://toolpantry.app/blog/where-to-watch-tracker-season-4) - [Tesla flying car: what the evidence says](https://toolpantry.app/blog/tesla-flying-car-roadster-facts) - [The Diplomat Season 4: scores in context](https://toolpantry.app/blog/the-diplomat-season-4-rotten-tomatoes-score) - [iPhone Duo: dates and confirmed details](https://toolpantry.app/blog/iphone-duo-release-date-preorders) - [What the green-star discovery means](https://toolpantry.app/blog/green-star-discovery-explained) ## Content Practical file guides and source-checked notes. Find the explanation, then get back to the task. Why photos arrive as HEIC, when you can keep them that way, and when making a JPG copy makes life easier. A 768 × 1024 poster layout we edited, exported, and reopened — with downloadable files. Join clips locally — no app, no account, no upload wait. The metadata trick that beats every editor — instant and pixel-identical. Box the face, export a blurred MP4 — free, no app, nothing uploaded. Draw it or clean up a photo — transparent PNG, no printing. Song or video → iPhone .m4r or Android MP3. 182 KB, tested. Stream copy explained — instant, pixel-identical, keyframe honest. Finder steps, Preview batch export, and downloadable files with checked sizes. Applications, receipts, portfolios — tested: two photos → 2-page PDF. Phone camera → clean PDF → inbox. 793 KB → 122 KB tested. Find the saved file, check app support, then make a local JPG copy. Pre-compress to its profile: 17.7 MB → 7.90 MB (720p) or 1.78 MB (480p), measured. The official allowance, Drive links, and when local compression helps. The signed receipt inside images that says who made them — and how to check. 2026 specs by exam — and the local workflow that hits them exactly. Choose the 64 MB or 100 MB target that matches your connection. Our measured fix: 17.7 MB → 8.39 MB in ~2 seconds, locally. GPS to the block, author names, scanner apps — and how to strip them. --- # BMI Calculator — Metric & Imperial Adult BMI > Calculate adult BMI in metric or imperial units, see the CDC category and healthy weight range locally in your browser. Source: https://toolpantry.app/bmi-calculator ## About Calculate adult BMI from height and weight in metric or imperial units, then see the standard category and healthy-weight range used for adults 20 and older. ## Quick answer How do I calculate my BMI? Enter height and weight in metric or imperial units; the tool returns your BMI, the standard adult category, and the healthy weight range for your height. ## How to calculate BMI 1. **Enter height and weight** — metric or imperial, whichever you have. 2. **Read your BMI and category** — the result shows the standard category ranges and your healthy weight range. 3. **Use it as a starting point** — for a conversation with a professional, not as the final word. ## When BMI is useful - A quick screening number between checkups - Understanding where the standard category boundaries actually sit - Tracking direction over months rather than judging a single day ## Good to know BMI is a screening tool, not a diagnosis. It does not distinguish muscle from fat, so athletes often read as “overweight,” and it says nothing about where weight sits, which matters for health. For children, pregnant people, and clinical decisions, different standards apply — confirm with a professional. Related: [unit converter](https://toolpantry.app/unit-converter.html) for height and weight conversions. ## Notes BMI is a screening measure, not a diagnosis. It does not account for muscle mass, pregnancy, age, sex, or where fat is distributed. For children and teens, use an age-and-sex percentile tool and discuss health questions with a qualified clinician. ## FAQ **Who is this BMI calculator for?** This page follows the adult BMI categories for people 20 and older. BMI for children and teens uses age-and-sex percentiles instead, so this page does not classify them. **How is BMI calculated?** BMI is weight in kilograms divided by height in metres squared. Imperial pounds and feet/inches are converted before applying the same formula. **Does a BMI category diagnose health?** No. CDC and NHLBI describe BMI as a screening measure that should be considered with other information such as medical history, physical examination, and laboratory findings. --- # Bulk Image Resizer — Resize & Compress Many Photos at Once > Resize and compress a whole batch of photos at once — max long edge or percentage, JPG/WebP output, download as one ZIP. Runs locally, no upload, no limits. Source: https://toolpantry.app/bulk-image-resizer ## About Resize and compress dozens of photos at once — cap the long edge or scale by percentage — then grab everything as a single ZIP. All local, no batch limits. ## Quick answer How do I resize many photos at once? Select the batch, pick "max long edge" (1600 px is the web-friendly default) or a percentage, choose JPG/WebP, and process. Download the results as one ZIP — everything runs in your browser, nothing is uploaded. ## How to bulk resize photos 1. **Select the batch** — a folder of phone shots, product photos, or event pictures. 2. **Pick the rule** — "max long edge 1600 px" is the web/email sweet spot; 50% halves everything; 2048 px suits large screens. 3. **Resize all, then grab the ZIP** — each file shows its before → after size; download individually or all at once. ## What "max long edge" actually does Every image keeps its aspect ratio; only the longest side is capped. A 4032×3024 iPhone photo at 1600 becomes 1600×1200 — under a megabyte, still crisp on any screen. Portrait and landscape mixes in one batch work fine because the rule applies per image, not per batch. And images already below the target pass through untouched — this tool never upscales (that's [Image Upscaler](https://toolpantry.app/image-upscaler.html)'s honest job). ## Good to know WebP typically lands 25–35% smaller than JPG at the same look — if the destination is a modern website, it's the better default. The ZIP is built in your browser with the same engine used by the [ZIP tool](https://toolpantry.app/zip-tool.html), and a batch of thirty photos finishes in seconds because nothing uploads. Photos with GPS or camera metadata? Resizing through the canvas strips it along the way — for full control of that, the [EXIF viewer](https://toolpantry.app/exif-viewer.html) shows what's inside and cleans a copy. ## Notes Images already smaller than the target are left at their original size (no upscaling). Transparency is flattened onto white for JPG output; keep PNG or WebP to preserve it. Single files? The [target-size compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-1mb.html) hits exact KB limits. ## FAQ **How do I resize many photos at once?** Select the whole batch, pick a rule (max long edge or a percentage), choose the output format, and process. Every photo is resized locally in your browser, and you download the results as a single ZIP. **Is there a file count or size limit?** No server limits — the work happens on your device, so the practical ceiling is your browser's memory. Batches of dozens of phone photos work comfortably on a laptop. **What does 'max long edge' mean?** The longest side of each image is capped at your number, keeping the aspect ratio. A 4032×3024 phone photo at 1600 becomes 1600×1200 — perfect for web or email, still sharp on any screen. **Are my photos uploaded?** No. Everything — resizing, compression, and the ZIP — is built in your browser tab. Batch jobs with private photos are exactly what this is for. --- # CBM Calculator — Carton Volume and Cubic Metres > Calculate carton volume, total CBM, cubic feet, and CBM per unit for an ecommerce shipment. Source: https://toolpantry.app/cbm-volume-calculator ## About Calculate carton volume, total cubic metres, cubic feet, and volume per unit for freight planning and warehouse quotes. ## Quick answer How do I calculate CBM for shipping? Enter carton length, width, height, and quantity in cm or inches; the tool totals the cubic meters for your shipment. ## How to calculate CBM (cubic metres) 1. **Enter carton dimensions and count** — metric or imperial. 2. **Read total volume** — total CBM, cubic feet, and per-unit volume. 3. **Use it for freight quotes** — sea and air freight price by volume and weight. ## Where CBM decisions get made - Getting a credible sea-freight quote before the forwarder gives one - Deciding how much fits in a 20ft (~28–33 CBM usable) or 40ft (~58–67 CBM) container - Comparing packaging options by volume cost ## Good to know Always measure the *outside* carton dimensions and add a few percent for bulging. Freight bills by the greater of volume (CBM) or weight (often 1 CBM ≈ 1,000 kg volumetric for LCL), so dense goods and bulky goods get charged differently. Related: [dimensional weight](https://toolpantry.app/dimensional-weight-calculator.html) and [packaging fit](https://toolpantry.app/packaging-fit-calculator.html). ## Notes Use the outside carton dimensions when planning freight space. For carrier billing, use the carrier’s own dimensional-weight rules. ## FAQ **What does CBM mean?** CBM means cubic metre. It describes the three-dimensional space occupied by a shipment. **Can I calculate cubic feet?** Yes. The result includes cubic feet even when you enter metric dimensions. --- # Client Intake Form Builder — Freelance Discovery Questions > Create a client intake questionnaire for goals, audience, requirements, assets, deadlines, and project context. Source: https://toolpantry.app/client-intake-form ## About Prepare discovery questions before kickoff and copy them into your preferred project workspace. ## Quick answer How do I create a client intake form? Fill in your business details and required fields; the page renders a printable form you can save as PDF. ## How to build a client intake form 1. **Pick the questions that matter** — goals, constraints, budget range, decision process. 2. **Customize wording for your niche** — a web form reads differently from a landscaping one. 3. **Export as Markdown** — send it in an email or paste into a form builder. ## What intake catches early - Budget mismatches — before you invest hours in a proposal - Hidden stakeholders and approval chains that will slow everything down - Hard constraints (deadlines, platforms, regulations) that shape the whole job ## Good to know Ask about budget in the form, not on the call — people answer more honestly in writing, and you get to frame it as a planning range. Keep the exercise short (8–12 questions); every extra question lowers completion. Related: [onboarding checklist](https://toolpantry.app/client-onboarding-checklist.html) for what happens after they say yes. ## Notes This is a planning template, not legal, tax, or contract advice. Review the final document before sending it. ## FAQ **Does this send anything to a client?** No. It only prepares text locally for you to review, copy, or download. **Can I customize the output?** Yes. Edit the fields, then copy the Markdown into your document, project workspace, or email. --- # Client Onboarding Checklist Builder — Freelance Template > Create a reusable client onboarding checklist for freelance projects. Customize the client and project, then copy or download Markdown. Source: https://toolpantry.app/client-onboarding-checklist ## About Create a practical client onboarding checklist for discovery, access, kickoff, delivery, and handoff. Copy it into your workspace or download Markdown. ## Quick answer How do I make a client onboarding checklist? Start from the template, edit the steps for your workflow, and export the checklist as Markdown. ## How to build a client onboarding checklist 1. **Start from the template** — contract, deposit, kickoff, channels, assets, access. 2. **Customize per service type** — add niche-specific items like brand assets or server access. 3. **Export as Markdown** — keep it in your notes app or project tool and tick as you go. ## Why the first 48 hours matter - Clients judge your whole process by the first week - Every forgotten access request or signed page costs you a day later - A checklist makes solo work look as organized as a team’s ## Good to know Keep the checklist public during onboarding — sharing it signals professionalism and lets the client help unblock items (while quietly holding both sides accountable). Anything you do for every client belongs on the list. Related: [intake form](https://toolpantry.app/client-intake-form.html) and [payment schedule](https://toolpantry.app/payment-schedule-calculator.html). ## Notes This template is a starting point. Adapt the tasks, responsibilities, and approvals to your service and agreement. ## FAQ **What belongs in client onboarding?** Confirm scope, decision makers, access, assets, communication channels, milestones, approvals, and the first payment or deposit. **Is this a contract?** No. It is an operational checklist. Your proposal or agreement should define scope, payment, ownership, revisions, and cancellation terms. --- # 7 Best CloudConvert Alternatives in 2026 (Free) > Seven honest CloudConvert alternatives for 2026 — free converters, API options, and local tools that never upload your files. Limits and formats compared. Source: https://toolpantry.app/cloudconvert-alternatives ## About CloudConvert is the developer's converter: 200+ formats, a clean API, and reliable batch processing. The free tier, though, is a handful of conversions per day — which is why casual users look elsewhere. Here are seven alternatives, from other API-first services to tools that convert files right in your browser. ## Quick answer Short answer: for occasional everyday conversions, Tool Pantry is free with no limits and no uploads. If you need an API or exotic formats, CloudConvert itself (or Zamzar for breadth) remains the right paid choice. ## FAQ **Is there a free CloudConvert alternative with an API?** For small volumes, CloudConvert's free tier is the practical API option. If you just need occasional file conversions without code, Tool Pantry is free and unlimited because it runs locally — no API, no upload, no counter. **Do I have to upload my files to use these alternatives?** No — and that is the main difference in this list. Tool Pantry processes everything locally in your browser: files never leave your device. The other services in these lists are server-based, so their files are uploaded. For sensitive documents, prefer a local tool. **Are these alternatives really free?** Mixed. Tool Pantry is fully free with no limits. Most others are freemium: a free tier with caps (documents per day, file size, tasks per hour) plus a paid plan. The lists above state the realistic free limits for each. --- # Color Blindness Simulator — Preview Image Colors > Preview how an image may look with common color vision deficiency simulations. Upload and process locally, adjust intensity, and download a PNG. Source: https://toolpantry.app/color-blindness-simulator ## About Preview an image with common color vision deficiency simulations. Everything runs locally, with an intensity control and a downloadable PNG. ## Quick answer How do I see how colors look to color-blind users? Pick a color or paste a palette; the tool simulates deuteranopia, protanopia, and tritanopia views locally. ## How to use a color blindness simulator 1. **Load an image or use the built-in sample** — charts, UI screenshots, and maps are the usual suspects. 2. **Cycle the four previews** — protanopia, deuteranopia, tritanopia, achromatopsia — and adjust simulation intensity. 3. **Export the preview as PNG** — attach it to a design review or accessibility ticket. ## What to look for in the preview - Information carried by color alone — red/green status dots, chart legends - Contrast that collapses: light green text on light red buttons - Charts where series lines become the same muddy tone ## Good to know The simulations use standard matrices — visual approximations, not medical diagnoses. Color vision differences affect roughly 1 in 12 men and 1 in 200 women, so this is a mainstream design concern, not an edge case. The durable fixes are labels, patterns, and contrast, not just different hues. Related: [color converter](https://toolpantry.app/color-converter.html) and [palette extractor](https://toolpantry.app/image-palette.html). ## Notes These are visual approximations based on color-transformation matrices, not a medical test. Use real user testing and contrast checks for accessibility decisions. ## FAQ **What does this simulator show?** It applies common color-transformation approximations for protanopia, deuteranopia, tritanopia, and achromatopsia. The result is a design preview, not a clinical measurement of how any person sees. **Does my image leave the browser?** No. The image is decoded into a local canvas. There is no upload endpoint or account, and the optional PNG download is created on your device. **How should I use the result?** Look for meaning that depends on color alone, then add labels, patterns, icons, or text. Pair this preview with a contrast checker and testing with people who have different visual needs. --- # Color Converter — HEX, RGB, HSL & CMYK > Convert colors between HEX, RGB, HSL, and CMYK in your browser. Pick a color, copy CSS-ready values, and check contrast locally. Source: https://toolpantry.app/color-converter ## About Convert one color between HEX, RGB, HSL, and CMYK. Pick a swatch, copy CSS-ready values, and check a text/background contrast ratio without uploading anything. ## Quick answer How do I convert HEX to RGB? Paste a HEX, RGB, or HSL value and the other formats update instantly, with a live swatch and contrast hint. ## How to convert between color formats 1. **Enter the color** — HEX, RGB, HSL, or CMYK, any direction. 2. **Read every format at once** — with a live swatch and a contrast hint. 3. **Copy the value the destination needs** — CSS, design tool, or printer. ## Which format to use where - HEX for web code; RGB when scripting or using APIs - HSL when you intend to tweak lightness or saturation by hand - CMYK only as a starting estimate for print — real conversions need ICC profiles ## Good to know On-screen CMYK conversions are approximations; print colors depend on ink, paper, and profile, so never promise a print match from a hex value. The contrast hint uses the WCAG idea that normal text wants roughly 4.5:1 against its background — it is worth checking before shipping any color pair. Related: [palette extractor](https://toolpantry.app/image-palette.html) and [gradient generator](https://toolpantry.app/css-gradient-generator.html). ## Notes HEX, RGB, and HSL describe the same screen color in different coordinate systems. CMYK here uses standard sRGB math and is only a screen preview; print production should use the printer's ICC profile. ## FAQ **Which formats are supported?** The converter accepts a 3- or 6-digit HEX value and editable RGB or HSL channels. It shows matching HEX, RGB, HSL, and CMYK output with one-click copy buttons. **Is CMYK exact for printing?** No. The CMYK value is a standard mathematical conversion from sRGB for orientation. A print workflow should use the destination printer or press ICC profile. **Does the color leave my browser?** No. Conversion, contrast math, and copy-ready output are generated in this page with local JavaScript. No color data is sent to a server. --- # Compress Image to 100KB — Free Image Size Reducer > Compress JPG, PNG or WebP below 100,000 bytes. Set required pixel dimensions, preview the result and check both limits locally before uploading. Source: https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb ## About Compress JPG, PNG or WebP below 100,000 bytes. Set required pixel dimensions, preview the result and check both limits locally before uploading. ## Quick answer How do I compress an image to 100KB? Choose an image, keep the 100 KB limit and enter required width and height only if your form specifies them. Compress, inspect the preview, then check the actual bytes and dimensions. Here 100 KB means 100,000 bytes; a passing result is strictly below that number. ## Measured 100 KB example On 15 October 2026, our public synthetic sample went from **4,642,935 to 98,489 bytes**; output: 1600 × 1200px. JPG output; no required pixel dimensions were set. [Download the test input](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/detail-chart.png) · [Inspect the measured output](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/target-100000.jpg) · [Full method and results](https://toolpantry.app/compression-benchmarks.html) One controlled example, not a typical compression ratio or a guarantee for your file. ## How to compress an image to 100 KB 1. **Add a JPG, PNG or WebP.** The image is processed on your device. 2. **Check the requirements.** Keep the 100 KB ceiling and optionally set the exact pixel dimensions from your form. 3. **Compare the result.** Review bytes, pixels and the preview. A pass covers the selected size and pixels, not every rule of the destination. ## For document previews and profile images A 100 KB ceiling leaves more room than 50 KB, but dense text and detailed photos still need inspection. Start without required pixels so quality is adjusted before dimensions. Zoom into small text in the result before submitting a document preview. ## Avoid compressing twice If a JPG or WebP already fits and you keep its output format, the original file is returned unchanged when no exact pixels are requested. If you need a different format or dimensions, a new image is made. Keep the original so you can compare. ## Choose the limit your destination actually gives Use [50 KB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-50kb.html), [100 KB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb.html) or [200 KB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-200kb.html) as required. For service-specific rules, see the [source-backed file size limits](https://toolpantry.app/file-size-limits.html). If the source is HEIC, [convert it to JPG first](https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-jpg.html). ## Notes Leave both empty to keep original dimensions when possible. With required pixels set, we will not shrink them to meet the file limit. KB = 1,000 bytes; MB = 1,000,000 bytes. A passing result is strictly below the limit. Your form may have additional requirements. ## FAQ **Does 100KB mean an exact file size?** No. This is a maximum: strictly below 100,000 bytes, using 1 KB = 1,000 bytes. The output can be smaller and is not padded to an exact byte count. **Will the dimensions change?** Without required pixels, original dimensions are tried first and reduced only when encoding quality cannot meet the byte limit. With required pixels set, those dimensions are kept and an unmet size limit is clearly flagged. **Will this guarantee my form accepts the image?** No. Check the required format, minimum bytes, dimensions, crop and other rules. The tool reports the selected byte and pixel checks and gives you a preview. **Will the original be overwritten?** No. You download a separate result. An already-small image in the same output format can be returned unchanged when no exact dimensions are requested. --- # Compress Image to 1MB — Free Image Size Reducer > Compress an image to under 1MB locally in your browser. Reduce oversized JPG, PNG, and WebP files for portals and email without uploading. Source: https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-1mb ## About Compress a JPG, PNG, or WebP below the 1MB line that portals, email, and hosting love to draw — done locally. ## Quick answer How do I compress an image to 1MB? Drop your image, select the 1 MB target, and download. The compressor only reduces quality enough to fit under 1 MB, and the file never leaves your browser. ## How to compress an image under 1 MB 1. **Add the oversized image** — typically a modern phone photo or an uncompressed export. 2. **Pick the 1 MB target** — quality reduction alone usually does the job; dimensions stay intact. 3. **Download** — near-original appearance, a fraction of the weight. ## Why 1MB keeps coming up - Email and messenger attachment hurdles - Government and company portals that cap single images at 1–2 MB - Website and app backends with per-image limits ## Good to know If your file is already under 1 MB, you do not need to compress it — check with [Image info](https://toolpantry.app/image-info.html) first. At this budget, visible quality loss is rare; any slight softness usually comes from the photo being upscaled somewhere in the pipeline. Related: [500 KB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-500kb.html) and [200 KB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-200kb.html) targets. ## Notes Leave both empty to keep original dimensions when possible. With required pixels set, we will not shrink them to meet the file limit. KB = 1,000 bytes; MB = 1,000,000 bytes. A passing result is strictly below the limit. Your form may have additional requirements. ## FAQ **Why did the dimensions change?** When no required pixels are set, the compressor reduces dimensions only if quality alone cannot meet the byte limit. Required pixel dimensions are kept; if both checks cannot pass, the result is clearly marked over the size limit. **Will the original be overwritten?** No. The result is a new downloaded file. Your original remains unchanged on your device. --- # Compress Image to 200KB — Free Image Size Reducer > Compress JPG, PNG or WebP below 200,000 bytes. Set required pixel dimensions, preview the result and check both limits locally before uploading. Source: https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-200kb ## About Compress JPG, PNG or WebP below 200,000 bytes. Set required pixel dimensions, preview the result and check both limits locally before uploading. ## Quick answer How do I compress an image to 200KB? Choose an image, keep the 200 KB limit and enter required width and height only if your form specifies them. Compress, inspect the preview, then check the actual bytes and dimensions. Here 200 KB means 200,000 bytes; a passing result is strictly below that number. ## Measured 200 KB example On 15 October 2026, our public synthetic sample went from **4,642,935 to 198,537 bytes**; output: 1600 × 1200px. JPG output; no required pixel dimensions were set. [Download the test input](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/detail-chart.png) · [Inspect the measured output](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/target-200000.jpg) · [Full method and results](https://toolpantry.app/compression-benchmarks.html) One controlled example, not a typical compression ratio or a guarantee for your file. ## How to compress an image to 200 KB 1. **Add a JPG, PNG or WebP.** The image is processed on your device. 2. **Check the requirements.** Keep the 200 KB ceiling and optionally set the exact pixel dimensions from your form. 3. **Compare the result.** Review bytes, pixels and the preview. A pass covers the selected size and pixels, not every rule of the destination. ## For a larger image field Use this page when your upload destination explicitly asks for an image below 200 KB. The extra budget can preserve more detail than a 50 KB target, but the result still depends on content. Choose JPG when the form requires it; a smaller WebP is not useful if that format is rejected. ## Keep the pixels your form asks for With required width and height set, the tool keeps those exact dimensions and reports failure if encoding cannot also meet the byte limit. It does not quietly make the image smaller in pixels. Whole-image fit adds white padding; center crop removes edges, so check the preview. ## Choose the limit your destination actually gives Use [50 KB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-50kb.html), [100 KB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb.html) or [200 KB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-200kb.html) as required. For service-specific rules, see the [source-backed file size limits](https://toolpantry.app/file-size-limits.html). If the source is HEIC, [convert it to JPG first](https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-jpg.html). ## Notes Leave both empty to keep original dimensions when possible. With required pixels set, we will not shrink them to meet the file limit. KB = 1,000 bytes; MB = 1,000,000 bytes. A passing result is strictly below the limit. Your form may have additional requirements. ## FAQ **Does 200KB mean an exact file size?** No. This is a maximum: strictly below 200,000 bytes, using 1 KB = 1,000 bytes. The output can be smaller and is not padded to an exact byte count. **Will the dimensions change?** Without required pixels, original dimensions are tried first and reduced only when encoding quality cannot meet the byte limit. With required pixels set, those dimensions are kept and an unmet size limit is clearly flagged. **Will this guarantee my form accepts the image?** No. Check the required format, minimum bytes, dimensions, crop and other rules. The tool reports the selected byte and pixel checks and gives you a preview. **Will the original be overwritten?** No. You download a separate result. An already-small image in the same output format can be returned unchanged when no exact dimensions are requested. --- # Compress Image to 20KB — Tiny Image Size Reducer > Compress an image to 20KB locally in your browser. Shrink JPG, PNG, or WebP to extremely small sizes for strict upload forms without uploading. Source: https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-20kb ## About Compress a JPG, PNG, or WebP toward an extreme 20KB limit for ID photos, signatures, and strict forms. The original stays on your device. ## Quick answer How do I compress an image to 20KB? Drop your image into the tool, pick the 20 KB target, and download the result. The compressor lowers quality and, when needed, gently reduces dimensions until the file fits — entirely in your browser. ## How to compress an image to 20 KB 1. **Add your image** — a passport-style photo or a document scan works best; drop it in and nothing is uploaded. 2. **Choose the 20 KB target** — the compressor lowers quality first, then dimensions, until the result fits the tiny budget. 3. **Download and verify on the portal** — check the required pixel size too; some forms cap both KB and dimensions. ## When 20KB is the actual limit - Visa, exam, and government forms that cap photo and signature uploads between 10–20 KB - Legacy portals with decade-old upload forms - Scanned signatures that must stay tiny ## Good to know Twenty kilobytes is an extremely tight budget — expect visible softness, and start from a tightly cropped photo rather than a full scene. Stick with JPG at these sizes; if the portal accepts WebP, it can fit the same limit with noticeably better quality (see the [PNG to WebP converter](https://toolpantry.app/png-to-webp.html)). Need a little more headroom? Try the [50 KB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-50kb.html) or [100 KB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb.html) target instead. ## Notes Leave both empty to keep original dimensions when possible. With required pixels set, we will not shrink them to meet the file limit. KB = 1,000 bytes; MB = 1,000,000 bytes. A passing result is strictly below the limit. Your form may have additional requirements. ## FAQ **Why did the dimensions change?** When no required pixels are set, the compressor reduces dimensions only if quality alone cannot meet the byte limit. Required pixel dimensions are kept; if both checks cannot pass, the result is clearly marked over the size limit. **Will the original be overwritten?** No. The result is a new downloaded file. Your original remains unchanged on your device. --- # Compress Image to 2MB — Free Image Size Reducer > Compress an image to under 2MB locally in your browser. Reduce oversized JPG, PNG, and WebP files for portals and email without uploading. Source: https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-2mb ## About Compress a JPG, PNG, or WebP below the 2MB line that portals, email, and hosting love to draw — done locally. ## Quick answer How do I compress an image to 2MB? Drop your image, select the 2 MB target, and download. The compressor only reduces quality enough to fit under 2 MB, and the file never leaves your browser. ## How to compress an image under 2 MB 1. **Add the oversized image** — typically a modern phone photo or an uncompressed export. 2. **Pick the 2 MB target** — quality reduction alone usually does the job; dimensions stay intact. 3. **Download** — near-original appearance, a fraction of the weight. ## Why 2MB keeps coming up - Job, visa, and government portals that cap single uploads at 2 MB - Email and messenger attachment hurdles - Application forms and listing platforms with per-image limits ## Good to know If your file is already under 2 MB, you do not need to compress it — check with [Image info](https://toolpantry.app/image-info.html) first. At this budget, visible quality loss is rare; tighter limits exist for a reason, so if the form still rejects the file, step down to the [1 MB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-1mb.html) or [500 KB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-500kb.html) target. Wondering where limits like these come from? The [file size limits reference](https://toolpantry.app/file-size-limits.html) lists every platform's cap in one table. ## Notes Leave both empty to keep original dimensions when possible. With required pixels set, we will not shrink them to meet the file limit. KB = 1,000 bytes; MB = 1,000,000 bytes. A passing result is strictly below the limit. Your form may have additional requirements. ## FAQ **Why did the dimensions change?** When no required pixels are set, the compressor reduces dimensions only if quality alone cannot meet the byte limit. Required pixel dimensions are kept; if both checks cannot pass, the result is clearly marked over the size limit. **Will the original be overwritten?** No. The result is a new downloaded file. Your original remains unchanged on your device. --- # Compress Image to 500KB — Free Image Size Reducer > Compress an image to 500KB locally in your browser. Reduce JPG, PNG, and WebP files for CMS, email, and course uploads without uploading. Source: https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-500kb ## About Compress a JPG, PNG, or WebP toward a 500KB cap for websites, courses, and email — visually near-original, and fully local. ## Quick answer How do I compress an image to 500KB? Drop your image into the tool, choose the 500 KB target, and download. The compressor runs entirely in your browser and the original stays on your device. ## How to compress an image to 500 KB 1. **Add your image** — phone photos and screenshots are the usual customers here. 2. **Choose the 500 KB target** — at this size most files get under with quality tuning only. 3. **Download** — visually indistinguishable at typical screen sizes. ## Where 500KB caps appear - CMS and website upload limits - Course platforms and LMS submissions - Email attachments when sending many images ## Good to know Half a megabyte is roomy: modern phone photos compress to it with essentially no visible loss at screen sizes. If you are publishing to the web, switch the output to WebP and you can often go far below the cap with identical quality — see the [PNG to WebP converter](https://toolpantry.app/png-to-webp.html). Related: [200 KB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-200kb.html) and [1 MB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-1mb.html) targets. ## Notes Leave both empty to keep original dimensions when possible. With required pixels set, we will not shrink them to meet the file limit. KB = 1,000 bytes; MB = 1,000,000 bytes. A passing result is strictly below the limit. Your form may have additional requirements. ## FAQ **Why did the dimensions change?** When no required pixels are set, the compressor reduces dimensions only if quality alone cannot meet the byte limit. Required pixel dimensions are kept; if both checks cannot pass, the result is clearly marked over the size limit. **Will the original be overwritten?** No. The result is a new downloaded file. Your original remains unchanged on your device. --- # Compress Image to 50KB — Free Image Size Reducer > Compress JPG, PNG or WebP below 50,000 bytes. Set required pixel dimensions, preview the result and check both limits locally before uploading. Source: https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-50kb ## About Compress JPG, PNG or WebP below 50,000 bytes. Set required pixel dimensions, preview the result and check both limits locally before uploading. ## Quick answer How do I compress an image to 50KB? Choose an image, keep the 50 KB limit and enter required width and height only if your form specifies them. Compress, inspect the preview, then check the actual bytes and dimensions. Here 50 KB means 50,000 bytes; a passing result is strictly below that number. ## Measured 50 KB example On 15 October 2026, our public synthetic sample went from **4,642,935 to 49,465 bytes**; output: 1360 × 1020px. JPG output; no required pixel dimensions were set. [Download the test input](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/detail-chart.png) · [Inspect the measured output](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/target-50000.jpg) · [Full method and results](https://toolpantry.app/compression-benchmarks.html) One controlled example, not a typical compression ratio or a guarantee for your file. ## How to compress an image to 50 KB 1. **Add a JPG, PNG or WebP.** The image is processed on your device. 2. **Check the requirements.** Keep the 50 KB ceiling and optionally set the exact pixel dimensions from your form. 3. **Compare the result.** Review bytes, pixels and the preview. A pass covers the selected size and pixels, not every rule of the destination. ## For a small photo field If your application explicitly asks for a photo below 50 KB, start with a tightly framed image. Full scenes waste detail on the background. If required pixels are set, choose whole-image padding or center crop and inspect faces before downloading. This tool does not certify passport, visa or exam-photo compliance. ## Check minimums as well as maximums A form may ask for a range such as 20–50 KB. This compressor checks the ceiling; it does not add filler bytes to satisfy a minimum. Follow the current application instructions for format, pixels, background and any other requirements. ## Choose the limit your destination actually gives Use [50 KB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-50kb.html), [100 KB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb.html) or [200 KB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-200kb.html) as required. For service-specific rules, see the [source-backed file size limits](https://toolpantry.app/file-size-limits.html). If the source is HEIC, [convert it to JPG first](https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-jpg.html). ## Notes Leave both empty to keep original dimensions when possible. With required pixels set, we will not shrink them to meet the file limit. KB = 1,000 bytes; MB = 1,000,000 bytes. A passing result is strictly below the limit. Your form may have additional requirements. ## FAQ **Does 50KB mean an exact file size?** No. This is a maximum: strictly below 50,000 bytes, using 1 KB = 1,000 bytes. The output can be smaller and is not padded to an exact byte count. **Will the dimensions change?** Without required pixels, original dimensions are tried first and reduced only when encoding quality cannot meet the byte limit. With required pixels set, those dimensions are kept and an unmet size limit is clearly flagged. **Will this guarantee my form accepts the image?** No. Check the required format, minimum bytes, dimensions, crop and other rules. The tool reports the selected byte and pixel checks and gives you a preview. **Will the original be overwritten?** No. You download a separate result. An already-small image in the same output format can be returned unchanged when no exact dimensions are requested. --- # Compress Image to 5MB — Free Image Size Reducer > Compress an image to under 5MB locally in your browser. Reduce oversized JPG, PNG, and WebP files for portals and email without uploading. Source: https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-5mb ## About Compress a JPG, PNG, or WebP below the 5MB line that upload forms and print services love to draw — done locally. ## Quick answer How do I compress an image to 5MB? Drop your image, select the 5 MB target, and download. The compressor keeps as much quality as it can while fitting under 5 MB, and the file never leaves your browser. ## How to compress an image under 5 MB 1. **Add the oversized image** — RAW exports, camera JPEGs, or screenshots saved losslessly. 2. **Pick the 5 MB target** — at this budget the quality loss is usually invisible. 3. **Download** — near-original appearance, ready for the upload form. ## Why 5MB keeps coming up - Print services and photo labs with per-image caps - Portals that accept larger scans but not raw exports - Cloud forms and ticketing systems with 5–10 MB limits ## Good to know If your file is already under 5 MB, you do not need to compress it — check with [Image info](https://toolpantry.app/image-info.html) first. Most images settle well below 5 MB once re-encoded, so if the form still complains about size, step down to the [2 MB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-2mb.html) or [1 MB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-1mb.html) target. ## Notes Leave both empty to keep original dimensions when possible. With required pixels set, we will not shrink them to meet the file limit. KB = 1,000 bytes; MB = 1,000,000 bytes. A passing result is strictly below the limit. Your form may have additional requirements. ## FAQ **Why did the dimensions change?** When no required pixels are set, the compressor reduces dimensions only if quality alone cannot meet the byte limit. Required pixel dimensions are kept; if both checks cannot pass, the result is clearly marked over the size limit. **Will the original be overwritten?** No. The result is a new downloaded file. Your original remains unchanged on your device. --- # Compress PDF — Reduce PDF Size in Your Browser > Compress a PDF locally in your browser. Pages are re-encoded at the quality you choose and the smaller file downloads — no upload, no account. Source: https://toolpantry.app/compress-pdf ## About Shrink scans and image-heavy PDFs to fit upload limits — pages are re-encoded locally at the quality you choose. ## Quick answer How do I compress a PDF for free? Choose a PDF, pick a compression level, and download the smaller file. The pages are re-encoded in your browser — the document is never uploaded. ## How PDF compression works here 1. **Add your PDF** — every page is rendered locally at the resolution of the level you pick. 2. **Pick a level** — Strong squeezes hardest, Light keeps the most detail. 3. **Download** — the status line shows the before and after sizes so you can keep the winner. ## When this helps most - Scanned documents and phone-photo PDFs with large embedded images — compare the before and after sizes - Uploads that must fit under a 5 MB or 10 MB portal limit - Court, visa, and application portals that reject large files ## Good to know Rasterizing flattens text, links, and forms into images, so always keep the original. Text-heavy documents that were already small may not shrink at all — the tool tells you when that happens. Need page images instead of a PDF? Use [PDF to JPG](https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-jpg.html). Combining documents first? [Merge PDF](https://toolpantry.app/merge-pdf.html) pairs well, and [Split PDF](https://toolpantry.app/split-pdf.html) helps when only some pages are too heavy. Doing this on an iPhone? We wrote the full walkthrough with test numbers: [How to compress a PDF on iPhone](https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-compress-a-pdf-on-iphone.html). ## A two-page scan, measured On 15 October 2026, our public synthetic sample went from **2,198,704 to 410,435 bytes**; output: 2 pages. Balanced mode: 144 DPI, JPEG quality 0.74. All two pages remain; the output is image-only. [Download the test input](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/synthetic-scan.pdf) · [Inspect the measured output](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/pdf-balanced.pdf) · [Full method and results](https://toolpantry.app/compression-benchmarks.html) One controlled example, not a typical compression ratio or a guarantee for your file. ## Check before using the compressed PDF This tool is intended for scans and image-heavy PDFs. It flattens selectable text, links and forms into page images and does not preserve digital signatures. Keep the original when those features matter. Compression levels do not guarantee an exact MB target: compare the downloaded bytes with the [receiving service limit](https://toolpantry.app/file-size-limits.html). [Splitting the document](https://toolpantry.app/split-pdf.html) may help when fewer pages are acceptable. ## Notes Compression re-encodes pages as images to make scans and image-heavy files smaller. Text becomes part of the image — keep the original for searchable text, links, or forms. ## FAQ **Is the PDF uploaded anywhere?** No. The document is read, re-encoded, and rebuilt inside your browser. Nothing is sent to a server. **Will the text stay selectable?** No. Compression re-encodes each page as an image, so text, links, and form fields are flattened. Keep the original file when you need to copy or edit text. **Why is the result bigger sometimes?** Text-heavy or already-optimized PDFs can grow when rasterized. The status line always shows both sizes before you decide which file to keep. --- # Compress Video — Discord, WhatsApp, and Email, Locally > Compress MP4 or MOV locally. Choose a size target, check actual output bytes, and see an honest warning if the video remains too large. No upload. Source: https://toolpantry.app/compress-video ## About Choose a file-size target and re-encode an MP4 or MOV on your device. The result is measured: if it stays too large, you get a warning instead of a false success. No upload or watermark. ## Quick answer How do I compress a video for WhatsApp, Discord, or email? Add the MP4, choose a target in MB or half size, and press Compress. Only a result that passes the byte check downloads automatically. If the target is not reached, try different settings or explicitly download the over-target result. ## How video compression works here The tool demuxes the MP4, decodes each frame with the browser's media pipeline (WebCodecs), optionally scales it, and re-encodes with H.264 at a bitrate computed from your target. Audio is re-encoded to AAC 128 kbps. Everything runs on your device — the file never leaves the tab, which you can verify in the Network panel. ## What actually makes a video small - **Bitrate** — the master dial: 10 MB for a 1-minute video means ~1.3 Mbps of video. Fast motion needs more; talking heads need less - **Resolution** — dropping 4K to 720p cuts pixels 9×; check detail and text after resizing - **Duration** — the only free win: trim it and everything else gets easier The 2, 10, 20, 25, 64 and 100 MB presets are file-size choices, not universal service limits. [Discord currently lists 20 MB for non-Nitro uploads](https://support.discord.com/hc/en-us/articles/25444343291031-File-Attachments-FAQ), with account experiments possible (checked 15 October 2026). Email message limits and WhatsApp file or video sharing are different constraints: check our [official-source file size limits](https://toolpantry.app/file-size-limits) and the current upload prompt. If the computed video bitrate drops below 300 kbps, the tool warns you; shorter clips and lower resolution may help, but cannot guarantee the target. ## Honest limits Input is MP4/MOV/M4V with H.264 or HEVC video — that covers phones (iPhone records HEVC), cameras, and most downloads. WebM/MKV input isn't supported yet; if you recorded with our [screen recorder](https://toolpantry.app/screen-recorder.html) (WebM), remux or record again as MP4 for now. Output is MP4 with H.264 video and AAC audio when an audio track is present. A size pass does not guarantee that a particular app accepts its codec, duration or other properties. And re-encoding always costs some quality: check the result before deleting the original. ## If the size target is not reached Bitrate is an estimate, and a minimum usable bitrate or MP4 container overhead can leave the result above your target. The output byte count is checked after encoding. Over-target files are not downloaded automatically; the separate download button labels them as over target. For a smaller result, try a shorter clip with the [video trimmer](https://toolpantry.app/video-trimmer), lower resolution, or a larger allowed ceiling. ## After compression Need the audio only? The [video to MP3](https://toolpantry.app/video-to-mp3.html) tool extracts it. Compressing images instead of videos? The [target-size image compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-1mb.html) also checks output bytes against the chosen ceiling. ## Notes MB = 1,000,000 bytes. Encoding targets are estimates: the output is measured before a pass is reported. Check your destination’s actual limit. Encoding speed and codec support depend on your browser and device. Keep the original, and check the new MP4’s picture and audio before using it. ## FAQ **How do I compress a video to under 10 MB?** Choose Below 10 MB and a resolution, then press Compress. This means fewer than 10,000,000 output bytes. Bitrate is estimated; if the output is too large, the tool warns you and does not download it automatically. **Is the final size guaranteed?** No. The output is measured after encoding. MP4 overhead and minimum bitrate can prevent a target from being reached. Change the settings or explicitly download the output marked as over target. **What size should I use for Discord, WhatsApp or email?** Follow the current limit shown by your destination. The tool’s MB presets are generic size choices; file uploads, shared videos and complete email messages can have different limits. Consult the linked official-source size reference. **Will the quality drop?** Re-encoding can reduce quality. Inspect text, motion and audio in the output, and keep your original. Smaller files and lower resolution can lose visible detail. **Which formats and browsers are supported?** Input is MP4, MOV or M4V with H.264 or HEVC video and AAC audio when present. Output is MP4 with H.264 video and AAC audio when present. Your browser and device must support the required WebCodecs decoders and encoders; WebM and MKV input are not supported here. --- # Compression Benchmarks — Real Numbers From Our Tests > Download synthetic inputs, measured outputs and exact settings for image size limits, HEIC conversion and PDF compression. Check bytes, pixels and reproducibility. Source: https://toolpantry.app/compression-benchmarks ## About Image size ceilings, exact pixels, HEIC conversion and a two-page PDF scan, measured with our actual browser tools. Every input, output and setting in this dataset is available below. ## Quick answer In this controlled run: one synthetic detail chart produced JPGs of 49,465, 98,489 and 198,537 bytes for 50, 100 and 200 KB ceilings. These are individual test results, not typical compression ratios. ## Method and scope Measured at 2026-10-15T08:59:59.633Z using Mozilla/5.0 (Macintosh; Intel Mac OS X 10_15_7) AppleWebKit/537.36 (KHTML, like Gecko) Chrome/155.0.0.0 Safari/537.36. Inputs are synthetic, generated with a fixed seed; the HEIC was made with macOS sips and the PDF contains two raster pages. No personal photos or documents are included. Size limits use decimal bytes: KB = 1,000 and MB = 1,000,000. [Input sizes, SHA-256 hashes and generation details](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/manifest.json) · [All settings, output hashes and checks (JSON)](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/results.json) · [CC0 sample license](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/LICENSE.txt) To reproduce a row, download its input, open the linked tool, use the listed settings, then compare the output bytes and pixels. Browser encoders can produce different bytes across versions; hashes identify this recorded run, not a cross-browser guarantee. We did not measure perceptual equivalence, average photo performance or video compression. ## One input, three form-size ceilings | Tool / ceiling | Input | Measured output | Output pixels | |---|---|---|---| | [Below 50,000 bytes](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-50kb.html) | [Synthetic detail chart (4,642,935 bytes)](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/detail-chart.png) | [49,465 bytes JPG](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/target-50000.jpg) | 1360 × 1020 | | [Below 100,000 bytes](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb.html) | [Synthetic detail chart (4,642,935 bytes)](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/detail-chart.png) | [98,489 bytes JPG](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/target-100000.jpg) | 1600 × 1200 | | [Below 200,000 bytes](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-200kb.html) | [Synthetic detail chart (4,642,935 bytes)](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/detail-chart.png) | [198,537 bytes JPG](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/target-200000.jpg) | 1600 × 1200 | All three use JPG with no required pixel dimensions. The tool first tries the original 1600 × 1200 pixels. This sample needed smaller pixels at 50 KB; the 100 and 200 KB outputs retained the original dimensions. ## Exact pixels and honest failure | Settings | Output | Result | |---|---|---| | 50,000-byte ceiling; 300 × 400; whole image with padding | [38,306 bytes; 300 × 400](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/pixels-pad-300x400.jpg) | Size and dimensions passed | | 50,000-byte ceiling; 300 × 400; center crop | [48,157 bytes; 300 × 400](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/pixels-crop-300x400.jpg) | Size and dimensions passed | | 20,000-byte ceiling; 1600 × 1200 required | [51,000 bytes; 1600 × 1200](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/pixels-unmet-1600x1200.jpg) | Size failed; required pixels kept and over-limit warning shown | The already-small 2800 × 400 JPG stayed at 38,181 bytes with identical bytes and original dimensions. The full JSON also records all eight size presets, WebP output, invalid dimension input and the defaults on all ten pages sharing the engine. ## HEIC and PDF examples | Tool / settings | Input | Output | What this checks | |---|---|---|---| | [HEIC to JPG; quality 85%](https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-jpg.html) | [289,338 bytes](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/synthetic-detail.heic) | [204,630 bytes](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/heic-to-jpg-85.jpg) | 960 × 720 pixels retained; synthetic HEIC only | | [Compress PDF; Balanced, 144 DPI, JPEG 0.74](https://toolpantry.app/compress-pdf.html) | [2,198,704 bytes](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/synthetic-scan.pdf) | [410,435 bytes](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/pdf-balanced.pdf) | Two pages retained; output is image-only | ## Use the result for the right task A byte ceiling does not certify a passport photo or document submission. Check format, minimum size, pixels, legibility and the destination rules. See our [official-source file size reference](https://toolpantry.app/file-size-limits.html). PDF compression rasterizes pages, so keep the original for selectable text, links, forms or signatures. ## FAQ **Can I download the original test files?** Yes. The tables link to synthetic inputs and recorded outputs. The input manifest and results JSON include file sizes, hashes, settings and browser details. **Are these typical compression ratios?** No. These are controlled examples on synthetic files. Real photos and scans can compress differently, and encoder output can vary between browsers. **Does a successful size check guarantee form acceptance?** No. Check the destination format, pixel dimensions, minimum size and other requirements. An output that cannot meet the chosen size while retaining required pixels is flagged instead of called successful. --- # Free Contractor Estimate Generator — Create Job Estimates > Create a free contractor estimate online for repairs, cleaning, landscaping, or trade work. Add job items and save a clean PDF. Source: https://toolpantry.app/contractor-estimate-generator ## About Create a clear contractor estimate for repairs, cleaning, landscaping, maintenance, or trade work. Add labor and materials, then print a PDF. ## Quick answer How do I write a contractor estimate? Enter line items, labor, and materials for your trade; the page produces a clean printable estimate you can save as PDF. ## How to write a contractor estimate 1. **Describe the job plainly** — repairs, cleaning, landscaping, whatever you do. 2. **Build material and labor lines** — quantities, unit prices, and what’s included. 3. **Print and get it in writing** — even a signature on a PDF beats a verbal number. ## Why verbal estimates cost you money - “You said it would be about $800” — with nothing in writing, the burden is yours - Materials receipts disappear into the job without line items - Deposit expectations are easier to state up front than to ask for later ## Good to know Label the document an estimate, not a quote, when the price depends on what you find on site — labor and hidden damage vary. State whether the estimate is valid if the scope changes, and standard practice in your region for deposits (commonly a third to a half of materials). Related: [quote generator](https://toolpantry.app/quote-generator.html) and [invoice generator](https://toolpantry.app/invoice-generator.html). ## Notes This estimate is a document template, not a contract or tax advice. Confirm scope, exclusions, deposits, and local requirements before sending. ## FAQ **What should a contractor estimate include?** List the work, materials, quantities, rates, assumptions, exclusions, validity date, and how the customer can approve the job. **Can I turn an estimate into an invoice?** Yes. Use the quote-to-invoice tool after the customer accepts the scope and price. --- # Cron Expression Tool — Parse Cron and See Next Runs > Parse five-field cron expressions locally and see the next scheduled run times in your browser. Source: https://toolpantry.app/cron-expression-tool ## About Parse standard five-field cron syntax and calculate the next scheduled run times using your local clock. ## Quick answer How do I read a cron expression? Paste a cron schedule and the tool explains each field in plain English and shows the next run times. ## How to read a cron expression 1. **Enter the five fields** — minute, hour, day of month, month, day of week. 2. **Read the plain-English summary** — “every weekday at 09:30” beats counting asterisks. 3. **Check the next run times** — upcoming schedules confirm you got the semantics right. ## When this prevents 3 a.m. pages - Writing a new job and double-checking the schedule before deploy - Auditing an inherited crontab nobody dares touch - Translating “every second Tuesday” into something the server understands ## Good to know Five fields is the classic format; some systems take six (with seconds). The job runs in the *server’s* timezone, not yours — the usual cause of “it fired an hour early.” Day-of-month and day-of-week combine with surprising OR semantics in classic cron, and the next-run list here shows exactly how your system’s reading it. ## Notes This uses the common minute hour day-of-month month day-of-week format. It does not include vendor-specific extensions such as seconds or @reboot. ## FAQ **Which timezone is used?** Next runs use the local timezone reported by your browser. **What does an asterisk mean?** An asterisk means every allowed value for that field, such as every minute or every day. --- # Crop Image Online — Cut Photos Precisely, Locally > Crop a photo to any area or a fixed ratio (1:1, 4:3, 16:9) right in your browser. Drag, resize, download — nothing is uploaded. Source: https://toolpantry.app/crop-image ## About Drag a selection over any photo, lock it to a familiar ratio, and download the cropped result — all in your browser. ## Quick answer How do I crop an image online? Add the photo, drag the selection (or pick a ratio like 1:1), then press Crop & Download. Nothing is uploaded and the original stays untouched. ## How to crop an image 1. **Add your photo** — it renders locally for the preview. 2. **Draw the crop area** — drag a new selection, or choose a ratio and let it lock. 3. **Crop & Download** — the kept pixels save at their original resolution. ## Common crops - Squares for profile pictures and avatars (1:1) - 16:9 for video thumbnails and presentations - Trimming screenshot borders, browser chrome, or scanned page edges ## Good to know The crop region keeps its full original resolution — nothing is upscaled, and the file never leaves your device. Straightening a tilted photo comes next; for now, [Rotate image](https://toolpantry.app/rotate-image.html) can fix the angle, and the [target-size compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb.html) can shrink whatever comes out. ## Notes Drag anywhere to draw a new selection, drag inside it to move, and pull the orange handle to resize. Pick a ratio to lock the shape. ## FAQ **Does cropping reduce quality?** The kept pixels are copied directly with no upscaling. PNG and WebP keep full quality; JPG output is re-encoded once at 92%, which is visually identical. **Can I crop to a square for social media?** Yes. Pick 1:1 in the ratio menu and the selection locks to a square while you drag. **Is the photo uploaded?** No. Cropping and downloading happen entirely inside your browser tab. --- # Crop Video — TikTok, Reels, Shorts Sizes, Locally > Crop an MP4 or MOV video to any area — drag a box or pick TikTok, Reels, Shorts (9:16), Instagram (4:5), or square sizes. Re-encoded locally, nothing uploaded. Source: https://toolpantry.app/crop-video ## About Drag a crop box over your video — or pick TikTok, Reels, or Instagram sizes — and export. Locally re-encoded, nothing uploaded, no watermark. ## Quick answer How do I crop a video for free? Load the MP4 or MOV, drag a box over the preview (or press a preset like 9:16 for Shorts/Reels), then press Crop & export . The kept area is re-encoded on your device into a new MP4 — no upload, no watermark. ## Why crop instead of resize Turning a landscape clip into a vertical video has two routes: crop (keep a vertical slice, lose the sides) or pad/zoom (keep everything, look worse). Cropping is what editors actually do for Shorts and Reels — the subject fills the frame and nothing looks stretched. This tool does that without an editor: draw the slice, export, upload. ## How to get a good crop - **Presets first** — 9:16 places the largest vertical crop; drag it over your subject to reframe - **Scrub to check** — play through the clip and watch what leaves the frame; if the subject moves, size the crop for their whole path - **Leave headroom** — for talking heads, put the eyes on the upper third line (the rule-of-thirds guides are drawn on the box) - **One generation only** — export once from the original; avoid re-cropping an already cropped file ## Honest limits The kept area is re-encoded once (H.264 at a bitrate near the source) — this is not a lossless operation like the [video trimmer](https://toolpantry.app/video-trimmer.html) or [rotate tool](https://toolpantry.app/rotate-video.html), because the pixels must be re-arranged. Audio passes through at 128 kbps AAC. If your clip is also too big to upload, crop first, then run it through the [video compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-video.html) — cropping alone often already saves plenty. ## Notes Drag inside the box to move it; drag outside to draw a new one. 9:16 = TikTok / Reels / Shorts · 4:5 = Instagram feed · 1:1 = square. Rotated phone videos are normalized automatically. ## FAQ **How do I crop a video?** Load the MP4 or MOV, drag a box over the preview (or pick a preset like 9:16 for Shorts), then press Crop and export. The tool re-encodes the kept area locally — nothing is uploaded. **Can I crop a video for TikTok, Reels, or Shorts?** Yes — pick the 9:16 preset for vertical video platforms, 4:5 for Instagram feed, 1:1 for square posts, or 16:9 for widescreen. The preset places the largest crop of that shape, and you can drag it to reframe. **Does cropping reduce quality?** The kept pixels are re-encoded once at a bitrate near the original, so there is one generation of encoding — far less loss than resizing or repeated edits. Nothing is upscaled, so there is no softening from stretching. **Does the output still contain the cropped-out area?** No. The exported file contains only the pixels inside your crop — the rest is simply not written. If you are cropping to hide something (a face, a watermark, a background), that area is genuinely gone from the new file. **Which formats are supported?** Input: MP4, MOV, and M4V with H.264 or HEVC video. Output: MP4 (H.264 + AAC). Rotated phone videos are normalized to their display orientation, so the crop you draw is the crop you get. --- # CSS Gradient Generator — Linear, Radial & Conic > Create linear, radial, or conic CSS gradients with live preview, editable color stops, copyable CSS, and an endpoint contrast check. Source: https://toolpantry.app/css-gradient-generator ## About Build a linear, radial, or conic CSS gradient with editable color stops, a live preview, and a copy-ready background declaration. ## Quick answer How do I create a CSS gradient? Pick two or more colors and a direction; copy the ready-made linear or radial gradient CSS. ## How to build a CSS gradient 1. **Pick the type** — linear, radial, or conic. 2. **Edit the color stops** — drag positions until the blend feels right. 3. **Copy the CSS** — one declaration, no image files. ## Where gradients fit - Hero backgrounds that scale to any screen without assets - Buttons, badges, and avatar placeholders with depth - Subtle section separation instead of hard color blocks ## Good to know Always test text contrast on the finished gradient — the page warns when your endpoints get risky, because a gradient can pass at the edges and fail in the middle. Prefer CSS over gradient images: it is sharp on any display, adapts to dark mode, and costs zero bytes. Banding on older displays is real; a very subtle noise overlay hides it when it matters. Related: [color converter](https://toolpantry.app/color-converter.html). ## Notes The contrast note checks only the selected text color against the color-stop endpoints. A gradient can still contain lower-contrast areas between stops, so review the actual design before publishing. ## FAQ **Can I use this with Tailwind?** Copy the generated CSS declaration into a custom class or convert the same gradient values into your project's arbitrary-value syntax. **What is the difference between linear and radial?** Linear gradients transition along a line or angle. Radial gradients spread from an origin point, while conic gradients rotate around that point. **Does the contrast check certify WCAG?** No. It is an endpoint warning based on the selected text color. Test important text against the full background and your target accessibility standard. --- # CSS Unit Converter — PX to REM, EM & Clamp > Convert PX, REM, and EM values with a custom base size, batch-convert CSS pixels, and generate a responsive CSS clamp() value locally. Source: https://toolpantry.app/css-unit-converter ## About Convert PX, REM, and EM values with your own root size, replace pixel values across a CSS snippet, and generate a responsive clamp() declaration. ## Quick answer How do I convert px to rem? Enter a pixel value and root font size to get rem and em equivalents, or batch-rewrite a block of CSS. ## How to convert CSS units 1. **Enter a value and its unit** — px, rem, em, or more. 2. **Set the root font size** — usually 16px, so rem conversions match your project. 3. **Copy the outputs** — including a ready-to-paste fluid clamp() when you need one. ## Why rem/em keep tripping people up - Designs arrive in px; responsive code wants rem - Nested em compounds against its parent — the same value grows at every level - Fluid type needs clamp(), and doing the math by eye goes badly ## Good to know rem resolves against the root element, em against the current parent — pick rem for a predictable rhythm and em only when you deliberately want relative scaling. Borders and hairlines can stay in px without anyone suffering. Related: [unit converter](https://toolpantry.app/unit-converter.html) for physical units. ## Notes The conversions are mathematical references. REM uses the root font size; EM depends on its parent context. The clamp generator keeps REM in its bounds by default, which helps text respond to browser font-size preferences. ## FAQ **What base size should I use?** Use the root font size in your project. Browsers commonly start at 16px, but a design system may choose another value. **Is EM always the same as REM?** No. REM references the root element, while EM references the current element's parent font size. This page uses the base size for a quick estimate and tells you where that assumption applies. **Why does the clamp output use REM?** The default keeps the minimum and maximum bounds in rem so text can respond to a reader's preferred browser font size. Switch to PX when exact screen bounds matter more than that behavior. --- # Dimensional Weight Calculator — Billable Shipping Weight > Calculate actual, dimensional, and billable parcel weight with metric or imperial units and a carrier-specific divisor. Source: https://toolpantry.app/dimensional-weight-calculator ## About Compare actual and dimensional weight for a parcel, then see which weight is likely to drive the charge. Use your carrier’s divisor and rounding rule. ## Quick answer How do I calculate dimensional weight? Enter package dimensions and the carrier divisor; the tool returns the billable dimensional weight to compare against actual weight. ## How to calculate dimensional weight 1. **Enter carton dimensions and actual weight** — the box, not the product. 2. **Apply the carrier divisor** — typically 5,000 metric or 139 imperial. 3. **Compare** — carriers bill the greater of actual and dimensional weight. ## Why box size literally costs money - A light product in an oversized box ships at the box’s dimensional weight - Reducing carton size a few centimetres can cut shipping cost per order - Ecommerce teams use this before carrier quotes — not after ## Good to know Divisor and rounding differ by carrier and service — always confirm with your rate card, which is why the divisor stays editable here. Measure the outside, including bulges. Related: [packaging fit](https://toolpantry.app/packaging-fit-calculator.html) and [shipping cost estimator](https://toolpantry.app/shipping-cost-estimator.html). ## Notes Example default: DHL-style metric divisor 5,000. FedEx US commonly shows inches ÷ 139; always confirm the divisor in your service guide. ## FAQ **What is dimensional weight?** It converts package space into a billable weight. The higher of actual and dimensional weight is commonly used for pricing. **Why can another carrier show a different answer?** Carriers can use different divisors, dimension rounding, minimum charges, and surcharges. Enter the rule for the service you are comparing. --- # Discount Calculator — Sale Price, Savings & Tax > Calculate sale price, savings, stacked discounts, sales tax, quantity totals, or reverse percentage off locally. Source: https://toolpantry.app/discount-calculator ## About Find the sale price, savings, tax, and checkout total without guessing. Compare stacked discounts in sequence or reverse a sale price to find the true percentage off. ## Quick answer How do I calculate a discount price? Enter the original price and discount percentage to get the sale price and the amount saved; stacked discounts are supported. ## How to calculate a discount 1. **Enter the original price** — and the discount percentage, or two stacked discounts. 2. **Read the final price and savings** — add sales tax if your region applies it. 3. **Try reverse mode** — enter the sale price to find out what the original price (or the real discount) was. ## Where this earns its keep - Deciding whether “extra 20% off sale items” is actually a deal - Setting a price for your own product with a planned discount - Checking that a receipt charged the discount it advertised ## Good to know Stacked discounts multiply — 20% + 10% is 28% off, not 30%. Retailers know this; now you do too. If you are pricing your own products, sanity-check the margin after the discount with the [profit margin calculator](https://toolpantry.app/ecommerce-profit-margin-calculator.html). Related: [tip calculator](https://toolpantry.app/tip-calculator.html) and [percentage calculator](https://toolpantry.app/percentage-calculator.html). ## Notes Tax is applied after the discount and currency selection changes display only; it does not convert money. Retailers may round at different points, so confirm the result at checkout. ## FAQ **Do stacked discounts add together?** No. A second discount applies to the already reduced price. For example, 20% off followed by 10% off produces a 28% effective discount, not 30%. **When is sales tax applied?** This page applies the tax percentage after all discounts to the reduced price. Taxable bases and rounding can vary by location and retailer. **Can I work backward from a sale price?** Choose Find percent off, enter the original price and the pre-tax sale price, and the page calculates the savings and effective percentage off. --- # Document Scanner — Photo to PDF, Straighten & Enhance > Turn a phone photo of a document into a clean, straight scan — drag the corners, straighten, enhance, and export as PDF or JPG. Everything runs locally. Source: https://toolpantry.app/document-scanner ## About Photograph a document, drag the corners, and get a straightened, enhanced scan — export single pages as JPG or build a multi-page PDF. No scanner, no upload, no app. ## Quick answer How do I scan a document with a phone photo? Choose the photo, drag the four corner dots onto the page corners, press Straighten, pick an enhancement (Enhance or B&W), then download a JPG or add pages to a PDF. ## How to scan a document without a scanner 1. **Photograph the page** — phone camera, overhead, even light. Include a little margin around the page. 2. **Straighten** — drag the four corners onto the page's corners; the perspective transform flattens the angle away. 3. **Enhance and export** — "Enhance" for a clean white page, "B&W" for text-only documents, then JPG or multi-page PDF. ## What each mode is for - **Enhance** — contracts, receipts, forms with signatures: keeps colour but cleans the background to white. - **B&W** — typed documents, books, notes: maximum readability, smallest PDF. - **Original** — photos, diagrams, or anything with colour you need to preserve. ## Good to know The straightening is a true perspective correction — the same math scanner apps use — so pages shot at an angle come out rectangular. Everything runs on your device: contracts and IDs never get uploaded. If the scan comes out dark, brighten the original photo first with the [image tools](https://toolpantry.app/image-upscaler.html), or re-shoot with more light. Related: [compress the PDF](https://toolpantry.app/compress-pdf.html) if it needs to fit an upload limit and [PDF to Word](https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-word.html) to edit it afterwards. ## Notes Tips for a good scan: shoot from above in even light, keep the whole page in frame with some margin, and avoid shadows across the text. Multi-page flow: straighten page 1 → Add page to PDF → choose the next photo → repeat → Export PDF. ## FAQ **How do I scan a document with my phone?** Photograph the page from above in good light, then open this page and choose the photo. Drag the four corner handles onto the page corners, press Straighten, pick an enhancement, and export as PDF or JPG. Multiple pages can be added to one PDF. **What do the enhancement modes do?** Enhance stretches the brightness range so a grey-ish photo becomes paper-white with dark text. B&W applies an adaptive threshold — the classic scanner look, smallest files, best for text-only documents. Original keeps the photo as-is. **Are my documents uploaded?** No. The straightening (a perspective transform) and enhancement run in your browser, and the PDF is assembled locally. Contracts, IDs, and receipts never leave your device. --- # Download Time Calculator — Estimate File Transfer Time > Estimate download time from file size and internet speed. Supports bytes, KB, MB, GB, bps, Kbps, Mbps, and Gbps. Source: https://toolpantry.app/download-time-calculator ## About Enter a file size and connection speed to estimate download time for a game, video, backup, app, or image archive. ## Quick answer How do I estimate a file download time? Enter the file size and your connection speed; the tool shows how long the transfer takes. ## How to estimate a download time 1. **Enter the file size** — MB or GB. 2. **Enter connection speed** — or pick a common connection type. 3. **Read the estimate** — plus a reality check that accounts for real-world overhead. ## Where transfer-time estimates help - Uploading a photo catalog or a large export to a client - Setting expectations before sending “it’s a big file” - Deciding whether to compress before sending at all ## Good to know Advertised speeds are best-case — expect 60–80% of them in practice, and uploads are almost always slower than downloads on consumer connections. If the estimate looks painful, compress first: the [target-size compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb.html) can cut a photo folder by an order of magnitude. ## Notes Uses decimal units and ideal throughput. Wi-Fi, server speed, protocol overhead, and congestion can make the real transfer slower. ## FAQ **Why is a 100 MB file not 800 megabits?** File sizes are shown in bytes while connection speeds are usually shown in bits. The calculator converts bytes to bits before dividing by speed. **Can I estimate upload time?** Yes. Use your upload speed in the speed field. --- # Ecommerce Profit Margin Calculator — Find Break-Even Price > Calculate ecommerce profit margin, break-even price, and target-margin price after product, shipping, platform, payment, ad, and return costs. Source: https://toolpantry.app/ecommerce-profit-margin-calculator ## About Model your selling price against product cost, delivery, marketplace fees, payment fees, advertising, packaging, and returns. ## Quick answer How do I calculate ecommerce profit margin? Enter price, product cost, fees, and shipping; the tool returns profit per order and margin percentage. ## How to calculate ecommerce profit margin 1. **Enter price and product cost** — landed cost, not supplier sticker. 2. **Add the real fees** — marketplace referral, payment processing, ads, and a returns allowance. 3. **Read margin, break-even price, and target price** — the three numbers pricing decisions need. ## Why sticker margins lie - Marketplace fees stack: referral + payment + fulfilment + promoted listings - A 5% return rate is a real cost, not an edge case - Break-even price is your floor in any negotiation or sale ## Good to know Model the ad cost per order as a line item — for many stores it is the largest fee after COGS, and it is the fastest to change. Re-run before every sale event; discounts below break-even are busywork. Related: [marketplace fees](https://toolpantry.app/marketplace-fee-calculator.html) and [landed cost](https://toolpantry.app/landed-cost-calculator.html). ## Notes Use your actual average fees and advertising cost. This page does not include income tax, fixed overhead, or currency conversion. ## FAQ **What is the break-even price?** It is the minimum product price that covers the per-order costs and percentage fees in your scenario. **Why can target price be unreachable?** If percentage fees plus your target margin approach 100%, there is not enough revenue left to cover fixed costs. --- # Editorial Standards — How We Test and Write > How Tool Pantry guides and benchmarks are made: real test files, published measurements, independence from advertisers, and a clear corrections policy. Source: https://toolpantry.app/editorial ## About Every guide on Tool Pantry is built around a real test run — real files, measured numbers, described setup. These are the standards we hold ourselves to. ## Quick answer The core rule: no number ships without a test. Every measurement in our guides comes from running the tool on an actual file with a described setup — and since everything runs in your browser, you can reproduce any of them yourself. ## How a guide gets made 1. **Pick the problem from real demand.** Guides exist because people actually search for the task — "video too large for Discord", "photo under 50 KB for a form" — not because a keyword looked good. 2. **Run the test first.** Before writing, we run the tool on a concrete test file and record what happens: input size, output size, time taken, and the settings used. The guides you read contain those actual numbers — for example the compression figures on our [benchmarks page](https://toolpantry.app/compression-benchmarks.html) or the timings on the [processing speed page](https://toolpantry.app/local-processing-benchmarks.html). 3. **Describe the setup honestly.** Test files and environments are stated ("12-second 1080p clip", "Chrome 155 on macOS") so results can be compared and reproduced — and limits are stated too (what the tool can't do, what might fail, what we skipped). 4. **Verify, then publish.** Every tool involved has passed its automated end-to-end tests; every factual claim in the text is checked against the test run. Anything that fails its check gets rewritten or cut. ## Independence - **No sponsored placements.** Companies cannot pay to appear in a guide, a comparison, or a recommendation. Ad slots on the site are visually separated from content and have no influence on what we write. - **No affiliate-driven advice.** We don't earn commissions on recommendations, so the recommendation is just what the test showed. - **Competitors are treated fairly.** Our comparison pages (for example [vs Smallpdf](https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-smallpdf.html)) include the honest "when you should use them instead" section — if another tool is better for your case, we say so. ## About AI assistance Like most small teams in 2026, we use modern tooling — including AI assistance — for drafting and engineering. The part that matters for trust is the verification gate described above: every number and every factual claim is produced by a real test run and checked before publishing. AI drafts, tests decide. ## Corrections and updates - **Report an error:** reach us via [GitHub](https://github.com/wu736139669). Verified errors are fixed promptly. - **Visible dates:** guides carry published and modified dates; benchmark pages are re-run when the tools they describe change meaningfully. - **Platform changes:** when a platform changes a limit (like a new attachment cap), affected guides are reviewed and updated — our [file size limits reference](https://toolpantry.app/file-size-limits.html) is the canonical tracker for those. ## What we don't do We don't publish "top 10 tools" listicles ranked by whoever paid, we don't use fake countdown timers or invented urgency, and we don't claim capabilities a tool doesn't have. When a tool has an honest limitation — the video face blur doesn't track moving faces, the HEIC-to-JPEG conversion can grow a file — the guide says so in plain words. That's the standard. Hold us to it. ## FAQ **Can a company pay to be featured or ranked in a guide?** No. Editorial content is independent: recommendations are based on what the tests show, not on commercial arrangements. Advertising slots are visually separated from content, and no advertiser has any input into what the guides say. **How do you verify the numbers published in guides?** The numbers are produced by running the actual tool on an actual test file, and the test setup is described in the guide. Because every tool runs locally in your browser, you can reproduce any published measurement with your own file in about a minute. **Do you use AI to write content?** We use modern tooling — including AI assistance — for drafting and site engineering, the same way most small teams do. What matters for trust is the verification gate: every factual claim and every number in a guide comes from a real test run that is checked before publishing, and anything that fails its check is rewritten or removed. **How do I report an error or request a correction?** Reach us through our GitHub profile (github.com/wu736139669). Verified errors are corrected promptly, and guides carry visible published and modified dates so changes are transparent. **How often are guides updated?** Guides are reviewed when the underlying tools change, when platform limits change (file size caps, format support), or when a correction is reported. Benchmark pages are re-run when the tools they describe get meaningful updates. --- # Email Signature Generator — Gmail, Outlook & Apple Mail > Create a clean HTML email signature for Gmail, Outlook, Apple Mail, or Thunderbird. Preview it locally, copy rich text, or download the inline-style HTML. Source: https://toolpantry.app/email-signature-generator ## About Create a simple, table-based HTML email signature for Gmail, Outlook, Apple Mail, or Thunderbird. Your contact details stay in this browser. ## Quick answer How do I make an email signature? Fill in your name, title, and links; the tool builds a clean HTML signature you can copy into Gmail or Outlook. ## How to create an email signature 1. **Enter your details** — name, role, company, and the links you actually want clicked. 2. **Pick a layout** — classic, minimal, or banner; the preview uses table-based markup that email clients tolerate. 3. **Copy rich text or HTML** — paste into Gmail/Outlook settings, or download the HTML file. ## Where a signature earns its bytes - Freelancers and small businesses standardizing how outreach looks - New roles where every email until now ends in a bare name - Keeping contact details consistent across a team ## Good to know Email clients rewrite CSS and strip what they dislike — so test by sending yourself a message before rolling it out. Keep it text-first with at most one small image; heavy banners get squashed or blocked, and some block remote images entirely (a good reason to avoid tracking pixels, which this tool also does not add). Related: [quote generator](https://toolpantry.app/quote-generator.html) and [invoice generator](https://toolpantry.app/invoice-generator.html) for the documents that follow the email. ## Notes The generated signature uses inline styles and HTML tables, with no tracking pixel or external stylesheet. A logo URL is kept as a reference in the exported HTML and will load only when the recipient's mail client requests it. ## FAQ **Can I paste this into Gmail?** Use Copy formatted signature, then paste it into Gmail Settings → See all settings → General → Signature. If rich clipboard access is unavailable, download the HTML, open it in a browser, and copy the rendered signature. **Will it look identical in Outlook?** No generator can guarantee identical rendering across mail clients. This output uses conservative tables and inline styles, but you should send a test email in the clients your recipients use. **Does the tool store my contact details?** No. The page does not send the fields to a server, save them to an account, or add a tracking pixel. --- # EMI Calculator — Monthly Payment, Interest & Prepayment > Calculate monthly EMI, total interest, total payment, amortization, and prepayment savings for home, car, personal, or education loans locally. Source: https://toolpantry.app/emi-calculator ## About Estimate a reducing-balance EMI for a home, car, personal, or education loan. Add a monthly top-up or one-time prepayment to see how much time and interest could change. ## Quick answer How is EMI calculated? EMI = P × r × (1+r)^n ÷ ((1+r)^n − 1), where P is the principal, r is the monthly interest rate (annual rate ÷ 12), and n is the number of monthly payments. The calculator also shows total interest and prepayment savings, all computed locally. ## How to use an EMI calculator 1. **Enter the loan amount, annual interest rate, and tenure** — the monthly EMI, total interest, and total payment are computed instantly. 2. **Read the schedule** — the first-year amortization shows how much of each payment goes to interest versus principal. 3. **Model prepayments** — add a monthly top-up or a one-time payment to see the interest saved and months shaved off. ## When this helps - Comparing two lender offers with different rates or tenures - Deciding whether to stretch the tenure or pay more each month - Checking how much interest an early prepayment actually saves ## Good to know The most common EMI formula is *P × r × (1+r)^n ÷ ((1+r)^n − 1)*, where r is the annual rate divided by 12. Prepayments save the most when made early in the loan, because that is when interest dominates each payment. Lenders add fees, insurance, and rounding that this calculator does not model — treat the result as a planning estimate, and compare with our [loan calculator](https://toolpantry.app/loan-calculator.html) or [mortgage calculator](https://toolpantry.app/mortgage-calculator.html). ## Notes This uses a fixed nominal annual rate, monthly compounding, and a reducing-balance formula. Currency is for display only; actual lenders may use different rounding, fees, taxes, insurance, daily interest, or prepayment rules. ## FAQ **How is EMI calculated?** The monthly rate is the annual rate divided by 12. For a reducing-balance loan, the fixed EMI is calculated from the principal, monthly rate, and number of monthly payments. At 0% interest, the principal is divided evenly. **What does a prepayment scenario show?** The scheduled EMI stays the same while extra monthly or one-time amounts reduce principal. The tool compares the resulting payoff count and interest with the baseline schedule. **Is this a bank quote or financial advice?** No. It is an educational estimate based on the inputs you provide. Check your lender's repayment schedule, fees, rate type, and prepayment terms before making a decision. --- # EXIF Viewer — Photo Metadata, GPS & AI Tags, Removable > View a photo's EXIF metadata — camera, settings, GPS location, software, and AI tags — and download a clean copy with all metadata removed. Runs locally. Source: https://toolpantry.app/exif-viewer ## About Camera, settings, GPS location, software, AI tags — see what's inside the file, then download a clean copy with it all removed. ## Quick answer How do I view and remove EXIF metadata from a photo? Add the photo to see its camera, GPS, and AI tags — then press "Download clean copy" to save a version with all metadata stripped. Everything runs locally; the photo is never uploaded. ## What's inside a photo file - **EXIF** — camera make and model, exposure settings, orientation, date/time, and GPS coordinates if location was on - **XMP / IPTC** — editor data, keywords, copyright, and increasingly **AI-source labels** (like IPTC's trainedAlgorithmicMedia) - **Content Credentials (C2PA)** — a signed provenance manifest some cameras and AI tools attach - **PNG text chunks** — AI generators often write prompts and settings here (Stable Diffusion's "parameters" is famous) ## Why GPS is the one that matters A photo of your home with GPS attached tells anyone exactly where you live — street address precision. Most social platforms strip metadata on upload, but email attachments, cloud links, Discord, and direct file shares keep it. The habit that always works: clean the copy before you share it anywhere sensitive. If you're checking whether an image was AI-generated, the [AI image checker](https://toolpantry.app/ai-image-checker.html) focuses on exactly those signals. ## What "clean copy" does Re-encoding through the canvas rebuilds the image from pixels only — every metadata segment is dropped: EXIF, GPS, XMP, IPTC, PNG text, and C2PA. That's a feature here, but it's worth knowing: the AI-source label goes too. If you need the evidence that an image is AI-generated, keep the original file. ## Common questions answered by the data Wondering why a photo looks sideways in some apps? That's the Orientation tag — this viewer shows it. Curious what lens took a photo, or when it was actually shot (not when it was copied)? The LensModel and DateTimeOriginal fields tell you. Need to shrink the cleaned file for email or a portal? Run it through the [1 MB compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-1mb.html) afterward. Sharing a group photo next? [Face blur](https://toolpantry.app/face-blur.html) hides faces before it goes out. ## Notes Removing metadata works by re-encoding the image once through the canvas — visually identical at 92% quality, and it strips EXIF, GPS, XMP, and AI tags in one pass. Keep the original if you need it for editing. ## FAQ **What is EXIF metadata in a photo?** EXIF is data your camera or phone writes into the file: camera model, exposure settings, date, and — if location was on — GPS coordinates. Editors and AI tools add their own tags on top, including AI-source labels. **How do I remove metadata from a photo?** Load the photo here and press Download clean copy. The tool re-encodes the image through the canvas, which strips EXIF, GPS, XMP, and AI tags in one pass — the metadata never leaves your browser. **Does removing metadata reduce quality?** The image is recompressed once at high quality (92% JPEG). Visually it's identical, but it is one re-encode — keep the original if you need it for editing later. **Does social media remove EXIF automatically?** Most platforms strip metadata on upload, but not all, and not always — direct file shares, email attachments, and cloud links keep everything. If the photo has GPS in it, clean it before sharing. --- # Freelance Expense Tracker — Log Expenses, Export CSV > Track freelance and project expenses online. Add dates, categories, notes, and amounts, then download a CSV locally. Source: https://toolpantry.app/expense-tracker ## About Log project expenses in your browser, see the running total, and download a CSV when you need to hand the list to a client or accountant. ## Quick answer How do I track expenses without a spreadsheet? Add expense rows with categories; totals update live and you can export everything as CSV. ## How to track freelance expenses 1. **Log each expense as it happens** — date, category, amount, note. 2. **Watch the category totals** — the line you didn’t open is usually the leak. 3. **Export CSV** — hand your accountant data they won’t complain about. ## Why weekly beats yearly - Receipts and card statements decay in memory by the week - Tax deadlines turn expense admin from 20 minutes into two days - Clean categories surface true project profitability while it’s still fixable ## Good to know Everything is stored in your browser — export a CSV backup regularly, especially before clearing site data. Keep categories consistent for at least a full tax year, and let your accountant define the category list if they have one. Related: [invoice generator](https://toolpantry.app/invoice-generator.html) and [timesheet](https://toolpantry.app/timesheet-calculator.html). ## Notes Entries stay in this browser until you clear them. This is a tracking aid, not accounting or tax advice. ## FAQ **Can I open the CSV in a spreadsheet?** Yes. The downloaded CSV opens in Excel, Google Sheets, Numbers, and most bookkeeping software. **Are my expenses uploaded?** No. The entries are stored locally in this browser and are only downloaded when you choose the CSV button. --- # Extract PDF Pages — Select and Download Pages Locally > Extract selected pages from a PDF locally in your browser using page numbers and ranges. Source: https://toolpantry.app/extract-pdf-pages ## About Choose individual pages or ranges from a PDF and download a new document without uploading the source. ## Quick answer How do I extract pages from a PDF? Choose the PDF, enter a page range like 2-5, and download a new PDF containing just those pages — locally in your browser. ## How to extract pages from a PDF 1. **Add your PDF** — processing stays local. 2. **Enter the pages** — single pages or ranges, 1-based. 3. **Download the new PDF** — just the pages you chose, in order. ## When extraction beats splitting - Pulling one invoice out of a 60-page statement pack - Sharing a single chapter or appendix without the whole file - Attaching only the signature page to a form ## Good to know Extracted pages are copied, not re-rendered, so quality and text stay identical. If you need *every* page as separate files, use [Split PDF](https://toolpantry.app/split-pdf.html); to put documents back together, [Merge PDF](https://toolpantry.app/merge-pdf.html). ## Notes Ranges are 1-based and inclusive. For example, 1,3-5 keeps pages 1, 3, 4, and 5 in that order. ## FAQ **Can I repeat a page?** Repeated page numbers are deduplicated so the extracted PDF contains each selected page once. **Are the original pages uploaded?** No. The source file is parsed and the new PDF is created in this browser tab. --- # Blur Faces in a Video — Free, Local, No App > Blur faces in an MP4 or MOV video — draw a box over each face and export a new file with those pixels blurred. Runs locally, no upload, no watermark, no app. Source: https://toolpantry.app/face-blur-video ## About Draw a box over each face and export a new video with those pixels blurred — baked in, not an overlay. No upload, no watermark, no app install. ## Quick answer How do I blur faces in a video for free? Load the MP4 or MOV, pause on a frame where the face is visible, and drag a box over it (or press Detect faces on Chrome). Set the blur strength, then press Blur & export — the box is blurred on every frame and written into a new MP4, entirely on your device. ## How it works, and what "baked in" means The tool decodes each frame with your browser's media pipeline (WebCodecs), draws the frame to a canvas, applies a gaussian blur to the pixels inside your boxes, and re-encodes everything to a new MP4. Because the blur happens *before* encoding, the exported file contains no sharp pixels in that region — it is not a sticker or an overlay that a viewer could remove. The original file on your device is never touched, so keep it somewhere private if it contains the unblurred footage. ## Getting a good result - **Scrub first** — pause on a frame where the face is biggest or most visible, and draw the box there; it will cover the whole clip - **Cover the path** — for someone walking through the frame, one tall box over their route beats several small boxes - **Strength by resolution** — 16–20 px is plenty at 720p; scale up for 1080p/4K. When in doubt, stronger is safer for privacy - **Check one frame** — after export, scrub the result once to confirm nothing peeks out at the edges ## Honest limits Boxes are fixed for the whole clip — this tool doesn't track faces frame by frame, so a fast-moving face may leave the box. Auto-detection runs on Chrome (Shape Detection API) and only on the frame you're looking at; on other browsers, drawing boxes manually works the same. Input is MP4/MOV with H.264 or HEVC video; output is always MP4 (H.264 + AAC). Re-encoding costs a little quality — for a privacy export, that's usually a trade worth making. Blurring a photo instead? Use the [face blur tool](https://toolpantry.app/face-blur.html) for images, and if you just need to shrink a clip, the [video compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-video.html) is the right tool. ## Notes Draw one box per face; the box covers the same spot on every frame. For moving faces, make the box cover the area they move within. Re-encoding a 1-minute clip typically takes 10–40 seconds on a laptop. ## FAQ **How do I blur a face in a video?** Load the MP4 or MOV, scrub to a frame where the face is visible, and draw a box over it — on Chrome you can also press Detect faces to place boxes automatically. Set the blur strength and press Blur and export. The blur is applied to that area for the whole clip, and nothing is uploaded. **Does it track the face as it moves?** No — the boxes you draw are applied to every frame. For a face that moves, draw a box that covers the area it moves within. For talking-head clips where the face stays in place, a snug box works fine. **Is the blur real, or can it be reversed?** The pixels in that region are replaced with a gaussian blur before re-encoding, so the exported file no longer contains the sharp original pixels — the blur is baked in. Keep in mind the source file on your device is untouched and still sharp; only the exported copy is blurred. **Which formats are supported?** Input: MP4, MOV, and M4V (H.264/HEVC video with AAC audio). Output: MP4 with H.264 + AAC. The re-encoding uses WebCodecs, so Chrome, Edge, and Safari 17+ are required — Firefox support is still rolling out. **How strong should the blur be?** At 720p, a 16–20 px blur makes a face unidentifiable while keeping the video looking natural. For 1080p use 20–28 px, and for 4K go higher — the stronger the blur, the safer the privacy. --- # Face Blur — Hide Faces in Photos, Locally > Blur faces in a photo — auto-detect where your browser can, or draw boxes yourself. Download a clean copy. Runs locally, nothing is uploaded. Source: https://toolpantry.app/face-blur ## About Auto-detect faces where your browser supports it, or draw boxes yourself — then download the blurred result. Nothing leaves your device. ## Quick answer How do I blur faces in a photo online? Add the photo, press "Detect faces" (Chrome-based browsers) or drag a box over each face, set the blur strength, and download. The image never leaves your browser. ## How to blur faces in a photo 1. **Add the photo** — it renders locally; nothing is uploaded. 2. **Find the faces** — press Detect faces in Chrome-based browsers, or drag a box over each face manually (boxes snap to your drag, add as many as you need). 3. **Set the strength and download** — 16px is a good default for full-resolution photos; heavier blur for larger images. ## Blur vs pixelate vs cover - **Blur** — natural-looking, good for casual privacy (group photos, social posts) - **Solid cover** — strongest; researchers have "unblurred" faces from weak blur in controlled cases, so for high-stakes anonymity cover the face completely - **Why not both?** For most everyday sharing, a strong blur (20px+) on a high-resolution photo is unrecognizable to people and matching software alike ## Good to know The blur is baked into the downloaded copy — the original file on your device is untouched. Photos shared afterward can still carry EXIF metadata (including GPS); the [EXIF viewer](https://toolpantry.app/exif-viewer.html) shows what's inside and can strip it. Need the file smaller for sharing? Run it through the [1 MB compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-1mb.html) or [JPG to WebP](https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-webp.html) — both also drop metadata. ## Notes Drag on the photo to add a blur box; drag again to add more. On browsers without built-in face detection, manual boxes do the same job — the blur strength slider is the same either way. ## FAQ **How do I blur a face in a photo?** Add the photo, then either press Detect faces (supported in Chrome-based browsers) or drag a box over each face. Adjust the blur strength and download. Everything happens in your browser. **Does auto-detect work in every browser?** Face detection uses your browser's built-in detector — available in Chrome and other Chromium browsers. In Safari and Firefox, draw the boxes manually; the blur itself works everywhere. **Is blurring enough to protect identity?** A strong blur makes a face unrecognizable to people and to most automated matching. For high-stakes anonymity, cover with a solid shape instead of blur — extreme unblurring research targets blur specifically. **Is the photo uploaded?** No. Detection, blurring, and downloading all happen in your browser tab. --- # Fancy Text Generator — Unicode Styles to Copy & Paste > Generate fancy Unicode text for Instagram bios, TikTok captions, Discord names, and gaming profiles. Preview styles and copy locally. Source: https://toolpantry.app/fancy-text-generator ## About Turn ordinary text into copy-and-paste Unicode styles for bios, captions, usernames, and messages. Preview every style locally in this browser tab. ## Quick answer How do I make fancy text for social media? Type your text and copy the Unicode style you like — bold, cursive, bubble, and more, all paste-ready. ## How to generate fancy text 1. **Type your text** — short phrases work best (bios, names, captions). 2. **Pick a style** — 16 Unicode variations from script to full-width. 3. **Copy all or one** — paste into bios, usernames, or captions. ## Where fancy text fits - Social bios and display names that need a personal fingerprint - Cute captions and comment flourishes - Presentation headers where the vibe matters more than the search index ## Good to know These styles are real Unicode characters, not images — so they paste anywhere, but rendering varies by device and font: test on a phone before committing to a bio. Keep them out of anything a search engine, screen reader, or email client needs to read reliably, because the characters break copy-paste and accessibility. Related: [hashtag generator](https://toolpantry.app/hashtag-generator.html). ## FAQ **Is this a real font?** No. The generator replaces Latin letters with Unicode look-alike characters, so the result can be copied into apps without installing a font file. **Where can I use fancy text?** Try social bios, captions, display names, chat messages, and game profiles. Each platform decides which Unicode characters it renders and accepts. **Why do some characters look like boxes?** A device or app may not have a font that contains every decorative code point. If a style looks broken, choose a simpler bold, fullwidth, or plain-text version. --- # Favicon Generator — Create PNG Icons Locally > Generate favicon PNG sizes from one image locally in your browser. Create 16px, 32px, 48px, Apple touch, and app icon files without uploading. Source: https://toolpantry.app/favicon-generator ## About Turn one square logo or image into useful PNG icon sizes for browser tabs, Apple touch icons, and app manifests. Processing stays on your device. ## Quick answer How do I create a favicon for my website? Upload a square logo or image and download the generated PNG sizes (16×16 up to 512×512). Add the files to your site and reference them with a link tag — no account or email required. ## How to create a favicon for your website 1. **Upload a square logo or image** — at least 512×512 px works best; the tool crops and resizes locally. 2. **Download the PNG set** — 16×16 and 32×32 for browser tabs, 180×180 as the Apple touch icon. 3. **Add them to your site** — place the files in your site root and reference them with link tags; the tool shows the exact HTML. ## When this matters - Launching a new site and replacing the default browser-tab icon - Fixing a favicon that appears blurry or missing in some browsers - Refreshing branding after a logo update ## Good to know Browsers cache favicons aggressively — after updating, hard-refresh (Cmd/Ctrl+Shift+R) or test in a private window before assuming something is broken. Provide at least 16×16 and 32×32 PNG files plus a 180×180 Apple touch icon; that covers tabs, bookmarks, and phone home screens. Check your source image with [Image info](https://toolpantry.app/image-info.html) before generating. Need a single favicon.ico file instead of PNG sizes? [PNG to ICO](https://toolpantry.app/png-to-ico.html) packs 16–256 px into one file. ## Notes Wide images are fitted inside a square canvas with transparent padding. Download the sizes your site actually references instead of shipping one oversized icon everywhere. ## FAQ **Which favicon sizes should I use?** A 32px icon covers common browser tabs, while 180px is useful for Apple touch icons and 192px or 512px are common app-manifest sizes. Keep your HTML links aligned with the files you choose. **Does this create an ICO file?** This version creates transparent PNG files, which work well for modern favicon links and app icons. You can use the 32px PNG in a link rel="icon" tag. --- # File Size Limits 2026 — Official Sources & Local Tools > Check Gmail, Discord, WhatsApp, YouTube, Dropbox and other upload limits against official sources, with plan conditions, dates and local compression tools. Source: https://toolpantry.app/file-size-limits ## About Attachment, message and transfer limits mean different things. These tables link to each service's own guidance and explain the plan, device or quota that the number applies to. ## Quick answer Common limits: personal Gmail lists 25 MB of attachments; Discord's current free allowance is 20 MB per upload; YouTube thumbnail limits differ between mobile and desktop. The source and conditions matter as much as the number. ## How this reference is checked Sources checked on 15 October 2026. These are published limits, not tests of every account. Services can change their rules, run experiments or apply organization policies. A source's MB or GB label is retained as published; the linked page and your upload screen take precedence. [Download the source list and conditions as JSON](https://toolpantry.app/data/file-size-limits.json). ## Email | Service / scope | Published limit | Conditions | Official source / checked | Local tool | |---|---|---|---|---| | Gmail personal | 25 MB total attachments | Above the attachment limit, Gmail replaces the attachment with a Drive link. Do not assume a universal 18 MB file limit. | [Gmail Help](https://support.google.com/mail/answer/6584?hl=en)2026-10-15 | [Compress PDF](https://toolpantry.app/compress-pdf.html) | | Google Workspace Gmail | Set by the administrator | Work and school limits depend on the organization. Check the sender and recipient policies. | [Gmail Help](https://support.google.com/mail/answer/6584?hl=en)2026-10-15 | [Compress PDF](https://toolpantry.app/compress-pdf.html) | | Exchange Online | 35 MB send / 36 MB receive by default | These are message limits, not guaranteed raw-file allowances. Administrators and clients can impose different limits. | [Microsoft Learn](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/office365/servicedescriptions/exchange-online-service-description/exchange-online-limits)2026-10-15 | [Compress video](https://toolpantry.app/compress-video.html) | | iCloud Mail | 20 MB message; Mail Drop up to 5 GB | The message includes attachments. Mail Drop uses a download link and separate service limits. | [Apple Support](https://support.apple.com/en-au/102198)2026-10-15 | [Compress images](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-500kb.html) | | Proton Mail | 25 MB outgoing / 50 MB incoming attachments | Encoding can enlarge attachments. The recipient service may enforce a lower limit. | [Proton Support](https://proton.me/support/attaching-multiple-documents-to-a-message)2026-10-15 | [Compress PDF](https://toolpantry.app/compress-pdf.html) | ## Chat and messaging | Service / scope | Published limit | Conditions | Official source / checked | Local tool | |---|---|---|---|---| | Discord without Nitro | 20 MB per upload | Discord says the check is before compression and notes that some accounts may be in upload-limit experiments. Check your own upload prompt. | [Discord Support](https://support.discord.com/hc/en-us/articles/25444343291031-File-Attachments-FAQ)2026-10-15 | [Compress video](https://toolpantry.app/compress-video.html) | | WhatsApp file sharing | Up to 2 GB per file | This is file sharing. Video and status workflows have separate behavior; pre-compression does not guarantee that WhatsApp will avoid re-encoding. | [WhatsApp Blog](https://blog.whatsapp.com/reactions-2gb-file-sharing-512-groups)2026-10-15 | [Compress video](https://toolpantry.app/compress-video.html) | | Telegram | 2 GB standard / 4 GB Premium per file | The larger upload allowance is a Premium feature. Receiving a large file does not require Premium. | [Telegram FAQ](https://telegram.org/faq_premium/?setln=en)2026-10-15 | [Compress video](https://toolpantry.app/compress-video.html) | ## Social uploads | Service / scope | Published limit | Conditions | Official source / checked | Local tool | |---|---|---|---|---| | YouTube custom thumbnails | Mobile video thumbnail: under 2 MB; desktop: under 50 MB | YouTube distinguishes device and thumbnail type. Mobile podcast thumbnails have a separate 10 MB allowance; follow the linked current guidance. | [YouTube Help](https://support.google.com/youtube/answer/72431?hl=en)2026-10-15 | [Compress image to 2 MB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-2mb.html) | ## Cloud and transfers | Service / scope | Published limit | Conditions | Official source / checked | Local tool | |---|---|---|---|---| | Google Drive (other file types) | Up to 5 TB | Google Docs, Sheets and Slides conversions have separate limits. Available account storage also matters. | [Google Drive Help](https://support.google.com/drive/answer/37603?hl=en)2026-10-15 | No compression needed in most cases | | Dropbox | 2 TB per file | Dropbox recommends its desktop app or API for files above 375 GB because browser uploads may time out. Storage quota is a separate constraint. | [Dropbox Help](https://help.dropbox.com/sync/upload-limitations)2026-10-15 | [Compress video](https://toolpantry.app/compress-video.html) | | WeTransfer free account | Up to 10 transfers or 3 GB total per month | This is a monthly allowance, not a 2 GB per-transfer promise. The remaining quota and current plan determine what you can send. | [WeTransfer Support](https://help.wetransfer.com/hc/en-us/articles/202702233-How-do-I-send-a-transfer)2026-10-15 | [Compress video](https://toolpantry.app/compress-video.html) | ## Forms, applications and other social uploads There is no universal passport, exam, university or marketplace file limit. Use the current form's instructions for the allowed format, minimum and maximum bytes, and exact pixels. A small enough file can still be rejected for the wrong dimensions or format. Other social platforms can also vary by app, posting surface and account type; check their current upload prompt. If the form explicitly asks for a ceiling, choose [50 KB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-50kb.html), [100 KB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb.html) or [200 KB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-200kb.html) and enter any required pixels. These tools use KB = 1,000 bytes, show the actual output bytes and do not certify that a photo meets an application's other rules. ## Email encoding: when it matters [MIME base64 encoding](https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2045#section-6.8) uses roughly four encoded bytes for every three input bytes, before headers and line breaks. This matters for whole-message limits. It does not mean every provider's advertised attachment limit must be divided by 1.35: a webmail attachment allowance and an SMTP message limit are different constraints. ## Check the result before sending Compare actual bytes, pixels and format with the receiving service's requirements. For measured examples with downloadable source files and outputs, see our [compression benchmarks](https://toolpantry.app/compression-benchmarks.html). The separate [processing notes](https://toolpantry.app/local-processing-benchmarks.html) cover local browser operations. ## FAQ **What is Gmail's attachment size limit?** Gmail documents 25 MB of total attachments for personal accounts. Above that limit it uses a Google Drive link. Work and school account limits are set by the administrator. **What is Discord's free upload limit?** The current Discord attachment FAQ lists 20 MB for non-Nitro accounts and a pre-compression size check. It also notes that upload-limit experiments can apply to selected users. **Why can a file under the stated limit still be rejected?** Limits can apply to the whole message, one attachment, a monthly quota, or a particular app and plan. File format, pixel dimensions, account storage and recipient policies can also cause rejection. **Does 200 KB always mean the same number of bytes?** Some systems use 200,000 bytes and others use 204,800. Our target-size image tools use the more conservative decimal limit and display the actual byte count. Check the specific form instructions. --- # Fill PDF Forms — Free, Local, No Sign-Up > Fill in a PDF form without printing it — type into the detected fields, flatten, and save. Free, no sign-up, and nothing is uploaded. Source: https://toolpantry.app/fill-pdf-forms ## About Load a PDF with form fields, fill them in like a web form, and download the filled copy — no printing, no scanning, no upload. ## Quick answer How do I fill in a PDF form for free? Load the PDF, type into the fields the tool finds (text, checkboxes, dropdowns), and press Save filled PDF . Everything runs locally — no account, no watermark, no "print and scan" dance. ## Fill forms the way they were meant to be filled Most "fillable PDFs" are interactive: they contain real form fields (text boxes, checkboxes, dropdowns) that you can type into. Desktop readers charge for editing them, and printer-and-scan workflows lose quality. This tool reads the fields directly and writes your answers back into the document — the whole round trip happens in your browser. ## Getting a good result - **Field names can be cryptic** — "Text1" and "Signature2" are common; use the page preview above to match a field to its place on the form - **Flatten by default** — flattening makes your values permanent and visible in every viewer; only turn it off if you want someone to be able to edit the fields afterwards - **Then sign if needed** — a filled form is not a signed one: run the result through [Sign PDF](https://toolpantry.app/sign-pdf.html) to place your signature on the dotted line - **Check the saved copy** — open the download once to confirm every field landed where you expect ## What this tool doesn't do It doesn't create new fields, remove form protection, or open password-protected files (remove protection with the owner's password first). XFA forms — a different, Adobe-specific format — aren't supported; the tool will tell you when a file has no standard fields. For flat/scanned documents, the honest route is [placing text and signatures](https://toolpantry.app/sign-pdf.html) on the page. Related: [merge](https://toolpantry.app/merge-pdf.html) several filled forms, [rotate](https://toolpantry.app/pdf-rotate.html) a sideways scan, or [compress](https://toolpantry.app/compress-pdf.html) before emailing. ## Notes Works with standard AcroForm PDFs (the kind government forms, banks, and HR documents usually use). Scanned PDFs have no fields — for those, place a signature or text with the sign tool instead. ## FAQ **How do I fill in a PDF form?** Load the PDF, type into the fields the tool detects (text boxes, checkboxes, dropdowns), and press Save. The filled copy downloads with your values written in — entirely on your device. **Can I fill and sign a PDF in one place?** Fill the form here, then sign it with our Sign PDF tool — the saved file keeps your values, and the signature is placed on top. Both tools run locally. **Why does it say no form fields were found?** The PDF is probably a scan or a flat document without interactive fields. For those, use the Sign PDF tool to place text or a signature directly on the page — or a fill-and-sign service if the form needs true form controls. **What does flattening do?** Flattening bakes your values into the page content so every viewer shows them, even ones that hide form fields. The trade-off: the fields become non-editable. Flattening is on by default; turn it off if you need an editable form. **Is my form uploaded anywhere?** No. The PDF is opened, filled, and saved entirely in your browser. You can verify in the network panel or by working offline. --- # FLUX 3 Bounding Box Generator — Draw Layouts & Copy Prompts > Draw a FLUX 3 Image layout, edit 0–1000 bounding box coordinates, and export a prompt with element JSON. Free, local, no API key. Includes a poster example. Source: https://toolpantry.app/flux-bounding-box-generator ## About Give every element a place. Draw bounding boxes, describe what goes inside, and copy a prompt with the right coordinates for FLUX 3 Image. ## FAQ **What order do FLUX 3 bounding box coordinates use?** Use [top, left, bottom, right], with whole numbers from 0 to 1000. The vertical coordinate comes first. [0, 0, 500, 500] is the top-left quarter at any aspect ratio. **Can I use this with FLUX 3 Image Klein?** The official Klein model card documents the same caption plus element-table format. Use a FLUX interface or workflow that accepts that prompt format. Self-hosted Klein needs a detailed scene caption; follow its prompt-upsample guidance. **Does this tool generate an image or charge API credits?** It creates a layout prompt and JSON in your browser. Image generation happens separately in your chosen FLUX app or workflow, which may charge for generation. **Are my descriptions saved or uploaded?** The layout and descriptions stay in this tab. This tool does not upload them or save them between visits. Download the JSON before leaving if you want to keep a copy. --- # Fraction Calculator — Add, Subtract, Multiply & Divide > Add, subtract, multiply, divide, and compare fractions locally with automatic simplification, mixed numbers, decimals, percentages, and steps. Source: https://toolpantry.app/fraction-calculator ## About Add, subtract, multiply, divide, or compare fractions without losing the exact result. Reduce the answer automatically and show the working in this browser tab. ## Quick answer How do I add or simplify fractions? Enter numerators and denominators; the tool adds, subtracts, multiplies, or divides and shows the simplified result. ## How to calculate with fractions 1. **Enter the fractions** — proper, improper, or mixed numbers. 2. **Pick the operation** — add, subtract, multiply, divide, or compare. 3. **Read the exact reduced answer** — plus reduced form, decimal, and the working steps. ## When exact fractions beat decimals - Homework where the method must be visible, not just the number - Scaling recipes and measurements where 1/3 actually is a third - Checking a contractor's "two and five-eighths" against your tape measure ## Good to know Decimals round; fractions do not — 1/3 is not 0.33, and the difference compounds when a recipe or quote is scaled. Mixed numbers convert exactly here, and division by zero is blocked with a clear message instead of infinity. Related: [percentage calculator](https://toolpantry.app/percentage-calculator.html) and [unit converter](https://toolpantry.app/unit-converter.html). ## Notes Leave the whole-number box empty for a simple fraction. A negative whole number keeps the sign on the complete mixed number. Denominators cannot be zero. ## FAQ **Does the calculator reduce every answer?** Yes. The exact result is normalized so the denominator is positive and common factors are removed. The mixed, decimal, and percentage views are derived from that exact fraction. **Can I enter mixed numbers?** Yes. Enter the whole number in the small Whole box and the fractional part in Numerator and Denominator. Leave Whole empty for a simple fraction. **What happens if I divide by zero?** The page stops with a clear error instead of showing an invalid number. All fraction values are processed locally in this browser tab. --- # Extract a Frame From a Video — PNG or JPG > Extract any frame from an MP4 or MOV as a full-resolution PNG or JPG — scrub to the moment, grab the frame. Free, local, nothing uploaded. Source: https://toolpantry.app/frame-extractor ## About Scrub to any moment in an MP4 or MOV and grab that frame at full resolution — PNG or JPG, straight to your device, nothing uploaded. ## Quick answer How do I save a still frame from a video? Load the MP4 or MOV, pause and scrub to the moment, then press Grab PNG (or JPG). You get the frame at the video's native resolution — a 1080p video gives a 1920×1080 image — saved instantly and entirely on your device. ## Why grab a frame at all? Video is awkward when you need a single moment: a thumbnail for the upload, a poster image for a website, a screenshot of a scene for a review or a report, or a still to print. Screenshotting the player usually gives you the player UI, the wrong resolution, or a compressed mess — grabbing the frame directly gives you a clean, full-resolution image. ## Getting the shot you want - **Pause, then scrub** — the frame you see is the frame you get; the slider moves in tenths of a second - **PNG vs JPG** — PNG is lossless (best for text and graphics); JPG at quality 92% is much smaller (best for photos and thumbnails) - **Orientation is handled** — rotated phone videos come out upright, at display resolution - **Mild motion blur is normal** — you're capturing a video frame, not taking a photo; pick a moment where the subject is still ## What people use it for YouTube and blog thumbnails from your own footage. Poster frames for video players. Stills for documentation and tutorials. Reference shots for drawing or 3D work. And the reverse of the [video to GIF tool](https://toolpantry.app/video-to-gif.html): one frame instead of a hundred. If the frame has faces you'd rather not publish, clean it up with the [photo face blur](https://toolpantry.app/face-blur.html) — and if you need to shrink the video first, the [video compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-video.html) is right there. ## Notes PNG keeps every pixel losslessly; JPG (quality 92%) is smaller for sharing. The last grabbed frame previews below the stats. ## FAQ **How do I extract a frame from a video?** Load the MP4 or MOV, scrub to the moment you want, and press Grab PNG or Grab JPG. The frame is captured at the video's full resolution and saved to your device. Nothing is uploaded. **Is the extracted frame full quality?** Yes — the frame is captured at the video's native resolution with its display orientation applied, not a screenshot of the preview. A 1920×1080 video gives you a 1920×1080 image. **How do I get an exact frame?** Pause and scrub with the slider to land on the moment, then grab. The captured frame is the one shown at the current position — close enough for thumbnails, posters, and reference shots. For frame-exact video analysis you would use a frame-by-frame player. **What can I use an extracted frame for?** YouTube thumbnails, video poster images, scene screenshots for documents and reviews, printing a still, or making an image from your own footage. If the frame contains people you want to protect, run it through the photo face blur tool afterwards. **Which formats are supported?** Input: MP4, MOV, and M4V (H.264 or HEVC). Output: PNG (lossless, larger) or JPG (smaller, quality 92%). Rotated phone videos come out in the correct orientation. --- # Free Shipping Threshold Calculator — Protect Margin > Estimate a free-shipping order threshold that covers shipping and ads while preserving a target ecommerce margin. Source: https://toolpantry.app/free-shipping-threshold-calculator ## About Estimate the minimum order value where free shipping can absorb delivery and advertising costs while preserving your target contribution margin. ## Quick answer How do I set a free shipping threshold? Enter your average order value and shipping cost; the tool suggests a break-even threshold. ## How to set a free-shipping threshold 1. **Enter your margin and average shipping cost** — per order. 2. **Add your current average order value** — the baseline you are trying to lift. 3. **Read the threshold** — the order size where free shipping stops eating margin. ## What free shipping actually does - Raises average order value — customers add items to clear the bar - Costs money on every order below the true break-even you calculated - Rewards you with better conversion when the threshold is believable, not absurd ## Good to know Set the threshold just above your current AOV (10–20%) so clearing it feels achievable; a bar nobody reaches is just a hidden shipping fee. Test two thresholds and compare both conversion and margin — not just order count. Related: [shipping cost estimator](https://toolpantry.app/shipping-cost-estimator.html) and [profit margin](https://toolpantry.app/ecommerce-profit-margin-calculator.html). ## Notes This is a contribution-margin estimate. Test it against average order value, product mix, returns, and customer behavior before changing a store policy. ## FAQ **What does the threshold mean?** Orders above the result should have enough contribution margin to absorb the shipping and ad cost assumptions while meeting the target margin. **Why is the threshold sometimes unreachable?** If fees and the target margin consume all of the product margin, no order value can satisfy the assumptions. --- # GIF to MP4 — Smaller, Smoother, Local > Convert an animated GIF to MP4 in your browser — smaller files, smooth playback on every platform. One loop, no upload, no watermark. Source: https://toolpantry.app/gif-to-mp4 ## About Turn an animated GIF into an MP4 — several times smaller, full color, smooth everywhere. One pass, locally, no watermark. ## Quick answer How do I convert a GIF to MP4 for free? Load the GIF and press Convert to MP4 . The frames are decoded and re-encoded in your browser — the result is usually several times smaller than the GIF and plays natively on every platform. Nothing is uploaded. ## Why MP4 beats GIF GIF was designed in 1987 for simple images and it shows: 256 colors per frame, no partial transparency worth the name, and a compression scheme that bloats with every frame. Modern MP4 (H.264) stores the same animation at full color with inter-frame compression — the result is typically 3–10× smaller for identical playback. That's why chat apps and social platforms increasingly treat GIFs as MP4s behind the scenes. ## Getting a good conversion - **Original size and timing** — frames convert at the GIF's own dimensions and per-frame durations, so the motion looks exactly like the source - **Full color** — banded GIF gradients come out smooth, because MP4 isn't limited to a 256-color palette - **One loop encoded** — the MP4 holds one pass; set your player (or a video tag's loop attribute) to repeat it - **Check the size win** — the stats show both file sizes so you can see the reduction before deleting the GIF ## Where this fits Converting a meme GIF to post natively on Instagram or X. Shrinking screen-recording GIFs before embedding them in a README. Making a demo animation that plays smoothly on a landing page. The reverse direction lives in [video to GIF](https://toolpantry.app/video-to-gif.html) — and if you're building clips from scratch, the [trimmer](https://toolpantry.app/video-trimmer.html) and [compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-video.html) handle the rest. Everything runs on your device; nothing is uploaded. ## Notes One pass of the animation is encoded at the GIF's original size and timing. Expect the MP4 to be several times smaller than the GIF for the same animation. ## FAQ **How do I convert a GIF to MP4 for free?** Load the animated GIF and press Convert. The frames are decoded and re-encoded into an MP4 locally in your browser — usually much smaller than the GIF, with no upload and no watermark. **Why convert GIF to MP4?** GIF is an old format with a limited 256-color palette and inefficient compression. The same animation as MP4 is typically several times smaller, plays smoothly at full color depth, and works natively on every social platform and video player. **Does the MP4 loop like the GIF?** The MP4 contains one pass of the animation. Most video players and platforms loop MP4s when the player is set to loop; for web embedding, use the loop attribute on a video tag. The file itself does not store a loop flag. **Will the colors change?** No — the opposite. GIF is limited to 256 colors per frame; MP4 encodes in full color, so gradients and photos look smoother. The frames are converted at their original size and timing. **Which browsers can convert GIFs here?** Chrome, Edge, and Safari 17+ — the conversion uses WebCodecs (ImageDecoder + VideoEncoder), the browser's built-in media pipeline. Firefox support is still rolling out; the tool checks and tells you. --- # GPA Calculator — Weighted, Unweighted & Cumulative > Calculate semester, weighted, unweighted, and cumulative GPA from course grades and credits locally in your browser. Source: https://toolpantry.app/gpa-calculator ## About Enter course grades and credits to calculate semester, weighted, unweighted, and optional cumulative GPA. Change the grading scale or course weighting to match your school. ## Quick answer How do I calculate my GPA? Add each course with its grade and credits; the tool weights them into a 4.0-scale GPA and shows the math. ## How to calculate GPA 1. **Add your courses** — name, credits, and grade for each. 2. **Choose the scale** — plus/minus or whole-letter, and Honors/AP weighting if relevant. 3. **Read both numbers** — weighted and unweighted GPA, plus a cumulative estimate when you add prior totals. ## When you actually need this - Mid-semester reality checks before finals - Scholarship and transfer applications that ask for exact GPA - Comparing “should I retake it?” scenarios ## Good to know Weighted and unweighted GPA measure different things: unweighted compares you on a common 4.0 field, weighted reflects course difficulty — schools differ in which they emphasize. The A- = 3.7 convention is typical in US four-point scales, but your registrar’s rules are the authoritative ones; verify before submitting anything official. Related: [percentage calculator](https://toolpantry.app/percentage-calculator.html). ## Notes A GPA is only as comparable as the grading policy behind it. This page uses the scale and bonuses you select; verify official calculations with your school or transcript. ## FAQ **What is the GPA formula?** For each graded course, multiply its grade points by its credits to get quality points. Add the quality points and divide by the total graded credits. Pass/no-credit rows are excluded from the GPA average. **What is the difference between weighted and unweighted GPA?** Unweighted GPA uses the base grade points. Weighted GPA adds the course bonus you choose for Honors or AP/IB classes. Schools set their own bonus rules, so edit the values to match your policy. **Is this an official college GPA?** No. It is a private browser estimate. Institutions may recalculate transfer work, repeated courses, plus/minus grades, pass/fail classes, and AP or Honors weighting differently. --- # SHA Hash Generator — Create SHA-256 Hashes Locally > Generate SHA-256, SHA-384, and SHA-512 hashes from text locally in your browser. Source: https://toolpantry.app/hash-generator ## About Create a SHA-256, SHA-384, or SHA-512 digest from text using the browser's Web Crypto API. ## Quick answer How do I generate a hash? Type or paste text and pick MD5, SHA-1, or SHA-256; the hash computes locally in your browser. ## How to generate a hash (SHA-256) 1. **Paste text or drop a file** — hashing is local. 2. **Pick the algorithm** — SHA-256 for integrity; MD5/SHA-1 for legacy comparisons. 3. **Copy the digest** — lowercase hex, ready to compare against a published checksum. ## Where hashes earn their keep - Verifying a download against the vendor’s published checksum - Producing checksums for your own release files - Checking whether two files are byte-identical ## Good to know SHA-256 is the modern standard for integrity checks. MD5 and SHA-1 are cryptographically broken for security purposes but still fine for quick duplicate detection. A hash proves the files match — it says nothing about whether the file is safe to run. Related: [password generator](https://toolpantry.app/password-generator.html) for secrets (where unpredictability, not comparison, is the point). ## Notes Hashing is one-way: a digest can help compare data, but it does not encrypt the original text. ## FAQ **Which algorithm should I use?** SHA-256 is a common general-purpose choice. SHA-384 and SHA-512 produce longer digests when your system requires them. **Does this support MD5?** This page uses the browser's native Web Crypto algorithms and does not include MD5. --- # Hashtag Generator — YouTube, TikTok and Instagram Tags > Create a clean starter set of YouTube, TikTok, or Instagram hashtags from a topic or caption in your browser. Source: https://toolpantry.app/hashtag-generator ## About Paste a topic, title, or caption to build a clean starter set of hashtags and comma-separated tags for YouTube, TikTok, or Instagram. ## Quick answer How do I generate hashtags for a post? Enter your topic and the tool suggests starter hashtags based on your input — not live trend data. ## How to generate starter hashtags 1. **Enter your topic or keyword** — one word or a short phrase. 2. **Review the variants** — broad, niche, and compound tags from your own input. 3. **Pick 10–15** — paste into the app; copy the set when you are happy. ## Where this fits in a publishing flow - Instagram, TikTok, and YouTube posts that need tag research fast - Refreshing an old post’s tags around a new topic wording - A starting point before checking what similar creators actually use ## Good to know This generator is transparent: variants are built from your input — no fake “trend scores.” Mix broad tags (discoverable but crowded) with specific community ones (smaller but engaged); Instagram allows up to 30 tags, but quality beats volume on every platform. Related: [YouTube tag generator](https://toolpantry.app/youtube-tag-generator.html). ## Notes This is a deterministic starter generator, not a live trend or ranking tool. Check the platform's current policies and search suggestions before publishing. ## FAQ **Can this predict viral hashtags?** No. It turns your own topic into relevant starter tags and adds platform basics; it does not claim trend or reach data. **Does it send my caption anywhere?** No. Tag generation runs locally in your browser. --- # HEIC to JPG Converter — Convert iPhone Photos Locally > Convert HEIC photos from iPhone to JPG locally in your browser. Pick the quality and download — no upload, no account, decoder runs on your device. Source: https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-jpg ## About Make a JPG copy of a HEIC photo for apps and upload forms that do not accept HEIC. Preview and convert locally in your browser; the photo is not uploaded. ## Quick answer How do I convert HEIC to JPG? Add your .heic or .heif file, pick the JPG quality, and download. The HEIC decoder loads once into your browser and runs on your device — the photo itself is never uploaded to a server. ## How to convert HEIC to JPG 1. **Add your HEIC or HEIF file** — drag it in or browse; the decoder loads once, then works offline. 2. **Set the JPG quality** — 85% suits most photos; lower it if a portal caps the file size. 3. **Download the JPG** — preview first, then save. Your original HEIC stays untouched. ## Why HEIC files cause trouble - Windows photo apps and older editors often cannot open HEIC — the HEVC codec inside needs licensing many apps skip - Upload portals and print shops frequently reject HEIC outright - Sharing to non-Apple devices is a compatibility gamble ## Good to know HEIC is widely used by iPhones. A JPEG copy can be larger or smaller: quality, dimensions, image content and the encoder affect the result. Keep the original HEIC when its features or metadata matter. If you still need a smaller file for a strict upload form, run the result through the [target-size compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb.html). Related: [HEIC to PNG](https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-png.html) when you need lossless output for editing, [HEIC to WebP](https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-webp.html) for the lightest web format, or bundle several photos into one document with [HEIC to PDF](https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-pdf.html). On Android? See [HEIC missing from the gallery](https://toolpantry.app/blog/heic-files-on-android) to find the saved file and downloaded JPG. Using a Mac? The [HEIC to JPG on Mac guide](https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-convert-heic-to-jpg-on-mac) covers Finder conversion and Preview batch export, with a downloadable sample and checked settings. Sharing to a Windows PC? The full walkthrough (and why you can skip the Microsoft Store codec) is in [HEIC to JPG on Windows](https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-convert-heic-to-jpg-on-windows.html). ## A downloadable HEIC conversion example On 15 October 2026, our public synthetic sample went from **289,338 to 204,630 bytes**; output: 960 × 720px. JPEG quality: 85%. This HEIC was generated from our synthetic chart, not captured on an iPhone. [Download the test input](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/synthetic-detail.heic) · [Inspect the measured output](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/heic-to-jpg-85.jpg) · [Full method and results](https://toolpantry.app/compression-benchmarks.html) One controlled example, not a typical compression ratio or a guarantee for your file. ## Next: make the JPG fit your upload Conversion makes the format compatible; it does not promise a particular file size. If your destination requires a byte ceiling and exact pixels, continue to the [50 KB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-50kb.html), [100 KB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb.html) or [200 KB compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-200kb.html). Check the [destination rules](https://toolpantry.app/file-size-limits.html) before choosing. ## Notes The decoder (~1.3 MB) downloads once per visit and everything after that happens locally. Burst photos and Live Photos contain multiple images — this tool converts the primary one. ## FAQ **Is my photo uploaded during conversion?** No. The HEIC decoder is downloaded to your browser once and runs locally — the photo itself never leaves your device. You can verify in the browser's Network tab. **Why won't my computer open HEIC files?** HEIC uses the HEVC codec, which many Windows apps and older editors lack licenses or support for. Converting to JPG makes the photo open anywhere. **Does it handle burst photos and Live Photos?** Those files contain several images; this tool converts the primary one. Open the others from your phone if you need them separately. --- # HEIC to PDF — Turn iPhone Photos into One PDF > Combine HEIC photos from iPhone into one PDF locally in your browser. Add several files, get a single document — no upload, no account. Source: https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-pdf ## About Turn iPhone HEIC photos into a single PDF — one photo per page, decoded locally in your browser, nothing uploaded. ## Quick answer How do I convert HEIC to PDF for free? Add one or more HEIC photos, press Convert, and download a single PDF with one photo per page. The HEIC decoder runs in your browser — the photos never leave your device. ## How to convert HEIC photos to PDF 1. **Add one or more HEIC files** — drag them in or browse; the decoder loads once, then works offline. 2. **Press Convert** — each photo is decoded and placed on its own A4 page. 3. **Download the PDF** — a single document holding every photo, created locally in your browser. ## When this is the right tool - Upload portals that accept PDF but reject iPhone photos - Sending photo evidence — insurance claims, rentals, applications — as one tidy file - Archiving a shoot or a set of receipts as a single document ## Good to know Photos are re-encoded as JPEG inside the PDF, so a converted file can be larger than the original HEICs — that is normal and keeps quality high. If the result exceeds an upload limit, run it through [Compress PDF](https://toolpantry.app/compress-pdf.html). Need individual images instead? Use [HEIC to JPG](https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-jpg.html) or [HEIC to PNG](https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-png.html). For other image types, [JPG to PDF](https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-pdf.html) handles JPG and PNG with page reordering, and [Merge PDF](https://toolpantry.app/merge-pdf.html) can join this PDF with existing documents. ## Notes Each photo is placed on a centered A4 page with its aspect ratio preserved. The decoder (~1.3 MB) downloads once per visit; conversion after that happens locally. Burst photos contain several images — this tool converts the primary one per file. ## FAQ **Can I add several HEIC photos?** Yes. Select multiple HEIC files and they become one PDF — one photo per A4 page, in the order you added them. **Is anything uploaded?** No. The HEIC decoder loads into your browser and every photo is converted on your device. Nothing is sent to a server. **Can I reorder the pages?** This version keeps your selection order. To rearrange pages, convert to JPG first and arrange them with the JPG to PDF tool. --- # HEIC to PNG Converter — Lossless HEIC Conversion Locally > Convert HEIC photos to PNG locally in your browser. Lossless output with transparency preserved — no upload, no account. Source: https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-png ## About Turn iPhone HEIC photos into lossless PNG for editing pipelines and tools that refuse HEIC — decoded locally in your browser. ## Quick answer How do I convert HEIC to PNG? Add your .heic or .heif file and download the PNG. The conversion is lossless, transparency is preserved, and the decoder runs entirely in your browser — nothing is uploaded. ## How to convert HEIC to PNG 1. **Add your HEIC or HEIF file** — the decoder loads once per visit and runs offline afterwards. 2. **Convert** — pixels are exported losslessly with transparency preserved. 3. **Download the PNG** — ready for editors and pipelines that expect PNG. ## When PNG beats JPG for HEIC output - Editing workflows that need a lossless starting point - Design tools and print shops that insist on PNG - Keeping alpha transparency through the conversion ## Good to know Expect a big file — lossless storage is the point, not a bug. And remember: converting does not recover detail the HEIC already discarded; PNG just stops further losses. For a smaller, universally-supported file instead, use [HEIC to JPG](https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-jpg.html), then compress with the [target-size compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb.html) if a portal has limits. ## Notes PNG is lossless, so the output will be several times larger than the HEIC. Transparency is preserved; burst photos convert their primary image. ## FAQ **Why convert HEIC to PNG instead of JPG?** PNG is lossless and keeps transparency — better as an editing starting point or when a tool demands PNG. The trade-off is a much larger file. **Is the photo uploaded?** No. The decoder runs in your browser and the photo never leaves your device. --- # HEIC to WebP Converter — Smaller iPhone Photos, Locally > Convert HEIC photos from iPhone to WebP locally in your browser — usually much smaller than JPG at the same look. No upload; the decoder runs on your device. Source: https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-webp ## About Turn iPhone HEIC photos into WebP — typically a quarter smaller than JPG at the same look — decoded locally in your browser, nothing uploaded. ## Quick answer How do I convert HEIC to WebP? Add your .heic or .heif file, set the quality (85% suits most photos), and download the WebP. The decoder runs on your device — the photo is never uploaded. ## How to convert HEIC to WebP 1. **Add your HEIC or HEIF file** — drag it in or browse; the decoder loads once, then works offline. 2. **Set the WebP quality** — 85% suits most photos and lands far smaller than the JPG equivalent. 3. **Download the WebP** — preview first, then save. Your original HEIC stays untouched. ## Why WebP for iPhone photos - **Size** — WebP typically runs 25–35% smaller than JPG at the same visual quality; for sites and modern apps that's free savings on every image - **Compatibility** — every current browser displays WebP, and Windows 11, macOS, and major social platforms accept it - **When to pick JPG instead** — old desktop software, some print shops, and a few upload portals still expect JPG; [HEIC to JPG](https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-jpg.html) covers those ## Good to know HEIC already compresses well, so converting isn't about shrinking your library — it's about *compatibility* (many apps can't open HEIC at all) with WebP keeping the smallest footprint while doing it. Need lossless output for editing? [HEIC to PNG](https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-png.html). Want the smallest file a strict form will accept? Run the result through the [target-size compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb.html). Building a site? [JPG to WebP](https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-webp.html) handles the rest of your images the same way. ## Notes The decoder (~1.3 MB) downloads once per visit and everything after that happens locally. Burst photos and Live Photos contain multiple images — this tool converts the primary one. ## FAQ **Why convert HEIC to WebP instead of JPG?** WebP is typically 25–35% smaller than JPG at the same visual quality, and every modern browser displays it. For websites and modern apps, WebP is the lighter choice; keep JPG for older software and print shops. **Is my photo uploaded during conversion?** No. The HEIC decoder is downloaded to your browser once and runs locally — the photo itself never leaves your device. **Which apps can open WebP?** All current browsers (Chrome, Safari, Edge, Firefox), Windows 11 photo tools, macOS Preview, and most design and social tools. Very old software may not — convert to JPG in that case. --- # Freelance Hourly Rate Calculator — Find Your Minimum Rate > Calculate a sustainable freelance hourly rate from your income goal, business costs, work weeks, and billable hours. Source: https://toolpantry.app/hourly-rate-calculator ## About Estimate the minimum hourly rate your freelance business needs to cover your income goal, operating costs, and non-billable time. ## Quick answer How do I calculate my freelance hourly rate? Enter your income goal, working weeks, and billable hours; the tool returns the hourly rate you need to charge. ## How to calculate your freelance hourly rate 1. **Enter income goal and real costs** — taxes, insurance, software, equipment, time off. 2. **Set realistic billable hours** — not 40 a week; usually half that once admin is counted. 3. **Read the minimum rate** — this is your floor, not your price list. ## Why the round-number rate is usually wrong - “$50 an hour” ignores that only ~50–60% of your work hours bill - Self-employment taxes, vacation, and slow months are real costs - A floor rate keeps every future quote from underpricing ## Good to know Raise rates on new clients first — existing ones can move at the next project, with a month’s notice. If the floor rate feels too high for your market, the fix is usually packaging (fixed-price projects) rather than discounting hours. Related: [project pricing](https://toolpantry.app/project-pricing-calculator.html) and [retainer pricing](https://toolpantry.app/retainer-pricing-calculator.html). ## Notes This is a planning estimate. It does not calculate income tax, sales tax, or local employment rules. ## FAQ **Why include billable time?** Freelancers spend part of the week on sales, admin, learning, and unpaid messages. Only billable hours should carry the income goal. **What should I do with the result?** Use the suggested rate as a starting point for quotes, retainers, and project pricing. Adjust it for scope and client value. --- # HTML Formatter — Format HTML, CSS & JavaScript > Format HTML, CSS, or JavaScript locally in your browser with readable indentation, optional comments, copy, and download. Source: https://toolpantry.app/html-formatter ## About Pretty-print HTML, CSS, or JavaScript locally with consistent indentation. Keep or remove comments, copy the result, or download a clean text file. ## Quick answer How do I format HTML online? Paste messy HTML, CSS, or JavaScript and get consistently indented output, processed locally. ## How to format HTML, CSS, or JavaScript 1. **Paste your code** — pick the language and indentation width. 2. **Format** — comments and structure are preserved. 3. **Copy or download** — readable markup for review and editing. ## When you inherit unreadable code - Minified or single-line HTML from an export or CMS - Email templates that arrived as one wall of markup - Before editing, so diffs make sense afterwards ## Good to know Formatting changes whitespace only. For HTML that is nearly always safe — with one edge case: whitespace between inline elements can add visible gaps, so for pixel-perfect layouts compare the rendering before and after. Related: [minify](https://toolpantry.app/minify-tool.html) for the return trip. ## Notes HTML and CSS use a structure-aware lightweight formatter. JavaScript uses a best-effort browser-safe formatter; review code in your normal test and lint workflow before committing. No input is uploaded. ## FAQ **Does formatting change the code?** It changes whitespace and indentation for readability. It does not intentionally rename tags, properties, variables, or values. Treat the JavaScript mode as best effort and run your own tests. **Can comments be removed?** Yes. Clear “Keep comments” and format again. This is useful for inspecting a compact copy, while the existing Minify tool is the better fit for production byte reduction. **Does my code leave this page?** No. Formatting runs in the browser tab. There is no upload request, account, or remote formatter dependency. --- # HTML to Markdown Converter — Convert HTML Locally > Convert HTML to readable Markdown locally in your browser. Handles headings, links, lists, code, blockquotes, and basic tables. Source: https://toolpantry.app/html-to-markdown ## About Paste HTML and get clean Markdown for docs, notes, GitHub issues, or an LLM prompt. The conversion happens in your browser. ## Quick answer How do I convert HTML to Markdown? Paste HTML and the tool returns clean Markdown with headings, links, lists, and simple tables preserved. ## How to convert HTML to Markdown 1. **Paste or drop your HTML** — exported documents, CMS pages, docs. 2. **Convert** — headings, links, lists, code, images, and simple tables map to Markdown. 3. **Copy the result** — for a README, a docs site, or an LLM prompt. ## Where HTML-to-Markdown happens daily - Migrating blog posts and help-center articles to Markdown-based tools - Feeding clean text to AI assistants — Markdown is the format they parse best - Cleaning pasted web content before it pollutes your notes ## Good to know Simple tables, images, and nested formatting convert cleanly; heavy layout HTML (newsletters, dashboards) stays best-effort, so spot-check the tricky sections. Keep the source until you have reviewed the output. Everything runs locally, so private drafts never leave the page. Related: [Markdown preview](https://toolpantry.app/markdown-preview.html) for the return trip. ## Notes This is a predictable basic converter, not a full browser-to-Markdown clone. Inline styles, scripts, forms, and visual CSS are intentionally skipped. ## FAQ **What HTML does it support?** Headings, paragraphs, emphasis, links, images, ordered and unordered lists, blockquotes, code blocks, horizontal rules, and simple tables. **Is the HTML sent to a server?** No. DOM parsing and Markdown generation happen locally in the browser. --- # 7 Best iLoveIMG Alternatives in 2026 (Free & Local) > Seven honest iLoveIMG alternatives for 2026: compress, resize, crop, and convert images free — with uploads, limits, and quality compared. Source: https://toolpantry.app/iloveimg-alternatives ## About iLoveIMG brings the iLovePDF formula to images: compress, resize, crop, convert, watermark — all in a friendly web interface. The free tier has ads and limits, and every image is uploaded. If either bothers you, these seven alternatives have you covered, from desktop apps to tools that work entirely in your browser. ## Quick answer Short answer: Tool Pantry does compress, resize, crop, and convert locally with no limits. For macOS batch work, ImageOptim is a great free install; TinyPNG remains the single-image quality benchmark. ## FAQ **Is iLoveIMG free?** It is free with ads and usage limits that vary by tool and change over time. If you hit them often, local tools like Tool Pantry remove both the limits and the upload for everyday image jobs. **Do I have to upload my files to use these alternatives?** No — and that is the main difference in this list. Tool Pantry processes everything locally in your browser: files never leave your device. The other services in these lists are server-based, so their files are uploaded. For sensitive documents, prefer a local tool. **Are these alternatives really free?** Mixed. Tool Pantry is fully free with no limits. Most others are freemium: a free tier with caps (documents per day, file size, tasks per hour) plus a paid plan. The lists above state the realistic free limits for each. --- # 7 Best iLovePDF Alternatives in 2026 (Free & No Limits) > Seven honest iLovePDF alternatives for 2026: free limits compared, privacy differences, and the best pick for merging, splitting, compressing, and signing PDFs. Source: https://toolpantry.app/ilovepdf-alternatives ## About iLovePDF earned its popularity with a broad free tier and a friendly interface. The catches are the ads, the size and usage limits that shift over time, and the fact that every document is uploaded to their servers. These seven alternatives cover the spectrum — from another polished suite to tools that keep files on your device. ## Quick answer Short answer: Tool Pantry covers everyday PDF jobs locally with no limits or uploads. If you need OCR or deep editing, pay for Adobe Acrobat or Sejda; for batch work on Windows, the free PDF24 desktop app is superb. ## FAQ **Is iLovePDF free unlimited?** It is free with limits — the exact caps (file size, tasks per day) vary by tool and change over time. If you regularly hit them, a local tool like Tool Pantry removes the counter entirely for core jobs. **Do I have to upload my files to use these alternatives?** No — and that is the main difference in this list. Tool Pantry processes everything locally in your browser: files never leave your device. The other services in these lists are server-based, so their files are uploaded. For sensitive documents, prefer a local tool. **Are these alternatives really free?** Mixed. Tool Pantry is fully free with no limits. Most others are freemium: a free tier with caps (documents per day, file size, tasks per hour) plus a paid plan. The lists above state the realistic free limits for each. --- # Blur Image Online — Private Blur & Pixelate Tool > Blur or pixelate an image locally in your browser. Private face and screenshot redaction with no upload. Source: https://toolpantry.app/image-blur ## About Blur or pixelate faces, names, and sensitive details before sharing. Everything happens locally in this browser. ## Quick answer How do I blur part of a photo? Upload the image, draw over the areas to hide, and download — blurring happens locally. ## How to blur or pixelate an image 1. **Load the image** — a photo, screenshot, or document scan. 2. **Apply blur or pixelation** — strength adjusts live in the preview. 3. **Download the PNG** — the original file stays untouched on your device. ## The classic redaction jobs - Hiding faces, license plates, and phone numbers before posting - Blurring client names and totals in screenshots for case studies - Softening backgrounds to push attention onto one subject ## Good to know Pixelation with a large block size is harder to reverse than light gaussian blur — for anything genuinely sensitive, dominate the area entirely or crop it out rather than trusting a mild blur. Since processing is local, the image you are redacting never touches a server. Related: [watermark](https://toolpantry.app/image-watermark.html) and [grayscale](https://toolpantry.app/image-grayscale.html). Related: [Crop image](https://toolpantry.app/crop-image.html) to cut an area out entirely, or [Rotate image](https://toolpantry.app/rotate-image.html) to fix the orientation first. ## Notes For reliable redaction, use a strong effect and inspect the downloaded image before sharing. This tool never sends the original file to a server. ## FAQ **Does blur remove the original pixels?** The downloaded copy contains the applied effect. Keep the original private and check the result at full size before publishing. **Can I pixelate a screenshot?** Yes. Pixelate is useful for usernames, faces, order numbers, and other details that should be harder to read. --- # Image Color Picker — Pick HEX, RGB & HSL Colors > Pick exact HEX, RGB, and HSL colors from any image locally in your browser. No upload required. Source: https://toolpantry.app/image-color-picker ## About Click any pixel to get its HEX, RGB, and HSL values for CSS, branding, or a design system. The image stays in this browser. ## Quick answer How do I pick a color from an image? Click any pixel to get its exact HEX, RGB, and HSL values. ## How to pick a color from an image 1. **Drop the image** — screenshot, photo, or design export. 2. **Click any pixel** — HEX, RGB, and HSL values appear instantly. 3. **Copy the format you need** — CSS wants HEX, design tools vary. ## When you need an exact sampled color - Matching a client’s brand color from a photo of their storefront or flyer - Rebuilding a UI color from a screenshot - Sampling a reference image before writing the palette ## Good to know Screens and photos lie a little — camera color, compression, and display profiles all shift values, so treat a pixel sample as “very close,” not “exact.” For serious brand work, confirm against the official brand guide when one exists. Convert or check contrast with the [color converter](https://toolpantry.app/color-converter.html). ## Notes The first color is sampled from the top-left pixel. Click the preview to inspect any other point. ## FAQ **Which color format should I use?** HEX is common in CSS, RGB is useful for code and image APIs, and HSL is convenient when you need to adjust hue, saturation, or lightness. **Why does the color look slightly different?** Displays and color profiles can vary. Use the sampled value as a practical starting point, then compare it in the final design. --- # Image Compressor & Resizer — JPG, PNG & WebP > Free image compressor and resizer for JPG, PNG, and WebP. Compress, resize, and convert photos privately in your browser — nothing is uploaded. Source: https://toolpantry.app/image-compressor ## Content Compress, resize and convert your images. Keep the original. Runs on your device Image compressor Runs locally in your browser Up to 20 MB per image 01 Compress 02 Resize 03 Convert 04 Crop 05 Favicon 06 Clean data ↥ Drop images here JPG, PNG or WebP · Up to 20 MB Choose images Just having a look? Try an illustration sample → Your original files stay unchanged. Already optimized images and lossless PNG output may produce a larger copy; check the result before sharing. Images are decoded and compressed inside your browser. They never leave your device. Choose WebP for smaller web images, JPG for compatibility, or PNG when transparency matters. Process several images together, then download each result or save the full batch at once. No. Compression happens locally in your browser. This page does not send your image files to a server. WebP is a good default for websites. Use JPG for photographs that need broad compatibility, and PNG when you need transparent pixels or lossless output. PNG is lossless and some already-optimized files cannot be reduced further. Try WebP or JPG when transparency is not needed. ## FAQ **Are my images uploaded?** No. Compression happens locally in your browser. This page does not send your image files to a server. **Which format should I choose?** WebP is a good default for websites. Use JPG for photographs that need broad compatibility, and PNG when you need transparent pixels or lossless output. **Why did a PNG become larger?** PNG is lossless and some already-optimized files cannot be reduced further. Try WebP or JPG when transparency is not needed. --- # Image DPI Calculator — Pixels to Inches & CM > Calculate image print size from pixels and DPI. Convert digital image dimensions to inches and centimeters locally. Source: https://toolpantry.app/image-dpi-calculator ## About See how large an image can print at 72, 150, 300, or 600 DPI. Load an image or enter pixel dimensions manually. ## Quick answer How do I calculate DPI for printing? Enter pixel dimensions and print size to get the effective DPI, or solve for any of the three values. ## How to calculate image DPI and print size 1. **Enter the pixel dimensions** — plus a target DPI, or ask what a given print size yields. 2. **Read the physical sizes** — outcomes in inches and centimeters. 3. **Plan the print** — 300 DPI is the standard for photo-quality print. ## When DPI math matters - Photo labs that state a minimum print resolution - Resizing a design for posters versus business cards - Understanding why a 72-DPI file prints fine anyway (pixels, not DPI, decide) ## Good to know Screens ignore the DPI number entirely — only pixels count. For print, the formula is simple: print inches = pixels ÷ DPI, so a 3000-pixel-wide photo is exactly 10 inches at 300 DPI. Bigger prints from smaller files are possible, but softness starts to show; check the actual pixels first with [Image info](https://toolpantry.app/image-info.html). Related: [Crop image](https://toolpantry.app/crop-image.html) to trim the photo to a target size before printing. ## Notes DPI is a print-density calculation: pixels ÷ DPI = physical size. It does not change the image file. ## FAQ **What DPI should I use for photos?** 300 DPI is a common target for high-quality prints. Large posters are often viewed from farther away and can use a lower effective DPI. **Does changing DPI add detail?** No. The calculator reports physical size from existing pixels. More DPI without more pixels only makes the physical print smaller. --- # Black and White Image Converter — Grayscale Photo Tool > Convert a photo to black and white locally in your browser. Adjust contrast and download a PNG without uploading. Source: https://toolpantry.app/image-grayscale ## About Turn a photo into a clean grayscale image, tune the contrast, and download a PNG. Processing happens on your device. ## Quick answer How do I make a photo black and white? Add the photo, adjust the contrast, and download a grayscale PNG. ## How to make an image black and white 1. **Load the photo** — nothing is uploaded. 2. **Adjust the contrast** — the conversion is luminance-weighted, so tones stay natural. 3. **Download** — a grayscale file for print, design, or mood. ## Why photographers and designers go grayscale - Print projects where color adds cost without adding meaning - Design layouts that need calm, text-forward imagery - Consistency across a set of photos with mismatched color casts ## Good to know This uses perceptual (luminance) weighting rather than a naive RGB average, so reds and blues convert the way the eye expects. A grayscale JPEG is also slightly smaller — a classic trick for heavy pages. For duotone or tinted looks, convert here first and tint in your editor. Related: [palette extractor](https://toolpantry.app/image-palette.html) and [blur & pixelate](https://toolpantry.app/image-blur.html). Related: [Crop image](https://toolpantry.app/crop-image.html) and [Rotate image](https://toolpantry.app/rotate-image.html) for the other framing jobs. ## Notes The original file is never overwritten. Use PNG when you want a lossless downloaded copy. ## FAQ **Is this the same as desaturation?** Yes. The tool applies a grayscale filter, then lets you increase or reduce contrast for a stronger black-and-white look. **Can I convert multiple images?** This focused page handles one image at a time. The main toolkit includes batch processing for compression and format conversion. --- # Image Info Viewer — Dimensions, Size & Format > See an image's dimensions, aspect ratio, format, file size, and megapixels without uploading it. Source: https://toolpantry.app/image-info ## About Inspect dimensions, aspect ratio, format, file size, and megapixels locally. Your image never leaves this browser. ## Quick answer How do I check an image's dimensions and file size? Drop the file to see dimensions, file size, format, and aspect ratio instantly. ## How to check image dimensions, size, and ratio 1. **Drop an image** — JPG, PNG, WebP, or GIF. 2. **Read the facts** — pixel dimensions, aspect ratio, file size, and format in one glance. 3. **Copy the values** — paste exact numbers into a form, brief, or CSS. ## Where this saves you - Checking a photo against a portal spec (exact pixels matter) - Explaining why an image looks blurry — it is usually too small for the display size - Getting the aspect ratio before cropping with the [ratio calculator](https://toolpantry.app/aspect-ratio-calculator.html) ## Good to know DPI in the file is metadata — screens ignore it, print needs 72 DPI for web display and roughly 300 DPI for quality print, which is why pixel dimensions are the honest number. An image displayed at 400 px wide stays sharp on retina screens when its real width is ~800 px or more. Before uploading anywhere, check size limits with the [compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb.html). Next steps: [Crop image](https://toolpantry.app/crop-image.html), [Rotate image](https://toolpantry.app/rotate-image.html), or [compress to a target size](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb.html). ## Notes Image Info Viewer reads the file and its natural dimensions in your browser. It does not read or upload EXIF location data. ## FAQ **What is aspect ratio?** Aspect ratio is the relationship between an image's width and height, such as 16:9 or 4:3. It helps you choose the right crop or social media preset. **Does this inspect EXIF metadata?** No. This page only reads the browser-provided file type, size, name, modified date, and image dimensions. --- # Image Color Palette Generator — Extract Hex Colors > Extract a six-color palette from any image in your browser. Copy hex colors privately with no upload. Source: https://toolpantry.app/image-palette ## About Extract six representative colors from a photo, screenshot, or product image. Copy the hex palette without uploading the source file. ## Quick answer How do I get the color palette from an image? Upload a photo and the tool extracts its dominant colors as HEX values. ## How to extract a color palette from an image 1. **Drop any image** — a photo, screenshot, or artwork. 2. **Get six representative colors** — the tool clusters and ranks them. 3. **Copy the hex codes** — straight into your design or CSS. ## Where a palette extraction helps - Matching a UI to a hero photo instead of guessing - Building a moodboard quickly from reference images - Picking accent colors that already exist in the artwork ## Good to know A palette shows what dominates the pixels, not what reads well as text or buttons — check contrast before using any color behind copy: the [color converter](https://toolpantry.app/color-converter.html) shows a contrast hint. Dominant is not always best: sometimes the smallest extracted color is the most interesting accent. ## Notes Color extraction is an approximation based on a small sample of the image. It is useful for mood boards, UI themes, and quick design references. ## FAQ **How are the colors chosen?** The image is reduced to a small canvas, colors are grouped into nearby buckets, and the most common distinct buckets become the palette. **Can I use the palette commercially?** The palette is a generated reference. Check the rights for the original image before using its visual identity in commercial work. --- # Image Splitter — Cut Photos into Grid Tiles Privately > Split an image into a grid of downloadable tiles in your browser. Create Instagram grid slices privately with no upload. Source: https://toolpantry.app/image-splitter ## About Cut a large image into evenly sized tiles for Instagram grids, profile banners, and print layouts. Your file stays local. ## Quick answer How do I split an image into a grid? Choose rows and columns; the tool cuts the image into evenly sized tiles and downloads them as a ZIP. ## How to split an image into grid tiles 1. **Load the image** — square-ish sources work best for grids. 2. **Choose the grid** — 2×2, 3×3, and similar splits. 3. **Download the tiles** — individually or as a set, locally produced. ## What people split images for - Instagram grid posts where one image spreads across nine tiles - Puzzle and scavenger-hunt games built from one picture - Zoomable previews in presentations and classrooms ## Good to know Post the tiles in reverse order — Instagram fills the grid newest-first, so the bottom-right tile goes up first. Keep every tile the same dimensions (the tool guarantees this), and plan the composition so faces and text do not land on the seams. Related: [social media size guide](https://toolpantry.app/social-media-size-guide.html) and [aspect ratio calculator](https://toolpantry.app/aspect-ratio-calculator.html). Related: [Crop image](https://toolpantry.app/crop-image.html) when you need one region instead of a full grid. ## Notes Tiles are numbered left to right, then top to bottom. Download each tile as a PNG and arrange them in the order shown. ## FAQ **What is an image grid useful for?** A grid lets you publish one wide artwork as several connected social posts or create a tiled banner for a profile page. **Will the tiles be the same size?** Yes. The image is divided into equal rows and columns. Any pixels that do not divide evenly are assigned to the final row or column. --- # Image to Base64 Converter — Copy a Data URI > Convert a small image to a Base64 data URI for HTML and CSS without uploading it. Source: https://toolpantry.app/image-to-base64 ## About Turn a small image into a data URI you can paste into HTML, CSS, or a JSON fixture. Everything happens locally. ## Quick answer How do I convert an image to Base64? Upload a small image and copy the data URI for use in HTML or CSS. ## How to convert an image to Base64 1. **Add a small image** — a logo or icon. 2. **Copy the data URI** — the full data:image/png;base64,… string. 3. **Paste it into CSS or HTML** — no extra request, no external file. ## Where Base64 images make sense - Tiny icons embedded in a CSS file - Single-file HTML demos and prototypes - Contexts that cannot reference external files at all ## Good to know Base64 inflates an image by about a third and blocks parallel downloads — it is a tool for small assets under ~10 KB, not for photos. For anything bigger, ship a normal file and compress it instead: see the [compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb.html). ## Notes Base64 makes files larger than their binary form, so it is usually best for small images rather than photographs. ## FAQ **What is a data URI?** A data URI puts the file's MIME type and encoded content directly inside a URL, so an HTML or CSS file can reference it without a separate image request. **Why is there a file size limit?** Large Base64 strings slow down pages and are hard to maintain. This tool is designed for icons, tiny illustrations, and test data. --- # Image to SVG — Convert JPG & PNG to Vector Free > Convert a JPG, PNG, or WebP image into an SVG vector file locally in your browser. Pick the number of colors and detail — no upload, no account. Source: https://toolpantry.app/image-to-svg ## About Trace a JPG, PNG, or WebP into a real SVG — a file made of shapes that scales to any size without blurring. Everything happens on your device. ## Quick answer How do I convert an image to SVG? Choose your image, pick the number of colors and detail level, and press Trace. Preview the actual vector result, then download the .svg — the image is never uploaded. ## How to convert an image to SVG 1. **Choose the image** — PNG with a transparent background works great for logos. 2. **Set colors and detail** — fewer colors give a cleaner, smaller file; more colors follow the original closely. 3. **Trace and download** — the preview is the real SVG; check it, then download and use it anywhere. ## What you can do with the SVG - **Scale without limits** — print a logo at any size with no pixelation. - **Edit in vector software** — open the result in Illustrator, Figma, or Inkscape to adjust colors and shapes. - **Shrink web graphics** — a clean icon as SVG often beats PNG in both size and sharpness. - **CNC and cutting machines** — simple silhouettes trace into cut-ready paths. ## Good to know Tracing is an approximation: the tool redraws what it sees, so fine textures and gradients become many small shapes. Start with 16 colors and medium detail, then raise either if the preview loses something important. The SVG file is plain text, so it can be compressed well — and it never degrades. Related: [convert PNG to JPG](https://toolpantry.app/png-to-jpg.html), [upscale an image](https://toolpantry.app/image-upscaler.html), and [generate favicons](https://toolpantry.app/favicon-generator.html). ## Notes Tracing redraws the image as colored vector paths — great for logos, icons, and flat art. Photos become heavy SVGs (every tone change is a shape), so JPEG or WebP is usually the better choice for them. Large images are scaled down before tracing to keep it fast. ## FAQ **What images trace best to SVG?** Flat graphics trace beautifully: logos, icons, stickers, maps, diagrams, and cartoon-style art. Photos work but produce large, heavy SVGs because every tone change becomes a path — for photos, JPEG or WebP is usually the better format. **Is the result a real vector file?** Yes — the output is a genuine SVG made of colored paths, so it scales to any size without pixelation. Tracing approximates the original: it is a faithful redrawing, not a perfect mathematical recovery of the original artwork. **Is my image uploaded?** No. The tracing engine runs inside your browser and the image never leaves your device. --- # Image Upscaler — Enlarge Photos 2× to 4× Locally (No AI) > Enlarge an image 2×, 3×, or 4× in your browser with a classic high-quality resampler — no AI, no upload, no watermark. Honest about what upscaling can and can't do. Source: https://toolpantry.app/image-upscaler ## About Enlarge an image 2×, 3×, or 4× with a classic high-quality resampler — no AI invention, no upload, no watermark. What you see is what you get. ## Quick answer How do I upscale an image for free? Add the image, pick 2×, 3×, or 4×, and download. This is a classic resampler, not an AI enhancer — screenshots and graphics enlarge cleanly; photos get bigger but won't gain detail that isn't there. ## What this tool does — and what it doesn't This is a **classic resampler**: it computes new pixels from the ones that exist, the same family of math as Photoshop's "Preserve Details" or GIMP's Lanczos. With light sharpening on top, screenshots, logos, icons, diagrams, and old low-resolution graphics come out genuinely usable. What it can't do: **invent detail in photos**. If you upscale a blurry face 4×, you get a bigger blurry face. AI upscalers guess at texture — sometimes impressively, sometimes wrongly. We don't guess. ## When upscaling helps - **Screenshots and UI** — text and edges are crisp; 2× is usually plenty - **Logos and icons** — flat colors enlarge cleanly; keep PNG output - **Old graphics and game art** — a 2× pass before printing often looks better than the printer's own scaling - **Print targets** — 300 DPI at 4×6 in needs 1200×1800 px; check the stats panel against your goal ## When it won't Heavily compressed photos (blocky JPEGs), motion blur, and faces at very low resolution stay soft — resampling can't recover what compression destroyed. If the result looks soft, try **3×** instead of 4× (less stretching per pixel), or skip sharpening, which can amplify JPEG blocks. ## Good to know Output caps at 8192 px on the long edge and a safe pixel budget per device; the stats panel shows the effective scale when a cap applies. If you need the file smaller afterward — for email, Discord, or a portal — run it through the [1 MB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-1mb.html) or [500 KB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-500kb.html) compressor, or convert to [WebP](https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-webp.html) for a big size win. Starting from a phone photo? [Crop first](https://toolpantry.app/crop-image.html), then upscale only what you need. ## Notes The detail previews above show a 160×160 patch at 100% zoom — that's how to judge resampling honestly. Sharpening is skipped on very large outputs to keep memory safe. ## FAQ **Does upscaling improve image quality?** It increases resolution, not detail. Screenshots, logos, and simple graphics enlarge cleanly. For photos, a classic resampler makes pixels bigger but can't invent detail — that takes an AI upscaler, which we deliberately are not. **Is this an AI upscaler?** No. It uses a high-quality classic resampler (like Photoshop's bicubic) plus an optional sharpening pass. Nothing is generated or invented, and nothing is uploaded. **How large can the output be?** Output is capped at 8192 px on the long edge and about 64 megapixels (16 on iPhone/iPad) so the browser can handle it. The tool shows the effective scale when a cap applies. **What sizes can I choose?** 2×, 3×, or 4× the original dimensions. A 1200×800 photo at 3× becomes 3600×2400 — enough for most print and 4K use. --- # Image Watermark Tool — Add Text Privately in Your Browser > Add a simple text watermark to an image in your browser. Choose position and opacity, then download a private PNG. Source: https://toolpantry.app/image-watermark ## About Place a light text watermark on a photo or graphic, choose its position, and download a fresh PNG without uploading the original. ## Quick answer How do I add a watermark to a photo? Type your text, position it, and download a PNG with the watermark applied locally. ## How to add a text watermark 1. **Load a photo** — nothing is uploaded. 2. **Place your text mark** — corner or centered, adjustable size. 3. **Download the PNG** — the marked version, original untouched. ## Where watermarks help - Sharing proofs and drafts with clients before final delivery - Posting previews of paid work on social media - Marking internal screenshots that must not be reused casually ## Good to know A watermark signals ownership and deters lazy reuse — it is not legal protection by itself, and determined people can crop or retouch it away. For proofing, subtle bottom-corner placement keeps the image judgeable; for social, opacity around 30–50% balances visibility and aesthetics. Related: [Crop image](https://toolpantry.app/crop-image.html) or [Rotate image](https://toolpantry.app/rotate-image.html) before you export the final file. ## Notes The watermark is rendered into the downloaded copy. Your original image remains unchanged on your device. ## FAQ **Can I use a logo image as a watermark?** This lightweight page adds text. Use the main image editor of your choice when you need a logo overlay or a repeating tiled mark. **Where is the watermark placed?** Choose a corner or center position. A small margin is added so the text does not touch the image edge. --- # Images to GIF — Make an Animated GIF from Photos > Combine JPG or PNG images into an animated GIF in your browser. Set the frame delay, preview the loop, and download — nothing is uploaded. Source: https://toolpantry.app/images-to-gif ## About Turn a set of images into an animated GIF with the frame timing you choose — encoded entirely in your browser. ## Quick answer How do I make a GIF from images? Add two or more images, set the frame delay, and press Create GIF. The animation is assembled locally and downloads as a single GIF file. ## How to make a GIF from images 1. **Add your images** — the selection order becomes the frame order. 2. **Set the timing** — 200–500 ms per frame feels natural; slower for slideshows. 3. **Create and download** — preview the loop, then save the GIF. ## Good uses for image GIFs - Flipbook-style before/after or progress sequences - Simple slideshows for chats and forums that don't play video - Tiny looping animations for product pages and emails ## Good to know Keep the output at 640 px or below for files that share well — GIF files grow fast with resolution and frame count. Building the frames first with [Photo collage](https://toolpantry.app/photo-collage.html) or [Add text to photo](https://toolpantry.app/add-text-to-photo.html) gives cleaner results than converting busy photos directly. ## Notes GIF is limited to 256 colors per frame, so photos lose some smoothness — for photographic motion, smaller sizes look better. The images never leave your device. ## FAQ **How many images do I need for a GIF?** Two is enough for a flip effect; 5–20 frames make a smooth loop. More frames mean a larger file. **Why is my GIF file so large?** GIF is an old format limited to 256 colors per frame. Lower the size setting to 320–480px and reduce the frame count for smaller files. **Are my images uploaded?** No. The GIF is encoded inside your browser tab; the images never leave your device. --- # Tool Pantry — Free Image, PDF & Browser Tools > Free browser tools for images, PDFs, video, code and everyday tasks. Find a tool, work on your files, and keep the result. No signup. Source: https://toolpantry.app/ ## About A smaller photo. A tidier PDF. A little less friction. Find the right tool and get on with your day. ## Tools and resources (216) ### Images & design - **Compress images** — Make files lighter for websites, email, and stores. (https://toolpantry.app/image-compressor.md) - **Resize images** — Set a max width, height, or a social media preset. (https://toolpantry.app/image-compressor.md) - **Convert formats** — Turn PNGs into WebP, JPGs into PNGs, and more. (https://toolpantry.app/image-compressor.md) - **Crop for social** — Fill exact Open Graph, LinkedIn, Instagram, or YouTube sizes. (https://toolpantry.app/image-compressor.md) - **Make a favicon** — Turn a logo or image into a clean square icon in seconds. (https://toolpantry.app/image-compressor.md) - **Clean image data** — Re-encode a file locally to remove embedded metadata. (https://toolpantry.app/image-compressor.md) - **Image info** — Check dimensions, aspect ratio, format, and file size instantly. (https://toolpantry.app/image-info.md) - **Color palette** — Pull a useful six-color palette from any image. (https://toolpantry.app/image-palette.md) - **Color blindness simulator** — Preview common color-vision differences before you publish a design. (https://toolpantry.app/color-blindness-simulator.md) - **Color converter** — Translate HEX, RGB, HSL, and CMYK values with a live swatch and contrast hint. (https://toolpantry.app/color-converter.md) - **Image to Base64** — Turn a small image into a copyable data URI for HTML and CSS. (https://toolpantry.app/image-to-base64.md) - **Blur & pixelate** — Hide faces, names, and sensitive details before sharing. (https://toolpantry.app/image-blur.md) - **Split image grid** — Cut a photo into evenly sized tiles for social posts. (https://toolpantry.app/image-splitter.md) - **Add a watermark** — Place a light text mark on a photo and download a PNG. (https://toolpantry.app/image-watermark.md) - **Add text to photo** — Drag styled text onto any photo — no watermark, no upload. (https://toolpantry.app/add-text-to-photo.md) - **Pick image colors** — Sample exact HEX, RGB, and HSL values from any pixel. (https://toolpantry.app/image-color-picker.md) - **DPI calculator** — Convert pixel dimensions into print inches and centimeters. (https://toolpantry.app/image-dpi-calculator.md) - **Black & white** — Make a clean grayscale photo with adjustable contrast. (https://toolpantry.app/image-grayscale.md) - **Rotate image** — Turn or flip a photo 90°, 180°, or 270° locally. (https://toolpantry.app/rotate-image.md) - **Crop image** — Cut any area or lock a 1:1, 4:3, or 16:9 ratio. (https://toolpantry.app/crop-image.md) - **Passport photo maker** — Country sizes, eye-line guides, and a 4×6 in print sheet — all local. (https://toolpantry.app/passport-photo-maker.md) - **Image upscaler** — Enlarge 2×–4× with a classic resampler — no AI, no upload. (https://toolpantry.app/image-upscaler.md) - **Signature maker** — Draw or clean up a photo — transparent PNG for any document. (https://toolpantry.app/signature-maker.md) - **Bulk image resizer** — Resize a whole batch at once — download everything as one ZIP. (https://toolpantry.app/bulk-image-resizer.md) - **AI image checker** — Scan metadata for AI generator signatures and Content Credentials. (https://toolpantry.app/ai-image-checker.md) - **EXIF viewer** — See camera, GPS, and AI tags — then download a clean copy. (https://toolpantry.app/exif-viewer.md) - **Face blur** — Auto-detect or box faces and blur them — locally. (https://toolpantry.app/face-blur.md) - **Aspect ratio calculator** — Find a simplified ratio and calculate the missing image dimension. (https://toolpantry.app/aspect-ratio-calculator.md) - **Compress to 100KB** — Hit a file-size limit for forms, uploads, and email. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb.md) - **Compress to 20KB** — Extreme target size for ID photos and legacy forms. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-20kb.md) - **Compress to 50KB** — Check a 50,000-byte ceiling and any required pixel dimensions. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-50kb.md) - **Compress to 200KB** — Check bytes, required pixels and the preview before uploading. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-200kb.md) - **Compress to 500KB** — CMS and email-sized images with near-original quality. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-500kb.md) - **Compress to 1MB** — The universal upload line — get any photo under it. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-1mb.md) - **Compress to 2MB** — Job, visa, and portal caps with quality intact. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-2mb.md) - **Compress to 5MB** — Print labs and looser portal limits, handled locally. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-5mb.md) ### Utilities - **JSON formatter** — Format, validate, minify, and copy JSON locally. (https://toolpantry.app/json-formatter.md) - **UTM link builder** — Create campaign tracking URLs for analytics. (https://toolpantry.app/utm-builder.md) - **Password generator** — Make a random password without sending it anywhere. (https://toolpantry.app/password-generator.md) - **QR code generator** — Create a static QR code for a URL, text, email, or phone. (https://toolpantry.app/qr-code-generator.md) - **Time calculator** — Calculate hours, breaks, decimal time, and overnight shifts. (https://toolpantry.app/time-duration-calculator.md) - **Online timer & stopwatch** — Run a precise countdown or stopwatch with presets, pause, laps, and fullscreen. (https://toolpantry.app/online-timer.md) - **Percentage calculator** — Calculate percent of, percent change, increases, decreases, and reverse values. (https://toolpantry.app/percentage-calculator.md) - **Unit converter** — Convert length, mass, temperature, area, volume, speed, time, and data locally. (https://toolpantry.app/unit-converter.md) - **Scientific calculator** — Evaluate trigonometry, logarithms, powers, roots, and factorials locally. (https://toolpantry.app/scientific-calculator.md) - **Mortgage calculator** — Estimate payment, interest, taxes, insurance, PMI, HOA, and payoff time locally. (https://toolpantry.app/mortgage-calculator.md) - **Age calculator** — Find exact years, months, days, total days, and your next birthday locally. (https://toolpantry.app/age-calculator.md) - **Fraction calculator** — Add, subtract, multiply, divide, and compare fractions with reduced answers and working. (https://toolpantry.app/fraction-calculator.md) - **Tip calculator** — Calculate tip, tax, group total, round-up, and each person's share locally. (https://toolpantry.app/tip-calculator.md) - **GPA calculator** — Calculate weighted, unweighted, semester, and cumulative GPA from course credits locally. (https://toolpantry.app/gpa-calculator.md) - **Discount calculator** — Find sale price, savings, stacked discounts, sales tax, and checkout total locally. (https://toolpantry.app/discount-calculator.md) - **Loan calculator** — Estimate fixed-rate payment, total interest, payoff time, extra-payment savings, and amortization locally. (https://toolpantry.app/loan-calculator.md) - **BMI calculator** — Calculate adult BMI in metric or imperial units with category and healthy-weight range. (https://toolpantry.app/bmi-calculator.md) - **Number to words** — Spell out numbers and currency amounts for checks, invoices, contracts, and receipts. (https://toolpantry.app/number-to-words.md) - **Random number generator** — Generate batches with ranges, decimals, unique values, sorting, and copy-ready results. (https://toolpantry.app/random-number-generator.md) - **Time zone meeting planner** — Convert meeting times across cities and find shared working-hour windows with DST-aware local calculations. (https://toolpantry.app/timezone-meeting-planner.md) - **Roman numeral converter** — Convert integers and validate standard Roman numerals with subtractive notation and visible breakdowns. (https://toolpantry.app/roman-numeral-converter.md) - **Random name picker** — Draw winners without repeats, shuffle a list, or split people into balanced teams locally. (https://toolpantry.app/random-name-picker.md) - **Typing speed test** — Measure net and gross WPM, accuracy, errors, and characters per minute with local practice passages. (https://toolpantry.app/typing-test.md) - **Fancy text generator** — Turn plain text into bold, cursive, bubble, gothic, fullwidth, and other copy-ready Unicode styles. (https://toolpantry.app/fancy-text-generator.md) - **Lorem Ipsum generator** — Generate placeholder copy by paragraphs, sentences, words, or characters with plain, HTML, Markdown, and JSON output. (https://toolpantry.app/lorem-ipsum-generator.md) - **YouTube thumbnail downloader** — Preview and save maxres, HD, standard, medium, and default thumbnails from a YouTube URL or video ID. (https://toolpantry.app/youtube-thumbnail-downloader.md) - **EMI calculator** — Estimate monthly EMI, total interest, amortization, and the impact of monthly or one-time prepayments locally. (https://toolpantry.app/emi-calculator.md) - **Barcode generator** — Create Code 128, Code 39, EAN-13, or UPC labels. (https://toolpantry.app/barcode-generator.md) - **Invoice generator** — Calculate line items and print a simple invoice or PDF. (https://toolpantry.app/invoice-generator.md) - **Word counter** — Count words, characters, sentences, and reading time. (https://toolpantry.app/text-counter.md) - **Token counter** — Exact GPT token counts (o200k/cl100k) + Claude and Gemini estimates. (https://toolpantry.app/token-counter.md) - **Meta tag generator** — Create SEO, Open Graph, and Twitter card tags. (https://toolpantry.app/meta-tag-generator.md) - **World clock** — Check the current time in cities around the world. (https://toolpantry.app/world-clock.md) ### Developer - **UUID generator** — Generate v4 UUIDs in batches and copy or download them. (https://toolpantry.app/uuid-generator.md) - **Check API (docs)** — Free keyless API: score any site’s AI readiness, bulk up to 6. (https://toolpantry.app/api-docs.md) - **JWT decoder** — Inspect JWT header and payload claims locally without verification. (https://toolpantry.app/jwt-decoder.md) - **URL encoder / decoder** — Encode query values or decode URL text without sending it anywhere. (https://toolpantry.app/url-encoder-decoder.md) - **JSON ↔ CSV converter** — Convert arrays and tabular data locally, with quoted CSV support. (https://toolpantry.app/json-csv-converter.md) - **Regex tester** — Test JavaScript patterns, flags, captures, and replacements. (https://toolpantry.app/regex-tester.md) - **SHA hash generator** — Create SHA-256, SHA-384, or SHA-512 hashes from text locally. (https://toolpantry.app/hash-generator.md) - **Zip & unzip** — Create or open ZIP archives in your browser — no upload, no cap. (https://toolpantry.app/zip-tool.md) - **XML formatter** — Validate and pretty-print XML with readable indentation. (https://toolpantry.app/xml-formatter.md) - **Markdown preview** — Render headings, lists, links, and code into clean HTML locally. (https://toolpantry.app/markdown-preview.md) - **Cron expression tool** — Parse five-field cron syntax and see the next scheduled runs. (https://toolpantry.app/cron-expression-tool.md) - **IPv4 subnet calculator** — Calculate network ranges, masks, broadcasts, and usable hosts. (https://toolpantry.app/subnet-calculator.md) ### PDF - **JPG to PDF** — Combine JPG or PNG images into a clean, ordered PDF. (https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-pdf.md) - **PNG to PDF** — One PNG per page, transparency flattened onto white. (https://toolpantry.app/png-to-pdf.md) - **Merge PDF** — Join multiple PDF files in a chosen order directly in your browser. (https://toolpantry.app/merge-pdf.md) - **PDF metadata remover** — See title, author, and scanner tags — then strip them clean. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf-metadata-remover.md) - **Delete PDF pages** — Type page numbers or ranges and download the trimmed PDF. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf-page-delete.md) - **Rotate PDF pages** — Turn one page or all of them — click a thumbnail, save. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf-rotate.md) - **Watermark PDF** — Stamp text on every page — centered or tiled, live preview. (https://toolpantry.app/watermark-pdf.md) - **Fill PDF forms** — Type into form fields and save — no printing, no sign-up. (https://toolpantry.app/fill-pdf-forms.md) - **Text to Speech** — Read any text aloud with your device's voices — no upload. (https://toolpantry.app/text-to-speech.md) - **Image to SVG** — Trace JPG or PNG into real vector paths — local. (https://toolpantry.app/image-to-svg.md) - **Resume Builder** — Live preview, ATS-friendly PDF — draft stays local. (https://toolpantry.app/resume-builder.md) - **PDF to Word** — Editable .docx from any text PDF — local, no upload. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-word.md) - **LLM Token Calculator** — Real token counts + API cost across GPT, Claude, Gemini. (https://toolpantry.app/llm-token-calculator.md) - **Speech to Text** — Live dictation with automatic punctuation — in your browser. (https://toolpantry.app/speech-to-text.md) - **Text Chunker** — RAG-ready token-exact chunks + JSONL export. (https://toolpantry.app/text-chunker.md) - **MCP Config Generator** — Wire MCP servers into Claude Desktop, Cursor, VS Code. (https://toolpantry.app/mcp-config-generator.md) - **AI Background Remover** — On-device AI cutouts — transparent PNG, no upload. (https://toolpantry.app/background-remover.md) - **OCR — Image to Text** — Extract text from screenshots & scans, fully local. (https://toolpantry.app/ocr.md) - **AI Image Detector** — Check C2PA & metadata for AI-generation markers. (https://toolpantry.app/ai-image-detector.md) - **Document Scanner** — Photo → straightened scan → multi-page PDF. (https://toolpantry.app/document-scanner.md) - **PDF to text** — Copy or download the words with page markers. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-text.md) - **Extract PDF pages** — Keep selected pages from a PDF and download a smaller document. (https://toolpantry.app/extract-pdf-pages.md) - **YAML ↔ JSON converter** — Convert configuration data locally without uploading secrets. (https://toolpantry.app/yaml-json-converter.md) - **SQL formatter** — Turn dense SQL into readable clauses and indentation in your browser. (https://toolpantry.app/sql-formatter.md) - **XML ↔ JSON converter** — Move API payloads while keeping attributes and repeated elements visible. (https://toolpantry.app/xml-json-converter.md) - **Code minifier** — Minify JSON, HTML, CSS, or JavaScript locally before you ship. (https://toolpantry.app/minify-tool.md) - **HTML / CSS formatter** — Pretty-print HTML, CSS, or JavaScript with readable indentation in your browser. (https://toolpantry.app/html-formatter.md) - **CSS unit converter** — Convert PX, REM, and EM values, batch-rewrite CSS pixels, and build clamp(). (https://toolpantry.app/css-unit-converter.md) - **Split PDF** — Turn every PDF page into a separate local PDF download. (https://toolpantry.app/split-pdf.md) - **Rotate PDF** — Turn every page by 90, 180, or 270 degrees in your browser. (https://toolpantry.app/rotate-pdf.md) - **PDF to JPG** — Turn every page into a shareable JPG or PNG image. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-jpg.md) - **PDF to PNG** — Render PDF pages as PNG at your chosen resolution. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-png.md) - **Sign PDF** — Draw, type, or upload a signature — locally, no upload. (https://toolpantry.app/sign-pdf.md) - **Compress PDF** — Shrink scans and image-heavy PDFs to fit upload limits. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-pdf.md) ### Creator - **MOSS Image Layout Editor** — Place text and subjects, then export centered layout JSON for MOSS-Image. (https://toolpantry.app/moss-image-layout-editor.md) - **FLUX 3 Bounding Box Generator** — Draw a layout, describe each element, and export a prompt with precise coordinates. (https://toolpantry.app/flux-bounding-box-generator.md) - **Social media sizes** — Check Instagram, TikTok, YouTube, Facebook, LinkedIn, and Pinterest dimensions. (https://toolpantry.app/social-media-size-guide.md) - **Screen recorder** — Record screen, window, or tab in the browser — nothing uploaded. (https://toolpantry.app/screen-recorder.md) - **Photo collage** — Grid layouts, gaps, and social-ready sizes — watermark-free. (https://toolpantry.app/photo-collage.md) - **Images to GIF** — Animate a set of images into a looping GIF locally. (https://toolpantry.app/images-to-gif.md) - **Hashtag generator** — Build a transparent starter set for YouTube, TikTok, or Instagram. (https://toolpantry.app/hashtag-generator.md) - **YouTube tag generator** — Build, review, and copy a focused comma-separated tag list within a visible character budget. (https://toolpantry.app/youtube-tag-generator.md) - **Email signature generator** — Create a clean inline HTML signature for Gmail, Outlook, Apple Mail, or Thunderbird. (https://toolpantry.app/email-signature-generator.md) - **CSS gradient generator** — Build linear, radial, or conic backgrounds and copy the CSS locally. (https://toolpantry.app/css-gradient-generator.md) - **Meme generator** — Add classic captions to an image and download a clean PNG without a watermark. (https://toolpantry.app/meme-generator.md) - **Open Graph image** — Create a 1200×630 social sharing image and copy starter meta tags. (https://toolpantry.app/og-image-generator.md) - **SERP preview** — Preview an SEO title, URL, and description with local character and pixel checks. (https://toolpantry.app/serp-preview.md) - **SVG to PNG** — Rasterize an SVG to PNG or JPG with a scale and background choice. (https://toolpantry.app/svg-to-png.md) ### Text & data - **JSON diff** — Compare two JSON documents and inspect changed paths. (https://toolpantry.app/json-diff.md) - **Remove duplicate lines** — Clean, deduplicate, sort, copy, or download a text list. (https://toolpantry.app/line-tools.md) - **Unix timestamp converter** — Convert epoch seconds or milliseconds to readable dates. (https://toolpantry.app/timestamp-converter.md) - **HTML to Markdown** — Convert headings, links, lists, and basic tables for docs and prompts. (https://toolpantry.app/html-to-markdown.md) - **JSON validator** — Check JSON syntax, inspect parse errors, and copy a formatted result locally. (https://toolpantry.app/json-validator.md) - **JSON Schema validator** — Check types, required fields, properties, arrays, enums, and common limits locally. (https://toolpantry.app/json-schema-validator.md) ### Conversion - **WebP to JPG** — Convert a WebP image to a broadly compatible JPG with quality control. (https://toolpantry.app/webp-to-jpg.md) - **JPG to WebP** — Typically 25–35% smaller than JPG at the same visual quality. (https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-webp.md) - **AVIF to JPG** — Open modern web images in any app, editor, or form. (https://toolpantry.app/avif-to-jpg.md) - **AVIF to PNG** — Lossless output with transparency preserved. (https://toolpantry.app/avif-to-png.md) - **HEIC to JPG** — iPhone photos openable anywhere — converted locally. (https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-jpg.md) - **HEIC to PNG** — Lossless HEIC conversion for editing pipelines. (https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-png.md) - **HEIC to WebP** — iPhone photos to the lightest web format. (https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-webp.md) - **HEIC to PDF** — Turn iPhone photos into one PDF — nothing uploaded. (https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-pdf.md) - **Favicon generator** — Create browser, Apple touch, and app icon PNG sizes from one logo. (https://toolpantry.app/favicon-generator.md) - **PNG to ICO** — Pack 16–256 px into one favicon.ico — transparency kept. (https://toolpantry.app/png-to-ico.md) - **Video to MP3** — Pull audio from MP4, MOV, or WebM — 128–320 kbps, all local. (https://toolpantry.app/video-to-mp3.md) - **Compress video** — Compress MP4 locally and verify the actual output size. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-video.md) - **Video to GIF** — Trim an MP4 clip into a looping GIF — fps and width dials included. (https://toolpantry.app/video-to-gif.md) - **GIF to MP4** — Modern video from an old GIF — smaller, full color, local. (https://toolpantry.app/gif-to-mp4.md) - **Audio trimmer & ringtones** — Cut MP3s on a waveform — export MP3, WAV, or iPhone .m4r. (https://toolpantry.app/audio-trimmer.md) - **Voice recorder** — Record and save MP3/WAV — nothing streamed to a server. (https://toolpantry.app/voice-recorder.md) - **Merge audio** — Join MP3/WAV/M4A files into one track — order your way. (https://toolpantry.app/merge-audio.md) - **Audio converter** — M4A, WAV, OGG, FLAC → MP3 or WAV — local, no upload. (https://toolpantry.app/audio-converter.md) - **Video trimmer** — Cut MP4 without re-encoding — instant, lossless, local. (https://toolpantry.app/video-trimmer.md) - **Video face blur** — Box the faces, export a blurred MP4 — baked in, never uploaded. (https://toolpantry.app/face-blur-video.md) - **Rotate video** — Turn 90°/180° by writing metadata — instant, lossless, local. (https://toolpantry.app/rotate-video.md) - **Mute video** — Remove audio without re-encoding — seconds, zero quality loss. (https://toolpantry.app/mute-video.md) - **Frame extractor** — Grab any moment as a full-resolution PNG or JPG. (https://toolpantry.app/frame-extractor.md) - **Crop video** — Freeform or 9:16 / 1:1 / 4:5 presets for Reels, Shorts, IG. (https://toolpantry.app/crop-video.md) - **MOV to MP4** — Lossless container swap — copies the data, never re-encodes. (https://toolpantry.app/mov-to-mp4.md) - **Merge videos** — Join clips into one MP4 — letterboxed, ordered, watermark-free. (https://toolpantry.app/merge-video.md) - **JPG to PNG** — Convert a JPEG into a lossless PNG copy for editors and upload forms. (https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-png.md) - **PNG to WebP** — Make a smaller WebP copy while keeping transparent pixels. (https://toolpantry.app/png-to-webp.md) - **WebP to PNG** — Create a lossless PNG copy for editors and forms that reject WebP. (https://toolpantry.app/webp-to-png.md) - **PNG to JPG** — Export a compatible JPG with quality and transparency background controls. (https://toolpantry.app/png-to-jpg.md) ### SEO - **Schema markup generator** — Build Article, FAQ, Product, LocalBusiness, Organization, or WebSite JSON-LD. (https://toolpantry.app/schema-markup-generator.md) - **AI Agent Readiness Checker** — Score any site's AI-search readiness: llms.txt, Markdown, JSON-LD, robots, sitemap. (https://toolpantry.app/agent-ready-checker.md) - **AI Agent Readiness Report 2026** — We tested 184 popular tool sites: only 1.6% can serve Markdown to AI agents. (https://toolpantry.app/ai-agent-readiness-report.md) - **vs iLoveIMG** — Honest comparison: local vs server, breadth vs depth. (https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-iloveimg.md) - **vs TinyPNG** — Local vs cloud compression, limits, and target sizes. (https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-tinypng.md) - **vs Smallpdf** — Free core PDF ops vs advanced server editing. (https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-smallpdf.md) - **vs Adobe Acrobat online** — Core jobs vs the full (paid) PDF editor. (https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-adobe-acrobat-online.md) - **vs Zamzar** — Everyday formats local vs 1,100+ formats in the cloud. (https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-zamzar.md) - **vs CloudConvert** — One-off jobs vs API pipelines and batch scale. (https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-cloudconvert.md) - **vs PDF24** — Core and local vs broad and cloud (Windows app too). (https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-pdf24.md) - **File size limits 2026** — Gmail to WhatsApp to portals — every cap, with a local tool for each. (https://toolpantry.app/file-size-limits.md) - **Smallpdf alternatives** — Seven honest picks — free, local, no sign-up. (https://toolpantry.app/smallpdf-alternatives.md) - **iLovePDF alternatives** — Free limits compared; local options included. (https://toolpantry.app/ilovepdf-alternatives.md) - **Acrobat alternatives** — When you need editing — and when you don't. (https://toolpantry.app/adobe-acrobat-alternatives.md) - **PDF24 alternatives** — Free, ad-free routes for the same jobs. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf24-alternatives.md) - **Zamzar alternatives** — Convert without the upload. (https://toolpantry.app/zamzar-alternatives.md) - **CloudConvert alternatives** — Free converters and API options compared. (https://toolpantry.app/cloudconvert-alternatives.md) - **TinyPNG alternatives** — Compress images without batch caps. (https://toolpantry.app/tinypng-alternatives.md) - **iLoveIMG alternatives** — Compress, crop, convert — locally. (https://toolpantry.app/iloveimg-alternatives.md) ### Business - **Quote generator** — Create a clean estimate with line items and a validity date. (https://toolpantry.app/quote-generator.md) - **Quote to invoice** — Turn a completed quote into a printable invoice in one step. (https://toolpantry.app/quote-to-invoice.md) - **Receipt generator** — Make a simple payment receipt and save it as a PDF. (https://toolpantry.app/receipt-generator.md) - **Payment reminder email** — Write a polite follow-up for an unpaid invoice. (https://toolpantry.app/payment-reminder-email.md) - **Contractor estimate** — Prepare a job estimate for repairs, cleaning, or trade work. (https://toolpantry.app/contractor-estimate-generator.md) - **Hourly rate calculator** — Find a sustainable minimum rate from income and business costs. (https://toolpantry.app/hourly-rate-calculator.md) - **Project pricing calculator** — Turn hours, expenses, and a buffer into a project price. (https://toolpantry.app/project-pricing-calculator.md) - **Expense tracker** — Log project expenses, see the total, and download a CSV. (https://toolpantry.app/expense-tracker.md) - **Retainer pricing calculator** — Price a monthly service package from hours, costs, and capacity. (https://toolpantry.app/retainer-pricing-calculator.md) - **Timesheet calculator** — Track weekly hours, billable time, and the value of your work. (https://toolpantry.app/timesheet-calculator.md) - **Keyword cluster tool** — Group a pasted keyword list, remove duplicates, and export CSV. (https://toolpantry.app/keyword-cluster-tool.md) - **Client onboarding checklist** — Build a reusable project kickoff checklist and export Markdown. (https://toolpantry.app/client-onboarding-checklist.md) - **Proposal generator** — Turn a project brief into a clear service proposal. (https://toolpantry.app/proposal-generator.md) - **Statement of work** — Outline scope, deliverables, timeline, and exclusions. (https://toolpantry.app/statement-of-work-generator.md) - **Payment schedule** — Split a project price into deposit and milestone payments. (https://toolpantry.app/payment-schedule-calculator.md) - **Client intake form** — Prepare the questions you need before a project starts. (https://toolpantry.app/client-intake-form.md) - **Meeting agenda** — Create a focused agenda with decisions and action items. (https://toolpantry.app/meeting-agenda-generator.md) ### Ecommerce ops - **Dimensional weight** — Compare actual, DIM, and billable parcel weight. (https://toolpantry.app/dimensional-weight-calculator.md) - **Shipping cost estimator** — Model delivery fees, fuel surcharge, handling, and insurance. (https://toolpantry.app/shipping-cost-estimator.md) - **Landed cost calculator** — Estimate the true import cost per product unit. (https://toolpantry.app/landed-cost-calculator.md) - **Ecommerce profit margin** — Find profit, break-even price, and target-margin price. (https://toolpantry.app/ecommerce-profit-margin-calculator.md) - **Reorder point** — Plan stock replenishment from sales velocity and lead time. (https://toolpantry.app/reorder-point-calculator.md) - **CBM volume calculator** — Calculate carton volume, cubic feet, and volume per unit. (https://toolpantry.app/cbm-volume-calculator.md) - **Packaging fit checker** — Test product rotations, padding, and box utilization. (https://toolpantry.app/packaging-fit-calculator.md) - **Safety stock calculator** — Estimate an inventory buffer from demand and lead-time variability. (https://toolpantry.app/safety-stock-calculator.md) - **Free shipping threshold** — Set a delivery offer while protecting your target margin. (https://toolpantry.app/free-shipping-threshold-calculator.md) - **Inventory coverage** — See days on hand and expected coverage with incoming stock. (https://toolpantry.app/inventory-coverage-calculator.md) - **Inventory spreadsheet** — Generate a clean SKU and stock CSV template. (https://toolpantry.app/inventory-spreadsheet-generator.md) - **Inventory tracker** — Track stock value and flag products at their reorder point. (https://toolpantry.app/inventory-tracker.md) - **Inventory turnover** — Calculate stock turns and days of inventory held. (https://toolpantry.app/inventory-turnover-calculator.md) - **Download time** — Estimate transfer time from file size and connection speed. (https://toolpantry.app/download-time-calculator.md) - **Marketplace fees** — Break down fees, net payout, profit, and margin. (https://toolpantry.app/marketplace-fee-calculator.md) ## FAQ **Are my images uploaded?** No. Compression happens locally in your browser. This page does not send your image files to a server. **Which format should I choose?** WebP is a good default for websites. Use JPG for photographs that need broad compatibility, and PNG when you need transparent pixels or lossless output. **Why did a PNG become larger?** PNG is lossless and some already-optimized files cannot be reduced further. Try WebP or JPG when transparency is not needed. --- # Inventory Coverage Calculator — Days of Stock on Hand > Calculate ecommerce inventory days on hand, expected coverage with incoming stock, and distance from your reorder point. Source: https://toolpantry.app/inventory-coverage-calculator ## About See how many days your current inventory covers, how incoming stock changes the picture, and whether you are already at the reorder point. ## Quick answer How do I calculate inventory coverage? Enter average daily sales and current stock to see how many days of cover you have. ## How to calculate inventory coverage 1. **Enter on-hand and inbound stock** — include purchase orders already placed. 2. **Enter the daily sales rate** — recent weeks, not launch month. 3. **Read the days of coverage** — how long until empty, promise included. ## What coverage numbers tell you - Coverage below lead time = stockout risk, act now - Coverage far above 90 days = cash parked in a warehouse - Coverage per SKU beats one average — averages hide both problems ## Good to know Segment by SKU class (hero / steady / long-tail) before setting action thresholds, and treat inbound stock as real only when the supplier has confirmed shipping dates. Related: [inventory turnover](https://toolpantry.app/inventory-turnover-calculator.html) and [reorder point](https://toolpantry.app/reorder-point-calculator.html). ## Notes Coverage is a planning estimate based on your average daily sales. Use a conservative demand number for seasonal or fast-changing products. ## FAQ **Why subtract committed stock?** Committed units are already promised to customers or orders, so they should not count as freely available inventory. **Does incoming stock prevent a stockout?** Only if it arrives before current available stock is consumed. Use the lead-time and reorder tools alongside this estimate. --- # Inventory Spreadsheet Generator — Free CSV Template > Generate a free inventory spreadsheet template with SKU, stock, pricing, supplier, and reorder columns, then download CSV. Source: https://toolpantry.app/inventory-spreadsheet-generator ## About Choose the columns you need, generate a starter CSV, and open it in Excel, Google Sheets, Numbers, or your inventory system. ## Quick answer How do I make an inventory spreadsheet? Define your columns and starting rows; the tool generates a CSV you can open in Excel or Sheets. ## How to generate an inventory spreadsheet 1. **Pick the columns you actually track** — SKU, stock, cost, location, supplier. 2. **Generate the CSV template** — one header row, ready to import. 3. **Open in Sheets or Excel and fill** — or hand it to a teammate as the standard. ## A spreadsheet is the right inventory system when… - You have fewer than a few hundred SKUs and one warehouse - Nobody wants to learn an ERP to count boxes - You need the team to share one format immediately ## Good to know Start minimal (SKU, on-hand, cost) and add columns only when a specific decision needs them — padded templates get abandoned. Re-export a fresh template whenever your standard changes, and pair with the [local tracker](https://toolpantry.app/inventory-tracker.html) for quick checks. ## Notes The starter rows are examples. Replace them with your own products. Nothing is uploaded. ## FAQ **Can I use this in Google Sheets?** Yes. Download the CSV, then import it into Google Sheets, Excel, Numbers, or another spreadsheet app. **What columns should I keep?** SKU, product name, stock on hand, reorder point, unit cost, and supplier are a useful starting set. Add location and incoming stock when you manage multiple shipments. --- # Inventory Tracker — Local Stock and Low Inventory List > Track products, stock on hand, reorder points, unit costs, and low-stock status locally in your browser. Export inventory to CSV. Source: https://toolpantry.app/inventory-tracker ## About Add a simple product list, calculate stock value, flag SKUs at or below their reorder point, and export the list when you need it. ## Quick answer How do I track inventory locally? Add SKUs with quantities; levels update as you log movements, all inside your browser. ## How to track stock locally 1. **Add your SKUs** — name, quantity, and a low-stock threshold each. 2. **Adjust quantities as things move** — sales, restocks, damages. 3. **Watch the low-stock list** — and export CSV regularly as your backup. ## Who this is actually for - Small shops and market stalls that track stock once or twice a week - Solo sellers who don’t need (and won’t maintain) an ERP - Marketplace sellers who need a quick check between exports ## Good to know Data lives in your browser’s local storage on *this* device and browser — export CSV often, especially before clearing site data or switching machines. When volume outgrows this, migrate to the [spreadsheet template](https://toolpantry.app/inventory-spreadsheet-generator.html) and then a real system. Related: [reorder points](https://toolpantry.app/reorder-point-calculator.html). ## Notes Entries stay in this browser using local storage. This is an inventory aid, not a warehouse accounting system. ## FAQ **Are my products uploaded?** No. The list stays in this browser and is only downloaded when you choose CSV export. **How is low stock calculated?** A product is flagged when stock on hand is less than or equal to its reorder point. --- # Inventory Turnover Calculator — Calculate Stock Turns > Calculate inventory turnover and days of inventory from COGS, opening inventory, closing inventory, and period length. Source: https://toolpantry.app/inventory-turnover-calculator ## About Calculate how many times inventory was sold and replaced over a period, plus the equivalent days of inventory held. ## Quick answer How do I calculate inventory turnover? Enter COGS and average inventory to get your turnover ratio and days on hand. ## How to calculate inventory turnover 1. **Enter cost of goods sold** — for the period you’re judging. 2. **Enter average inventory value** — start plus end, divided by two. 3. **Read the ratio and days** — turns per year and days to sell through. ## What the ratio actually says - Higher turns = faster cash cycle, but compare within your category (fashion and staples live differently) - Falling turns with rising stock = dead inventory accumulating - Sky-high turns = possible stockout risk, check coverage ## Good to know The fastest turnover improvements usually come from cutting dead SKUs, not squeezing suppliers. Run this quarterly; a single number without a trend tells you little. Related: [coverage](https://toolpantry.app/inventory-coverage-calculator.html) and [profit margin](https://toolpantry.app/ecommerce-profit-margin-calculator.html). ## Notes Turnover is based on inventory value, not unit count. Compare similar periods and categories for a useful signal. ## FAQ **What is inventory turnover?** It compares the cost of goods sold with average inventory value to show how often stock was replaced during a period. **Is higher always better?** No. A high number with frequent stockouts can be worse than a lower number with reliable availability. --- # Free Invoice Generator — Create & Print Invoices Online > Create a simple invoice online, calculate tax and totals, then print or save it as a PDF. Runs locally in your browser. Source: https://toolpantry.app/invoice-generator ## About Create a clean invoice, calculate line items and tax, then print it or save it as a PDF. Your business details stay in this browser. ## Quick answer How do I create a free invoice? Fill in your details, line items, and tax; download a clean PDF invoice — no signup required. ## How to create an invoice 1. **Add your business and client details** — name, address, and any tax identifiers you use. 2. **Add line items** — description, quantity, rate; tax is calculated automatically on the subtotal. 3. **Print or save as PDF** — your browser’s print dialog produces a clean PDF, generated entirely locally. ## When this fits - Freelancers and contractors billing a client for the first time - Small shops issuing a one-off invoice without accounting software - Anyone who needs a printable invoice in two minutes, not a subscription ## Good to know Include the essentials and disputes stay rare: a sequential invoice number, issue date, payment terms, and a clear total. Tax rules vary by country and trade (VAT, GST, sales tax) — this tool records what you enter, it does not advise. Keep numbered copies of everything for your records. Related: [quote generator](https://toolpantry.app/quote-generator.html), [receipt generator](https://toolpantry.app/receipt-generator.html), and the [payment reminder email](https://toolpantry.app/payment-reminder-email.html). ## Notes This is a simple invoice template, not accounting or tax advice. Confirm local requirements before sending a real invoice. ## FAQ **Can I save the invoice as a PDF?** Choose “Print / save PDF,” then select Save as PDF in your browser's print dialog. **Is my invoice uploaded?** No. The calculations and preview happen in your browser. Nothing is sent to a server. --- # JPG to PDF Converter — Combine JPG & PNG Images Locally > Convert JPG and PNG images to an ordered PDF locally in your browser. No upload queue or account required. Source: https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-pdf ## About Combine JPG or PNG images into an A4-sized PDF with local page ordering and no server upload. ## Quick answer How do I convert JPG or PNG to PDF? Add one or more JPG or PNG images, arrange the order, and export a single PDF with one image per A4 page. Everything is processed locally — no account and no watermark. ## How to convert JPG to PDF 1. **Add one or more images** — photos, scans, or screenshots; order them as you like. 2. **Check the page layout** — each image is placed on its own A4 page, centered. 3. **Download the PDF** — one file containing every image, created locally in your browser. ## When this is the right tool - Submitting photo evidence or scanned documents as a single PDF - Building a simple portfolio or lookbook from photos - Turning phone shots of receipts into one expense file ## Good to know Nearly every upload portal accepts PDF while image sets are often rejected or limited. For email, keep the total under 25 MB (the Gmail limit) — compress the source images first with the [image compressor](https://toolpantry.app/index.html), and combine with an existing PDF using [Merge PDF](https://toolpantry.app/merge-pdf.html). Starting from iPhone photos? [HEIC to PDF](https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-pdf.html) skips the conversion step entirely. Working from PNG files? The [PNG to PDF](https://toolpantry.app/png-to-pdf.html) tool takes them directly. ## Notes Images are placed on centered A4 pages with their aspect ratio preserved. The bundled PDF engine runs inside this browser tab. ## FAQ **Can I choose the page order?** Yes. Use the up and down controls beside each selected image before creating the PDF. **Are my images uploaded?** No. The PDF is built locally in your browser. **Can I convert PNG files to PDF?** Yes. PNG files can be added alongside JPGs — each image becomes its own page in the same PDF, with transparency flattened onto white. --- # JPG to PNG Converter — Convert JPEG Images Locally > Convert JPG and JPEG images to lossless PNG locally in your browser. No upload, no account, and no server-side conversion. Source: https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-png ## About Turn a JPG or JPEG into a lossless PNG copy inside your browser. Useful when a form, editor, or design workflow only accepts PNG. ## Quick answer How do I convert JPG to PNG? Add the JPG and download the PNG copy; the conversion runs locally and the original stays untouched. ## How to convert JPG to PNG 1. **Add your JPG** — one file or a batch. 2. **Convert** — pixels are copied exactly; PNG is lossless. 3. **Download** — a PNG version for editing, archiving, or platforms that require it. ## Why convert up to PNG - Editing workflows: repeated saves in JPG degrade quality — PNG does not - Portals and tools that accept only PNG - Consistent lossless formats in an archive or asset pipeline ## Good to know The PNG will be considerably *larger* than the JPG — lossless storage costs space, that is expected. Converting does not restore detail lost when the JPG was created, and a JPG has no transparency to preserve. For web delivery where size matters, prefer WebP or keep the original JPG. Related: [JPG to WebP](https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-webp.html) when file size matters more than compatibility. ## Notes PNG does not improve the already-compressed JPG pixels, but it can satisfy tools that require a PNG container. The original file stays on your device. ## FAQ **Does JPG to PNG improve quality?** No. Converting formats cannot restore detail that was removed by JPEG compression. It creates a lossless PNG wrapper around the pixels the browser decoded. **Is the file uploaded?** No. The image is decoded, drawn, and exported locally by the browser. --- # JPG to WebP Converter — Smaller Files, Same Look > Convert JPG photos to smaller WebP files locally in your browser. Choose the quality, compare sizes, and download — nothing is uploaded. Source: https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-webp ## About Make a lighter WebP copy of any JPG photo — typically a quarter smaller at the same visual quality — right in your browser. ## Quick answer How do I convert a JPG to WebP? Add the photo, keep quality around 85%, and download the WebP. The original JPG stays untouched and nothing is uploaded. ## How to convert JPG to WebP 1. **Add your JPG** — a photo, screenshot, or export. 2. **Pick the quality** — 75–85% is the sweet spot for websites; above 90% gains little. 3. **Download the WebP** — typically 25–35% smaller than the JPG at the same look. ## Where WebP pays off - Website and app images that need to load fast - Photo galleries and product shots where every KB counts - Storage cleanup when you keep both formats side by side ## Good to know The stats above show the WebP size right next to the dimensions, so compare before you commit. If a portal needs an exact size limit, finish with the [target-size compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb.html). Need the reverse direction? That's [WebP to JPG](https://toolpantry.app/webp-to-jpg.html). ## Notes WebP is the modern default for web images. Some older desktop apps still can't open it — keep the JPG when in doubt. The original remains unchanged. ## FAQ **Why convert JPG to WebP?** WebP is typically 25–35% smaller than JPG at the same visual quality, which speeds up websites and saves storage. Every modern browser supports it. **Is the photo uploaded?** No. The conversion and the download happen in the current browser tab. --- # JSON to CSV Converter — Convert CSV to JSON Locally > Convert JSON arrays to CSV or CSV rows to JSON in your browser. Handles quoted values and exports locally. Source: https://toolpantry.app/json-csv-converter ## About Turn an array of JSON objects into spreadsheet-ready CSV, or convert a simple CSV table into JSON without uploading your data. ## Quick answer How do I convert JSON to CSV? Paste a JSON array of objects and the tool outputs CSV with headers, or convert CSV back to JSON. ## How to convert JSON to CSV (or CSV to JSON) 1. **Paste your JSON array or CSV** — paste or drop a file. 2. **Pick the delimiter** — comma, semicolon, or tab for spreadsheet import. 3. **Download or copy** — the converted data, ready for Excel, Sheets, or code. ## Where this gets used - Opening API data in Excel or Google Sheets without writing code - Importing a spreadsheet into a database as JSON - Handing data to a teammate who lives in spreadsheets ## Good to know Nested objects and arrays cannot become neat columns — flatten them first or the cell shows [object Object]. Quoted fields with commas are handled correctly on both directions; European Excel often wants semicolons, which the delimiter option covers. Related: [JSON formatter](https://toolpantry.app/json-formatter.html). ## Notes Nested JSON values are kept as JSON text inside a CSV cell. CSV to JSON returns strings so identifiers such as leading-zero SKUs are not changed. ## FAQ **What JSON shape should I paste?** Use an array of objects such as [{"name":"Mug","stock":12}] . Each object becomes one CSV row and the union of its keys becomes the header. **Does this upload my spreadsheet?** No. Conversion runs in the page and the download is created locally. --- # JSON Diff — Compare JSON Objects Locally > Compare two JSON documents locally and see changed, added, and removed paths without uploading API data. Source: https://toolpantry.app/json-diff ## About Paste two JSON responses, configs, or fixtures and inspect changed paths locally. Sensitive payloads never leave this browser tab. ## Quick answer How do I compare two JSON files? Paste both JSON documents; the tool highlights added, removed, and changed paths while ignoring key order. ## How to compare two JSON files 1. **Paste the two JSON documents** — before and after. 2. **Diff** — keys are compared by path, so object key order does not cause false differences. 3. **Review the changes** — added, removed, and changed values, path by path. ## The practical scenarios - Comparing API responses between staging and production - Spotting config drift between environments - Reviewing fixture changes in a pull request ## Good to know The comparison is structural, not textual — reformatting is not a difference, a changed value is. Privacy note: API responses regularly contain tokens and customer data; running the diff locally means nothing is uploaded to a third-party service, which is the safer default for production payloads. ## Notes The comparison is structural and reports paths such as $.stock. It does not execute JSON, call an API, or treat reordered object keys as changes. ## FAQ **Can I compare API responses?** Yes. Paste the two responses into the panels. Parsing and comparison run locally. **Does key order matter?** No. Object keys are compared by name; a different order alone is not shown as a change. --- # JSON Formatter — Beautify & Format JSON, Private > Format, validate, minify, and copy JSON locally in your browser. No data is uploaded. Source: https://toolpantry.app/json-formatter ## About Pretty-print, validate, or minify JSON before pasting it into an API request, config file, or codebase. Everything runs locally. ## Quick answer How do I format JSON online? Paste your JSON and choose Format JSON or Minify. Processing happens locally in the browser, so API payloads and configs are never sent to a server. ## How to format JSON online 1. **Paste your JSON** — choose Format JSON or Minify to validate and format it. 2. **Check the validation result** — a line and column point to the exact syntax error if something is wrong. 3. **Copy the result** — keep the pretty version, or use the minify option to strip whitespace. ## When you reach for this - Debugging an API response that arrived as one unreadable line - Reviewing config files before committing them - Preparing clean JSON snippets for docs, tickets, or prompts ## Good to know Everything runs locally in your browser. Formatting changes whitespace outside strings while preserving original numbers, string escapes, property order and duplicate keys. Common invalid-JSON traps: trailing commas, single quotes, unquoted keys, and comments (none are valid JSON). For stricter checks, use the [JSON validator](https://toolpantry.app/json-validator.html), or convert with [JSON to CSV](https://toolpantry.app/json-csv-converter.html). Working with a search API response? Our [tested DeepSeek Search and Fetch Python guide](https://toolpantry.app/blog/deepseek-search-fetch-api-python) shows the returned fields and the invalid-count error we reproduced. Remove credentials before pasting a response into a shared document. ## Notes Formatting and minification keep numbers and strings as written, including large integers. No JSON is uploaded. ## FAQ **What does a JSON formatter do?** It parses valid JSON and adds indentation so nested objects and arrays are easier to read and debug. **What does minify mean?** Minified JSON removes unnecessary whitespace, which is useful when sending a compact request or storing a smaller config. --- # JSON Schema Validator — Validate JSON Locally > Validate JSON against a practical JSON Schema subset in your browser — types, required fields, arrays, enums, and numeric limits. Nothing uploaded. Source: https://toolpantry.app/json-schema-validator ## About Validate a JSON value against a practical JSON Schema subset in your browser. See the exact paths that fail without sending fixtures or API payloads to a server. ## Quick answer How do I validate JSON against a schema? Paste your JSON and its JSON Schema; the tool reports every validation error locally. ## How to validate JSON against a schema 1. **Paste the JSON document** — and the JSON Schema to check it against. 2. **Validate** — the failing path and rule are reported, not just “invalid”. 3. **Iterate** — fix the data, or the schema if the contract was wrong. ## Where schema validation pays off - Pre-flighting payloads before they hit a strict API - Checking fixtures in CI workflows without running the full suite - Deciding whether broken output is bad data or a wrong contract ## Good to know Syntax-valid JSON can still violate its schema — that is the whole point of checking both layers (see the [JSON validator](https://toolpantry.app/json-validator.html) for syntax). This tool supports the common draft subset of JSON Schema described on the page; heavy conditional and remote-reference features belong in a full validator. Schema checks structure, types, and required fields — business rules still live in code. ## Notes Supported keywords: type, required, properties, items, enum, minLength, maxLength, minimum, and maximum. This is a transparent local subset, not a full replacement for every JSON Schema draft or AJV. ## FAQ **Is my data uploaded?** No. Both JSON documents are parsed and checked in this browser tab. **Does this support every JSON Schema feature?** No. The page deliberately lists its supported subset so you can tell when a full draft implementation is required. --- # JSON Validator — Validate JSON and Find Errors, Free > Validate JSON in your browser and jump to the exact line of any syntax error. Free, private, nothing uploaded — paste and check in seconds. Source: https://toolpantry.app/json-validator ## About Paste JSON to check whether it parses, see the error line and column, and copy a formatted version. The payload stays in this tab. ## Quick answer How do I check if JSON is valid? Paste the JSON and the tool points to the exact location of any syntax error. ## How to validate JSON 1. **Paste your JSON** — validation runs as you type. 2. **Read the error position** — line and column point straight at the problem. 3. **Fix and re-check** — copy the formatted result, or open the [formatter](https://toolpantry.app/json-formatter.html) for a compact version. ## Formatting keeps your values intact Only whitespace outside strings changes. Large integers such as 9007199254740993, decimal and exponent notation, string escapes, property order and duplicate keys are kept as written. Duplicate keys can be interpreted differently by receiving software; preserving them does not make them safe for every API. ## Common JSON errors and their fixes Almost every "invalid JSON" comes down to one of a handful of mistakes. The error position tells you where the problem is; this table tells you what to look for: | What you wrote | Why it breaks | The fix | |---|---|---| | {"a": 1,} | Trailing comma — legal in JavaScript, fatal in JSON | Delete the last comma before } or ] | | {'a': 1} | Single quotes | JSON strings need double quotes: {"a": 1} | | {a: 1} | Unquoted key | Quote every key: {"a": 1} | | {"a": 1} // note | Comments do not exist in the JSON spec | Remove comments — or use JSON5/JSONC tooling for config files | | {"a": “1”} | Smart quotes from Word, Docs, or notes apps | Retype the quotes: "1" — straight quotes only | | {"a": NaN} | NaN, Infinity, undefined are JavaScript values, not JSON | Use null — JSON has no NaN | | {"a": 1 | Missing closing brace | Count your brackets — the error often appears at the end of the file | One more source that surprises people: a **BOM** (byte-order mark) at the start of a file saved by some Windows tools. This checker reports the BOM at line 1, column 1. Remove it explicitly or re-save the file as UTF-8 without BOM; leading blank lines are kept for accurate error locations. ## Good to know Syntax validation and schema validation are different jobs: valid JSON can still have the wrong shape. Check structure separately with the [JSON Schema validator](https://toolpantry.app/json-schema-validator.html). Common scenario: webhook payloads and API responses, where a missing comma cascades into a cryptic production error — validate before shipping. ## Notes A valid parse only confirms that the text is syntactically valid JSON. It does not confirm that an API's schema, required fields, or business rules are correct. ## FAQ **Does this send JSON to a server?** No. Syntax checking and formatting run in this browser tab. The JSON is not uploaded. **What does a JSON parse error mean?** It usually points to a missing comma, quote, bracket, or another character that prevents the text from following JSON syntax. **Why does my JSON fail with a trailing comma error?** Trailing commas are legal in JavaScript but not in JSON. Delete the comma before a closing brace or bracket: {"a": 1,} becomes {"a": 1}. **Why does JSON copied from Word or Google Docs fail to validate?** Word and Google Docs replace straight quotes with curly smart quotes, and JSON only accepts straight double quotes. Retype the quotes, or paste through a plain-text editor first. **What does Unexpected token mean in a JSON error?** It usually means single quotes, an unquoted key, or a comment — the three things JavaScript allows that JSON does not. The error position points at the first offending character. --- # JWT Decoder — Inspect Header and Payload Locally > Decode a JSON Web Token header and payload locally in your browser. No token is uploaded and no signature verification is performed. Source: https://toolpantry.app/jwt-decoder ## About Inspect the header, payload, and common time claims of a JSON Web Token without sending it to a server. ## Quick answer How do I decode a JWT? Paste the token to see its header and payload claims — decoding happens in your browser, so tokens never leave it. ## How to decode a JWT 1. **Paste the token** — header, payload, and signature appear separated and readable. 2. **Read the claims** — issuer, subject, expiry (exp), and custom fields in plain JSON. 3. **Check the timeline** — expired tokens are flagged, which kills most “why is auth failing?” cases instantly. ## When developers reach for this - Debugging an authentication flow that rejects a seemingly valid login - Confirming which roles or scopes a token actually carries - Inspecting API responses when only the token knows the truth ## Good to know Decoding is not verifying — this tool reads the contents and does *not* check the signature, so never treat a decoded token as authentic on its own. Also remember JWTs are base64-encoded, not encrypted: anyone holding the token can read the claims. Decoding runs locally, but production tokens are secrets — avoid pasting them into unknown services. ## Notes Decoding is not verification. This page does not validate the signature, issuer, audience, or permissions, so never treat the display as proof that a token is trusted. ## FAQ **Does this verify a JWT?** No. It only base64url-decodes the header and payload so you can inspect them. Signature verification needs the issuer's key and policy. **Is my token uploaded?** No. The token is decoded in this browser tab. Avoid pasting production secrets into any tool unless you understand the environment. --- # Keyword Cluster Tool — Group SEO Keywords Online > Group and clean a keyword list locally. Paste one keyword per line, remove duplicates, inspect simple clusters, and export CSV. Source: https://toolpantry.app/keyword-cluster-tool ## About Paste a keyword list, remove duplicates, and create quick word-based clusters before you plan pages or ad groups. Everything runs locally. ## Quick answer How do I cluster keywords? Paste your keyword list; the tool groups them by shared terms and exports the clusters as CSV. ## How to cluster keywords 1. **Paste your keyword list** — exported from any keyword tool or gathered manually. 2. **Group by stem and similarity** — clusters become content pages and ad groups. 3. **Export CSV** — one cluster per row set, ready for the content plan. ## What clustering is actually for - Turning 300 loose keywords into 15 or 20 page topics - Grouping ad keywords into tightly themed ad groups - Spotting cannibalization — two planned pages targeting the same intent ## Good to know Each cluster should describe one intent: one page answers it fully. When a cluster has two “intent centers,” split it. Processing is local, so your strategy data never lands in a third-party service. Related: [SERP preview](https://toolpantry.app/serp-preview.html) and [meta tags](https://toolpantry.app/meta-tag-generator.html). ## Notes This is a word-based grouping heuristic, not a live SERP or semantic similarity analysis. Validate important clusters with real search results before publishing. ## FAQ **What does this tool group?** It groups phrases by their first meaningful word after cleaning common words. That makes a fast planning view, not a replacement for SERP analysis. **Are my keywords uploaded?** No. The list is processed in this browser and is not sent to a server. --- # Landed Cost Calculator — Calculate True Import Cost Per Unit > Calculate ecommerce landed cost from product cost, freight, insurance, duty, import tax, clearance, and other costs. Source: https://toolpantry.app/landed-cost-calculator ## About Combine goods, freight, insurance, duty, import tax, clearance, and other charges to estimate a product’s landed cost per unit. ## Quick answer How do I calculate landed cost? Enter product cost, freight, duties, and fees to get the true per-unit landed cost. ## How to calculate landed cost 1. **Enter goods, freight, and insurance** — everything paid to get the shipment to your door. 2. **Apply duty and tax bases** — percentages depend on your country and product. 3. **Read the true unit cost** — the number your retail price must respect. ## Where landed cost surprises people - “Supplier cost” prices that ignore freight, duty, and insurance - Margin that vanishes after customs and currency moves - Comparing domestic vs import sourcing without full costs ## Good to know The duty base is usually the goods value plus freight and insurance (CIF) in many jurisdictions — but rules vary, so verify your specific tariff treatment. Add a 3–5% buffer for currency swings and inspection surprises. Related: [profit margin](https://toolpantry.app/ecommerce-profit-margin-calculator.html) and [CBM volume](https://toolpantry.app/cbm-volume-calculator.html). ## Notes This is a planning estimate. Duty, tax basis, recoverability, and customs valuation depend on country, product classification, and trade terms. ## FAQ **What does landed cost include?** It is the cost of getting inventory ready for sale, including goods and the import costs you choose above. **Why show cash outlay and landed cost separately?** A recoverable import tax can affect cash flow even when it is not treated as a permanent product cost. The calculator keeps those figures visible. --- # Remove Duplicate Lines — Sort and Clean Text Online > Remove duplicate lines, trim whitespace, and sort a list locally in your browser. Copy or download the cleaned text. Source: https://toolpantry.app/line-tools ## About Trim blank lines, remove duplicates, and sort pasted emails, keywords, SKUs, domains, or log values without uploading the list. ## Quick answer How do I remove duplicate lines? Paste your list; the tool deduplicates, trims, sorts, and exports one value per line. ## How to clean up a line-based list 1. **Paste your list** — one item per line: emails, SKUs, tags, log lines. 2. **Choose the operations** — trim spaces, remove duplicates, sort, or all three. 3. **Copy or download** — a clean list, processed locally. ## Where list cleanup saves an hour - De-duplicating an email list before an import - Sorting a keyword dump before clustering it - Removing accidental repeats from a CSV column paste ## Good to know Duplicate handling keeps the first occurrence, so decide your preferred spelling before cleanup. Case-insensitive matching is usually what you want for emails and tags, exact matching for SKUs. Lists sometimes contain customer data — everything here runs in the browser, so nothing leaks. Related: [word counter](https://toolpantry.app/text-counter.html) and [keyword cluster tool](https://toolpantry.app/keyword-cluster-tool.html). ## Notes Blank lines are removed and each remaining line is trimmed. The original input stays unchanged in the top panel. ## FAQ **What can I clean?** Use it for keyword lists, email lists, domains, product SKUs, usernames, or any one-value-per-line text. **Does it upload my list?** No. Cleaning, sorting, copying, and downloading happen in the browser. --- # LLM Token Calculator — API Cost & Context Window > Count the tokens in your prompt and estimate the API cost across GPT, Claude, and Gemini models — with context-window fit. Runs locally in your browser. Source: https://toolpantry.app/llm-token-calculator ## About Paste a prompt, see the real token count, and compare what it costs to run on GPT, Claude, and Gemini — including whether it fits each model's context window. ## Quick answer How much will my prompt cost? Paste your prompt below, set the expected reply length, and the table shows the cost per call and per 1,000 calls for every major model. Token counting happens locally with the real GPT tokenizer — nothing is uploaded. ## How to estimate LLM API costs 1. **Paste the prompt** — system prompt plus user message; the tokenizer counts it exactly. 2. **Set the output size** — 500 tokens is a typical chat reply; long analyses run 2,000–8,000. 3. **Compare models** — the table shows cost per call and per 1,000 calls, plus whether the prompt fits the context window. ## Rules of thumb - **Output costs 4–6× input** — most of the bill comes from what the model writes, not what you send. - **1,000 tokens ≈ 750 words** — a dense page of text is roughly 500–700 tokens. - **Context limits matter** — a prompt over the window is rejected outright; check the "fits" column before building a long-document pipeline. - **Caching and batch cut costs** — cached input can be 10× cheaper and batch runs often 50% off; both are provider-specific and not shown here. ## Good to know Token counts differ between providers because each one splits text its own way — that is why the same paragraph can be 812 tokens on GPT and 845 on Claude. For budgeting, the ±10% difference is far smaller than the gap between model tiers. Related: [token counter](https://toolpantry.app/token-counter.html) for plain counting and [text chunker](https://toolpantry.app/text-chunker.html) for splitting long documents into context-sized pieces. ## Notes Prices per million tokens (input / output), checked October 2026 — providers change rates often, verify on their pricing pages. Counts use the o200k_base tokenizer (exact for current OpenAI models; ±10% for Claude and Gemini). Cached input and batch discounts are not included. ## FAQ **How accurate is the token count?** The calculator uses the real GPT tokenizer (o200k_base, the one behind current OpenAI models) for exact counts on GPT-family models. Claude and Gemini tokenize slightly differently — treat their counts as accurate within roughly ±10%. **Are the prices current?** Prices are checked periodically (last check: October 2026) and shown per million tokens, input and output. Providers change prices often — verify on the provider's pricing page before committing to a budget. **Is my prompt uploaded?** No. Token counting runs entirely in your browser with a locally loaded tokenizer, and nothing you paste is sent anywhere. --- # Loan Calculator — Payment, Interest & Extra Payments > Estimate fixed-rate loan payments, total interest, payoff time, extra-payment savings, and an amortization schedule locally. Source: https://toolpantry.app/loan-calculator ## About Estimate a fixed-rate loan payment, total interest, payoff timeline, and the effect of paying extra each month or once as a lump sum. ## Quick answer How do I calculate a loan payment? Enter the amount, rate, and term to get the monthly payment and total interest; extra payments are supported. ## How to calculate a loan payment 1. **Enter amount, rate, and term** — monthly payment, total interest, and total cost are computed together. 2. **Add recurring or one-time extra payments** — watch the payoff date move. 3. **Read the first-year amortization** — see how interest-heavy the early payments are. ## Choosing between loan offers - Two offers, different rates and terms — compare total cost, not just the monthly number - Car, personal, or student loans where the APR hides fees - Deciding if paying extra monthly is better than lump summing later ## Good to know The math is reducing-balance: early payments are mostly interest, which is why prepayments save the most when made first. The nominal rate here is not the APR — fees and insurance live outside this model, so treat results as planning estimates. For home loans specifically, the [mortgage calculator](https://toolpantry.app/mortgage-calculator.html) adds tax and insurance. ## Notes This models a fixed nominal annual rate with monthly compounding and principal-and-interest payments. It does not include fees, insurance, taxes, variable rates, lender-specific rounding, or prepayment rules. ## FAQ **How is the monthly payment estimated?** The page uses the standard fixed-rate amortization formula with the annual rate divided by 12. At zero interest, the principal is divided evenly across the number of payments. **What do extra payments change?** The regular payment stays the same while extra amounts reduce principal at payment time. That can shorten the payoff timeline and reduce interest; the page shows the difference against the baseline schedule. **Is this a lender quote?** No. It is an educational estimate. Actual loans can include APR differences, fees, daily interest, taxes, insurance, penalties, payment timing, and lender-specific rounding. --- # In-Browser Processing Benchmarks — Instant vs Seconds > Measured timings for in-browser processing: which operations are truly instant (lossless stream copy), which take seconds, and why. From our own tests. Source: https://toolpantry.app/local-processing-benchmarks ## About Browser-based processing has two tiers: operations that are truly instant (and provably lossless), and operations that re-encode and take seconds. We measured both. ## Quick answer The short version: trimming, muting, rotating, and remuxing a video finish in 0.0 seconds — they copy the original data instead of re-encoding it. Compressing or blurring video takes seconds to tens of seconds , scaling with clip length and your device's hardware encoder. ## Methodology Tests ran in Chrome 155 on macOS. The "instant tier" timings come from stream-copy operations on a 6-second 720p MP4 and were verified byte-for-byte (MD5 or pixel comparison). The "re-encode tier" timings come from our automated test environment, which runs in software mode (no GPU) — a regular browser on a laptop or phone with hardware acceleration is typically faster. Treat the second table as upper-bound-ish, not exact. ## Tier 1 — instant and lossless (0.0 seconds) | Operation | Test input | Time | Fidelity check | |---|---|---|---| | Trim video ([video trimmer](https://toolpantry.app/video-trimmer.html)) | 6 s 720p MP4, cut to 4 s | 0.0 s | Video stream bit-identical | | Remove audio ([mute video](https://toolpantry.app/mute-video.html)) | Same clip, audio dropped | 0.0 s | Video bitstream MD5-identical | | Rotate 90° ([rotate video](https://toolpantry.app/rotate-video.html)) | Same clip, metadata patch | instant | Zero pixel difference vs reference | | MOV → MP4 ([remux](https://toolpantry.app/mov-to-mp4.html)) | Same clip in .mov wrapper | 0.0 s | Video + audio bitstreams identical | | Rotate PDF pages ([pdf rotate](https://toolpantry.app/pdf-rotate.html)) | 3-page PDF | instant | Page attribute only; content untouched | These operations never decode a single frame. Trimming copies the video samples between two keyframes; muting leaves the audio track out; rotation writes a different display transform into the file header; remuxing rewrites the container index. That is why they take the same time for a 10-minute file as for a 10-second one — the limit is disk copy speed, not processing. ## Tier 2 — re-encode (seconds, scales with length) | Operation | Test input | Time (software mode) | |---|---|---| | Compress image ([image compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image.html)) | 1.13 MB photo | < 1 s | | Trim audio / export MP3 ([audio trimmer](https://toolpantry.app/audio-trimmer.html)) | 3.5 s MP3 | < 1 s | | Blur faces in video ([video face blur](https://toolpantry.app/face-blur-video.html)) | 6 s 720p clip | ~15 s | | Compress video ([video compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-video.html)) | 1 min 1080p clip | 10–40 s (typical laptop) | | Merge two clips ([merge video](https://toolpantry.app/merge-video.html)) | 2 × 6 s 720p → 12.1 s output | ~49 s | Re-encoding decodes every frame, draws or scales it, and encodes a new stream — the one quality generation that compression, blur, crop, and merge inherently cost. Two levers make it faster: a shorter clip (linear), and hardware acceleration (a real browser with GPU access, unlike our test harness). ## Why this matters for choosing a tool If your task is on the instant tier — cutting, muting, rotating, converting containers — a browser tool isn't just more private than a cloud service; it's *faster*, because there's no upload. If your task requires re-encoding, the browser is still private and often competitive, but the honest advice is: check the result, and keep the original. Our [compression benchmark page](https://toolpantry.app/compression-benchmarks.html) has the quality-side numbers; the [file size limits reference](https://toolpantry.app/file-size-limits.html) covers where the results need to land. ## FAQ **Why are some file operations instant and others take time?** There are two classes of operation. Lossless ones — trimming, muting, rotating, or remuxing a video — rearrange or re-label existing data without decoding it, so they finish as fast as the file can be copied (often under a second). Re-encoding operations — compressing video, blurring faces — must decode every frame and encode a new one, which takes seconds and scales with clip length. **Is the "instant" tier really lossless?** Yes, and we verify it. In our tests, a muted video's bitstream was MD5-identical to the source, a rotated video's frames matched a reference rotation with zero pixel difference, and a MOV-to-MP4 conversion produced identical video and audio bitstreams. The original data is copied, not re-created. **Does processing speed depend on my device?** Yes. Re-encoding uses your device's hardware encoder when available, so a modern phone or laptop can be several times faster than our headless test environment, which runs in software. Lossless operations depend mostly on disk read/write speed and are fast on any device. **How long does a typical video compression take?** On a normal laptop, a 1-minute 1080p clip typically takes 10–40 seconds to compress. Longer clips scale roughly linearly. In our software-only test environment, merging two 6-second 720p clips took about 49 seconds — hardware acceleration in a regular browser is significantly faster. **Why process files in the browser at all?** Two reasons: privacy and time. Nothing is uploaded, so sensitive files never leave your device — and you skip the upload/download round trip entirely. For lossless operations the browser is actually faster than any cloud tool, because there is nothing to transfer. --- # Lorem Ipsum Generator — Paragraphs, Words & HTML > Generate Lorem Ipsum placeholder text by paragraphs, sentences, words, or characters. Copy plain text, HTML, Markdown, or JSON locally. Source: https://toolpantry.app/lorem-ipsum-generator ## About Generate placeholder copy for mockups, prototypes, and test pages by paragraphs, sentences, words, or characters. Choose a format and copy it without leaving this browser tab. ## Quick answer How do I generate Lorem Ipsum? Pick paragraphs, words, or bytes and copy the placeholder text, classic opening included. ## How to generate placeholder text 1. **Pick the mode** — paragraphs, sentences, words, or characters. 2. **Choose the text bank** — classic Latin or plain English. 3. **Copy or download** — as text, HTML, Markdown, or JSON. ## Where placeholders actually help - UI mockups where text length must feel real - CMS and template testing before the copywriters arrive - Stress-testing layouts with realistic paragraph lengths ## Good to know Lorem ipsum’s superpower is being ignorable — stakeholders review layout instead of drafting copy in a design meeting. But when a demo needs to feel real, the plain-English bank reads like actual content. Match the language of the final product when testing line lengths — German runs 30% longer than English, which is how buttons break. ## FAQ **What can I use placeholder text for?** Use it to test layouts, spacing, typography, pagination, and component states before final copy is ready. Replace it before publishing customer-facing content. **Can I copy HTML or Markdown?** Yes. Choose HTML paragraphs, Markdown, or JSON from Output format, then use Copy output. The preview shows the exact text that will be copied. **Is anything sent to a server?** No. Word selection, formatting, copying, and download all happen locally in this browser tab. --- # Markdown Preview — Render Markdown to HTML Locally > Preview Markdown as HTML locally with headings, lists, links, blockquotes, and fenced code blocks. Source: https://toolpantry.app/markdown-preview ## About Write Markdown and see a clean HTML preview immediately. Copy the generated HTML or download a standalone file. ## Quick answer How do I preview Markdown? Type or paste Markdown and see the rendered HTML live — everything stays local. ## How to preview Markdown 1. **Paste or write Markdown** — headings, lists, links, code fences. 2. **Watch the live preview** — rendered next to your source. 3. **Copy the HTML or download it** — ready for a CMS or email. ## When you need a quick render - Drafting a README or docs page before pushing - Checking a tricky table or nested list will survive rendering - Converting Markdown to clean HTML for a newsletter or CMS ## Good to know This preview supports the common vocabulary — headings, emphasis, lists, links, blockquotes, code fences — and escapes HTML first, so nothing executes. Flavors differ at the edges (tables, footnotes, task lists vary by platform), which is why serious docs get a final check in their real renderer. Related: [HTML to Markdown](https://toolpantry.app/html-to-markdown.html) for the reverse trip. ## Notes This lightweight preview supports common headings, lists, links, emphasis, blockquotes, horizontal rules, and fenced code. It escapes HTML before rendering. ## FAQ **Can I use this for private notes?** Yes. The Markdown and generated HTML stay in this browser tab until you download or copy them. **Does it support every Markdown extension?** No. It focuses on the common syntax needed for notes, README files, checklists, and simple documentation. --- # Marketplace Fee Calculator — Net Proceeds and Seller Profit > Estimate marketplace fees, payment fees, listing fees, ads, fulfillment, net proceeds, and profit using your own rate card. Source: https://toolpantry.app/marketplace-fee-calculator ## About Estimate net proceeds and seller profit after platform commission, payment processing, listing fees, ads, fulfillment, and product cost. ## Quick answer How do I calculate marketplace fees? Enter the price and the platform's percentage fee to see what you keep per sale. ## How to calculate marketplace fees 1. **Enter your listing price** — and the marketplace’s referral percentage. 2. **Add payment processing and any fulfilment or ad fees** — rates stay editable. 3. **Read your net proceeds** — what actually lands in your account. ## Why fees need their own calculator - Referral + payment + fulfilment stack into a number nobody holds in their head - Rates change — and some change by category, price band, or country - Channel comparison needs net numbers, not gross ## Good to know Keep the rates editable because marketplaces update them regularly — re-run before each season. Compare net proceeds per channel against your [margin math](https://toolpantry.app/ecommerce-profit-margin-calculator.html) before committing inventory to a new marketplace. ## Notes Rates differ by platform, country, category, shipping method, and advertising program. This page keeps the assumptions editable rather than hard-coding a rate card. ## FAQ **Why use editable fees?** Marketplace fees change and often differ by country or category. Enter the rates shown in your seller account to keep the estimate current. **What is net proceeds?** Net proceeds are customer revenue minus the fees and fulfillment costs entered above. Profit then subtracts product cost. --- # MCP Config Generator — Claude Desktop, Cursor & VS Code > Generate MCP server configuration for Claude Desktop, Cursor, and VS Code — presets for filesystem, GitHub, SQLite, and more. Copy or download the JSON. Source: https://toolpantry.app/mcp-config-generator ## About Build the JSON that connects an MCP server to Claude Desktop, Cursor, or VS Code — pick a preset or enter your own command, copy, and restart your client. ## Quick answer How do I add an MCP server? Choose your client and a server preset (filesystem, GitHub, SQLite…), adjust the command and environment variables, then copy the generated JSON into the config file — the page shows the exact path and restart step for each client. ## How to add an MCP server to your AI client 1. **Install the runtime** — Node.js for npx-based servers, uv for uvx-based ones (one-time install). 2. **Generate the config** — pick the preset, set your paths or tokens, copy the JSON. 3. **Paste and restart** — drop it into the client's config file and restart the app; the server's tools appear in the assistant. ## Popular MCP servers to start with - **Filesystem** — let the assistant read and write files in a folder you choose. The classic first server. - **GitHub** — search repos, read issues, manage pull requests from chat. - **SQLite** — query a local database in plain language. - **Fetch** — pull a web page into the context as clean text. - **Memory** — a persistent knowledge graph the assistant can update across sessions. ## Good to know MCP servers run with your user's permissions — a filesystem server pointed at your home folder can read everything in it. Scope paths narrowly (one project folder beats /Users/you), keep tokens in environment variables, and review what a server does before enabling it. This generator is a static page: no config ever leaves your browser. Related: [AI agent readiness checker](https://toolpantry.app/agent-ready-checker.html) and [LLM token calculator](https://toolpantry.app/llm-token-calculator.html). Building a Python agent that calls a web-search HTTP API directly? See our [DeepSeek Search and Fetch API walkthrough](https://toolpantry.app/blog/deepseek-search-fetch-api-python) for the request bodies and a source-date pitfall. That example uses direct HTTP calls and is separate from this MCP configuration generator. ## Notes Secrets stay local: the config is generated in your browser and never sent anywhere. Only paste tokens you are comfortable placing in a local config file, and prefer environment variables over hardcoding keys. ## FAQ **What is MCP?** The Model Context Protocol is an open standard that lets AI assistants (Claude Desktop, Cursor, VS Code Copilot, and others) connect to external tools and data through small local or remote servers. This page generates the JSON configuration that registers such a server with your client. **Where do I put the generated config?** Claude Desktop reads claude_desktop_config.json from its app-data folder (the page shows the exact path per OS). Cursor reads .cursor/mcp.json in your project or home folder, and VS Code reads .vscode/mcp.json. Restart the client after saving. **Do I need Node.js or Python?** Most published MCP servers run via npx (Node.js) or uvx (Python). Install Node.js or uv once and the commands in the generated config will fetch and run the server on first launch. Remote HTTP servers need neither. --- # Meeting Agenda Generator — Create Focused Project Meetings > Create a focused project meeting agenda with purpose, topics, decisions, action items, and owners. Source: https://toolpantry.app/meeting-agenda-generator ## About Turn a few notes into a reusable agenda for a kickoff, review, or project status meeting. ## Quick answer How do I write a meeting agenda? Add topics with time boxes; the tool formats a clean agenda you can copy or print. ## How to build a meeting agenda 1. **State the purpose in one line** — if you can’t, cancel the meeting. 2. **List topics with timeboxes** — start with decisions needed, end with FYIs. 3. **Copy and send beforehand** — decisions and action items get their own section to fill in live. ## What an agenda fixes - Meetings that drift for 40 minutes and decide nothing - Client calls where you forgot to raise the thing that matters - “Who was supposed to do that?” — the action section answers it ## Good to know Send the agenda with the calendar invite and ask for additions 24 hours ahead; everything that arrives later becomes the next meeting’s list. Four or five topics is the useful limit — timebox to 25 or 50 minutes, not 60. Related: [onboarding checklist](https://toolpantry.app/client-onboarding-checklist.html) and [proposal generator](https://toolpantry.app/proposal-generator.html). ## Notes This is a planning template, not legal, tax, or contract advice. Review the final document before sending it. ## FAQ **Does this send anything to a client?** No. It only prepares text locally for you to review, copy, or download. **Can I customize the output?** Yes. Edit the fields, then copy the Markdown into your document, project workspace, or email. --- # Meme Generator — Free Meme Maker, No Watermark > Paste, drop or choose an image to make a free meme with no watermark. Add multiline captions that fit the image, customize text, and download a PNG locally. Source: https://toolpantry.app/meme-generator ## About Paste or choose your own image, add captions, and download a PNG. Your photo stays on your device. ## How to make a meme 1. **Choose, drop or paste an image** — your own photo, a screenshot, or the built-in sample. Files stay on your device. 2. **Add top and bottom text** — press Enter for a line break. Long words wrap and text shrinks to keep the two caption blocks apart. 3. **Download the PNG** — no watermark, and your image never leaves the browser. ## Where meme-style images get used - Social posts and community replies that need a human touch - Team chats, presentations, and newsletters - Explaining a feature or bug with zero slides ## Good to know The PNG keeps your image’s proportions, with its longest edge capped at 1400 pixels. Animated GIF input becomes a still image. Very long captions can become too small to read even when they fit; shorten the text before sharing. Use images you have the rights to — memes live and die by context, but copyright still applies to the base image. Keep captions short: they need to survive a phone screen, so 5–8 words per line is the sweet spot. Resize for each platform with the [social media size guide](https://toolpantry.app/social-media-size-guide.html). ## Notes Your image and captions are combined in this browser tab. Animated input is exported as a still PNG. ## FAQ **Can I use my own image?** Yes. Choose a JPG, PNG, WebP, or GIF image. It is decoded and rendered in this browser tab, then discarded when you leave or replace it. **How does the classic meme style work?** The default uses bold white captions with a black outline, wraps long lines to the image width, and positions one caption near the top and one near the bottom. You can change the font, colors, alignment, and outline width. **Is there a watermark or account?** No. The PNG is generated locally and contains only your source image and captions. **How do I keep meme text from being cut off?** Long words wrap and captions shrink to fit separate top and bottom areas. Press Enter for a manual line break. Very long captions can become small, so shorten the text for readability. --- # Audio Joiner — Merge MP3, WAV & M4A Into One File > Merge MP3s and other audio files into one track — arrange the order and join locally. No upload, no account, free. Source: https://toolpantry.app/merge-audio ## About Combine MP3, WAV, and M4A files into one continuous track — in the order you choose, on your device, with no upload. ## Quick answer How do I merge audio files for free? Add two or more files, arrange the order with the arrows, and press Merge to MP3 (or WAV for lossless). The tracks are decoded and joined sample-to-sample on your device — no gap, no upload. ## What "merging" means for audio Audio files are just long lists of samples. Merging decodes each file back to raw samples, glues the lists end to end, and encodes one new file. That's why mixed formats work here — an MP3 and a WAV become the same thing (raw samples) before they're joined. And because the glue happens at the sample level, there's no gap or fade between tracks unless the source files themselves contain it. ## Getting a good result - **Order first** — the list order is the playback order; reorder with the arrows before merging - **Trim the edges** — silence at the start or end of source files shows up in the merge; the [audio trimmer](https://toolpantry.app/audio-trimmer.html) removes it - **MP3 vs WAV** — MP3 (192 kbps) is small and universally compatible; WAV is lossless and roughly 10× the size - **Mono + stereo mixes fine** — mono files are spread to both channels when joined with stereo material ## Common uses Joining lecture recordings into one file. Combining song segments into a DJ-style mix. Stitching voice notes into a single memo. Merging practice takes for a teacher. And pairing with the [video to MP3](https://toolpantry.app/video-to-mp3.html) extractor: pull the audio out of several videos, then join them here. Related: [record a voice memo](https://toolpantry.app/voice-recorder.html) straight in the browser, [trim](https://toolpantry.app/audio-trimmer.html) it, and merge it with the rest. ## Notes Tracks join in the listed order — use ↑ / ↓ to reorder. Mixed formats and mixed mono/stereo work; everything is normalized internally before joining. ## FAQ **How do I merge MP3 files into one?** Add two or more audio files, arrange the order, and press Merge to MP3 (or WAV). The files are decoded and joined into a single continuous track on your device — nothing is uploaded. **Which audio formats can I merge?** Anything your browser can play: MP3, WAV, M4A/AAC, OGG, and FLAC. You can mix formats in one merge — everything is decoded to the same internal format first, so a WAV and an MP3 combine cleanly. **Will there be a gap or click between tracks?** No gap — the decoded audio is joined sample-to-sample. If the original files have silence at their edges you will hear that silence; trim it first with the audio trimmer for seamless transitions. **What quality is the merged MP3?** 192 kbps — transparent for speech, music playback, and sharing. If you want zero loss, export as WAV instead: it is a bigger file but an exact copy of the decoded audio. **Can I merge audio from videos?** Yes, if the file is an audio container like M4A. For sound inside MP4/MOV videos, extract it first with the video to MP3 tool, then merge the results here. --- # Merge PDF Files — Combine PDFs Locally > Merge multiple PDF files into one document locally in your browser. Reorder files before downloading. Source: https://toolpantry.app/merge-pdf ## About Join multiple PDFs in the order you choose. Pages stay in your browser while the combined document is created. ## Quick answer How do I merge PDF files for free? Add two or more PDFs, drag them into order, and download a single combined file. Merging runs in your browser with no upload, so confidential documents stay on your device. ## How to merge PDF files for free 1. **Add two or more PDFs** — drag to reorder them into the order you want. 2. **Merge** — pages are copied into a single document without re-compressing them. 3. **Download the combined PDF** — quality is preserved exactly as in the originals. ## Common merging jobs - Combining a contract with its appendices and signatures - Joining monthly bank or card statements into one file - Assembling study notes, reports, or scanned chapters ## Good to know Merging does not re-encode pages, so text stays sharp and file size is roughly the sum of the parts. If the result exceeds an upload limit, split the source documents first or check whether the portal accepts ZIPs. Related: [Split PDF](https://toolpantry.app/split-pdf.html) and [Extract PDF pages](https://toolpantry.app/extract-pdf-pages.html). ## Notes The source PDFs are read locally and copied into a new document. Encrypted or damaged PDFs may not be readable by the browser engine. ## FAQ **Can I reorder the PDFs?** Yes. Use the up and down controls to choose the order before clicking Merge PDFs. **Does merging reduce file quality?** The pages are copied into a new PDF without rasterizing them, so the page content stays vector or image-based. --- # Merge Videos — Combine Clips Into One MP4 > Merge videos into one MP4 — add clips, set the order, and join them locally. No upload, no watermark, free. Source: https://toolpantry.app/merge-video ## About Join your MP4 and MOV clips into a single continuous file, in the order you choose — locally, with no upload and no watermark. ## Quick answer How do I merge videos for free? Add your clips, arrange the order, press Merge . The tool decodes and re-encodes them into one MP4 on your device — a few minute-long clips take well under a minute. Nothing is uploaded. ## Why merging needs a re-encode Cutting, rotating, and muting can be done losslessly because they only rearrange the original data. Joining is different: two separate files have independent frame numbering, codec settings, and timelines, so the merge decodes each clip and writes one continuous new stream. Our merge does it in a single encoding pass — you pay one generation of quality, not one per clip. ## Getting a good merge - **Order matters** — use the ↑ / ↓ buttons to arrange clips; the first clip also sets the output size - **Mix orientations freely** — portrait and landscape clips both work; portrait phone footage is normalized upright automatically - **Similar clips merge cleanest** — same size and orientation throughout means no letterbox bars at all - **Check the join points** — play the merged file once to confirm the transitions land where you want ## When you'd use this Combining a few takes into one clip for a class project. Joining screen recordings into a single tutorial. Merging phone clips into one video before sending to family. Stitching dashcam segments. If the result is too large to share, the [compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-video.html) shrinks it next; if you need to cut something out first, use the [trimmer](https://toolpantry.app/video-trimmer.html) (which works without re-encoding). Honest limits: clips must be MP4/MOV with H.264/HEVC video and AAC audio; audio from clips with different audio settings is skipped rather than resampled, and the tool says so when it happens. ## Notes The output uses the first clip's size — other sizes are letterboxed, never stretched. Merging re-encodes once at a bitrate averaged from your clips, so keep the originals until you've checked the result. ## FAQ **How do I merge videos into one file?** Add two or more MP4 or MOV clips, arrange them in the order you want, and press Merge. The tool decodes and re-encodes them into a single continuous MP4 on your device — nothing is uploaded and there is no watermark. **What happens when the clips have different sizes?** The output uses the first clip's size. Other clips are scaled to fit and letterboxed with black bars — nothing is stretched or cropped. For the cleanest result, put a clip of the size you want first. **Is there a limit on file count or length?** No fixed limit — the merge runs on your device, so the practical limit is your computer's memory and patience. A handful of minute-long clips merges in well under a minute; long 4K footage takes longer since everything is re-encoded once. **Is the audio merged too?** Yes — audio from each clip is joined continuously in the same order, as long as the clips use AAC audio at the same sample rate. Clips with different audio formats get merged without their audio, which the tool reports honestly. **Do rotated phone clips work?** Yes. Clips that carry rotation metadata are normalized to their display orientation before merging, so portrait phone footage merges upright instead of sideways. --- # Meta Tag Generator — SEO & Open Graph Tags > Generate title, description, Open Graph, and Twitter card meta tags for a website. Runs locally in your browser. Source: https://toolpantry.app/meta-tag-generator ## About Generate a ready-to-paste title, description, Open Graph, and Twitter card block for a page. No URL or copy is uploaded. ## Quick answer How do I generate meta tags? Fill in the title, description, and URL; copy the ready meta, Open Graph, and Twitter tags. ## How to generate meta tags 1. **Fill title, description, canonical URL** — the trio every page needs. 2. **Add social fields** — Open Graph image and site name for link previews. 3. **Copy into the page head** — the generator escapes everything correctly. ## What each tag actually does - Title and description: the search snippet and the click-through rate - OG tags: how the link looks when pasted into chat apps and social feeds - Canonical: which URL is the “real” one when duplicates exist ## Good to know The description is a pitch, not a keyword dump — write the sentence a human would click. Missing OG tags do not hurt rankings, but they hurt every share, which is where a lot of tool-page traffic starts. Keep canonical pointing at the final URL, including the protocol and no tracking parameters. Related: [SERP preview](https://toolpantry.app/serp-preview.html) and [schema generator](https://toolpantry.app/schema-markup-generator.html). ## Notes The generator escapes characters for HTML attributes and leaves the final editorial decisions to you. Check the page title and description against your actual content. ## FAQ **What are Open Graph tags?** Open Graph tags help platforms such as Facebook, LinkedIn, and Slack choose the title, description, and image shown when a URL is shared. **How long should a meta description be?** A concise description around 150–160 characters is a useful starting point, but clarity and relevance matter more than hitting an exact limit. --- # Code Minifier — Minify JSON, HTML, CSS, and JavaScript > Minify JSON, HTML, CSS, or JavaScript locally in your browser. Remove unnecessary whitespace and comments without uploading code. Source: https://toolpantry.app/minify-tool ## About Remove comments and unnecessary whitespace from JSON, HTML, CSS, or JavaScript locally before you paste it into a project or CMS. ## Quick answer How do I minify CSS or JavaScript? Paste your code and get the minified version with the size savings shown — all locally. ## How to minify JSON, HTML, CSS, or JavaScript 1. **Paste your code** — pick the language. 2. **Minify** — whitespace and comments are stripped, size stats shown. 3. **Copy or download** — and always test the minified output before shipping it. ## When minifying pays - Shaving kilobytes off an inline snippet - Preparing a small JS file for a static deploy - Seeing how much of a file is just whitespace ## Good to know Minification is not optimization — it does not remove dead code or rename variables, it only compresses syntax. JavaScript is the risky one: missing semicolons at line boundaries can change behavior after joining lines, so test the result, and keep the readable source as the source of truth. Related: [formatter](https://toolpantry.app/html-formatter.html) (the reverse trip). ## Notes JSON is parsed and re-serialized. HTML, CSS, and JavaScript use lightweight browser-safe minification; review output in your build or test process before publishing. ## FAQ **Will my code leave this page?** No. The minifier operates on the text in this browser tab and creates no server request. **Why did JSON show an error?** JSON must be valid before it can be minified. Check commas, quotes, braces, and trailing commas. --- # Mortgage Calculator — Payment, Interest & Amortization > Estimate fixed-rate mortgage payments, taxes, insurance, HOA, PMI, total interest, and an amortization schedule locally. Source: https://toolpantry.app/mortgage-calculator ## About Estimate principal, interest, taxes, insurance, HOA, PMI, and the effect of an extra payment. The inputs stay in this browser tab and the schedule is an estimate for planning. ## Quick answer How do I calculate a mortgage payment? Enter the home price, down payment, rate, and term for the monthly payment, total interest, and amortization. ## How to estimate a mortgage payment 1. **Enter principal, rate, and term** — the principal-and-interest payment appears instantly. 2. **Add the carrying costs** — property tax, insurance, and HOA give the realistic monthly number. 3. **Try extra payments** — see how many years and dollars disappear from the schedule. ## Budget questions this answers - What can I actually afford per month, escrow included? - Is the 15-year loan worth the higher payment versus investing the difference? - How much faster does one extra payment per year pay off the house? ## Good to know The headline number from lenders is usually principal and interest only — taxes, insurance, and HOA stack on top, and that is the number your bank account feels. This is a fixed-rate model; ARMs, points, and closing costs are not modeled. Compare scenarios side by side with the [loan calculator](https://toolpantry.app/loan-calculator.html). ## Notes This is a fixed-rate planning estimate. Actual payments depend on the lender, rate lock, property taxes, insurance, mortgage insurance rules, fees, and local terms. Verify figures with a lender or qualified adviser before making a decision. ## FAQ **What does the monthly estimate include?** The headline adds the scheduled principal-and-interest payment to your estimated property tax, home insurance, HOA, and PMI inputs. It does not fetch local rates or add closing costs. **What does an extra payment change?** An extra monthly principal-and-interest payment can shorten the payoff time and reduce interest. The amortization table shows the modeled result; your lender's rules and payment application control the real outcome. **Is this a lending quote?** No. This page is an educational estimate, not a loan offer, underwriting decision, tax calculation, or financial recommendation. Check the assumptions and confirm them with a qualified professional. --- # MOSS Image Layout Editor — Draw Boxes & Export JSON > Draw a MOSS-Image layout, place exact text, and export centered bounding-box JSON. Free browser editor with editable drafts and a poster example. Source: https://toolpantry.app/moss-image-layout-editor ## About Place a heading, a subject, and the small print. Draw boxes, enter the exact words, and export the layout for your MOSS-Image workflow. --- # MOV to MP4 — Lossless, Instant, No Upload > Convert MOV to MP4 in seconds — the video and audio are copied byte-for-byte, not re-encoded. Free, local, nothing uploaded. Source: https://toolpantry.app/mov-to-mp4 ## About Rebuild a MOV as MP4 by copying the video and audio — no re-encoding, seconds not minutes, and nothing leaves your device. ## Quick answer How do I convert MOV to MP4 without losing quality? Load the MOV and press Convert to MP4 . The tool copies the H.264/HEVC video and AAC audio into an MP4 container — a "remux" — so it finishes in seconds with byte-identical video and audio. No upload, no re-encode. ## MOV and MP4 are cousins Both are built on the same box structure (ISO Base Media Format) — MOV is Apple's original version, MP4 is the standardized one everything accepts. If the codecs inside are already MP4-friendly (H.264 or HEVC video, AAC audio), converting is just rewriting the index: same data, new wrapper. That's why this tool takes seconds while "real" converters churn for minutes — they decode and re-encode every frame. ## Why upload-free matters here Videos are the most personal files most people convert — home footage, work recordings, kids' clips. Uploading them to a converter site means a copy sits on someone else's server with unknown retention. This tool never sends a byte: the whole conversion runs in your browser's memory. ## When you need it - **iPhone footage** — QuickTime .MOV files that portals and editors prefer as .MP4 - **Mac screen recordings** — QuickTime saves .MOV; upload forms often reject it - **Camera exports** — many cameras write MOV; MP4 plays on more TVs and apps - **Anywhere an upload bounces** — "unsupported format" messages usually mean this conversion ## After converting If the MP4 is too big for an upload limit, the [video compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-video.html) handles that next. For cutting, rotating, or muting the clip, the [trimmer](https://toolpantry.app/video-trimmer.html), [rotator](https://toolpantry.app/rotate-video.html), and [mute tool](https://toolpantry.app/mute-video.html) all work without re-encoding too. Honest limit: MOVs using PCM audio (older QuickTime recordings) or ProRes video can't be copied into MP4 losslessly — that needs a re-encode, and this tool will tell you when it sees one. ## Notes This is a container conversion, not a re-encode: the exact video and audio data are moved into an MP4 wrapper. iPhone and QuickTime MOVs convert losslessly; unusual codecs are detected and reported honestly. ## FAQ **How do I convert MOV to MP4?** Load the MOV file and press Convert. The H.264/HEVC video and AAC audio are copied into an MP4 container without re-encoding — it takes seconds even for large files, with zero quality loss, entirely on your device. **Does converting MOV to MP4 lose quality?** No. This is a container conversion (a remux): the video and audio data are copied byte-for-byte into a new MP4 wrapper. Nothing is decoded or re-encoded, so the picture and sound are identical to the original. **Why do most converters take so long?** Most online converters actually re-encode the video — decoding every frame and encoding it again, which takes time proportional to length and costs quality. A container conversion just rewrites the wrapper, so it finishes in seconds. **Which MOV files work?** MOV files with H.264 or HEVC video and AAC audio — which covers iPhone recordings, QuickTime exports, and most camera files. MOVs with PCM/LPCM audio or ProRes video need actual re-encoding, and the tool tells you when it hits one. **Will the MP4 play everywhere?** Yes — MP4 with H.264/HEVC video and AAC audio is the most universally accepted combination: browsers, phones, TVs, editors, and every upload portal. Rotation metadata from phone recordings is preserved. --- # Mute Video — Remove Audio Without Re-encoding > Remove the audio from an MP4 or MOV in one click — the video stream is copied untouched, so it's instant and lossless. No upload, no re-encoding, no watermark. Source: https://toolpantry.app/mute-video ## About Drop the soundtrack from an MP4 or MOV while copying the video stream untouched — instant, lossless, and nothing leaves your device. ## Quick answer How do I remove audio from a video? Load the MP4 or MOV and press Remove audio . The audio track is deleted and the video stream is copied byte-for-byte — seconds even for large files, with zero quality loss. The muted copy downloads automatically. ## What actually happens The tool unpacks the MP4, copies every video sample into a fresh file, and simply doesn't include the audio track. No frame is decoded or re-encoded, so the picture is bit-identical and the operation finishes in seconds — the time scales with disk speed, not video length. Rotation metadata from phone videos is preserved, so portrait clips stay portrait. ## When you'd want this - **Silent background loops** — for kiosks, websites, and signage where any soundtrack is unwanted - **Privacy** — recordings where conversations or background noise shouldn't travel with the file - **Replacing the soundtrack** — mute first, then add music in your editor of choice; a silent track never fights the new audio - **Upload portals** — some forms and platforms reject videos with audio, or you simply don't want them playing sound on review ## Honest limits This tool removes audio — it doesn't add or replace it. Input is MP4/MOV/M4V with H.264 or HEVC video; the output is an MP4. If you actually want the audio by itself (for a podcast clip, ringtone, or transcript), extract it first with the [video to MP3 tool](https://toolpantry.app/video-to-mp3.html) — the original keeps the audio either way. Need the file smaller too? Run it through the [video compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-video.html) after muting; dropping the audio track already saves a little size. ## Notes The video stream is copied, not re-encoded — a 10-minute clip takes about as long as a 10-second one. Play the preview to check the file before you mute it. ## FAQ **How do I mute a video?** Load the MP4 or MOV and press Remove audio. The audio track is dropped and the video stream is copied untouched — the whole thing takes seconds even for large files, with zero quality loss. **Does muting re-encode the video?** No. The video samples are copied byte-for-byte; only the audio track is left out of the rebuilt file. That is why it's instant and why the picture is identical to the original. **Can I get the audio back afterwards?** Your original file is never modified and still has the audio. The muted copy has no audio track at all. If you want the audio as a separate file, extract it with the video to MP3 tool first. **Why mute instead of setting the volume to zero in an editor?** A volume-zero edit still carries an audio track (silent audio) and requires re-exporting the whole video. A muted copy has no audio track at all, which is what upload portals, background-playback setups, and editors actually want — and it happens without re-encoding. **Which formats are supported?** MP4, MOV, and M4V with H.264 or HEVC video. The output is an MP4 with the same video stream and rotation metadata, minus the audio. Files with no audio track are detected and reported. --- # Number to Words Converter — Amounts, Checks & Invoices > Convert numbers and amounts into English words for checks, invoices, contracts, and plain text locally in your browser. Source: https://toolpantry.app/number-to-words ## About Spell out numbers for checks, invoices, contracts, receipts, or plain text. Choose a currency and letter case, then copy the exact wording from this browser tab. ## Quick answer How do I convert a number to words? Enter the amount to get it spelled out, including the check-writing format. ## How to convert numbers to words 1. **Enter the number** — amounts, counts, or long figures. 2. **Pick the format** — plain words, currency words, or check-writing style. 3. **Copy** — with case and decimal options that match your document. ## What needs numbers spelled out - The written amount line on checks and payment documents - Contracts and legal text where digits alone invite disputes - Invoices, receipts, and teaching materials ## Good to know Check conventions vary: some rules use "and" between groups, some do not, and hyphenation of compound tens ("twenty-one") is the usual standard. For binding documents, double-check the written form against the digits — a mismatch is the expensive kind of typo. Related: [invoice generator](https://toolpantry.app/invoice-generator.html) and [fraction calculator](https://toolpantry.app/fraction-calculator.html). ## Notes Currency and check modes accept up to two decimal places and use the selected currency's major/minor names. Plain mode reads decimal digits after “point.” This page spells text for documents; it does not verify a bank, invoice, or legal requirement. ## FAQ **What does check writing mode do?** It spells the whole major amount and writes the minor amount as a fraction over 100, such as “One Thousand Two Hundred Fifty and 75/100 Dollars Only.” **Can I use commas and negative numbers?** Yes. Commas and spaces are ignored around the number, and a leading minus sign becomes “Negative” in the output. Currency/check formats use at most two decimal places. **Does this support other languages?** This page intentionally outputs English only. It keeps the grammar predictable for overseas English-language checks, invoices, and contracts without loading a translation API. --- # OCR — Extract Text from Images Free (No Upload) > Extract text from images and screenshots with OCR that runs in your browser — English and Spanish, no upload, no account, no limits. Source: https://toolpantry.app/ocr ## About Pull the words out of screenshots, scans, and photos of documents — the OCR engine runs in your browser, so receipts and IDs never leave your computer. ## Quick answer How do I extract text from an image? Choose a screenshot or scan, pick the language, and press Extract text. The words appear in an editable box — copy them or download a .txt. First run downloads the engine (~8 MB, cached after). ## How to extract text from an image 1. **Choose the image** — screenshots give the best results, then flat scans, then photos. 2. **Pick the language** — English or Spanish; the model for that language loads once. 3. **Extract and edit** — the text lands in an editable box with a confidence score; fix any misreads and copy it out. ## What OCR is good for - **Screenshots** — pull a quote, error message, or table out of an image without retyping. - **Receipts and invoices** — digitize amounts and line items for expense reports. - **Old scans** — make text searchable again. - **Notes and whiteboards** — turn a photo of handwriting-adjacent print into editable text. ## Good to know OCR accuracy is mostly about the input image: straight, well-lit, and at least ~300px of width per text column. If a photo comes out skewed, straighten it first. The extracted text keeps line breaks but loses columns and formatting — for PDFs with a real text layer, use [PDF to text](https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-text.html) instead, which is exact. Related: [PDF to Word](https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-word.html) and [text to speech](https://toolpantry.app/text-to-speech.html). ## Notes Powered by Tesseract compiled to WebAssembly — the same open-source engine behind many desktop OCR tools, running locally. Works best on screenshots and straight, well-lit scans; skewed or blurry photos lose accuracy. The engine (~8 MB) is downloaded once and cached, after which the tool works offline. ## FAQ **How accurate is the OCR?** For clean screenshots and scanned documents, accuracy is typically 95%+. Photos of text taken at an angle, in poor light, or with small fonts do worse. Sharpen and straighten the image first — the tool reports a confidence score so you know when to double-check. **Which languages are supported?** English and Spanish are built in. The recognition model for the selected language is downloaded once (a few MB) and cached; more languages can be added to the page over time. **Is my image uploaded?** No. The OCR engine (Tesseract compiled to WebAssembly) runs inside your browser and your image never leaves your device — safe for receipts, IDs, and internal documents. --- # Open Graph Image Generator — Create a 1200×630 Social Image > Create a 1200x630 Open Graph social sharing image in your browser. Add a title, subtitle, colors, and a local image, then download a PNG without a watermark. Source: https://toolpantry.app/og-image-generator ## About Create a clean 1200 × 630 Open Graph image for blog posts, projects, and product pages. The canvas and optional image are processed locally. ## Quick answer How do I make an OG image? Compose a simple social preview image with your title and colors, then download the PNG. ## How to create an Open Graph image 1. **Enter the page title and subtitle** — the generator lays out a 1200×630 canvas. 2. **Preview at share-card size** — how it will actually look in chat apps and feeds. 3. **Download the PNG and reference it** — via the og:image meta tag. ## When link previews matter - Every page you promote on social or in group chats - Blog posts and docs where a blank preview looks broken - Tool pages that should look intentional when shared ## Good to know 1200×630 is the widely supported ratio; keep text large with generous margins — previews render small and get cropped in some layouts. The first share often gets cached, so fix the image before the launch post, not after. Related: [social media size guide](https://toolpantry.app/social-media-size-guide.html) and [meta tag generator](https://toolpantry.app/meta-tag-generator.html). ## Notes The downloaded PNG needs to be hosted at a public URL before social networks can fetch it. This page gives you the artwork and a starter tag block; it does not publish the image. ## FAQ **What size is an Open Graph image?** 1200 × 630 pixels is a widely used landscape starting point for link previews. Platforms may crop or scale it differently. **Can I use this for LinkedIn or Discord?** Yes. Many platforms read Open Graph metadata, but each platform can apply its own crop, cache, and display rules. --- # Online Timer & Stopwatch — Countdown, Pause and Laps > Use a precise browser countdown timer or stopwatch with presets, pause/resume, laps, fullscreen, and an optional completion beep. No account required. Source: https://toolpantry.app/online-timer ## About Start a precise local countdown or stopwatch with pause/resume, useful presets, laps, fullscreen focus, and an optional completion beep. ## Quick answer How do I set an online timer? Enter the duration and start; the timer runs in your browser tab and alerts you when it finishes. ## How to start a countdown or stopwatch 1. **Pick a mode** — countdown with presets, or stopwatch with laps. 2. **Start and control** — pause, resume, and reset without losing accuracy. 3. **Keep it running in the background** — the timer counts against a fixed deadline, so background-tab throttling cannot slow it down. ## What people actually time - Cooking, coffee, and workout intervals - Pomodoro study and focus blocks - Classroom activities and presentations ## Good to know The countdown recalculates from the real clock rather than counting ticks, so it stays correct even when your browser freezes the tab — the classic failure of naive online timers. The optional beep requires one interaction before it can play (browser audio rules, not a bug). Fullscreen mode makes the display readable across a room. Related: [time duration calculator](https://toolpantry.app/time-duration-calculator.html) and [world clock](https://toolpantry.app/world-clock.html). ## Notes Timing uses a deadline and the browser's monotonic performance clock, so a delayed background tab does not make the countdown accumulate interval drift. Audio can only start after you interact with the page. ## FAQ **Will the timer keep accurate time in another tab?** The display may update less often when a tab is in the background, but the remaining time is recalculated from a deadline when it paints again. It does not simply subtract one interval per tick. **Why did I not hear the beep?** Browsers block audio until a user gesture. Start the timer from this page, keep the sound option checked, and make sure the device is not muted. **Does this timer send data anywhere?** No. The timer and stopwatch state live in this browser tab. There is no account, server timer, or analytics payload containing your timing content. --- # Packaging Fit Calculator — Check Product and Box Dimensions > Check whether a product fits a shipping box with padding, test every rotation, and estimate box utilization. Source: https://toolpantry.app/packaging-fit-calculator ## About Check whether a product fits inside a carton after padding. The calculator tests all six product rotations and shows estimated box utilization. ## Quick answer How do I check if a product fits a box? Enter the product and box dimensions to see whether it fits and with how much room to spare. ## How to check if a product fits a box 1. **Enter the product dimensions** — the real ones, handle width included. 2. **Enter the box inner dimensions** — not the outside. 3. **Read the verdict** — fits, tight, or no — plus how much void space is left. ## Where fit checking pays off - Choosing a box size per product instead of "close enough" - Cutting dimensional weight — snug boxes are cheaper to ship - Reducing void fill and crushed corners at the same time ## Good to know Snug beats roomy for cost, but leave 1–2 cm of padding for protection — a box that only fits when nothing is wrapped is a returns generator. Always test with one real packed unit before ordering a thousand boxes. Related: [dimensional weight](https://toolpantry.app/dimensional-weight-calculator.html) and [shipping cost](https://toolpantry.app/shipping-cost-estimator.html). ## Notes This is a dimensional fit check. Fragility, compression, void fill, and carrier size limits still need a packaging review. ## FAQ **Does orientation matter?** Yes. A product can fit in one rotation and fail in another, so the tool checks all six rotations. **What does utilization mean?** It compares the product volume with the inside volume of the box. Padding is included in the fit check, not in the product-volume percentage. --- # Passport Photo Maker — Free, Print-Ready, 100% Local > Make a passport photo in your browser: pick your country's size, fit the face with eye-line guides, and download one photo or a 4×6 in sheet. Nothing uploaded. Source: https://toolpantry.app/passport-photo-maker ## About Pick your country's size, fit the face with eye-line guides, and download a print-ready photo — or a 4×6 in sheet with six copies. ## Quick answer How do I make a passport photo at home? Add a photo with a plain, light background, pick your country's size, then drag and zoom until the eyes sit between the dashed guides. Download the single photo or the 4×6 in sheet — nothing is uploaded. ## How to make a passport photo at home 1. **Take the photo right** — plain light wall, face the camera straight on, even lighting, neutral expression, no shadows on the face. 2. **Fit it in the frame** — pick your country's size below, then drag and zoom until the eyes sit between the dashed guides. 3. **Download and print** — the single photo is print-ready at 300 DPI; the 4×6 in sheet fits six copies for a kiosk print. ## Photo sizes by country | Country / document | Size | Pixels (300 DPI) | Head height | |---|---|---|---| | US passport / visa | 2×2 in (51×51 mm) | 600×600 px | 25–35 mm, eyes 28–35 mm from bottom | | UK, EU, India, Australia | 35×45 mm | 413×531 px | 32–36 mm | | China | 33×48 mm | 390×567 px | 28–33 mm | | Canada | 50×70 mm | 591×827 px | 31–36 mm | Requirements change and vary by document — always check your issuing authority's current rules before submitting. The eye-line guides in the tool use typical published ranges; treat them as a starting point. ## What makes a photo acceptable - **Plain, light background** — off-white, cream, or light gray, no objects behind you - **Face the camera directly**, eyes open, neutral expression, mouth closed - **Even lighting** — no shadows on the face or background, no flash glare - **No glasses** for US passports, and nothing covering the face - **Recent photo** — taken within the last six months ## Printing tips Print the sheet at **exactly 4×6 in (10×15 cm)** on photo paper — at home, or at any photo kiosk (choose "4×6, no border, actual size"). Cut along the light gray lines. If the portal only takes a digital upload and caps the file size, run the single photo through the [target-size compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb.html) — passport portals often stop at 240 KB or less. Need to trim the photo first? [Crop image](https://toolpantry.app/crop-image.html) handles the raw cut; sizing for email and portals is covered in our [guide with the measured numbers](https://toolpantry.app/blog/reduce-image-size-for-email-discord-passport). ## Notes Drag the photo to move it, scroll or use the slider to zoom. Use a photo with a plain, light background — this tool sizes and positions the photo, but does not remove backgrounds. ## FAQ **How do I make a passport photo at home?** Take a photo with a plain, light background, open this tool, pick your country's size, and drag or zoom so the eyes sit between the dashed guides. Download the single photo, or the 4×6 in sheet with six copies, and print it at a kiosk. **What size is a US passport photo?** 2×2 inches (51×51 mm). The head should be 1 to 1⅜ inches tall, with the eyes 1⅛ to 1⅜ inches from the bottom. This tool outputs 600×600 px at 300 DPI, print-ready. **Will the photo be accepted?** The tool gets the size and head position right, but acceptance also depends on the photo itself: plain background, even lighting, neutral expression, no shadows. Always check your issuing authority's current rules before submitting. **How do I print the 4×6 sheet?** Download the sheet and print it at exactly 4×6 inches (10×15 cm) on photo paper — at home, or at any photo kiosk. Cut along the light gray lines. **Is my photo uploaded?** No. Everything — sizing, positioning, and the print sheet — happens in your browser tab. The photo never leaves your device. --- # Password Generator — Strong Random Passwords Locally > Generate a random password locally with custom length, numbers, symbols, and letter options. Nothing is saved or uploaded. Source: https://toolpantry.app/password-generator ## About Create a random password in this browser. Nothing is uploaded, saved, or sent to an account. ## Quick answer How do I generate a strong password? Choose the length and character sets; passwords are generated locally with a secure random source. ## How to generate a strong password 1. **Choose the length and character set** — longer beats exotic complexity. 2. **Generate** — randomness comes from your browser, not a server. 3. **Copy into your password manager** — and save it before closing the tab. ## What actually makes passwords stronger - Length: every extra character multiplies the guessing effort - Uniqueness: one password per account — reuse is how breaches spread - Storage: a manager, not memory, not a notes app screenshot ## Good to know Generation happens entirely on your device — this tool never sees (and cannot save) your passwords. For passwords you must type by hand, a random four-word passphrase beats a short jumble of symbols. Related: [UUID generator](https://toolpantry.app/uuid-generator.html) for IDs that need uniqueness rather than secrecy. ## Notes For important accounts, use a password manager and a unique password. This page does not store your generated result. ## FAQ **How random is this generator?** It uses the browser's cryptographic random source when available and falls back to regular randomness only in older environments. **Should I reuse a generated password?** No. Use a different password for every important account and store it in a trusted password manager. --- # Payment Reminder Email Generator — Polite Invoice Follow-up > Write a polite payment reminder email for an overdue invoice. Choose a tone and copy the subject and message locally. Source: https://toolpantry.app/payment-reminder-email ## About Fill in a few details to create a friendly, firm, or final payment reminder email for an unpaid invoice. ## Quick answer How do I write a payment reminder email? Pick a friendly, firm, or final tone and fill in the details for a ready-to-send reminder. ## How to write a payment reminder email 1. **Pick a tone** — friendly for a first nudge, firm mid-way, final when the deadline is real. 2. **Fill in the facts** — invoice number, amount, due date, payment link or bank details. 3. **Copy into your email client** — three escalating drafts, zero awkwardness, generated locally. ## The standard escalation ladder - Day 1–3 past due: friendly check-in — assume it slipped through - Day 7–14: firm — restate terms, attach the invoice again - Day 30+: final — state next steps (late fees, pausing work) calmly ## Good to know Most late invoices are administrivia, not malice — the first email should assume exactly that. Keep every version short, factual, and free of sarcasm; it protects the relationship and your position at the same time. Related: [payment schedules](https://toolpantry.app/payment-schedule-calculator.html) front-load the awkwardness before work even starts. ## Notes The message is generated locally. Review the details and your agreement before sending a payment reminder. ## FAQ **Should I mention late fees?** Only mention a fee when it is already included in your agreement and allowed by local rules. Keep the first reminder factual and polite. **Does this send the email?** No. It only prepares text for you to review and paste into your email app. --- # Payment Schedule Calculator — Deposits & Milestones > Split a project total into a deposit, milestones, and final payment with clear amounts and percentages. Source: https://toolpantry.app/payment-schedule-calculator ## About Enter a project total and payment percentages to create a practical milestone schedule. ## Quick answer How do I split a project into payments? Enter the total, deposit percentage, and milestones for a clear payment schedule. ## How to build a payment schedule 1. **Enter the project total** — and any tax treatment you use. 2. **Set the deposit and milestone split** — percentages and amounts stay in sync as you edit. 3. **Copy the schedule** — paste it into the proposal or contract with dates. ## Where schedules earn their keep - Deposits that cover your risk before work starts - Milestone billing tied to deliverables, so invoices are never a surprise - Clients who need budget visibility across their own quarters ## Good to know A deposit is your insurance against a project stalling — 30–50% is common in service work, but check your industry norm. Milestones work best when attached to something the client can see (a design approved, a staging link delivered), not to your internal effort. Related: [proposal generator](https://toolpantry.app/proposal-generator.html) and [statement of work](https://toolpantry.app/statement-of-work-generator.html). ## Notes This is a planning template, not legal, tax, or contract advice. Review the final document before sending it. ## FAQ **Does this send anything to a client?** No. It only prepares text locally for you to review, copy, or download. **Can I customize the output?** Yes. Edit the fields, then copy the Markdown into your document, project workspace, or email. --- # PDF Metadata Remover — See & Strip Title, Author, XMP > See the metadata hiding in a PDF — title, author, scanner app, dates — and download a clean copy with the Info dictionary and XMP stripped. Runs locally. Source: https://toolpantry.app/pdf-metadata-remover ## About Author, software, scanner app, dates — see what the file carries, then download a clean copy with the metadata stripped. Content untouched. ## Quick answer How do I remove metadata from a PDF? Load the file to see its title, author, and software tags, then press "Download clean copy" — the Info dictionary and XMP block are removed and a new PDF is saved, all in your browser. Nothing is uploaded. ## What's hiding in a PDF - **Info dictionary** — Title, Author, Subject, Keywords, Creator and Producer (the apps), CreationDate and ModDate - **XMP** — an XML block many tools embed, repeating the same fields and sometimes adding more (including GPS in some scan apps) - **Structural leftovers** — fonts, layers, and embedded files can also carry names; this tool removes the standard metadata, not exotic payloads ## Who this is for Résumés and cover letters top the list: the Author field often carries your full name, and Producer reveals the software (or the scanner) you used. Then come scanned documents — some scan apps write their name and even a location into XMP — and anything shared publicly: reports, forms, templates. If a PDF goes on a job board, a forum, or a public link, strip it first. ## What "clean copy" does, exactly The tool deletes the Info dictionary from the trailer and removes the XMP metadata stream from the catalog, then re-saves the document. In our test, the output opened identically in viewers, kept the same page count, and a byte-level search found none of the original metadata strings. Dates get cleared too — a fresh clean file carries no "modified at" fingerprint. ## What it can't do Metadata removal is not redaction. Text and images on the pages stay exactly as they are — a name printed on page one is still there after cleaning. For images inside PDFs, and photos outside them, metadata is a separate story: the [EXIF viewer](https://toolpantry.app/exif-viewer.html) handles photos, and the [AI image checker](https://toolpantry.app/ai-image-checker.html) reads AI-source labels. Need the file smaller as well? Run the cleaned PDF through the [PDF compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-pdf.html) afterward — it also strips metadata as a side effect, though it rasterizes pages, so prefer this tool when you need selectable text. ## Notes The clean copy keeps every page and pixel; only the metadata structures (Info dictionary and XMP) are deleted. Encrypted PDFs can't be processed — remove the password first. ## FAQ **What metadata does a PDF contain?** Most PDFs carry an Info dictionary: title, author, subject, keywords, the app that created and produced the file, and creation/modification dates. Many also embed XMP — an XML block that can repeat all of the above and sometimes more. **How do I remove metadata from a PDF?** Load the file here, review what's inside, and press Download clean copy. The tool deletes the Info dictionary and the XMP block, then saves a new PDF — all in your browser, nothing uploaded. **Does removing metadata change the PDF content?** No. Pages, text, images, and layout are untouched — only the metadata structures are removed. In our test, the output opened identically and no metadata strings remained in the file bytes. **Why does PDF metadata matter?** Résumés reveal your name and the software you used, scanned documents reveal the scanner app (and sometimes its location), and shared reports reveal their author and revision dates. If you're posting a PDF publicly, strip it first. --- # Delete PDF Pages — Remove Unwanted Pages Locally > Delete pages from a PDF in your browser — type the page numbers or ranges (2, 5-7) and download a clean copy. Nothing is uploaded, no account needed. Source: https://toolpantry.app/pdf-page-delete ## About Type the page numbers or ranges to remove and download a clean PDF — remaining pages stay exactly as they were. All local. ## Quick answer How do I delete pages from a PDF? Load the file, type what to remove — like 2, 5-7 — and press "Delete pages & download". The new PDF keeps everything else untouched; nothing is uploaded. ## How to delete pages from a PDF 1. **Add the PDF** — the page count is detected locally in your browser. 2. **List the pages** — single numbers or ranges, comma-separated: 1, 4-6, 12. 3. **Download the cleaned copy** — everything you didn't list stays byte-for-byte as it was. ## Common reasons people remove pages - **Scans with blank or duplicated pages** — the classic 20-page scan with three duds - **Printing only part of a document** — strip the appendix before sending to the printer - **Privacy cleanup** — a bank statement page you don't want to share - **Before compressing** — fewer pages means a smaller file before you run [Compress PDF](https://toolpantry.app/compress-pdf.html) ## Good to know Deleting pages is not redaction of *content*: anything printed on the remaining pages stays exactly as it is. Need a single page extracted instead? [Extract PDF pages](https://toolpantry.app/extract-pdf-pages.html) pulls pages out into a new document, and [Split PDF](https://toolpantry.app/split-pdf.html) breaks a file into parts. For sharing the result, the [PDF compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-pdf.html) often shrinks scans dramatically, and [PDF metadata remover](https://toolpantry.app/pdf-metadata-remover.html) clears the author fields before it leaves your desk. ## Notes Ranges are inclusive and 1-based: "5-7" removes pages 5, 6, and 7. The output is rebuilt page-by-page, so removed content is fully dropped from the file bytes (and document metadata is cleared along the way). Keep the original file — this tool writes a new PDF. ## FAQ **How do I delete pages from a PDF?** Load the PDF, type the pages to remove — single numbers or ranges like 2, 5-7 — and press Delete pages. The tool saves a new PDF with those pages gone; the original file is untouched. **Can I delete several ranges at once?** Yes. Combine numbers and ranges separated by commas: 1, 4-6, 12 removes page 1, pages 4 through 6, and page 12 in one pass. **Is the rest of the PDF changed?** No. Remaining pages keep their content, layout, and quality exactly — only the pages you list are removed. Bookmarks and form fields that pointed at removed pages may not carry over, which is true of every PDF editor. **Is my PDF uploaded?** No. The whole edit happens in your browser with a bundled PDF engine — the file never leaves your device. --- # Rotate PDF — One Page or All Pages, Free > Rotate PDF pages — all pages or just one — and save. Thumbnails update live, nothing is uploaded, and the rotation is written into the file itself. Source: https://toolpantry.app/pdf-rotate ## About Click any page to turn it 90° — or rotate the whole document at once. Live thumbnails, local processing, nothing uploaded. ## Quick answer How do I rotate pages in a PDF? Load the PDF, click a page thumbnail to rotate it 90° clockwise (click again for 180°), or press Rotate all . Press Save PDF — the rotation is written into the file itself, and nothing was uploaded. ## How PDF rotation actually works Every page in a PDF can carry a rotation attribute — "display me at 90°" — without touching the actual content. That's what this tool changes: a small value in the page dictionary. Text stays selectable, images stay full-resolution, and the file size barely moves. It's the same mechanism scanners use when they write sideways pages in the first place. ## The sideways-scan problem The most common case: a stack of pages fed through a scanner at the wrong orientation, or phone photos saved into a PDF. The result is a document where half the pages need a 90° turn. Fixing it used to mean a desktop app or a re-scan; here it's a click per page and a save. ## Getting a good result - **Click, look, click again** — each click turns a page 90°; the thumbnail updates immediately, so stop when it looks right - **Mixed orientations are fine** — rotate each page independently; the badge shows the current rotation per page - **Save once at the end** — all your rotations are written together in one pass - **Check the badge** — a page that already had 90° of rotation plus your 90° shows 180°, which is usually a sign to click once more or press Reset ## Related PDF fixes Deleting bad pages? The [page deleter](https://toolpantry.app/pdf-page-delete.html) does it without leaving data behind. Merging documents? Try the [PDF merger](https://toolpantry.app/merge-pdf.html). Stripping metadata before sharing? The [metadata remover](https://toolpantry.app/pdf-metadata-remover.html) handles that. And if the PDF is just too heavy to send, the [compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-pdf.html) is the next step. ## Notes Click a page to rotate it 90° clockwise; the badge under each page shows its rotation. Pages that came rotated (scans, phone captures) are handled correctly — your click is added to whatever rotation the page already has. ## FAQ **How do I rotate a PDF?** Load the PDF and click any page thumbnail to rotate it 90° clockwise — or press Rotate all for the whole document. Press Save and the rotation is written into the PDF. Nothing is uploaded. **Can I rotate just one page instead of all pages?** Yes. Each page rotates independently — click the sideways page as many times as needed (90° each click) and leave the rest alone. The thumbnails update live so you can see the result before saving. **Does rotating a PDF change its quality?** No. Rotation is stored as a page attribute in the PDF structure — the text, images, and vectors are untouched. The file stays exactly as sharp as the original, just displayed at a new angle. **How do I fix a scanned document that's sideways?** Load the scan, click the pages that are sideways until they're upright, and save. Scanned PDFs are the most common rotation case — this fixes them without re-scanning or any other app. **Is my PDF uploaded anywhere?** No. The PDF is read, rotated, and saved entirely inside your browser. It never touches a server — you can verify in your browser's network panel. --- # PDF to JPG / PNG — Convert PDF Pages to Images Locally > Convert PDF pages to JPG or PNG locally, keeping page order and orientation. Download one image or a ZIP, choose resolution, and keep your original PDF. Source: https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-jpg ## About Render every page as a JPG or PNG you can drop into slides, chats, or design tools. Conversion runs on your device. ## Quick answer How do I convert a PDF to JPG for free? Choose a PDF, pick the output format and quality, then download the images. Multi-page documents arrive as a single ZIP — the document never leaves your browser. ## Choose the pages and resolution you need This converter renders the complete document. To export only selected pages, first make a smaller copy with [Extract PDF pages](https://toolpantry.app/extract-pdf-pages). JPG uses lossy encoding; PNG encodes the rendered pixels losslessly. Neither output preserves selectable text, vector objects, working links or interactive form fields. PDF page rotation and visible crop areas are applied to the exported images. ## How to convert PDF pages to images 1. **Add your PDF** — the page count is detected locally in your browser. 2. **Choose JPG or PNG and a quality level** — 2× doubles pixel width and height compared with 1×; it cannot restore missing source detail. 3. **Download** — a single page saves directly; longer documents arrive as one ZIP. ## Which format should I pick? - **JPG** for photos, slides, chat messages, and smaller files - **PNG** for text-heavy pages, screenshots, charts, and line art - **ZIP** for long documents — unzip and pick the pages you need ## Good to know Every page is rasterized at the resolution you choose, so vector text becomes pixels: perfect for sharing and previews, but not for further editing. Need a PDF again later? Rebuild one from images with [JPG to PDF](https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-pdf.html). Big scans are a different job — shrink them with [Compress PDF](https://toolpantry.app/compress-pdf.html), or combine documents first with [Merge PDF](https://toolpantry.app/merge-pdf.html). ## Notes Pages are re-encoded as images — text will no longer be selectable in the exported files. Large documents can take a moment; keep this tab open until the download starts. ## FAQ **Are my PDF files uploaded?** No. The PDF is opened, rendered, and converted inside your browser. **How are the pages downloaded?** A single-page PDF downloads as one JPG or PNG. Multiple pages download as one ZIP, with numbered filenames in document order and the visible page orientation retained. **Can I convert just some pages?** This tool converts the complete document. Use the linked Extract PDF pages tool first to make a copy containing only the pages you want. **Is PNG export lossless?** PNG losslessly encodes the rendered pixels. It does not preserve the PDF’s selectable text, vectors, working links or interactive form fields. Export resolution still controls how much detail is represented. **What are the export limits?** PDF input is limited to 60 MB. Each output page is limited to 16 megapixels and 16,384 pixels per side; all encoded page images together are limited to 100 MB. If a limit is exceeded, the batch is not downloaded. Lower resolution or split the source document first. --- # PDF to PNG — Export Page Images Locally > Convert PDF pages to JPG or PNG locally, keeping page order and orientation. Download one image or a ZIP, choose resolution, and keep your original PDF. Source: https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-png ## About Render every page as a PNG at your chosen resolution — converted on your device, nothing uploaded. ## Quick answer How do I convert a PDF to PNG? Choose a PDF, keep PNG selected as the format, pick a quality level, then download. Multi-page documents arrive as a single ZIP — the PDF never leaves your browser. ## Choose the pages and resolution you need This converter renders the complete document. To export only selected pages, first make a smaller copy with [Extract PDF pages](https://toolpantry.app/extract-pdf-pages). JPG uses lossy encoding; PNG encodes the rendered pixels losslessly. Neither output preserves selectable text, vector objects, working links or interactive form fields. PDF page rotation and visible crop areas are applied to the exported images. ## How to convert PDF pages to PNG 1. **Add your PDF** — the page count is detected locally in your browser. 2. **Pick a quality level** — Best renders at twice the pixel width and height of 1×. 3. **Download** — a single page saves directly; longer documents arrive as one ZIP of PNGs. ## When PNG is the right choice - **Text-heavy pages** — contracts, papers, receipts: no JPEG ringing around letters - **Charts and diagrams** — flat colors and thin lines stay clean - **Screenshots inside PDFs** — pixel-perfect when you'll re-edit or measure - **Slides and thumbnails** — export enough pixels for the intended display size ## Good to know PNG files run larger than JPG — if you're sharing over chat or email, [PDF to JPG](https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-jpg.html) is the smaller option, or run the PNGs through the [1 MB compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-1mb.html) afterward. Need the pages back as a document? Rebuild with [JPG to PDF](https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-pdf.html) (PNG works there too), or shrink the source instead with [Compress PDF](https://toolpantry.app/compress-pdf.html). ## Notes Pages are rasterized at the resolution you choose. PNG preserves those rendered pixels without additional compression loss; text is no longer selectable. Large documents can take a moment; keep this tab open until the download starts. ## FAQ **Are my PDF files uploaded?** No. The PDF is opened, rendered, and converted inside your browser. **How are the pages downloaded?** A single-page PDF downloads as one JPG or PNG. Multiple pages download as one ZIP, with numbered filenames in document order and the visible page orientation retained. **Can I convert just some pages?** This tool converts the complete document. Use the linked Extract PDF pages tool first to make a copy containing only the pages you want. **Is PNG export lossless?** PNG losslessly encodes the rendered pixels. It does not preserve the PDF’s selectable text, vectors, working links or interactive form fields. Export resolution still controls how much detail is represented. **What are the export limits?** PDF input is limited to 60 MB. Each output page is limited to 16 megapixels and 16,384 pixels per side; all encoded page images together are limited to 100 MB. If a limit is exceeded, the batch is not downloaded. Lower resolution or split the source document first. --- # PDF to Text — Copy or Download the Words, Locally > Extract the text from a PDF in your browser — copy it or download a .txt with page markers. Selectable-text PDFs only; nothing is uploaded. Source: https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-text ## About Pull the text layer out of any selectable-text PDF — copy it or download a .txt with page markers. All local, nothing uploaded. ## Quick answer How do I extract text from a PDF? Load the file and press "Extract text" — the words appear with page markers, ready to copy or download as .txt. Works on PDFs with selectable text; scanned pages have no text layer and need OCR instead. ## How to extract text from a PDF 1. **Add the PDF** — page count is detected locally. 2. **Press Extract text** — every page's text layer is read in order, with page markers. 3. **Copy or download** — paste into notes, translate it, or save the .txt for later. ## What it's good for - **Quotes and citations** — pull exact wording out of papers and reports - **Notes from e-books and manuals** — grab the sections you need without retyping - **Feeding other tools** — count words, translate, or check a document's length with the [word counter](https://toolpantry.app/text-counter.html) and [token counter](https://toolpantry.app/token-counter.html) ## When it can't help Scanned documents are images of pages — there's no text layer to read, and this tool will honestly report "no text found". That's a job for OCR software, which we deliberately don't offer (browser OCR quality is a lottery). If you need the pages as crisp images instead, [PDF to PNG](https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-png.html) renders them at any resolution, and [PDF to JPG](https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-jpg.html) keeps it lighter. ## Notes Output is plain text in reading order — layout, tables, and columns are flattened. Scanned PDFs (photos of pages) contain no text layer; this tool will tell you when it finds nothing. ## FAQ **How do I extract text from a PDF?** Load the PDF, press Extract text, and the full document text appears with page markers. Copy it or download a .txt file — everything runs in your browser. **Why is the text empty or garbled?** That happens with scanned PDFs: they're photos of pages, so there is no text layer to extract. This tool reads selectable text only — scanned documents need OCR, which we don't do. **Does it keep the layout?** No. The output is plain text in reading order — great for copying quotes, notes, and references, but tables and columns come out flattened. For visual fidelity use PDF to PNG instead. **Is my PDF uploaded?** No. The text layer is read locally by a bundled PDF engine — the document never leaves your device. --- # PDF to Word — Convert PDF to DOCX Free (No Upload) > Convert a PDF to an editable Word (DOCX) file locally in your browser. Text is extracted with paragraph structure — no upload, no account, no watermark. Source: https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-word ## About Turn a PDF into a Word (.docx) file you can actually edit — text extracted with paragraph structure, assembled locally in your browser, no upload. ## Quick answer How do I convert PDF to Word? Choose your PDF, press Convert to Word, and download the .docx. The text is read locally with paragraphs and page breaks; nothing is uploaded and no account is needed. ## How to convert a PDF to Word 1. **Choose the PDF** — the page count is detected in your browser. 2. **Convert** — each page's text is read line by line and rebuilt as paragraphs. 3. **Download the .docx** — open it in Word, Google Docs, or LibreOffice and edit. ## What converts well (and what does not) - **Great:** reports, contracts, articles, letters — anything mostly made of text. - **OK:** simple lists and headings; they arrive as plain paragraphs you can restyle. - **Not supported:** scanned pages (no text layer), complex tables, multi-column magazine layouts, and images. ## Good to know The DOCX format is a small package of XML files — this tool assembles it entirely on your device, which is why nothing needs to be uploaded. If the PDF is a scan, convert it with [PDF to JPG](https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-jpg.html) to see the pages as images, or copy the text manually. Related: [PDF to text](https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-text.html) for plain text and [Merge PDF](https://toolpantry.app/merge-pdf.html) to combine documents first. ## Notes The output is text-focused: paragraphs and page breaks come through, but fonts, columns, tables, and images do not. It is the right tool for editing the words in a PDF — for preserving a complex design, use a desktop converter. ## FAQ **Does the Word file keep the original layout?** It keeps the text with paragraph structure, but not the visual layout: fonts, columns, tables, images, and headers are not reproduced. The result is a clean editable document you can reformat in Word — ideal for editing text rather than preserving a design. **Can it convert a scanned PDF?** No. Scanned PDFs are photos of pages with no text layer, so there is nothing to extract — they need OCR, which this tool does not do. The tool tells you when it finds no text. **Is my PDF uploaded?** No. The conversion runs entirely in your browser: the PDF is read locally and the DOCX is assembled on your device. --- # 7 Best PDF24 Alternatives in 2026 (Free & No Sign-Up) > Seven honest PDF24 alternatives for 2026: the best free and local tools for merging, splitting, compressing, and converting PDFs without uploading or signing up. Source: https://toolpantry.app/pdf24-alternatives ## About PDF24 is one of the few genuinely free PDF suites, and its Windows desktop app is a quiet gem. The web tools, though, still upload your files and carry ads. If you are looking for something lighter, faster, or more private, these seven alternatives cover the realistic options. ## Quick answer Short answer: Tool Pantry is the closest web equivalent — free, no ads, no sign-up, and files never leave your device. Keep PDF24's desktop app in mind for heavy Windows batch work. ## FAQ **Is PDF24 really free?** Yes — the web tools and the Windows desktop app are free and ad-supported. The trade-offs are uploads (web), ads, and Windows-only for the desktop version. Tool Pantry takes a different route: free, no ads, and nothing ever leaves your browser. **Do I have to upload my files to use these alternatives?** No — and that is the main difference in this list. Tool Pantry processes everything locally in your browser: files never leave your device. The other services in these lists are server-based, so their files are uploaded. For sensitive documents, prefer a local tool. **Are these alternatives really free?** Mixed. Tool Pantry is fully free with no limits. Most others are freemium: a free tier with caps (documents per day, file size, tasks per hour) plus a paid plan. The lists above state the realistic free limits for each. --- # Percentage Calculator — Percent Of, Change, Increase > Calculate percentages locally: X% of Y, what percent one number is of another, percentage change, increase or decrease, and reverse percentages. Source: https://toolpantry.app/percentage-calculator ## About Choose the question you actually have, see the formula, and copy the result. Everything runs locally for prices, grades, tips, growth, discounts, and everyday math. ## Quick answer How do I calculate percentages? Enter the numbers to solve percent-of, percent-change, and "what percent" questions. ## How to calculate percentages in every direction 1. **Pick the mode** — percent-of (X% of Y), percent change, increase/decrease, or reverse (Y is X% of what?). 2. **Enter the numbers** — the answer updates live. 3. **Copy the result** — formula shown, so you can double-check the logic. ## Everyday percentage jobs - Discounts and tax — pair with the [discount calculator](https://toolpantry.app/discount-calculator.html) - Grades and score improvements - Business metrics: growth rates, margins, conversion deltas ## Good to know Percent change and percentage points are different animals: going from 5% to 7% is +2 percentage points but a +40% relative change — reports love to blur this line. Reverse mode is the one people search for most: “the sale price is $80 after 20% off — what was the original?” ($100). Related: [fraction calculator](https://toolpantry.app/fraction-calculator.html). ## Notes The calculator shows the denominator used by each formula. For percentage change, the starting value is the baseline; a move from 80 to 100 is a 25% increase. ## FAQ **What is the difference between percentage change and percentage points?** Percentage change compares the difference with the original value. Percentage points describe the direct difference between two rates, such as 15% to 20% being a 5 percentage-point increase but a 33.33% relative increase. **How do I calculate a discount or tax?** Use “Increase or decrease Y by X%”. Choose decrease for a discount and increase for tax or a surcharge. The output shows both the change and the final amount. **Does this send my numbers anywhere?** No. All formulas, formatting, and copy actions run in this browser tab. --- # Photo Collage Maker — Combine Photos into One Image > Make a photo collage in your browser: pick a grid, drop your photos, and download one clean image. No upload, no watermark, no signup. Source: https://toolpantry.app/photo-collage ## About Combine photos into a collage with grid layouts, gaps, and output sizes made for social media — all in your browser. ## Quick answer How do I make a photo collage? Add your photos, pick a grid and output size, and download the combined image. Everything runs locally — no watermark and no upload. ## How to make a photo collage 1. **Add your photos** — selection order becomes the grid order. 2. **Pick a grid and size** — square for feeds, portrait for stories, wide for covers. 3. **Download** — one PNG, exactly as previewed. ## When this is handy - Before/after shots and renovation recaps - Travel or event recaps for social media - Selling multiple items in one listing photo ## Good to know The output is a flat PNG — sharp, share-ready, and watermark-free. Add a title or caption afterwards with [Add text to photo](https://toolpantry.app/add-text-to-photo.html); for platform-specific dimensions see the [social media size guide](https://toolpantry.app/social-media-size-guide.html). Want the photos animated instead of arranged? [Images to GIF](https://toolpantry.app/images-to-gif.html) turns a set into a loop. ## Notes Photos are cropped to fill their cell (cover fit), so edges may be trimmed — crop precisely first with [Crop image](https://toolpantry.app/crop-image.html) if the framing matters. ## FAQ **How many photos can I use?** Up to the grid size — a 2×2 grid takes four photos, 3×3 takes nine. Extra photos are ignored and empty cells stay as background. **Is there a watermark?** No. The downloaded collage is exactly what the preview shows — no watermark, no logo, no signup. **Are my photos uploaded?** No. The collage is composed inside your browser tab; the photos never leave your device. --- # PNG to ICO — Multi-Size favicon.ico, Made Locally > Convert a PNG, JPG, or WebP logo into a multi-size .ico file (16–256 px) right in your browser — one favicon.ico for browsers and Windows. Nothing is uploaded. Source: https://toolpantry.app/png-to-ico ## About Turn a square logo into a proper multi-size favicon.ico — 16 to 256 px packed into one file, transparency kept, made in your browser. ## Quick answer How do I convert a PNG to ICO? Add the logo, tick the sizes you want (16, 32, 48 is the common set), and download favicon.ico. Every size lives in one file, so browsers and Windows pick what they need. Nothing is uploaded. ## How to make a favicon.ico from a PNG 1. **Start square** — 512×512 or 1024×1024 logos convert cleanly; non-square images get center-cropped. 2. **Pick sizes** — 16 (tab), 32 (taskbar), 48 (desktop shortcut) is the classic trio; add 256 if you want Windows high-DPI and the app list covered. 3. **Download and reference it** — drop favicon.ico at your site root and add . ## What's inside the .ico An .ico is a tiny container: a directory listing each image and its size, followed by the images themselves. This tool embeds PNG data for every entry — a format Windows has accepted since Vista and every modern browser understands. Because the PNGs are generated at each target size (not scaled by the browser), the 16 px version stays sharp where it matters most. ## ICO vs PNG favicons - **favicon.ico** — the safe default: browsers request it automatically at the site root, and Windows uses it for shortcuts - **PNG icons** — needed separately for Apple touch icons, Android, and web app manifests; grab those from the [favicon generator](https://toolpantry.app/favicon-generator.html) - **SVG** — crisp at any size but ignored by older browsers; fine as an upgrade, not a replacement ## Good to know Keep the file under a few KB — a 16/32/48 set from a simple logo usually lands between 2 and 15 KB. If your source logo is a photo, simplify it first: a favicon is read at 16 px, where detail turns to mud. Trimming or cropping the logo? [Crop image](https://toolpantry.app/crop-image.html) handles that; shrinking a heavy source first with the [100 KB compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb.html) keeps things tidy. ## Notes Non-square images are center-cropped to a square. Prefer separate PNG files for Apple touch icons and web app manifests? The [favicon generator](https://toolpantry.app/favicon-generator.html) makes those too. ## FAQ **How do I convert a PNG to ICO?** Add your logo, tick the sizes you want (16, 32, and 48 cover most uses), and download favicon.ico. The file packs every size into one .ico — browsers and Windows each pick what they need. **Which sizes should I include?** 16 and 32 are the classic browser tab sizes; 48 for desktop shortcuts; 256 for Windows high-DPI and app lists. A 16+32+48 set is the common default — the full set costs only a few KB more. **Does Windows accept PNG inside ICO?** Yes — since Windows Vista, .ico files may contain PNG images, and every modern browser accepts them too. This tool writes PNG-embedded icons, which keep transparency and look crisp. **Is my logo uploaded?** No. The conversion and the .ico file are built entirely in your browser tab. --- # PNG to JPG Converter — Convert PNG Images Locally > Convert PNG images to JPG locally in your browser. Choose JPEG quality and a background color for transparent pixels. Source: https://toolpantry.app/png-to-jpg ## About Convert a PNG into a widely compatible JPG with a quality slider and an explicit background color for transparent areas. ## Quick answer How do I convert PNG to JPG? Add the PNG, choose a background color for transparent areas, and download the JPG. ## How to convert PNG to JPG 1. **Add your PNG** — drop it in; transparency is flattened onto a background color you pick. 2. **Adjust the quality** — the slider trades file size against sharpness; 80–85% suits most photos. 3. **Download the JPG** — much smaller for photos, produced entirely in your browser. ## When PNG-to-JPG is the right move - Photo-heavy files heading to email or upload portals - Screenshots that are megabytes larger than they need to be - Sites and apps that reject PNG uploads ## Good to know JPG is dramatically smaller for photographic content, but slightly softens crisp text — for screenshots with lots of small text, [WebP](https://toolpantry.app/png-to-webp.html) often keeps both sharpness and a small size. Transparency is lost in JPG, so transparent PNGs get a solid background; keep PNG if you need the alpha channel. Related: [PNG to WebP](https://toolpantry.app/png-to-webp.html) keeps transparency and saves space at the same time. ## Notes JPG does not support transparency, so transparent pixels are filled with the chosen color. Lower quality can make photos smaller, but inspect text and edges before sharing. ## FAQ **Why turn PNG into JPG?** JPG is commonly accepted for photos, email attachments, and marketplace uploads. It usually creates a smaller file, but it cannot keep transparency. **Is the conversion local?** Yes. The browser draws the PNG to a canvas and creates the JPG without uploading your file. --- # PNG to PDF Converter — Combine PNG Images Locally > Convert PNG images to a single ordered PDF locally in your browser — one PNG per page, transparency flattened onto white. No upload queue or account required. Source: https://toolpantry.app/png-to-pdf ## About Combine PNG images into an A4-sized PDF with local page ordering and no server upload — transparency flattened cleanly onto white. ## Quick answer How do I convert PNG to PDF? Add one or more PNG images, arrange the order, and export a single PDF with one PNG per A4 page. Everything is processed locally — no account and no watermark. ## How to convert PNG to PDF 1. **Add one or more PNGs** — screenshots, exported charts, scans; order them as you like. 2. **Check the page layout** — each image is placed on its own A4 page, centered, transparency on white. 3. **Download the PDF** — one file containing every image, created locally in your browser. ## When PNG to PDF is the right move - **Portals that only accept PDF** — job boards, visa forms, expense systems; PNG sets are often rejected - **Screenshots as evidence** — chat logs, dashboards, error reports: one clean PDF - **Charts and diagrams** — PNG's sharp edges survive the PDF embedding untouched ## Good to know PNG is lossless, so pages keep their crisp edges but files run larger than JPG — for photo-heavy sets, [JPG to PDF](https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-pdf.html) (which also accepts PNGs) or [HEIC to PDF](https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-pdf.html) for iPhone photos will be lighter. Keep the total under 25 MB for email — the [1 MB compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-1mb.html) preps images first, and [Merge PDF](https://toolpantry.app/merge-pdf.html) joins the result with existing documents. ## Notes Images are placed on centered A4 pages with their aspect ratio preserved; transparent areas become white. The bundled PDF engine runs inside this browser tab. ## FAQ **How do I convert PNG to PDF?** Add one or more PNG images, arrange the order, and export a single PDF with one PNG per A4 page. Everything is processed locally — no account, no watermark. **What happens to PNG transparency?** Transparent areas are flattened onto white, which is what print and most portals expect. If you need transparency preserved, keep the original PNG alongside the PDF. **Are my images uploaded?** No. The PDF is built locally in your browser — the bundled PDF engine runs inside this tab. **Can I add JPG images too?** This page takes PNG files. For JPGs — or a mix of both — use the JPG to PDF tool, which accepts both formats in one PDF. --- # PNG to WebP Converter — Compress Transparent Images Locally > Convert PNG images to smaller WebP files locally in your browser. Keep transparency and choose WebP quality before downloading. Source: https://toolpantry.app/png-to-webp ## About Make a smaller WebP copy of a PNG while preserving transparent pixels. Choose quality and compare the exported size in your browser. ## Quick answer How do I convert PNG to WebP? Add the PNG and pick the quality; transparency stays intact and the file usually gets smaller. ## How to convert PNG to WebP 1. **Add your PNG** — transparency included. 2. **Pick the quality** — 75–85% is the usual sweet spot for web assets. 3. **Download the WebP** — typically 25–35% smaller at comparable quality. ## Why WebP is the default web format now - All modern browsers have supported WebP for years; file size drops visibly - Product images, hero images, and UI assets deliver faster - Transparency stays intact — unlike JPG ## Good to know WebP is now the safe default for websites; fall back to PNG only for very old tools. Compare the result at actual display size before publishing — sharpness perception depends mostly on resolution, not format. If you need to hit an exact upload limit, finish with the [target-size compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb.html). Related: [JPG to WebP](https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-webp.html) for photos, and [WebP to PNG](https://toolpantry.app/webp-to-png.html) for the reverse direction. ## Notes WebP is often smaller than PNG for web graphics, but check the destination app before replacing a source asset. The original remains unchanged. ## FAQ **Does WebP support transparency?** Yes. WebP supports alpha transparency, so this page leaves transparent PNG pixels transparent during the canvas export. **Is the image uploaded?** No. Conversion and download happen in the current browser tab. --- # Press & Brand Assets — Tool Pantry > Press and brand assets for Tool Pantry — boilerplate copy, logos, screenshots, and facts for directories, newsletters, and articles. Source: https://toolpantry.app/press ## Boilerplate copy (use verbatim) **One-liner:** 216 free browser tools that process files locally — nothing is uploaded. **Short (100–160 chars):** Tool Pantry is a free collection of 216 browser tools for files — PDF, images, video, and text. Everything runs locally: no uploads, no accounts, no watermarks. Tool Pantry is a free collection of 216 browser tools for everyday files — PDF operations, image compression and conversion, video-to-audio and video-to-GIF, metadata inspection, and text utilities. Every tool runs entirely in the visitor's browser, so files are never uploaded to a server, and there are no accounts, watermarks, or file-size limits. It also ships an AI-agent layer: a machine-readable catalog at /tools.json, an installable Agent Skill, and a small public API. ## Logos [logo-512.png](https://toolpantry.app/press/logo-512.png) (512×512, for directories and articles) · [logo-96.png](https://toolpantry.app/press/logo-96.png) (96×96) · [favicon.ico](https://toolpantry.app/favicon.ico) ## Screenshots [Homepage, 1440×900](https://toolpantry.app/press/screenshot-home-1440.png) · [A tool page (Compress PDF)](https://toolpantry.app/press/screenshot-tool-compress-pdf.png) · [Homepage, mobile](https://toolpantry.app/press/screenshot-home-mobile.png) ## Facts & figures **Launched:** October 2026 **Tools:** 216, all free, no signup **Uploads:** Zero — by architecture, not by policy **Processing:** Client-side (browser): WebCodecs, pdf-lib, HEIC decoder, canvas **Agent-ready:** llms.txt · tools.json catalog · Markdown content negotiation · public API · MCP server (stdio + HTTP endpoint) **Measured results:** Scan PDF 793 KB → 122 KB (−85%) · video 17.7 MB → 7.9 MB · HEIC 29 KB → JPG 46 KB / WebP 23 KB ## Brand usage - Write the name as **Tool Pantry** (two words, both capitalized). - Link to **https://toolpantry.app** — prefer linking a specific tool page when referencing a tool (e.g. /compress-pdf). - Don't recolor, rotate, or add effects to the logo; keep clear space around it. ## About Boilerplate copy, logos, screenshots, and facts about Tool Pantry — free to use. Keeping the name and description consistent across listings helps AI engines and search systems cross-check the same entity, so use these verbatim where you can. ## Notes Questions, corrections, or a listing to add? Reach the maintainer via [GitHub](https://github.com/wu736139669). Limits and figures are verified as of October 2026 and updated with the site. --- # Privacy — Tool Pantry Browser Tools > Tool Pantry privacy information: what browser tools process locally, what the inventory tracker stores, and how future advertising may work. Source: https://toolpantry.app/privacy ## About Tool Pantry is a collection of browser-first utilities. This page explains what stays on your device, what the site itself can receive, and how the existing page analytics differ from the files you process. ## Notes **Effective date:** October 17, 2026 --- # Project Pricing Calculator — Estimate Freelance Price > Calculate a freelance project price from estimated hours, expenses, your hourly rate, and a scope buffer. Source: https://toolpantry.app/project-pricing-calculator ## About Combine your hourly rate, estimated project hours, direct expenses, and a scope buffer into a practical project price. ## Quick answer How do I price a project? Enter hours, direct expenses, a scope buffer, and any discount to reach a defensible project price. ## How to price a fixed-price project 1. **Estimate hours and multiply by rates** — include every phase, not just the fun part. 2. **Add direct expenses** — licenses, stock images, sub-contractors, travel. 3. **Add a buffer, then decide on discounts** — the buffer absorbs reality. ## Where fixed-price projects go wrong - No buffer for revisions, stalls, and “small changes” — 20–30% is not greed - Discounting the price instead of trimming the scope - Forgetting the fixed price also transfers all risk from the client to you ## Good to know Show buffers as their own line internally, never in the client quote — the client buys a result, not your risk math. If the deal needs a discount, remove a deliverable; the price drop should always match the scope drop. Related: [hourly rate](https://toolpantry.app/hourly-rate-calculator.html) and [quote generator](https://toolpantry.app/quote-generator.html). ## Notes Use the buffer for revisions, coordination, and unknowns. This calculator does not include tax or legal advice. ## FAQ **What is a scope buffer?** A buffer adds room for normal project uncertainty. Keep the scope and revision limits clear in the quote so the price is easy to explain. **Can I use this for a fixed-price quote?** Yes. Use the suggested project price as a starting point, then describe exactly what is included and what counts as extra work. --- # Proposal Generator — Create a Freelance Service Proposal > Create a clear freelance proposal from a few project details, then copy or download the Markdown draft. Source: https://toolpantry.app/proposal-generator ## About Turn a project brief into a structured proposal with the goal, deliverables, timeline, price, and next step. ## Quick answer How do I write a freelance proposal? Fill in the scope, timeline, and price for a structured proposal you can copy or export. ## How to write a project proposal 1. **Open with the client’s problem** — their words, not your template. 2. **Lay out approach, deliverables, and timeline** — what you’ll do, in what order, by when. 3. **Close with pricing context and next steps** — copy as Markdown or plain text, plus one clear call to action. ## What a proposal has to answer - Why you understand the problem better than the next bidder - What exactly gets delivered — and what does not - How much, paid how, starting when ## Good to know Keep it to a page or two plus pricing — long proposals get skimmed, then filed. Send it the same day as the call if you can, and follow up in three days with a single question, not a “just checking in.” When it’s accepted, turn scope into the [statement of work](https://toolpantry.app/statement-of-work-generator.html) and numbers into a [quote](https://toolpantry.app/quote-generator.html). ## Notes This is a planning template, not legal, tax, or contract advice. Review the final document before sending it. ## FAQ **Does this send anything to a client?** No. It only prepares text locally for you to review, copy, or download. **Can I customize the output?** Yes. Edit the fields, then copy the Markdown into your document, project workspace, or email. --- # QR Code Generator — Create Free QR Codes Online > Generate a QR code for a URL, text, email, or phone number. Download a PNG locally with no signup or upload. Source: https://toolpantry.app/qr-code-generator ## About Generate a free QR code for a website, message, email, or phone number. It is created in your browser and downloaded as a PNG. ## Quick answer How do I create a free QR code? Paste a URL, text, email address, or phone number, choose the download size, and save the PNG. Static QR codes carry the data in the pattern itself, so they never expire. ## How to create a free QR code 1. **Choose the content type** — a website URL, plain text, an email address, or a phone number. 2. **Paste the content and pick a size** — 512×512 px works for most print and screen uses; 1024 px for posters. 3. **Download the PNG** — the code is generated locally and never expires. ## What people use QR codes for - Restaurant menus, event posters, and business cards - Packaging inserts that link to instructions or warranties - Quick contact sharing — email and phone payloads launch the dialer or mail app ## Good to know Static QR codes store the data in the pattern itself, so they work forever with no subscription — unlike “dynamic” codes that route through a short URL service. For print, keep codes at least 2 cm wide and test with a phone at arm’s length; contrast matters more than color. Need something for retail products instead? See the [barcode generator](https://toolpantry.app/barcode-generator.html). ## Notes QR codes are static: the content is stored in the pattern itself. Check the downloaded code with your phone before printing or publishing. ## FAQ **Can I make a QR code for a website?** Yes. Choose Website URL, paste a complete URL including https://, then generate and download the PNG. **Does this QR code expire?** No. This generator creates a static QR code and does not route scans through a subscription service. The destination can still change or disappear later. --- # Free Quote Generator — Create Estimates Online > Create a free quote or estimate online. Add services, prices, a validity date, and print a clean PDF in your browser. Source: https://toolpantry.app/quote-generator ## About Build a clear estimate with services, quantities, tax, and a validity date. Print it or save it as a PDF without creating an account. ## Quick answer How do I make a quote for a client? Add line items and terms; download a clean PDF quote with a validity date. ## How to write a professional quote 1. **Add your details and line items** — labor, materials, and anything pass-through, each on its own line. 2. **Set a validity date and terms** — quotes should expire; say when and on what conditions. 3. **Print or save as PDF and send** — everything is generated locally in your browser. ## When a written quote matters - A prospect asks “what would this cost?” before committing - Any job big enough that scope or price disputes would hurt - Comparing your offer against someone else’s line by line ## Good to know Quote, estimate, and invoice are three different documents: a quote is a firm offer, an estimate is a best guess, and an invoice requests payment. Expiring quotes protect you from rising material costs — 14–30 days is common. When the job is approved, convert it with the [quote-to-invoice converter](https://toolpantry.app/quote-to-invoice.html) instead of retyping. ## Notes This is a quote template, not a contract or tax advice. Confirm local requirements before sending a real estimate. ## FAQ **Can I save the quote as a PDF?** Choose “Print / save PDF,” then select Save as PDF in your browser's print dialog. **Is my quote uploaded?** No. The calculations and preview happen in your browser. Nothing is sent to a server. --- # Quote to Invoice Converter — Estimate to Invoice, Free > Turn a quote into an invoice online. Edit the client, invoice number, dates, and line items, then print or save a PDF locally. Source: https://toolpantry.app/quote-to-invoice ## About Bring the agreed services into a clean invoice, update the number and due date, then print or save the final document as a PDF. ## Quick answer How do I turn a quote into an invoice? Re-enter the agreed line items quickly and download the matching invoice PDF. ## How to convert a quote into an invoice 1. **Bring over the agreed line items** — reuse the quote’s scope and pricing exactly. 2. **Assign an invoice number and due date** — sequential numbers keep records clean. 3. **Print or save as PDF** — the client already approved these numbers, so payment friction drops. ## Why bother converting instead of rewriting - The quote is the agreement; the invoice should mirror it line for line - Retyping invites typos, and typos invite payment delays - Keeping both documents gives you a clean paper trail if questions come up ## Good to know Match the invoice description wording to the quote — clients (and their accountants) compare them. Set payment terms that you will actually enforce, and if a due date passes quietly, the [payment reminder email](https://toolpantry.app/payment-reminder-email.html) tool has polite, firm, and final tones ready. ## Notes This converter does not import a file or send data anywhere. Paste the agreed line items, then check local invoicing requirements before sending. ## FAQ **Does this connect to my accounting software?** No. It is a lightweight document converter for a quick PDF. It does not store invoices or sync payment status. **Can I change the quote after approval?** Use the fields as a final editing step. Only include work and prices that both sides agreed to. --- # Random Name Picker — Winners, Shuffle & Teams > Pick random names, draw winners without repeats, shuffle a list, or split people into balanced teams locally in your browser. Source: https://toolpantry.app/random-name-picker ## About Paste names or items to draw winners, shuffle the order, or make balanced teams. Results use a local browser random source and never leave this tab. ## Quick answer How do I pick a random name from a list? Paste the list; the tool draws a winner with a no-repeat option for classrooms and raffles. ## How to pick a random name 1. **Paste the list of names** — one per line, duplicates cleaned automatically. 2. **Draw a winner** — no one repeats until you reset the draw. 3. **Or split into teams** — balanced groups from the same list. ## Where fair draws matter - Classroom cold-calls that cannot afford favourites - Giveaways and prize draws where the process needs defending - Daily standups and meeting order ## Good to know The "no repeat" mode only guarantees fairness across a full round — reset deliberately, in front of witnesses if it matters. For regulated prize promotions, check local rules about what counts as a legitimate random drawing. Related: [random number generator](https://toolpantry.app/random-number-generator.html). ## FAQ **Can I draw multiple winners without repeats?** Yes. Set the winner count, keep Remove winners on, and each run takes a shuffled slice from the remaining pool. The page reports when the pool is empty. **How are teams balanced?** The list is shuffled and dealt round-robin. Team sizes differ by at most one person, so an odd-sized list stays as even as possible. **Is my class or giveaway list uploaded?** No. The list is read and randomized in this browser tab. It is not sent to a server or saved to an account. --- # Random Number Generator — Batch, Unique & Sorted > Generate random numbers in a chosen range with batches, unique values, sorting, decimals, presets, and copy-ready output locally in your browser. Source: https://toolpantry.app/random-number-generator ## About Generate one number or a batch inside your range, with optional decimals, unique values, sorting, and copy-ready output. The draw happens locally in this browser tab. ## Quick answer How do I generate random numbers? Set the range, count, and whether repeats are allowed; numbers come from a browser crypto source. ## How to generate random numbers 1. **Set the range and count** — integers by default, decimals optional. 2. **Choose the rules** — unique values, sorted output, or free repeats. 3. **Copy the batch** — first time, every time, from your browser. ## Typical uses - Lottery and bingo numbers - Random sampling for surveys and testing - Tabletop games, classroom activities, decision rolls ## Drawing numbers for raffles and giveaways The "drawing numbers" use case — picking a raffle winner, assigning contest numbers, or drawing lottery-style digits — has three requirements this tool handles: - **No repeats** — enable unique mode so each drawn number appears once, exactly like numbered tickets - **Verifiable randomness** — numbers come from the browser's crypto generator, not Math.random, so the draw is not biased by the algorithm - **A record of the draw** — copy or download the results as text; for public giveaways, screenshot the sorted list next to the timestamp Practical tip for live draws: generate the full list in advance, sort it, and draw the winner's position with a physical dice or another tool — then the list itself can be published without revealing which number wins. ## Good to know These draws are fine for games and sampling but are not cryptographic — for passwords and keys, use the [password generator](https://toolpantry.app/password-generator.html) and [hash tools](https://toolpantry.app/hash-generator.html) built for that. Unique mode draws without replacement, which is what "pick 6 numbers" actually means. Related: [name picker](https://toolpantry.app/random-name-picker.html). ## FAQ **Can I generate numbers without repeats?** Yes. Turn on Unique values. The tool checks the available decimal grid before drawing and gives an error if you request more unique values than the range can contain. **How do I draw random numbers for a raffle?** Set the range to your ticket numbers, enable unique mode, and generate the full list. The numbers come from the browser's crypto generator, so the draw is unbiased — publish the sorted list as the record. **Are the results random enough for a lottery?** This page uses the browser's cryptographic random source when available and rejection sampling for integer ranges. It is useful for ordinary picks and simulations, but regulated drawings should use their required official process. **Does it work with decimals and negative ranges?** Yes. Choose up to six decimal places and enter negative minimum or maximum values. Decimal results are drawn from the selected fixed decimal grid. --- # Free Receipt Generator — Create Payment Receipts Online > Create a free payment receipt online. Add a customer, payment method, and line items, then print or save a PDF in your browser. Source: https://toolpantry.app/receipt-generator ## About Create a simple receipt for a client or customer, add the payment method, and print a tidy PDF. No account or upload required. ## Quick answer How do I create a payment receipt? Fill in the payer, amount, and method for a simple printable receipt PDF. ## How to create a payment receipt 1. **Enter payer, payee, and amount** — plus the date the payment actually settled. 2. **Note the payment method** — cash, transfer, card — and any reference number. 3. **Print or save as PDF** — hand one copy to the payer, keep one for records. ## When a receipt is expected - Cash jobs where there’s no bank trail - Client accounting departments that need proof before releasing the next milestone - Deposits — a receipt confirms what the deposit covers ## Good to know A receipt confirms money received; an invoice requests money due — issuing them in that order keeps books clean. For larger engagements, pair receipts with the [invoice generator](https://toolpantry.app/invoice-generator.html) and log the income in the [expense tracker](https://toolpantry.app/expense-tracker.html) at the same time, while it’s fresh. ## Notes This receipt is a simple record of payment, not accounting or tax advice. Keep it with your business records. ## FAQ **Can I add multiple products or services?** Yes. Add as many line items as you need, then print the receipt or save it as a PDF. **Is my customer information stored?** No. The receipt is generated in this browser and is not uploaded. --- # Regex Tester — Test JavaScript Regular Expressions > Test JavaScript regular expressions with flags, capture groups, match indexes, and replacement previews in your browser. Source: https://toolpantry.app/regex-tester ## About Try a JavaScript regular expression against sample text, inspect capture groups, and preview a replacement without sending the text anywhere. ## Quick answer How do I test a regular expression? Paste a pattern and test text to see matches and groups highlighted live. ## How to test a regular expression 1. **Enter your pattern** — plus the sample text to run against it. 2. **Read the highlights** — matches, capture groups, and indexes are shown live. 3. **Try the replacement** — preview substitutions before putting the regex into code. ## When this saves you - Building validators (emails, phone numbers, IDs) with real samples - Debugging log parsers that mysteriously skip lines - Verifying a search-and-replace before running it in bulk ## Good to know This uses JavaScript regex flavor — most patterns port to other languages, but not all. Always test the boring edge cases (empty string, unicode, trailing newline), and keep patterns specific: vague ones like .* repeated can cause catastrophic backtracking and freeze a tab. Related: [SQL formatter](https://toolpantry.app/sql-formatter.html) for query cleanup. ## Notes This tester uses the JavaScript RegExp engine. Patterns and test text stay in your browser; a maximum input size keeps accidental runaway patterns manageable. ## FAQ **Which regex syntax is supported?** This page uses the regular expression syntax built into your browser's JavaScript engine, including flags such as g, i, m, s, u, and y. **Why are there no matches?** Check the pattern, flags, and whether you need a global g flag for repeated matches. --- # Reorder Point Calculator — Inventory Restock Planner > Calculate inventory reorder point, stock position, and suggested order quantity from sales velocity, supplier lead time, and safety stock. Source: https://toolpantry.app/reorder-point-calculator ## About Estimate when to reorder a product and how much to buy after accounting for daily sales, supplier lead time, safety stock, incoming inventory, and pack size. ## Quick answer How do I calculate a reorder point? Enter daily usage and lead time to see when to reorder and the safety buffer you need. ## How to calculate a reorder point 1. **Enter daily sales and supplier lead time** — honest averages, promo weeks included. 2. **Add safety stock** — the buffer for demand and lead-time wobble. 3. **Read the reorder point, rounded to pack size** — order when stock crosses it. ## What reorder points prevent - Stockouts on your best sellers — the sales you never see - Emergency air-freight charges to fix a late order - Over-ordering because “we might run out” ## Good to know Reorder point = (daily sales × lead time) + safety stock; supplier minimums and pack sizes round the order up, not the point down. Recalculate after any promotion — a week of 3× sales should not surprise the next reorder. Related: [safety stock](https://toolpantry.app/safety-stock-calculator.html) and [inventory coverage](https://toolpantry.app/inventory-coverage-calculator.html). ## Notes This uses average demand. For seasonal products, replace the average with a conservative demand estimate and review the result regularly. ## FAQ **What is a reorder point?** It is the stock level that should trigger a purchase order: expected demand during lead time plus a safety-stock buffer. **What does the suggested order include?** It aims to cover lead time plus the extra review period, then rounds up to your supplier’s pack size. --- # Resume Builder — Free, No Sign-Up, Download as PDF > Build a clean, ATS-friendly resume in your browser and download it as a PDF — no account, no watermark, nothing uploaded. Your draft stays on your device. Source: https://toolpantry.app/resume-builder ## About Fill in the form, watch the live preview, and download a clean single-column resume — ATS-friendly, no account, and your draft never leaves your browser. ## Quick answer How do I build a resume here? Type your details into the form on the left — the preview updates as you go. Add experience and education entries, then press Download PDF. The file is generated locally; nothing is uploaded and no account is needed. ## How to build a resume 1. **Start with the header** — name, one-line title, and contact details. A recruiter should know who you are in three seconds. 2. **Add experience with numbers** — one achievement per line, starting with an action verb: "Cut onboarding time 40% by redesigning the setup flow". 3. **Download and proofread** — open the PDF, check every line, and save it with your name in the filename. ## What makes a resume ATS-friendly - **Single column** — two-column layouts and text boxes confuse parsing software. - **Standard section names** — Experience, Education, Skills. Not "My journey". - **Real text, no images** — this tool outputs selectable text, so every word is readable by software. - **Keywords from the job post** — mirror the exact terms the posting uses ("project management", not "herding cats"). ## Good to know Keep it to one page if you have under ~10 years of experience; two pages maximum otherwise. The PDF supports Latin alphabets — very large character sets (CJK, Arabic) are not embedded yet. Nothing is uploaded: the whole resume is assembled in your browser and the draft lives in local storage on your own device. Related: [email signature generator](https://toolpantry.app/email-signature-generator.html) and [invoice generator](https://toolpantry.app/invoice-generator.html). ## Notes Your draft is saved only in this browser (localStorage) so you can come back later — "Clear draft" removes it completely. The PDF uses standard fonts and a single column on purpose: recruiter software reads it perfectly. ## FAQ **Is this resume builder really free?** Yes — no account, no watermark, no paywall at the download step. The PDF is generated locally in your browser with an open-source engine. **Where is my resume data stored?** Only in your own browser, as a local draft so you can come back and keep editing. Nothing is uploaded or sent anywhere. The Clear draft button removes it completely. **Will this resume pass ATS screening?** The output is deliberately ATS-friendly: a single column, standard fonts, real selectable text, no tables or graphics. Recruiter software can read every section. The content still has to match the job — use the same keywords the posting uses. --- # Retainer Pricing Calculator — Monthly Freelance Rate > Calculate a freelance retainer price from included hours, your hourly rate, operating costs, and a monthly buffer. Source: https://toolpantry.app/retainer-pricing-calculator ## About Work out a monthly service package from the hours included, your effective rate, operating costs, and a buffer for communication and revisions. ## Quick answer How do I price a retainer? Enter monthly hours, costs, and margin to get a defensible retainer price. ## How to price a monthly retainer 1. **Enter monthly hours and your costs** — use your floor rate as the baseline. 2. **Add a buffer and choose a commitment discount** — monthly certainty earns the client a small break. 3. **Read the monthly number** — billable floor, buffer, and discount in one figure. ## What retainers change about your business - Predictable monthly income — the freelancer’s version of a salary - Fewer sales cycles and more context carried month to month - Some flexibility traded away: hours are committed whether used or not ## Good to know Define the rollover policy in writing (typical: unused hours expire monthly, or up to 25% rolls once). Review the retainer every quarter — scope quietly grows. Related: [hourly rate calculator](https://toolpantry.app/hourly-rate-calculator.html) and [timesheet](https://toolpantry.app/timesheet-calculator.html) to prove your value each month. ## Notes This is a planning model. Define included work, response times, rollover rules, and overage pricing in the final agreement. ## FAQ **Why add a communication buffer?** A retainer includes coordination, status updates, and small revisions. A buffer prevents those tasks from silently consuming all delivery hours. **Should unused hours roll over?** Choose a clear policy before sending the offer. You can allow limited rollover, set an expiry, or keep the retainer focused on reserved capacity. --- # Roman Numeral Converter — Number to Roman & Back > Convert integers from 1 to 3999 to standard Roman numerals and decode valid Roman numerals locally with strict validation and copy-ready output. Source: https://toolpantry.app/roman-numeral-converter ## About Convert an integer to standard Roman numerals or decode a numeral back to a number. The page validates modern subtractive notation and keeps every conversion in this browser tab. ## Quick answer How do I convert Roman numerals? Type a number or a numeral to convert both ways, with standard forms from 1 to 3,999. ## How to convert Roman numerals 1. **Type a number or a numeral** — the converter detects the direction. 2. **Read the result and the breakdown** — each subtractive pair explained. 3. **Copy** — for homework, designs, or trivia settling. ## What Roman numerals still show up in - Clock faces, book chapters, film sequels, and monuments - Homework and quiz practice - Tattoos, logos, and design work that needs checked spelling ## Good to know Standard form runs 1 to 3,999 — beyond that, the conventions get historically messy, which is why this tool stops where it does. Subtraction is the modern rule (IV, not IIII), though some clock faces bend it deliberately. For documents, verify against the reference style your institution uses. Related: [number to words](https://toolpantry.app/number-to-words.html) and [fraction calculator](https://toolpantry.app/fraction-calculator.html). ## FAQ **Why is 4 written as IV instead of IIII?** Standard modern notation uses subtractive pairs. IV means one before five, IX means one before ten, and the same pattern applies to XL, XC, CD, and CM. **What is the largest standard Roman numeral?** For the usual seven-symbol system, this page uses 3,999, written MMMCMXCIX. Larger values need a separate overline or historical convention, so they are flagged instead of guessed. **Does the converter accept lowercase?** Yes. Roman input is trimmed, uppercased, and checked against the canonical modern form. Malformed sequences such as IIII, VV, or IC are rejected. --- # Rotate Image Online — Turn or Flip Photos Locally > Rotate a photo 90°, 180°, or 270° or flip it horizontally and vertically, right in your browser. No upload, no account — download when it looks right. Source: https://toolpantry.app/rotate-image ## About Turn a sideways photo upright or mirror it in one click — the dimensions update live and the file downloads from your browser. ## Quick answer How do I rotate an image online? Add the photo, use the rotate and flip buttons until it looks right, then download. Everything happens locally — nothing is uploaded. ## How to rotate an image 1. **Add your photo** — it stays in your browser. 2. **Rotate or flip** — every click updates the preview and the dimensions instantly. 3. **Download** — the result saves in the same format you uploaded. ## When you need this - Phone photos that saved sideways - Scanned documents fed the wrong way into the scanner - Mirroring a photo to fix a flipped selfie camera shot ## Good to know Rotating by 90° or 270° swaps width and height — the stats above show the new dimensions before you download. Need to cut instead of turn? Try [Crop image](https://toolpantry.app/crop-image.html), or shrink the result with the [target-size compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb.html). ## Notes JPG photos are re-encoded once at 92% quality (visually identical); PNG stays lossless. The original file is never modified. ## FAQ **Does rotating reduce quality?** PNG input stays lossless. JPG output is re-encoded once at 92% quality, which is visually identical for photos. The original file is never modified. **Is the photo uploaded?** No. Rotating, flipping, and downloading all happen inside your browser tab. --- # Rotate PDF — Turn Pages 90, 180, or 270 Degrees > Rotate every page in a PDF locally by 90, 180, or 270 degrees and download the result from your browser. Source: https://toolpantry.app/rotate-pdf ## About Turn every page by 90, 180, or 270 degrees and download a new PDF without sending the document to a server. ## Quick answer How do I rotate a PDF? Add the PDF, pick 90°, 180°, or 270°, and download the rotated file — locally in your browser. ## How to rotate a PDF 1. **Add your PDF** — it stays in your browser. 2. **Choose 90°, 180°, or 270°** — the whole document rotates together. 3. **Download** — the fixed orientation saves into a new PDF. ## The classic cases - Scans fed sideways into the feeder - Phone photos saved as PDF in the wrong orientation - A document where every page needs the same quarter-turn ## Good to know Rotation is recorded in page metadata — original scan quality is untouched, and file size barely changes. If only some pages are wrong, rotate specific pages with the [extract tool](https://toolpantry.app/extract-pdf-pages.html) workaround or re-scan those pages. Related: [merge](https://toolpantry.app/merge-pdf.html) and [split](https://toolpantry.app/split-pdf.html). Working with a photo instead of a document? [Rotate image](https://toolpantry.app/rotate-image.html) does the same job for JPG, PNG, and WebP. ## Notes The tool changes page rotation metadata while preserving the original page content. The output is saved as rotated.pdf. ## FAQ **Are pages uploaded?** No. Reading, rotating, and exporting happen locally in your browser. **Can I rotate only one page?** This first version rotates every page together. Use a PDF editor when individual page selection is required. --- # Rotate Video — Lossless, Instant, No Re-encode > Rotate an MP4 or MOV left, right, or 180° instantly — zero re-encoding. Rotation is written into the file itself, so quality is untouched. Free and local. Source: https://toolpantry.app/rotate-video ## About Rotate an MP4 or MOV left, right, or 180° — by writing the rotation into the file itself. No re-encoding, no quality loss, no upload. ## Quick answer How do I rotate a video without losing quality? Load the MP4 or MOV, click Rotate left , Rotate right , or 180° , then save. The rotation is stored as a display transform in the file — the video data stays byte-for-byte identical, and the whole thing takes under a second. ## Why this is instant (and lossless) Most tools rotate a video by decoding every frame, turning it, and encoding it again — that's why a 2-minute clip can take a minute to rotate and comes out slightly softer. Phones don't do that: an iPhone portrait video is actually stored sideways, with a tiny "rotate 90°" instruction in the file that every player obeys. This tool writes exactly that instruction. A few dozen bytes change; the video data doesn't. The rotation lands in under a second regardless of file size, and the result is pixel-for-pixel identical to your original. ## How to use it 1. Load the MP4 or MOV — the preview shows the current orientation 2. Click **Rotate left**, **Rotate right**, or **180°** — the preview updates immediately 3. Keep clicking if you overshoot (rotations stack), or press **Reset** 4. Press **Save rotated video** — done Videos that already carry a rotation (like phone footage) are handled correctly: the new rotation is composed with the existing one. ## Honest limits Rotation is stored as metadata, which every mainstream player honors — browsers, phones, YouTube, VLC, QuickTime, and editors like CapCut and Premiere. A rare very old tool might ignore it and show the original orientation. Input is MP4/MOV/M4V with H.264 or HEVC video; fragmented MP4s from streaming tools may not carry a patchable structure. If you need to rotate *and* trim or crop, do the rotation here first — the other tools will see the new orientation. Cropping a video is available in the [video cropper](https://toolpantry.app/crop-video.html), and cutting is in the [video trimmer](https://toolpantry.app/video-trimmer.html). ## Notes The preview updates live — the rotation you see is the rotation stored in the saved file. Your original is never modified. ## FAQ **How do I rotate a video?** Load the MP4 or MOV, click rotate left, rotate right, or 180°, and save. The rotation is written into the file's metadata — the video itself is never re-encoded, so it takes under a second and quality is untouched. **Does rotating a video reduce quality?** No. The video pixels are never re-encoded — the tool writes a standard rotation transform into the file, the same mechanism phones use to store portrait videos. The video data is byte-for-byte identical to your original. **Why not just use a video editor?** Editors re-encode the entire file to rotate it — slow for long clips and it costs quality. This tool changes a few bytes of metadata instead: instant, lossless, and no editor to learn. **Will the rotated video look right everywhere?** Yes — phones, browsers, YouTube, VLC, QuickTime, and editors all honor rotation metadata; it is exactly how iPhone portrait videos work. A handful of very old tools ignore it, in which case the video shows its original orientation. **Which formats are supported?** MP4, MOV, and M4V files with H.264 or HEVC video. The file format is unchanged — you get the same container back with rotation applied. --- # Safety Stock Calculator — Estimate Inventory Buffer > Calculate safety stock and reorder point from average and maximum sales and supplier lead times. Source: https://toolpantry.app/safety-stock-calculator ## About Estimate safety stock and reorder point using average demand, peak demand, average lead time, and the longest recent lead time. ## Quick answer How do I calculate safety stock? Enter demand variability and lead time to estimate the buffer that protects your service level. ## How to calculate safety stock 1. **Enter demand variability** — how much daily/weekly sales swing. 2. **Account for lead-time variability** — suppliers are not metronomes. 3. **Read the buffer** — the stock you hold purely as insurance. ## How much insurance to hold - Hero products: more buffer, stockouts cost brand trust - Long-tail SKUs: minimal buffer, dead stock costs cash - Launch periods: raise the buffer until demand stabilizes ## Good to know Safety stock is an insurance premium paid in warehouse space — the right amount is the one where stockout cost ≈ holding cost, and both numbers differ by SKU class. Review after every quarter and after any supplier change. Related: [reorder point](https://toolpantry.app/reorder-point-calculator.html) and [inventory turnover](https://toolpantry.app/inventory-turnover-calculator.html). ## Notes This planning formula is deliberately conservative. It does not model service levels, seasonality, promotions, or supplier minimum order quantities. ## FAQ **Why use maximum values?** Using recent peak demand and the longest observed lead time creates a simple buffer for variability. It may overstock products with highly seasonal demand. **How is this different from reorder point?** Safety stock is the buffer. Reorder point combines expected lead-time demand and that buffer. --- # Schema Markup Generator — Create JSON-LD Locally > Generate copyable JSON-LD schema markup for Article, FAQ, Product, LocalBusiness, Organization, or WebSite pages locally in your browser. Source: https://toolpantry.app/schema-markup-generator ## About Fill in the details for a common Schema.org type and copy a ready-to-paste JSON-LD script. Everything runs locally; review the result against your real page before publishing. ## Quick answer How do I add schema markup to a page? Pick a type like FAQ, Article, or Product and fill the fields for ready JSON-LD you can paste into your site. ## How to generate JSON-LD schema markup 1. **Pick the content type** — Article, FAQ, Product, LocalBusiness, Organization, or WebSite. 2. **Fill the fields honestly** — markup must match what the page actually shows. 3. **Paste the JSON-LD into your page head** — no build step required. ## When structured data earns its keep - Article pages that want richer treatment in search results - FAQ sections — the format AI systems and search engines both understand - Business sites establishing entity information (name, URL, logo) ## Good to know Structured data describes visible content; describing things a visitor cannot see violates Google’s guidelines and can trigger manual actions. Start with one type per page, validate with Google’s Rich Results test after publishing, and never let the markup drift after a page rewrite. Related: [AI readiness report](https://toolpantry.app/ai-agent-readiness-report.html) explains why this matters for AI search. ## Notes This generator creates a practical starting point for common types. It does not promise rich results, validate every Schema.org property, or replace Google's Rich Results Test. ## FAQ **What is JSON-LD?** JSON-LD is a structured data format that describes a page in a script block. Search engines may use valid, relevant structured data to understand content, but display features are never guaranteed. **Should every page use every schema type?** No. Choose the type that accurately describes the visible content on that page and keep each property truthful. --- # Scientific Calculator — Trig, Log, Powers & Roots > Use a free scientific calculator locally for trigonometry, logarithms, powers, roots, factorials, and common math expressions. Source: https://toolpantry.app/scientific-calculator ## About Evaluate common scientific expressions with trigonometry, logarithms, powers, roots, and factorials. The parser runs locally in this browser tab and never uses JavaScript eval. ## Quick answer How do I use a scientific calculator online? Type expressions with functions like sin, log, and powers; results compute instantly in your browser. ## How to use the scientific calculator 1. **Type the expression** — powers, roots, trig, logs, factorials, constants. 2. **Set degrees or radians** — the single most common mistake lives in this toggle. 3. **Check the history** — previous results stay available for chained work. ## When you reach for it - Homework and exam practice where a phone calculator is banned but a browser is allowed - Engineering and lab quick-math with clean history - Checking a suspicious result from another tool ## Good to know The parser is a real expression evaluator — no eval, and it tells you when input is malformed instead of guessing. Floating point is floating point: 0.1 + 0.2 will never be exactly 0.3 in any calculator of this class. Related: [fraction calculator](https://toolpantry.app/fraction-calculator.html) for exact rational math and [percentage calculator](https://toolpantry.app/percentage-calculator.html). ## Notes Functions use the selected angle mode. `log` means base 10, `ln` means the natural logarithm, `%` divides a value by 100, and `!` accepts non-negative integers up to 170. ## FAQ **Which functions are supported?** Use sin, cos, tan, their inverse functions, sqrt, abs, log, ln, powers with ^, percent with %, factorial with !, the constants π and e, and parentheses for grouping. **Is this calculator safe for private expressions?** The expression is parsed by the page's own arithmetic code. It is not passed to eval, uploaded, or sent to an external API. **How does the angle setting work?** Degrees mode interprets sin(30) as the sine of 30 degrees. Radians mode interprets the same input as 30 radians; use π for familiar values such as sin(π/6). --- # Screen Recorder — Record Your Screen in the Browser > Record your screen, window, or tab right in the browser — with optional microphone. Free, no install, and the recording never leaves your device. Source: https://toolpantry.app/screen-recorder ## About Capture your screen, a window, or a browser tab — with optional microphone — and download the video. Nothing is uploaded. ## Quick answer How do I record my screen online? Press Start, pick the screen, window, or tab to share, and record. When you stop, download the video file — the recording stays on your device. ## How to record your screen 1. **Press Start recording** — the browser asks what to share (entire screen, one window, or one tab). 2. **Do your thing** — the timer runs; the microphone is optional. 3. **Stop and download** — preview the result and save the video file. ## What you can record - Product demos and bug reports (one tab keeps it clean and private) - Video calls, presentations, and classes (with permission) - Quick tutorials for teammates ## Good to know Tab and system audio support varies by browser and platform — Chrome on desktop is the most generous; macOS usually needs a tab (not the whole screen) for sound. Recordings can be large: a 10-minute demo at Standard quality is roughly 150–300 MB. Nothing is uploaded, so you keep full control of the file. ## Notes The browser will ask which screen, window, or tab to share — that picker is built into your browser. Keep this tab open while recording; stopping the share from the browser bar also stops the recording. ## FAQ **Does this work on iPhone or iPad?** No — mobile Safari does not offer screen capture to web pages. Use a desktop browser like Chrome, Edge, or Safari on a computer. **Where is the recording saved?** Only on your device. You download the file when you stop; nothing is uploaded to any server. **What video format do I get?** WebM in Chrome, Edge, and Firefox; MP4 in Safari. Both play in modern players and upload fine to YouTube and similar platforms. --- # SERP Preview Tool — Preview SEO Title & Meta Description > Preview an SEO title, URL, and meta description as a Google-style search result. Check approximate character and pixel widths locally. Source: https://toolpantry.app/serp-preview ## About See how a page title, URL, and description may look in a search result. Counts and pixel widths are local estimates, because Google can rewrite snippets and uses its own fonts. ## Quick answer How do I preview a Google snippet? Paste your title and description to see desktop and mobile SERP previews with pixel-width checks. ## How to preview a search snippet 1. **Enter the title, description, and URL** — or your live page values. 2. **See desktop and mobile previews** — with approximate pixel-width truncation, not just character counts. 3. **Copy the finished meta tags** — straight into your . ## Why pixel width beats character count - Wide letters truncate earlier than narrow ones — counting characters lies - Mobile truncates harder, and most impressions are mobile - The title is the highest-leverage CTR knob you fully control ## Good to know Google rewrites titles and descriptions more often than site owners like, but a tight, honest snippet still improves the odds. Keep the unique part of the title inside the first visible pixels, and let the description promise exactly what the page delivers. Approximate widths are directional — eyeball both breakpoints. Related: [meta tag generator](https://toolpantry.app/meta-tag-generator.html). ## Notes Pixel widths are measured with a local canvas and common system fonts. They are a practical check, not a promise of how every search engine will truncate the result. ## FAQ **Does this predict the exact Google snippet?** No. Search engines may choose page text instead of the meta description, and the visible result can vary by device, query, language, and experiment. **Why measure pixels as well as characters?** Letters have different widths, so two titles with the same character count can occupy very different space. A pixel estimate gives a more useful editing signal. --- # Shipping Cost Estimator — Estimate Parcel Delivery Fees > Estimate shipping cost from billable weight, rate, fuel surcharge, handling, insurance, and other delivery fees. Source: https://toolpantry.app/shipping-cost-estimator ## About Build a transparent shipping estimate from your billable weight and the fees you actually pay. Add it to an order or use it to test a free-shipping threshold. ## Quick answer How do I estimate shipping costs? Enter package weight, dimensions, and zones for a practical rate estimate. ## How to estimate shipping cost per order 1. **Enter billable weight and your rate** — dimensional or actual, whichever is greater. 2. **Add the surcharges** — fuel, handling, insurance, minimums. 3. **Read the per-order and per-shipment cost** — then sanity-check against what you charge customers. ## Where estimates save margin - Pricing products before the first real shipment - Deciding free-shipping thresholds with numbers, not vibes - Spotting orders where shipping quietly exceeds revenue ## Good to know Rates and fuel surcharges change monthly — keep the inputs editable and re-run them periodically (this tool never calls carrier APIs, deliberately). Model the worst-case zone; the cheapest zone is not the one that eats margin. Related: [free shipping threshold](https://toolpantry.app/free-shipping-threshold-calculator.html) and [landed cost](https://toolpantry.app/landed-cost-calculator.html). ## Notes The estimate uses the currency and rates you enter. It does not call a carrier API or promise a delivery quote. ## FAQ **What should billable weight be?** Use the chargeable weight from the dimensional-weight calculator, or the weight shown by your carrier’s service guide. **Can I use this for free-shipping decisions?** Yes. Compare the shipping estimate with your order value to test thresholds and see the percentage of revenue consumed by delivery. --- # Sign PDF — Add a Signature Locally, No Upload > Add a visual signature to PDF pages, including rotated layouts. Position it in the preview and export locally. This does not create a certificate-based digital signature. Source: https://toolpantry.app/sign-pdf ## About Draw, type, or upload a signature, drag it onto any page, and download the signed document — all on your device. ## Quick answer How do I sign a PDF for free? Open the PDF, create your signature, drag it onto the page, and download the signed file. The document and your signature never leave your browser. ## Choose the next task carefully For an image preview, use [PDF to JPG](https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-jpg). If you need a smaller scanned document, work on an unsigned copy with [Compress PDF](https://toolpantry.app/compress-pdf) first: that compressor rasterizes pages and is not suitable for preserving editable form fields. Keep the original PDF. ## How to sign a PDF 1. **Add your PDF** — the pages render locally for preview. 2. **Create your signature** — draw it, type it, or upload a photo of your ink signature. 3. **Place and download** — drag the signature onto the page, resize it with the slider, and save the signed PDF. ## Tips for a clean signature - Drawing with a stylus or finger gives the most natural result - Uploading a photo? Shoot your ink signature straight on, on plain white paper — the white background is removed automatically - Signing a long agreement? Turn on Add to every page to stamp each page at once ## Good to know This tool adds a visual signature image. It does not create or verify a certificate-based digital signature. Editing a PDF that already carries a digital signature can affect its validation. Keep the original and check the recipient’s requirements. Rotated pages are processed rather than skipped. Related: [Compress PDF](https://toolpantry.app/compress-pdf.html), [Merge PDF](https://toolpantry.app/merge-pdf.html), and [PDF to JPG](https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-jpg.html). ## Notes The signature is stamped onto the page as an image — a visual signature, not a certificate-based digital signature. Keep the original file in case you need to redo the placement. Signing on an iPhone? The walkthrough and export checks are here: [How to sign a PDF on iPhone](https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-sign-a-pdf-on-iphone.html). ## FAQ **What kind of signature does this add?** It adds a visual signature image. It does not create or verify a certificate-based digital signature. Check the signature format required by the recipient. **Can I sign rotated pages?** Yes. Pages with 0°, 90°, 180° or 270° rotation are processed, with placement mapped through each page’s visible area. **How does Add to every page work?** The same relative width and position are used on each visible page. The image keeps its aspect ratio and is fitted inside smaller pages. Review the result when page sizes differ. **Are form fields flattened?** The tool does not intentionally flatten form fields when adding the image. Keep your original and verify field values and appearances in the output, especially for complex forms. **Are my files uploaded?** No. The PDF and signature are processed in your browser. PDF input is limited to 60 MB. --- # Signature Maker — Transparent PNG for PDFs and Documents > Draw your signature or clean up a photo of it — then download a transparent PNG that drops onto PDFs and documents. Free, no watermark, nothing uploaded. Source: https://toolpantry.app/signature-maker ## About Draw it with a mouse or finger, or photograph the real thing and let the tool clean the paper away. Download a transparent PNG that drops straight onto any document. ## Quick answer How do I make a signature for documents? Draw in the box below (or upload a photo of your signature on white paper), adjust the ink, and download a transparent PNG — auto-cropped to the signature. Then insert it into a PDF, or sign directly with the Sign PDF tool . Nothing is uploaded. ## How to make a signature (two honest routes) 1. **Draw it** — quick, clean, and consistent. Use a finger on a phone for the most natural line; a mouse works too, just a little stiffer. 2. **Photograph the real thing** — sign on plain white paper with a black pen, shoot it straight-on in even light, upload, and slide the paper-removal control. The ink stays, the paper vanishes. 3. **Download and use it** — the PNG is transparent and auto-cropped, so it drops onto a signature line without a white box. Insert it in any PDF editor or Word (Insert → Picture → Behind Text), or use our [Sign PDF](https://toolpantry.app/sign-pdf.html) tool to place it directly. ## Why blue ink A blue-ink signature is the classic way to show a document was signed (not photocopied) — it's why we default to it. Black is the choice when a form demands it. The transparent background is the part that matters most: without it, your signature arrives on a white rectangle that covers the line it's supposed to sit on. ## Good to know Everything happens in your browser — a signature is about as personal as a file gets, and it never touches a server here. The tool trims to the ink automatically, so you don't have to fight a canvas app's cropping. Need the signed document next? [Sign PDF](https://toolpantry.app/sign-pdf.html) places this PNG (or a drawn one) onto the page, and [Compress PDF](https://toolpantry.app/compress-pdf.html) shrinks the result before it goes back to whoever asked for it. ## Notes Draw with a mouse, trackpad, or finger. For the photo route: sign in black ink on plain white paper, fill the frame, and photograph it straight-on — then drag the paper-removal slider until the paper disappears. The PNG comes out transparent and cropped, ready to place over any signature line. ## FAQ **How do I make a signature for a PDF?** Draw your signature here (or upload a photo of it on white paper and let the tool clean the background), download the transparent PNG, then insert it into the document — or sign the PDF directly with our Sign PDF tool. **Why transparent PNG?** A transparent background means the signature sits on the signature line of a document instead of covering it with a white box. It is the format every PDF editor and Word expect. **Can I clean up a photo of my real signature?** Yes — sign on plain white paper, photograph it straight-on, and upload it. The tool removes the paper background and keeps the ink, then trims to the signature. **Is a drawn signature legally valid?** For everyday documents and approvals, an image signature is widely accepted (ESIGN Act in the US, eIDAS in the EU). Documents that legally require a qualified electronic signature need a certificate-based service — this tool is for the everyday 99%. --- # 7 Best Smallpdf Alternatives in 2026 (Free, No Sign-Up) > Seven honest Smallpdf alternatives for 2026: what each does best, free limits, and which to pick for merging, splitting, converting, and signing PDFs without an account. Source: https://toolpantry.app/smallpdf-alternatives ## About Smallpdf is a genuinely good PDF suite — which is exactly why people go looking for alternatives once the free daily limit stops them mid-task, or when a document cannot be uploaded to a server. This list covers seven alternatives, from full server suites to tools that never upload your files at all. ## Quick answer Short answer: for everyday PDF jobs (merge, split, rotate, sign, fill, convert) without limits or uploads, use Tool Pantry. For advanced editing and OCR, Adobe Acrobat or Sejda are worth the money — and iLovePDF and PDF24 have the most generous free server tiers. ## FAQ **Is there a free Smallpdf alternative without daily limits?** Yes — Tool Pantry has no daily caps because everything runs locally in your browser. The server-based suites (iLovePDF, PDF24) have the most generous free tiers, but all of them apply some limits. **Do I have to upload my files to use these alternatives?** No — and that is the main difference in this list. Tool Pantry processes everything locally in your browser: files never leave your device. The other services in these lists are server-based, so their files are uploaded. For sensitive documents, prefer a local tool. **Are these alternatives really free?** Mixed. Tool Pantry is fully free with no limits. Most others are freemium: a free tier with caps (documents per day, file size, tasks per hour) plus a paid plan. The lists above state the realistic free limits for each. --- # Social Media Image Sizes 2026 — Instagram, TikTok & More > Check Instagram 3:4 photos, YouTube thumbnails and more with scoped official sources, practical canvas options and PNG guides at exact pixel dimensions. Source: https://toolpantry.app/social-media-size-guide ## About Find Instagram, TikTok, YouTube, Facebook, LinkedIn, X and Pinterest dimensions. See which numbers are official recommendations and which are practical design canvases, then download a guide at the exact selected pixels. ## Quick answer Is 1080 × 1440 supported on Instagram? Yes: the photo-resolution guide supports 3:4. A 4:5 photo is another option, rather than the maximum portrait height. Select the placement below for its scope and source. ## How to use this guide 1. **Choose the placement.** A feed photo, Story, video, thumbnail and profile cover can have different rules. 2. **Read the scope and source.** A recommended size is different from a minimum requirement or a practical design choice. 3. **Export and preview.** Download the PNG at the selected width and height, then check crops and interface overlays in the destination app. ## Dimensions, conditions and official references Reviewed on 15 October 2026. Rows marked as practical canvases are our design choices, not platform-mandated pixel sizes. References are scoped to the named placement. [Download the dimensions, conditions and source list as JSON](https://toolpantry.app/data/social-media-sizes.json). | Placement | Canvas / ratio | Basis and conditions | Official reference / date | |---|---|---|---| | Instagram square photo | 1080 × 10801:1JPG or PNG | **Supported ratio; chosen canvas**Instagram preserves supported photo ratios from 1.91:1 through 3:4, up to 1080 pixels wide. This is a square canvas within that range. | [Instagram Help: photo resolution](https://help.instagram.com/1631821640426723)Checked2026-10-15 | | Instagram portrait photo (3:4) | 1080 × 14403:4JPG or PNG | **Supported ratio; chosen canvas**The photo-resolution guide supports 3:4. At 1080 pixels wide, this is 1440 pixels tall. The former claim that 4:5 is the tallest supported photo was outdated. | [Instagram Help: photo resolution](https://help.instagram.com/1631821640426723)Checked2026-10-15 | | Instagram portrait photo (4:5) | 1080 × 13504:5JPG or PNG | **Supported ratio; chosen canvas**4:5 remains an option within the supported photo ratio range; it is not the maximum portrait height. | [Instagram Help: photo resolution](https://help.instagram.com/1631821640426723)Checked2026-10-15 | | Instagram Story canvas | 1080 × 19209:16JPG or PNG for a still image | **Practical canvas**A 9:16 working canvas for a full-screen Story, rather than a universal minimum upload requirement. | [Instagram Help: sharing to a Story](https://help.instagram.com/1257341144298972)Reference; canvas is editorial2026-10-15 | | Instagram Reel canvas | 1080 × 19209:16MP4 video; PNG guide only | **Practical canvas**1080 × 1920 is a 9:16 working canvas. The linked Reel guidance, rather than this PNG, defines video upload requirements. | [Instagram Help: Reel size and aspect ratios](https://help.instagram.com/1038071743007909)Reference; canvas is editorial2026-10-15 | | TikTok vertical video canvas | 1080 × 19209:16MP4 or MOV video; PNG guide only | **Practical canvas; ad source scoped**TikTok Non-Spark in-feed ad guidance recommends 9:16 and at least 540 × 960 pixels. 1080 × 1920 is our larger working canvas; these ad rules do not define every organic photo post. | [TikTok: auction in-feed ad specifications](https://ads.tiktok.com/resources/help/article/tiktok-auction-in-feed-ads?lang=en)Checked2026-10-15 | | YouTube video thumbnail | 3840 × 216016:9JPG or PNG | **Official recommendation**Current guidance recommends 3840 × 2160 at 16:9 for videos, with a minimum width of 640. Mobile video thumbnails must be under 2 MB; desktop thumbnails under 50 MB. Shorts and podcasts have different ratios. | [YouTube Help: custom thumbnails](https://support.google.com/youtube/answer/72431?hl=en)Checked2026-10-15 | | YouTube channel banner | 2560 × 144016:9JPG or PNG | **Official recommendation**YouTube creator guidance recommends 2560 × 1440. The branding guide lists a minimum of 2048 × 1152 and a 1235 × 338 text-safe area at that minimum size; that safe rectangle must be scaled for a larger canvas. | [YouTube Help: banner tips](https://support.google.com/youtube/answer/12950272?hl=en)Checked2026-10-15 | | Facebook landscape post canvas | 1200 × 63040:21JPG or PNG | **Practical canvas**A 1200 × 630 design option, not a universal Facebook organic-post requirement. Check the destination preview and current upload guidance. | [Facebook Help: share photos or videos on a Page](https://www.facebook.com/help/492633697483393/)Reference; canvas is editorial2026-10-15 | | Facebook Page cover | 851 × 315851:315sRGB JPG; PNG for text or logos | **Official loading-size recommendation**Facebook recommends an 851 × 315 sRGB JPG under 100 KB for fastest loading. This is not a universal display size: the guide describes different desktop and mobile crops, with a minimum upload of 400 × 150. | [Facebook Help: Page profile and cover dimensions](https://www.facebook.com/help/125379114252045)Checked2026-10-15 | | LinkedIn landscape post canvas | 1200 × 627400:209JPG or PNG | **Practical canvas**A landscape design option, not a mandatory size for all LinkedIn posts. Personal-profile, Page and advertising placements have different rules. | [LinkedIn Help: Page posts FAQ](https://www.linkedin.com/help/linkedin/answer/a567075)Reference; canvas is editorial2026-10-15 | | LinkedIn personal background | 1584 × 3964:1JPG or PNG | **Official recommendation**LinkedIn recommends 1584 × 396 pixels for a personal-profile background; the help page lists an 8 MB maximum and PNG or JPG. Company Page covers are separate. | [LinkedIn Help: profile photo uploads](https://www.linkedin.com/help/linkedin/answer/a549049)Checked2026-10-15 | | X landscape post canvas | 1600 × 90016:9JPG or PNG | **Practical canvas**A 16:9 design option, not an X-mandated post size. Multi-image posts and previews may show different crops. | [X Help: photo posts](https://help.x.com/en/using-x/posting-photos)Reference; canvas is editorial2026-10-15 | | X profile header | 1500 × 5003:1JPG or PNG | **Official recommendation**X recommends 1500 × 500 pixels for profile headers. This recommendation applies to the header, not normal posts. | [X Help: customize your profile](https://help.x.com/articles/166743)Checked2026-10-15 | | Pinterest standard image Pin | 1000 × 15002:3JPG or PNG | **Official recommendation; standard-image scope**Pinterest standard image specifications recommend 2:3 or 1000 × 1500. Taller images can be cut off in feeds; other Pin and ad formats have separate specifications. | [Pinterest Help: standard image specifications](https://help.pinterest.com/en/business/article/pinterest-product-specs)Checked2026-10-15 | ## 1080 × 1440, 1080 × 1350 or 1080 × 1920? These are 3:4, 4:5 and 9:16 respectively. Instagram photo uploads support 3:4 and 4:5 within the documented range; a full-screen Story or Reel is a different placement. A 9:16 video canvas is not a universal rule for TikTok photo posts. The [Instagram photo-resolution guide](https://help.instagram.com/1631821640426723) explains the supported photo ratios and the 1080-pixel width. ## Safe areas depend on the placement There is no single safe rectangle for every platform and device. TikTok ad safe zones vary with captions, language and add-ons. YouTube channel banners show different crops on mobile, desktop and TV. Keep important text near the center, then use the actual preview rather than treating this PNG's dashed margin as an official template. ## Prepare the file for upload Use [Crop image](https://toolpantry.app/crop-image.html) or the [aspect ratio calculator](https://toolpantry.app/aspect-ratio-calculator.html) to fit your artwork. Check the [source-backed file-size reference](https://toolpantry.app/file-size-limits.html) for byte limits, or use the [target-size compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb.html) when your destination gives a specific ceiling. Changing dimensions does not automatically satisfy a file-size limit. ## Notes The PNG is a reference canvas at the displayed pixel size. Dashed margins are illustrative; use the destination preview and any official safe-zone file for the selected placement. ## FAQ **What size is an Instagram portrait photo?** Instagram supports photo ratios through 3:4. At 1080 pixels wide, a 3:4 photo is 1080 × 1440; 4:5 is 1080 × 1350 and remains another supported option. Check the feed, carousel and profile crop separately. **Is 1080×1440 an Instagram photo size?** Yes. It is a 3:4 canvas within the Instagram photo-resolution guide. The old claim that 4:5 was the tallest supported photo ratio is outdated. **What is the TikTok image ratio?** The 1080 × 1920 preset is a practical 9:16 video canvas. The linked TikTok ad specification recommends 9:16 for vertical Non-Spark ads; it does not establish one mandatory ratio for every organic photo post. **What size should a YouTube video thumbnail be?** The current YouTube guide recommends 3840 × 2160 pixels at 16:9 for video thumbnails, with a minimum width of 640. Upload limits vary by device. Shorts and podcasts have different recommended ratios. **Does the PNG download have the selected pixel dimensions?** Yes. The PNG has exactly the width and height shown by the picker. It is a reference image, not a video. Its dashed margin is illustrative and is not a universal official safe zone. **Does this upload an image?** No. No image is required. Copying dimensions and creating the PNG happen in your browser. --- # Speech to Text — Free Online Dictation & Transcription > Live speech-to-text dictation in your browser: speak and watch words appear with automatic punctuation. Copy or download the transcript — no account needed. Source: https://toolpantry.app/speech-to-text ## About Dictate in your browser and watch words appear live with automatic punctuation. Copy or download the transcript when you are done. ## Quick answer How do I transcribe my voice? Pick your language, press Start, allow the microphone, and speak. Words appear as you talk; press Stop and copy or download the text. Works in Chrome, Edge, and Safari. ## How to dictate text 1. **Choose your language** — the recognizer expects one language at a time. 2. **Press Start and speak** — normal pace, clear words; punctuation is added automatically in most languages. 3. **Stop, review, export** — edit the transcript in the box, then copy it or download a .txt. ## What dictation is good for - **Drafting** — get thoughts out faster than typing; clean them up afterward. - **Notes and meetings** — capture a summary right after the call while it is fresh. - **Accessibility** — hands-free text entry. - **AI prompting** — dictate a prompt instead of typing it, then paste it into your AI tool. ## Good to know Accuracy depends on the microphone, background noise, and how clearly you speak. Say punctuation out loud when you need it placed ("comma", "new paragraph"). For long recordings or audio files, dedicated transcription tools do better — this page listens to your microphone live. Related: [voice recorder](https://toolpantry.app/voice-recorder.html) to capture audio and [text to speech](https://toolpantry.app/text-to-speech.html) for the reverse direction. ## Notes Browser support: Chrome, Edge, and Safari. Important privacy note: in Chrome and Edge the speech engine runs on the browser vendor's online service, so your audio is sent to Google or Microsoft while dictating (Safari often recognizes on-device). Tool Pantry itself never receives your audio or transcript — the page is a thin wrapper over your browser's built-in engine. ## FAQ **Which browsers support live dictation?** Chrome, Edge, and Safari support the Web Speech API used here. Firefox currently does not — the page tells you when support is missing instead of failing silently. **Is my voice sent to a server?** Depends on your browser. Chrome and Edge process speech with their vendor's online service, so audio is sent to Google or Microsoft while you dictate. Safari uses on-device recognition for many languages. Tool Pantry itself never receives or stores your audio or transcript. **How accurate is the transcription?** For clear speech in a quiet room, accuracy is high — typically 95%+ for common languages. Names, heavy accents, and technical jargon are the usual mistakes. Speak at a normal pace and correct as you go. --- # Split PDF — Create One PDF Per Page Locally > Split a PDF into one local PDF per page in your browser. No upload, signup, or server processing required. Source: https://toolpantry.app/split-pdf ## About Turn a multi-page PDF into separate one-page files directly in your browser. The source stays on your device. ## Quick answer How do I split a PDF into pages? Add the PDF and the tool exports one file per page — locally, with no upload. ## How to split a PDF into single pages 1. **Add your PDF** — the file stays in your browser; nothing is uploaded. 2. **Split** — the tool creates one file per page or extracts your chosen ranges. 3. **Download** — grab individual pages or everything in one go. ## Why people split PDFs - Sending only the relevant page of a long document - Meeting upload portals that cap file size or page count - Separating invoices, chapters, or forms from a combined scan ## Good to know Splitting keeps original quality — pages are copied, not re-created. When a portal rejects a big scan, splitting is often the fastest fix. Need the opposite? [Merge PDF](https://toolpantry.app/merge-pdf.html) puts files back together. ## Notes This creates files named split-page-01.pdf, split-page-02.pdf, and so on. Your browser may ask to allow multiple downloads. ## FAQ **Does splitting upload my document?** No. The PDF is parsed and each output file is generated in this browser tab. **Can I extract only selected pages?** Use the Extract PDF pages tool when you want one smaller PDF containing a chosen range. --- # SQL Beautifier — Format & Beautify SQL Queries Online > Beautify SQL queries in your browser: keywords uppercased, clauses on their own lines, joins and subqueries indented — with your query never leaving the page. Source: https://toolpantry.app/sql-formatter ## About Turn a dense SQL query into a readable, copy-ready layout — keywords uppercased, clauses on their own lines, joins indented. Your query stays in the browser. ## Quick answer How do I format SQL online? Paste a query to get readable indentation and clauses; common dialects are supported best-effort. ## What the beautifier does to your query - **Keywords uppercased** — SELECT, FROM, JOIN, CASE/WHEN, CTEs (WITH), and window functions (OVER, PARTITION BY) get the classic uppercase treatment. - **Clauses on their own lines** — FROM, WHERE, GROUP BY, HAVING, ORDER BY, and LIMIT each start a fresh line, so the query's structure is visible at a glance. - **Joins and subqueries indented** — nested logic steps inward instead of flattening into one line. - **Strings and comments preserved** — literal text inside quotes is never touched, and your -- comments survive the reformat. ## Before and after ``` -- before select o.id, u.name, sum(oi.price*oi.qty) as total from orders o join users u on u.id=o.user_id join order_items oi on oi.order_id=o.id where o.created_at > '2026-01-01' and o.status in ('paid','shipped') group by o.id, u.name having sum(oi.price*oi.qty) > 100 order by total desc limit 20; -- after SELECT o.id, u.name, SUM(oi.price * oi.qty) AS total FROM orders o JOIN users u ON u.id = o.user_id JOIN order_items oi ON oi.order_id = o.id WHERE o.created_at > '2026-01-01' AND o.status IN ('paid', 'shipped') GROUP BY o.id, u.name HAVING SUM(oi.price * oi.qty) > 100 ORDER BY total DESC LIMIT 20; ``` ## How to beautify SQL 1. **Paste your query** — long one-liners and dumps from logs are exactly the point. 2. **Format** — keywords, clauses, and nesting get normalized instantly. 3. **Copy the result** — straight into code review, a ticket, a runbook, or your editor. ## Why format SQL at all - **Reviewing someone else's query** — a 200-character one-liner hides its joins; formatted, the mistake is usually obvious. - **Documentation** — formatted queries in tickets and runbooks are readable months later. - **Debugging** — missing join conditions and wrong GROUP BY scopes jump out once clauses are separated. - **Learning** — seeing clause structure on separate lines teaches SQL faster than parsing dense text. ## Good to know Formatting changes whitespace only — the query behaves exactly the same, but always skim your comments after any reformat. Dialects vary wildly, so this is labeled best-effort: common syntax formats identically across MySQL, PostgreSQL, SQLite, and SQL Server, while vendor-specific constructs pass through unchanged. For very large migration files, paste one statement at a time for the cleanest result. And because queries contain real table and column names, the local-only processing matters: nothing is ever sent to a server. ## Notes This formatter changes whitespace and keyword casing only. It does not parse, validate, execute, or rewrite your SQL logic; review the result before running it. ## FAQ **Which SQL dialects work?** Common syntax used across MySQL, PostgreSQL, SQLite, and SQL Server — SELECT/INSERT/UPDATE/DELETE, joins, subqueries, CTEs, and window functions — formats well. Vendor-specific constructs are preserved unchanged on a best-effort basis. **Does formatting change how the query runs?** No — only whitespace changes. String literals are never touched and comments are preserved, so the reformatted query executes identically. Do skim your comments after reformatting, since line wrapping can move them. **Does it support private queries?** Yes. Formatting happens locally and the page never sends query text to a server — which matters when the query contains real table names, customer columns, or anything under NDA. **Why is this called best effort?** SQL dialects have vendor-specific grammar. This page formats common statements and clause structures but is not a full dialect-aware parser — unusual syntax passes through rather than breaking. **Can I beautify a whole migration file?** Paste one statement at a time for the cleanest result. The formatter works on any text, but very large multi-statement files are easier to review when formatted piece by piece. --- # Statement of Work Generator — Free SOW Template > Create a statement of work draft with scope, deliverables, exclusions, timeline, and acceptance notes. Source: https://toolpantry.app/statement-of-work-generator ## About Outline what is included, what is excluded, how delivery works, and how the client approves the work. ## Quick answer How do I write a statement of work? Fill in the scope, deliverables, and acceptance terms for a structured SOW. ## How to write a statement of work 1. **Define the scope and deliverables** — specific, countable, reviewable items. 2. **Add the timeline and exclusions** — the exclusions list prevents scope creep later. 3. **List acceptance criteria** — what “done” means signs off and unlocks payment. ## When you need an SOW - Any project with multiple deliverables or a timeline beyond a few weeks - Retainer relationships, to bound what monthly hours actually cover - Subcontracted work, where the trail matters to a third party ## Good to know The exclusions section is the part clients’ change requests will argue with — make it explicit (“does not include copywriting, hosting setup, or ongoing edits”). Acceptance criteria turn “I’ll know it when I see it” into a testable checklist. Related: [proposal generator](https://toolpantry.app/proposal-generator.html) and [agenda builder](https://toolpantry.app/meeting-agenda-generator.html) for kickoff. ## Notes This is a planning template, not legal, tax, or contract advice. Review the final document before sending it. ## FAQ **Does this send anything to a client?** No. It only prepares text locally for you to review, copy, or download. **Can I customize the output?** Yes. Edit the fields, then copy the Markdown into your document, project workspace, or email. --- # IPv4 Subnet Calculator — CIDR Network and Host Range > Calculate IPv4 subnet network ranges, broadcast address, subnet mask, wildcard mask, and usable hosts locally. Source: https://toolpantry.app/subnet-calculator ## About Enter an IPv4 address in CIDR notation to calculate the network, broadcast, mask, wildcard, and host range. ## Quick answer How do I calculate a subnet? Enter an IP address and CIDR mask to see the network range, broadcast address, and usable hosts. ## How to calculate a subnet 1. **Enter an IP address and mask** — dotted or CIDR, both accepted. 2. **Read the block** — network address, broadcast, usable host range, and host count. 3. **Check membership** — is this IP inside that range? The answer is one glance away. ## Where subnet math shows up - Configuring VPNs, firewalls, and cloud VPCs without breaking routing - Deciding how large a subnet a workload actually needs - Certification study — the topic that refuses to stick from slides alone ## Good to know The network and broadcast addresses are part of the block but not usable by hosts — a /24 is 256 addresses with 254 usable. The /31 and /32 edge cases (point-to-point links and single hosts) follow the conventions explained on the page. Private ranges — 10/8, 172.16/12, 192.168/16 — never belong on the public internet, which is why your home router hands out 192.168 addresses. ## Notes Host counts follow common IPv4 conventions: /31 and /32 are shown without subtracting network and broadcast addresses. ## FAQ **What is CIDR notation?** CIDR writes an IPv4 address followed by a prefix length, such as 192.168.1.0/24. The prefix length tells you how many bits belong to the network. **Does this check routing or firewall rules?** No. It only calculates the mathematical boundaries of the entered IPv4 subnet. --- # SVG to PNG Converter — Export SVG as PNG or JPG Locally > Convert an SVG to PNG or JPG locally in your browser. Choose a scale and background without uploading the vector file. Source: https://toolpantry.app/svg-to-png ## About Rasterize an SVG into a downloadable PNG or JPG in your browser. Choose a scale and a background color without sending the vector file to a server. ## Quick answer How do I convert SVG to PNG? Add the SVG, choose the scale and background, and download a PNG — rasterized locally. ## How to convert SVG to PNG or JPG 1. **Drop your SVG** — logos and icons render locally on a canvas. 2. **Choose scale and background** — 1×–4× zoom; transparent, white, or custom. 3. **Download** — a PNG for everything, or JPG when transparency is not needed. ## Why you end up needing raster copies - Email signatures and documents that refuse SVG - App icons and store listings with strict PNG requirements - Tools that cannot import vector files at all ## Good to know Raster output is fixed at the exported resolution — export at 2–3× if the image will appear on retina screens or in print; you cannot zoom a PNG later. If an SVG uses fonts that are not embedded, text may render differently than in your editor — outline text in the source SVG first if exactness matters. Related: [PNG to JPG](https://toolpantry.app/png-to-jpg.html) or [JPG to WebP](https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-webp.html) once you have the raster copy. ## Notes SVG files can reference external assets or fonts that are unavailable offline. This tool rasterizes what the browser can resolve locally; check the preview before downloading. ## FAQ **Is my SVG uploaded?** No. The file is read by the browser, drawn to a local canvas, and downloaded from that canvas. **Why does JPG need a background?** JPG does not support transparency, so transparent SVG areas are filled with the selected color before export. --- # Text Chunker — Split Text for RAG & Embeddings > Split long text into token-sized chunks for RAG and embeddings pipelines — exact token counts, configurable overlap, export as JSONL. Runs locally. Source: https://toolpantry.app/text-chunker ## About Split long documents into token-sized chunks with overlap — the first step of every RAG and embeddings pipeline. Export as JSONL and feed it straight to your embedding script. ## Quick answer How do I chunk text for embeddings? Paste the document, choose a chunk size (512 tokens is the common default) and an overlap (50–100 tokens), and press Split. Review the chunks and download them as JSONL or plain text. ## How to chunk text for RAG 1. **Paste the document** — or a section of it; very long books are better processed chapter by chapter. 2. **Choose size and overlap** — 512 tokens with 64 overlap is the standard starting point. 3. **Export and embed** — download chunks.jsonl and run your embedding pipeline over each line. ## Choosing the right chunk size - **128–256 tokens** — best when queries are precise and answers live in a paragraph or two (FAQ bots, docs search). - **512 tokens** — the all-round default; good balance of context and retrieval precision. - **1,024–2,048 tokens** — for narrative or legal text where an answer spans pages. - **Overlap 10–20%** — keeps boundary sentences intact in both chunks. ## Good to know Chunking is the step most RAG quality problems trace back to: chunks that are too small lose context, too large dilute the embedding, and no overlap cuts sentences in half. After splitting, embed each line of the JSONL and store it with its source reference. Related: [LLM token calculator](https://toolpantry.app/llm-token-calculator.html) to size your context budget and [token counter](https://toolpantry.app/token-counter.html) for plain counting. ## Notes Chunking is token-exact: the text is tokenized with the real GPT tokenizer, sliced by token count, and decoded back — so every chunk lands within a token or two of your target size. The JSONL export has one {"text": …, "tokens": …} object per line. ## FAQ **What chunk size should I use for RAG?** 512 tokens with 50–100 tokens of overlap is the common default. Smaller chunks (128–256) give more precise retrieval but more embeddings to store; larger chunks (1,024+) keep more context per hit but retrieve less precisely. Try 512 first and adjust by testing retrieval quality. **Why do chunks overlap?** Overlap keeps sentences that fall on a boundary readable in both neighboring chunks. Without overlap, a key sentence can be cut in half and retrieved in a useless state. 10–20% of the chunk size is a good overlap. **What is the JSONL export for?** Each line is a JSON object with the chunk text and its token count — the shape embedding pipelines expect. You can feed the file straight to your embedding script or load it in a notebook without reformatting. --- # Word Counter — Character Counter & Reading Time > Count words, characters, sentences, paragraphs, and reading time in text locally. No text is uploaded. Source: https://toolpantry.app/text-counter ## About Check words, characters, sentences, paragraphs, and estimated reading time for a post, essay, email, or product description. ## Quick answer How do I count words and characters? Paste your text and the counter shows words, characters, sentences, and reading time in real time. Everything stays in your browser — nothing is saved or transmitted. ## How to count words and characters 1. **Paste your text** — counts update live as you type or paste. 2. **Read the stats** — words, characters (with and without spaces), sentences, paragraphs, and estimated reading time. 3. **Trim to a limit** — use the live counters to cut an essay, caption, or meta description down to its cap. ## Common limits people check against - College essays: 500 / 650 / 1,000-word caps - X posts: 280 characters; Instagram captions: 2,200 - SEO meta descriptions: keep under ~160 characters — see the [meta tag generator](https://toolpantry.app/meta-tag-generator.html) ## Good to know Word counts differ by language — Chinese and Japanese text has no spaces, so “words” are approximate; character counts are the reliable number there. Reading-time estimates assume roughly 200–250 words per minute. Nothing you paste is saved or transmitted. ## Notes Counting happens in your browser. Word counts treat runs of letters, numbers, and punctuation-separated text as words. ## FAQ **How is reading time estimated?** This page uses an approximate 200 words per minute, a common baseline for general English reading. **Does it count spaces?** Characters includes spaces and line breaks because that is useful for social posts and fields with character limits. --- # Text to Speech — Read Any Text Aloud Free (No Upload) > Read any text aloud with your device's built-in voices. Pick a voice, speed, and pitch, and follow along word by word — free, private, nothing uploaded. Source: https://toolpantry.app/text-to-speech ## About Turn any text into speech using the voices built into your device — no upload, no account, and it works offline once the page is open. ## Quick answer How do I hear my text? Paste or type your text, pick one of your device's voices, and press Speak. Adjust the speed and pitch if you like, and follow along word by word as it reads — nothing is uploaded. ## How to read text aloud 1. **Paste your text** — an article, study notes, an email draft, or any document you can copy. 2. **Pick a voice** — your device's voices are listed with their languages; macOS and iOS offer particularly natural ones. 3. **Press Speak** — adjust speed and pitch live, pause any time, and follow the highlighted words. ## What this tool is good for - **Proofreading by ear** — hearing your own writing catches clumsy sentences that silent reading misses. - **Accessibility** — listen to long documents without special software. - **Multitasking** — hear an article while doing something else. - **Language practice** — slow the speed to 0.7× to hear pronunciation clearly. ## Good to know Everything runs on your device: the text never leaves the browser, and after the page loads it works without a connection. Very long text is read sentence by sentence, so nothing gets cut off. If a voice sounds robotic, that is the voice your operating system provides — installing better system voices (in your OS settings) improves every site that uses them, including this one. Related: [convert audio files](https://toolpantry.app/audio-converter.html) and [extract audio from video](https://toolpantry.app/video-to-mp3.html). ## Notes Reading uses your device's built-in voices — quality and language availability depend on your operating system. There is no download option: browser speech plays through your speakers and cannot be captured as an audio file. Nothing you paste is uploaded or saved. ## FAQ **Can I download the audio as an MP3?** No — browser speech plays through your device's voices and cannot be captured as a file. This tool is for listening: proofreading, accessibility, and multitasking. For downloadable audio you need a server-based text-to-speech service. **Which voices are available?** Your device's own voices. macOS and iOS ship high-quality voices (Samantha, Daniel, and more), Windows includes Microsoft voices, and Android varies by device. Nothing is uploaded — the voices run locally. **Is there a length limit?** No hard limit: long text is read sentence by sentence so it never gets cut off. Very long documents (an hour of audio or more) are easier to handle in parts. --- # Time Duration Calculator — Calculate Hours Between Times > Calculate elapsed time between two times, including overnight shifts and breaks. Free browser-based time duration calculator. Source: https://toolpantry.app/time-duration-calculator ## About Find the time between a start and end time, subtract an unpaid break, and handle overnight shifts automatically. ## Quick answer How do I calculate time between two times? Enter start and end times to get the duration, including overnight shifts and breaks. ## How to calculate a time duration 1. **Enter start and end times** — same day or spanning midnight. 2. **Subtract breaks** — minutes or a period, done automatically. 3. **Read hours and minutes** — plus the decimal-hours form for timesheets. ## The everyday uses - Shift work and timesheet entries - Sleep, workout, and commute tracking - Project timeboxes measured in real hours ## Good to know Overnight spans are handled — machines and humans both fail at "11:30 PM to 3:15 AM" arithmetic, and this tool does not. Note that decimal hours (7.5) and clock format (7h 30m) are different languages: payroll systems may want one and your brain the other. Related: [timesheet calculator](https://toolpantry.app/timesheet-calculator.html) and [online timer](https://toolpantry.app/online-timer.html). ## FAQ **Can it calculate an overnight shift?** Yes. An end time earlier than the start time is treated as the following day, so 10:00 PM to 6:00 AM becomes eight hours before any break is deducted. **What is decimal time?** Decimal hours are useful for invoices and timesheets. Seven hours and thirty minutes is 7.50 decimal hours. --- # Timesheet Calculator — Track Weekly Freelance Hours > Track freelance hours for a week, calculate billable time and value, then download a simple CSV timesheet. Source: https://toolpantry.app/timesheet-calculator ## About Log a week of freelance work, mark billable hours, calculate the value at your rate, and download a CSV for your records. ## Quick answer How do I calculate weekly timesheet hours? Enter daily start and end times; totals and billable value compute automatically, with CSV export. ## How to track billable hours 1. **Enter hours per day or per project** — start/end or direct totals, weekly view. 2. **See billable value** — hours times rate for the week, before you forget the rate. 3. **Export CSV** — attach to invoices or feed your accounting. ## Who needs a weekly timesheet - Hourly and retainer clients who expect detail - Fixed-price projects where you want to know your real effective rate - Anyone who legitimately cannot remember Tuesday from three weeks ago ## Good to know Track as you work, not Friday afternoon — the Friday estimate is always wrong and always generous to the client. Round consistently (6 or 15 minute blocks) per your contract, and store the timesheet alongside the [invoice](https://toolpantry.app/invoice-generator.html). Related: [expense tracker](https://toolpantry.app/expense-tracker.html). ## Notes This timesheet stays in your browser. It is a planning and record-keeping aid, not payroll or tax advice. ## FAQ **What are billable hours?** Billable hours are time you agreed to charge to a client. Keep admin, sales, and learning separate so your project total stays clear. **Can I send the CSV to a client?** Yes. Review the project names and hours first, then open the CSV in a spreadsheet or attach it to your invoice workflow. --- # Unix Timestamp Converter — Convert Epoch Time Locally > Convert Unix timestamps to readable UTC dates and turn ISO dates into Unix seconds or milliseconds locally. Source: https://toolpantry.app/timestamp-converter ## About Convert Unix seconds or milliseconds to UTC and local time, or turn an ISO date into epoch values for logs and APIs. ## Quick answer How do I convert a Unix timestamp? Paste a Unix timestamp or an ISO date to convert between formats and time zones. ## How to convert Unix timestamps 1. **Paste the number** — seconds and milliseconds are auto-detected. 2. **Read both views** — UTC and your local timezone, side by side. 3. **Convert back** — from a human date to the epoch number APIs expect. ## The classic confusions this settles - Is 1728400000 seconds or milliseconds? (10 digits = seconds, 13 = milliseconds) - Why does the same timestamp show different hours to different teammates? (timezones render differently; the instant is identical) - Log entries with raw epoch values that no human can eyeball ## Good to know A Unix timestamp is always UTC by definition — timezone is only applied at display time, which is where bugs live. Databases store one, APIs sometimes expect the other; when a date is off by exactly a factor of 1000, you now know which conversion to run. ## Notes Numeric values with 13 or more digits are treated as milliseconds; shorter numeric values are treated as Unix seconds. Date parsing uses the browser's standard JavaScript parser. ## FAQ **What is Unix time?** Unix time counts seconds from 1970-01-01 00:00:00 UTC. Some JavaScript and database APIs use milliseconds instead. **Which timezone is shown?** The result includes UTC and the browser's local timezone so you can compare them. --- # Time Zone Converter & Meeting Planner — Compare Cities > Convert a meeting time across cities and find working-hour overlap across time zones with daylight-saving-aware browser calculations. Source: https://toolpantry.app/timezone-meeting-planner ## About Convert a meeting time across cities, see date changes and UTC offsets, then find shared working-hour windows. Future dates use the time-zone rules built into your browser. ## Quick answer How do I find a meeting time across time zones? Add participants' zones and working hours; the tool highlights the overlapping window. ## How to plan across timezones 1. **Add every participant’s city** — the planner shows each local time. 2. **Spot the working-hour overlap** — highlighted windows make candidates obvious. 3. **Copy the plan** — with DST-aware offsets so nobody shows up an hour off. ## The recurring pain this solves - Remote teams spread across three continents - A weekly call that drifts for two weeks every spring (DST changes on different dates) - Support shifts that must cover a business day elsewhere ## Good to know Daylight saving changes are the trap: countries shift on different dates in March, April, October, and November, so a “same time as last week” invite silently moves for someone. Recheck the overlap for meetings scheduled within a week of those transitions — this is also why smart schedulers store UTC. ## FAQ **Does this handle daylight saving time?** Yes. The page asks your browser's built-in IANA time-zone data for the selected date, so a future meeting can show a different offset from today's offset. **What does best overlap mean?** It scans the selected date in 15-minute steps and lists windows where every participant is inside their chosen local working hours for the full meeting length. It does not invent an overlap when none exists. **Does the page send my meeting details anywhere?** No. The title, date, time, locations, and working hours are calculated locally and are not uploaded by this page. --- # 7 Best TinyPNG Alternatives in 2026 (Free & No Upload) > Seven honest TinyPNG alternatives for 2026: compress images free — locally or in the cloud — with batch limits, quality, and privacy compared. Source: https://toolpantry.app/tinypng-alternatives ## About TinyPNG set the standard for image compression: drop in a PNG, get a dramatically smaller file that still looks right. Its limits (files and megabytes per batch) and the fact that images are uploaded send power users looking elsewhere. These seven alternatives cover the realistic options — including one that never uploads at all. ## Quick answer Short answer: for everyday compression (photos, screenshots, web images) Tool Pantry is free with no batch caps and nothing uploaded. Squoosh gives fine-grained control for one-off experiments; TinyPNG remains the quality benchmark. ## FAQ **Is there a free TinyPNG alternative with no batch limit?** Yes — Tool Pantry compresses images locally in your browser with no batch caps and no uploads. Quality is comparable for everyday photos and screenshots; TinyPNG's paid API still leads for automated pipelines. **Do I have to upload my files to use these alternatives?** No — and that is the main difference in this list. Tool Pantry processes everything locally in your browser: files never leave your device. The other services in these lists are server-based, so their files are uploaded. For sensitive documents, prefer a local tool. **Are these alternatives really free?** Mixed. Tool Pantry is fully free with no limits. Most others are freemium: a free tier with caps (documents per day, file size, tasks per hour) plus a paid plan. The lists above state the realistic free limits for each. --- # Tip Calculator — Split the Bill & Add Tax > Calculate a tip, tax, bill total, and per-person split with pre-tax or after-tax tipping and optional round-up locally. Source: https://toolpantry.app/tip-calculator ## About Calculate a tip, tax, group total, and per-person share with clear assumptions. Choose whether the tip applies before or after tax, then round up when clean change matters. ## Quick answer How do I calculate a tip? Enter the bill, tip percentage, and party size to split the total fairly. ## How to calculate a tip 1. **Enter the bill** — choose whether to tip on the subtotal or the taxed total. 2. **Pick or type a percentage** — presets for common norms, custom for the rest. 3. **Split by group** — tax basis, round-up, and per-person totals, all copyable. ## When it matters - US restaurants where 15–20% is the customary range - Delivery and service calls with suggested percentage guidelines - Groups splitting a bill where “everyone pays their share” needs exact numbers ## Good to know Tipping norms are local custom, not universal: the US leans percentage-based, Japan and much of Europe do not expect tips, and rules differ for counter service. When traveling, check the country’s convention rather than importing your home habit. Related: [percentage calculator](https://toolpantry.app/percentage-calculator.html) and [discount calculator](https://toolpantry.app/discount-calculator.html). ## Notes This displays money in the selected currency but never converts between currencies. Tax and tip values are your inputs; local tipping customs and tax rules vary. ## FAQ **Does the tip use the tax?** Choose Before tax to calculate the tip from the subtotal only, or After tax to include the tax amount in the tip base. The selected basis is shown beside the result. **How does the split work?** The rounded group total, if selected, is divided evenly among the number of people. The calculator shows the round-up adjustment separately so the assumption stays visible. **Does currency selection convert money?** No. Currency changes the display symbol and formatting only. Enter all amounts in one currency; no exchange-rate service is used. --- # Token Counter — Exact GPT Token Counts, Locally > Count GPT tokens exactly (o200k / cl100k) and estimate Claude and Gemini tokens — paste text, see tokens, characters, words, and context usage. Runs locally. Source: https://toolpantry.app/token-counter ## About Paste any text for exact GPT token counts — computed locally with the real open-source tokenizer — plus Claude and Gemini estimates. ## Quick answer How do I count ChatGPT tokens? Paste your text below. GPT-4o / GPT-5-class counts are exact (o200k_base tokenizer, run in your browser); GPT-4 / 3.5 counts are exact too (cl100k_base). Claude and Gemini columns are estimates — their tokenizers aren't public. A 500-word page ≈ 650–700 tokens. ## Token counts by model family | Column | Tokenizer | Accuracy | |---|---|---| | GPT-4o, GPT-4.1, GPT-5-class | o200k_base | **Exact** — runs locally | | GPT-4, GPT-3.5 | cl100k_base | **Exact** — runs locally | | Claude (Sonnet / Opus / Haiku) | Not public | Estimate, ±15% typical | | Gemini (2.x / 3.x) | Not public | Estimate, ±15% typical | ## Why token counts matter - **Cost** — APIs bill per token; a long prompt sent daily adds up fast - **Context limits** — every model has a window (commonly 128k tokens); going over means truncation or errors - **Prompt efficiency** — trimming boilerplate from a system prompt saves tokens on every single call ## Rules of thumb English: **1 token ≈ ¾ of a word ≈ 4 characters**. Code and JSON cost more per character (symbols split). CJK text costs roughly 1 token per character. A 500-word article lands around 650–700 tokens; a full book page of dense text around 500–600. ## Notes Exact columns use the official open-source tokenizers (tiktoken o200k_base / cl100k_base) running in your tab — your text is never uploaded. Estimates assume English; CJK and code can differ by more. ## FAQ **How many tokens is my text?** Paste it here and you'll get exact GPT token counts (o200k_base for GPT-4o and newer, cl100k_base for GPT-4 and 3.5) plus estimates for Claude and Gemini. A typical 500-word page is roughly 650–700 tokens. **Are the Claude and Gemini counts exact?** No — Anthropic and Google don't publish their tokenizers, so those columns are estimates (±15% typical). The OpenAI counts run the actual open-source tokenizer locally, so they are exact. **Is my text uploaded?** Never. The tokenizer (about 2.4 MB) downloads once and runs in your browser; your text stays in the tab. **What is a token?** A token is a chunk of text the model reads — roughly ¾ of a word in English. Punctuation, spaces, and code symbols each cost tokens too, which is why character counts and token counts never match exactly. --- # Tool Pantry vs Adobe Acrobat Online — Free PDF Tools (2026) > An honest 2026 comparison: Adobe Acrobat online's full PDF editor versus Tool Pantry's free local core tools — features, limits, uploads, and who should use which. Source: https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-adobe-acrobat-online ## About Adobe built the PDF. Its online tools are powerful — and cloud-based, account-gated, and subscription-priced for the good parts. Tool Pantry does the everyday operations free and local. Here is the honest split. ## Quick answer Is Tool Pantry a good Adobe Acrobat alternative? For everyday PDF work — merging, splitting, compressing, rotating, deleting pages, signing, converting to images, stripping metadata — yes: free, unlimited, and nothing uploaded. For deep editing (changing text inside a PDF), advanced form workflows, or certified e-signatures, Adobe's paid tools are still the ones to beat. ## Notes To be fair: Adobe's editor does things no free tool can, and we don't pretend otherwise. Tool Pantry optimizes for the 90% of PDF jobs that are mechanical — and for keeping your documents on your device while doing them. ## FAQ **Is Tool Pantry a good Adobe Acrobat alternative?** For core PDF jobs — merge, split, compress, rotate, delete pages, sign, and convert to or from images — yes: free, unlimited, and nothing uploaded. For deep editing like changing text inside a PDF, advanced forms, or certified signatures, Adobe's paid tools remain ahead. **Can Adobe Acrobat online tools be used for free?** Adobe offers some free online actions, but many require an Adobe account and daily usage limits apply, and files are processed on Adobe's servers. The full editor is subscription-based. **Does Tool Pantry edit PDF text?** No — it handles document-level operations (pages, merging, splitting, compression, signing, metadata, conversion). Text editing inside a PDF is a paid-editor job, and we say so instead of pretending otherwise. **Are my PDFs uploaded anywhere?** Not with Tool Pantry — every PDF operation runs in your browser tab. Adobe's online tools upload files to their cloud to process them. --- # Tool Pantry vs CloudConvert — Local vs API Conversion (2026) > An honest 2026 comparison: CloudConvert's 200+ format API service versus Tool Pantry's free local converters — limits, privacy, and who should use which. Source: https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-cloudconvert ## About CloudConvert is a conversion engine with an API and 200+ formats. Tool Pantry is what you open when you need to convert one file, right now, without an account. Different jobs entirely. ## Quick answer Is Tool Pantry a good CloudConvert alternative? For everyday one-off conversions — photos, PDFs, video-to-audio — yes: free, unlimited, and nothing uploaded. CloudConvert's 200+ formats, batch jobs, and paid API serve automation and scale, so keep it when you're building pipelines or converting something exotic. ## Notes To be fair: CloudConvert's engine is genuinely capable and its API is a real product. Tool Pantry competes on a different axis — instant, private, unlimited, and free for the conversions most people actually do. ## FAQ **Is Tool Pantry a good CloudConvert alternative?** For everyday one-off conversions, yes: free, unlimited, and fully local. CloudConvert is built for scale and automation — a paid API, 200+ formats, and batch pipelines — which is a different job than converting a photo on your laptop. **What are CloudConvert's free limits?** CloudConvert's free tier includes a limited number of conversion minutes per day (commonly 25 conversions), with paid packages for volume. Tool Pantry has no conversion count and no file size cap. **Does Tool Pantry have an API?** A light one: the Tools API at toolpantry.app/api offers text, QR, hashing, and catalog helpers — not file conversion, because conversion happens on your device, not our servers. CloudConvert's file-conversion API has no local equivalent. **Which is more private?** Tool Pantry by construction: files are processed in your browser and never uploaded. CloudConvert processes everything server-side — that's how it powers its API and integrations. --- # Tool Pantry vs iLoveIMG — Free Tools Compared (2026) > An honest 2026 comparison of Tool Pantry and iLoveIMG: local versus server processing, tool breadth, limits, and which one to pick for your task. Source: https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-iloveimg ## About Both are free tool collections. iLoveIMG goes deep on images and PDFs; Tool Pantry spans 128 tools with 100% local processing. Here is how to choose. ## Quick answer Which is better, Tool Pantry or iLoveIMG? iLoveIMG is stronger for advanced image editing (AI background removal, upscaling) within its image-and-PDF suite. Tool Pantry wins on privacy (files never leave your browser), breadth (128 tools including calculators, developer utilities, and business templates), no-account unconditional free use, and AI-agent-readiness (llms.txt, Markdown, open source). Many people keep both. ## Notes Features and pricing for third-party services change over time — verify on their site before deciding. This page is updated with the site (last reviewed October 2026). ## FAQ **Which one is more private?** Tool Pantry: every operation runs in your browser and files are never uploaded. iLoveIMG processes some tools locally and others on its servers, with automatic deletion. **Can Tool Pantry remove image backgrounds?** No — that needs a segmentation model, which cannot run entirely in a lightweight local tool yet. iLoveIMG offers it (some plans paid). **Is Tool Pantry free like iLoveIMG?** Yes: no account, no watermark, no daily limits. Some iLoveIMG advanced features are paid; Tool Pantry has no paid tier. **Can I use both?** Absolutely — many people use iLoveIMG for deep image editing and Tool Pantry for privacy-sensitive or high-volume jobs plus the wider toolset. --- # Tool Pantry vs PDF24 — Free PDF Suites Compared (2026) > An honest 2026 comparison: PDF24's broad free PDF suite versus Tool Pantry's browser-local core PDF tools — uploads, platforms, ads, and who should use which. Source: https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-pdf24 ## About PDF24 is one of the oldest free PDF suites — famously broad, ad-supported, and server-based online. Tool Pantry covers the core PDF jobs in your browser with nothing uploaded. Here is the honest split. ## Quick answer Is Tool Pantry a good PDF24 alternative? For core PDF work in a browser — merge, split, compress, rotate, delete pages, sign, convert, strip metadata — yes: free, no ads, and nothing uploaded, on any OS including phones. PDF24 wins on niche PDF features and its free Windows desktop app; keep it for those. ## Notes To be fair: PDF24 has been free and broad for decades, and its Windows Creator is genuinely useful. Tool Pantry optimizes for the modern default — any device, any OS, no install, nothing uploaded — and covers the operations most people actually run. ## FAQ **Is Tool Pantry a good PDF24 alternative?** For the core PDF operations in a browser — merge, split, compress, rotate, delete pages, sign, convert to and from images, strip metadata — yes: free, no ads, and nothing uploaded. PDF24 goes broader on niche PDF features and offers a free Windows desktop app; it's the better pick for those. **Does PDF24 upload my files?** PDF24's online tools process files on their servers (the desktop Creator app works offline, but it's Windows-only). Tool Pantry processes everything in your browser tab on any OS. **Which has more features?** PDF24 has more niche PDF operations (its suite is famously broad). Tool Pantry covers the core 20+ operations plus the image, video, and text tools PDF24 doesn't have — and none of it needs an upload. **Is Tool Pantry free of ads?** Yes — no ad banners inside the tools, no popups, no cookie walls. PDF24's free online tools are ad-supported. --- # Tool Pantry vs Smallpdf — Free PDF Tools Compared (2026) > An honest 2026 comparison of Smallpdf and Tool Pantry PDF tools: free limits, privacy, advanced features, and which to use for merge, split, and convert jobs. Source: https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-smallpdf ## About Smallpdf leads on advanced PDF features. Tool Pantry does the core operations — merge, split, rotate, extract, JPG to PDF — free, unlimited, and fully local. ## Quick answer Is there a free Smallpdf alternative? Yes: Tool Pantry's PDF tools (merge, split, extract, rotate, JPG→PDF) are free with no daily limits and run entirely in your browser — documents never leave your device. Smallpdf still leads on advanced features (compress, edit, sign, OCR). Choose Smallpdf for advanced editing; choose Tool Pantry for unlimited free core operations with privacy, plus 123 other utilities. ## Notes PDF compression and editing need heavy server-side engines; that is why Tool Pantry skips them rather than shipping a thin upload form. Core operations are where local wins. Last reviewed October 2026. ## FAQ **Is Tool Pantry PDF tooling really free and unlimited?** Yes — no account, no daily caps, no watermarks on the PDF tools. The files are processed locally by your browser using a bundled MIT-licensed engine. **Can Tool Pantry compress a PDF?** Not currently — reliable PDF re-encoding needs heavier engines than we ship. For that, Smallpdf or similar dedicated services remain the right tool. **Are my documents uploaded?** No. Merging, splitting, rotating, extracting, and JPG→PDF all run in your browser — verifiable in DevTools Network. --- # Tool Pantry vs TinyPNG — Local vs Cloud Compression (2026) > An honest 2026 comparison: TinyPNG quality and cloud compression versus Tool Pantry local compression, target sizes, limits, and privacy. Source: https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-tinypng ## About TinyPNG squeezes PNGs with a famous smart-lossy engine. Tool Pantry compresses everything locally with exact KB targets. Different strengths — here is the honest split. ## Quick answer Is Tool Pantry a good TinyPNG alternative? For privacy and unlimited use, yes: Tool Pantry compresses locally with exact target sizes (20KB–1MB) and no file limits or uploads. For pure smallest-possible PNG compression, TinyPNG's cloud engine is still excellent. Use TinyPNG when raw compression wins; use Tool Pantry when files are sensitive, when you need a precise KB target, or when you want 127 other tools in the same place. ## Notes To be fair: TinyPNG earned its reputation, especially on PNG. Tool Pantry optimizes for privacy, exact targets, and breadth instead of chasing the last 5% of compression. Compare both on your own images. ## FAQ **Which compresses files smaller?** TinyPNG usually wins on raw size, especially PNG. Tool Pantry stays local, hits exact KB targets, and often closes the gap with WebP output — compare visually at your display size. **Can Tool Pantry replace TinyPNG for web images?** For most websites, yes: convert to WebP and check the result at actual display size. If the last few KB matter more than privacy, keep TinyPNG for that job. **Is Tool Pantry really no-upload?** Yes — you can verify it yourself: open DevTools → Network and compress an image; no file data leaves the page. --- # Tool Pantry vs Zamzar — Free Conversion Compared (2026) > An honest 2026 comparison: Zamzar's 1,100+ format conversion service versus Tool Pantry's free local converters — limits, uploads, formats, and who should use which. Source: https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-zamzar ## About Zamzar has converted files since 2006 — over a thousand formats, all on their servers. Tool Pantry converts the formats people actually use, locally, without limits. Different tools for different jobs. ## Quick answer Is Tool Pantry a good Zamzar alternative? For everyday conversions — photos between JPG/PNG/WebP/HEIC, PDF to images, video to MP3, images to PDF — yes: unlimited, no signup, and nothing uploaded. Zamzar's 1,100+ formats (ebooks, CAD, legacy Office) remain unmatched by any browser-local toolset, so keep it for the exotic stuff. ## Notes To be fair: Zamzar has kept a thousand obscure formats working for two decades — that's genuinely hard engineering. Tool Pantry bets on the opposite trade-off: the ten formats that cover most people, done instantly, privately, and for free. ## FAQ **Is Tool Pantry a good Zamzar alternative?** For everyday conversions — images between JPG/PNG/WebP/HEIC, PDF to and from images, video to MP3, document basics — yes: unlimited and fully local. Zamzar converts over a thousand formats including ebooks, CAD, and legacy office files, which a browser-local toolset can't match. **What are Zamzar's free limits?** Zamzar's free tier is commonly two conversions per 24 hours with a 50 MB per-file limit, with paid plans starting around $9 per month. Tool Pantry has no conversion limit and no file size cap. **Why does local conversion matter?** Conversion services receive your files on their servers. For contracts, IDs, medical records, or unreleased media, that's a real exposure. Tool Pantry converts in your browser tab — you can verify with the Network panel. **Which formats can Tool Pantry convert?** The everyday set: JPG, PNG, WebP, HEIC, AVIF, ICO, SVG between each other; PDF to JPG/PNG/text; JPG/PNG/HEIC to PDF; video (MP4/MOV) to MP3, GIF, or a smaller MP4. Obscure formats are Zamzar's territory. --- # Typing Test — WPM, Accuracy & Error Count > Take a local typing speed test with WPM, net speed, accuracy, error count, timer presets, and short practice passages. Source: https://toolpantry.app/typing-test ## About Test your typing speed with a short passage and see gross WPM, net WPM, accuracy, characters per minute, and errors. The timer and keystrokes stay in this browser tab. ## Quick answer How do I test my typing speed? Type the sample text and get your words per minute and accuracy for the run. ## How to take a typing test 1. **Start typing the passage** — the timer begins with your first keystroke. 2. **Watch the stats** — gross and net WPM, accuracy, and character count update live. 3. **Retry and compare** — track progress across sessions on the same passage. ## What the numbers actually mean - Gross WPM counts raw speed; net WPM subtracts errors — the honest number - Accuracy first: speed follows accuracy, not the other way around - Results shift with keyboard, language, and passage familiarity ## Good to know Typical comfortable typing lands around 40–60 net WPM; the celebrated 100+ WPM club practises deliberately rather than just hurrying. Use the same passage and keyboard for before/after comparisons, or the numbers lie. Related: [word counter](https://toolpantry.app/text-counter.html) and [timer](https://toolpantry.app/online-timer.html). ## FAQ **How is WPM calculated?** This page treats five typed characters, including spaces and punctuation, as one standard word. Gross WPM is typed characters divided by five and elapsed minutes; net WPM subtracts the error penalty. **Does the timer start when the page loads?** No. Press Start typing, then the timer begins on your first character so a paused setup does not lower your score. **Are my keystrokes uploaded?** No. The passage, input, timer, and result are handled locally in this browser tab. --- # Unit Converter — Length, Mass, Temperature, Volume > Convert length, mass, temperature, area, volume, speed, time, and digital data locally with a clear formula and common equivalents. Source: https://toolpantry.app/unit-converter ## About Convert everyday measurements between metric and US units, see the factor used, and copy a clean result. The math stays in this browser tab. ## Quick answer How do I convert units online? Pick a category and enter a value for instant length, weight, temperature, and more. ## How to convert units 1. **Pick a category** — length, mass, temperature, area, volume, speed, time, or digital data. 2. **Type a value in any field** — every other unit updates instantly. 3. **Copy the result you need** — no submit button, nothing sent anywhere. ## Everyday conversions people actually make - Cooking: ounces to grams, cups to milliliters - DIY and woodworking: inches to centimeters, feet to meters - Travel: miles to kilometers, pounds to kilograms - Screens and design: pixels meet DPI — see the [DPI calculator](https://toolpantry.app/image-dpi-calculator.html) ## Good to know Temperature is the odd one out — it converts with an offset, not a simple ratio, which this tool handles. One trap for cooks: a US fluid ounce is not the same as an imperial fluid ounce, so check which system a recipe assumes. For CSS lengths (px/rem/em), use the [CSS unit converter](https://toolpantry.app/css-unit-converter.html). ## Notes Linear units convert through a shared base unit. Temperature uses offsets instead of a single multiplier. Digital data labels make the decimal KB/MB and binary KiB/MiB distinction explicit. ## FAQ **Which units does this converter support?** It covers common length, mass, temperature, area, volume, speed, time, and digital-data units, including metric and US customary choices. Each category updates its own From and To lists. **Why are KB and KiB different?** Decimal storage uses powers of 1,000: 1 KB is 1,000 bytes. Binary storage uses powers of 1,024: 1 KiB is 1,024 bytes. The labels stay separate so a disk or download estimate is easier to check. **Are the conversions sent to a server?** No. The factors and formulas are bundled in the page, and the value stays in this browser tab. No account, upload, or live API is required. --- # URL Encoder & Decoder — Encode Query Parameters Online > Encode or decode URL text and query parameters locally with encodeURIComponent, encodeURI, and their decode functions. Source: https://toolpantry.app/url-encoder-decoder ## About Encode query values, encode a complete URI, or decode percent-escaped text locally with the browser's native URL functions. ## Quick answer How do I encode a URL? Paste text or a URL to percent-encode or decode it instantly. ## How to encode or decode a URL 1. **Choose the mode** — component encoding for individual values, full-URI for whole links. 2. **Paste the text** — encoded or plain. 3. **Copy the result** — safe for query strings, redirects, and API calls. ## The everyday debugging cases - A tracking parameter broke because an ampersand inside a value was not encoded - Reading a URL full of percent signs and guessing wrong - Passing a redirect target as a query parameter — needs component encoding ## Good to know Component encoding escapes reserved characters inside a single value; full-URI encoding keeps the structural characters (:, /, ?) readable. Double-encoding is the classic bug — encode once, at the point where the value enters the URL. And in form bodies, spaces are + while in paths they are %20. ## Notes Use component encoding for individual query values. Full URI encoding keeps URL separators such as :, /, and ? readable where possible. ## FAQ **What is the difference between encodeURI and encodeURIComponent?** encodeURI is intended for a complete URI and preserves structural separators. encodeURIComponent is intended for one value such as a query parameter. **Why did decoding fail?** The input may contain a stray percent sign or an incomplete escape sequence. Copy the encoded value exactly and try again. --- # UTM Builder & Generator — Analytics Campaign URLs > Build campaign tracking links with UTM parameters for Google Analytics and marketing campaigns. Runs locally. Source: https://toolpantry.app/utm-builder ## About Create clean campaign URLs for newsletters, social posts, ads, and partner links. The builder never sends your URL anywhere. ## Quick answer How do I build a UTM link? Fill in the source, medium, and campaign for a tagged URL you can copy into your posts. ## How to build a UTM link 1. **Enter the destination URL** — the real, final one. 2. **Fill the five parameters** — source, medium, campaign, and optionally term and content. 3. **Copy and share** — analytics will now attribute arrivals correctly. ## Where UTM discipline pays - Newsletter and social posts, so “which channel worked?” has a real answer - Ad campaigns, where mismatched parameters split reporting - Partner links where you need credit to land in the right bucket ## Good to know Consistency is everything — email and Email become two different channels in most analytics tools, so write a tiny convention and stick to it (lowercase is the easy default). Do not tag internal links: a UTM on an internal click resets the visitor’s original attribution and steals credit from the channel that found them. ## Notes UTM values are added in your browser using standard URL parameters. Keep names lowercase and consistent so reports stay easy to compare. ## FAQ **What is a UTM parameter?** A UTM parameter labels a link so analytics tools can group visits by source, medium, campaign, keyword, or creative. **Will UTM parameters change the page?** They usually do not change the content. Your analytics platform reads them when someone opens the tagged link. --- # UUID Generator — Create Random UUID v4 Values > Generate random UUID v4 values in your browser. Create a batch, copy it, or download it as text. Source: https://toolpantry.app/uuid-generator ## About Create random version 4 UUIDs for database rows, API fixtures, test data, and local development. Generation happens in your browser. ## Quick answer How do I generate a UUID? Pick v4 or v7 and generate as many as you need — all locally. ## How to generate UUIDs (v4) 1. **Pick a batch size** — one or hundreds, uppercase optional. 2. **Generate** — version-4 UUIDs from your browser’s secure random source. 3. **Copy or download** — one per line, ready for a seed script. ## Typical uses - Database primary keys and test fixtures - Unique filenames and correlation IDs in logs - Filling sample data without collisions ## Good to know UUID v4 is random — collision odds are astronomically small, but the values are not time-ordered, which some databases prefer for write performance. If you need sortable IDs, UUID v7 or an ULID solves that; v4 remains the standard “just unique” choice and is what this tool generates. ## Notes This page generates UUID v4 values with the browser's cryptographic random source. It does not check whether an existing UUID is already in your database. ## FAQ **What is a UUID?** A UUID is a 128-bit identifier commonly written as five groups of hexadecimal characters separated by hyphens. **Which UUID version does this use?** This tool creates random version 4 UUIDs, which are suitable for many IDs and test fixtures. --- # Video to GIF — Make Animated GIFs Locally > Turn an MP4 or MOV clip into an animated GIF right in your browser — pick the trim, frame rate, and width. No upload, no watermark, no 30 MB download. Source: https://toolpantry.app/video-to-gif ## About Turn an MP4 or MOV into a looping GIF — choose the seconds that matter, the frame rate, and the width. Everything runs on your device. ## Quick answer How do I convert a video to GIF? Add the MP4, set the trim (5 seconds or less is the sweet spot), pick 12 fps and 480 px wide, and press Convert. Shorter, narrower, and fewer frames = smaller GIF — all three dials are in your hands, and nothing is uploaded. ## How the conversion works The tool demuxes the MP4, decodes frames with the browser's media pipeline (WebCodecs), captures them at your chosen frame rate and size, and encodes a GIF locally with a palette of 256 colors per frame. No server, no watermark — you can watch the Network tab stay quiet after the page loads. ## The three dials that control GIF size - **Duration** — halve the seconds, halve the file. Most great GIFs are 2–4 seconds - **Width** — GIF size scales with pixel count: 480 → 320 px is about 55% fewer pixels, 640 → 320 is 75% fewer - **Frame rate** — 10 fps vs 15 fps is a third fewer frames; for screen recordings 10 fps is usually fine, for sports and gestures use 15 ## Honest limits Input is MP4/MOV/M4V with H.264 or HEVC video (same as our [video compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-video.html)). WebM and MKV aren't supported yet. Clips are capped at 20 seconds and 300 frames — beyond that GIF files stop being shareable anywhere. There's no audio in GIF, by format; extract it separately with [video to MP3](https://toolpantry.app/video-to-mp3.html) if you need it. And if the destination is a chat app that supports video — Discord, Slack, iMessage all do — send the compressed video instead; it will look better and weigh less. Starting from still photos instead of a clip? [Images to GIF](https://toolpantry.app/images-to-gif.html) animates a set of pictures. ## Notes GIFs are big by nature — every frame is a full image with a 256-color palette. A 5-second 480 px GIF usually lands at 1–4 MB. If the platform accepts video, the video is almost always smaller and smoother. ## FAQ **How do I convert a video to GIF?** Add an MP4 or MOV, choose the trim (start and duration — shorter is better), set the frame rate and width, and press Convert. The whole pipeline runs in your browser; nothing is uploaded. **How do I keep the GIF small?** GIF is an old format and it shows: keep clips under about 6 seconds, drop the width to 320 or 240, and use 10–12 fps. A 5-second 480 px GIF typically lands between 1 and 4 MB; halving the width cuts that roughly fourfold. **Why is the GIF larger than the video?** GIF stores every frame with a limited 256-color palette and no motion compensation — modern video codecs are simply far more efficient. That's why a 1 MB MP4 can become a 4 MB GIF. If the destination accepts video, send the video. **Is there sound in the GIF?** No — the GIF format has no audio at all. The audio track is ignored; if you need it, extract it as MP3 with the video to MP3 tool. --- # Video to MP3 — Extract Audio Locally, No Upload > Extract MP3 audio from a video file right in your browser — MP4, MOV, WebM, or M4A in, MP3 out at 128–320 kbps. No upload, no account, no watermarks. Source: https://toolpantry.app/video-to-mp3 ## About Pull the audio out of any video file — decoded by your browser, encoded to MP3 at your chosen bitrate. Files only, no links, nothing uploaded. ## Quick answer How do I convert a video to MP3? Add the file, pick 192 kbps (the safe default), and press Convert to MP3. Decoding and encoding happen in your browser — no upload, no account, no watermark. This works on files you have; it does not take YouTube links. ## How the conversion works Your browser already contains the codecs that play videos — AAC for MP4, Opus for WebM. This tool hands the file to that same decoder (through the Web Audio API), gets raw PCM audio back, and encodes it to MP3 with the LAME encoder compiled to JavaScript. Nothing goes to a server; you can watch the Network tab stay silent. ## Bitrate: what to pick - **128 kbps** — small files, podcasts and voice; fine for speech, slightly dull for music - **192 kbps** — the default for a reason: transparent for most listeners, about 1.4 MB per minute - **320 kbps** — maximum MP3 quality, about 2.4 MB per minute; only worth it if the source audio is high quality to begin with One honest note: if the source is already compressed (say AAC at 128 kbps), converting to MP3 320 kbps doesn't add quality — it just stops the re-encode from making things worse. Match the source's level, don't exceed it by much. ## What this tool won't do It won't take a YouTube, TikTok, or Spotify link — only files on your device. Link downloading violates those platforms' terms, and any site promising it is doing something the law frowns on. If you recorded the video yourself (our [screen recorder](https://toolpantry.app/screen-recorder.html) saves WebM locally), converting it here is completely fine. ## After the conversion MP3 files don't carry metadata beyond ID3 tags — none are written here. If you need a ringtone-length clip, trim the MP3 in any player; if you need the video itself smaller, the [video compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-video.html) does that next door. Photos with hidden data? The [EXIF viewer](https://toolpantry.app/exif-viewer.html) handles those. ## Notes Long videos take a few seconds per minute of audio to encode — the progress field shows where it is. Files over roughly an hour are better handled on a computer than a phone: decoding loads the whole audio into memory. ## FAQ **How do I convert a video to MP3?** Add a video file (MP4, MOV, WebM, M4A), pick a bitrate — 192 kbps is the safe default — and press Convert. Your browser decodes the audio and encodes MP3 locally; nothing is uploaded. **Can it convert a YouTube link?** No — and we deliberately don't do links. This tool works on files you already have on your device. Downloading from streaming platforms is against their terms, and we're not going near it. **Does converting to MP3 lose quality?** If the source audio is already compressed (AAC or Opus), MP3 re-compresses it once. At 192 kbps or higher that's fine for listening. For archiving, keep the original file. **Which formats are supported?** Whatever your browser can play: MP4 and MOV (AAC), WebM (Opus), M4A audio. MKV and some exotic codecs may fail — the tool tells you when it can't decode a file. --- # Video Trimmer — Cut MP4 Without Re-Encoding, Locally > Trim an MP4 or MOV without re-encoding — the cut is instant and pixel-identical to the original. Pick start and end, download. Nothing is uploaded. Source: https://toolpantry.app/video-trimmer ## About Trim an MP4 or MOV by copying the original data — no re-encoding, no quality loss, done in seconds. The cut snaps to the nearest keyframe, and we show you exactly where it landed. ## Quick answer How do I trim a video without re-encoding? Add the MP4, set start and end (or use the playhead buttons), and press Trim. The clip is rebuilt from the original video/audio data — pixel-identical, no export wait. Nothing is uploaded. ## How to trim a video (without re-encoding) 1. **Add the MP4 or MOV** — it loads into the preview player. 2. **Set the range** — type times, or play to a spot and press "Set start/end at playhead". 3. **Trim & download** — the file rebuilds in seconds (it's a copy, not an export). ## Why this beats "export" in an editor Any tool that re-encodes a cut costs you twice: the wait (an export can take minutes) and a generation of quality loss (the video is compressed again). This trimmer does what a cutting tool should: it copies the original compressed frames and audio samples into a new file. The clip that comes out is byte-for-byte the same video data as the source — the industry calls it "stream copy". The one honest limitation is keyframes, explained above and shown in the status line after every trim. ## When to use the re-encoding tool instead - **Frame-exact cuts** where the first frame matters — [Compress video](https://toolpantry.app/compress-video.html) can start precisely - **Smaller files** — trimming barely shrinks a file (it only removes what you cut); compressing changes the bitrate itself - **Format changes** — this tool outputs MP4; [Video to MP3](https://toolpantry.app/video-to-mp3.html) extracts audio, [Video to GIF](https://toolpantry.app/video-to-gif.html) makes loops ## Good to know Trimmed clips carry no new metadata — the output is a clean rebuild of the frames you kept, which is also handy for privacy. Everything runs locally: a 200 MB video is processed in your browser tab without a single byte uploaded, so it works on a plane and it works on files you'd rather not hand to a server. ## Notes Because the video data is copied rather than re-encoded, the cut starts at the nearest keyframe at or before your chosen time (usually within a second or two) — the tool tells you the exact start it used. Need a frame-exact cut or a smaller file? That's [Compress video](https://toolpantry.app/compress-video.html), which re-encodes. ## FAQ **How do I trim a video without losing quality?** This tool cuts MP4/MOV files by copying the original video and audio data — no re-encoding at all, so the trimmed clip is pixel-identical to the source. The trade-off: the cut snaps to the nearest keyframe before your chosen start, usually within a couple of seconds. **Why does my clip start a little before the time I picked?** Video is compressed in keyframe groups; a player can only start cleanly at a keyframe. The tool shows the actual start it used, which is the nearest keyframe at or before your chosen point. Re-encoding (the compress-video tool) can cut exactly, at the cost of quality and time. **Which formats work?** MP4, MOV, and M4V with H.264 or HEVC video — the same family the compress-video tool handles. The output is always MP4. **Is my video uploaded?** No. The file is demuxed and rebuilt in your browser tab; nothing is sent to a server. --- # Voice Recorder Online — Save MP3 or WAV, Nothing Uploaded > Record your voice in the browser and save it as MP3 or WAV — pause, resume, watch the level meter. No app, no account, and the recording never leaves your device. Source: https://toolpantry.app/voice-recorder ## About Voice memos, interviews, practice takes — recorded in the browser, saved as MP3 or WAV. The audio never leaves your device, which is more than most online recorders can say. ## Quick answer How do I record my voice online? Press Record, allow the microphone once, and speak — pause and resume as needed. Stop, then export MP3 or WAV. Unlike most online recorders, nothing is streamed to a server; it all happens in your tab. ## How to record your voice 1. **Press Record** and allow the microphone when your browser asks. 2. **Speak** — the meter shows your level; pause and resume whenever you like. 3. **Stop and export** — MP3 for sharing, WAV for editing and transcription. ## Why "recorded locally" matters Most free online recorders stream your microphone to their servers, store the file there, and hand you back a download — which means your interview, medical note, or client call now exists on someone else's disk. This recorder uses the browser's own MediaRecorder API: the audio goes into memory in this tab, gets encoded here, and is saved by your browser's download. Open the Network panel while recording and you'll see nothing being sent. ## Good to know Long sessions are bounded by device memory — an hour or more on a laptop, less on a phone; save in parts for anything longer. For cleaner takes, record in a quiet room and keep the mic 15–20 cm from your mouth. If you need to cut the dead air or keep only a section, run the exported file through the [audio trimmer](https://toolpantry.app/audio-trimmer.html) — it also makes [iPhone ringtones](https://toolpantry.app/audio-trimmer.html) out of anything you record. Recording the screen instead of just your voice? The [screen recorder](https://toolpantry.app/screen-recorder.html) captures video with mic audio. ## Notes The browser asks for microphone permission once; the permission prompt is your browser's, not ours. Keep the tab open while recording — a reload loses the take. Need to trim the ends or cut a segment? Export and refine it in the [audio trimmer](https://toolpantry.app/audio-trimmer.html). ## FAQ **How do I record my voice online?** Press Record, allow the microphone once, and speak. Pause and resume as needed, then stop and export as MP3 or WAV. Everything is captured and encoded in your browser. **Is my recording uploaded anywhere?** No — unlike most online recorders, the audio never goes to a server. It is captured with the browser's MediaRecorder, encoded on your device, and saved by your browser's normal download. Open the Network panel to verify. **How long can I record?** Bounded only by your device's memory — typically an hour or more on a laptop. Save long sessions in parts, and keep the tab open until you export. **Which format should I pick — MP3 or WAV?** MP3 for sharing, voice notes, and anything that needs to be small. WAV if the recording feeds an editor or transcription service — it keeps full quality at a bigger size. --- # Watermark PDF — Text on Every Page, Free & Local > Add a text watermark to every page of a PDF — centered or tiled, with opacity, rotation, and color controls. Live preview, runs locally, nothing uploaded. Source: https://toolpantry.app/watermark-pdf ## About Stamp DRAFT, CONFIDENTIAL, or your brand across every page — centered or tiled, with a live preview. Local processing, nothing uploaded. ## Quick answer How do I watermark a PDF for free? Load the PDF, type your text, tune the opacity and angle, and press Add watermark . The live preview shows page 1; the saved file carries the mark on every page. No upload, no account, no per-page work. ## Why watermark at all? A watermark does two jobs: it labels a document's status (DRAFT, VOID, COPY) and it deters casual reuse of your work — proposals, samples, course materials, and proofs. Doing it by hand in an editor means opening heavyweight software for a one-line stamp; this tool does the whole document in one pass, locally. ## Getting a good watermark - **Status marks** — DRAFT / VOID / COPY: centered, 45°, 15–25% opacity, red or grey. Visible, but the text underneath stays readable - **Protection marks** — your name, brand, or order ID: tiled mode at 10–15% opacity. Repeated small marks are much harder to crop out than one big stamp - **Color logic** — red reads as "not final"; grey reads as "branding"; dark colors at low opacity look like printed stationery - **Check the preview** — it updates live for text, size, opacity, angle, and position before you commit ## What this tool does and doesn't do It draws *text* watermarks (any string up to 40 characters) into every page. It does not add image/logo watermarks, per-page different texts, or password protection — for those, pair it with the rest of the PDF family: [rotate pages](https://toolpantry.app/pdf-rotate.html), [delete pages](https://toolpantry.app/pdf-page-delete.html), [merge documents](https://toolpantry.app/merge-pdf.html), or [sign the result](https://toolpantry.app/sign-pdf.html). Everything stays on your device. ## Notes The preview approximates the final result (exact font rendering happens in the PDF itself). Centered + 20% opacity is the classic "DRAFT" look; tiled mode makes a document harder to reuse. ## FAQ **How do I add a watermark to a PDF for free?** Load the PDF, type your watermark text, adjust opacity, rotation, and position, then press Add watermark. The preview shows page 1 live, and the saved file carries the watermark on every page. Nothing is uploaded. **Can I watermark all pages at once?** Yes — the watermark is applied to every page in one pass. Choose centered (one diagonal stamp in the middle) or tiled (a repeating grid across the page). **Will the watermark cover the text underneath?** At typical settings (15–30% opacity) the watermark sits visibly over the content without hiding it. Use higher opacity for stronger protection, or tiled mode to make the document harder to reuse without attribution. **Can someone remove the watermark afterwards?** The watermark is drawn into the page content, so removing it requires editing the PDF — it is not a separate layer you can simply toggle off. For documents that need tamper-proof marking, combine it with a signature or certification service. **Is my PDF uploaded anywhere?** No. The PDF is read, watermarked, and saved entirely in your browser. You can verify in the network panel or by working offline. --- # WebP to JPG Converter — Convert WebP Images Locally > Convert WebP images to JPG locally in your browser. Choose JPEG quality and a background color without uploading the image. Source: https://toolpantry.app/webp-to-jpg ## About Convert a WebP image into a broadly compatible JPG with a quality slider and background color. The image stays in your browser. ## Quick answer How do I convert WebP to JPG? Add your WebP file, keep the JPG output selected, and download. Conversion happens locally in your browser, so your images never leave your device. ## How to convert WebP to JPG 1. **Add your WebP file** — drag it in or browse; conversion runs locally in your browser. 2. **Set the output quality** — the default preserves a good balance; raise it for print, lower it for smaller files. 3. **Download the JPG** — the file saves directly to your device, no upload and no account. ## When you need a JPG instead of WebP - Upload portals and older CMS versions that reject WebP files - Photo apps, printers, and devices with limited format support - Sharing images with people whose tools predate WebP (2010–2020) ## Good to know WebP files are typically 25–35% smaller than a JPG of similar quality, so converting back to JPG will usually *increase* the file size — that is expected. One caveat: JPG has no transparency, so transparent areas are flattened onto a solid background. If you need transparency, keep PNG; see [PNG to JPG](https://toolpantry.app/png-to-jpg.html) and [JPG to PNG](https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-png.html) conversions. Going the other way? [JPG to WebP](https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-webp.html) makes smaller files, and [PNG to WebP](https://toolpantry.app/png-to-webp.html) handles transparent images. ## Notes JPG cannot preserve transparent pixels, so transparent areas use the selected background color. The original file is never overwritten. ## FAQ **Why convert WebP to JPG?** JPG is still accepted by many older editors, forms, marketplaces, and print workflows. WebP is often smaller for websites, while JPG is a convenient compatibility copy. **Is the image uploaded?** No. Decoding, drawing, and JPEG export happen inside your browser. --- # WebP to PNG Converter — Convert WebP Images Locally > Convert WebP images to lossless PNG locally in your browser. Preserve transparency without uploading the image. Source: https://toolpantry.app/webp-to-png ## About Turn a WebP into a lossless PNG copy for older editors, upload forms, and apps that still refuse WebP. The conversion runs on your device. ## Quick answer How do I convert WebP to PNG? Add the WebP and download a lossless PNG with transparency preserved. ## How to convert WebP to PNG 1. **Add your WebP file** — batch supported. 2. **Convert to PNG** — lossless, transparency preserved. 3. **Download** — ready for editors and tools that expect PNG. ## When you need PNG back - Editors and pipelines built around PNG-only workflows - Platforms whose upload checks still reject WebP - Keeping transparency while switching formats ## Good to know Expect the PNG file to be several times larger than the WebP — that is the cost of lossless storage. Use PNG when a tool demands it; for anything headed to a browser, WebP stays the better delivery format. Related: [WebP to JPG](https://toolpantry.app/webp-to-jpg.html) for photo-style images. Related: [PNG to WebP](https://toolpantry.app/png-to-webp.html) for the reverse direction, or [JPG to WebP](https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-webp.html) for photos. ## Notes PNG is lossless, but the exported file can be larger than the original WebP. The pixels are copied from what your browser decodes; no server is involved. ## FAQ **Why convert WebP to PNG?** Some older design tools, upload forms, and local editors accept PNG but do not understand WebP. This creates a compatibility copy while keeping alpha transparency. **Is my WebP uploaded?** No. The browser decodes and exports it locally. --- # World Clock — Current Time in Global Cities > See the current local time in major cities around the world. A simple browser-only world clock with no tracking. Source: https://toolpantry.app/world-clock ## About Check the current local time in major cities before a call, launch, meeting, or handoff. Time zones come from your browser. ## Quick answer What time is it around the world? See the current time for major cities side by side and compare quickly. ## How to watch multiple timezones at once 1. **Add the cities you care about** — teammates, family, clients. 2. **Read live local times** — side by side, no math. 3. **Keep the tab open** — it works offline and updates itself. ## What people use it for - Glancing before sending that “quick question” to another continent - Timing calls and releases against key regions - Keeping in touch with family across borders ## Good to know Times derive from your device clock and major cities’ current DST rules — offsets update automatically across daylight-saving transitions, which is precisely when human memory fails. For scheduling rather than glancing, start with the [meeting planner](https://toolpantry.app/timezone-meeting-planner.html). ## Notes The clock updates every second and uses your device's current date and time. Daylight saving changes are handled by the browser's time-zone database. ## FAQ **Does this need an API?** No. Modern browsers include time-zone formatting through the Internationalization API, so this page can run without a server or account. **Why can a city be on a different date?** Time zones can cross midnight. The date shown beside each time is local to that city. --- # XML Formatter — Validate and Pretty-Print XML > Validate and pretty-print XML locally in your browser with readable indentation and error messages. Source: https://toolpantry.app/xml-formatter ## About Pretty-print and validate XML documents locally so attributes, children, and closing tags are easier to inspect. ## Quick answer How do I format XML? Paste XML to get clean indentation — processed locally in your browser. ## How to format XML 1. **Paste your XML** — or drop a file. 2. **Format and validate** — mismatched tags get flagged with the position. 3. **Copy the clean version** — consistent indentation for diffing and review. ## When XML still shows up - RSS feeds, sitemaps, and SOAP integrations - Export files from enterprise and finance systems - Before writing XPath or XSLT against a document ## Good to know Formatting only changes whitespace between tags — but in rare mixed-content documents that can alter meaning, so keep the original file if a parser cares about exact bytes. Related: [XML to JSON](https://toolpantry.app/xml-json-converter.html) when you want to work with the data as JSON. ## Notes The browser parser validates well-formed XML. It does not validate an external XSD, DTD, or business schema. ## FAQ **What does XML formatting change?** It adds indentation and line breaks around nested elements while keeping element names, attributes, and text values readable. **Why did the parser reject my XML?** Look for an unclosed tag, mismatched tag name, unescaped ampersand, or an attribute without quotes. --- # XML to JSON Converter — Convert XML Locally > Convert XML to JSON or JSON to XML locally in your browser, with attributes, text nodes, and repeated elements preserved. Source: https://toolpantry.app/xml-json-converter ## About Convert API payloads and feed data locally, keeping XML attributes and repeated child elements visible in the JSON output. ## Quick answer How do I convert XML to JSON? Paste XML or JSON to convert between the formats while keeping attributes visible. ## How to convert XML to JSON (or back) 1. **Paste the XML or JSON** — the converter detects the direction. 2. **Convert** — attributes, text, and repeated elements map with a clear convention. 3. **Eyeball the tricky parts** — nested repeats and namespaced attributes deserve a second look. ## Where this conversion earns its keep - Modernising an old SOAP or RSS integration into a JSON pipeline - Inspecting feed data as plain JSON - Turning XML config exports into something your scripts prefer ## Good to know Mapping conventions matter more than raw conversion: attributes get a reserved prefix and mixed text becomes a node value, so check how your downstream code expects those to look. Namespaces and type inference are not guessed — for critical integrations, validate the converted payload against the receiving schema. Everything runs locally, which matters when documents contain credentials. Related: [XML formatter](https://toolpantry.app/xml-formatter.html) and [JSON formatter](https://toolpantry.app/json-formatter.html). ## Notes XML attributes are stored under @attributes, text under #text, and repeated elements become arrays. Review the mapping for your API's schema. ## FAQ **Does this upload XML?** No. Parsing and conversion happen in the browser, so the document stays on your device. **Can it convert every XML schema?** It handles well-formed XML and common attributes, text, and repeated elements. Namespaces and schema-specific typing may need manual review. --- # YAML to JSON Converter — Convert YAML Locally > Convert YAML to JSON or JSON to YAML locally in your browser. No upload, signup, or server required. Source: https://toolpantry.app/yaml-json-converter ## About Turn configuration files between YAML and JSON without uploading secrets, environment values, or API payloads. ## Quick answer How do I convert YAML to JSON? Paste YAML or JSON to convert between them locally — secrets never leave your browser. ## How to convert YAML to JSON (or back) 1. **Paste your YAML or JSON** — the converter detects which way to go. 2. **Convert** — formatting and structure are translated locally. 3. **Copy or download** — clean output with consistent indentation. ## Everyday uses - Kubernetes and CI configs when only JSON is accepted - Turning API payload samples into readable YAML for docs - Inspecting docker-compose files as plain data ## Good to know YAML has quiet traps: tabs are illegal (use spaces), unquoted yes/no/on/off can become booleans, and anchors or custom tags may not survive conversion — always compare the result for configs that matter. Everything runs locally, which matters because configs often contain credentials. Related: [JSON formatter](https://toolpantry.app/json-formatter.html) and [validator](https://toolpantry.app/json-validator.html). ## Notes The converter supports common YAML mappings, lists, strings, numbers, booleans, and null values. It does not validate a deployment platform's schema. ## FAQ **Can I convert a config file?** Yes. Paste the text from a YAML or JSON configuration file; processing stays in this browser tab. **Why is my YAML rejected?** Check indentation, tabs, unmatched quotes, and mapping values that need quoting. --- # YouTube Tag Generator — Build a Clean Video Tag List > Generate and organize comma-separated YouTube video tags locally. Review keyword variations, stay within a character budget, and copy the final tag list. Source: https://toolpantry.app/youtube-tag-generator ## About Turn seed topics into a focused, comma-separated tag list. Review every suggestion, keep the character budget visible, and copy only the phrases that describe your video. ## Quick answer How do I generate YouTube tags? Enter your video topic for starter tag suggestions, copy-ready for the upload form. ## How to generate YouTube tags 1. **Enter your video topic** — a keyword, title, or phrase works. 2. **Pick from the generated candidates** — the tool builds deterministic phrase variants and tracks the 500-character tag budget. 3. **Copy or export** — paste into YouTube Studio or download as TXT. ## When to refresh your tags - Publishing a new video and filling the tag field in seconds - Updating older videos whose topic wording has drifted - Drafting tag ideas before finalizing the title ## Good to know YouTube’s tag field allows up to 500 characters; tags are a light ranking signal compared to titles, thumbnails, and watch time — treat them as seasoning, not the meal. This generator is transparent: it builds phrase variants from your own topic, with no fake “trend scores.” Related: [hashtag generator](https://toolpantry.app/hashtag-generator.html) and [thumbnail downloader](https://toolpantry.app/youtube-thumbnail-downloader.html). ## Notes Tags are descriptive metadata, not a ranking guarantee. YouTube says titles, thumbnails, and descriptions matter more; use tags for relevant wording, alternate phrases, and common misspellings. This page does not call YouTube or a keyword API. ## FAQ **Is this the same as a hashtag generator?** No. YouTube tags are comma-separated metadata entered in Studio and do not need a # . Use the separate hashtag generator when you want public hashtags for a caption or description. **Does this fetch live YouTube suggestions?** No. It creates deterministic phrase variations locally, so your seed topics stay private and the result is easy to audit. **How many tags should I keep?** Keep the phrases that accurately describe the video and stop when the list no longer adds useful context. A shorter relevant list is better than unrelated keyword stuffing. --- # YouTube Thumbnail Downloader — HD, Maxres & All Sizes > Download YouTube video thumbnails in max resolution, HD, standard, medium, and default sizes. Paste a URL or video ID and preview locally. Source: https://toolpantry.app/youtube-thumbnail-downloader ## About Paste a YouTube link or video ID to preview and save every standard thumbnail size. The page builds public image URLs in your browser and does not need a YouTube API key. ## Quick answer How do I download a YouTube thumbnail? Paste a video URL or ID and download the full-resolution thumbnail (maxres or the highest available size) with one click. No login required. ## How to download a YouTube thumbnail 1. **Paste the video URL or ID** — shorts links and full URLs both work. 2. **Pick a size** — maxres (1280×720) when available, or a smaller fallback the tool detects automatically. 3. **Download, open, or copy the URL** — whichever your workflow needs. ## What people use it for - Studying thumbnail design patterns in a niche - Archiving your own channel’s visual history - Grabbing a reference image for a deck or moodboard ## Good to know Thumbnails are copyrighted by their creators — downloading for reference or study is one thing; republishing is not. Older uploads sometimes have no maxres image, which the tool flags and falls back from. Bonus: once you have the image, check its exact dimensions with [Image info](https://toolpantry.app/image-info.html), or plan your own with the [YouTube tag generator](https://toolpantry.app/youtube-tag-generator.html). ## FAQ **Which thumbnail is the highest quality?** Max resolution is usually 1280×720 when YouTube generated it. Some videos do not have that file, so the tool checks the image and keeps the available HQ or standard version visible. **Which YouTube links can I paste?** Watch links, youtu.be short links, Shorts, live links, embed links, and an 11-character video ID are supported. Extra query parameters such as si or playlist values are ignored. **Do I need a YouTube API key?** No. YouTube's public thumbnail CDN uses predictable image paths. This page builds those paths locally and does not request video metadata. --- # 7 Best Zamzar Alternatives in 2026 (Free & Local) > Seven honest Zamzar alternatives for 2026: convert documents, images, audio, and video free — including tools that run locally and never upload your files. Source: https://toolpantry.app/zamzar-alternatives ## About Zamzar has been converting files since 2006, and its long format list is still impressive. The catches: free conversions are limited by size and count, results arrive by email, and every file is uploaded. These seven alternatives cover the spectrum — from API-first converters to tools that do the work on your own device. ## Quick answer Short answer: for everyday conversions (images, PDFs, video to MP3), Tool Pantry does it locally and free. For exotic formats and batch jobs, CloudConvert has the deepest format list; Convertio sits in between. ## FAQ **What can Zamzar convert that local tools cannot?** Zamzar handles long-tail formats — think CAD drawings, ebooks, and legacy document types — that browser tools do not. For the common image, PDF, audio, and video conversions, local tools match it and remove the upload. **Do I have to upload my files to use these alternatives?** No — and that is the main difference in this list. Tool Pantry processes everything locally in your browser: files never leave your device. The other services in these lists are server-based, so their files are uploaded. For sensitive documents, prefer a local tool. **Are these alternatives really free?** Mixed. Tool Pantry is fully free with no limits. Most others are freemium: a free tier with caps (documents per day, file size, tasks per hour) plus a paid plan. The lists above state the realistic free limits for each. --- # Zip & Unzip Online — Create or Extract ZIP Files Locally > Zip files or unzip archives right in your browser — no upload, no size cap, no account. Create a .zip from any files, or open one and pull out what's inside. Source: https://toolpantry.app/zip-tool ## About Bundle files into a .zip, or open an archive and pull out what's inside — entirely in your browser. No upload, no size cap, no account. ## Quick answer How do I unzip (or make) a ZIP online? Drop the archive into Extract to see every file inside and save them; switch to Create to bundle files into a new .zip. Nothing is uploaded — archives with private documents are exactly what this is for. ## How to unzip a file in the browser 1. **Drop the .zip** — it's read locally; nothing is sent anywhere. 2. **Look inside** — every file appears with its size. 3. **Save what you need** — individually, or "Save all" for the lot. ## Why local unzipping matters Most "unzip online" sites upload your archive to their servers, extract it there, and hand you the pieces back — which means everything inside (bank statements, scans, contracts) briefly exists on someone else's disk. This tool opens the archive with a DEFLATE engine compiled to JavaScript, right in your tab. You can verify with the Network panel: after the page loads, nothing moves. ## Creating a ZIP, the desktop way — without the desktop On Windows and macOS you can right-click → Compress to make a ZIP; on a phone, or on a locked-down computer, that's not always available. The Create tab does the same job: add files, pick a compression level (Balanced is right almost always), and download. It's the standard way to send a folder's worth of documents as one attachment — the [Gmail guide](https://toolpantry.app/blog/gmail-attachment-limit-25mb) explains when zipping helps (documents) and when it doesn't (photos, videos). ## Good to know Files come out with their folder paths intact, so nested archives extract correctly. Multi-hundred-MB archives work; multi-GB ones are better on a desktop-class machine with more memory. And the output of "Save all" is the original files, byte-for-byte — extraction never alters content, so checksums match what the sender zipped. ## Notes Standard ZIP and ZIP64 archives work; password-protected ZIPs, RAR, and 7z aren't supported (no password guessing here). For photos and videos, ZIP barely shrinks anything — they're already compressed; it's for bundling, not shrinking. Making a batch of images smaller? That's the [bulk image resizer](https://toolpantry.app/bulk-image-resizer.html). ## FAQ **How do I unzip a file online?** Drop the .zip in, and the archive is opened in your browser — you'll see every file inside with its size, ready to save individually or all at once. Nothing is uploaded to a server, so even private archives are safe to open here. **Is there a file size limit?** No server-imposed limit — the practical ceiling is your browser's memory. Typical document and photo archives (hundreds of MB) work fine; multi-GB archives are better handled on a desktop with more headroom. **Can I create a ZIP too?** Yes — switch to the Create tab, add any files, pick a compression level, and download the .zip. It's the same flow as the right-click → Compress on a desktop, without needing a desktop. **Does this open password-protected ZIPs?** No — encrypted archives aren't supported (and we don't guess passwords). Standard ZIPs and ZIP64 work. RAR and 7z are different formats this tool doesn't handle. --- # ColorOS 17 AI Features: Regional Limits and Availability > Check ColorOS 17 AI feature restrictions by region: Photo Agent rollout, document capture in Europe, Call Guard countries and supported Interpreter hardware. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/coloros-17-ai-features-by-region OPPO says AI Photo Agent will reach Europe later, while Long-doc Capture and Link Capture are unavailable there. AI Call Guard is listed for India, Indonesia and Thailand; use the region selector to separate those rules from unconfirmed access. ## Check the announced regional limits Choose a region. Results describe published restrictions; access on your exact phone may still vary. Announced limits; device-specific access is not verified. The table below contains all regional rules. JavaScript enables the region selector. | Feature | Rule and limitation | |---|---| | AI Photo Agent | Staged rolloutEurope follows later. Monthly limits vary by region. | | Long-doc Capture / Link Capture | Europe excludedThese two capture features are not available in Europe. | | AI Call Guard | Three countries listedIndia, Indonesia and Thailand. Phone support and rollout still matter. | | AI Mind Pilot: Agent Mode | AnnouncedManus and ChatGPT are the initial supported services. Allowances vary by region. | | AI Live Interpreter | Hardware requirementsSelect supported phones plus OPPO Enco X4 or OnePlus Buds Pro 4 earbuds. | The rules above come from the feature descriptions and numbered notes in [OPPO’s global AI feature announcement](https://www.oppo.com/en/newsroom/stories/oppo-color-os-17-ai/). The selector reorganizes those published rules; it does not connect to your phone or inspect an account. ## What changed in ColorOS 17? OPPO’s [October 13 global launch announcement](https://www.oppo.com/en/newsroom/press/oppo-color-os-17/) describes Agent Mode as a way to complete multi-step file and photo tasks. Photo Agent adds editing directed by a written instruction or a reference image. These are announced capabilities, not our performance measurements. A system update and access to an AI service are separate checks. A rollout entry for your model does not settle regional access, connected-account limits or accessory requirements. This guide follows the global ColorOS announcement; it does not translate a mainland-China feature list into promises for other builds. ## If a feature is missing on your phone 1. **Check the exact model and local rollout.** Use the [official ColorOS rollout page](https://www.oppo.com/en/coloros17/), then the OPPO site for your country. Record your installed software version before comparing instructions. 2. **Check the feature’s own restriction.** Look at the row above. Missing document capture in Europe has a different explanation from an Interpreter hardware requirement. 3. **Keep unknowns separate from faults.** If the source does not name your country or model, access is unconfirmed. A changed account, region setting or software version is not a verified workaround. ## After an AI photo edit If you need a tighter frame for a finished export, [crop the saved image](https://toolpantry.app/crop-image). When the remaining task is an upload-size limit, [compress a copy in the browser](https://toolpantry.app/). These are separate file-preparation steps; this page does not run OPPO’s editing model. ## What we checked, and what we could not test We compared the global launch material with its feature notes and tested this page’s region selector. We did not test a ColorOS 17 handset, an AI subscription or the supported earbuds. The table therefore reports published conditions, with unknown availability left unknown. OPPO can change rollout dates or access terms after this check. ## Notes Source-checked October 17, 2026. Announcement-based; no handset testing. --- # How to Put Multiple Photos Into One PDF (Applications, Receipts, Portfolios) > Turn a pile of photos into one tidy PDF — for job applications, expense receipts, and portfolios. Our tested run: two photos became a 1.4 MB, 2-page PDF in seconds, locally. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/combine-photos-into-one-pdf Job forms reject image sets, receipts scatter across your camera roll, and portfolios look amateur as loose files. The fix takes two minutes — and your photos never leave your device. ## Quick answer Short answer: open the JPG to PDF tool , add your photos, drag them into order, and press Create PDF — each photo becomes one A4 page. In our test, two photos (843 KB + 325 KB) became a 2-page, 1.4 MB PDF in seconds , built locally with nothing uploaded. ## When this is the right move - **Job and visa applications** — portals ask for "one PDF" and reject loose images, or worse, scramble their order - **Expense receipts** — snap each receipt, bundle them into one file, done before the coffee goes cold - **Portfolios and property listings** — a single tidy document beats seven attachments - **Evidence and documentation** — chat screenshots, damage photos, delivery proof: one dated file ## How to do it (2 minutes) 1. **Open toolpantry.app/jpg-to-pdf** — PNG files work too, and iPhone HEIC photos have their own route: [HEIC to PDF](https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-pdf.html) skips the conversion step entirely. 2. **Add and order the photos.** Use the up/down controls beside each file — page order in the PDF matches the list, so fix it before building. 3. **Press Create PDF.** Each image lands on its own centered A4 page with the aspect ratio preserved. ## What we measured A phone-style JPG (843 KB) plus a PNG (325 KB) produced a **1.4 MB, 2-page PDF** — about the size of its inputs, which is the honest math: the PDF engine embeds the images as they are. That means the file-size strategy happens *before* the merge: shrink heavy photos first with the [1 MB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-1mb.html) or [500 KB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-500kb.html) compressor, then combine. ## The email math Email inflates attachments by about 35% (base64), so a 25 MB Gmail limit is really an ~18 MB file limit — a 1.4 MB PDF is comfortably fine, but ten raw phone photos are not. If your finished PDF is over budget, the [PDF compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-pdf.html) shrinks scans dramatically (our 3-page test: 793 KB → 122 KB). The full picture of who caps what lives in the [file size limits reference](https://toolpantry.app/file-size-limits.html). ## The honest parts Two things PDF-ification won't fix. Quality: the pages are your photos as-is, so a blurry shot stays blurry. And editability: once images are in a PDF, the text inside them (a receipt's line items, say) isn't selectable or searchable — that's inherent to image-based PDFs, not a tool limitation. If you need a searchable document, that starts with a proper scan app or a text-based source file. And if the portal also wants exact dimensions or KB windows — common on government forms — see our [exam specs guide](https://toolpantry.app/blog/ssc-upsc-photo-signature-size-2026) for the workflow that hits them. ## Notes By the Tool Pantry team, October 2026. Measured with Chrome 155 on macOS on a phone-style JPG and a PNG; output verified as a valid 2-page PDF. ## FAQ **How do I combine multiple photos into one PDF?** Open the JPG to PDF tool, add your photos (JPG or PNG), drag them into the order you want, and press Create PDF. Each photo becomes one centered A4 page. In our test, two photos became a 2-page, 1.4 MB PDF in seconds — built locally in the browser. **Why combine photos into a PDF instead of sending them separately?** Portals accept PDF where image sets get rejected or scrambled; PDFs keep the order you chose; and one file is far easier to attach, print, and archive than seven loose photos. Most job and government forms explicitly ask for a single PDF. **Will the PDF be too big to email?** Phone photos run 3–8 MB each, so a stack of them adds up fast — and email inflates attachments by about 35% (base64). Compress the source images first, or run the finished PDF through the PDF compressor: our 3-page scan test went from 793 KB to 122 KB. **Is my photo uploaded when I make the PDF?** No — the PDF is built in your browser tab with a bundled PDF engine. Nothing is sent to a server, which matters for IDs, certificates, and receipts with account details. --- # How to Compress a Video for WhatsApp — 64 MB, 100 MB, or Less > WhatsApp currently documents default video limits of 64 MB on slower connections and 100 MB on faster connections. Learn which target to choose and compress locally in your browser. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/compress-video-for-whatsapp Pick a target that matches your connection, reduce the bitrate only as much as you need, and make the MP4 locally in your browser. ## Quick answer Short answer: use the video compressor , choose WhatsApp — under 64 MB for the conservative option or WhatsApp — under 100 MB when your connection supports the larger default, then press Compress. The source stays on your device. ## WhatsApp does not have one universal video limit WhatsApp's current help page says the default video limit is **100 MB at 720p for faster connections** and **64 MB at 480p for slower connections**. It also lists a 90-second maximum for Status videos and up to 2 GB for documents. The practical lesson is simple: if WhatsApp says your video is too large, the 64 MB target is the safer first attempt; if your app accepts larger media, 100 MB preserves more detail. See the [WhatsApp Help Center instructions for sending media](https://faq.whatsapp.com/453914586839706/?cms_platform=web&locale=en_US) for the current limits. Those rules can change, so treat the numbers as a starting point rather than a promise that every account will show the same picker. ## Which target should you choose? | Situation | Target | Resolution | Why | |---|---|---|---| | WhatsApp rejects the video or you are unsure | **64 MB** | 480p or 720p | The conservative target for slower connections | | Fast connection and the app allows larger media | **100 MB** | 720p | More room for motion and fine detail | | Status video | Use the app's duration and size limits | Usually 480p/720p | Status has its own duration rules | ## How to compress the video 1. **Open the [local video compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-video.html)** and choose the MP4 or MOV file. Nothing is uploaded. 2. **Choose WhatsApp — under 64 MB or under 100 MB.** Pick 720p when the original is 1080p or 4K; it usually saves more detail than forcing the original resolution into a tiny bitrate. 3. **Press Compress and inspect the result.** The tool shows the planned bitrate and output size, then downloads a new H.264 MP4. Keep the original until you have sent the copy successfully. ## Why resolution matters more than squeezing the last megabyte A video is a stream of pictures plus audio. If you keep a 4K frame but give it a very small bitrate, motion turns into blocks and smearing. Dropping to 720p reduces the number of pixels before the encoder spends its remaining bits on edges and movement. For a phone chat, that trade usually looks better than keeping 1080p at an unusably low bitrate. ## If WhatsApp still refuses it Try the 64 MB target, shorten the clip, or send the file as a document if your app offers that option. A document may avoid the media preview path, but the recipient may need to download it first. If you only need to share the content and not the file itself, a Drive or iCloud link keeps the original quality. For a broader walkthrough covering Discord and email limits, read [Video Too Large to Send?](https://toolpantry.app/blog/video-too-large-to-send.html). For audio-only sharing, use [video to MP3](https://toolpantry.app/video-to-mp3.html). ## Notes By the Tool Pantry team, October 2026. WhatsApp limits can vary by connection, app version, and how you attach the media; check the limit shown in your own app. ## FAQ **What is WhatsApp's video size limit?** WhatsApp's current help page lists a default video limit of 100 MB at 720p for faster connections and 64 MB at 480p for slower connections. Your app or connection may show a different limit, so use the smaller target when you are unsure. **How do I compress a video for WhatsApp?** Open the local video compressor, choose WhatsApp 64 MB or WhatsApp 100 MB, choose 720p if the clip is large, and press Compress. The browser creates a new MP4 on your device; the source file is not uploaded. **Will WhatsApp compress my video again?** WhatsApp may recompress media when you send it as a photo or video. Starting with a compatible MP4 at a suitable resolution and bitrate gives it less work to do and makes a rejected upload less likely. **Can I send a larger video as a document?** WhatsApp's help page lists a 2 GB maximum for documents. Sending a video as a document can avoid media-preview limits, but the recipient may need to download it before watching and the exact options vary by app version. --- # Content Credentials (C2PA), Explained — the Label That Says 'AI Made This' > Content Credentials (C2PA) are signed receipts attached to images — saying who made them and how. Here's what they prove, who writes them, and how to check any image locally. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/content-credentials-c2pa-explained Content Credentials are signed records that say who made a file and how — cameras add them, AI generators add them, and most people have never heard of them. Here's the plain-words version. ## Quick answer Short answer: Content Credentials (the C2PA standard) are a signed record inside a file that names its origin — camera or AI tool, plus edits since. Our AI image checker reads them locally in seconds; for full cryptographic verification, contentcredentials.org/verify. The catch: they're easy to strip, so absence proves nothing — only presence is a signal. ## What exactly is inside a Content Credential A C2PA manifest is a small, cryptographically signed block of metadata — usually embedded in the file itself (a JUMBF box in a JPEG, a chunk in a PNG). It can record: the device or tool that created the file, the date, whether generative AI was involved, and a chain of edits if the software supports it. The signature is the point: anyone can write metadata, but only the holder of the signing key can write a credential that verifies. Two flavors show up in the wild. **Content Credentials** (C2PA) are the signed manifests — cameras from Leica and Sony write them at capture, and most major AI generators attach them to output. **IPTC labels** are a lighter cousin: a plain metadata field, most notably trainedAlgorithmicMedia, that tools like Adobe Firefly and Google's image models set to declare AI generation. ## What our tests showed We ran three files through the checker. A Stable-Diffusion-style PNG carrying the Automatic1111 "parameters" chunk — the full generation recipe — was flagged instantly as a strong AI signal. A camera JPEG with ordinary Canon EXIF came back clean, with camera metadata listed as context. And a screenshot of an AI image? Nothing — no metadata, no verdict, because the screenshot never had any. That spread is the whole story in three files: when the receipt is there, it's conclusive; when it's gone, the file is simply silent. ## How to check any image (30 seconds) 1. Open **toolpantry.app/ai-image-checker** and add the original file — not a screenshot of it. 2. Read the verdict: AI markers found, Content Credentials present, or nothing to report. 3. For a C2PA manifest, take the extra step to **contentcredentials.org/verify** — that's the official validator that checks the cryptographic signature itself. Our checker reports presence; the validator confirms authenticity. ## Why this matters in 2026 Two forces are pushing credentials into the mainstream. Regulators: the EU AI Act's transparency provisions expect AI-generated content to be labeled, and platforms are starting to surface labels in their UIs. And toolmakers: since late 2025, new cameras and image models ship with provenance "baked in" by default — the metadata is becoming automatic, which makes checking it worthwhile. If you run a newsletter, a marketplace, or a classroom, "check the receipt" is the practical habit; the full walkthrough is in our guide [Is this image AI?](https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-tell-if-an-image-is-ai-generated). ## The honest limits Three caveats worth internalizing. Credentials are stripped by most social platforms, all screenshots, and many re-saves — so a missing receipt means nothing either way. Our checker detects and reports; it doesn't cryptographically validate signatures (the official validator does). And credentials describe a file's history, not its truth: a real photo with a real credential can still be staged, and an AI image with no credential can still be AI. They're evidence, not verdicts. ## Notes By the Tool Pantry team, October 2026. Tested with our own checker on a Stable-Diffusion-style PNG, a camera JPEG, and a stripped screenshot — results below. ## FAQ **What are Content Credentials?** Content Credentials are a signed record — the C2PA standard — embedded in a file that describes its origin: which camera or AI tool made it, when, and what edits happened since. Think of it as a nutrition label for media. **Can Content Credentials be removed?** Yes, easily — any re-save, screenshot, or social platform upload can strip them. That's why their absence proves nothing; only their presence is informative. **Are AI labels legally required now?** The direction of travel is yes: the EU AI Act's transparency rules expect AI-generated content to be marked, and major generators now add labels and credentials by default. Enforcement is still unfolding through 2026. **How do I check an image for Content Credentials?** Use the AI image checker — it reads the file locally and reports whether a C2PA manifest or IPTC AI label is present. For full cryptographic verification of a manifest, upload it at contentcredentials.org/verify. --- # Fall Back 2026: US & UK Dates and Meeting Time Checker > Fall back 2026: US clocks go back November 1; UK clocks go back October 25. Check a city countdown and compare New York–London meeting times. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/daylight-saving-time-ends-2026 In US areas observing daylight saving time, clocks go back on Sunday, November 1, 2026. In the UK, it happens on Sunday, October 25. Both changes repeat the hour from 1 a.m. to 2 a.m.; the gap between the two dates can move an international meeting by an hour. ## Quick answer Save the date that applies to you: October 25 for the UK, November 1 for US areas that observe daylight saving time. For an international meeting, check both cities on the actual meeting date. ## When do clocks go back in your city? New York: November 1. London: October 25. At 2 a.m. local time, clocks go back to 1 a.m. Phoenix and Honolulu do not change clocks. The countdown uses your device clock and counts to the selected city’s transition, rather than to midnight. The dates and exceptions remain in the table below if JavaScript is off. ## US and UK clock-change dates | Where | Autumn change in 2026 | |---|---| | US areas observing DST | Sunday, November 1. At 2 a.m. local time, clocks return to 1 a.m. | | United Kingdom | Sunday, October 25. At 2 a.m., clocks return to 1 a.m.; the UK returns to GMT. | [NIST’s 2026 date and rules](https://www.nist.gov/pml/time-and-frequency-division/popular-links/daylight-saving-time-dst) cover the US transition. Hawaii and most of Arizona do not observe DST; the Navajo Indian Reservation is an exception within Arizona. Check the specific place rather than applying the national date to every US address. [GOV.UK’s clock-change table](https://www.gov.uk/when-do-the-clocks-change) confirms the UK date. British Summer Time ends when the clocks go back, leaving the UK on Greenwich Mean Time. ## Check a New York–London meeting across the change A meeting fixed at 9 a.m. in New York reaches London at 2 p.m. on October 23, 1 p.m. on October 26, then 2 p.m. again on November 2. Change the organizer’s city and local time to see your own example. A 09:00 meeting fixed in New York, shown in London across the two clock changes. | Meeting date in organizer’s city | Organizer’s local time | Other city’s date and time | |---|---|---| | 2026-10-23 | 09:00 in New York | 23 Oct, 14:00 in London | | 2026-10-26 | 09:00 in New York | 26 Oct, 13:00 in London | | 2026-11-02 | 09:00 in New York | 2 Nov, 14:00 in London | London is four hours ahead of New York between the two autumn changes, instead of the usual five. The table keeps the organizer’s local time fixed. Late-night meetings can land on the next date in the other city, so read both columns before editing an invitation. For other dates and cities, open the [time zone meeting planner](https://toolpantry.app/timezone-meeting-planner). A countdown or calendar date entry does not change your existing meeting invitations. ## Do we gain an hour, and will my phone change? **Do we gain an hour?** Yes, where clocks go back, the hour from 1 a.m. to 2 a.m. occurs twice. A label such as “1:30 a.m.” is ambiguous that night; include the date and time-zone offset when scheduling in the repeated hour. **Does every US state change?** No. Hawaii and most of Arizona stay on the same clock time. The Navajo Indian Reservation observes DST. Phoenix in the selector represents that city, not all places in Arizona. **Will my phone change automatically?** Devices using an up-to-date operating system and automatic time-zone settings generally apply the local rules. Check your device’s settings; manually set clocks still need attention. NIST explains that the operating system applies DST corrections to its UTC time service. ## Add the two dates to your calendar [Download the US and UK clock-change dates (.ics)](https://toolpantry.app/downloads/clock-changes-us-uk-2026.ics). The file contains two one-time, all-day entries: October 25 and November 1. Import it into your calendar, then choose any notifications in that app. These entries flag the dates. They do not represent one worldwide instant when everyone changes clocks, and the file contains no recurring events or automatic alert. Keep the entry for the region relevant to you, or both if you schedule across the Atlantic. ## Check a recurring meeting before the change 1. **Open an occurrence on each side of the change.** Check October 26 and November 2 if you work between New York and London. 2. **Inspect the organizer’s time zone.** A meeting anchored to one city can move for an attendee elsewhere. 3. **Confirm the invitation after an edit.** Ask the organizer to send the updated event if the intended local time has changed. For another city pair, calculate that pair directly. The example above does not establish the dates or time-zone rules for every country. ## Notes Sources checked October 18, 2026 — NIST and GOV.UK. The meeting checker uses the named America/New_York and Europe/London time zones. The calendar download contains date entries; we have not tested imports in every calendar app. --- # DeepSeek Search and Fetch API: a Python example > Find a source with DeepSeek Search, fetch the page in Python, and see what our NIST query revealed about full text, dates and request costs. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/deepseek-search-fetch-api-python We used DeepSeek Search to find NIST’s 2026 daylight-saving rules. It returned the rules page and two historical PDFs. For that question, we would fetch the current rules page and pass its relevant passage to a model. Requesting every result’s full text grew our serialized response from about 6.7 KB to 42.3 KB. A publication-date filter caused another problem: it dropped the source we wanted. By Tool Pantry · Updated October 18, 2026 ## Start with Search, then choose a page to Fetch The [Search endpoint](https://api-docs.deepseek.com/api/search/) finds candidate pages; the [Fetch endpoint](https://api-docs.deepseek.com/api/fetch/) retrieves a selected URL. Both accept JSON requests with a DeepSeek bearer API key. They are separate endpoints, so you can use them from a script without asking a chat model to generate an answer. Set DEEPSEEK_API_KEY in your environment and run this with Python 3. It uses the standard library: ```python import json import os from urllib.error import HTTPError from urllib.parse import urldefrag, urlsplit from urllib.request import Request, urlopen API_KEY = os.environ["DEEPSEEK_API_KEY"] BASE_URL = "https://api.deepseek.com/v1/tools/" def post(tool, payload): request = Request( BASE_URL + tool, data=json.dumps(payload).encode("utf-8"), headers={ "Authorization": "Bearer " + API_KEY, "Content-Type": "application/json", }, method="POST", ) try: with urlopen(request, timeout=30) as response: return json.load(response) except HTTPError as error: print("HTTP", error.code, error.read().decode("utf-8")) raise search = post("search", { "query": "site:nist.gov daylight saving time 2026", "count": 3, "need_content": False, }) for result in search["results"]: print(result["title"], result["url"], result.get("date")) # Choose a source deliberately. This example is specific to NIST. candidate = next(( result for result in search["results"] if urlsplit(result["url"]).scheme == "https" and urlsplit(result["url"]).hostname == "www.nist.gov" ), None) if candidate is None: raise SystemExit("No matching NIST source; review the results.") source_url = urldefrag(candidate["url"]).url page = post("fetch", {"url": source_url}) print(page["title"]) print(page["content"][:500]) ``` need_content stays false here because we are choosing one source ourselves. The host check is specific to this NIST example; change it when you change the task. An empty or unexpected result set stops the script before it tries to fetch a page. ## When to ask Search for the full text Search can include page content in the same response. Set need_content to true if you need several result pages, and inspect the returned text before deciding whether a separate Fetch is necessary. Individual pages can still have unavailable content. We repeated the query site:nist.gov daylight saving time 2026 with a count of 3. Both settings returned three results: | need_content | Content characters | Serialized JSON bytes | |---|---|---| | false | 0 | 6,740 | | true | 35,160 | 42,318 | The false response still included snippet and summary. It was enough to inspect the candidates. Turning content on brought back the historical PDFs as well as the current rules page, adding text we did not need for this question. For a broad research task, those extra documents might be useful. For a narrow fact check, we would start with the summaries and read the chosen source. Fetch adds a request, but passing unnecessary documents to a model can add its own cost and make the answer harder to verify. A broader workflow makes a different trade-off. Reddit user [u/PocketManey described building a multi-source answer pipeline](https://www.reddit.com/r/DeepSeek/comments/1x8fbd6/i_built_a_perplexitystyle_search_on_deepseeks_new/) with DeepSeek Search and Fetch: request page text with the search results, then fetch only where usable text is missing. Their warning that models “over-cite” comes with a separate step to check citations and repair unsupported sentences. That is a useful distinction: retrieving the page does not establish that it supports the answer. We have not reproduced their pipeline or verified its cost and timing estimates. The byte counts above came from len(json.dumps(response, ensure_ascii=False).encode("utf-8")). The roughly 6.3-fold difference is a comparison of these two serialized responses, not compressed network traffic or model tokens. ## The date filter lost an up-to-date page The first result was [NIST’s Daylight Saving Time Rules page](https://www.nist.gov/pml/time-and-frequency-division/popular-links/daylight-saving-time-dst). Its API date was 2010-03-01T16:00:00+00:00. The page text, however, contained the 2026 rule and an update note dated February 9, 2026. We added an after filter: ```json { "query": "site:nist.gov daylight saving time 2026 after:2026-01-01", "count": 3, "need_content": false } ``` That request returned HTTP 200 with {"results": []}. The [official guide](https://api-docs.deepseek.com/guides/search/) describes after as a publication-date filter. A recently updated page can still have an old publication date; our query lost a useful source carrying current information. One query pair cannot tell us how every document is dated. It is enough to change how we would troubleshoot an empty search: remove the date restriction and inspect the source’s update note before concluding that no current information exists. This matters for documentation and reference pages that are maintained at the same URL for years. For the clock-change question itself, our [US–UK daylight-saving guide](https://toolpantry.app/blog/daylight-saving-time-ends-2026) links the underlying sources. ## Count the requests, then consider the text On October 18, 2026, DeepSeek listed direct Search and Fetch at **$0.75 per 1,000 successful requests each**. The result count does not change that unit price. At those rates, 1,000 searches with one successful Fetch each cost $1.50 in retrieval requests; three Fetch calls per search make that $3.00. Model tokens and other charges are separate. The temporary free period for integrated server-side tools is a different calling route. DeepSeek’s [announcement](https://api-docs.deepseek.com/news/news261017/) says billing for those calls through DeepSeek Harness, Claude Code and Codex starts October 31, 2026 at 16:00 UTC — November 1 at 00:00 Beijing time. Our examples use the direct JSON endpoints. The error we reproduced was straightforward: count: 0 returned HTTP 400 with invalid_request_error and the allowed range, 1–50. Fix the parameter before trying again. An HTTP 200 empty list, like our date-filter result, is a separate case and needs ordinary empty-result handling. The [API guide](https://api-docs.deepseek.com/guides/search/) excludes failed requests, empty searches and timeouts from billing, and recommends waiting and retrying for HTTP 408, 429 and 5xx errors. Those transient failures were not part of our test. Before adding this to an agent, check the current limits and inspect a saved response; the [JSON formatter](https://toolpantry.app/json-formatter) can help separate the fields you plan to display from the text you plan to send to a model. ## Where the API is being integrated The direct endpoints are already appearing in public agent and chat-app code. These examples show different choices about how much text to retrieve and where to put the integration. We reviewed the linked source on October 18, 2026; this does not establish which released app versions include it or how well their search results perform. ### [OpenClaw](https://github.com/openclaw/openclaw/blob/28f97f236f882af739aac9f0e6e77d83b2da2a7c/extensions/deepseek/web-search-provider.runtime.ts) OpenClaw sends need_content: false and uses the summary, falling back to the snippet when needed. Unsupported filter fields produce an error with advice to use query operators. Moving an agent between providers means checking its filter parameters as well as changing the API key. ### [pi-web-access](https://github.com/nicobailon/pi-web-access/blob/18e36f9e0fc2de3c9895a7fda8d39a62ce60f49e/deepseek.ts) Here a recency setting becomes an after: operator. The plugin checks the complete query length, including operators, and caps the returned summary. A friendly “recent results” control still invokes a publication-date filter, with the same risk to maintained reference pages illustrated by our NIST query. ### [Kelivo](https://github.com/Chevey339/kelivo/blob/e13b1a62cb36cb48e2b5a6b63a0727eeb9a37b06/lib/core/services/search/providers/deepseek_search_service.dart) Kelivo keeps Search and Fetch in separate methods. Search asks for summaries without page content; Fetch retrieves the selected page text. This is the same two-step retrieval choice as our Python example, inside an app’s provider interface. ### [BetterSearch](https://github.com/ry0narushima/bettersearch) BetterSearch wraps the endpoints in search, fetch, batch and report commands. Its client throttles requests, retries selected failures and estimates retrieval cost from successful requests. A report still needs source review, and the estimate needs to be reconciled with the account bill. ### [Smart Reader](https://github.com/ChqJourney/smart_reader/blob/master/src-tauri/src/web_tools.rs) Smart Reader calls the endpoints from a Rust backend, using the DeepSeek credential in the app’s key storage. That retrieval path is separate from its chat route. The model writing an answer and the service retrieving its sources can be configured independently. These are integration examples, not a provider-quality comparison. To choose a setup, run the same questions you actually need answered, inspect the returned pages and check whether the final citations support the answer. A working adapter alone cannot settle those questions. ## Test notes We made seven direct requests on one account: an initial Search, Fetch calls for example.com and NIST, a Search with count 0, the two need_content comparison requests, and the date-filtered Search. NIST’s fetched text included the 2026 rule. The displayed Python example was also run against those saved responses and an empty-result fixture, without extra paid calls. ## Notes Requests recorded October 17–18, 2026 (UTC), using Python’s urllib client. This was a small retrieval task. We did not compare providers, load-test retries, check an invoice or test an MCP setup. --- # Gmail Attachment Size Limit: 25 MB, Drive Links and Compression > Gmail allows 25 MB of total attachments on personal accounts. Check the official rule, understand Drive links and reduce files locally when needed. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/gmail-attachment-limit-25mb Personal Gmail documents a 25 MB total attachment allowance. Larger attachments become Google Drive links. Here is how to choose between a smaller file and a link, without confusing attachment size with message encoding. ## Quick answer Short answer: Google's Gmail Help states 25 MB for personal accounts. Work and school limits are administrator-controlled. If the total attachments exceed the allowance, Gmail replaces them with a Drive link. ## Attachments and whole messages are different limits [MIME base64](https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/rfc2045#section-6.8) encodes three input bytes into four characters, with additional line breaks and message headers. This affects transport and whole-message limits. A webmail provider can account for encoding separately when it publishes an attachment allowance, so do not automatically divide every advertised limit by 1.35. Recipient systems can have different limits. [Microsoft's Exchange Online guidance](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/office365/servicedescriptions/exchange-online-service-description/exchange-online-limits), for example, distinguishes configurable message limits and client restrictions. Check both ends if delivery fails. ## Choose the route that fits the task 1. **Use a Drive link for a large original.** Gmail offers this when attachments exceed its allowance. Confirm that the recipient can open the link. 2. **Compress a scan or image when a smaller copy is useful.** Use [PDF compression](https://toolpantry.app/compress-pdf.html) for image-heavy scans or an [image size ceiling](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-1mb.html) when appropriate. Inspect small text and keep the original. PDF compression here turns pages into images. 3. **Split a document when only some pages are needed.** [Split PDF](https://toolpantry.app/split-pdf.html) can reduce what you send, provided the recipient accepts separate documents. ## Check measured examples Our [downloadable compression dataset](https://toolpantry.app/compression-benchmarks.html) includes a synthetic two-page scan compressed from 2,198,704 to 410,435 bytes in Balanced mode. It is one controlled example, not a promised reduction for your file. Download both versions and inspect them before choosing a compression level. ## When a small file is still blocked Size is only one condition. Gmail may block certain file types; storage, recipient policies and link access can also matter. A ZIP archive may help some uncompressed data but is not a reliable way to shrink already-compressed images or video. Follow the error message and [Google's attachment troubleshooting steps](https://support.google.com/mail/answer/6584?hl=en). For other platforms, use our [file size reference with official sources and checked dates](https://toolpantry.app/file-size-limits.html). ## Notes Correction, 15 October 2026: an earlier version inferred a universal 18 MB raw-file limit from email encoding. The linked Gmail documentation does not support that inference. ## FAQ **How big can a Gmail attachment be?** Google documents a 25 MB total attachment allowance for personal Gmail accounts. Work and school limits are set by the Google Workspace administrator. **Is Gmail really limited to an 18 MB file?** No universal 18 MB file limit is stated in the linked Gmail guidance. Base64 affects message transport size, but that does not justify replacing the provider's published attachment allowance with 18 MB. **What happens above the attachment allowance?** Gmail removes the attachment and adds a Google Drive link. Check the sharing permissions and the recipient's access before sending. **Can compression guarantee delivery?** No. Compression may reduce a file, but file type restrictions, recipient limits, account storage and other policies can still prevent delivery. Inspect the output and keep the original. --- # Green Star Discovery: What the White Dwarf Study Actually Found > Why a white dwarf could look green, how researchers calculated its color from spectra, and what the October 2026 discovery does and does not show. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/green-star-discovery-explained The green-star discovery concerns a white dwarf whose light could look green to a nearby observer. Researchers inferred the perceived color from spectra and atmospheric models; the result is not a close-up telescope photograph of a green stellar surface. ## Quick answer The key object: WD J1330+6435. The study links its unusual color to strong absorption by sodium in a dense white-dwarf atmosphere. ## First, what is a white dwarf? A white dwarf is the compact remnant left after a star has shed its outer layers. It can remain hot and luminous while cooling. [NASA’s explanation of stellar evolution](https://imagine.gsfc.nasa.gov/science/objects/stars1.html) describes how a medium-sized star leaves this remnant after its red-giant stage. ## How do you measure a color from far away? A spectrum records how much light arrives at different wavelengths. The researchers combined spectra with the response of human color vision to calculate how that light would appear. Their [research paper](https://arxiv.org/html/2610.18966v1) also uses atmospheric models to render stellar discs as they could look from close enough to resolve them. A rendered disc illustrates a calculated color. It is not a photograph taken next to the star, and its brightness is reduced for display. | What you are reading | What it establishes | |---|---| | A measured spectrum | The distribution of received light by wavelength. | | A calculated perceived color | How a human visual response combines that spectrum. | | A rendered stellar disc | A visualization based on a model, rather than a resolved surface photograph. | ## Why can this one look green? For many stars, temperature is the main guide to their apparent color. The extreme density of some white-dwarf atmospheres makes chemical composition much more important: absorption features can spread across broad parts of the visible spectrum. In its [October 15 explanation](https://warwick.ac.uk/news/pressreleases/astronomers-reveal-true-colours-of-white-dwarf-stars/), Warwick identifies sodium-rich material in WD J1330+6435. Broad sodium absorption removes much of its yellow, orange and red light, shifting the balance of the remaining light toward green. Other atmospheric mixtures can produce pink, purple or cyan appearances. ## Are white dwarfs usually green? No. The study also examines a local sample extending to 20 parsecs, about 65 light-years. Most of those white dwarfs have much more ordinary colors. The paper reports a median correlated color temperature close to 6,800 K for the objects near the usual thermal-color sequence. The nearby sample describes typical colors; the individual green example demonstrates an unusual atmospheric effect. Green is not the normal white-dwarf appearance. ## Read the original result Read [Any colour you like: the diverse chromaticities of white dwarfs](https://doi.org/10.1093/rasti/rzag069), by Mark A. Hollands and colleagues, for the spectra and calculations. ## Notes Sources checked October 17, 2026 — the research paper, the University of Warwick release and NASA’s stellar-evolution background. This is a source-based explainer, not our own astronomical observation. --- # Handwired JavaScript: Try the Integer Branch Example > Explore Handwired’s integer branch idea with a local slider. Compare ordinary JavaScript with ReLU arithmetic and see why a fractional input changes the result. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/handwired-javascript-integer-branch A condition can be written as arithmetic. Move the input below to compare an ordinary JavaScript branch with a ReLU gate, including a fractional value where the two results differ. ## Try an integer, then try 4.5 The ordinary branch returns 10 when the input is greater than 4, and 12 otherwise. Its arithmetic counterpart builds a gate from two ReLU values, then uses that gate to weight the two outputs. The two results match at input 5. At 4.5, the ordinary branch returns 10, while the arithmetic returns 11. The input slider needs JavaScript. The calculation and result table below work as a static explanation. ## How the gate works ReLU means taking the larger of zero and a number. In this example, subtracting the ReLU of input minus 5 from the ReLU of input minus 4 creates a gate: zero at and below 4, one at and above 5, and a ramp between those points. ``` // Ordinary JavaScript const direct = input > 4 ? 10 : 12; // A ReLU gate and its weighted output const gate = Math.max(input - 4, 0) - Math.max(input - 5, 0); const weighted = 12 - 2 * gate; ``` At input 4, both ReLU terms are zero, so the gate is zero and the weighted output is 12. At input 5, the terms are one and zero, so the output becomes 10. For integer inputs above 5, both terms rise together and their difference stays one. ## What our arithmetic check found We compared the arithmetic output with the ordinary branch for every integer from −1,000 through 1,000. All 2,001 inputs matched. We also checked fractional inputs around the threshold: | Input | Gate | Branch | Arithmetic | |---|---|---|---| | 4 | 0 | 12 | 12 | | 4.25 | 0.25 | 10 | 11.5 | | 4.5 | 0.5 | 10 | 11 | | 4.75 | 0.75 | 10 | 10.5 | | 5 | 1 | 10 | 10 | There is no integer between 4 and 5, so the ramp is invisible on the intended integer domain. A fractional input reveals it. This is a limit of this construction’s input assumption; it does not demonstrate a bug in Handwired’s compiler. ## What this explains about Handwired [Handwired’s README](https://github.com/chenglou/handwired) describes manually constructed numerical operations for programs, using matrix operations and ReLU-style gates. Its own examples include a JavaScript backend and WebGPU experiments. The small construction here only illustrates a conditional; it does not compile arbitrary JavaScript into a trained language model. To try the full project, use [the author’s live demos](https://chenglou.me/handwired/) and read the repository’s setup instructions. We have not measured GPU speed, general-program equivalence or training behavior. A successful arithmetic check cannot establish any of those claims. ## A useful way to experiment 1. Start with a tiny condition whose expected result you can calculate independently. 2. Write down whether the input domain is integers, bounded integers or real numbers. 3. Test the boundary and the values on both sides before adding loops or state. 4. Keep performance measurements separate from correctness checks. If you are inspecting a result object from your own experiment, the [JSON formatter](https://toolpantry.app/json-formatter) can format it locally. This explainer sends no input to a server. ## Notes We checked this small arithmetic example with Node.js. It is an independent explainer of a construction in Cheng Lou’s README, not a test of the Handwired compiler or WebGPU backend. No model weights or third-party runtime are downloaded. --- # HEIC Not Showing in Android Gallery? Find & Convert the Photo > HEIC missing from your Android gallery? Check Downloads, try another app, or make a local JPG copy. Includes clear steps and a downloadable test file. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/heic-files-on-android A photo missing from the gallery, a file that will not open, and a form rejecting an upload need different checks. Start with the file itself, then choose the next step. ## Quick answer Quick answer: Look in Files → Downloads for the HEIC. If the file is present but the app cannot open it, try another available image app or make a JPG copy. If no complete file was downloaded, conversion cannot recover it. Convert a HEIC to JPG → ## 1. The photo is missing from the gallery 1. Open your phone’s **Files**, **My Files** or equivalent file manager and check **Downloads**. App names and menus vary by phone. 2. Look for the file you received, including its extension and size. If it is not there, return to the message, email or browser and finish saving the attachment. An empty or incomplete download needs a new copy. 3. If the file exists, use its **Open with** option, when available, to try another image app already on the device. A gallery can omit a downloaded file even when a file manager can find it. 4. If the app reports an unsupported format, follow the conversion steps below. Keep the original while checking the new copy. ## 2. The HEIC exists but will not open Android’s [supported image formats](https://developer.android.com/media/platform/supported-formats#image-support) list HEIF decoding from **Android 9**, with device support marked optional. The system version alone does not guarantee that a particular device, app or HEIF variant will work. The same page lists JPEG decoding across Android versions. 1. Open the [HEIC to JPG converter](https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-jpg#heic-heading) in your browser. 2. Tap **Choose a HEIC photo**. In the file picker, browse to the saved .heic or .heif file rather than relying only on the gallery’s photo list. 3. Wait for the JPG preview. The decoder must load on first use; conversion can take longer for a large photo. The tool handles one file per pass and accepts files up to 40 MB. 4. Check the preview, then tap **Download JPG**. Find the result in the browser’s downloads or your Files app. Open the JPG there before trying another app. If the browser cannot decode the file, keep the original and try an export from the device or app that created it. Renaming .heic to .jpg does not perform a conversion. We cannot guarantee every browser, phone or HEIF variant. ## 3. The JPG opens, but an upload form rejects it Check the destination’s rules for **format, file size and pixel dimensions** separately. A JPG copy solves the encoding requirement; it does not guarantee a small enough file or the required width and height. Continue to the [target-size image compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb) when the form has a byte ceiling. Choose the actual limit and enter both required pixel dimensions if the form specifies them. Keep faces and text readable in the final preview. For common limits, see the [file-size reference](https://toolpantry.app/file-size-limits). ## A conversion sample you can inspect Our [synthetic HEIC input](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/synthetic-detail.heic) is **289,338 bytes**. Its [JPG output at 85% quality](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/heic-to-jpg-85.jpg) is **204,630 bytes**; both decode at **960 × 720 pixels**. This is a generated chart checked in desktop Chrome, not an iPhone camera photo or an Android device benchmark. One sample is not a typical compression ratio. JPEG size can increase or decrease depending on the input and settings. See the [test method and downloadable results](https://toolpantry.app/compression-benchmarks). Keep the original if HDR, depth, color information, metadata or Live Photo video matters. ## Prevent the same format mismatch next time Apple documents **Settings → Camera → Formats → Most Compatible** for taking new photos as JPEG on supported iPhones. This does not change existing HEIC files. See [Apple’s HEIF and HEVC guidance](https://support.apple.com/en-us/116944), or ask the sender to export a JPG copy. Using a computer instead? The [Mac guide](https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-convert-heic-to-jpg-on-mac) covers Finder and Preview; the [Windows guide](https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-convert-heic-to-jpg-on-windows) covers the PC workflow. [Return to the converter](https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-jpg#heic-heading) when you have located the file. ## Notes Updated by the Tool Pantry team on 17 October 2026. Android support details come from Android’s documentation. Our downloadable conversion sample was checked in desktop Chrome; this is not a claim of testing on a physical Android phone. ## FAQ **Does Android support HEIC photos?** The Android platform lists HEIF decoding from Android 9, but device support is optional and apps can differ. A supported Android version does not guarantee that every gallery, editor or upload form will accept the file. **What if the HEIC is not showing in my gallery?** First look for the actual file in Files or Downloads. If it is missing or empty, finish the download or ask for a new copy. If it exists, try opening it with another available image app, or convert it to JPG and check the downloaded copy. **How do I convert a HEIC to JPG on my phone?** Open the HEIC to JPG converter, select the HEIC from your file picker, wait for the preview, and download the JPG. Look in the browser downloads or the Files app for the result. Conversion runs in your browser; no photo upload is required. **Will changing .heic to .jpg fix it?** No. Renaming the extension does not change the image encoding. Export or convert a real JPEG copy, then open that file to check it. **What if an upload form still rejects the JPG?** Check the form’s allowed format, byte limit and pixel dimensions separately. Use the target-size compressor if you need a smaller file or exact pixels, and inspect the saved result before uploading. --- # How to Blur Faces in a Video (Free, No App) > Blur a face in a video without installing anything — draw a box over the face and export a new MP4 with those pixels blurred for the whole clip. Free, local, no watermark. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-blur-faces-in-a-video Someone walked through your shot. A student's face is in the demo. Your kid is in the background. Here's how to blur them out — free, in the browser, nothing uploaded. ## Quick answer Short answer: open the video face blur tool , load the MP4 or MOV, pause on a frame where the face is visible, and drag a box over it. Press Blur & export — the box is blurred on every frame and saved as a new MP4. No app, no upload, no watermark. ## Why the usual options are annoying CapCut and iMovie can blur faces, but you install an app, learn its masking tools, and sometimes fight an account or watermark. Online blur sites make you upload the video first — which is ironic when the whole point is privacy. And "just crop them out" only works when the person is at the edge of the frame. ## The two-minute method 1. Open **toolpantry.app/face-blur-video** and load your MP4 or MOV — it stays on your device 2. **Scrub to the best frame** — pause where the face is clearest and biggest; the box will cover the whole clip 3. **Drag a box over the face** (one per face). On Chrome, "Detect faces" can place boxes for you on the current frame 4. **Set the strength** — 16–20 px is plenty at 720p; go stronger for 1080p/4K 5. **Blur & export** — a new MP4 downloads with the blur baked into the pixels ## "Baked in" is the important part Some tools show a blur that is really an overlay — the sharp video is still underneath, and anyone can remove it. Here the pixels are blurred *before* the video is re-encoded, so the exported file simply no longer contains the sharp version of that region. Our own test: the sharpest edge inside a blurred box measured 97% flatter than the same edge outside it — the detail is gone, not hidden. ## The honest limits **The box doesn't follow the face.** It covers the same spot on every frame, so for someone walking through the shot, draw one box that covers their whole path — or a generous box around their head. For a stationary talking-head clip, a snug box is fine. **And keep the original safe:** the source file on your device still has the unblurred footage; only the exported copy is protected. If the footage is sensitive, store or delete the original accordingly. ## When you need it Teachers blurring students in class recordings. Anyone posting footage of strangers — street scenes, protests, travel vlogs. Parents sharing clips from school events. And anyone who has ever thought "I'd post this if it weren't for the faces in the background." That last one is most of us. Blurring a photo instead? The [photo face blur tool](https://toolpantry.app/face-blur.html) does the same job for images, and if the clip just needs to be smaller, use the [video compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-video.html). ## Notes By the Tool Pantry team, October 2026. Tested with Chrome 155 on macOS: a 6-second 1280×720 clip with a boxed region exported in about 15 seconds — the sharp edge inside the box measured 97% flatter than the same edge outside it. ## FAQ **How do I blur a face in a video for free?** Open the video face blur tool, load the MP4, pause on a frame where the face is visible, and drag a box over it. Set the blur strength and press Blur and export — the pixels are blurred on every frame and written into a new MP4. Everything runs on your device. **Does the blur follow a moving face?** The box is fixed for the whole clip — the tool doesn't track faces frame by frame. For a moving face, draw one box that covers the area the person moves within. For talking-head clips, a snug box works fine. **Can someone unblur the video?** No. The pixels are replaced with a gaussian blur before the video is re-encoded, so the sharp pixels no longer exist in the exported file. It is not an overlay or a sticker that can be removed. The original file on your device is untouched, so delete it if it contains sensitive footage. **Why blur a face instead of cropping it out?** Blurring keeps the scene intact — the person's gestures, position, and the context of the shot still read clearly, which matters for demos, tutorials, and street footage. Cropping removes the person; blurring protects their identity while keeping the video usable. **What apps do people normally use for this?** CapCut, iMovie, and paid editors can all blur faces, but they require installing an app, learning its masking tools, and often uploading or exporting through an account. A browser tool does the same core job — box the face, blur, export — with nothing installed and nothing uploaded. --- # How to Compress a PDF on iPhone — Free, No App Needed > Safari can shrink your PDF without an app — the 30-second walkthrough, plus our measured results for each compression level. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-compress-a-pdf-on-iphone Your iPhone can shrink a PDF without installing anything, in about 30 seconds in Safari. No app, no account, and the file never gets uploaded to a server. ## Quick answer Short answer: open toolpantry.app/compress-pdf in Safari, pick your PDF, tap Compress, and save the smaller file. No app, about 30 seconds. Your document never leaves the phone. ## The steps 1. In Safari, go to **toolpantry.app/compress-pdf**. 2. Tap **Choose one PDF** and pick the file from Files. 3. Pick a level. Balanced is the right default. 4. Tap **Compress PDF**. Each page is rendered and re-encoded on the phone — a few seconds for a short document, longer for a big scan. 5. The file downloads. Safari will ask where to put it. The original stays untouched in Files. If the result isn't small enough — or you don't like how it looks — run it again at a different level. There's nothing to undo because nothing was changed. ## What "compressing" actually does here The tool turns each page into a JPEG image and rebuilds the PDF. It's honest compression: dramatic on scans, useless on some other files. Two things to know before you start: - **Text stops being selectable.** Fine for scans, receipts, and signed forms. If you'll need to copy text out of the document later, keep the original file too. - **Text-heavy PDFs can get bigger.** A PDF exported from Word or Google Docs is already efficiently packed. Re-encoding it as images adds bytes instead of removing them. ## Our test, with real numbers We took a 196.8 KB PDF — a full-page screenshot saved as a document — and ran it through all three levels. | Level | Result | Best for | |---|---|---| | Strong | **41.3 KB (−79%)** | Scans and forms you read on screen | | Balanced | **106.8 KB (−46%)** | The everyday default | | Light | 197.5 KB — no gain | Rare cases where quality is critical | Two details worth noticing. Light made the file slightly **bigger**, and the tool said so instead of quietly handing back a worse file. And because the source was already a compressed JPEG, this test flatters nobody — photos straight from a phone camera, which is what most scan PDFs are made of, typically shrink far more at Balanced. ## Picking a level **Strong** drops scans to around a fifth of their size. Text inside a scan gets soft, but for anything you read on screen it's usually fine. **Balanced** is where most people should live; quality stays close to the original. **Light** only makes sense for documents with fine detail, and only when the file is genuinely bloated to start with. ## When this isn't the right tool If your PDF is mostly text — a lease, a report, a ticket — re-encoding it as images won't help, and you lose the ability to search or copy text. Our compressor will tell you when it can't shrink a file; listen to it and keep your original. Two workarounds that come up a lot: if only a few pages are heavy, [split the PDF](https://toolpantry.app/split-pdf.html) first so you're only compressing what matters. And if the portal actually wants images instead of a PDF, [convert the pages to JPG](https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-jpg.html) — it's often the smaller file anyway. ## Notes By the Tool Pantry team, October 2026. Tested with Chrome 130 on macOS using a 196.8 KB test PDF; Safari on iPhone uses the same browser APIs — if your iPhone behaves differently, tell us. ## FAQ **Does this work on iPhone?** Yes. It runs in Safari like any web page — nothing to install. The engine loads once (about 1.7 MB) and after that everything happens on the device. **Is it really free, and is my file uploaded?** Free, no account, no watermark. And no — the compression runs in your browser. The PDF never goes anywhere. **Why didn't my PDF get smaller?** Usually one of two reasons: it was already optimized, or it is mostly text. The status line tells you which one it is. Neither is worth fighting — keep the original. **Can I do this on a computer instead?** Yes, same link. The desktop version has identical options. --- # How to Convert HEIC to JPG on Mac: Finder, Preview & Browser > Convert HEIC to JPG on Mac with Finder Quick Actions, Preview batch export, or a local browser tool. Includes a tested sample and exact file sizes. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-convert-heic-to-jpg-on-mac Use Finder for a quick JPEG copy, Preview for files you want to export together, or a browser converter for one loose image. Keep the HEIC original and check the copy before sending it. ## Quick answer Quick answer: in Finder, Control-click your HEIC → Quick Actions → Convert Image . Choose JPEG , use Actual Size when you want to keep the pixel dimensions, review Preserve Metadata , and convert. If that action is unavailable, open the file in Preview and use File → Export → JPEG . ## 1. Convert a HEIC with Finder Quick Actions 1. Find the HEIC file. Control-click it, or use a right-click. 2. Open **Quick Actions** and choose **Convert Image**. Which actions appear depends on the file and your Finder extensions. 3. Set the format to **JPEG**. Choose **Actual Size** to keep the dimensions rather than deliberately downsize. 4. Review **Preserve Metadata**. The checkbox controls whether metadata is copied; inspect what the resulting file contains before sharing sensitive images. 5. Choose **Convert to JPEG**. In our test, Finder placed a .jpeg copy beside the HEIC and left the original unchanged. JPEG and JPG are names for the same image format. Apple documents this action in its [Finder Quick Actions guide](https://support.apple.com/en-euro/guide/mac-help/mchl97ff9142/27/mac/27). Menu layout varies by macOS version. If Convert Image is missing, use Preview below rather than changing the file extension. ## 2. Use Preview for one file or a batch For one image, open it in Preview and choose **File → Export**. Select **JPEG**, adjust quality if needed, and save a copy under a new name or in a separate folder. Apple’s [Preview export instructions](https://support.apple.com/en-il/guide/preview/prvw1012/mac) also explain the available formats. For several loose files: 1. In Finder, select the HEIC files and open them together in Preview. They must be in the same window. 2. Show the thumbnail sidebar if it is hidden. Select the thumbnails you want to convert; choosing only one exports only that selection. 3. Use **File → Export Selected Images** (or Export, depending on the version). Choose JPEG in the export settings and a destination folder. 4. Compare the output count with your selection and open a few JPEGs. Keep the HEIC originals until you have checked the results. Apple explicitly describes selecting multiple images in one Preview window before exporting. We confirmed the two-image selection and Export Selected Images menu on our Mac; the measured output comparison below covers Finder and the browser converter. Already using Photos? Apple’s [Photos export guide](https://support.apple.com/en-ie/guide/photos/pht6e157c5f/12.0/mac/27) uses **File → Export → Export [number] Photos**, then a chosen photo format. Select JPEG for a JPEG copy; exporting an unmodified original serves a different purpose. ## 3. Convert one file in your browser 1. Open the [local HEIC to JPG converter](https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-jpg). 2. Choose one HEIC or HEIF file and let the decoder load. Keep this tab open while it converts. 3. Pick a JPEG quality value; 85% is the tool’s default. Preview the result, then download it. 4. Check the saved file’s dimensions and readability. The tool processes one file per pass; use the native batch route above for a selection of files. The decoder runs in the browser and the tool does not send the photo to a conversion server. A successful result in our Chrome sample does not establish compatibility with every browser or every HEIF variant. Keep the original if color, HDR, depth information or other metadata matters. ## Two outputs from one downloadable HEIC sample The same [synthetic HEIC input](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/synthetic-detail.heic) was used for both outputs below. All three files decode at **960 × 720 pixels**. The browser output was measured on 15 October; the Finder output on 16 October 2026. | File | Exact bytes | Settings | |---|---|---| | [HEIC input](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/synthetic-detail.heic) | 289,338 | Generated chart | | [Finder JPEG output](https://toolpantry.app/samples/heic-mac/2026-10-16/finder-original-size.jpeg) | 326,051 | JPEG; Actual Size; metadata enabled | | [Browser JPEG output](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/heic-to-jpg-85.jpg) | 204,630 | JPEG quality 85% | In this sample one JPEG was bigger than the HEIC and the other was smaller. **These are different encoders and settings, not an equal-quality comparison or a typical compression ratio.** File size alone does not tell you whether one output looks better. [Read the settings and checks](https://toolpantry.app/samples/heic-mac/2026-10-16/results.json), or use the [broader downloadable test set](https://toolpantry.app/compression-benchmarks). ## If the conversion does not solve the upload problem - **Finder action missing:** use Preview’s Export command. Available actions depend on your macOS version, file type and enabled extensions. - **Renamed file still rejected:** changing .heic to .jpg changes the name, not the encoding. Export an actual JPEG copy. - **The JPEG is still too large:** lower quality or dimensions if the destination permits it. For a specific byte ceiling and pixel size, continue to the [target-size image compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb). - **Colors or special features differ:** compare with the original. A plain JPEG copy does not retain every HDR, depth or multi-image feature, nor the paired video of a Live Photo. - **The HEIC will not open:** support depends on the software and file variant. Apple introduced HEIF support in macOS High Sierra 10.13; see its [HEIF compatibility and conversion guidance](https://support.apple.com/en-au/116944). For a PC workflow, see [HEIC to JPG on Windows](https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-convert-heic-to-jpg-on-windows). For the format background, see [why iPhone photos use HEIC](https://toolpantry.app/blog/why-are-my-iphone-photos-heic). Return to the [HEIC converter](https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-jpg) when you are ready to make one JPEG copy. ## Notes Updated by the Tool Pantry team on 16 October 2026. Finder conversion was verified on macOS Sequoia 15.6 (Apple silicon); its screenshot uses Simplified Chinese. Preview and Photos steps reference Apple’s documentation. The downloadable sample below is synthetic, not an iPhone camera photo. ## FAQ **What is the quickest built-in way to convert one HEIC on a Mac?** In Finder, Control-click the file, choose Quick Actions → Convert Image, select JPEG and the image size, then convert. Menu availability depends on your macOS version and enabled Finder extensions. Preview is an alternative. **How do I convert several HEIC files in Preview?** Open the files together in one Preview window, select their thumbnails in the sidebar, and use File → Export Selected Images (or Export). Select JPEG in the export settings and choose a destination folder. Check that the number of exported files matches your selection. **Do I need to install another app?** Finder and Preview are built into macOS. The linked browser converter is another option for one HEIC file at a time; it loads a decoder and processes the image locally. **Will converting HEIC to JPG make the file smaller?** It may increase or decrease the file size. The image content, encoder, quality setting, dimensions and metadata affect the result. Our one synthetic sample produced different sizes in Finder and the browser; it is not a typical compression ratio. **Does conversion preserve the original HEIC and all its features?** The workflows here create a JPEG copy. Keep the original HEIC and any paired Live Photo video. A JPEG copy does not retain every possible HDR, depth, multi-image or metadata feature. Review the output before replacing or sharing anything. **What if Convert Image is missing from Quick Actions?** Finder actions depend on the file type, macOS version and enabled extensions. Try Preview → File → Export and choose JPEG, or use the one-file browser converter. Renaming .heic to .jpg does not convert the image. --- # HEIC to JPG on Windows — No Install, No Upload > HEIC photo won't open on your Windows PC? Make a JPG copy in your browser, check a downloadable sample, and compare the Windows extension option. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-convert-heic-to-jpg-on-windows If your photo app cannot open an iPhone HEIC file, convert a copy in your browser. Your photo stays on this device, and the original is kept. ## Quick answer Quick answer: Save the complete HEIC file to your PC, open the converter, choose the file, wait for the preview, and download the JPG. Use the sample button in the converter to try the steps before selecting your own photo. Convert a HEIC to JPG → One photo per pass · no account · no photo upload. Looking for a Windows app’s codec option? Check Windows support below . ## Convert a HEIC to JPG without installing an app 1. **Find the actual file.** Save the attachment from email, a message, a browser download or iCloud to a folder you can find, such as Downloads or Pictures. Finish the download first; an empty or damaged file needs a new copy. 2. **Open the [HEIC to JPG converter](https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-jpg#heic-heading).** Use a current browser such as Chrome or Edge. The decoder loads on first use. To try it with a public generated chart, choose **Try a sample HEIC**. 3. **Select one photo and check the preview.** Choose the saved .heic or .heif file. Start at the default 85% JPEG quality, then compare the preview if you adjust it. The tool accepts one file up to 40 MB per pass. 4. **Choose Download JPG.** Open the browser’s downloads and use **Show in folder**, when available. Open the JPG copy in your photo app before attaching it or sending it onward. A converted JPG does not need the Windows app to decode the original HEIC. If this web converter cannot decode your file, keep the original and ask the sender or the app that created it for a JPEG export. Browser support and HEIF variants differ; not every file is guaranteed to work. ## If you want Windows to open the HEIC itself First try the image app already on your PC. Some Windows environments can open HEIC, while others need additional support. Support depends on the app, installed codecs and file variant. Microsoft documents the [HEIF extension codec](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/wic/heif-codec) for compatible apps. **HEIF Image Extensions** and **HEVC Video Extensions** are different components. Microsoft’s [Photos support article, which applies to Windows 10](https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/apps/photos/photos-app-video-editor-error-can-t-view-this-file-type), explains when both may be needed. Check the current Microsoft instructions and availability for your device; this guide does not claim the same codec setup for every Windows 10 or 11 PC. If you only need a JPG copy, the browser converter uses its own decoder. On a managed work computer, follow your organisation’s software and file-handling rules. ## A conversion sample you can inspect Our [synthetic HEIC input](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/synthetic-detail.heic) is **289,338 bytes**. The [JPG output at 85% quality](https://toolpantry.app/samples/compression/2026-10-15/heic-to-jpg-85.jpg) is **204,630 bytes**. Both decode at **960 × 720 pixels**. This is a generated detail chart checked in desktop Chrome on macOS. It is not an iPhone camera sample, a Windows-device test, a speed benchmark or a typical compression ratio. See the [method and downloadable results](https://toolpantry.app/compression-benchmarks). JPEG conversion can make a file larger or smaller and uses lossy recompression. Check the result and keep the original if HDR, depth, colour information, metadata or Live Photo video matters. This tool makes a still-image copy; it does not promise to preserve all of that information. ## If the JPG opens but an upload form still rejects it Read the destination’s allowed format, file-size limits and required pixel dimensions. Conversion changes the encoding; it does not guarantee that the destination accepts the file. If you need a byte ceiling or exact pixels, use **Use this JPG in the size compressor** after conversion, or open the [target-size compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb) and choose the limit your destination actually specifies. This step is optional. Inspect the saved file before submitting it. ## A few files now, or a whole camera roll? The current converter handles **one file per pass**. For a few photos, repeat the steps. For a whole folder or hundreds of photos, use a trusted batch workflow available to you; this page is not a batch conversion tool. For new photos on supported iPhones, Apple documents **Settings → Camera → Formats → Most Compatible**. This captures new photos as JPEG; it does not convert existing HEIC files. Apple also explains how [transfer and sharing settings can affect the exported format](https://support.apple.com/en-us/116944). Ask the sender for a JPG export if that is simpler. Using a Mac instead? The [Mac guide](https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-convert-heic-to-jpg-on-mac) covers Finder and Preview. To make a document from photos, use [HEIC to PDF](https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-pdf). [Return to the JPG converter](https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-jpg#heic-heading) when you have the file ready. ## Notes One photo per pass · no account · no photo upload. Looking for a Windows app’s codec option? [Check Windows support below](https://toolpantry.app/#windows-support). Updated by the Tool Pantry team on 17 October 2026. The workflow is intended for Windows users. Our downloadable sample was checked in desktop Chrome on macOS; we have not verified it on a Windows device. ## FAQ **Do I need a Windows HEIF or HEVC extension for this converter?** No. This converter uses its own decoder in your browser. Windows photo apps have separate codec requirements; HEIF Image Extensions and HEVC Video Extensions are different components. **Will renaming .heic to .jpg fix the photo?** No. Renaming changes the filename, not the image encoding. Convert or export a real JPEG copy, then open the downloaded file to check it. **Are my photos uploaded?** No. The selected photo is decoded and converted in your browser tab. The website and its decoder need to load first, but the photo is not sent to a conversion server. **Can I convert a whole folder of HEIC photos?** This converter handles one file per pass. For a few photos, repeat the steps. For a whole camera roll, choose a trusted batch workflow available to you; this page does not provide a batch conversion tool. **Why can the JPG be larger than the HEIC?** JPEG and HEIC encode images differently. Converting to JPG can increase or decrease file size, and JPEG recompression can reduce quality. Inspect the preview and keep the original. **Does Most Compatible change my existing iPhone photos?** No. On supported iPhones, Settings → Camera → Formats → Most Compatible changes how new photos are captured. Export or convert existing HEIC photos separately. --- # How to Make a Ringtone From a Song or Video (Free, No App) > Turn any song, voice memo, or video's audio into a ringtone — iPhone .m4r or Android MP3 — right in your browser. Our test: a 12-second cut came out at 182 KB as M4R. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-make-a-ringtone Any song, voice memo, or video's audio — trimmed to the part you love and exported as an iPhone ringtone or an Android MP3. No app store, no account, and the file never leaves your device. ## Quick answer Short answer: open the audio trimmer , add the song (or a video — the audio is pulled out automatically), drag to select up to 40 seconds, and export M4R for iPhone or MP3 for Android. In our test, a 12-second cut came out at 182 KB as M4R and 282 KB as 192 kbps MP3. ## The 3-step version 1. **Add the source** — an MP3, WAV, M4A, or the video itself (MP4/MOV). The waveform appears once it decodes. 2. **Select the part** — drag across the waveform. The "30 s ringtone preset" button is a fast start: it grabs the first 30 seconds and adds a fade-out. Press **Play selection** to check it. 3. **Export and install** — M4R for iPhone, MP3 for Android. ## Installing an iPhone ringtone (the part nobody explains) Apple doesn't let you set a ringtone from the Files app — the file has to arrive through Finder or iTunes: 1. Download the .m4r file and connect the iPhone to a Mac (Finder) or PC (iTunes). 2. Drag the .m4r into the **Tones** section of the device (it appears alongside Music, Movies, Books). 3. On the phone: **Settings → Sounds & Haptics → Ringtone** — your clip is at the top of the list. The 40-second cap is Apple's, not ours: iPhone ringtones stop at 40 s. The trimmer warns you if your selection is longer and exports the first 40 s. Android has no such ritual — download the MP3, open it, and pick "Set as ringtone" (or select it in the sound settings). ## What we measured A 12-second cut from a video's audio track exported to **181.6 KB as M4R** (AAC, 48 kHz) and **281.8 KB as 192 kbps MP3** — both produced in seconds, on our machine, with the source never uploaded. That's the honest size math: ringtones are small because they're short; the quality dial matters less than picking the right 30 seconds. ## Picking a good ringtone section The best ringtones are *recognizable in two seconds* — the hook, the chorus drop, the first bar of the intro. Skip long buildups: by the time the good part arrives, you've already answered. And use the fade-out: an abrupt cut sounds broken, a 2-second fade sounds intentional. The preset does exactly that. ## The honest parts Making a ringtone for your own phone from music you own is personal use in most countries — but don't redistribute the clips, and this tool deliberately can't download from streaming platforms (it works on files you already have; our guide on [extracting audio from video](https://toolpantry.app/video-to-mp3.html) covers the file side). One more thing worth knowing: if the source is a low-bitrate stream rip, the ringtone will sound like one — trimming can't add quality, only keep it. Record your own instead? The [voice recorder](https://toolpantry.app/voice-recorder.html) captures audio straight to MP3 and feeds this same trimmer. ## Notes By the Tool Pantry team, October 2026. Measured with Chrome 155 on macOS using a 12-second audio track; the M4R output was verified as AAC/MP4, the format iPhones accept. ## FAQ **How do I make a ringtone from a song?** Open the audio trimmer, add the song, drag on the waveform to select up to 40 seconds, and export as M4R for iPhone or MP3 for Android. The whole thing runs in your browser — no app, no account, and the song is never uploaded. **What format do iPhone ringtones need?** M4R — which is AAC audio in an MP4 container, capped at 40 seconds. This tool exports it directly; you then drag the file into Finder (macOS) or iTunes (Windows) under Tones and pick it in Settings → Sounds. **Can I make a ringtone from a video?** Yes — drop the MP4 or MOV straight into the trimmer. Its audio track is decoded automatically, you trim it like any audio file, and export. No separate extraction step. **Is this legal?** Making a ringtone for your own phone from music you own is widely treated as personal use in most countries. Don't redistribute or sell the clips — and don't use this to bypass any streaming platform's download rules, which this tool doesn't touch. --- # How to Make a Signature for PDFs (Without Printing a Thing) > Make a signature for PDFs and documents without printing — draw it or clean up a photo of your real signature, and download a transparent PNG that drops onto any signature line. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-make-a-signature No printer, no scanner, no "photograph the signed page and hope" routine. Make a proper signature image once, reuse it forever — and keep it off every server while you do. ## Quick answer Short answer: open the signature maker and either draw your signature or upload a photo of it on white paper — the tool removes the paper, trims to the ink, and gives you a transparent PNG that drops onto any document. To sign a PDF directly, use Sign PDF . ## The old way, and why it's bad The classic routine: print the document, sign it, photograph the page on your kitchen table, and email the photo. The result is a grey rectangle of table around a crooked signature — and if you sign a lot of documents, you do this every time. The modern routine takes two minutes once: make a clean signature image, then place it on anything, forever. ## Route 1: draw it (two minutes, done forever) 1. Open **toolpantry.app/signature-maker** and draw in the box — a finger on a phone gives the most natural line, a trackpad works too. 2. Set the ink: **blue is the classic choice** (it shows the document was signed, not photocopied), black when a form demands it. 3. Download. The PNG is auto-cropped to the signature and transparent — 958×197 px in our test, ready for any signature line. ## Route 2: photograph the real thing If you want your actual pen-and-paper signature: sign on plain white paper with black ink, fill the frame, and photograph it straight-on in even light. Upload it to the maker's "Clean up a photo" mode and slide the paper-removal control until the paper disappears — the tool keeps the ink and trims to it (our test photo cleaned down to 898×142 px of pure signature). This is the route to choose when a document expects "your real signature" rather than a drawn one. ## Where to put it - **PDFs** — our [Sign PDF](https://toolpantry.app/sign-pdf.html) tool places it directly on the page; any PDF editor takes it as an image too - **Word / Google Docs** — Insert → Picture, then set text wrapping to "Behind text" so it sits over the signature line - **Forms and portals** — anywhere that accepts an image upload, a transparent PNG looks native ## Two things worth knowing **The legal bit, plainly:** for everyday agreements and approvals, image signatures are widely accepted (ESIGN in the US, eIDAS in the EU). If a document explicitly demands a "qualified electronic signature" — some contracts, registries, and notarized deeds — you need a certificate-based service; no image can substitute. **The privacy bit:** a signature is about as personal as a file gets, and every tool in this workflow runs in your browser — nothing is uploaded, which is exactly why signing here beats the sites that ask you to upload the document first. Signing on iPhone? The full Safari walkthrough is in our [Sign a PDF on iPhone](https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-sign-a-pdf-on-iphone) guide. ## Notes By the Tool Pantry team, October 2026. Tested with Chrome 155 on macOS: a drawn signature exported as a 958×197 transparent PNG; a photographed signature cleaned to 898×142 with the paper fully removed. ## FAQ **How do I make a signature without printing?** Two routes: draw your signature with a mouse or finger in the signature maker, or sign a piece of white paper, photograph it, and let the tool remove the paper background. Either way you download a transparent PNG that drops onto any signature line. **Why does the PNG need a transparent background?** So the signature sits on the document's signature line instead of arriving on a white rectangle that covers it. Every PDF editor and Word expect a transparent PNG for this — it's the difference between looking signed and looking pasted. **Can I sign a PDF directly?** Yes — our Sign PDF tool places a drawn or uploaded signature straight onto the page, no separate editor needed. This maker is for when you want the signature as a reusable image file. **Is a PNG signature legally valid?** For everyday agreements, approvals, and forms, an image signature is widely accepted under laws like the US ESIGN Act and the EU eIDAS regulation. Documents that legally require a qualified electronic signature need a certificate-based service instead. --- # How to Merge Videos Into One File (Free, No Watermark) > Join clips into one video without an app or watermark — arrange the order, merge locally, and skip the upload-and-download dance of online editors. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-merge-videos Without the app install, the account signup, the upload wait, or the watermark. Here's how merging videos should work. ## Quick answer Short answer: open the video merger , add your MP4 or MOV clips, arrange the order with the arrows, and press Merge. The clips are joined into one MP4 on your device — no upload, no watermark, no account. ## Why online mergers feel like a trap The pattern is familiar: find a "free video merger", upload two clips (a wait), discover the export has a watermark, and the "HD download" wants a subscription. The upload wait and the watermark exist because the service is paying for servers to do the work. When the work happens on your own device, neither is necessary. ## What merging actually involves Two separate video files can't just be taped together — they have independent codecs, timelines, and settings. A merger decodes each clip and writes one continuous new stream: that's why merging always re-encodes (unlike trimming or rotating, which can be lossless). The good news: a proper merger does it in a *single* encoding pass, so you pay one generation of quality, not one per clip. ## Getting a clean merge - **First clip sets the size** — the output takes the first clip's dimensions; the rest are scaled to fit with black bars (never stretched) - **Portrait and landscape mix fine** — phone clips are normalized upright automatically, so nothing merges sideways - **Order with the arrows** — the list order is the playback order; check it before merging - **Similar clips, cleanest result** — same size and orientation throughout means no letterbox bars at all ## Beyond video: audio and everything else The same principle powers the rest of the family: the [audio merger](https://toolpantry.app/merge-audio.html) joins MP3s and WAVs sample-to-sample (no gaps), the [trimmer](https://toolpantry.app/video-trimmer.html) cuts clips losslessly, and the [MOV to MP4](https://toolpantry.app/mov-to-mp4.html) converter swaps containers without touching the data. If your merged file ends up too big for sharing, the [compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-video.html) is the last step — it targets Discord, WhatsApp, and email limits directly. One honest note: merging needs the clips' audio to use compatible settings (AAC at the same sample rate); clips that don't are merged without their audio rather than failing the whole job, and the tool tells you when that happens. ## Notes By the Tool Pantry team, October 2026. Tested with Chrome 155 on macOS: a landscape 720p clip joined with a portrait 720×1280 clip produced a single 12.1-second MP4 in 49 seconds, with the portrait footage normalized upright and letterboxed — no stretching, no sideways frames. ## FAQ **How do I merge videos for free without a watermark?** Use a browser-based merger like Tool Pantry's: add your clips, arrange the order, and merge. It runs on your device — no account, no watermark, and nothing is uploaded. **Can I merge videos on iPhone without an app?** Yes — open the merge tool in Safari or Chrome on the phone, add clips from your library, and merge. The output saves to your downloads, ready to share. No app install needed. **Why do online mergers add watermarks?** They pay for servers that re-encode your video, and watermarks or paid tiers are how they recover the cost. A local tool uses your own device's power, so there is nothing to charge for — and nothing to brand. **What happens to clips with different sizes?** The merged video uses the first clip's size; other clips are scaled to fit with black bars (letterboxing). Nothing is stretched or cropped. Put a clip in the size you want first. **Does merging reduce quality?** Merging re-encodes once — one generation of quality, not one per clip. At a bitrate averaged from your source clips, the difference is usually invisible; keep the originals until you have checked the result. --- # How to Rotate a Video Without Losing Quality > Rotate a video 90° or 180° without re-encoding — instant, pixel-identical, no app. Why editors blur your video and how metadata rotation avoids it. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-rotate-a-video Every editor you've tried rotates by decoding and re-encoding the whole file — slow, and a little softer every time. There's a one-second, zero-loss way. Here's how it works. ## Quick answer Short answer: open the rotate video tool , load the MP4 or MOV, click rotate left/right/180°, and save. The rotation is written into the file as metadata — the video data is never re-encoded, so it's instant and pixel-identical to your original. ## Why your video is sideways When you film vertically, your phone doesn't actually record a vertical video — it records a wide video and stores a tiny "display this rotated 90°" instruction in the file. That's why the same file can look upright in Photos and sideways in some other app: one honors the instruction, the other ignores it. ## How editors make it worse Most video editors "fix" rotation by decoding every frame, rotating the pixels, and re-encoding the whole file. For a 2-minute clip that can take a minute or more, and every re-encode loses a little quality — color gradients get banded, fine texture gets mushy. For a purely geometric operation like rotation, that's a waste. ## The metadata trick (what our tool does) The rotate tool rewrites the rotation instruction itself — a handful of bytes in the file's header. The video stream isn't decoded, isn't re-encoded, isn't touched. Our own test: the output's frames matched a reference rotation with a pixel difference of 0.0, and the operation took under a second for a 6-second clip — it would take the same for a 60-minute clip, because nothing scales with length except copying the file. ## Getting a good result 1. Load the MP4 or MOV — the preview shows the current orientation 2. Click **Rotate left**, **Rotate right**, or **180°**; the preview updates instantly and rotations stack 3. Save. That's it — the file works in browsers, phones, YouTube, VLC, and editors ## After rotating Once the orientation is right, the rest of the video family plays nicely: cut the clip with the [trimmer](https://toolpantry.app/video-trimmer.html) (also no re-encoding), silence it with the [mute tool](https://toolpantry.app/mute-video.html), reframe it for Reels with the [cropper](https://toolpantry.app/crop-video.html), or grab a still with the [frame extractor](https://toolpantry.app/frame-extractor.html). One honest note: videos that arrive with a rotation already applied (straight from a phone) are handled correctly — the new rotation is composed with the existing one, so nothing doubles up. And if a very old tool ever shows the video sideways anyway, any modern player will display it upright — the metadata is the industry-standard mechanism, not a workaround. ## Notes By the Tool Pantry team, October 2026. Tested with Chrome 155 on macOS: a 6-second 1280×720 clip rotated 90° in under a second; the output's frames matched the reference rotation pixel-for-pixel (difference 0.0), and the file carried the standard rotation metadata that players already honor. ## FAQ **How do I rotate a video without losing quality?** Use a tool that writes rotation into the file's metadata instead of re-encoding. The video pixels are never touched — the rotation lands in under a second and the result is pixel-for-pixel identical to the original. **Why does my video look sideways in the first place?** Phone cameras record in their sensor's native orientation and store a rotation instruction in the file so players display it upright. When software ignores that instruction, the video appears sideways. **Do video editors like CapCut re-encode when rotating?** Usually yes — editors typically decode every frame, rotate, and re-encode the whole file, which takes time proportional to length and costs a generation of quality. A metadata rotation avoids both. **Will every player show the rotated video correctly?** Yes for all mainstream players — browsers, phones, YouTube, VLC, QuickTime, and editors. Rotation metadata is exactly how iPhone portrait videos have always worked. Only very old or unusual tools might ignore it. **Can I also trim or crop after rotating?** Yes, but do the rotation first. Once the file carries the new orientation, the trimmer and cropper will see the correct upright frame and their cuts and boxes will land where you expect. --- # How to Sign a PDF on iPhone — Free, No App Needed > Safari can sign your PDF without an app — draw, type, or upload a signature, drag it into place, and download. Our measured results inside. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-sign-a-pdf-on-iphone Draw, type, or upload your signature in the browser, then position it and export a new PDF. No app, no account, and neither the PDF nor your signature ever leaves the phone. ## Quick answer Short answer: open toolpantry.app/sign-pdf in Safari, choose your PDF, create a signature (draw it, type it, or upload a photo of it), drag it where it belongs, and download the signed file. ## The steps 1. In Safari, go to **[toolpantry.app/sign-pdf](https://toolpantry.app/sign-pdf.html)**. 2. Tap **Choose one PDF** and pick the document from Files. 3. Create your signature: draw it with your finger, type your name, or upload a photo of your ink signature. 4. Drag the signature into position over the signature line, and resize it with the slider. 5. To repeat the signature, tick **Add to every page**. Its width and position are relative to each page’s visible area; review every exported page. 6. Tap **Download signed PDF** and save it back to Files. The three signature styles, for reference: - **Draw** — finger or stylus right on the screen; the most natural look. - **Type** — pick a script style and get a tidy, consistent signature. - **Upload** — a photo of your ink signature on plain white paper; the background is removed automatically. The original PDF is never modified. If the placement looks off, run it again — there's nothing to undo because nothing was changed. ## What this actually does Your signature is stamped onto the page as an image. The tool does not create or verify a certificate-based digital signature. Keep the original and check the recipient’s requirements. Before exporting: - **It adds a visual signature.** It does not add a signing certificate or audit trail. Editing an already digitally signed PDF can affect its validation. - **Rotated pages are included.** Pages rotated by 0°, 90°, 180° or 270° are supported. Mixed page sizes use the same relative placement, fitted within each visible page. ## Our export checks On October 15, 2026, we exported an eight-page synthetic PDF containing four page rotations, mixed sizes, cropped pages, a text field, a checkbox and links. We reopened the output with a separate PDF parser and renderer. | What | Result | |---|---| | Pages signed | 8 of 8, including rotated pages | | Single-page mode | Only the selected rotated page was marked | | Form fields | Text value, checkbox state and appearance retained in this sample | | Other content | Links and page content outside the signature retained | These checks cover this ordinary PDF form sample. They do not establish compatibility with every PDF, XFA forms or existing digital signatures. Input files are limited to 60 MB (60,000,000 bytes). ## Touches worth knowing Drawing with your finger works better than you'd expect, but type it if you want it tidy. If you upload a photo, shoot it straight on, on plain white paper — the background remover is good but not magic. If a scanned PDF needs to be smaller, use [Compress PDF](https://toolpantry.app/compress-pdf.html) on an unsigned copy first. That tool turns pages into images and does not preserve editable form fields. Keep the original. Combining the signed page with attachments? That's [Merge PDF](https://toolpantry.app/merge-pdf.html). ## Notes Updated October 15, 2026. The export checks below ran in Chrome on macOS. These Safari instructions have not been independently verified on an iPhone. ## FAQ **Is it really free?** Yes. No account or watermark. Processing runs in your browser; input PDFs are limited to 60 MB. **Can I draw the signature with my finger?** Yes — that's the default tab. A stylus or finger both work. You can also type it or upload a photo; all three produce a transparent PNG. **What type of signature does this add?** It adds a visual image of a signature. It does not create or verify a certificate-based digital signature. Check the recipient’s requirements. **Does it work the same on a computer?** Yes, identical options. On desktop, drawing with a mouse works fine. --- # How to Tell If an Image Is AI-Generated (Without Trusting a Detector) > Check the file, not the pixels: AI generators leave metadata receipts — IPTC labels, generator signatures, Content Credentials. What each proves, and why a clean result means nothing. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-tell-if-an-image-is-ai-generated AI generators increasingly sign their output — IPTC labels, generator signatures, Content Credentials. Here's what each signal proves, what it doesn't, and why "no markers found" is not the same as "real". ## Quick answer Short answer: run the file through the AI image checker first. If the creating tool wrote an AI label, a generator signature, or Content Credentials, you have a receipt — strong evidence. If the metadata is gone (typical after any social upload), no honest tool can tell from pixels alone, and the pixel-based "detectors" that claim otherwise don't publish their error rates. ## The receipt test, in 30 seconds 1. Open **toolpantry.app/ai-image-checker** and add the file — original, not a screenshot of it. 2. Read the verdict: **AI markers found** (strong), **Content Credentials found** (verify at contentcredentials.org), or **no markers**. 3. If you need the full picture — GPS, camera, editing history — the [EXIF viewer](https://toolpantry.app/exif-viewer.html) shows every field the file carries. ## What we found in our test files We ran three files through the checker. A Stable-Diffusion-style PNG carrying the Automatic1111 "parameters" chunk — the full prompt-and-sampler recipe many local generators embed — was flagged instantly as a strong AI signal. A camera JPEG with Canon EXIF and a Lightroom software tag came back clean, with camera metadata as context. And a screenshot of an AI image? Nothing. No metadata, no verdict — the file simply doesn't remember where it came from. | Signal | Strength | What it proves | |---|---|---| | IPTC trainedAlgorithmicMedia label | **Strong** | The creating tool declared the image AI-generated — a direct statement in XMP | | Generator signature (Midjourney, ComfyUI, NovelAI…) | **Strong** | The software that made the file signed it | | Stable Diffusion "parameters" chunk | **Strong** | The generation recipe is embedded, prompt included | | Content Credentials (C2PA) | Verify | Signed provenance — could be AI or a camera; verify the manifest itself | | Camera EXIF | Context | A camera wrote the file — but AI tools can copy metadata | | No metadata at all | Nothing | The file was stripped, re-saved, or screenshotted. Proves nothing | ## Why we don't do pixel-based detection The "AI detector" industry sells probabilities. None of the major services publishes a real error rate, the generators improve every few months, and false positives have already ruined real people's work — teachers running essays through text detectors, stock photographers accused of generating their own photos. The honest position: when the label is in the file, you don't need a probability. When it isn't, we say so. ## The visual tells that are mostly dead Wrong hands and garbled text were the classic 2023 tells. By late 2025, Gemini's Nano Banana Pro and OpenAI's GPT Image models largely fixed both — text rendering is now a selling point. What still trips generators: reflections that don't match the scene, text that drifts on the third repetition, and background people whose faces melt under zoom. Treat all of these as hints, never proof. A hint is enough for "look closer"; it is not enough to accuse. ## When this approach fails Instagram, WhatsApp, and X re-encode every upload and drop the metadata. If an image reached you through a social platform, the receipt is gone — the checker will honestly tell you there's nothing to go on. Screenshots are worse: a screenshot never had metadata in the first place. And if you're the one holding evidence — a suspicious image someone sent you — **don't re-save, edit, or screenshot it**. Every one of those destroys the very fields that carry the proof. Keep the original file, check it, and share the check result alongside it. ## Where this is heading Regulation is making labeling the default: the EU AI Act's transparency rules expect AI content to be marked, and cameras (Leica, Sony) now add C2PA Content Credentials on capture, as do most major generators. The practical habit for 2026 is simple — before you trust or forward an image, glance at the file, not just the picture. ## Notes By the Tool Pantry team, October 2026. Tested with our own checker on a Stable-Diffusion-style PNG, a camera JPEG, and a stripped screenshot — results below. ## FAQ **How can I tell if an image was made by AI?** Check the file's metadata first: many AI tools write a generator signature, an IPTC trainedAlgorithmicMedia label, or Content Credentials into the image. Those are strong evidence when present. If the metadata is missing — common after any social upload — no honest tool can tell from the pixels alone. **Are AI image detectors reliable?** Pixel-based detectors publish no error rates and are in an arms race with generators; false positives have already harmed real people. Metadata is different — it is a statement written by the creating tool, not a probability. **Why do AI images show no markers?** Most generators don't write labels, and every major social platform re-encodes uploads, stripping metadata. Screenshots never had metadata. Absence of markers is not evidence either way. **What should I do if I need to prove an image is AI-generated?** Keep the original file exactly as it was downloaded and don't re-save, edit, or screenshot it. Re-saving destroys the very metadata that carries the proof. Check it with the AI image checker before sharing. --- # iPhone Duo Release Date, Preorders and Confirmed Details > iPhone Duo preorders opened October 16. US and UK availability starts October 23. Check the launch timeline, local times, prices and official sources. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/iphone-duo-release-date-preorders iPhone Duo preorders opened on October 16, 2026. Apple says availability begins October 23 in the US, UK and other first-wave markets, followed by 28 more countries and regions on October 30. ## Quick answer As of October 17: the preorder opening has passed. Check your local Apple store for the delivery or pickup date of the exact configuration you want. October 23 is the announced availability date for first-wave markets. ## Release date and preorder timeline The [September launch announcement](https://www.apple.com/newsroom/2026/09/apple-unveils-iphone-duo/) gives four different milestones. Keeping them separate resolves much of the confusion around “release date.” | Date in 2026 | What happened or is scheduled | |---|---| | September 9 | Apple announced iPhone Duo. | | October 16 | Preorders opened. | | October 23 | Availability begins in first-wave markets, including the US and UK. | | October 30 | Availability begins in 28 additional countries and regions. | The product’s launch day and an individual order’s arrival date answer different questions. For a purchase you are considering now, use the estimate shown after choosing your country, storage and delivery method. ## What time did preorders open? Apple’s [October 15 update](https://www.apple.com/newsroom/2026/10/open-up-to-new-possibilities-with-iphone-duo/) set the opening at 5 a.m. Pacific Time on Friday, October 16. At that date, the same moment was 8 a.m. US Eastern and 1 p.m. British Summer Time. Those are conversions of one opening time, not three separate release events. If you found an old countdown, check its date before relying on it. Preordering is already open as of this source check; the next first-wave milestone is October 23. ## What is confirmed? Apple’s [product page](https://www.apple.com/iphone-duo/) describes a foldable phone with a 7.6-inch inner display, a 5.4-inch outer display, an A20 Pro chip and two 48MP rear cameras. These are published specifications. They do not tell us how comfortable the hinge feels or how the cameras perform in an independent test. | Market | Announced starting price | |---|---| | United States | $1,999 — [US announcement](https://www.apple.com/newsroom/2026/09/apple-unveils-iphone-duo/) | | United Kingdom | £1,999 — [UK announcement](https://www.apple.com/uk/newsroom/2026/09/apple-unveils-iphone-duo/) | Use the current regional checkout for the final price and any conditions. A starting price is not the cost of every storage configuration, accessory or payment plan. ## A short check before ordering 1. **Choose your country first.** Use the regional Apple store so the quoted currency and delivery options apply to you. 2. **Select the actual configuration.** Record the delivery or pickup estimate shown for that choice, rather than assuming the launch date applies to every order. 3. **Separate published claims from measurements.** Battery endurance, screen reflections and long-term hinge wear need hands-on evidence. We have not measured them. This brief is useful for dates and confirmed specifications. It is too early for us to give an independent verdict on daily use. For that decision, look for reviews that explain their test conditions and show the device being used. ## Notes Sources checked October 17, 2026 — Apple’s launch announcement, October preorder update and product page. This is an official-information brief. We have not tested an iPhone Duo. --- # Modern Warfare 4 Release Date: Campaign and DMZ Early Access > MW4 launches October 23, 2026. Campaign early access began October 16; DMZ early access starts October 20. Check digital-purchase and Game Pass details. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/modern-warfare-4-release-date-early-access Modern Warfare 4 launches on October 23, 2026. Campaign early access began October 16 for qualifying digital purchases, while DMZ early access is scheduled for October 20. ## Quick answer Campaign access has begun as of October 17. Identify the mode and digital edition on your receipt before choosing a launch countdown. ## The MW4 launch timeline The dates below come from the [October 16 Call of Duty announcement](https://www.callofduty.com/blog/2026/10/call-of-duty-modern-warfare-4-campaign-early-access-live-now). Early access and the full release are separate milestones. | Date in 2026 | What opens | |---|---| | October 16 | Campaign early access for eligible digital pre-orders or pre-purchases. | | October 20 | Scheduled DMZ early access. | | October 23 | Full Modern Warfare 4 release. | ## Who can play the campaign early? The campaign announcement includes both the Standard Digital Edition and Vault Edition. It lists Xbox Series X|S, Xbox on PC, PlayStation 5, Battle.net, Steam and Nintendo Switch 2. Do not assume a physical pre-order has the same entitlement as the digital editions named in that announcement. Check your order receipt for the platform, account and edition. A storefront page showing the general launch date does not, by itself, explain whether your account has early access. ## Is MW4 on Game Pass at launch? No. The [official October 15 launch update](https://www.callofduty.com/blog/2026/10/call-of-duty-intel-modern-warfare-4-launch-xbox-game-pass) says MW4 requires a separate purchase at launch and is planned for Game Pass in Holiday 2027. That is the publisher’s announced window, not a precise calendar date. The same update distinguishes MW4 from older Call of Duty titles available through Game Pass Ultimate. If you are checking whether you already have access, match the exact game title rather than relying on the franchise name. ## A short check before downloading 1. **Pick the mode first.** Campaign, DMZ and the full release have different milestones. 2. **Match your purchase.** Read the edition and platform on your receipt, then compare them with the official access conditions. 3. **Check the current launch notice.** The publisher qualifies access with platform availability, time-zone differences and possible outages. A date alone is not a guarantee of an uninterrupted session. ## What this brief can help you decide It helps you identify the relevant release milestone and check the announced entitlement. We have not tested download sizes, frame rates, server queues or controller behavior. For a performance decision, use evidence that names the actual hardware and test conditions. ## Notes Sources checked October 17, 2026 — the official Call of Duty campaign-access and launch announcements. This is a release-information brief. We have not played or benchmarked the game. --- # MOSS-Image Layout JSON: A Poster Walkthrough > We edited a 768 × 1024 poster layout, checked its JSON against the official compiler, and reopened the saved draft. Download the example and follow the steps. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/moss-image-layout-json-poster Our test was a pottery-event poster: split the heading across two lines, keep the vase in place, and give the event time more room. MOSS-Image’s layout JSON lets us describe those regions separately. Here is the 768 × 1024 draft we edited and what came out of the export. ## Quick answer The workflow: match the canvas to your generation size, give text its own element, enter the exact words, then copy the compiled model prompt. Save the editable draft too: that file keeps the dimensions and lets you revise the composition later. Open the MOSS-Image layout editor → ## The poster brief We used a fictional pottery open-studio event: a large “OPEN STUDIO” heading, a blue ceramic vase in the middle, and “SATURDAY · 10 AM” underneath. Three elements were enough. The vase box reserves space for a subject; the editor does not draw a vase. The useful part of this brief was having three different decisions to make. The heading needed its own line break; the vase needed a large central region; the short event time needed a wider box near the bottom. We kept those as separate elements on a canvas 768 pixels wide and 1024 pixels tall. ## One line break, then a wider footer We started with Poster example. Its heading read OPEN STUDIO on one line. In element 1’s Exact words to render field, we put a line break after OPEN. Then we moved the top edge from 64 to 80 pixels, leaving left 64, right 704, and bottom 224. The preview showed two lines inside that heading region; the vase region stayed where it was. For the event time, we used the numeric edge fields. Element 3 started at left 128 and right 640. Changing those edges to 96 and 672 widened the region from 512 to 576 pixels. We also raised its top and bottom edges by 16 pixels, to 864 and 944. The words SATURDAY · 10 AM and their appearance description stayed the same. That was the useful editing pattern in this run: change the literal words or one box without rewriting the overall scene caption. The preview made the regions easy to inspect, but it could not tell us how the model would fit actual lettering into them. ## Saving something we could return to We kept both downloads. Download prompt saved a 732-byte UTF-8 text file for the generation workflow. Save editable draft saved a 1,045-byte JSON file for continuing the edit. We reopened that draft through the macOS file picker and checked the two-line heading, all three boxes, and the copied prompt. They matched the saved version exactly. To repeat the edit: 1. **Load Poster example at 768 × 1024.** If you change either dimension, choose Apply size before continuing. 2. **Edit element 1.** Enter OPEN, a line break, then STUDIO. Set its edges to left 64, top 80, right 704, bottom 224. 3. **Edit element 3.** Set left 96, top 864, right 672, bottom 944. Leave element 2 unchanged. 4. **Save the draft and export the prompt.** Reopen the draft when you want to change the composition; use the compiled prompt in a compatible generation workflow. The two downloads serve different jobs. The [checked model prompt](https://toolpantry.app/samples/moss-layout/2026-10-17/open-studio-prompt.txt) is the generation input. The [editable draft](https://toolpantry.app/samples/moss-layout/2026-10-17/open-studio-draft.json) includes the canvas dimensions and top-left pixel coordinates for reopening in the editor. Keep the width and height with the prompt when moving to a generation workflow. ## Why the coordinates change on export The editor lets you work from the top-left corner. The model prompt uses the canvas center as its origin, with the vertical edges first. Here is the output from this run: | Element | Editor: left, top, right, bottom | Export: top, left, bottom, right | |---|---|---| | Heading | 64, 80, 704, 224 | −432, −320, −288, 320 | | Vase region | 112, 288, 656, 832 | −224, −272, 320, 272 | | Event time | 96, 864, 672, 944 | 352, −288, 432, 288 | We compared the browser export with the [official compiler at the checked source revision](https://github.com/OpenMOSS/MOSS-Image/blob/c1355e6b1986dfe8fba3c0455783a05899212342/skills/moss-image-prompt-enhancer/scripts/compile_prompt.py). Parsing both outputs produced the same object, including the literal text and coordinates. That checks the prompt format; it does not measure image quality. ## Two mistakes worth catching before generation A size change can be easy to miss. We also doubled the example’s width to 1536 while keeping the height at 1024. Apply size scaled the boxes horizontally. That gives you a wider composition, so inspect the preview again and set that same size in the generation app. An invalid edge should stop export. We tried a left edge beyond the canvas, cleared required text, and entered a width of 1000, which is not divisible by 16. Each case disabled export and displayed a correction. Restore valid values before copying; do not reuse an earlier prompt after changing the draft. ## When this approach helps For this test, separate text fields and saved boxes made revisions easy to follow. The extra work was choosing dimensions and inspecting each region. We would use this workflow for a heading, subject, and small print that need distinct places. For an ordinary scene without placement requirements, a written caption may be simpler. MOSS also provides an official prompt enhancer for people who prefer an agent and a local script. Its [layout format is experimental](https://github.com/OpenMOSS/MOSS-Image/blob/c1355e6b1986dfe8fba3c0455783a05899212342/USERGUIDE.md#layout-prompts-experimental). We have not tested whether the model obeys this poster or renders its words correctly. Run generation in your own compatible workflow, inspect the image, and revise from that result. The boxes are a plan, not a guarantee of exact placement. Working with FLUX instead? Its element table uses a different coordinate system; the [FLUX 3 bounding box generator](https://toolpantry.app/flux-bounding-box-generator) prepares that format. Pasting one model’s layout into the other is not a conversion. ## Notes Tested 17 October 2026 — desktop Chrome on macOS. We checked layout editing, export, and reopening a saved draft. This walkthrough stops before model inference; the screenshot is the editor’s layout preview. --- # PDF Too Large to Upload? How to Shrink It for Any Portal > Portal rejected your PDF for being too large? Three ways to make it smaller — with our measured results on a 3-page scan (-85% at Strong). Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/pdf-too-large-to-upload Portals and forms reject oversized PDFs constantly — 2 MB, 5 MB, 10 MB limits, usually on scans you can't easily re-do. Here's how to get under the line without special software. ## Quick answer Short answer: open toolpantry.app/compress-pdf, pick the file and a level (Balanced to start), and download. In our test, a 3-page scan dropped from 793 KB to 122 KB at Strong — 85% smaller. Nothing gets uploaded. ## The fast fix 1. Open **toolpantry.app/compress-pdf** and choose the rejected file. 2. Pick a level. **Balanced** first; if the portal still complains, redo it at **Strong**. 3. Download and re-submit. Keep the original file on your machine. ## What each level gave us We built a 3-page scan-like PDF — the kind of document upload portals are fussy about — and ran it through the levels. | Level | Result | Readability | |---|---|---| | Strong | **793.4 KB → 122.1 KB (−85%)** | Soft on fine print, fine on screen | | Balanced | **793.4 KB → 319.7 KB (−60%)** | Close to the original | | Light | often little or no gain | Use only if quality is critical | Scans compress beautifully because they're photos of paper. Every level is enough to clear a 2 MB limit in our test — and Strong clears even a 500 KB limit. ## When compression isn't the fix A mostly-text PDF — a bank statement, a lease, a report exported from Word — can actually grow when rasterized, and it loses selectable text in the process. Our compressor says so in plain words when it can't shrink a file; believe it and keep your original. Two better moves for those: - **Only a few pages are heavy?** [Split the PDF](https://toolpantry.app/split-pdf.html) and submit the heavy pages separately, or compress just that part. - **Does the portal accept images?** [Convert the pages to JPG](https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-jpg.html) — often the smaller file already. - **Building the PDF yourself?** Shrink the source photos first with [the image compressor](https://toolpantry.app/index.html), then combine them with [Merge PDF](https://toolpantry.app/merge-pdf.html). ## Common limits, for reference Most job and government portals cap uploads somewhere between 2 MB and 10 MB; email attachments often stop at 25 MB total. Aim a comfortable margin below the stated limit — 10–20% — because some forms re-check after their own processing. ## Notes By the Tool Pantry team, October 2026. Measured with Chrome 130 on a 3-page 793 KB scan PDF; the same tool runs in any browser. ## FAQ **How small can a PDF get?** In our test, a 3-page scan went from 793 KB to 122 KB at the Strong setting — an 85% cut. Scans compress far better than text documents. **Will compressing break my PDF?** The layout survives. What you lose is selectable text — pages become images. Keep the original for anything you still need to copy from or edit. **Is there a file size or privacy catch?** No account, no watermark, no upload. The compression runs in your browser, so the document never leaves your device. **What if it still says the file is too big?** Split the PDF and submit the heaviest pages separately, or convert the pages to JPG if the portal accepts images. Both are linked above. --- # Using Pele to render Mermaid diagrams > A Node.js walkthrough for Pele, with the flowchart we rendered, the Mermaid theme setting it ignored and the fix for saving a standalone SVG. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/pele-mermaid-svg-guide Our first Pele sample was a three-node Mermaid flowchart: Draft → Review → Publish. It rendered in Node.js without opening a browser. When we added a pink-and-green Mermaid theme, the SVG stayed gray. Pele uses its own layout and CSS variables for colors. If you are moving diagrams into a documentation site, check those details before replacing the renderer everywhere. By Tool Pantry · Updated October 18, 2026 ## Get an SVG on disk first [Pele](https://pele.run/) is an MIT-licensed JavaScript library developed for Obsidian. It accepts Mermaid text and returns SVG. The [official playground](https://pele.run/playground) is enough for a quick look; for a documentation build, start with a small local example you can inspect. We used Pele 1.6.0. It requires Node.js 20 or newer and declares no runtime dependencies. Install that version in a project directory: ```bash npm install --save-exact pele@1.6.0 ``` Save this as render-diagram.mjs: ```javascript import { writeFile } from "node:fs/promises"; import { render } from "pele"; const source = `flowchart LR A[Draft] --> B[Review] --> C[Publish]`; const { svg, type, width, height } = render(source); await writeFile("diagram.svg", svg, "utf8"); console.log(type, width, height); ``` Run node render-diagram.mjs. It writes diagram.svg; our run printed flowchart 360 64. This is the SVG it produced: The same source measured 364 × 64 in Chrome. Node used Pele’s built-in text-width estimate, while the browser measured the text with canvas. That small difference is a reason to check the final page with the font you intend to use. ## The Mermaid theme did not carry over We put this directive above the flowchart, expecting pink nodes and green text: ```mermaid %%{init: {"theme":"base","themeVariables":{"primaryColor":"#ff00f1","primaryTextColor":"#00ff01"}}}%% ``` The output was byte-for-byte identical to the SVG without that directive. Pele does not apply Mermaid’s theme or themeVariables colors. The fix is to set Pele’s CSS variables on the inline SVG or its container: ```css .diagram { --pele-bg: #151d2b; --pele-fg: #edf4ff; --pele-line: #cbd8ee; --pele-surface: #26374d; --pele-border: #91abd2; background: var(--pele-bg); padding: 20px; } ``` Changing these colors in our browser experiment did not require another render. An explicit diagram style behaved differently: style A fill:#ff00f1,color:#00ff01 retained its fixed colors. If a node refuses to follow your dark theme, check for a style in the source that overrides it. Fonts need more care than colors because they affect layout. The [theming documentation](https://pele.run/theming) explains how to refresh a mounted diagram after a font change or pass the font to render(). ## Open the exported file on its own Our dark preview looked right inside the page. Loaded through an img, the raw SVG reverted to the default light colors: the file no longer had the page’s CSS variables to inherit. Embedding the five color variables on the SVG root, then adding a background rectangle, kept the dark colors in the standalone image. Both files decoded in Chrome. If you need the downloaded image to look like the preview, the colors and background need to travel with it. Check the saved file before converting it to PNG or adding it to a document. Charts can use additional series colors, and custom fonts or images need separate checks. Our export experiment covered this small flowchart. The existing [SVG to PNG converter](https://toolpantry.app/svg-to-png) is an option once your standalone SVG looks right. ## A few other things to check before switching For one docs maintainer, the appeal was simpler integration. On Hacker News, [9dev reported migrating their project’s diagrams to Pele](https://news.ycombinator.com/item?id=50139527), replacing a mix of Mermaid, pan/zoom and dark-theme workarounds. They linked their documentation in the comment. Another reader, [nkmnz](https://news.ycombinator.com/item?id=50140005), tried a couple of diagrams and “couldn’t see any major differences in the layout.” These are individual reports, not a comparison across many diagrams. The layout caveat has a concrete example. In [issue #3, Spenhouet supplied a shared-store flowchart and SVG comparisons](https://github.com/obsidianmd/pele/issues/3) reporting excess crossings between subgraphs in Pele 1.6.0, along with a proposed fix. We have not rerun that benchmark. It makes a complex fan-in diagram a more useful migration check than our three-node flowchart. A narrow layout can change the diagram’s direction. Our flowchart LR became vertical with maxWidth: 320, going from 360 × 64 to 105 × 256 in Node.js. Set autoDirection: false if the horizontal arrangement matters: ```javascript const result = render(source, { maxWidth: 320, autoDirection: false, }); ``` That version stayed horizontal but was still 336 pixels wide. You may need scaling or scrolling. For a live page, [mount()](https://pele.run/api) handles container resizes; with render(), your application handles them. | In the source | What happened in our test | |---|---| | click with an HTTPS URL | The result’s links array retained the URL. | | click with a JavaScript callback | The diagram rendered, but the callback was not retained. | | A colored HTML span | The text remained; the span and its color style did not. Bold text and a line break became SVG tspan elements. | | ZenUML | Rejected with unsupported-diagram. | Also catch errors from render(). Our unclosed flowchart label passed supports() and then failed to render. The first function checks whether a diagram type is available, not whether the entire source is valid. For an existing docs site, we would try the diagrams with the most styling and interaction first. Those are the examples most likely to expose a migration problem. Keep the original sources and compare their actual outputs against the [compatibility notes](https://pele.run/compatibility). When displaying an error, use textContent; the message can quote source text. Custom icon markup and navigation also need attention, as explained in the [security reference](https://pele.run/security). ## How other projects are using Pele Replacing the renderer is only part of a migration. These projects show the work around it: streamed input, theme changes and exported documents. We checked the linked PRs, source files and project documentation on October 18, 2026. These are source reviews; our own execution results are in the test notes below. ### [Outline: diagrams in documents](https://github.com/outline/outline/pull/14126) The merged PR moves theme colors into CSS variables, keeps rendered SVG in a session cache and gives printing a light palette. Switch themes, revisit a document and open print preview. Those are separate paths through a docs app. ### [Lobe UI: streaming Mermaid](https://github.com/lobehub/lobe-ui/pull/748) The merged PR keeps the last valid SVG while incomplete streamed text fails to parse; reports the real error when streaming ends. A half-written diagram should not replace a readable preview with an error on every chunk. ### [BookStack community module: document exports](https://github.com/felixyman/bookstack-pele/blob/c26548848668db5c117a55ec5856305fdd95393a/pele-render/server.mjs) The community module renders on the server, resolves SVG color variables for export and rasterizes the result to PNG for PDF. Test the exported document. A browser preview alone will not show what a server-side PDF renderer receives. ### [Scotty: diagrams in chat replies](https://github.com/Yeshwanthyk/scotty/pull/293) The merged PR keeps the diagram in an img, writes its palette into the SVG and passes the figure width to the renderer. An SVG image cannot inherit the host page’s variables. Narrow screens also need a layout decision. ### [sphinx-pele: Python documentation](https://github.com/python-project-templates/sphinx-pele) This development extension accepts reStructuredText directives, MyST Mermaid fences and external .mmd files. The reviewed code leaves source text in non-HTML builds. Confirm the output format you need; an HTML extension does not automatically provide rendered PDF diagrams. For an existing app, we would follow the case closest to its output. The BookStack module is relevant to PDF delivery; Lobe UI is relevant to an answer that arrives in chunks. Their performance figures and release availability need separate verification—we have not used these projects as a speed benchmark. ## Test notes We ran 15 inputs with Pele 1.6.0 on Node.js 22.23.1: 13 produced SVG, including our flowchart, sequence, ER and Gantt samples; ZenUML and a malformed flowchart were rejected. Producing SVG did not mean every feature survived, as the callback example shows. The theme and standalone-image checks ran in Chrome. ## Notes Tested October 18, 2026. These were small functional examples, not a complete Mermaid compatibility suite or a speed comparison. Source code and license: [obsidianmd/pele](https://github.com/obsidianmd/pele). --- # How to Reduce Image Size for Email, Discord, and Passport Portals > Which size each service actually wants — email, Discord, passport portals — and our measured numbers shrinking an 843 KB photo to 198 KB. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/reduce-image-size-for-email-discord-passport Email servers, Discord, and passport portals all want different maximum sizes — and none of them explain it well. Here's what each one actually needs, and how to hit the number. ## Quick answer Short answer: think in three targets — under 1 MB for email photos, under 10 MB for Discord (any compressed phone photo clears this), and exactly the stated limit (often 240 KB–2 MB, plus pixel dimensions) for passport and visa portals. Then compress to that number with toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-1mb (or one of the sibling target pages). ## The size each service actually wants | Service | Practical target | Why | |---|---|---| | Email | under 1 MB per photo | 25 MB total cap is common, but large attachments annoy and trigger filters | | Discord | under 10 MB (free tier) | any compressed phone photo clears this easily | | Passport / visa portals | the stated numbers, exactly | often 240 KB–2 MB with fixed pixel sizes; they reject oversize *and* undersize | | Job and school forms | usually 2 MB | leave a 10–20% margin below the stated limit | ## What shrinking actually looks like We took an 843 KB photo (4032×3024) and ran it through our target-size compressor at several ceilings. | Target | Result | |---|---| | 200 KB | **198.4 KB**, 2200×1650 | | 500 KB | **396.1 KB**, 2200×1650 | | 1 MB | 396.1 KB, 2200×1650 | | 2 MB | 396.1 KB, 2200×1650 | | 5 MB | 396.1 KB, 2200×1650 | Two things worth noticing. Above the 500 KB target the tool returns the **same 396 KB file** — it doesn't pad a file to reach your ceiling, it just stops improving once the picture needs no more bytes. And the long edge settles at 2200 px because the tool won't upscale; for a phone photo that's a gentle, honest reduction. For passport-style portals, that resolution is still far above what they ask for (usually 600–900 px squares). ## How to hit an exact number 1. Open the target page that matches your limit — [1 MB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-1mb.html), [2 MB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-2mb.html), [500 KB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-500kb.html), [200 KB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-200kb.html), or [100 KB](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb.html). 2. Drop the image in, keep JPG output, and download. 3. If the portal also states pixel dimensions, check the result's dimensions before uploading — most passport specs are small squares, which the 2200 px output exceeds (safe, since portals usually crop or reject only oversize files, but read their rules). Making the passport photo itself? The [passport photo maker](https://toolpantry.app/passport-photo-maker.html) sizes it to your country's spec, adds eye-line guides, and builds a 4×6 in print sheet with six copies — locally, like everything here. One habit worth keeping: never overwrite your original. Compress a copy, and keep the full-size photo for printing or future requests. ## Notes By the Tool Pantry team, October 2026. Measured with Chrome 130 on an 843 KB, 4032×3024 test image. ## FAQ **What size should an image be for email?** Under 1 MB per photo is the safe habit — attachments usually cap at 25 MB total, but big photos annoy recipients and trigger spam filters more often. **What is Discord's upload limit?** Around 10 MB on the free tier. The same compressed image that works for email will always fit. **What do passport and visa portals want?** Commonly 240 KB to 2 MB, often with pixel dimensions spelled out (for example 600×600). Compress to the stated numbers, not to "as small as possible". **Does reducing size hurt quality?** At target sizes of 500 KB and up, our test photo kept the same quality and resolution. At 200 KB and below the tool reduces gently — on screen it is still fine; for printing, keep a bigger copy. --- # What Your Files Reveal — and How to Strip It Before Sharing > Photos carry your exact location; PDFs carry your name and software. Here's what's hiding in your files — and how to strip it before sharing, with our measured before/after. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/remove-metadata-before-sharing A test photo carried GPS coordinates down to the block. A test PDF carried its author's name and the scanner app. Here's what hides in everyday files — and how to strip it in seconds. ## Quick answer Short answer: photos and PDFs carry hidden metadata — camera, GPS location, author names, software. Our test photo exposed coordinates to within a block; our test PDF exposed a full author name and scanner app. Both tools below show you what's inside and strip it locally: EXIF viewer for photos, PDF metadata remover for PDFs. ## What our test photo revealed We created a photo with the metadata an iPhone writes by default and ran it through the [EXIF viewer](https://toolpantry.app/exif-viewer.html). The camera make and model (Apple, iPhone 15 Pro), the exact capture time, exposure settings, and the software version all came up — expected. The interesting part was the location: **37.77500, −122.41667, altitude 15 m**. That's not "San Francisco" — that's a specific block, precise enough to find a building. Every photo you take with location services on carries this, silently, until something strips it. The clean copy told the same story in reverse: the file went from 8.5 KB to 3.5 KB, and every field — camera, GPS, timestamps — was gone. The image itself looked identical. ## What our test PDF revealed PDFs are quieter about it, but the [PDF metadata remover](https://toolpantry.app/pdf-metadata-remover.html) found six fields in our test document: title, author name, subject, keywords, the creating app, and the producing app (a "SuperSecretScanner v9" we planted for the test). The clean copy came out at 440 bytes with a byte-level search confirming none of the original strings survived — while the page content stayed exactly as it was. ## Where the metadata actually leaks Social platforms mostly save you: Instagram, X, and WhatsApp re-encode uploads and drop metadata along the way. The leaks happen everywhere else — email attachments, Discord file uploads, cloud drive links, USB sticks, and "send me the original" requests. If you're posting something on a marketplace or a forum, remember that a photo taken at home carries the address of the thing you're selling. Job seekers: a PDF's Author field is frequently your full name, and Producer shows the software (or the scanner) you used. ## The two-step habit 1. **Check before you share.** Both tools show the hidden data first — the EXIF viewer displays GPS with a map link, the PDF tool lists every metadata field. Thirty seconds of looking beats a lifetime of "why does this person know where I live". 2. **Share the clean copy, keep the original.** Cleaning is destructive on purpose: the GPS, the author name, and — worth knowing — any AI-source labels are removed. If you ever need the file as evidence, the original is the one that counts. ## When not to strip Two honest cases. Metadata removal is not redaction: if your name is printed on page one of the PDF, cleaning the file won't hide it. And if you're keeping a file as proof — a suspicious image, a document dispute — don't strip it; the metadata *is* the evidence. For the "is this AI-generated?" question specifically, our [AI image checker](https://toolpantry.app/ai-image-checker.html) reads those labels before you decide anything. One gap to name: Word documents carry the same kind of author and edit-history data (Word's own Inspect Document tool can strip it) — we cover photos and PDFs here, and that's the honest scope. ## Notes By the Tool Pantry team, October 2026. Measured with Chrome 155 on macOS using our own tools on an iPhone-style test photo and a generated test PDF. ## FAQ **Does Instagram remove EXIF data?** Most social platforms re-encode uploads and strip metadata, so Instagram, X, and WhatsApp typically do. But email attachments, Discord files, cloud links, and direct transfers keep everything — those are the channels where hidden GPS and names survive. **How do I remove GPS from a photo?** Open the EXIF viewer, add the photo to see its GPS coordinates (with a map link), then press Download clean copy. The tool re-encodes the image once, dropping EXIF, GPS, XMP, and AI tags — locally, nothing uploaded. **How do I remove metadata from a PDF?** The PDF metadata remover shows the title, author, and software tags inside the file, then deletes the Info dictionary and XMP block on download. In our test, the author name vanished at the byte level while the page content stayed identical. **Does removing metadata reduce quality?** For photos, the image is recompressed once at 92% quality — visually identical for sharing. For PDFs, nothing is re-encoded at all: only the metadata structures are deleted, so quality is untouched. --- # How to Scan a Document With Your Phone and Email It > Turn paper into a clean PDF with just your phone camera — then email it without hitting attachment limits. Tested: a 793 KB scan compressed to 122 KB locally. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/scan-and-email-a-document No scanner, no app store, no "please re-send, too large" replies. The three-step workflow — shoot, convert, compress — with the numbers from our own test. ## Quick answer Short answer: photograph the pages flat (or use your phone's built-in scanner), build one PDF with the JPG to PDF tool , then shrink it with the PDF compressor before emailing. Our 3-page scan test: 793 KB → 122 KB (−85%) , compressed locally in the browser. ## Step 1: get clean page images Two routes, both fine. **Built-in scanners** (iPhone: Notes or Files; Android: Google Drive) shoot, crop, and de-skew automatically — best when the page is flat on a dark surface. **Plain photos** work too if you're careful: flat surface, even light, camera directly above the page, no shadow of your hand. Shoot each page at full resolution; you can always shrink later, never un-blur. ## Step 2: build one PDF 1. Open **toolpantry.app/jpg-to-pdf** on the phone. 2. Add the page photos — order them with the arrows if the sequence matters. 3. Press Create PDF. Each page photo becomes one A4 page. A 3-page document takes seconds. If you photographed on the iPhone and the files are HEIC, use [HEIC to PDF](https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-pdf.html) instead — same result, one step fewer. ## Step 3: compress before you send Scans are big because they're photos of paper. Our test document — three scan-style pages, 793.4 KB — came out of the [PDF compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-pdf.html) at **122.1 KB at the Strong setting (−85%)**, with Balanced at 319.7 KB for when you want closer-to-original quality. The trade-off, stated honestly: compressed pages become images — the text stops being selectable — and text-heavy documents that were never scans can actually grow. The tool says so when it can't help. ## The email math, once more Attachments travel base64-encoded — about 35% bigger on the wire — so Gmail's 25 MB limit is really about **18 MB of file**. A compressed scan is nowhere near that; an uncompressed 30-page photo scan absolutely is. If a portal (not email) is the destination, its limits are often 2 MB or even 240 KB — the [file size limits reference](https://toolpantry.app/file-size-limits.html) has the full table, and the [Gmail guide](https://toolpantry.app/blog/gmail-attachment-limit-25mb) covers the email side in depth. ## The honest parts Three things to know. Phone scans of *text* documents look great but aren't OCR — the PDF won't be searchable, and if you need selectable text you'll need a scanning app with OCR, which is a different tool class we deliberately don't fake. Compression with Strong settings softens fine print — for legal documents, keep the original alongside the compressed copy. And for anything with your ID or signature on it: every tool in this workflow runs locally, so the scan never touches a server — which is precisely why it's the right workflow for exactly those documents. ## Notes By the Tool Pantry team, October 2026. Measured with Chrome 155 on macOS on a 3-page scan-style PDF; the same tools run in Safari on iPhone and Chrome on Android. ## FAQ **How do I scan a document with my phone?** Use your phone's built-in scanner (iPhone Notes or Files, Android Google Drive), or just photograph the page flat in good light and convert the photos to PDF with our JPG to PDF tool. The built-in scanners correct perspective; a plain photo needs to be taken straight-on. **Why is my scanned PDF so large?** Scanners and phone cameras store pages as high-resolution images, and image-heavy PDFs are big by nature. Our 3-page scan test started at 793 KB; after local compression it was 122 KB — an 85% cut — while staying perfectly readable on screen. **Will the scan fit in an email attachment?** Email limits apply after base64 encoding (about 35% inflation), so Gmail's 25 MB is really ~18 MB of file. Most compressed scans are far smaller; if yours isn't, compress it before attaching — the PDF compressor runs locally. **Are my documents uploaded anywhere?** Not with our tools — the compression and PDF building run in your browser tab. That matters for scanned IDs, contracts, and medical papers, which is exactly the kind of paper people need to scan. --- # How to Send a Video on WhatsApp Without Destroying the Quality > WhatsApp re-compresses your videos into mush — unless they already match its profile. Our measured fix: a 17.7 MB clip came out at 7.90 MB (720p) or 1.78 MB (480p), compressed locally in about two seconds. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/send-video-on-whatsapp-hd You sent a crisp clip; it arrived as mush. The fix is to hand WhatsApp a file that already matches its own output — here's the walkthrough, with our measured numbers. ## Quick answer Short answer: pre-compress the video yourself before sending. In our test, a 12-second 1080p clip (17.7 MB) came out at 7.90 MB at 720p or 1.78 MB at 480p — in about two seconds, on our own machine. WhatsApp re-compresses anything heavier than its own profile; a file that already fits tends to pass through untouched. ## Why WhatsApp turns video into mush WhatsApp targets small files, fast. When your video doesn't match its output profile, it re-encodes the whole thing on a compressed timeline — and that fast encode is what you see: blocky motion, smeared faces, washed-out detail. The file that arrives is a re-encode of a re-encode, which is why "HD" clips can look worse than a 480p file you prepared yourself. ## What we measured We took a 12-second 1920×1080 clip (17.7 MB, 12.4 Mbps — a normal phone recording) and ran it through our [video compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-video.html) twice. | Setting | Result | Video bitrate | Time | |---|---|---|---| | 720p, half size | **17.7 MB → 7.90 MB (−55%)** | ~5.6 Mbps | ~1.6 s | | 480p, tight (2 MB) | **17.7 MB → 1.78 MB (−90%)** | ~1.2 Mbps | ~1.6 s | Two notes from the numbers. First, both encodes ran in about two seconds — that's hardware-accelerated encoding on the device, no 30 MB download and no upload queue. Second, the 480p file at ~1.2 Mbps is a very safe bet for passing through WhatsApp untouched; the 720p file is sharper and usually fine, but heavier. ## How to do it 1. **Open toolpantry.app/compress-video** on the phone or computer and add the clip. 2. **Pick your profile.** For quality: 720p with the "half" target. For the safest pass-through: 480p with the tight 2 MB target. (Sending a long video that's too large outright? The tool also has WhatsApp — under 64 MB / 100 MB targets — see our companion guide [Compress a video for WhatsApp](https://toolpantry.app/blog/compress-video-for-whatsapp) for the size-limit math.) 3. **Send the output.** WhatsApp will accept it immediately — and mostly leave it alone. ## The honest part WhatsApp doesn't publish its exact re-encode threshold, and it varies by version and connection. We can't promise your file will never be touched — but if it is, it's being re-encoded from an already-good 720p master instead of a 4K monster, which is exactly why the result looks better. Two companions worth knowing: if the video is simply too large to send, our [WhatsApp size-limits guide](https://toolpantry.app/blog/compress-video-for-whatsapp) covers the 64 MB and 100 MB targets; and if you only need the sound, skip the video entirely and pull the audio with [video to MP3](https://toolpantry.app/video-to-mp3.html) — voice notes and podcasts travel far better as audio. For a loopable snippet instead of a video, [video to GIF](https://toolpantry.app/video-to-gif.html) makes a small, ugly-cute alternative. ## Notes By the Tool Pantry team, October 2026. Measured with Chrome 155 on macOS on a 1920×1080 12-second clip — the kind of file a phone records every day. WhatsApp behavior varies by app version; the strategy below is the robust part. ## FAQ **Why does WhatsApp ruin video quality?** WhatsApp re-encodes anything that doesn't match its own output profile — typically 720p or lower at a modest bitrate. That fast re-encode is what turns crisp footage into mush. If your file already fits the profile, it tends to pass through untouched. **What is WhatsApp's video size limit?** As of 2026 the app accepts videos up to 64–100 MB depending on your connection (the older 16 MB ceiling still applies to status in many versions). The real problem is not the size limit but the re-compression. **Does WhatsApp's HD toggle fix it?** Partly — HD sends a less-crushed version, but WhatsApp still re-encodes. Pre-compressing the file yourself to 720p (or 480p) at a modest bitrate gives the app much less to ruin. **Is my video uploaded to this tool?** No. The compression runs entirely in your browser using your device's own media pipeline. The video never leaves your phone or computer. --- # SSC, UPSC, IBPS Photo & Signature Sizes 2026 — and How to Hit Them Locally > SSC, UPSC, IBPS, RRB photo and signature requirements for 2026 — the exact KB limits and pixel sizes, plus a local workflow that hits them without uploading your documents anywhere. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/ssc-upsc-photo-signature-size-2026 Sarkari exam forms reject photos and signatures that miss the exact KB window — sometimes for being too big, sometimes for being too small. Here are the 2026 specs and a local workflow that hits them. ## Quick answer Short answer: SSC and most bank forms want a 200×230 px photo at 20–50 KB and a 140×60 px signature at 10–20 KB , both JPG. Crop to the right ratio, then compress to the exact KB with our 50 KB and 20 KB tools — locally, so your documents never leave your device. In our test, an 823 KB phone photo compressed to 49.8 KB . ## The specs, exam by exam | Exam | Photo | Signature | |---|---|---| | SSC (CGL / CHSL / MTS / GD) | 200×230 px · JPG · 20–50 KB | 140×60 px · JPG · 10–20 KB | | RRB (NTPC / Group D / ALP) | 200×230 px · JPG · 15–40 KB | 140×60 px · JPG · 10–30 KB | | IBPS / SBI (PO / Clerk) | 200×230 px · JPG · up to 50 KB | 140×60 px · JPG · up to 20 KB | | UPSC (CSE and others) | 350–1000 px · JPG · 20–300 KB · face ≈75% | 140×60 px · JPG · 20–300 KB | | CTET / JEE / NEET | 200×230 px · JPG · 10–100 KB | 140×60 px · JPG · 4–30 KB | Two things the table can't show. First, most boards also enforce a *minimum* — a 5 KB photo gets rejected just like a 500 KB one. Second, the dimension windows matter: UPSC in particular checks the pixel range and how much of the frame the face fills. ## Why portals reject perfectly good photos - **Too big** — a phone photo is 3–8 MB; the window is 20–50 KB. This is the common case, and it's a compression problem. - **Too small** — aggressive WhatsApp forwarding can drop a photo under the minimum. Re-export from the original. - **Wrong format** — PNG screenshots named ".jpg". The portal checks the actual file, not the name. - **Wrong crop** — full-body shots, tilted scans, or signatures with half the page of white space around them. ## The local workflow (photo and signature) 1. **Crop to the ratio.** For the photo, a head-and-shoulders crop close to 4:5 (use [Crop image](https://toolpantry.app/crop-image.html) with the ratio locked). For the signature, crop tight to the ink — white space is wasted KB. 2. **Compress to the exact KB.** The [50 KB tool](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-50kb.html) for photos (or 20 KB for RRB), the [20 KB tool](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-20kb.html) for signatures. The compressor keeps the largest dimensions that fit under the cap — in our test, an 823 KB photo landed at 49.8 KB. 3. **Check and upload.** The result panel shows the final size; if the portal wants a minimum too, a bigger quality target (100 KB tool) gives you headroom. ## Documents (certificates, marksheets, ID) Most forms want supporting documents as PDFs with their own limits — often 200–500 KB per document, occasionally 2 MB. Two tools cover it: merge photos or scans into one PDF with [JPG to PDF](https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-pdf.html), then shrink the result with [Compress PDF](https://toolpantry.app/compress-pdf.html) (our 3-page scan test: 793 KB → 122 KB). Both run locally — worth remembering when the document in question is your ID. ## The honest parts Specs change between cycles and sometimes between regions — treat the table as a checklist to verify, not gospel. Our tools handle KB limits precisely and the ratio crop; if your portal also validates exact pixel dimensions and rejects the upload, set the exact pixels in your phone's built-in editor first, then compress here. And a privacy note: every tool linked in this guide runs in your browser — your photo, signature, and ID scans are never uploaded to a server, ours or anyone's. That matters more for identity documents than for almost anything else you'll put online. ## Notes By the Tool Pantry team, October 2026. Specs compiled from published notification patterns for the 2026 cycle; our compression numbers measured with Chrome 155 on macOS. Boards change limits between cycles — always verify against the current official notification before submitting. ## FAQ **What is the photo size for SSC forms?** For most SSC forms (CGL, CHSL, MTS): a recent photo at 200×230 pixels, JPG, between 20 KB and 50 KB. The signature is 140×60 pixels, JPG, 10–20 KB. Always re-check the current notification — boards do change limits. **What is the signature size for SSC and IBPS?** SSC: 10–20 KB at roughly 140×60 px. IBPS and SBI: up to 20 KB, same 140×60 px. Sign in black ink on plain white paper, and keep the crop tight — empty space wastes your KB budget. **How do I compress a photo to exactly 50 KB?** Use the target-size compressor set to 50 KB: add the photo and it lands under the cap, keeping the largest dimensions that fit. In our test, an 823 KB photo came out at 49.8 KB. **Do the pixel dimensions matter too?** Often yes — several portals validate exact dimensions. Crop to the required ratio first (the standard photo ratio is close to 4:5), and if your portal enforces exact pixels, set them in your phone's editor before compressing. This guide's tools handle the KB limits precisely. --- # Streamer Awards 2026: Voting Dates & Show Time (PT/ET) > Voting runs Oct 16–31, 2026. The Nov 12 show starts at 5:30 PM PT / 8:30 PM ET. Check US time zones, the official voting site and calendar start times. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/streamer-awards-2026-voting-date-time The Streamer Awards lists public voting for October 16–31, 2026, and the main show for November 12 at 5:30 p.m. Pacific. Check the converted date below: for some viewers, the show starts on November 13. ## Quick answer Voting: October 16–31, 2026. The announcement does not give a closing hour or time zone. Main show: Thursday, November 12 at 5:30 PM Pacific / 8:30 PM Eastern. Open the official voting site → See all four US time zones ↓ ## Voting dates and the official voting page Use [The Streamer Awards website](https://thestreamerawards.com/) to vote. QTCinderella’s [official Twitch announcement](https://tw.blog.twitch.tv/en/2026/08/31/how-to-apply-for-the-2026-streamer-awards/) lists the public voting window as October 16–31, 2026. The nomination window ended October 2, so nomination instructions and current voting are different stages. The announcement gives October 31 as the final voting date but does not state a closing hour or time zone. We cannot give an exact cutoff countdown from that information. Follow the current voting page if it adds a more precise deadline, and avoid leaving your vote until the last possible hour. ## US start times on November 12 | US time zone | Red carpet | Main show | |---|---|---| | Pacific | 2:30 PM PST | 5:30 PM PST | | Mountain | 3:30 PM MST | 6:30 PM MST | | Central | 4:30 PM CST | 7:30 PM CST | | Eastern | 5:30 PM EST | 8:30 PM EST | ## Convert the show to your time zone The table shows UTC. Enable JavaScript to convert it to another time zone. | Event | Start in UTC | |---|---| | Red carpet | Thursday, November 12, 2026 at 10:30 PM UTC | | Main show | Friday, November 13, 2026 at 1:30 AM UTC | [Save both start times (.ics)](https://toolpantry.app/downloads/streamer-awards-2026-start-times.ics)[Open the official awards site →](https://thestreamerawards.com/) The download contains two start-time markers. It does not set an end time or notification, and it is not a live calendar subscription. Import the file, check the calendar’s displayed time zone and set any reminder there. If the organizer changes the schedule, update your saved entries. ## The organizer’s Pacific schedule The same announcement lists November 12 at 2:30 p.m. Pacific for the red carpet and 5:30 p.m. Pacific for the main show. We converted those times using America/Los_Angeles for that date. The show falls on November 13 in UTC and several other time zones; selecting a different zone changes the displayed date as well as the clock time. For your own event, the [time-zone meeting planner](https://toolpantry.app/timezone-meeting-planner) lets you compare cities. The [2026 US and UK clock-change guide](https://toolpantry.app/blog/daylight-saving-time-ends-2026) explains why the offset can change between dates. ## What this page verifies We checked the organizer’s published schedule, tested the time selector and validated the calendar’s timestamps and file structure. We have not imported the file into every calendar app. This is an independent planning guide, not the voting service or an official live player. Recheck the organizer’s site before the event. ## Notes Schedule rechecked October 18, 2026 against the organizer’s Twitch announcement. Independent guide; use the official site to vote. ## FAQ **When does Streamer Awards 2026 voting close?** The published final date is October 31, 2026. The organizer’s announcement gives no exact hour or time zone, so this guide does not provide a cutoff countdown. **Is the voting deadline the same as the show time?** No. Voting is listed for October 16–31. The show is scheduled for November 12 at 5:30 PM Pacific / 8:30 PM Eastern. --- # Tesla Flying Car: Roadster Demo, Options and Open Questions > What the Tesla flying-car headlines refer to, what Tesla's Roadster page confirms, and which delivery and everyday-use details still need evidence. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/tesla-flying-car-roadster-facts The Tesla flying-car headlines concern a Roadster demonstration. AP reported brief airborne movements on October 16, 2026; its account is evidence about an event, rather than a customer’s daily trip. ## Quick answer Three questions, three kinds of evidence: What was demonstrated? Which configuration is described? What can a customer actually receive and use? Keep those questions separate when reading a flying-car headline. ## What happened at the demonstration? [AP’s October 16 report](https://apnews.com/article/7d5f19665435b7408025bfb7a2f2f0b7) describes Tesla showing the Roadster at an event the previous evening. Its account includes a suction system and short movements in the air. We treat that as reporting about a demonstration, rather than our own verification of the engineering or its performance. For a reader trying to understand the headline, the useful distinction is between a vehicle leaving the ground briefly and a vehicle taking you from one place to another through the air. Evidence for the first claim does not, by itself, settle the second. ## What does Tesla’s own page confirm? The text we could verify on [Tesla’s official Roadster page](https://www.tesla.com/roadster) calls the Thrust augment an optional upgrade. A separate footnote limits the feature it marks to the Rocket trim and says it is unavailable in some regions. Those qualifications matter: a claim about one option should not be applied to every car bearing the Roadster name. | Question | Evidence in this check | |---|---| | What did the event show? | AP reports brief airborne movements. We did not independently test them. | | Is the option universal? | Tesla’s page specifies an optional upgrade and a regional qualification. | | What will a buyer receive? | We have not verified a delivery commitment for a specific configuration. | ## How to check the next claim you see 1. **Find the original footage.** Check whether it shows the complete maneuver, its setting and what happens before and after it. A short clip answers a narrower question than a full demonstration. 2. **Match the configuration.** Look for the trim, option and region attached to the claim. Keep those details alongside any quoted number. 3. **Check what the document promises.** A demonstration, a reservation page and an order agreement provide different information. Use the document that answers your actual question. ## What this brief leaves open We are not publishing a flight duration, range, retail price or delivery date here because this source check did not establish those details for a customer vehicle. That is a limit of this brief, not a claim that no such information exists elsewhere. For now, the useful answer is specific: there is reporting about an airborne Roadster demonstration, and Tesla’s page carries option and region qualifications. A broader claim about daily transport needs broader evidence. ## Notes Sources checked October 17, 2026, at 03:25 UTC — Tesla’s Roadster page and AP’s October 16 event report. This is a source check, not a vehicle test. We did not attend the demonstration or independently measure the car’s performance. --- # The Diplomat Season 4 Rotten Tomatoes Score, Explained > A dated check of The Diplomat Season 4: 100% from 14 critic reviews and 73% audience approval on October 17, plus what those Rotten Tomatoes numbers mean. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/the-diplomat-season-4-rotten-tomatoes-score The Diplomat Season 4 showed a 100% Tomatometer from 14 critic reviews and a 73% Popcornmeter with fewer than 50 audience ratings when we checked Rotten Tomatoes on October 17, 2026. These are two different approval measures, and both can change as reviews arrive. ## Quick answer 100% is the share of positive critic reviews, not a 10-out-of-10 average rating. Read it with the review count and the season number. For the latest figure, open the linked Season 4 page rather than relying on an undated screenshot. ## The score snapshot These figures came from the [Season 4 page on Rotten Tomatoes](https://www.rottentomatoes.com/tv/the_diplomat/s04), checked at 03:25 UTC on October 17. They are a dated record, not an automatically updating score feed. | Measure | What the page showed | |---|---| | Tomatometer | 100%, from 14 critic reviews. | | Popcornmeter | 73%, with fewer than 50 audience ratings. | | Scope | The Diplomat, Season 4. Not an individual episode or the combined series. | The counts are part of the answer. A percentage based on 14 reviews describes a smaller body of opinion than the same percentage after many more reviews. The audience count is a range, so we cannot recover an exact number of positive votes from the displayed percentage. ## Why 100% does not mean every critic gave it full marks In [Rotten Tomatoes’ own explanation](https://www.rottentomatoes.com/about), the Tomatometer measures the proportion of professional reviews classified as positive. It does not average the numerical grades into a percentage. A positive review can still contain reservations. The Popcornmeter comes from audience ratings, a separate pool of responses. The site counts ratings of at least 3.5 out of 5 as positive for that measure. The two headline percentages therefore tell you about different groups; neither is a forecast of how much you personally will enjoy the show. ## Where to watch Season 4 [Netflix’s October 15 announcement](https://www.netflix.com/tudum/articles/the-diplomat-season-4-release-date-photos-news) says all 8 episodes are streaming. Netflix’s [season-launch article](https://about.netflix.com/en/news/celebrating-the-diplomat-season-4-around-the-world) also confirms the October 15 debut and identifies Netflix as the platform. Check the title inside your own Netflix account for access in your country. We have not tested playback across countries or plans. The linked announcement includes story details, so use it cautiously if you are avoiding spoilers. ## If two pages show different numbers 1. **Check the season.** A series page, Season 4 page and episode page can show different measures. 2. **Check the count and date.** Search summaries and screenshots can preserve an earlier snapshot. 3. **Open the source page.** Use its current percentage and sample size together. During this check, the search result still showed 9 critic reviews while the live page showed 14. We used the live page for the table above. This brief helps interpret the figures; it does not replace reading a few reviews whose preferences you understand. ## Notes Sources checked October 17, 2026, at 03:25 UTC — the live Rotten Tomatoes Season 4 page, Rotten Tomatoes’ score definitions and Netflix’s season announcement. This is a spoiler-free information brief, not our review of the season. --- # How to Trim a Video Without Re-Encoding (Stream Copy, Explained) > Cutting a video usually means re-encoding it — slow, and one generation of quality loss. Stream copy skips both: our 6-second test trimmed to 4 seconds in under a second, pixel-identical. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/trim-video-without-re-encoding Most "trimmers" re-encode your whole video just to cut ten seconds — slow, and a little quality gone each time. Stream copy does the cut as a copy operation. Here's how it works and where it bites back. ## Quick answer Short answer: use the video trimmer — it copies the original compressed data instead of re-encoding. Our test: a 6-second 2.3 MB clip trimmed to 4 seconds in under a second , output pixel-identical, 1.56 MB. The trade-off: the cut snaps to the nearest keyframe, and the tool tells you exactly where it landed. ## Two ways to cut a video **Re-encode ("export")** is what most editors and online trimmers do: every frame is decoded, filtered, and compressed again. It's precise to the frame — and it costs you minutes of processing plus one generation of quality loss. Do it five times and you've re-compressed the video five times. **Stream copy** does what the name says: the compressed frames and audio samples are copied, in order, into a fresh container, and the timestamps are rewritten. No pixels are touched. A trim becomes a file-copy job that finishes in seconds — our 6-second test cut to 4 seconds in well under a second of processing. ## The keyframe trade-off Compressed video isn't a stack of independent pictures. It's periodic full frames (keyframes) followed by frames that describe only what changed. A player can only start cleanly at a keyframe — so a stream-copy cut must begin at the nearest keyframe at or before your chosen point. On typical phone and camera footage, keyframes land every 1–2 seconds, so your clip may start up to that much early. Our test clip was generated with a single keyframe at the very start, which is the worst case: asking for a cut at 1.0 s produced a clip starting at 0.07 s. Real footage behaves better — and the tool always reports the actual start it used, so there's no mystery. ## When to use which | Job | Stream copy (video trimmer) | Re-encode (compress video) | |---|---|---| | Cut seconds off a clip | **Ideal — instant, lossless** | Works, slower | | Frame-exact start | Snaps to keyframe | **Ideal** | | Make the file smaller | Only removes what you cut | **Ideal — changes bitrate** | | Format conversion | MP4 out only | MP4 out (input: MP4/MOV) | ## Good to know The rebuilt file carries no metadata — trimmed clips come out clean, which is quietly useful before sharing. Audio is cut at frame granularity (about 23 ms), close enough to feel exact. And if you need a loop or a sound clip instead, [Video to GIF](https://toolpantry.app/video-to-gif.html) and [Video to MP3](https://toolpantry.app/video-to-mp3.html) take the same files — all three run locally in the browser, so a private video gets trimmed without ever touching a server. ## Notes By the Tool Pantry team, October 2026. Measured with Chrome 155 on macOS on a 1280×720 H.264 clip; output verified as valid H.264 + AAC MP4. ## FAQ **What does 'trimming without re-encoding' mean?** It means copying the original compressed video and audio data into a new file instead of decoding and re-compressing it. The result is pixel-identical to the source, and it takes seconds instead of minutes because no heavy processing happens. **Why does the clip start at a slightly different time than I picked?** Compressed video is built from keyframes: only keyframes can start playback cleanly. A stream-copy cut snaps to the nearest keyframe at or before your start point — usually within a second or two on normal footage. The tool shows the exact start it used. **When should I re-encode instead?** When you need a frame-exact cut, a smaller file, or a different format. Re-encoding (our video compressor does it) processes every frame — slower and slightly lossy, but it can start exactly where you asked. **Is my video uploaded?** No. The trim happens in your browser tab — the file is demuxed and rebuilt locally, and nothing is sent to a server. --- # Video Too Large to Send? Shrink It for Discord, Email, and Portals > Your video is too big to send — Discord wants 10 MB, email 25 MB. Our measured fix: a 17.7 MB iPhone-style clip became 8.39 MB in about two seconds, locally in the browser. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/video-too-large-to-send Phones shoot video at high quality and chat apps cap uploads at 10 MB. Here's the fix — and our measured numbers shrinking an iPhone-style clip locally in the browser. ## Quick answer Short answer: open the video compressor , pick your target (Discord 10 MB, email 25 MB, or half size) and 720p, and press Compress. In our test, a 17.7 MB 1080p clip became 8.39 MB in about two seconds — re-encoded on our own machine, nothing uploaded. ## Why phone videos refuse to send Your phone records at high bitrates on purpose — that's where the quality comes from. A typical 1080p30 clip runs 8–12 Mbps, about **90 MB per minute**; 4K60 can pass **400 MB per minute**. Meanwhile the destinations keep their doors small: Discord's free tier stops at 10 MB, most email providers cap attachments at 25 MB, and government portals often ask for 2 MB. The gap is real, and "record worse" is not a fix. ## What we measured We built a test clip that behaves like a phone recording — 12 seconds, 1920×1080, 17.7 MB — and ran it through the compressor twice. | Scenario | Settings | Result | Time | |---|---|---|---| | Discord | 10 MB target, 720p | **17.7 MB → 8.39 MB (−53%)** | ~2 s | | Email | 25 MB target, keep 1080p | **17.7 MB → 15.54 MB (−12%)** | ~2 s | Two details worth noticing. The Discord run didn't just squeeze quality — it also dropped the resolution to 1280×720, which is where most of the savings live. And the email run shows the tool won't waste bits: with a generous 25 MB budget it kept 1080p and only trimmed the bitrate, landing comfortably under Gmail's attachment line. Both encodes ran at roughly real-time ×6 — that's hardware-accelerated encoding, the same silicon your video calls use. ## How to do it 1. **Open toolpantry.app/compress-video** and add the MP4 or MOV (iPhone videos work, including HEVC). 2. **Pick a target** — Discord 10 MB, email 25 MB, half size, or the tight 2 MB — and a resolution. 720p is the sweet spot for chat; keep 1080p when the recipient will watch on a TV. 3. **Press Compress and check the result.** The tool shows the plan (resolution and bitrate) before you commit, then the exact output size. Keep your original; the compressed copy is a new file. ## When this isn't the fix If the destination accepts a link, uploading to Drive or iCloud and sharing the link beats any compression — zero quality loss. If the video is for archival, don't compress it at all. And if your file is WebM or MKV, the tool will tell you it can't read it yet — remux to MP4 first. One more honest note: re-encoding always costs *something*; check the output before deleting the original. For everything that only needs the sound, there's [video to MP3](https://toolpantry.app/video-to-mp3.html) — and if you want a loopable snippet instead, [video to GIF](https://toolpantry.app/video-to-gif.html) handles the trim. ## Notes By the Tool Pantry team, October 2026. Measured with Chrome 155 on macOS (M-series) on a 12-second 1920×1080 clip at 12.4 Mbps — the kind of file an iPhone records every day. ## FAQ **Why is my iPhone video so big?** Phones record at high bitrates for quality: a typical 1080p30 clip runs about 8–12 Mbps — roughly 90 MB per minute — and 4K60 can pass 400 MB per minute. That is what makes chat apps and email refuse it. **How do I compress a video to under 10 MB?** Open the compress video tool, pick the Discord (10 MB) target and 720p resolution, and press Compress. In our test a 17.7 MB clip came out at 8.39 MB in about two seconds, encoded locally in the browser. **Does compressing lose quality?** The picture is re-encoded, so yes in principle — but dropping 1080p to 720p at a good bitrate is usually invisible on a phone screen. What you lose first is fine detail in fast motion. Keep the original for archiving. **Does it work on iPhone?** The tool runs in Safari 17+ and works, but big videos are a better job for a computer — decoding a long clip loads it fully into memory. On a phone, keep clips short. --- # Where to Watch Tracker Season 4 in the US: CBS and Paramount+ > Tracker Season 4 airs Sundays on CBS. Compare live viewing with Paramount+ Premium and next-day streaming on either plan, with official links and dated details. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/where-to-watch-tracker-season-4 In the US, Tracker Season 4 airs on CBS, with a regular Sunday slot at 9 p.m. ET/PT. Paramount+ Premium includes the live local CBS feed; both Premium and Essential offer new episodes on demand the following day. ## Quick answer Live CBS access and next-day episodes are separate options. Start with the season and episode you want, then compare when each plan makes it available. ## The US viewing options Paramount+ explains the live and on-demand distinction in its [official guide to watching CBS](https://www.paramountplus.com/sneak-peak/how-to-watch-cbs-shows-on-paramount-plus/). A title being available on a streaming service does not mean every plan includes the live channel. | Option | How new episodes are offered | |---|---| | Your local CBS station | During the scheduled broadcast. Check the local TV listing and your reception or provider access. | | Paramount+ Essential | On demand beginning the day after the CBS broadcast. | | Paramount+ Premium | The local CBS live feed, plus next-day on-demand viewing. | ## When does Season 4 air? The [official CBS fall schedule](https://www.paramountplus.com/sneak-peak/cbs-fall-2026-schedule/) lists the season premiere on October 4, 2026, at 9:30 p.m. ET, followed by the regular Sunday 9–10 p.m. ET/PT slot beginning October 11. A premiere time and a regular slot can differ. Use the [current CBS schedule](https://www.cbs.com/schedule/) for a particular Sunday and station. The regular slot is a planning reference; it does not replace the local listing. ## Check that you have opened the right season The [CBS Season 4 episode guide](https://www.cbs.com/shows/tracker/episodes/4/) provides a useful cross-check without reading plot descriptions: | Episode | Listed US air date | |---|---| | 1 — Safe Harbor | October 4, 2026 | | 2 — Switchback | October 11, 2026 | This is a dated check of the first two entries, not a complete season schedule. If you are browsing a service’s search results, inspect the season selector before assuming a result includes the newest episodes. ## Before choosing a subscription 1. **Check the country.** This guide covers the US offering. We have not verified the same season or rights in other countries. 2. **Check live versus catch-up.** Confirm whether the plan description includes the local CBS feed or next-day episodes. 3. **Open the episode list.** Verify that the season and episode you want are listed in your account before making a purchase decision. We have left subscription prices out of this brief because offers and billing conditions can change. Use the current service page for the total price and renewal terms. The linked CBS episode page contains synopses, so avoid expanding them if you want to stay spoiler-free. ## Notes Sources checked October 17, 2026 — CBS’s episode guide and Paramount+’s official viewing and fall-schedule guides. This is a US viewing-information brief, not our review of the season. We have not tested playback across plans, devices or countries. --- # Why AI Images Are So Big — and How to Shrink Them > AI generators hand you 1–4 MB PNGs because PNG is lossless. We measured what happens when you convert: our detailed test image dropped 54% as JPG, 58% as WebP. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/why-ai-images-are-big Generators hand you lossless PNGs full of detail — beautiful, and heavy. Here's what we measured converting them, and how to hit any upload limit. ## Quick answer Short answer: AI tools default to PNG because it's lossless, and lossless is big. Convert to JPG or WebP and the file typically drops by half to nine-tenths: our detailed 1.13 MB test PNG came out at 524 KB as JPG and 477 KB as WebP. Use the target-size compressor and pick your limit. ## Why generators pick PNG PNG stores every pixel exactly — no approximation, no artifacts. For an image editor's working file that's the right call, and it's also why a generated image survives any amount of re-saving without degrading. The cost is size: PNG has no way to say "this area is nearly uniform," so fine texture, gradients, and film-grain effects that generators love all pay full price. A 1024×1024 output commonly lands between 1 and 4 MB. Midjourney's JPEGs are smaller; DALL·E-style downloads and most local generators (ComfyUI, Automatic1111) give you PNG. ## What we measured Two test images, both 1024×1024, run through our target-size compressor — one JPG pass, one WebP pass, no resizing. | Test image | PNG | → JPG | → WebP | |---|---|---|---| | Detail-heavy render | 1.13 MB | **524 KB (−54%)** | **477 KB (−58%)** | | Smooth illustration | 318 KB | **74 KB (−77%)** | **34 KB (−89%)** | Two things worth noticing. The smoother the image, the bigger the win — flat color and soft gradients crush down to almost nothing. And the detail-heavy test is close to the worst case for any compressor: dense texture is hard for both formats, so if your render behaves worse than the table, that's why. Nothing in the test lost visible quality at 100% zoom. ## How to shrink an AI image 1. **Know your limit** — Discord's free tier takes 10 MB, email attachments usually 25 MB total, and portals are the strict ones (often 240 KB–2 MB). 2. **Compress to the number** — open the [target-size compressor](https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-1mb.html), pick the limit and JPG or WebP, download. It lowers quality gently, and only reduces dimensions if it has to. 3. **Prefer WebP for the web, JPG for the printer** — WebP wins on size for almost every sharing case; JPG is the safest format for print shops and old software. If you're converting a batch for a site, [JPG to WebP](https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-webp.html) keeps a quality slider in view so you can watch the size move. ## When not to convert Two cases. If you'll keep editing — layered work, further upscaling — keep the PNG; every JPG re-save costs a little quality, and starting from lossless is the clean path. And if you're keeping the file as *evidence*: converting strips the metadata, including the AI-source labels and Content Credentials that prove how the image was made. Our [AI image checker](https://toolpantry.app/ai-image-checker.html) reads those labels — check the original first, and keep it. Converting a copy for sharing is fine; converting your only copy isn't. ## What about resizing? If the destination doesn't need 1024 pixels — a forum avatar, a chat sticker — shrinking the dimensions beats squeezing quality. The target-size compressor only resizes when it can't hit your limit otherwise, which is the right order: dimensions first hurt, quality second. And don't upscale an AI image to make it "better" — upscaling adds no detail and doubles the file. Our [image upscaler](https://toolpantry.app/image-upscaler.html) says the same thing on its own page, with the receipts. ## Notes By the Tool Pantry team, October 2026. Measured with Chrome 130 on macOS using our own tools on two 1024×1024 test images — a detail-heavy render and a smooth illustration. ## FAQ **Why are AI-generated images so large?** Most generators output PNG, which is lossless — every pixel is stored exactly, and AI images are full of fine detail that compresses poorly. A 1024×1024 AI image often lands between 1 and 4 MB. **Does converting an AI image to JPG lose quality?** One high-quality re-encode (92%) is visually identical for sharing. What you lose is the metadata — including any AI-source label. Keep the original PNG if you need the file as evidence. **How do I make an AI image smaller for Discord or a portal?** Run it through a target-size compressor: pick the limit (500 KB, 1 MB), choose JPG or WebP, and download. Our detailed test image went from 1.13 MB to 477 KB as WebP without resizing. **Should I upscale or resize an AI image instead?** Resize down when the destination doesn't need the pixels. Upscaling never recovers detail and doubles file size — only do it for print targets that genuinely need more resolution. --- # Why Are My iPhone Photos HEIC? (And When to Convert Them) > HEIC is the iPhone's default photo format for a reason — and it's also why Windows and upload forms complain. What it is, why it exists, and when to convert. Source: https://toolpantry.app/blog/why-are-my-iphone-photos-heic Apple has saved photos as HEIC since iOS 11 — smaller files, better color. It's also why your Windows PC and half the upload forms you use complain. Here's the whole story, short. ## Quick answer Short answer: HEIC is Apple's default because it stores the same photo at roughly 20–30% less size than JPG. Keep it for your own storage; convert to JPG (or PNG) when sending photos to Windows, older apps, or upload portals that reject .heic. ## What HEIC actually is HEIC is a container — like a box — holding an image compressed with HEVC, the same codec family that makes 4K video manageable. Apple switched the iPhone camera to it in 2017 (iOS 11), and the reasons were practical: about half the storage for the same visual quality, better color depth, and room for extras like Live Photo motion in the same file. On an iPhone, everything works. The trouble starts the moment the photo leaves the garden: Windows needs a separate codec to even preview it, plenty of older apps refuse it, and upload portals — job applications, school forms, visa sites — very often list .heic as unsupported. ## The size argument, with our numbers We took one 1440×2200 image and saved it both ways. As HEIC it weighed 165.6 KB. As a JPG at 85% quality — the usual "looks identical" setting — 212 KB. Same picture, about 22% smaller in HEIC. On real camera photos with more detail, the gap is often wider; that's the storage win Apple is after. Flip it around and you get the compatibility cost: converting to JPG usually makes the file bigger, not smaller. If you're converting to fit an upload limit, drop the JPG quality — at 60% our test image came out at 146.9 KB, and on a screen you'd struggle to tell. ## Your three options, honestly ranked 1. **Keep HEIC, convert on demand.** Best storage, zero downside until something can't open the file — then convert that one photo with [HEIC to JPG](https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-jpg.html) (a browser tool, nothing to install). 2. **Switch the camera to Most Compatible.** Settings → Camera → Formats. Photos become JPGs everywhere, forever. The cost: your camera roll takes noticeably more space. 3. **Convert everything after the fact.** The worst option — you keep two copies of everything and manage neither well. Don't do this one. ## When to convert, in one line each - Sending to a Windows PC or older Android: convert to JPG, 85%. - Editing in Photoshop or a lossless pipeline: [HEIC to PNG](https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-png.html). - Submitting to a portal that caps size: convert at 60–75%. - Keeping your own archive: leave HEIC alone. It's the master copy. On a Mac, use the [Finder and Preview conversion steps](https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-convert-heic-to-jpg-on-mac) to make JPEG copies. The guide explains one-file conversion, batch export and what to check in the output. For the walkthrough on a PC specifically — including why you can skip the Microsoft Store codec — see [HEIC to JPG on Windows](https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-convert-heic-to-jpg-on-windows.html). ## Notes By the Tool Pantry team, October 2026. Size comparison measured on a 1440×2200 test image: 165.6 KB as HEIC, 212.0 KB as JPG at 85% quality. ## FAQ **Is HEIC better than JPG?** For storage and image quality per byte, yes. For compatibility, no. Same photo, roughly 20–30% smaller as HEIC in our test — but plenty of apps and forms still can't open it. **Does converting to JPG lose quality?** Slightly — JPG is a lossy format. At 85% quality it is essentially invisible in normal viewing. Keep the original HEIC as your master copy. **Can I make my iPhone save JPGs instead?** Yes: Settings → Camera → Formats → Most Compatible. The cost is storage — photos take noticeably more space, which is the reason Apple switched to HEIC in the first place. **Why won't Windows open my photos?** Windows needs the HEIF Image Extensions codec to decode HEIC. The Microsoft Store offers it, sometimes for a small fee. A browser converter avoids the install entirely. --- # AI Game Art Pipeline — From Prompt to Runtime-Safe Assets > A production pipeline for AI-generated game art: sprite atlases with frame manifests, chroma-key cleanup, map generation, audio, and the QA that makes assets runtime-safe. Source: https://toolpantry.app/gamedev/ai-game-art-pipeline ## About Marketing images need to look good. Game assets need to load : alpha edges that key cleanly, anchors that line up frame to frame, and manifests the engine can trust. Here is the pipeline we run for every sprite, map, and sound in our games. ## Quick answer The one rule: pick the pipeline by the runtime job, not by the model. A walk cycle, an icon, a parallax background, and a boss cinematic each need a different generation-and-cleanup path — and every path ends in deterministic post-processing, not vibes. ## Pipeline by runtime job | Job | Pipeline | |---|---| | Props, items, FX icons | Image model + style refs + background removal | | Combat animation | Keyframe-first: pose → row strip → frame extraction → atlas | | Walk / run / body motion | Video motion reference → frame extraction (skeleton rigs only when cleanup is acceptable) | | Ambient loops | Video generation → looping frame sequence | | Cinematic moments | Full-screen video → frames → code-driven timing in the engine | | Level backgrounds | Master-first painting → outpainting chains → parallax layers | ## The sprite atlas pipeline, step by step 1. **Base identity first.** Before any animation, lock one canonical image of the character or object. Every later frame must match it — that single constraint kills 80% of "why does frame 3 look like a different creature". 2. **Per-state row strips.** Generate each animation state as one horizontal strip on a solid chroma background — not individual frames, which drift. A strip keeps pose, scale, and style consistent by construction. 3. **Deterministic cleanup.** Chroma-key the background, then *connected-component extraction* finds each frame's actual bounds. This is what fixes the classic AI-art problem: frames that bleed into each other or carry halos. 4. **Atlas + manifest.** Frames are packed into one texture, and the engine gets a frame_layout manifest: cell coordinates, anchors, durations. The game reads the manifest — it never guesses where a frame lives. 5. **QA before shipping.** The pipeline renders a contact sheet and asserts: frame count matches the request, no frame touches the atlas edge, alpha survives at game scale. A mismatch fails the build. ## Maps and backgrounds Level art inverts the sprite problem: it needs *less* precision per element and more compositional control. Our approach is master-first: generate one full painting at high resolution as the ground truth, then derive parallax layers by outpainting and slicing. Tilemaps are generated against a strict palette and grid — the engine owns collision and walkability, art never does. This split is why our maps ship without "invisible wall" bugs: gameplay geometry is data, not pixels. ## Audio and cinematics Audio follows the same philosophy: generated, then measured. Loudness normalized to game targets, loop points verified sample-accurate, and format-converted per platform (compressed for size, uncompressed for low-latency SFX). Cinematic ultimates are the most demanding job in the whole pipeline: a generated video is sliced into a frame sequence with code-driven timing — hit pause, shake, and flash are engine code, not baked into the video, so they feel instant and stay tunable. ## What still needs a human - **Acceptance, not generation.** Technical checks pass far more often than aesthetic ones. "Does this slime belong in this village?" is a human verdict, every time. - **Style locks.** Once a style reference set exists, agents can generate a hundred consistent assets. Choosing the reference — that's taste. - **Cuts.** Half the pipeline's value is making bad directions cheap to discover. Killing an asset at step 2 costs cents; at step 5 it costs days. ## Start small If you want to try this on your own game: pick one vertical slice — a single character, one animation state, one map corner — and take it all the way to runtime with a manifest. The pipeline reveals its own problems at that scale, for a few dollars, before you commit to a full art pass. ## FAQ **Which image models work for this?** The pipeline is provider-neutral: any image or video model that can hold a style reference works. What matters is the deterministic post-processing — chroma-keying, connected-component extraction, atlas packing — which runs locally and doesn't care where the pixels came from. **Why not just generate single frames?** Single frames drift: scale, lighting, and style change between generations. Row strips keep a whole animation consistent in one generation, and frame extraction guarantees each cell is exactly one frame. **How long does a character take?** With the pipeline in place: under an hour for a full animation set, including QA. Without it, days of manual cleanup — the difference is the deterministic middle, not the model. --- # The Evidence System — QA That Keeps AI Game Dev Honest > The evidence system we use to keep AI game development honest: runtime recordings, same-state captures, source-bound audits, and acceptance gates. How to verify what an agent claims it built. Source: https://toolpantry.app/gamedev/evidence-system-game-qa ## About AI agents can build fast — and they can also say "done" when a feature merely compiles. This is the verification system we run to keep every claim in our games tied to something you can watch: recordings of the real build, before/after captures of the same state, and audits bound to exact code revisions. ## Quick answer Why this exists: in agent-driven development, the cheapest sentence is "it works." The evidence system makes that sentence expensive: every accepted feature must ship with a runtime recording, a same-state comparison, and a source-bound audit — or it stays in the "unproven" column of the status board. ## The failure mode this fixes Here is how AI game development quietly rots: an agent implements a feature, runs the tests it wrote itself, declares success, and moves on. Three days later the save system breaks on a path nobody recorded. The code looked right. The tests passed. The claim was never true — it was just unfalsified. Our answer borrows from industrial QA rather than from unit testing: **the unit of verification is a recording of the running game, not a green checkmark.** ## Rule 1: no claim without runtime evidence Every feature that counts as done leaves behind a real-time capture — an uncut recording of an actual build, walking the exact path the feature claims to support. Not a screenshot from a good day; the whole interaction. When we say "the dispatch decision loop works on a 844×390 phone," there is a 20-second video where you can watch it: units leave, production pauses, rewards wait at the guild. This single rule changes agent behavior more than any prompt: an agent that knows it must produce a watchable recording stops cutting corners you would have caught a week later. ## Rule 2: same-state before/after captures For UI and behavior changes, before/after screenshots must be taken from the *same state* — same save, same screen, same viewport — or they prove nothing. "It looks better now" is meaningless if the before-picture was a fresh game and the after-picture was mid-progress. | What same-state captures catch | What loose screenshots miss | |---|---| | Layout drift at other viewport sizes | Everything outside the one screenshot | | State-dependent rendering (locked/affordable/exhausted) | Only the "happy path" state | | Regressions in adjacent UI sharing the component | Anything the author wasn't looking at | In practice this means: freeze the state, capture every phone size (320 → 430px, plus large-type mode), then change, then capture again. The diff review is mechanical — which is exactly why it works at agent scale. ## Rule 3: source-bound audits Evidence without a revision is a rumor. Every accepted batch gets an audit that ties its recordings and captures to an exact source revision — a hash, a commit, a manifest. If the code moves afterward, the old evidence doesn't silently bless it; the batch is re-verified or the claim is withdrawn. This is also what makes handoff possible: a reviewer can check that the build they're looking at is provably the code that produced the evidence. ## The content lifecycle (from our own pipeline) Every piece of content — event, feature, asset — moves through explicit states, and nothing skips a step: | State | Meaning | |---|---| | drafted | Written/generated | | validated | References and numbers check out | | integrated | Loads in the runtime | | rendered | Appears in a real render pass with layout assertions | | runtime-seen | Reached through the normal player entry point and rendered | | manually-played | A human walked the main branches | | accepted | Passed the chapter's quality gate | This is why our status boards can say "305 events render clean, and the 20-hour content claim is not yet accepted" in the same breath — the states are separate, and the pipeline refuses to blur them. ## Regression across the whole surface Any accepted system is frozen as a baseline: its interfaces can't change without a contract update. Every new batch re-runs the regression suite across all phone viewports and both type modes, and scans for engine errors and leaks. The suites are boring by design — their job is to catch the thousandth small break, not to be interesting. ## What this system still misses (honest section) - **Fun.** Nothing here measures whether the game is enjoyable. Evidence proves behavior, not delight. - **Feel.** Animation timing and game juice pass all technical checks while still feeling wrong; only a human notices. - **Novel exploits.** Suites verify known paths; players invent new ones. Simulation catches some; playtesting catches the rest. That's why the evidence system is a floor, not a ceiling: it guarantees nothing ships *broken*, and leaves the judgment of *good* where it belongs — with humans. ## How to start small 1. **Pick one feature** — something with a visible flow, like a menu → action → result. 2. **Record it once, uncut** — a real-time capture of the actual build, not a retimed screencast. 3. **Freeze a before/after pair** — same state, two phone sizes. 4. **Bind it to a revision** — even a filename with the commit hash beats nothing. That's the whole system in miniature. Everything else — lifecycle states, regression baselines, audits — is this pattern scaled up. Try it on your next feature; the first regression you catch will pay for the habit. ## FAQ **Isn't recording every feature too slow?** It's faster than debugging blind. A 20-second recording takes less time to produce than writing a thorough test suite — and unlike tests, it can't pass while the game is visibly broken. The slow part is doing it after skipping it. **Can agents review the evidence themselves?** Partly — agents can watch recordings, compare captures, and flag diffs mechanically. That's most of the volume. Human review concentrates on taste and edge cases, which is exactly where human time is worth spending. **Does this replace unit tests?** No — they're layers. Unit tests verify logic in isolation; the evidence system verifies the running game. AI-generated code benefits from both, because passing tests is cheap to fake accidentally and recording a working game is not. --- # How We Build Games with AI Agents (Production Pipeline) > The complete pipeline we use to build real games with AI agent teams: art generation, Godot implementation, QA evidence trails — and why vibe-coded demos are not shipping games. Source: https://toolpantry.app/gamedev/how-we-build-games-with-ai-agents ## About Two real games, one production pipeline: generated art with frame-perfect manifests, contract-driven implementation in Godot, and QA that records evidence for every claim. Here is how it actually works — and where it still breaks. ## Quick answer The short version: agents generate art, write and test code, and collect runtime evidence at a scale one developer cannot match. Humans keep three jobs: deciding what to build, judging what feels good, and accepting what ships. Everything else is pipeline. ## Demos are not games — the gap this pipeline exists to close In 2026, generating a playable prototype takes an afternoon. The industry data shows exactly that: roughly 20% of Steam Next Fest entries now declare generative-AI use, and vibe coding helped push **181,000 mobile games** to market in six months. But release counts and hit counts moved in opposite directions — the games earning real revenue barely grew. The gap is not generation. It is everything after generation: does the UI read on a 390-pixel phone? Does the economy hold for twenty hours? Does the boss fight feel like a fight? Our answer is a pipeline built around one rule: *no claim without runtime evidence*. ## Case study 1: Linjiang Chronicles — a 305-event life simulation *Linjiang Chronicles* (一纸青云·临江志) is a premium ancient-life simulation for iPhone, built in Godot 4.6. The numbers at its current development stage: **305 events, 711 choices, 20 endings, 12 characters, 8 chapters**, plus sixteen relationship and investigation lines. It is a reading-first game — decisions, materials, consequences — with a paper-and-vermilion UI built for one-handed phone play. The part that makes this possible: every content branch is simulated headlessly. A balance run walks the full event graph and reports where the economy breaks, where a chapter can dead-end, and how many minutes of genuine content each route holds. When a design claims "twenty hours of content", the pipeline either proves it or flags it. Ours is currently flagged: at least twenty hours of effective single-run content is *not yet accepted* — the honest state of the project. ## Case study 2: Moonlit Kingdom — an idle RPG on its way to iOS *Moonlit Kingdom* (月光王国) is an idle RPG about rebuilding a village with heroes and slimes. It is further along the delivery chain: touch-first landscape layouts at 780×360 through 932×430, expedition and dispatch systems, save-state continuity across restarts, and an iOS Xcode project pipeline with source-bound delivery manifests. For an idle game, "feels right" lives in tiny details: does the production counter tick when you expect, does the return animation land before the reward toast, does a restart mid-expedition keep the right state. Each of those got its own recorded verification — a real-time capture of the actual build, reviewed frame by frame, before the feature counted as done. ## The pipeline, layer by layer ### 1. Art that ships in a runtime (not pretty pictures) Game art fails differently from marketing art: it needs alpha edges that survive chroma-keying, anchors that line up across animation frames, and file sizes a phone can load. Our sprite pipeline goes: base identity first → per-state row strips → deterministic background removal → connected-component frame extraction → atlas composition with a frame_layout manifest the engine reads directly. If the manifest and the atlas disagree, the build fails — by design. ### 2. Implementation under contract Features are not "asks"; they are contracts with scope, acceptance criteria, and frozen baselines. An agent that changes the dispatch system must prove the other pages still behave — the pipeline runs regression suites over every phone viewport size and flags any drift. This is the unglamorous discipline that separates a shipping game from a demo: *frozen interfaces and evidence for every change*. ### 3. QA that records instead of asserting Every accepted feature leaves behind: a same-state before/after capture, a real-time runtime recording, and a source-bound audit tying the evidence to an exact revision. Reviewers (human or agent) watch the recording, not the promise. When something regresses, the evidence trail shows which change did it. ### 4. Audio and cinematics Ambience, SFX, and voice use generated audio with the same rule: files are validated for loudness, loop points, and runtime format before entering the build. Cinematic moments use video-to-frames pipelines — generated video is sliced into engine-ready frame sequences with code-driven timing, not shipped as a video blob the engine can't control. ## Where humans still matter - **Taste.** Agents can make a UI readable; they cannot decide it feels right. Every "this is fun" verdict is human. - **Cuts.** The strongest pipeline output of a week is often a decision to kill a feature. Agents rarely propose killing their own work; humans must. - **Media acceptance.** Generated art passes technical checks far more often than aesthetic ones. The acceptance bar for "this character belongs in this world" stays human. ## What this costs Running this pipeline costs API calls, not salaries. A content-heavy simulation like Linjiang Chronicles spends most of its budget on generation and verification loops, not on writing code. The trade is explicit: more compute, fewer people — and more discipline required, because a pipeline without contracts and evidence just produces faster chaos. ## Follow the build This lab publishes the pipeline as it evolves — including failures, cut features, and cost breakdowns. Next up: a deep dive into the sprite atlas pipeline with real manifests, and the full QA loop for the dispatch system. The games will be playable here before anywhere else. ## FAQ **What tools do you use?** Godot 4.6 for the games themselves; image, video, and audio generation models for assets; and a contract-and-evidence workflow (documented in these articles) to keep agent output verifiable. The art and QA approaches are provider-neutral — they work with any generation backend. **Can a solo developer copy this pipeline?** Yes, and it scales down: the core ideas are (1) generate the smallest vertical slice, (2) freeze interfaces once accepted, (3) require runtime evidence for every claim. The upcoming sprite-pipeline article walks through the exact steps. **Is AI doing all the work?** No. Agents do the volume work — generation, implementation, regression testing, evidence collection. Humans own direction, taste, and final acceptance. The honest split is roughly: agents build what you specify; you are responsible for specifying something worth building. --- # AI Game Lab — Real Games Built by AI Agents > Real games built by AI agent teams — two production games, the pipelines behind them, and honest guides. No 'one prompt, one demo' hype. Source: https://toolpantry.app/gamedev/ ## Tools and resources (216) ### Images & design - **Compress images** — Make files lighter for websites, email, and stores. (https://toolpantry.app/image-compressor.md) - **Resize images** — Set a max width, height, or a social media preset. (https://toolpantry.app/image-compressor.md) - **Convert formats** — Turn PNGs into WebP, JPGs into PNGs, and more. (https://toolpantry.app/image-compressor.md) - **Crop for social** — Fill exact Open Graph, LinkedIn, Instagram, or YouTube sizes. (https://toolpantry.app/image-compressor.md) - **Make a favicon** — Turn a logo or image into a clean square icon in seconds. (https://toolpantry.app/image-compressor.md) - **Clean image data** — Re-encode a file locally to remove embedded metadata. (https://toolpantry.app/image-compressor.md) - **Image info** — Check dimensions, aspect ratio, format, and file size instantly. (https://toolpantry.app/image-info.md) - **Color palette** — Pull a useful six-color palette from any image. (https://toolpantry.app/image-palette.md) - **Color blindness simulator** — Preview common color-vision differences before you publish a design. (https://toolpantry.app/color-blindness-simulator.md) - **Color converter** — Translate HEX, RGB, HSL, and CMYK values with a live swatch and contrast hint. (https://toolpantry.app/color-converter.md) - **Image to Base64** — Turn a small image into a copyable data URI for HTML and CSS. (https://toolpantry.app/image-to-base64.md) - **Blur & pixelate** — Hide faces, names, and sensitive details before sharing. (https://toolpantry.app/image-blur.md) - **Split image grid** — Cut a photo into evenly sized tiles for social posts. (https://toolpantry.app/image-splitter.md) - **Add a watermark** — Place a light text mark on a photo and download a PNG. (https://toolpantry.app/image-watermark.md) - **Add text to photo** — Drag styled text onto any photo — no watermark, no upload. (https://toolpantry.app/add-text-to-photo.md) - **Pick image colors** — Sample exact HEX, RGB, and HSL values from any pixel. (https://toolpantry.app/image-color-picker.md) - **DPI calculator** — Convert pixel dimensions into print inches and centimeters. (https://toolpantry.app/image-dpi-calculator.md) - **Black & white** — Make a clean grayscale photo with adjustable contrast. (https://toolpantry.app/image-grayscale.md) - **Rotate image** — Turn or flip a photo 90°, 180°, or 270° locally. (https://toolpantry.app/rotate-image.md) - **Crop image** — Cut any area or lock a 1:1, 4:3, or 16:9 ratio. (https://toolpantry.app/crop-image.md) - **Passport photo maker** — Country sizes, eye-line guides, and a 4×6 in print sheet — all local. (https://toolpantry.app/passport-photo-maker.md) - **Image upscaler** — Enlarge 2×–4× with a classic resampler — no AI, no upload. (https://toolpantry.app/image-upscaler.md) - **Signature maker** — Draw or clean up a photo — transparent PNG for any document. (https://toolpantry.app/signature-maker.md) - **Bulk image resizer** — Resize a whole batch at once — download everything as one ZIP. (https://toolpantry.app/bulk-image-resizer.md) - **AI image checker** — Scan metadata for AI generator signatures and Content Credentials. (https://toolpantry.app/ai-image-checker.md) - **EXIF viewer** — See camera, GPS, and AI tags — then download a clean copy. (https://toolpantry.app/exif-viewer.md) - **Face blur** — Auto-detect or box faces and blur them — locally. (https://toolpantry.app/face-blur.md) - **Aspect ratio calculator** — Find a simplified ratio and calculate the missing image dimension. (https://toolpantry.app/aspect-ratio-calculator.md) - **Compress to 100KB** — Hit a file-size limit for forms, uploads, and email. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb.md) - **Compress to 20KB** — Extreme target size for ID photos and legacy forms. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-20kb.md) - **Compress to 50KB** — Check a 50,000-byte ceiling and any required pixel dimensions. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-50kb.md) - **Compress to 200KB** — Check bytes, required pixels and the preview before uploading. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-200kb.md) - **Compress to 500KB** — CMS and email-sized images with near-original quality. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-500kb.md) - **Compress to 1MB** — The universal upload line — get any photo under it. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-1mb.md) - **Compress to 2MB** — Job, visa, and portal caps with quality intact. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-2mb.md) - **Compress to 5MB** — Print labs and looser portal limits, handled locally. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-5mb.md) ### Utilities - **JSON formatter** — Format, validate, minify, and copy JSON locally. (https://toolpantry.app/json-formatter.md) - **UTM link builder** — Create campaign tracking URLs for analytics. (https://toolpantry.app/utm-builder.md) - **Password generator** — Make a random password without sending it anywhere. (https://toolpantry.app/password-generator.md) - **QR code generator** — Create a static QR code for a URL, text, email, or phone. (https://toolpantry.app/qr-code-generator.md) - **Time calculator** — Calculate hours, breaks, decimal time, and overnight shifts. (https://toolpantry.app/time-duration-calculator.md) - **Online timer & stopwatch** — Run a precise countdown or stopwatch with presets, pause, laps, and fullscreen. (https://toolpantry.app/online-timer.md) - **Percentage calculator** — Calculate percent of, percent change, increases, decreases, and reverse values. (https://toolpantry.app/percentage-calculator.md) - **Unit converter** — Convert length, mass, temperature, area, volume, speed, time, and data locally. (https://toolpantry.app/unit-converter.md) - **Scientific calculator** — Evaluate trigonometry, logarithms, powers, roots, and factorials locally. (https://toolpantry.app/scientific-calculator.md) - **Mortgage calculator** — Estimate payment, interest, taxes, insurance, PMI, HOA, and payoff time locally. (https://toolpantry.app/mortgage-calculator.md) - **Age calculator** — Find exact years, months, days, total days, and your next birthday locally. (https://toolpantry.app/age-calculator.md) - **Fraction calculator** — Add, subtract, multiply, divide, and compare fractions with reduced answers and working. (https://toolpantry.app/fraction-calculator.md) - **Tip calculator** — Calculate tip, tax, group total, round-up, and each person's share locally. (https://toolpantry.app/tip-calculator.md) - **GPA calculator** — Calculate weighted, unweighted, semester, and cumulative GPA from course credits locally. (https://toolpantry.app/gpa-calculator.md) - **Discount calculator** — Find sale price, savings, stacked discounts, sales tax, and checkout total locally. (https://toolpantry.app/discount-calculator.md) - **Loan calculator** — Estimate fixed-rate payment, total interest, payoff time, extra-payment savings, and amortization locally. (https://toolpantry.app/loan-calculator.md) - **BMI calculator** — Calculate adult BMI in metric or imperial units with category and healthy-weight range. (https://toolpantry.app/bmi-calculator.md) - **Number to words** — Spell out numbers and currency amounts for checks, invoices, contracts, and receipts. (https://toolpantry.app/number-to-words.md) - **Random number generator** — Generate batches with ranges, decimals, unique values, sorting, and copy-ready results. (https://toolpantry.app/random-number-generator.md) - **Time zone meeting planner** — Convert meeting times across cities and find shared working-hour windows with DST-aware local calculations. (https://toolpantry.app/timezone-meeting-planner.md) - **Roman numeral converter** — Convert integers and validate standard Roman numerals with subtractive notation and visible breakdowns. (https://toolpantry.app/roman-numeral-converter.md) - **Random name picker** — Draw winners without repeats, shuffle a list, or split people into balanced teams locally. (https://toolpantry.app/random-name-picker.md) - **Typing speed test** — Measure net and gross WPM, accuracy, errors, and characters per minute with local practice passages. (https://toolpantry.app/typing-test.md) - **Fancy text generator** — Turn plain text into bold, cursive, bubble, gothic, fullwidth, and other copy-ready Unicode styles. (https://toolpantry.app/fancy-text-generator.md) - **Lorem Ipsum generator** — Generate placeholder copy by paragraphs, sentences, words, or characters with plain, HTML, Markdown, and JSON output. (https://toolpantry.app/lorem-ipsum-generator.md) - **YouTube thumbnail downloader** — Preview and save maxres, HD, standard, medium, and default thumbnails from a YouTube URL or video ID. (https://toolpantry.app/youtube-thumbnail-downloader.md) - **EMI calculator** — Estimate monthly EMI, total interest, amortization, and the impact of monthly or one-time prepayments locally. (https://toolpantry.app/emi-calculator.md) - **Barcode generator** — Create Code 128, Code 39, EAN-13, or UPC labels. (https://toolpantry.app/barcode-generator.md) - **Invoice generator** — Calculate line items and print a simple invoice or PDF. (https://toolpantry.app/invoice-generator.md) - **Word counter** — Count words, characters, sentences, and reading time. (https://toolpantry.app/text-counter.md) - **Token counter** — Exact GPT token counts (o200k/cl100k) + Claude and Gemini estimates. (https://toolpantry.app/token-counter.md) - **Meta tag generator** — Create SEO, Open Graph, and Twitter card tags. (https://toolpantry.app/meta-tag-generator.md) - **World clock** — Check the current time in cities around the world. (https://toolpantry.app/world-clock.md) ### Developer - **UUID generator** — Generate v4 UUIDs in batches and copy or download them. (https://toolpantry.app/uuid-generator.md) - **Check API (docs)** — Free keyless API: score any site’s AI readiness, bulk up to 6. (https://toolpantry.app/api-docs.md) - **JWT decoder** — Inspect JWT header and payload claims locally without verification. (https://toolpantry.app/jwt-decoder.md) - **URL encoder / decoder** — Encode query values or decode URL text without sending it anywhere. (https://toolpantry.app/url-encoder-decoder.md) - **JSON ↔ CSV converter** — Convert arrays and tabular data locally, with quoted CSV support. (https://toolpantry.app/json-csv-converter.md) - **Regex tester** — Test JavaScript patterns, flags, captures, and replacements. (https://toolpantry.app/regex-tester.md) - **SHA hash generator** — Create SHA-256, SHA-384, or SHA-512 hashes from text locally. (https://toolpantry.app/hash-generator.md) - **Zip & unzip** — Create or open ZIP archives in your browser — no upload, no cap. (https://toolpantry.app/zip-tool.md) - **XML formatter** — Validate and pretty-print XML with readable indentation. (https://toolpantry.app/xml-formatter.md) - **Markdown preview** — Render headings, lists, links, and code into clean HTML locally. (https://toolpantry.app/markdown-preview.md) - **Cron expression tool** — Parse five-field cron syntax and see the next scheduled runs. (https://toolpantry.app/cron-expression-tool.md) - **IPv4 subnet calculator** — Calculate network ranges, masks, broadcasts, and usable hosts. (https://toolpantry.app/subnet-calculator.md) ### PDF - **JPG to PDF** — Combine JPG or PNG images into a clean, ordered PDF. (https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-pdf.md) - **PNG to PDF** — One PNG per page, transparency flattened onto white. (https://toolpantry.app/png-to-pdf.md) - **Merge PDF** — Join multiple PDF files in a chosen order directly in your browser. (https://toolpantry.app/merge-pdf.md) - **PDF metadata remover** — See title, author, and scanner tags — then strip them clean. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf-metadata-remover.md) - **Delete PDF pages** — Type page numbers or ranges and download the trimmed PDF. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf-page-delete.md) - **Rotate PDF pages** — Turn one page or all of them — click a thumbnail, save. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf-rotate.md) - **Watermark PDF** — Stamp text on every page — centered or tiled, live preview. (https://toolpantry.app/watermark-pdf.md) - **Fill PDF forms** — Type into form fields and save — no printing, no sign-up. (https://toolpantry.app/fill-pdf-forms.md) - **Text to Speech** — Read any text aloud with your device's voices — no upload. (https://toolpantry.app/text-to-speech.md) - **Image to SVG** — Trace JPG or PNG into real vector paths — local. (https://toolpantry.app/image-to-svg.md) - **Resume Builder** — Live preview, ATS-friendly PDF — draft stays local. (https://toolpantry.app/resume-builder.md) - **PDF to Word** — Editable .docx from any text PDF — local, no upload. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-word.md) - **LLM Token Calculator** — Real token counts + API cost across GPT, Claude, Gemini. (https://toolpantry.app/llm-token-calculator.md) - **Speech to Text** — Live dictation with automatic punctuation — in your browser. (https://toolpantry.app/speech-to-text.md) - **Text Chunker** — RAG-ready token-exact chunks + JSONL export. (https://toolpantry.app/text-chunker.md) - **MCP Config Generator** — Wire MCP servers into Claude Desktop, Cursor, VS Code. (https://toolpantry.app/mcp-config-generator.md) - **AI Background Remover** — On-device AI cutouts — transparent PNG, no upload. (https://toolpantry.app/background-remover.md) - **OCR — Image to Text** — Extract text from screenshots & scans, fully local. (https://toolpantry.app/ocr.md) - **AI Image Detector** — Check C2PA & metadata for AI-generation markers. (https://toolpantry.app/ai-image-detector.md) - **Document Scanner** — Photo → straightened scan → multi-page PDF. (https://toolpantry.app/document-scanner.md) - **PDF to text** — Copy or download the words with page markers. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-text.md) - **Extract PDF pages** — Keep selected pages from a PDF and download a smaller document. (https://toolpantry.app/extract-pdf-pages.md) - **YAML ↔ JSON converter** — Convert configuration data locally without uploading secrets. (https://toolpantry.app/yaml-json-converter.md) - **SQL formatter** — Turn dense SQL into readable clauses and indentation in your browser. (https://toolpantry.app/sql-formatter.md) - **XML ↔ JSON converter** — Move API payloads while keeping attributes and repeated elements visible. (https://toolpantry.app/xml-json-converter.md) - **Code minifier** — Minify JSON, HTML, CSS, or JavaScript locally before you ship. (https://toolpantry.app/minify-tool.md) - **HTML / CSS formatter** — Pretty-print HTML, CSS, or JavaScript with readable indentation in your browser. (https://toolpantry.app/html-formatter.md) - **CSS unit converter** — Convert PX, REM, and EM values, batch-rewrite CSS pixels, and build clamp(). (https://toolpantry.app/css-unit-converter.md) - **Split PDF** — Turn every PDF page into a separate local PDF download. (https://toolpantry.app/split-pdf.md) - **Rotate PDF** — Turn every page by 90, 180, or 270 degrees in your browser. (https://toolpantry.app/rotate-pdf.md) - **PDF to JPG** — Turn every page into a shareable JPG or PNG image. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-jpg.md) - **PDF to PNG** — Render PDF pages as PNG at your chosen resolution. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-png.md) - **Sign PDF** — Draw, type, or upload a signature — locally, no upload. (https://toolpantry.app/sign-pdf.md) - **Compress PDF** — Shrink scans and image-heavy PDFs to fit upload limits. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-pdf.md) ### Creator - **MOSS Image Layout Editor** — Place text and subjects, then export centered layout JSON for MOSS-Image. (https://toolpantry.app/moss-image-layout-editor.md) - **FLUX 3 Bounding Box Generator** — Draw a layout, describe each element, and export a prompt with precise coordinates. (https://toolpantry.app/flux-bounding-box-generator.md) - **Social media sizes** — Check Instagram, TikTok, YouTube, Facebook, LinkedIn, and Pinterest dimensions. (https://toolpantry.app/social-media-size-guide.md) - **Screen recorder** — Record screen, window, or tab in the browser — nothing uploaded. (https://toolpantry.app/screen-recorder.md) - **Photo collage** — Grid layouts, gaps, and social-ready sizes — watermark-free. (https://toolpantry.app/photo-collage.md) - **Images to GIF** — Animate a set of images into a looping GIF locally. (https://toolpantry.app/images-to-gif.md) - **Hashtag generator** — Build a transparent starter set for YouTube, TikTok, or Instagram. (https://toolpantry.app/hashtag-generator.md) - **YouTube tag generator** — Build, review, and copy a focused comma-separated tag list within a visible character budget. (https://toolpantry.app/youtube-tag-generator.md) - **Email signature generator** — Create a clean inline HTML signature for Gmail, Outlook, Apple Mail, or Thunderbird. (https://toolpantry.app/email-signature-generator.md) - **CSS gradient generator** — Build linear, radial, or conic backgrounds and copy the CSS locally. (https://toolpantry.app/css-gradient-generator.md) - **Meme generator** — Add classic captions to an image and download a clean PNG without a watermark. (https://toolpantry.app/meme-generator.md) - **Open Graph image** — Create a 1200×630 social sharing image and copy starter meta tags. (https://toolpantry.app/og-image-generator.md) - **SERP preview** — Preview an SEO title, URL, and description with local character and pixel checks. (https://toolpantry.app/serp-preview.md) - **SVG to PNG** — Rasterize an SVG to PNG or JPG with a scale and background choice. (https://toolpantry.app/svg-to-png.md) ### Text & data - **JSON diff** — Compare two JSON documents and inspect changed paths. (https://toolpantry.app/json-diff.md) - **Remove duplicate lines** — Clean, deduplicate, sort, copy, or download a text list. (https://toolpantry.app/line-tools.md) - **Unix timestamp converter** — Convert epoch seconds or milliseconds to readable dates. (https://toolpantry.app/timestamp-converter.md) - **HTML to Markdown** — Convert headings, links, lists, and basic tables for docs and prompts. (https://toolpantry.app/html-to-markdown.md) - **JSON validator** — Check JSON syntax, inspect parse errors, and copy a formatted result locally. (https://toolpantry.app/json-validator.md) - **JSON Schema validator** — Check types, required fields, properties, arrays, enums, and common limits locally. (https://toolpantry.app/json-schema-validator.md) ### Conversion - **WebP to JPG** — Convert a WebP image to a broadly compatible JPG with quality control. (https://toolpantry.app/webp-to-jpg.md) - **JPG to WebP** — Typically 25–35% smaller than JPG at the same visual quality. (https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-webp.md) - **AVIF to JPG** — Open modern web images in any app, editor, or form. (https://toolpantry.app/avif-to-jpg.md) - **AVIF to PNG** — Lossless output with transparency preserved. (https://toolpantry.app/avif-to-png.md) - **HEIC to JPG** — iPhone photos openable anywhere — converted locally. (https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-jpg.md) - **HEIC to PNG** — Lossless HEIC conversion for editing pipelines. (https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-png.md) - **HEIC to WebP** — iPhone photos to the lightest web format. (https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-webp.md) - **HEIC to PDF** — Turn iPhone photos into one PDF — nothing uploaded. (https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-pdf.md) - **Favicon generator** — Create browser, Apple touch, and app icon PNG sizes from one logo. (https://toolpantry.app/favicon-generator.md) - **PNG to ICO** — Pack 16–256 px into one favicon.ico — transparency kept. (https://toolpantry.app/png-to-ico.md) - **Video to MP3** — Pull audio from MP4, MOV, or WebM — 128–320 kbps, all local. (https://toolpantry.app/video-to-mp3.md) - **Compress video** — Compress MP4 locally and verify the actual output size. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-video.md) - **Video to GIF** — Trim an MP4 clip into a looping GIF — fps and width dials included. (https://toolpantry.app/video-to-gif.md) - **GIF to MP4** — Modern video from an old GIF — smaller, full color, local. (https://toolpantry.app/gif-to-mp4.md) - **Audio trimmer & ringtones** — Cut MP3s on a waveform — export MP3, WAV, or iPhone .m4r. (https://toolpantry.app/audio-trimmer.md) - **Voice recorder** — Record and save MP3/WAV — nothing streamed to a server. (https://toolpantry.app/voice-recorder.md) - **Merge audio** — Join MP3/WAV/M4A files into one track — order your way. (https://toolpantry.app/merge-audio.md) - **Audio converter** — M4A, WAV, OGG, FLAC → MP3 or WAV — local, no upload. (https://toolpantry.app/audio-converter.md) - **Video trimmer** — Cut MP4 without re-encoding — instant, lossless, local. (https://toolpantry.app/video-trimmer.md) - **Video face blur** — Box the faces, export a blurred MP4 — baked in, never uploaded. (https://toolpantry.app/face-blur-video.md) - **Rotate video** — Turn 90°/180° by writing metadata — instant, lossless, local. (https://toolpantry.app/rotate-video.md) - **Mute video** — Remove audio without re-encoding — seconds, zero quality loss. (https://toolpantry.app/mute-video.md) - **Frame extractor** — Grab any moment as a full-resolution PNG or JPG. (https://toolpantry.app/frame-extractor.md) - **Crop video** — Freeform or 9:16 / 1:1 / 4:5 presets for Reels, Shorts, IG. (https://toolpantry.app/crop-video.md) - **MOV to MP4** — Lossless container swap — copies the data, never re-encodes. (https://toolpantry.app/mov-to-mp4.md) - **Merge videos** — Join clips into one MP4 — letterboxed, ordered, watermark-free. (https://toolpantry.app/merge-video.md) - **JPG to PNG** — Convert a JPEG into a lossless PNG copy for editors and upload forms. (https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-png.md) - **PNG to WebP** — Make a smaller WebP copy while keeping transparent pixels. (https://toolpantry.app/png-to-webp.md) - **WebP to PNG** — Create a lossless PNG copy for editors and forms that reject WebP. (https://toolpantry.app/webp-to-png.md) - **PNG to JPG** — Export a compatible JPG with quality and transparency background controls. (https://toolpantry.app/png-to-jpg.md) ### SEO - **Schema markup generator** — Build Article, FAQ, Product, LocalBusiness, Organization, or WebSite JSON-LD. (https://toolpantry.app/schema-markup-generator.md) - **AI Agent Readiness Checker** — Score any site's AI-search readiness: llms.txt, Markdown, JSON-LD, robots, sitemap. (https://toolpantry.app/agent-ready-checker.md) - **AI Agent Readiness Report 2026** — We tested 184 popular tool sites: only 1.6% can serve Markdown to AI agents. (https://toolpantry.app/ai-agent-readiness-report.md) - **vs iLoveIMG** — Honest comparison: local vs server, breadth vs depth. (https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-iloveimg.md) - **vs TinyPNG** — Local vs cloud compression, limits, and target sizes. (https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-tinypng.md) - **vs Smallpdf** — Free core PDF ops vs advanced server editing. (https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-smallpdf.md) - **vs Adobe Acrobat online** — Core jobs vs the full (paid) PDF editor. (https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-adobe-acrobat-online.md) - **vs Zamzar** — Everyday formats local vs 1,100+ formats in the cloud. (https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-zamzar.md) - **vs CloudConvert** — One-off jobs vs API pipelines and batch scale. (https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-cloudconvert.md) - **vs PDF24** — Core and local vs broad and cloud (Windows app too). (https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-pdf24.md) - **File size limits 2026** — Gmail to WhatsApp to portals — every cap, with a local tool for each. (https://toolpantry.app/file-size-limits.md) - **Smallpdf alternatives** — Seven honest picks — free, local, no sign-up. (https://toolpantry.app/smallpdf-alternatives.md) - **iLovePDF alternatives** — Free limits compared; local options included. (https://toolpantry.app/ilovepdf-alternatives.md) - **Acrobat alternatives** — When you need editing — and when you don't. (https://toolpantry.app/adobe-acrobat-alternatives.md) - **PDF24 alternatives** — Free, ad-free routes for the same jobs. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf24-alternatives.md) - **Zamzar alternatives** — Convert without the upload. (https://toolpantry.app/zamzar-alternatives.md) - **CloudConvert alternatives** — Free converters and API options compared. (https://toolpantry.app/cloudconvert-alternatives.md) - **TinyPNG alternatives** — Compress images without batch caps. (https://toolpantry.app/tinypng-alternatives.md) - **iLoveIMG alternatives** — Compress, crop, convert — locally. (https://toolpantry.app/iloveimg-alternatives.md) ### Business - **Quote generator** — Create a clean estimate with line items and a validity date. (https://toolpantry.app/quote-generator.md) - **Quote to invoice** — Turn a completed quote into a printable invoice in one step. (https://toolpantry.app/quote-to-invoice.md) - **Receipt generator** — Make a simple payment receipt and save it as a PDF. (https://toolpantry.app/receipt-generator.md) - **Payment reminder email** — Write a polite follow-up for an unpaid invoice. (https://toolpantry.app/payment-reminder-email.md) - **Contractor estimate** — Prepare a job estimate for repairs, cleaning, or trade work. (https://toolpantry.app/contractor-estimate-generator.md) - **Hourly rate calculator** — Find a sustainable minimum rate from income and business costs. (https://toolpantry.app/hourly-rate-calculator.md) - **Project pricing calculator** — Turn hours, expenses, and a buffer into a project price. (https://toolpantry.app/project-pricing-calculator.md) - **Expense tracker** — Log project expenses, see the total, and download a CSV. (https://toolpantry.app/expense-tracker.md) - **Retainer pricing calculator** — Price a monthly service package from hours, costs, and capacity. (https://toolpantry.app/retainer-pricing-calculator.md) - **Timesheet calculator** — Track weekly hours, billable time, and the value of your work. (https://toolpantry.app/timesheet-calculator.md) - **Keyword cluster tool** — Group a pasted keyword list, remove duplicates, and export CSV. (https://toolpantry.app/keyword-cluster-tool.md) - **Client onboarding checklist** — Build a reusable project kickoff checklist and export Markdown. (https://toolpantry.app/client-onboarding-checklist.md) - **Proposal generator** — Turn a project brief into a clear service proposal. (https://toolpantry.app/proposal-generator.md) - **Statement of work** — Outline scope, deliverables, timeline, and exclusions. (https://toolpantry.app/statement-of-work-generator.md) - **Payment schedule** — Split a project price into deposit and milestone payments. (https://toolpantry.app/payment-schedule-calculator.md) - **Client intake form** — Prepare the questions you need before a project starts. (https://toolpantry.app/client-intake-form.md) - **Meeting agenda** — Create a focused agenda with decisions and action items. (https://toolpantry.app/meeting-agenda-generator.md) ### Ecommerce ops - **Dimensional weight** — Compare actual, DIM, and billable parcel weight. (https://toolpantry.app/dimensional-weight-calculator.md) - **Shipping cost estimator** — Model delivery fees, fuel surcharge, handling, and insurance. (https://toolpantry.app/shipping-cost-estimator.md) - **Landed cost calculator** — Estimate the true import cost per product unit. (https://toolpantry.app/landed-cost-calculator.md) - **Ecommerce profit margin** — Find profit, break-even price, and target-margin price. (https://toolpantry.app/ecommerce-profit-margin-calculator.md) - **Reorder point** — Plan stock replenishment from sales velocity and lead time. (https://toolpantry.app/reorder-point-calculator.md) - **CBM volume calculator** — Calculate carton volume, cubic feet, and volume per unit. (https://toolpantry.app/cbm-volume-calculator.md) - **Packaging fit checker** — Test product rotations, padding, and box utilization. (https://toolpantry.app/packaging-fit-calculator.md) - **Safety stock calculator** — Estimate an inventory buffer from demand and lead-time variability. (https://toolpantry.app/safety-stock-calculator.md) - **Free shipping threshold** — Set a delivery offer while protecting your target margin. (https://toolpantry.app/free-shipping-threshold-calculator.md) - **Inventory coverage** — See days on hand and expected coverage with incoming stock. (https://toolpantry.app/inventory-coverage-calculator.md) - **Inventory spreadsheet** — Generate a clean SKU and stock CSV template. (https://toolpantry.app/inventory-spreadsheet-generator.md) - **Inventory tracker** — Track stock value and flag products at their reorder point. (https://toolpantry.app/inventory-tracker.md) - **Inventory turnover** — Calculate stock turns and days of inventory held. (https://toolpantry.app/inventory-turnover-calculator.md) - **Download time** — Estimate transfer time from file size and connection speed. (https://toolpantry.app/download-time-calculator.md) - **Marketplace fees** — Break down fees, net payout, profit, and margin. (https://toolpantry.app/marketplace-fee-calculator.md) ## FAQ **Are the games playable yet?** Both run today in development builds. Linjiang Chronicles has complete single-player flows with headless test suites; Moonlit Kingdom is in iOS delivery. Playable web demos will be announced here first. **Were the games fully AI-made?** No — and that honesty is the point of this lab. Agent teams handle generation, implementation, testing, and evidence collection at a scale one person cannot. Humans own taste: what feels fun, what gets cut, what ships. The guides show exactly where that line sits. **Can I use these pipelines for my own game?** Yes — start with the flagship guide , then the art pipeline . The approaches are provider-neutral and scale down to solo projects. --- # Linjiang Chronicles — Life Sim Built by AI Agents (Godot) > Linjiang Chronicles (一纸青云·临江志) — a 305-event ancient-life simulation for iPhone, built by AI agent teams in Godot. Systems, numbers, and honest development status. Source: https://toolpantry.app/gamedev/linjiang-chronicles ## About A premium ancient-life simulation for iPhone — take the imperial exams, manage a granary through flood season, and live with the consequences of 711 decisions. Built in Godot by AI agent teams, with every branch machine-audited. ## Quick answer What is it? A reading-first life simulation set in a river county of ancient China. You steer one life across 8 chapters — scholarship, family, disaster relief, and twenty possible endings — through a paper-and-vermilion phone UI designed for one-handed play. ## The design idea: decisions you can read Most mobile "choices" games hide their systems behind timers. Linjiang goes the other way: every decision shows its cost before you commit. A choice page is a reading page — the plan, the receipts, and the consequences are all on the paper. The UI contract is explicit: selecting never executes; only the vermilion seal at the bottom commits. Two adjacent options always fit on screen as fixed-width cards, and every prep step is reachable in a tap — no hidden menus, no forced scroll-hunting on a 320-pixel-wide phone. ## Systems worth knowing ### Three life routes, one county You pick a path through county life — scholarship first among them — and the game tracks material holdings, health, reputation, and the two long-arc relationships (a magistrate's aide and a merchant's daughter are the current pair). Routes cross: an exam decision can cost you the grain you needed for flood relief. ### The granary problem (chapter six) Chapter six turns disaster relief into a finite-inventory puzzle: five household funds buy twelve sacks of grain, once. First distribution splits into three outcomes; the second wave pressures you to save workers or sell stock. The autumn-flood relief requires that four sacks *actually remain* — the game audits your receipts, not your intentions. No amount of reputation or rest can conjure grain; old debts and damaged records have their own handover exits. ### Evidence-grade content pipeline All 305 events render headlessly in CI. A balance run walks the full event graph and reports where the economy dead-ends. Every content state has a lifecycle — drafted, validated, integrated, rendered, runtime-seen, manually-played, accepted — and nothing is claimed as done before its stage is proven. The current honest status: the single-run content is estimated at roughly 10 hours per route by simulation models, and **the "20+ hours" goal is explicitly not yet accepted**. ## What the agents actually did - **Content at scale:** events, branches, receipts, and endings drafted as structured data, then validated by graph walks — the parts of a life-sim that are pure volume. - **UI iteration under constraints:** six layouts across four phone sizes (320→430px) plus large-type mode, verified with same-state before/after captures. - **Runtime evidence:** real-time recordings of actual builds reviewed frame-by-frame before features count as done — the pipeline from our [flagship guide](https://toolpantry.app/how-we-build-games-with-ai-agents.html). ## Honest status board | Area | State | |---|---| | Core loop & save system | Playable in Godot, headless-verified | | All 305 events / 20 endings | Render clean, machine-audited | | Art & audio | Candidate stage — final human acceptance pending | | 20-hour content claim | Not accepted (simulation estimates ~10h/route) | | Device testing & release | Not started — iPhone build pipeline next | ## Notes Godot 4.6 · iPhone portrait · premium (buy once) · no ads, no gacha, no live-service hooks. ## FAQ **When can I play it?** Not yet — it is in active development. The complete single-player flow runs in Godot today, and iPhone release is the next milestone. Playable demos will appear in this lab first. **Is it really 305 events?** Yes, and they all render in automated tests. What is not yet proven is the total playtime : simulation models estimate roughly ten hours per route, and the team's own bar is twenty. The gap is content depth per branch, not event count. **Why build a life sim with AI agents?** Life sims are almost pure content volume — hundreds of interlocking events where the hard part is consistency, not rendering. That is exactly the work agent pipelines are good at: generate, validate against the graph, and record evidence. See the pipeline guide . --- # Moonlit Kingdom — Idle RPG Built by AI Agents (Godot, iOS) > Moonlit Kingdom (月光王国) — an idle RPG about rebuilding a village with heroes and slimes, built by AI agent teams in Godot and heading to iOS. Economy, chapters, expeditions, and honest status. Source: https://toolpantry.app/gamedev/moonlit-kingdom ## About An idle RPG about relighting a dark world, one village at a time. Start by tapping an expedition button; end by managing forty routes, sixteen relics, and a production line of slimes — on a phone, in landscape, built by agent teams in Godot. ## Quick answer What is it? A click-to-automate idle RPG. Every expedition returns courage instantly; slimes and inns convert that loop into per-second production. Eight chapters, prestige resets that permanently raise your rate, and an expedition system that pauses your economy while your units are away. ## The core loop, with actual formulas Idle games live or die on their math being legible. Moonlit Kingdom publishes its own: courage income per second is (0.60 × slimes + 2.5 × inns) × chapter bonus × (1 + 0.15 × starfire). The prestige currency (starfire) scales as max(1, floor(sqrt(run earnings ÷ chapter goal))) — the square root keeps early resets meaningful without letting late ones trivialize the curve. The rhythm: tap expeditions for instant courage → buy slimes (cheap, slow) → save for inns (expensive, 4× rate) → hit the chapter goal → choose a permanent blessing. *Oath of Dawn* boosts manual play by 25%; *Oath of the Hearth* boosts automation by 25%. That single choice decides what kind of next chapter you'll play. ## Chapter progression | # | Area | Goal courage | Efficiency | |---|---|---|---| | 1 | Sparkfire Village | 250 | 1.00× | | 2 | Windbell Forest | 650 | 1.15× | | 3 | Star River Canyon | 1,600 | 1.35× | | 4 | Old Tower Outer Wall | 3,800 | 1.60× | Chapter five's tower core is an optional side line — the campaign keeps going through eight chapters to the star-core finale, where a final boss and an ending choice close the run. ## Expeditions: the anti-idle system Every six expeditions triggers a journey encounter — escort a caravan for instant courage, or follow a star beast for a temporary production boost. Later, the expedition board opens up: forty routes and sixteen relics. Dispatch uses one active slot, **pauses the production of the units you send**, and rewards must be claimed at the guild — a deliberate friction that makes "leave it running" a real decision instead of a default. The second relic slot unlocks in chapter four, and old saves migrate cleanly into it. Bosses mutate. The bestiary and boss-mutation systems give repeated fights variation, so the idle grind never becomes a single solved equation. ## What the agents actually did - **Touch-first UI under safe-area constraints:** every layout verified at 780×360, 844×390, and 932×430 — including notch and home-indicator safe areas — with same-state before/after evidence for each fix. - **Save-state continuity:** mid-expedition restarts, offline progression, and reward state all verified by independent process restarts, not just in-memory tests. - **iOS delivery pipeline:** a source-bound Xcode project with manifest hashes — the build you test is provably the source you reviewed. - **Real-time recordings:** each accepted feature ships with a runtime video of the actual build — the QA approach from the [pipeline guide](https://toolpantry.app/how-we-build-games-with-ai-agents.html). ## Honest status board | Area | State | |---|---| | Core idle loop & 8 chapters | Playable, running builds | | Expeditions, relics, blessings | Implemented & runtime-verified | | iOS Xcode project | Source-bound delivery complete (unsigned) | | Signing, TestFlight, store | Not started | | Human play-feel acceptance | Ongoing — the honest bottleneck of idle design | ## Notes Godot 4.6 · iPhone landscape · anti-pillars are explicit: no high-precision combat, no forced ads, no paid acceleration. ## FAQ **When does it come out?** The playable build runs today; iOS signing and TestFlight are the next milestones. No release date is announced — this lab posts progress, not promises. **Why landscape on a phone?** Idle games are dashboards: production rates, dispatch timers, and cost curves want width. Every layout was designed and tested for one-hand landscape play at real device sizes. **Can I see the math?** Yes — the formulas in this article are the shipping ones. Idle players reverse-engineer spreadsheets anyway, so the design publishes its curve honestly. --- # Vibe Coding Games: What Actually Works (2026 Honest Guide) > An honest guide to vibe coding games in 2026: what AI actually nails (prototypes, content volume, tooling), where it breaks (fun, feel, balance), and the workflow that closes the gap. Source: https://toolpantry.app/gamedev/vibe-coding-games-what-works ## About 181,000 mobile games shipped in six months. Twenty percent of Steam Next Fest entries now declare generative-AI use. And revenue? Barely moved. Here is the honest split between what AI game development nails and what still eats projects alive. ## Quick answer The one-paragraph version: AI is spectacular at prototypes, content volume, tooling, and iteration speed. It is mediocre at fun, feel, balance, and polish — the exact things that make a game worth playing twice. The teams winning with it treat AI as a production line with quality gates, not a slot machine. ## What the 2026 numbers actually say | Signal | Number | What it means | |---|---|---| | Mobile games launched (6 months) | 181,000 | Making games is now cheap | | Games earning ≥ $20k (quarterly) | +14% YoY | Making *successful* games is not | | Steam Next Fest AI-declared entries | ~20% | Players know — disclosure is mainstream | | Typical AI-made prototype cost | $10–50 of API calls | The barrier is gone; the filter is taste | Read together, these numbers describe a funnel with a wide top and a narrow neck: generation is solved, distribution and retention are not. Every guide that promises "make a hit game with one prompt" is selling the wide end of the funnel. ## What AI genuinely nails - **Prototypes in an afternoon.** Mechanics, UI skeletons, placeholder art — the cost of finding out "is this idea stupid?" dropped 100×. This is the single biggest win, and most people underuse it. - **Content volume.** Hundreds of events, items, dialogue branches, and levels — with graph-validation to keep them consistent. Text-heavy and system-heavy games eat this for breakfast. - **Tooling and QA.** Test suites, evidence recordings, regression runs across screen sizes. Boring work that humans skip and AI never gets tired of. - **Art pipelines.** Consistent sprite sets, atlases, maps, and audio — when the pipeline has deterministic post-processing ([our full guide](https://toolpantry.app/ai-game-art-pipeline.html)). ## Where it breaks (the part nobody posts about) - **Fun is not a generation problem.** AI can build your combat system; it cannot tell you the hit doesn't feel good. "Feels good" is a judgment loop that runs at human speed. - **Balance is adversarial.** An economy that "works" on paper breaks when players find the one degenerate strategy. Balance requires playtesting against human creativity, not just simulation. - **Content volume ≠ content depth.** Our own life-sim numbers: 305 events, 711 choices — and the honest internal verdict is that a 20-hour content claim is *not yet earned*. Volume is cheap; meaning per minute is not. - **Polish is a thousand small judgments.** Safe areas, animation timing, when a reward toast appears relative to a return animation. Each is trivial; the aggregate is what separates a game from a demo. ## Genres where AI has a real edge The pattern across 2026's AI-made successes: **low art dependency, high system or text density.** Life sims, historical strategy, interactive fiction, idle and incremental games, simulation tools. These games are built from decisions and numbers — exactly what agent pipelines produce and validate well. High-fidelity action games are the opposite end: every frame is handcrafted feel, and that is still a human craft at scale. ## The workflow that closes the gap 1. **Vertical slice first.** One complete loop — menu to reward — before any content expansion. If the slice isn't fun with placeholder art, more generation won't save it. 2. **Freeze interfaces.** Once a system is accepted, its contract is locked. Agents change implementations freely; they don't get to move the goalposts. 3. **Evidence over claims.** Every feature ships with a runtime recording and a before/after capture. "It works" is a video, not a sentence. 4. **Human gates on taste.** Schedule explicit checkpoints where a human judges feel, look, and fun — and be willing to kill features there. 5. **Budget compute, not hope.** Track generation and verification costs per feature. Our content-heavy sim spends most of its budget on validation loops — that's the healthy ratio. ## The honest bottom line AI game development in 2026 is not a shortcut around game development. It's a production multiplier: it multiplies speed, volume, and consistency — and it multiplies whatever judgment you bring. Bring taste and a quality gate, and you can ship things a solo developer never could. Bring neither, and you'll add to the 181,000. ## FAQ **Can one person really ship a game with AI?** Yes — one person plus an agent pipeline can now produce what a small team used to. The catch is role change: you become a director and quality gate, not a producer. The work shifts from making to judging. **Which engine should I use?** Whatever you'll actually iterate in. We use Godot for our own games because its headless mode makes automated testing cheap — a real advantage when agents run your test suites. Unity and web stacks work too; the pipeline ideas transfer. **Is AI-generated game content a turnoff for players?** Studies in 2026 suggest undisclosed AI content can hurt trust — but players respond to quality first. The practical rule: be honest about your pipeline (we are), and never let generation quality slip below what the game needs. --- # Calculadora de IMC — Índice de Masa Corporal > Calcula tu IMC (índice de masa corporal) en tu navegador con unidades métricas o imperiales. Resultado inmediato, sin enviar datos de salud. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/calculadora-de-imc ## About Introduce tu altura y tu peso (en métrico o imperial) y obtén tu IMC con la categoría de referencia — todo se calcula en tu dispositivo. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: elige el sistema de unidades, introduce altura y peso, y el IMC se calcula al momento. No se envía ningún dato de salud a ningún servidor. ## Cómo se calcula el IMC 1. **Elige el sistema de unidades** — métrico (kg/cm) o imperial (lb/ft/in). 2. **Introduce altura y peso** — el resultado se actualiza al momento. 3. **Lee la categoría** — la escala muestra dónde cae tu valor y tu rango de peso saludable. ## Lo que debes saber La fórmula es peso ÷ altura² (kg ÷ m²). El IMC no distingue músculo de grasa: un atleta puede dar "sobrepeso" con muy poca grasa corporal. Es una herramienta de cribado poblacional, no una evaluación individual — úsala como orientación, no como diagnóstico. ## Notes El IMC es una medida de cribado, no un diagnóstico. No tiene en cuenta la masa muscular, el embarazo, la edad, el sexo ni la distribución de la grasa. Para niños y adolescentes se usa una tabla de percentiles por edad y sexo; consulta a un profesional sanitario para cualquier duda de salud. El IMC es una medida de cribado, no un diagnóstico. No tiene en cuenta la masa muscular, el embarazo, la edad, el sexo ni la distribución de la grasa. Consulta a un profesional sanitario para cualquier duda de salud. ## FAQ **¿Se envían mis datos?** No. El cálculo ocurre por completo en tu navegador; no se envía ni se guarda nada. **¿El IMC es un diagnóstico?** No. Es una medida de cribado que no distingue músculo de grasa ni tiene en cuenta edad, sexo o embarazo. Consulta a un profesional para evaluar tu salud. --- # Comprimir Imagen a 1MB — Reduce el Tamaño Gratis > Comprime una imagen a menos de 1MB localmente en tu navegador. Reduce JPG, PNG y WebP para portales y correo sin subir el archivo. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-imagen-1mb ## About Comprime un JPG, PNG o WebP por debajo de la línea de 1MB que piden los portales y el correo — todo local. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: suelta tu imagen, selecciona el objetivo de 1 MB y descarga. El compresor solo reduce lo necesario y el archivo nunca sale de tu navegador. ## Cómo comprimir una imagen por debajo de 1 MB 1. **Añade la imagen** — normalmente una foto de móvil o una exportación sin comprimir. 2. **Elige el objetivo de 1 MB** — casi siempre basta con ajustar la calidad; las dimensiones se mantienen. 3. **Descarga** — aspecto casi idéntico, una fracción del peso. ## Lo que debes saber Si tu archivo ya está por debajo de 1 MB, no necesitas comprimirlo. A este nivel, la pérdida visible de calidad es rara. Relacionado: [Comprimir PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-pdf.html) para documentos. ## Notes Deja ambos campos vacíos para conservar las dimensiones cuando sea posible. Con ancho y alto fijados no reducimos los píxeles para cumplir el tamaño. KB = 1.000 bytes; MB = 1.000.000 bytes. El resultado debe quedar por debajo del límite. Comprueba también las reglas del formulario. ## FAQ **¿Por qué cambian las dimensiones?** Sin píxeles requeridos, solo se reducen las dimensiones si ajustar la calidad no basta. Con ancho y alto fijados se conservan esos píxeles y se avisa si el archivo supera el límite. **¿Se sobrescribe el original?** No. El resultado es un archivo nuevo; tu original queda intacto en tu dispositivo. --- # Comprimir Imagen a 2MB — Reduce el Tamaño Online > Comprime una imagen a menos de 2MB localmente en tu navegador. Reduce JPG, PNG y WebP para portales y correo sin subir el archivo. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-imagen-2mb ## About Comprime un JPG, PNG o WebP por debajo de la línea de 2MB que piden muchos portales — todo local, sin subir nada. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: suelta tu imagen, selecciona el objetivo de 2 MB y descarga. El compresor solo reduce lo necesario y el archivo nunca sale de tu navegador. ## Cómo comprimir una imagen por debajo de 2 MB 1. **Añade la imagen** — normalmente una foto de móvil o una exportación sin comprimir. 2. **Elige el objetivo de 2 MB** — casi siempre basta con ajustar la calidad; las dimensiones se mantienen. 3. **Descarga** — aspecto casi idéntico, una fracción del peso. ## Lo que debes saber Si tu archivo ya está por debajo de 2 MB, no necesitas comprimirlo. A este nivel, la pérdida visible de calidad es rara. Relacionado: [Comprimir imagen a 1MB](https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-imagen-1mb.html) para límites más estrictos y [Recortar imagen](https://toolpantry.app/es/recortar-imagen.html) para quitar zonas que no aportan. ## Notes Deja ambos campos vacíos para conservar las dimensiones cuando sea posible. Con ancho y alto fijados no reducimos los píxeles para cumplir el tamaño. KB = 1.000 bytes; MB = 1.000.000 bytes. El resultado debe quedar por debajo del límite. Comprueba también las reglas del formulario. ## FAQ **¿Por qué cambian las dimensiones?** Sin píxeles requeridos, solo se reducen las dimensiones si ajustar la calidad no basta. Con ancho y alto fijados se conservan esos píxeles y se avisa si el archivo supera el límite. **¿Se sobrescribe el original?** No. El resultado es un archivo nuevo; tu original queda intacto en tu dispositivo. --- # Comprimir PDF Online — Reduce el Tamaño Sin Subir el Archivo > Comprime archivos PDF directamente en tu navegador. Elige el nivel de compresión y descarga el archivo más pequeño — sin subirlo a ningún servidor y sin crear una cuenta. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-pdf ## About Reduce escaneos y PDF pesados hasta que quepan en cualquier formulario — la compresión ocurre dentro de tu navegador, sin subir nada. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: elige el PDF, escoge un nivel de compresión (Equilibrado para empezar) y descarga el archivo más pequeño. Sin cuenta y sin subir el documento. ## Cómo comprimir un PDF 1. **Añade el PDF** — el archivo se queda en tu dispositivo. 2. **Elige el nivel** — Fuerte reduce más, Equilibrado mantiene la calidad, Ligero solo si el detalle importa. 3. **Descarga** — la página muestra el tamaño antes y después para que decidas. ## Lo que debes saber La compresión convierte cada página en una imagen: los escaneos suelen reducirse un 50–85%, pero los PDF que son casi todo texto pueden no reducirse o incluso crecer, porque ya estaban bien comprimidos. La herramienta te avisa cuando eso pasa. Relacionado: [Dividir PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/dividir-pdf.html) y [Unir PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/unir-pdf.html). ## Notes La compresión re-codifica las páginas como imágenes para que los escaneos sean mucho más pequeños. El texto deja de ser seleccionable — guarda el original. ## FAQ **¿Se sube mi PDF a algún servidor?** No. La compresión se ejecuta dentro de tu navegador y el documento nunca sale de tu dispositivo. **¿Por qué a veces el archivo no se reduce?** Los PDF con mucho texto ya están bien comprimidos: convertirlos en imágenes puede incluso aumentar el tamaño. La herramienta te avisa cuando no puede reducirlo. --- # Comprimir Video Online — Reduce MP4 sin Subirlo > Comprime un video MP4 o MOV directamente en tu navegador: elige un objetivo de tamaño y descarga un archivo más ligero — sin subirlo a ningún servidor. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-video ## About Reduce un MP4 o MOV para WhatsApp, correo o Discord — la re-codificación ocurre en tu dispositivo, sin subir nada. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: elige el video, selecciona un objetivo en MB o la mitad del tamaño y pulsa Comprimir. El resultado se mide; si supera el objetivo, no se descarga automáticamente. Todo se procesa en tu navegador. ## Cómo comprimir un video 1. **Añade el MP4 o MOV** — el archivo se queda en tu dispositivo. 2. **Elige un objetivo** — 2, 10, 20, 25, 64 o 100 MB, o simplemente "la mitad". Comprueba el límite vigente de tu aplicación. 3. **Comprime y descarga** — la tabla muestra los bytes originales y finales. Si no se alcanza el objetivo, puedes cambiar los ajustes o descargar expresamente el resultado que lo supera. ## Límites de las aplicaciones El [soporte de Discord](https://support.discord.com/hc/en-us/articles/25444343291031-File-Attachments-FAQ) indica 20 MB sin Nitro y advierte que puede haber pruebas por cuenta (consultado el 15 de octubre de 2026). Los objetivos de esta herramienta no son límites universales de WhatsApp o correo. Consulta la [tabla de límites con fuentes oficiales](https://toolpantry.app/file-size-limits). ## Lo que debes saber Comprimir vuelve a codificar el video: la calidad puede bajar y no siempre se alcanza el objetivo. El aviso comprueba el tamaño real; no certifica todas las reglas de la aplicación receptora. Si la tasa de bits queda muy ajustada, bajar la resolución se ve mejor que forzar la calidad. Relacionado: [Cortar video](https://toolpantry.app/es/cortar-video.html) (sin re-codificar) y [Video a MP3](https://toolpantry.app/es/video-a-mp3.html) para quedarte solo con el audio. ## Notes MB = 1.000.000 bytes. El objetivo es una estimación: el resultado se mide antes de indicar que cumple. Comprueba el límite de tu destino. La velocidad y los códecs dependen del navegador y del dispositivo. Guarda el original y revisa la imagen y el audio del MP4 nuevo. ## FAQ **¿Se sube mi video?** No. El procesamiento ocurre en tu navegador. El video no se envía a un servidor. **¿Se garantiza el tamaño final?** No. La tasa de bits es una estimación. El resultado se mide y solo se descarga automáticamente si cumple el objetivo. Un resultado demasiado grande puede descargarse expresamente, marcado como tal. **¿Qué significa MB?** La herramienta usa MB decimales: 1 MB = 1.000.000 bytes. Los objetivos fijos requieren un resultado inferior al límite; la opción mitad permite como máximo la mitad de los bytes originales. **¿Cuánto tarda?** Depende de la duración, la resolución, los códecs, el navegador y el dispositivo. No hay un tiempo garantizado. --- # Contador de Palabras y Caracteres — Online > Cuenta palabras, caracteres, frases y tiempo de lectura mientras escribes — directamente en tu navegador, sin subir el texto y sin cuenta. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/contador-de-palabras ## About Pega o escribe tu texto y mira al momento cuántas palabras, caracteres y frases tiene, con tiempo de lectura estimado. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: pega el texto en el cuadro y las métricas se actualizan solas. Todo ocurre en tu navegador; el texto no se envía a ningún sitio. ## Para qué sirve un contador de palabras 1. **Límites de plataformas** — X, LinkedIn o los formularios de admisión tienen topes de caracteres. 2. **SEO y meta descripciones** — los buscadores cortan los títulos a ~60 y las descripciones a ~160 caracteres. 3. **Trabajos académicos** — ensayos con un número exacto de palabras. ## Lo que debes saber El tiempo de lectura se estima a unas 200 palabras por minuto, la media de un lector adulto. El contador no guarda tu texto: al cerrar la pestaña, desaparece. Relacionado: [Generador de contraseñas](https://toolpantry.app/es/generador-de-contrasenas.html) y [PDF a texto](https://toolpantry.app/es/pdf-a-texto.html) para extraer texto de documentos. ## Notes El conteo ocurre en tu navegador. Se cuentan como palabras las secuencias de letras y números separadas por espacios o puntuación. El conteo ocurre en tu navegador. Se cuentan como palabras las secuencias de letras y números separadas por espacios o puntuación. ## FAQ **¿Se guarda mi texto?** No. El conteo es local y el texto desaparece al cerrar la página. **¿Cómo se cuenta el tiempo de lectura?** A unas 200 palabras por minuto, el promedio de lectura de un adulto. --- # Convertidor de Audio — MP3, WAV, M4A, OGG y Más > Convierte archivos de audio a MP3 o WAV localmente en tu navegador. M4A, AAC, OGG, FLAC y más — sin subir el archivo y sin cuenta. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/conversor-de-audio ## About Convierte M4A, AAC, OGG, FLAC y otros formatos a MP3 o WAV — todo el procesado ocurre en tu dispositivo. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: añade el archivo, escucha la vista previa, elige MP3 o WAV y pulsa Convertir. El audio nunca sale de tu navegador. ## Cómo convertir un archivo de audio 1. **Añade el archivo** — M4A del iPhone, AAC, OGG, FLAC, WAV o MP3. 2. **Escucha la vista previa** — confirma que es el archivo correcto antes de convertir. 3. **Elige MP3 o WAV y descarga** — MP3 para compartir, WAV para editar. ## Lo que debes saber La conversión decodifica el audio original y lo vuelve a codificar: de un MP3 a otro MP3 la calidad no mejora, solo cambia el contenedor o el bitrate. El WAV ocupa mucho más (unos 10 MB por minuto) pero es ideal para edición. Relacionado: [Video a MP3](https://toolpantry.app/es/video-a-mp3.html) para extraer audio de un video. ## Notes Escucha la vista previa para comprobar el archivo. La salida MP3 es de 192 kbps — transparente para escuchar a diario; elige WAV cuando necesites una copia sin pérdida del audio decodificado. Escucha la vista previa para comprobar el archivo. La salida MP3 es de 192 kbps — transparente para escuchar a diario; elige WAV cuando necesites una copia sin pérdida del audio decodificado. ## FAQ **¿Qué formatos acepta?** MP3, M4A, AAC, WAV, OGG, FLAC y Opus — todo lo que tu navegador pueda decodificar. **¿La conversión mejora la calidad?** No. Re-codificar no recupera calidad perdida; el MP3 a 192 kbps suena igual que la fuente en la mayoría de los casos. --- # Conversor de Unidades — Longitud, Peso, Temperatura > Convierte unidades de longitud, peso, temperatura, área, volumen, velocidad, tiempo y datos, localmente en tu navegador. Sin subir nada. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/conversor-de-unidades ## About Convierte metros a pies, kilos a libras, °C a °F y mucho más — con tabla de equivalencias y factor exacto. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: elige la categoría, introduce el valor y selecciona las unidades. El resultado aparece al momento con el factor usado. ## Cómo convertir unidades 1. **Elige la categoría** — longitud, peso, temperatura, área, volumen, velocidad, tiempo o datos. 2. **Introduce el valor y las unidades** — el resultado se calcula al momento, con el factor exacto a la vista. 3. **Usa la tabla** — las equivalencias comunes se copian con un clic. ## Lo que debes saber Los factores están integrados en la página: funciona sin conexión y sin enviar consultas a ninguna API. Para temperatura se aplican las fórmulas con desplazamiento (°C×9/5+32). En datos digitales, ojo con la diferencia: 1 MB decimal = 1.000.000 bytes, 1 MiB binario = 1.048.576 bytes. Relacionado: [Calculadora de IMC](https://toolpantry.app/es/calculadora-de-imc.html) y [Comprimir a 1MB](https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-imagen-1mb.html). ## Notes Las unidades lineales convierten a través de una unidad base común. La temperatura usa desplazamientos en vez de un multiplicador. En datos digitales se distingue entre KB/MB decimales y KiB/MiB binarios. Las unidades lineales convierten a través de una unidad base común. La temperatura usa desplazamientos. En datos digitales se distingue entre KB/MB y KiB/MiB. ## FAQ **¿Funciona sin conexión?** Sí — los factores están integrados en la página, así que tras cargarla funciona sin internet. **¿Por qué hay KB y KiB?** KB (decimal) son 1.000 bytes y KiB (binario) son 1.024. Los discos usan decimales y los sistemas operativos a menudo binarios — de ahí la confusión clásica. --- # Cortar Audio — Recorta MP3 y Crea Tonos de Llamada > Recorta el inicio y el final de un audio, localmente en tu navegador. Exporta MP3, WAV o un tono de llamada M4R para iPhone — sin subir el archivo. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/cortar-audio ## About Selecciona sobre la forma de onda, escucha el resultado y exporta el fragmento — incluso como tono de llamada para iPhone. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: elige el audio (o un video), arrastra sobre la onda para seleccionar el fragmento, escúchalo y exporta en MP3, WAV o M4R. Nada se sube. ## Cómo cortar un audio 1. **Añade el archivo** — MP3, WAV, M4A… o incluso un video (se toma su audio). 2. **Selecciona el fragmento** — arrastra sobre la forma de onda; escúchalo antes de exportar. 3. **Exporta** — MP3 para compartir, WAV para editar o M4R como tono de iPhone. ## Tonos de llamada para iPhone El formato M4R es el que usa iOS para los tonos: elige un fragmento de 30–40 segundos, activa los fundidos y exporta. El archivo se puede añadir al iPhone desde Finder o iTunes. Relacionado: [Unir audio](https://toolpantry.app/es/unir-audio.html) para combinar fragmentos y [Video a MP3](https://toolpantry.app/es/video-a-mp3.html) para extraer audio de un video. ## Notes Arrastra sobre la onda para seleccionar; arrastra los bordes para afinar; arrastra dentro para mover la selección. Los fundidos se aplican al exportar (y también los oirás en la vista previa). Los archivos largos se decodifican en memoria — hasta una hora de audio funciona bien. Arrastra sobre la onda para seleccionar; arrastra los bordes para afinar. Los fundidos se aplican al exportar. ## FAQ **¿Puedo cortar el audio de un video?** Sí — añade el MP4 o MOV y la herramienta trabaja con su pista de audio, exportando solo el fragmento de sonido. **¿Para qué sirve el fundido?** Suaviza el inicio y el final del fragmento para que no corte en seco — ideal para tonos de llamada y clips de presentación. --- # Cortar Video Online — Recorta MP4 sin Perder Calidad > Recorta el inicio y el final de un video MP4 o MOV sin re-codificar, directamente en tu navegador. Sin subir el archivo y sin pérdida de calidad. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/cortar-video ## About Elige el inicio y el final, y descarga el fragmento — los datos se copian tal cual, así que no hay pérdida de calidad. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: elige el MP4, mueve el cursor al punto deseado y pulsa "Fijar inicio" y "Fijar final". El corte empieza en el fotograma clave más cercano, sin re-codificar. ## Cómo cortar un video 1. **Añade el MP4 o MOV** — se reproduce en la vista previa. 2. **Marca inicio y final** — con los botones o escribiendo los segundos exactos. 3. **Corta y descarga** — el clip nuevo se copia sin re-codificar: calidad intacta. ## Lo que debes saber Cortar sin re-codificar es instantáneo y sin pérdida, pero el inicio se alinea al fotograma clave más cercano. Si necesitas precisión absoluta, re-codifica con [Comprimir video](https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-video.html). Relacionado: [Unir videos](https://toolpantry.app/es/unir-videos.html) para combinar varios clips y [Video a MP3](https://toolpantry.app/es/video-a-mp3.html) si solo quieres el audio. ## Notes Como los datos se copian en vez de re-codificarse, el corte empieza en el fotograma clave anterior a tu marca (normalmente a menos de un segundo) — la herramienta te dice el inicio exacto que usó. ¿Necesitas un corte exacto o un archivo más pequeño? Eso es [Comprimir video](https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-video.html), que sí re-codifica. Como los datos se copian en vez de re-codificarse, el corte empieza en el fotograma clave anterior a tu marca (normalmente a menos de un segundo) — la herramienta te dice el inicio exacto que usó. ## FAQ **¿Se pierde calidad al cortar?** No. Las pistas se copian sin re-codificar, así que el fragmento conserva la calidad del original. **¿El corte es exacto al segundo?** El inicio se ajusta al fotograma clave más cercano por delante de tu marca (normalmente a menos de 1–2 segundos). La herramienta te muestra el inicio real usado. --- # Crear Currículum — Gratis, Sin Registro, PDF Listo > Crea un currículum limpio y compatible con sistemas ATS en tu navegador y descárgalo en PDF — sin cuenta, sin marca de agua y sin subir nada. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/creador-de-curriculum ## About Rellena el formulario, mira la vista previa en vivo y descarga un currículum de una columna — compatible con filtros ATS y sin que tus datos salgan del navegador. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: escribe tus datos en el formulario — la vista previa se actualiza sola. Añade experiencia y formación, y pulsa Descargar PDF. El archivo se genera localmente; nada se sube. ## Cómo crear un currículum 1. **Empieza por la cabecera** — nombre, puesto en una línea y datos de contacto. El reclutador debe saber quién eres en tres segundos. 2. **Experiencia con números** — un logro por línea, empezando con un verbo de acción: "Reduje un 40% el tiempo de alta rediseñando el flujo". 3. **Descarga y revisa** — abre el PDF, comprueba cada línea y guarda con tu nombre en el archivo. ## Qué hace un currículum compatible con ATS **Una sola columna** — las maquetas a dos columnas confunden al software de análisis. **Nombres de sección estándar** — Experiencia, Formación, Habilidades. **Texto real, sin imágenes** — esta herramienta genera texto seleccionable. **Palabras clave de la oferta** — usa los mismos términos que el anuncio. Con menos de 10 años de experiencia, intenta que quepa en una página. ## Notes Tu borrador se guarda solo en este navegador (localStorage) para que puedas volver — "Borrar borrador" lo elimina por completo. El PDF usa fuentes estándar y una sola columna a propósito: el software de reclutamiento lo lee perfectamente. Tu borrador se guarda solo en este navegador (localStorage) para que puedas volver. El PDF usa fuentes estándar y una sola columna a propósito: el software de reclutamiento lo lee perfectamente. ## FAQ **¿Es realmente gratis?** Sí — sin cuenta, sin marca de agua y sin pago al descargar. El PDF se genera localmente en tu navegador con un motor de código abierto. **¿Dónde se guardan mis datos?** Solo en tu propio navegador, como borrador local para que puedas seguir editando. Nada se sube a ningún sitio. El botón "Borrar borrador" los elimina por completo. --- # Dividir PDF — Separa un PDF en Páginas Individuales > Divide un PDF en un archivo por página, localmente en tu navegador. Sin subir el documento ni crear una cuenta. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/dividir-pdf ## About Convierte un PDF de varias páginas en archivos de una página cada uno, directamente en tu navegador. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: elige el PDF y pulsa Dividir: obtendrás un archivo por página. Tu navegador puede pedir permiso para varias descargas. ## Cómo dividir un PDF 1. **Añade el PDF** — el número de páginas se detecta localmente. 2. **Pulsa Dividir PDF** — cada página se exporta como un archivo independiente. 3. **Guarda los archivos** — revisa la carpeta de descargas de tu navegador. ## Lo que debes saber La división conserva la calidad original porque las páginas se copian sin recomprimir. ¿Necesitas combinar esto con otro documento? [Unir PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/unir-pdf.html). ¿Solo quieres reducir el tamaño? [Comprimir PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-pdf.html). ## Notes Se crean archivos llamados split-page-01.pdf, split-page-02.pdf, etc. Tu navegador puede pedir permiso para varias descargas. ## FAQ **¿Dividir sube mi documento?** No. El PDF se procesa y cada archivo de salida se genera en esta pestaña. **¿Puedo extraer solo algunas páginas?** Esta herramienta divide todas; para rangos específicos usa Comprimir o extrae primero las páginas que necesitas. --- # Eliminar Metadatos de un PDF — Borra Autor y Fechas > Borra los metadatos de un PDF — autor, programa, fechas — localmente en tu navegador. Conserva cada página y cada píxel — sin subir el documento. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/eliminar-metadatos-pdf ## About Elimina la información oculta del documento — quién lo creó, con qué programa, cuándo — antes de compartirlo. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: elige el PDF, revisa los metadatos que lleva y pulsa Descargar copia limpia. Cada página se conserva exactamente igual. ## Qué son los metadatos de un PDF Todo PDF puede llevar información oculta: el nombre del autor, el programa con el que se creó, las fechas de creación y modificación, y a veces el título interno del documento. No se ve al abrir el archivo, pero viaja con él. ## Cuándo conviene borrarlos Antes de publicar un PDF en la web, enviarlo a un cliente o subirlo a un portal: los metadatos pueden revelar tu nombre completo, tu sistema operativo o el historial de ediciones. Esta herramienta te muestra primero qué lleva el documento y luego descarga una copia sin nada de eso. Relacionado: [Marca de agua](https://toolpantry.app/es/marca-de-agua-pdf.html) y [Comprimir PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-pdf.html). ## Notes La copia limpia conserva cada página y cada píxel; solo se eliminan las estructuras de metadatos (diccionario Info y XMP). Los PDF cifrados no se pueden procesar — quita primero la contraseña. La copia limpia conserva cada página y cada píxel; solo se eliminan las estructuras de metadatos (diccionario Info y XMP). ## FAQ **¿Se modifica el contenido visible?** No. Páginas, texto e imágenes quedan idénticos; solo desaparecen las estructuras de metadatos (Info y XMP). **¿Funciona con PDF protegidos?** No — los PDF cifrados no se pueden procesar sin la contraseña. Quita primero la protección y vuelve a intentarlo. --- # Eliminar Páginas de un PDF — Borra las Que Sobran > Borra páginas concretas de un PDF y descarga una copia limpia, localmente en tu navegador. Indica páginas como 2, 5-7 — sin subir el documento. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/eliminar-paginas-pdf ## About Quita las páginas que no quieres — la publicidad del final, una hoja en blanco, un anexo — y descarga el documento recortado. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: elige el PDF, escribe las páginas a borrar (ej. 2, 5-7) y pulsa Borrar y descargar. El archivo nuevo se genera localmente. ## Cómo borrar páginas de un PDF 1. **Añade el PDF** — se detecta el total de páginas. 2. **Escribe qué borrar** — por ejemplo 2, 5-7. 3. **Descarga** — un PDF nuevo sin esas páginas; el original queda intacto. ## Lo que debes saber Al reconstruir el archivo, las páginas borradas no quedan "ocultas" dentro: el contenido se elimina de verdad, lo que también reduce el peso. Los metadatos del documento se limpian en el proceso. Relacionado: [Extraer páginas](https://toolpantry.app/es/extraer-paginas-pdf.html) para lo contrario y [Comprimir PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-pdf.html) para reducir el tamaño. ## Notes Los rangos son inclusivos y empiezan en 1: "5-7" elimina las páginas 5, 6 y 7. El resultado se reconstruye página a página, así que el contenido eliminado desaparece por completo del archivo (y los metadatos se limpian de paso). Guarda el original — esta herramienta crea un PDF nuevo. El resultado se reconstruye página a página, así que el contenido eliminado desaparece por completo del archivo (y los metadatos se limpian de paso). ## FAQ **¿Las páginas borradas se pueden recuperar?** No del archivo nuevo — el contenido se elimina por completo. Conserva el PDF original hasta estar seguro. **¿Qué pasa con los metadatos?** Se limpian durante la reconstrucción: el PDF nuevo no arrastra la información del documento original. --- # Escalar Imagen — Amplía Fotos 2×, 3× o 4× Gratis > Amplía una imagen 2×, 3× o 4× localmente en tu navegador, con suavizado y enfoque ligero. Comparativa honesta antes/después — sin subir la foto. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/escalar-imagen ## About Duplica o cuadruplica el tamaño de una imagen con remuestreo de calidad y un enfoque ligero — y compara antes/después al 100% antes de descargar. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: elige la imagen, selecciona 2×–4× y descarga. La comparativa al 100% muestra exactamente qué se gana. La foto nunca se sube. ## Cómo ampliar una imagen 1. **Añade la foto** — JPG, PNG o WebP. 2. **Elige el factor** — 2× para la mayoría de casos; 4× cuando necesitas dimensiones grandes y la fuente es nítida. 3. **Compara y descarga** — mira la comparativa al 100% y decide con los ojos, no con la fe. ## Qué esperar (sin promesas falsas) Ampliar no inventa detalle: esta herramienta remuestrea con suavizado de calidad y aplica un enfoque ligero para compensar. Fotos algo borrosas mejoran; fotos muy comprimidas mostrarán sus artefactos más grandes. Para resultados de "IA que inventa detalle" necesitas modelos pesados que no caben en una página web honesta. Relacionado: [Comprimir imagen a 1MB](https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-imagen-1mb.html) y [Recortar imagen](https://toolpantry.app/es/recortar-imagen.html). ## Notes Las comparativas muestran un recorte de 160×160 al 100% — así se juzga el remuestreo con honestidad. El enfoque se omite en salidas muy grandes para no saturar la memoria. Las comparativas muestran un recorte de 160×160 al 100% — así se juzga el remuestreo con honestidad. ## FAQ **¿La ampliación añade detalle real?** No — remuestrea y enfoca con calidad, pero no inventa información. La comparativa al 100% te muestra exactamente el resultado antes de descargar. **¿Hasta cuánto puedo ampliar?** Hasta 4×. Más allá, el archivo crece mucho y la falta de detalle se hace evidente. --- # Extraer Páginas de un PDF — Quédate Solo con las Que Quieras > Extrae páginas concretas de un PDF en un archivo nuevo, localmente en tu navegador. Indica rangos como 1,3-5 y descarga — sin subir el documento. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/extraer-paginas-pdf ## About Crea un PDF nuevo con las páginas que elijas — por ejemplo solo la 1 y de la 3 a la 5 — sin tocar el original. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: elige el PDF, escribe las páginas a conservar (ej. 1,3-5) y pulsa Extraer. El archivo nuevo se genera en tu dispositivo. ## Cómo extraer páginas de un PDF 1. **Añade el PDF** — se detecta el total de páginas. 2. **Escribe el rango** — por ejemplo 2-4,7 para las páginas 2, 3, 4 y 7. 3. **Descarga** — un PDF nuevo solo con esas páginas; el original no se toca. ## Lo que debes saber Extraer conserva la calidad original porque las páginas se copian sin recomprimir. ¿Necesitas lo contrario — quitar páginas? Usa [Eliminar páginas de PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/eliminar-paginas-pdf.html). ¿Separar todas las páginas en archivos sueltos? [Dividir PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/dividir-pdf.html). ## Notes Los rangos empiezan en 1 y son inclusivos: 1,3-5 conserva las páginas 1, 3, 4 y 5 en ese orden. Los rangos empiezan en 1 y son inclusivos: 1,3-5 conserva las páginas 1, 3, 4 y 5 en ese orden. ## FAQ **¿Qué formato de rango acepta?** Números separados por comas y rangos con guion: 1,3-5 conserva las páginas 1, 3, 4 y 5. También puede invertir el orden: 5-3 las pone al revés. **¿Se sube el documento?** No. Las páginas se leen y se copian al archivo nuevo dentro de tu navegador. --- # Firmar PDF — Firma Online Sin Subir el Documento > Añade una firma visual a páginas PDF, incluidas páginas giradas. Ajusta la posición, previsualiza y exporta en tu navegador, sin subir el documento. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/firmar-pdf ## About Dibuja, escribe o sube una firma, arrástrala a su sitio y descarga el documento firmado — todo en tu dispositivo. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: elige el PDF, crea tu firma (a mano, con texto o una foto) y arrástrala sobre la página. El documento y la firma nunca salen de tu navegador. ## Elige el siguiente paso Para compartir una vista como imagen, usa [PDF a JPG](https://toolpantry.app/es/pdf-a-jpg). Para reducir un escaneo, trabaja primero sobre una copia sin firmar con [Comprimir PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-pdf): esa herramienta convierte las páginas en imágenes y no es adecuada para conservar formularios editables. Mantén siempre el original. ## Cómo firmar un PDF 1. **Añade el PDF** — las páginas se renderizan localmente. 2. **Crea tu firma** — dibújala, escríbela o sube una foto de tu firma en papel. 3. **Coloca y descarga** — arrástrala a su sitio, ajusta el tamaño y guarda el PDF firmado. ## Lo que debes saber La herramienta añade una imagen de firma y no crea ni verifica una firma digital basada en certificados. Modificar un PDF que ya tiene una firma digital puede afectar a su validación. Guarda el original y comprueba los requisitos del destinatario. Las páginas giradas se procesan, no se omiten. ## Notes La firma se estampa como imagen — una firma visual, no una firma digital certificada. Guarda el original por si quieres rehacer la colocación. ## FAQ **¿Qué tipo de firma añade?** Añade una imagen visual de firma. No crea ni verifica una firma digital basada en certificados. Comprueba qué formato de firma acepta el destinatario. **¿Funciona en páginas giradas?** Sí. Se procesan páginas con rotación de 0°, 90°, 180° y 270°, usando el área visible de cada página para colocar la firma. **¿Qué hace Añadir a todas las páginas?** Usa el mismo ancho y posición relativos en cada página visible, conserva las proporciones de la firma y la ajusta para que quepa. Revisa el resultado cuando las páginas tienen tamaños distintos. **¿Se eliminan los formularios?** La herramienta no aplana intencionadamente los formularios al añadir la imagen. Conserva el original y comprueba los campos y su apariencia en el archivo exportado, sobre todo en formularios complejos. **¿Se sube el documento?** No. El PDF y la firma se procesan en tu navegador. El archivo de entrada tiene un límite de 60 MB. --- # Foto Carnet — Crea Fotos de Pasaporte y Visa Gratis > Crea fotos tamaño carnet para pasaporte, visa o documentos oficiales, localmente en tu navegador. Presets por país, guías y hoja 4×6 — sin subir la foto. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/foto-carnet ## About Recorta y dimensiona una foto con las medidas oficiales de pasaporte y visa — y descarga una hoja 4×6 lista para imprimir. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: elige la foto, selecciona el país o documento, ajusta posición y zoom con las guías, y descarga la foto sola o una hoja 4×6 con varias copias. ## Cómo hacer una foto carnet 1. **Añade la foto** — idealmente de frente, con fondo claro y buena luz. 2. **Elige el preset** — EE. UU. 2×2 in, 35×45 mm, China 33×48 mm o Canadá 50×70 mm. 3. **Ajusta con las guías** — la línea de ojos debe caer en la guía; descarga la foto sola o la hoja 4×6 con copias. ## Lo que debes saber La mayoría de requisitos piden: cara centrada, expresión neutra, sin gafas de sol, fondo liso claro y ojos en la franja superior. La hoja 4×6 in trae varias copias con recorte listo para la tienda de fotos. Verifica siempre las exigencias exactas de tu trámite. Relacionado: [Recortar imagen](https://toolpantry.app/es/recortar-imagen.html) y [Comprimir a 1MB](https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-imagen-1mb.html) para portales con límite. ## Notes Arrastra la foto para moverla, usa la rueda o el deslizador para el zoom. Usa una foto con fondo liso y claro — esta herramienta ajusta tamaño y posición, pero no quita fondos. Arrastra la foto para moverla, usa la rueda o el deslizador para el zoom. Usa una foto con fondo liso y claro — la herramienta no quita fondos. ## FAQ **¿Qué medidas cubre?** EE. UU. (2×2 in), UE/Reino Unido/India/Australia (35×45 mm), China (33×48 mm) y Canadá (50×70 mm) — los presets más pedidos. **¿Quita el fondo?** No — esta herramienta ajusta tamaño y posición. Usa una foto con fondo liso claro, como piden los requisitos oficiales. --- # Generador de Código QR — Gratis, Sin Registro > Genera códigos QR para URLs, texto, email o teléfono, localmente en tu navegador. Descarga el PNG en alta resolución — sin subir nada y sin cuenta. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/generador-de-codigo-qr ## About Convierte una URL, un texto o un contacto en un código QR descargable — generado localmente, sin registro y sin caducidad. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: elige el tipo de contenido, pega el dato, selecciona el tamaño y pulsa Generar. Descarga el PNG y pruébalo con tu móvil. ## Cómo generar un código QR 1. **Elige el tipo** — URL, texto, email o teléfono; el QR se formatea según el tipo. 2. **Pega el contenido** — cuanto más corto, más simple y legible será el patrón. 3. **Genera y descarga** — PNG de 512px va bien para pantalla; 1024px para imprimir. ## Lo que debes saber Estos QR son estáticos: no caducan y no permiten cambiar el destino después. Si necesitas métricas o editar la URL más tarde, eso requiere un QR dinámico con redirección, que esta herramienta no hace. Para imprimir, usa el tamaño 1024px y deja margen blanco alrededor. Relacionado: [Generador de contraseñas](https://toolpantry.app/es/generador-de-contrasenas.html) y [Contador de palabras](https://toolpantry.app/es/contador-de-palabras.html). ## Notes Los códigos QR son estáticos: el contenido va dentro del propio patrón. Comprueba el código descargado con tu móvil antes de imprimirlo o publicarlo. Los códigos QR son estáticos: el contenido va dentro del propio patrón. Comprueba el código descargado con tu móvil antes de imprimirlo o publicarlo. ## FAQ **¿Los códigos caducan?** No. Son estáticos: el contenido vive en el patrón y funciona para siempre. **¿Puedo cambiar la URL después?** No en un QR estático. Cambiar el destino requiere un QR dinámico con redirección externa. --- # Generador de Contraseñas Seguras — Gratis y Local > Genera contraseñas aleatorias y seguras en tu navegador. Elige longitud y tipos de caracteres y copia el resultado — nada se envía ni se guarda. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/generador-de-contrasenas ## About Crea contraseñas aleatorias con la longitud y los caracteres que elijas — generadas localmente y nunca enviadas a ningún sitio. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: ajusta la longitud, marca los tipos de caracteres y pulsa Generar. Copia el resultado y guárdalo en tu gestor de contraseñas. ## Cómo generar una contraseña segura 1. **Elige la longitud** — 16–20 caracteres es un buen punto de partida para cuentas importantes. 2. **Marca los tipos de caracteres** — todos activados maximiza la variedad. 3. **Genera y copia** — guarda la contraseña en tu gestor de contraseñas, no en una nota. ## Lo que debes saber La aleatoriedad usa el generador criptográfico del navegador (Web Crypto), el mismo que usan las aplicaciones de seguridad. Una contraseña larga y única por cuenta es la mejor defensa contra el relleno de credenciales. Relacionado: [Generador de código QR](https://toolpantry.app/es/generador-de-codigo-qr.html) y [Contador de palabras](https://toolpantry.app/es/contador-de-palabras.html). ## Notes Para cuentas importantes, usa un gestor de contraseñas y una contraseña única. Esta página no guarda el resultado generado. Para cuentas importantes, usa un gestor de contraseñas y una contraseña única. Esta página no guarda el resultado generado. ## FAQ **¿Se envía mi contraseña a algún sitio?** No. Se genera en tu navegador con Web Crypto y no se guarda ni se transmite. **¿Qué longitud es segura?** 16 caracteres o más con variedad de tipos es sólido para la mayoría de cuentas. Más longitud siempre gana a más símbolos. --- # Generador de Memes — Crea Memes Online Gratis (Sin Marca) > Crea memes con tu imagen o una de ejemplo: texto arriba y abajo, fuente Impact, contorno ajustable. Todo local, sin marca de agua y sin subir fotos. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/generador-de-memes ## About Pon texto arriba y abajo a cualquier imagen, ajusta fuente, tamaño y contorno, y descarga el PNG — sin marca de agua ni registros. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: elige una imagen (o usa la de ejemplo), escribe los textos, ajusta el estilo y descarga el PNG. La imagen nunca se sube. ## Cómo hacer un meme 1. **Elige una imagen** — tu foto o la de ejemplo para probar. 2. **Escribe los textos** — arriba y abajo; el estilo clásico de meme usa mayúsculas con contorno negro. 3. **Ajusta y descarga** — fuente, tamaño, colores y contorno se ven en vivo; descarga el PNG. ## Lo que debes saber El estilo clásico (Impact, mayúsculas, contorno grueso) funciona porque el texto se lee sobre cualquier fondo. Para memes de redes, exporta y sube directo — el PNG va sin marca de agua. Respeta los derechos de las imágenes que uses. Relacionado: [Recortar imagen](https://toolpantry.app/es/recortar-imagen.html) y [Generador de QR](https://toolpantry.app/es/generador-de-codigo-qr.html). ## Notes El texto se dibuja localmente con Canvas. Sin marca de agua, sin cuenta y sin subir imágenes. El texto se dibuja localmente con Canvas. Sin marca de agua, sin cuenta y sin subir imágenes. ## FAQ **¿Lleva marca de agua?** No — el PNG se descarga limpio, sin marcas ni registros. **¿Se sube mi imagen?** No. El texto se dibuja sobre la imagen dentro de tu navegador. --- # GIF a MP4 — Convierte GIF Animados en Video Ligero > Convierte un GIF animado en MP4, localmente en tu navegador. El video resultante pesa varias veces menos — sin subir el GIF y sin cuenta. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/gif-a-mp4 ## About Convierte un GIF animado en un MP4 que pesa una fracción — mismo movimiento, sin el peso del GIF. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: elige el GIF, pulsa Convertir a MP4 y descarga. Una pasada de la animación se codifica localmente a tamaño y ritmo originales. ## Cómo convertir un GIF a MP4 1. **Añade el GIF** — la vista previa muestra la animación. 2. **Convierte** — cada fotograma se codifica como video H.264. 3. **Descarga el MP4** — mismo movimiento, mucho menos peso. ## Por qué el MP4 gana al GIF El GIF guarda cada fotograma como una imagen completa con 256 colores; el MP4 solo guarda lo que cambia entre fotogramas. La misma animación puede pasar de 8 MB en GIF a menos de 1 MB en MP4, y además el MP4 admite muchos más colores y se ve más suave. Relacionado: [Video a GIF](https://toolpantry.app/es/video-a-gif.html) (la dirección contraria) y [Comprimir video](https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-video.html). ## Notes Se codifica una pasada de la animación al tamaño y ritmo originales del GIF. El MP4 suele pesar varias veces menos que el GIF para la misma animación. Se codifica una pasada de la animación al tamaño y ritmo originales del GIF. El MP4 suele pesar varias veces menos. ## FAQ **¿El MP4 hace bucle como el GIF?** Los reproductores de video no repiten solos, pero casi todas las plataformas (redes, chats, webs) permiten activar la reproducción en bucle o lo hacen automáticamente. **¿Se pierde calidad?** La animación se re-codifica una vez a su tamaño original: visualmente idéntica para GIFs de paleta limitada, y sin el ruido de color típico del GIF. --- # Grabadora de Voz Online — Graba y Exporta MP3 o WAV > Graba tu voz con el micrófono y exporta MP3 o WAV, localmente en tu navegador. Pausa, revisa y descarga — sin cuenta y sin subir las grabaciones. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/grabadora-de-voz ## About Graba notas de voz, ideas o entrevistas y exporta el resultado como MP3 o WAV — todo se queda en tu dispositivo. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: pulsa Grabar, permite el micrófono, habla y pulsa Detener. Revisa la toma y exporta en MP3 o WAV. Las grabaciones nunca salen de tu navegador. ## Cómo grabar tu voz 1. **Pulsa Grabar** — el navegador pedirá permiso para el micrófono la primera vez. 2. **Habla** — el medidor muestra el nivel; puedes pausar y continuar. 3. **Revisa y exporta** — escucha la toma y descarga en MP3 (ligero) o WAV (máxima calidad). ## Lo que debes saber La grabación ocurre con la API de audio del navegador: el sonido va directo del micrófono a tu dispositivo, sin pasar por ningún servidor. El MP3 se codifica al exportar (128–320 kbps); el WAV conserva la calidad completa del micrófono. Para notas de voz y entrevistas, 192 kbps es más que suficiente. Relacionado: [Cortar audio](https://toolpantry.app/es/cortar-audio.html) y [Convertir audio](https://toolpantry.app/es/conversor-de-audio.html). ## Notes El navegador pide permiso para el micrófono una vez; ese aviso es del navegador, no nuestro. Mantén la pestaña abierta mientras grabas — recargar pierde la toma. ¿Quieres recortar los extremos? Exporta y ajústalo en el [cortador de audio](https://toolpantry.app/es/cortar-audio.html). El navegador pide permiso para el micrófono una vez; ese aviso es del navegador, no nuestro. Mantén la pestaña abierta mientras grabas. ## FAQ **¿Se suben mis grabaciones?** No. El audio va del micrófono a tu dispositivo y se queda ahí; la exportación también ocurre localmente. **¿Qué formato elijo?** MP3 a 192 kbps para notas de voz y compartir; WAV si vas a editar o necesitas la máxima calidad. --- # HEIC a JPG — Convierte Fotos de iPhone a JPG Gratis > Convierte fotos HEIC de iPhone a JPG localmente en tu navegador. Elige la calidad y descarga — sin subir nada y sin cuenta. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/heic-a-jpg ## About Convierte los archivos HEIC de tu iPhone en JPG que se abre en cualquier parte — decodificado localmente en tu navegador. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: añade tu archivo .heic o .heif, elige la calidad JPG y descarga. El decodificador se carga una vez y todo se ejecuta en tu dispositivo. ## Cómo convertir HEIC a JPG 1. **Añade tu archivo HEIC o HEIF** — arrástralo o búscalo; el decodificador se carga una vez. 2. **Ajusta la calidad JPG** — 85% sirve para casi todo; baja si un portal limita el tamaño. 3. **Descarga el JPG** — previsualiza y guarda. Tu HEIC original no se toca. ## Por qué el HEIC da problemas Windows y muchos editores no abren HEIC porque el códec HEVC que lleva dentro necesita licencias que muchos programas no pagan. Convertir a JPG hace que la foto se abra en cualquier parte. ¿Vas a Windows? Tienes la guía completa en [HEIC to JPG on Windows](https://toolpantry.app/blog/how-to-convert-heic-to-jpg-on-windows.html) (en inglés). Relacionado: [HEIC a PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/heic-a-pdf.html) para juntar fotos en un documento. ## Notes El decodificador (~1,3 MB) se descarga una vez por visita; después todo ocurre localmente. Las fotos en ráfaga contienen varias imágenes — esta herramienta convierte la principal. ## FAQ **¿Se sube mi foto?** No. El decodificador se descarga a tu navegador y se ejecuta localmente — la foto nunca sale de tu dispositivo. **¿Por qué convertir aumenta el tamaño?** El HEIC comprime mejor que el JPG: es normal que el JPG pese algo más. A cambio, se abre en cualquier programa. --- # HEIC a PDF — Convierte Fotos de iPhone en un Solo PDF > Combina varias fotos HEIC de iPhone en un solo PDF, localmente en tu navegador. Cada foto en una página A4 — sin subir nada. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/heic-a-pdf ## About Convierte fotos HEIC del iPhone en un único PDF — una foto por página, decodificado localmente en tu navegador. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: añade una o varias fotos HEIC, pulsa Convertir y descarga un PDF con una foto por página A4. Nada se sube a ningún servidor. ## Cómo convertir fotos HEIC a PDF 1. **Añade una o varias fotos HEIC** — el decodificador se carga una vez. 2. **Pulsa Convertir** — cada foto se decodifica y se coloca en su página A4. 3. **Descarga el PDF** — un solo documento con todas las fotos. ## Cuándo usarla Portales que aceptan PDF pero rechazan fotos de iPhone, envíos de pruebas con varias imágenes como un solo archivo, o simplemente archivar una serie de fotos en un documento. Las fotos se re-codifican como JPEG dentro del PDF, así que el archivo puede pesar más que los HEIC originales — es normal y mantiene la calidad. Si el resultado supera un límite, pásalo por [Comprimir PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-pdf.html). Relacionado: [HEIC a JPG](https://toolpantry.app/es/heic-a-jpg.html) para imágenes sueltas. ## Notes Cada foto se coloca centrada en una página A4 conservando su proporción. El decodificador (~1,3 MB) se descarga una vez por visita. ## FAQ **¿Puedo añadir varias fotos?** Sí. Se convierten en un solo PDF con una foto por página A4, en el orden en que las añadiste. **¿Se sube algo?** No. El decodificador se carga en tu navegador y cada foto se convierte en tu dispositivo. --- # Imagen a SVG — Convierte JPG y PNG a Vector Gratis > Convierte una imagen JPG, PNG o WebP en un archivo SVG vectorial, localmente en tu navegador. Elige colores y detalle — sin subir nada y sin cuenta. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/imagen-a-svg ## About Convierte un JPG, PNG o WebP en un SVG real — un archivo de formas que escala a cualquier tamaño sin pixelarse. Todo ocurre en tu dispositivo. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: elige la imagen, ajusta el número de colores y el nivel de detalle, y pulsa Vectorizar. Previsualiza el SVG real y descárgalo — la imagen nunca se sube. ## Cómo convertir una imagen a SVG 1. **Elige la imagen** — un PNG con fondo transparente funciona genial para logos. 2. **Ajusta colores y detalle** — menos colores dan un archivo más limpio y ligero; más colores siguen de cerca al original. 3. **Vectoriza y descarga** — la vista previa es el SVG real; revísala y descarga. ## Qué puedes hacer con el SVG **Escalar sin límites:** imprime un logo a cualquier tamaño sin pixelarse. **Editar en software vectorial:** ábrelo en Illustrator, Figma o Inkscape y ajusta colores y formas. **Web más ligera:** un icono limpio en SVG suele pesar menos que en PNG y se ve más nítido. La vectorización es una aproximación fiel: empieza con 16 colores y detalle medio, y sube si la vista previa pierde algo importante. Relacionado: [PNG a JPG](https://toolpantry.app/es/png-a-jpg.html) y [Comprimir imagen a 2MB](https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-imagen-2mb.html). ## Notes La vectorización redibuja la imagen como trazos de color — ideal para logos, iconos y arte plano. Las fotos generan SVG pesados (cada cambio de tono es una forma), así que para ellas el JPG o WebP suele ser mejor opción. Las imágenes grandes se reducen antes de vectorizar para mantenerlo rápido. La vectorización redibuja la imagen como trazos de color — ideal para logos, iconos y arte plano. Las fotos generan SVG pesados; para ellas el JPG o WebP suele ser mejor. ## FAQ **¿Qué imágenes vectorizan mejor?** Los gráficos planos: logos, iconos, pegatinas, mapas, diagramas y arte tipo dibujo. Las fotos funcionan pero generan SVG muy pesados — para fotos, el JPG o el WebP es mejor formato. **¿El resultado es un vector real?** Sí — la salida es un SVG auténtico hecho de trazos de color, y escala a cualquier tamaño sin pixelarse. La vectorización aproxima el original: es un redibujado fiel, no una recuperación matemática perfecta. --- # Tool Pantry — Herramientas Online Gratis en Español > Herramientas online gratis en español: comprime y une PDF, convierte imágenes y video, extrae audio — todo en tu navegador, sin subir archivos. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/ ## Tools and resources (216) ### Images & design - **Compress images** — Make files lighter for websites, email, and stores. (https://toolpantry.app/image-compressor.md) - **Resize images** — Set a max width, height, or a social media preset. (https://toolpantry.app/image-compressor.md) - **Convert formats** — Turn PNGs into WebP, JPGs into PNGs, and more. (https://toolpantry.app/image-compressor.md) - **Crop for social** — Fill exact Open Graph, LinkedIn, Instagram, or YouTube sizes. (https://toolpantry.app/image-compressor.md) - **Make a favicon** — Turn a logo or image into a clean square icon in seconds. (https://toolpantry.app/image-compressor.md) - **Clean image data** — Re-encode a file locally to remove embedded metadata. (https://toolpantry.app/image-compressor.md) - **Image info** — Check dimensions, aspect ratio, format, and file size instantly. (https://toolpantry.app/image-info.md) - **Color palette** — Pull a useful six-color palette from any image. (https://toolpantry.app/image-palette.md) - **Color blindness simulator** — Preview common color-vision differences before you publish a design. (https://toolpantry.app/color-blindness-simulator.md) - **Color converter** — Translate HEX, RGB, HSL, and CMYK values with a live swatch and contrast hint. (https://toolpantry.app/color-converter.md) - **Image to Base64** — Turn a small image into a copyable data URI for HTML and CSS. (https://toolpantry.app/image-to-base64.md) - **Blur & pixelate** — Hide faces, names, and sensitive details before sharing. (https://toolpantry.app/image-blur.md) - **Split image grid** — Cut a photo into evenly sized tiles for social posts. (https://toolpantry.app/image-splitter.md) - **Add a watermark** — Place a light text mark on a photo and download a PNG. (https://toolpantry.app/image-watermark.md) - **Add text to photo** — Drag styled text onto any photo — no watermark, no upload. (https://toolpantry.app/add-text-to-photo.md) - **Pick image colors** — Sample exact HEX, RGB, and HSL values from any pixel. (https://toolpantry.app/image-color-picker.md) - **DPI calculator** — Convert pixel dimensions into print inches and centimeters. (https://toolpantry.app/image-dpi-calculator.md) - **Black & white** — Make a clean grayscale photo with adjustable contrast. (https://toolpantry.app/image-grayscale.md) - **Rotate image** — Turn or flip a photo 90°, 180°, or 270° locally. (https://toolpantry.app/rotate-image.md) - **Crop image** — Cut any area or lock a 1:1, 4:3, or 16:9 ratio. (https://toolpantry.app/crop-image.md) - **Passport photo maker** — Country sizes, eye-line guides, and a 4×6 in print sheet — all local. (https://toolpantry.app/passport-photo-maker.md) - **Image upscaler** — Enlarge 2×–4× with a classic resampler — no AI, no upload. (https://toolpantry.app/image-upscaler.md) - **Signature maker** — Draw or clean up a photo — transparent PNG for any document. (https://toolpantry.app/signature-maker.md) - **Bulk image resizer** — Resize a whole batch at once — download everything as one ZIP. (https://toolpantry.app/bulk-image-resizer.md) - **AI image checker** — Scan metadata for AI generator signatures and Content Credentials. (https://toolpantry.app/ai-image-checker.md) - **EXIF viewer** — See camera, GPS, and AI tags — then download a clean copy. (https://toolpantry.app/exif-viewer.md) - **Face blur** — Auto-detect or box faces and blur them — locally. (https://toolpantry.app/face-blur.md) - **Aspect ratio calculator** — Find a simplified ratio and calculate the missing image dimension. (https://toolpantry.app/aspect-ratio-calculator.md) - **Compress to 100KB** — Hit a file-size limit for forms, uploads, and email. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb.md) - **Compress to 20KB** — Extreme target size for ID photos and legacy forms. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-20kb.md) - **Compress to 50KB** — Check a 50,000-byte ceiling and any required pixel dimensions. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-50kb.md) - **Compress to 200KB** — Check bytes, required pixels and the preview before uploading. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-200kb.md) - **Compress to 500KB** — CMS and email-sized images with near-original quality. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-500kb.md) - **Compress to 1MB** — The universal upload line — get any photo under it. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-1mb.md) - **Compress to 2MB** — Job, visa, and portal caps with quality intact. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-2mb.md) - **Compress to 5MB** — Print labs and looser portal limits, handled locally. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-5mb.md) ### Utilities - **JSON formatter** — Format, validate, minify, and copy JSON locally. (https://toolpantry.app/json-formatter.md) - **UTM link builder** — Create campaign tracking URLs for analytics. (https://toolpantry.app/utm-builder.md) - **Password generator** — Make a random password without sending it anywhere. (https://toolpantry.app/password-generator.md) - **QR code generator** — Create a static QR code for a URL, text, email, or phone. (https://toolpantry.app/qr-code-generator.md) - **Time calculator** — Calculate hours, breaks, decimal time, and overnight shifts. (https://toolpantry.app/time-duration-calculator.md) - **Online timer & stopwatch** — Run a precise countdown or stopwatch with presets, pause, laps, and fullscreen. (https://toolpantry.app/online-timer.md) - **Percentage calculator** — Calculate percent of, percent change, increases, decreases, and reverse values. (https://toolpantry.app/percentage-calculator.md) - **Unit converter** — Convert length, mass, temperature, area, volume, speed, time, and data locally. (https://toolpantry.app/unit-converter.md) - **Scientific calculator** — Evaluate trigonometry, logarithms, powers, roots, and factorials locally. (https://toolpantry.app/scientific-calculator.md) - **Mortgage calculator** — Estimate payment, interest, taxes, insurance, PMI, HOA, and payoff time locally. (https://toolpantry.app/mortgage-calculator.md) - **Age calculator** — Find exact years, months, days, total days, and your next birthday locally. (https://toolpantry.app/age-calculator.md) - **Fraction calculator** — Add, subtract, multiply, divide, and compare fractions with reduced answers and working. (https://toolpantry.app/fraction-calculator.md) - **Tip calculator** — Calculate tip, tax, group total, round-up, and each person's share locally. (https://toolpantry.app/tip-calculator.md) - **GPA calculator** — Calculate weighted, unweighted, semester, and cumulative GPA from course credits locally. (https://toolpantry.app/gpa-calculator.md) - **Discount calculator** — Find sale price, savings, stacked discounts, sales tax, and checkout total locally. (https://toolpantry.app/discount-calculator.md) - **Loan calculator** — Estimate fixed-rate payment, total interest, payoff time, extra-payment savings, and amortization locally. (https://toolpantry.app/loan-calculator.md) - **BMI calculator** — Calculate adult BMI in metric or imperial units with category and healthy-weight range. (https://toolpantry.app/bmi-calculator.md) - **Number to words** — Spell out numbers and currency amounts for checks, invoices, contracts, and receipts. (https://toolpantry.app/number-to-words.md) - **Random number generator** — Generate batches with ranges, decimals, unique values, sorting, and copy-ready results. (https://toolpantry.app/random-number-generator.md) - **Time zone meeting planner** — Convert meeting times across cities and find shared working-hour windows with DST-aware local calculations. (https://toolpantry.app/timezone-meeting-planner.md) - **Roman numeral converter** — Convert integers and validate standard Roman numerals with subtractive notation and visible breakdowns. (https://toolpantry.app/roman-numeral-converter.md) - **Random name picker** — Draw winners without repeats, shuffle a list, or split people into balanced teams locally. (https://toolpantry.app/random-name-picker.md) - **Typing speed test** — Measure net and gross WPM, accuracy, errors, and characters per minute with local practice passages. (https://toolpantry.app/typing-test.md) - **Fancy text generator** — Turn plain text into bold, cursive, bubble, gothic, fullwidth, and other copy-ready Unicode styles. (https://toolpantry.app/fancy-text-generator.md) - **Lorem Ipsum generator** — Generate placeholder copy by paragraphs, sentences, words, or characters with plain, HTML, Markdown, and JSON output. (https://toolpantry.app/lorem-ipsum-generator.md) - **YouTube thumbnail downloader** — Preview and save maxres, HD, standard, medium, and default thumbnails from a YouTube URL or video ID. (https://toolpantry.app/youtube-thumbnail-downloader.md) - **EMI calculator** — Estimate monthly EMI, total interest, amortization, and the impact of monthly or one-time prepayments locally. (https://toolpantry.app/emi-calculator.md) - **Barcode generator** — Create Code 128, Code 39, EAN-13, or UPC labels. (https://toolpantry.app/barcode-generator.md) - **Invoice generator** — Calculate line items and print a simple invoice or PDF. (https://toolpantry.app/invoice-generator.md) - **Word counter** — Count words, characters, sentences, and reading time. (https://toolpantry.app/text-counter.md) - **Token counter** — Exact GPT token counts (o200k/cl100k) + Claude and Gemini estimates. (https://toolpantry.app/token-counter.md) - **Meta tag generator** — Create SEO, Open Graph, and Twitter card tags. (https://toolpantry.app/meta-tag-generator.md) - **World clock** — Check the current time in cities around the world. (https://toolpantry.app/world-clock.md) ### Developer - **UUID generator** — Generate v4 UUIDs in batches and copy or download them. (https://toolpantry.app/uuid-generator.md) - **Check API (docs)** — Free keyless API: score any site’s AI readiness, bulk up to 6. (https://toolpantry.app/api-docs.md) - **JWT decoder** — Inspect JWT header and payload claims locally without verification. (https://toolpantry.app/jwt-decoder.md) - **URL encoder / decoder** — Encode query values or decode URL text without sending it anywhere. (https://toolpantry.app/url-encoder-decoder.md) - **JSON ↔ CSV converter** — Convert arrays and tabular data locally, with quoted CSV support. (https://toolpantry.app/json-csv-converter.md) - **Regex tester** — Test JavaScript patterns, flags, captures, and replacements. (https://toolpantry.app/regex-tester.md) - **SHA hash generator** — Create SHA-256, SHA-384, or SHA-512 hashes from text locally. (https://toolpantry.app/hash-generator.md) - **Zip & unzip** — Create or open ZIP archives in your browser — no upload, no cap. (https://toolpantry.app/zip-tool.md) - **XML formatter** — Validate and pretty-print XML with readable indentation. (https://toolpantry.app/xml-formatter.md) - **Markdown preview** — Render headings, lists, links, and code into clean HTML locally. (https://toolpantry.app/markdown-preview.md) - **Cron expression tool** — Parse five-field cron syntax and see the next scheduled runs. (https://toolpantry.app/cron-expression-tool.md) - **IPv4 subnet calculator** — Calculate network ranges, masks, broadcasts, and usable hosts. (https://toolpantry.app/subnet-calculator.md) ### PDF - **JPG to PDF** — Combine JPG or PNG images into a clean, ordered PDF. (https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-pdf.md) - **PNG to PDF** — One PNG per page, transparency flattened onto white. (https://toolpantry.app/png-to-pdf.md) - **Merge PDF** — Join multiple PDF files in a chosen order directly in your browser. (https://toolpantry.app/merge-pdf.md) - **PDF metadata remover** — See title, author, and scanner tags — then strip them clean. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf-metadata-remover.md) - **Delete PDF pages** — Type page numbers or ranges and download the trimmed PDF. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf-page-delete.md) - **Rotate PDF pages** — Turn one page or all of them — click a thumbnail, save. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf-rotate.md) - **Watermark PDF** — Stamp text on every page — centered or tiled, live preview. (https://toolpantry.app/watermark-pdf.md) - **Fill PDF forms** — Type into form fields and save — no printing, no sign-up. (https://toolpantry.app/fill-pdf-forms.md) - **Text to Speech** — Read any text aloud with your device's voices — no upload. (https://toolpantry.app/text-to-speech.md) - **Image to SVG** — Trace JPG or PNG into real vector paths — local. (https://toolpantry.app/image-to-svg.md) - **Resume Builder** — Live preview, ATS-friendly PDF — draft stays local. (https://toolpantry.app/resume-builder.md) - **PDF to Word** — Editable .docx from any text PDF — local, no upload. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-word.md) - **LLM Token Calculator** — Real token counts + API cost across GPT, Claude, Gemini. (https://toolpantry.app/llm-token-calculator.md) - **Speech to Text** — Live dictation with automatic punctuation — in your browser. (https://toolpantry.app/speech-to-text.md) - **Text Chunker** — RAG-ready token-exact chunks + JSONL export. (https://toolpantry.app/text-chunker.md) - **MCP Config Generator** — Wire MCP servers into Claude Desktop, Cursor, VS Code. (https://toolpantry.app/mcp-config-generator.md) - **AI Background Remover** — On-device AI cutouts — transparent PNG, no upload. (https://toolpantry.app/background-remover.md) - **OCR — Image to Text** — Extract text from screenshots & scans, fully local. (https://toolpantry.app/ocr.md) - **AI Image Detector** — Check C2PA & metadata for AI-generation markers. (https://toolpantry.app/ai-image-detector.md) - **Document Scanner** — Photo → straightened scan → multi-page PDF. (https://toolpantry.app/document-scanner.md) - **PDF to text** — Copy or download the words with page markers. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-text.md) - **Extract PDF pages** — Keep selected pages from a PDF and download a smaller document. (https://toolpantry.app/extract-pdf-pages.md) - **YAML ↔ JSON converter** — Convert configuration data locally without uploading secrets. (https://toolpantry.app/yaml-json-converter.md) - **SQL formatter** — Turn dense SQL into readable clauses and indentation in your browser. (https://toolpantry.app/sql-formatter.md) - **XML ↔ JSON converter** — Move API payloads while keeping attributes and repeated elements visible. (https://toolpantry.app/xml-json-converter.md) - **Code minifier** — Minify JSON, HTML, CSS, or JavaScript locally before you ship. (https://toolpantry.app/minify-tool.md) - **HTML / CSS formatter** — Pretty-print HTML, CSS, or JavaScript with readable indentation in your browser. (https://toolpantry.app/html-formatter.md) - **CSS unit converter** — Convert PX, REM, and EM values, batch-rewrite CSS pixels, and build clamp(). (https://toolpantry.app/css-unit-converter.md) - **Split PDF** — Turn every PDF page into a separate local PDF download. (https://toolpantry.app/split-pdf.md) - **Rotate PDF** — Turn every page by 90, 180, or 270 degrees in your browser. (https://toolpantry.app/rotate-pdf.md) - **PDF to JPG** — Turn every page into a shareable JPG or PNG image. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-jpg.md) - **PDF to PNG** — Render PDF pages as PNG at your chosen resolution. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-png.md) - **Sign PDF** — Draw, type, or upload a signature — locally, no upload. (https://toolpantry.app/sign-pdf.md) - **Compress PDF** — Shrink scans and image-heavy PDFs to fit upload limits. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-pdf.md) ### Creator - **MOSS Image Layout Editor** — Place text and subjects, then export centered layout JSON for MOSS-Image. (https://toolpantry.app/moss-image-layout-editor.md) - **FLUX 3 Bounding Box Generator** — Draw a layout, describe each element, and export a prompt with precise coordinates. (https://toolpantry.app/flux-bounding-box-generator.md) - **Social media sizes** — Check Instagram, TikTok, YouTube, Facebook, LinkedIn, and Pinterest dimensions. (https://toolpantry.app/social-media-size-guide.md) - **Screen recorder** — Record screen, window, or tab in the browser — nothing uploaded. (https://toolpantry.app/screen-recorder.md) - **Photo collage** — Grid layouts, gaps, and social-ready sizes — watermark-free. (https://toolpantry.app/photo-collage.md) - **Images to GIF** — Animate a set of images into a looping GIF locally. (https://toolpantry.app/images-to-gif.md) - **Hashtag generator** — Build a transparent starter set for YouTube, TikTok, or Instagram. (https://toolpantry.app/hashtag-generator.md) - **YouTube tag generator** — Build, review, and copy a focused comma-separated tag list within a visible character budget. (https://toolpantry.app/youtube-tag-generator.md) - **Email signature generator** — Create a clean inline HTML signature for Gmail, Outlook, Apple Mail, or Thunderbird. (https://toolpantry.app/email-signature-generator.md) - **CSS gradient generator** — Build linear, radial, or conic backgrounds and copy the CSS locally. (https://toolpantry.app/css-gradient-generator.md) - **Meme generator** — Add classic captions to an image and download a clean PNG without a watermark. (https://toolpantry.app/meme-generator.md) - **Open Graph image** — Create a 1200×630 social sharing image and copy starter meta tags. (https://toolpantry.app/og-image-generator.md) - **SERP preview** — Preview an SEO title, URL, and description with local character and pixel checks. (https://toolpantry.app/serp-preview.md) - **SVG to PNG** — Rasterize an SVG to PNG or JPG with a scale and background choice. (https://toolpantry.app/svg-to-png.md) ### Text & data - **JSON diff** — Compare two JSON documents and inspect changed paths. (https://toolpantry.app/json-diff.md) - **Remove duplicate lines** — Clean, deduplicate, sort, copy, or download a text list. (https://toolpantry.app/line-tools.md) - **Unix timestamp converter** — Convert epoch seconds or milliseconds to readable dates. (https://toolpantry.app/timestamp-converter.md) - **HTML to Markdown** — Convert headings, links, lists, and basic tables for docs and prompts. (https://toolpantry.app/html-to-markdown.md) - **JSON validator** — Check JSON syntax, inspect parse errors, and copy a formatted result locally. (https://toolpantry.app/json-validator.md) - **JSON Schema validator** — Check types, required fields, properties, arrays, enums, and common limits locally. (https://toolpantry.app/json-schema-validator.md) ### Conversion - **WebP to JPG** — Convert a WebP image to a broadly compatible JPG with quality control. (https://toolpantry.app/webp-to-jpg.md) - **JPG to WebP** — Typically 25–35% smaller than JPG at the same visual quality. (https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-webp.md) - **AVIF to JPG** — Open modern web images in any app, editor, or form. (https://toolpantry.app/avif-to-jpg.md) - **AVIF to PNG** — Lossless output with transparency preserved. (https://toolpantry.app/avif-to-png.md) - **HEIC to JPG** — iPhone photos openable anywhere — converted locally. (https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-jpg.md) - **HEIC to PNG** — Lossless HEIC conversion for editing pipelines. (https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-png.md) - **HEIC to WebP** — iPhone photos to the lightest web format. (https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-webp.md) - **HEIC to PDF** — Turn iPhone photos into one PDF — nothing uploaded. (https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-pdf.md) - **Favicon generator** — Create browser, Apple touch, and app icon PNG sizes from one logo. (https://toolpantry.app/favicon-generator.md) - **PNG to ICO** — Pack 16–256 px into one favicon.ico — transparency kept. (https://toolpantry.app/png-to-ico.md) - **Video to MP3** — Pull audio from MP4, MOV, or WebM — 128–320 kbps, all local. (https://toolpantry.app/video-to-mp3.md) - **Compress video** — Compress MP4 locally and verify the actual output size. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-video.md) - **Video to GIF** — Trim an MP4 clip into a looping GIF — fps and width dials included. (https://toolpantry.app/video-to-gif.md) - **GIF to MP4** — Modern video from an old GIF — smaller, full color, local. (https://toolpantry.app/gif-to-mp4.md) - **Audio trimmer & ringtones** — Cut MP3s on a waveform — export MP3, WAV, or iPhone .m4r. (https://toolpantry.app/audio-trimmer.md) - **Voice recorder** — Record and save MP3/WAV — nothing streamed to a server. (https://toolpantry.app/voice-recorder.md) - **Merge audio** — Join MP3/WAV/M4A files into one track — order your way. (https://toolpantry.app/merge-audio.md) - **Audio converter** — M4A, WAV, OGG, FLAC → MP3 or WAV — local, no upload. (https://toolpantry.app/audio-converter.md) - **Video trimmer** — Cut MP4 without re-encoding — instant, lossless, local. (https://toolpantry.app/video-trimmer.md) - **Video face blur** — Box the faces, export a blurred MP4 — baked in, never uploaded. (https://toolpantry.app/face-blur-video.md) - **Rotate video** — Turn 90°/180° by writing metadata — instant, lossless, local. (https://toolpantry.app/rotate-video.md) - **Mute video** — Remove audio without re-encoding — seconds, zero quality loss. (https://toolpantry.app/mute-video.md) - **Frame extractor** — Grab any moment as a full-resolution PNG or JPG. (https://toolpantry.app/frame-extractor.md) - **Crop video** — Freeform or 9:16 / 1:1 / 4:5 presets for Reels, Shorts, IG. (https://toolpantry.app/crop-video.md) - **MOV to MP4** — Lossless container swap — copies the data, never re-encodes. (https://toolpantry.app/mov-to-mp4.md) - **Merge videos** — Join clips into one MP4 — letterboxed, ordered, watermark-free. (https://toolpantry.app/merge-video.md) - **JPG to PNG** — Convert a JPEG into a lossless PNG copy for editors and upload forms. (https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-png.md) - **PNG to WebP** — Make a smaller WebP copy while keeping transparent pixels. (https://toolpantry.app/png-to-webp.md) - **WebP to PNG** — Create a lossless PNG copy for editors and forms that reject WebP. (https://toolpantry.app/webp-to-png.md) - **PNG to JPG** — Export a compatible JPG with quality and transparency background controls. (https://toolpantry.app/png-to-jpg.md) ### SEO - **Schema markup generator** — Build Article, FAQ, Product, LocalBusiness, Organization, or WebSite JSON-LD. (https://toolpantry.app/schema-markup-generator.md) - **AI Agent Readiness Checker** — Score any site's AI-search readiness: llms.txt, Markdown, JSON-LD, robots, sitemap. (https://toolpantry.app/agent-ready-checker.md) - **AI Agent Readiness Report 2026** — We tested 184 popular tool sites: only 1.6% can serve Markdown to AI agents. (https://toolpantry.app/ai-agent-readiness-report.md) - **vs iLoveIMG** — Honest comparison: local vs server, breadth vs depth. (https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-iloveimg.md) - **vs TinyPNG** — Local vs cloud compression, limits, and target sizes. (https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-tinypng.md) - **vs Smallpdf** — Free core PDF ops vs advanced server editing. (https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-smallpdf.md) - **vs Adobe Acrobat online** — Core jobs vs the full (paid) PDF editor. (https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-adobe-acrobat-online.md) - **vs Zamzar** — Everyday formats local vs 1,100+ formats in the cloud. (https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-zamzar.md) - **vs CloudConvert** — One-off jobs vs API pipelines and batch scale. (https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-cloudconvert.md) - **vs PDF24** — Core and local vs broad and cloud (Windows app too). (https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-pdf24.md) - **File size limits 2026** — Gmail to WhatsApp to portals — every cap, with a local tool for each. (https://toolpantry.app/file-size-limits.md) - **Smallpdf alternatives** — Seven honest picks — free, local, no sign-up. (https://toolpantry.app/smallpdf-alternatives.md) - **iLovePDF alternatives** — Free limits compared; local options included. (https://toolpantry.app/ilovepdf-alternatives.md) - **Acrobat alternatives** — When you need editing — and when you don't. (https://toolpantry.app/adobe-acrobat-alternatives.md) - **PDF24 alternatives** — Free, ad-free routes for the same jobs. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf24-alternatives.md) - **Zamzar alternatives** — Convert without the upload. (https://toolpantry.app/zamzar-alternatives.md) - **CloudConvert alternatives** — Free converters and API options compared. (https://toolpantry.app/cloudconvert-alternatives.md) - **TinyPNG alternatives** — Compress images without batch caps. (https://toolpantry.app/tinypng-alternatives.md) - **iLoveIMG alternatives** — Compress, crop, convert — locally. (https://toolpantry.app/iloveimg-alternatives.md) ### Business - **Quote generator** — Create a clean estimate with line items and a validity date. (https://toolpantry.app/quote-generator.md) - **Quote to invoice** — Turn a completed quote into a printable invoice in one step. (https://toolpantry.app/quote-to-invoice.md) - **Receipt generator** — Make a simple payment receipt and save it as a PDF. (https://toolpantry.app/receipt-generator.md) - **Payment reminder email** — Write a polite follow-up for an unpaid invoice. (https://toolpantry.app/payment-reminder-email.md) - **Contractor estimate** — Prepare a job estimate for repairs, cleaning, or trade work. (https://toolpantry.app/contractor-estimate-generator.md) - **Hourly rate calculator** — Find a sustainable minimum rate from income and business costs. (https://toolpantry.app/hourly-rate-calculator.md) - **Project pricing calculator** — Turn hours, expenses, and a buffer into a project price. (https://toolpantry.app/project-pricing-calculator.md) - **Expense tracker** — Log project expenses, see the total, and download a CSV. (https://toolpantry.app/expense-tracker.md) - **Retainer pricing calculator** — Price a monthly service package from hours, costs, and capacity. (https://toolpantry.app/retainer-pricing-calculator.md) - **Timesheet calculator** — Track weekly hours, billable time, and the value of your work. (https://toolpantry.app/timesheet-calculator.md) - **Keyword cluster tool** — Group a pasted keyword list, remove duplicates, and export CSV. (https://toolpantry.app/keyword-cluster-tool.md) - **Client onboarding checklist** — Build a reusable project kickoff checklist and export Markdown. (https://toolpantry.app/client-onboarding-checklist.md) - **Proposal generator** — Turn a project brief into a clear service proposal. (https://toolpantry.app/proposal-generator.md) - **Statement of work** — Outline scope, deliverables, timeline, and exclusions. (https://toolpantry.app/statement-of-work-generator.md) - **Payment schedule** — Split a project price into deposit and milestone payments. (https://toolpantry.app/payment-schedule-calculator.md) - **Client intake form** — Prepare the questions you need before a project starts. (https://toolpantry.app/client-intake-form.md) - **Meeting agenda** — Create a focused agenda with decisions and action items. (https://toolpantry.app/meeting-agenda-generator.md) ### Ecommerce ops - **Dimensional weight** — Compare actual, DIM, and billable parcel weight. (https://toolpantry.app/dimensional-weight-calculator.md) - **Shipping cost estimator** — Model delivery fees, fuel surcharge, handling, and insurance. (https://toolpantry.app/shipping-cost-estimator.md) - **Landed cost calculator** — Estimate the true import cost per product unit. (https://toolpantry.app/landed-cost-calculator.md) - **Ecommerce profit margin** — Find profit, break-even price, and target-margin price. (https://toolpantry.app/ecommerce-profit-margin-calculator.md) - **Reorder point** — Plan stock replenishment from sales velocity and lead time. (https://toolpantry.app/reorder-point-calculator.md) - **CBM volume calculator** — Calculate carton volume, cubic feet, and volume per unit. (https://toolpantry.app/cbm-volume-calculator.md) - **Packaging fit checker** — Test product rotations, padding, and box utilization. (https://toolpantry.app/packaging-fit-calculator.md) - **Safety stock calculator** — Estimate an inventory buffer from demand and lead-time variability. (https://toolpantry.app/safety-stock-calculator.md) - **Free shipping threshold** — Set a delivery offer while protecting your target margin. (https://toolpantry.app/free-shipping-threshold-calculator.md) - **Inventory coverage** — See days on hand and expected coverage with incoming stock. (https://toolpantry.app/inventory-coverage-calculator.md) - **Inventory spreadsheet** — Generate a clean SKU and stock CSV template. (https://toolpantry.app/inventory-spreadsheet-generator.md) - **Inventory tracker** — Track stock value and flag products at their reorder point. (https://toolpantry.app/inventory-tracker.md) - **Inventory turnover** — Calculate stock turns and days of inventory held. (https://toolpantry.app/inventory-turnover-calculator.md) - **Download time** — Estimate transfer time from file size and connection speed. (https://toolpantry.app/download-time-calculator.md) - **Marketplace fees** — Break down fees, net payout, profit, and margin. (https://toolpantry.app/marketplace-fee-calculator.md) --- # JPG a PDF — Combina Imágenes en un Solo PDF (Gratis) > Convierte imágenes JPG y PNG en un PDF ordenado, directamente en tu navegador. Sin subir archivos ni crear una cuenta. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/jpg-a-pdf ## About Combina fotos y capturas JPG o PNG en un único PDF tamaño A4, con orden de páginas — todo local y sin subir nada. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: añade una o varias imágenes JPG o PNG, ordénalas con las flechas y exporta un PDF con una imagen por página A4. ## Cómo convertir JPG a PDF 1. **Añade una o varias imágenes** — fotos, escaneos o capturas; ordénalas como quieras. 2. **Revisa el orden** — las flechas suben y bajan cada imagen antes de crear el PDF. 3. **Descarga el PDF** — un solo archivo con todas las imágenes, creado en tu navegador. ## Lo que debes saber Casi todos los portales aceptan PDF mientras que los conjuntos de imágenes suelen ser rechazados o limitados. ¿Solo tienes algunas páginas y quieres extraerlas? Usa [Dividir PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/dividir-pdf.html); ¿necesitas unir esto con un PDF existente? [Unir PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/unir-pdf.html). ## Notes Las imágenes se colocan centradas en páginas A4 conservando su proporción. El motor de PDF se ejecuta dentro de esta pestaña. ## FAQ **¿Puedo elegir el orden de las páginas?** Sí. Usa las flechas junto a cada imagen para subirla o bajarla antes de crear el PDF. **¿Se suben mis imágenes?** No. El PDF se construye localmente en tu navegador. --- # Marca de Agua en PDF — Pon Texto en Cada Página > Añade una marca de agua de texto a todas las páginas de un PDF, localmente en tu navegador. Elige posición, rotación y opacidad — sin subir el archivo. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/marca-de-agua-pdf ## About Estampa un texto como CONFIDENCIAL, BORRADOR o tu nombre en cada página — el PDF se procesa en tu dispositivo. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: añade el PDF, escribe el texto de la marca, ajusta posición, opacidad y color con la vista previa, y descarga. Nada se sube. ## Cómo poner una marca de agua en un PDF 1. **Añade el PDF** — se renderiza la primera página como vista previa. 2. **Ajusta el texto y el estilo** — posición, rotación, opacidad, tamaño y color en vivo. 3. **Aplica y descarga** — la marca se dibuja en todas las páginas del documento. ## Lo que debes saber La marca es un texto vectorial: no tapa el contenido, se puede leer a través de ella con la opacidad adecuada y no altera el texto del documento. Para documentos que deben llevar tu firma, combínala con [Firmar PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/firmar-pdf.html). Relacionado: [Comprimir PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-pdf.html) y [Dividir PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/dividir-pdf.html). ## Notes La vista previa aproxima el resultado final (el renderizado exacto de la fuente ocurre en el PDF). Centrada + 20% de opacidad es el clásico aspecto de BORRADOR; el mosaico hace que un documento sea más difícil de reutilizar. La vista previa aproxima el resultado final (el renderizado exacto de la fuente ocurre en el PDF). Centrada + 20% de opacidad es el clásico aspecto de BORRADOR; el mosaico hace que un documento sea más difícil de reutilizar. ## FAQ **¿La marca de agua se puede quitar?** Al aplanarse en el contenido de la página, quitarla requiere editar el PDF con herramientas avanzadas — ese es justo el objetivo. **¿Se sube el documento?** No. Todo el proceso ocurre en tu navegador. --- # MOV a MP4 — Convierte Video de iPhone Sin Perder Calidad > Convierte un archivo MOV de iPhone o QuickTime a MP4 sin re-codificar, localmente en tu navegador. Calidad idéntica — sin subir el video. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/mov-a-mp4 ## About Convierte el MOV de tu iPhone en un MP4 que se reproduce en cualquier parte — los datos de video y audio se mueven intactos. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: elige el MOV, pulsa Convertir a MP4 y descarga. Es un cambio de contenedor, no una re-codificación: la calidad es exactamente la misma. ## Cómo convertir MOV a MP4 1. **Añade el MOV** — el video se reproduce en la vista previa. 2. **Convierte** — las pistas de video y audio se reempaquetan en MP4. 3. **Descarga** — mismo contenido bit a bit, compatible con todo. ## ¿Por qué convertir MOV a MP4? El MOV de Apple usa el mismo códec que el MP4 (H.264 o HEVC) dentro de otra envoltura: la conversión no toca los datos, solo cambia el envase. El MP4 se reproduce en Android, Windows, televisiones, redes sociales y cualquier navegador. Relacionado: [Comprimir video](https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-video.html) si además quieres reducir el tamaño y [Video a MP3](https://toolpantry.app/es/video-a-mp3.html) para quedarte con el audio. ## Notes Es una conversión de contenedor, no una re-codificación: los datos exactos de video y audio se mueven a una envoltura MP4. Los MOV de iPhone y QuickTime convierten sin pérdida; los códecs poco habituales se detectan y se informan con honestidad. Es una conversión de contenedor, no una re-codificación: los datos exactos de video y audio se mueven a una envoltura MP4. Los MOV de iPhone convierten sin pérdida. ## FAQ **¿La conversión pierde calidad?** No. Es un cambio de contenedor: los datos exactos de video y audio se copian al MP4 sin re-codificar. **¿Funciona con video HEVC de iPhone?** Sí — los MOV de iPhone (H.264 y HEVC) convierten sin pérdida. Si el archivo lleva un códec poco habitual, la herramienta te lo dirá con claridad. --- # PDF a JPG — Convierte las Páginas en Imágenes (JPG o PNG) > Convierte páginas PDF en JPG o PNG con orientación y orden conservados. Una página se descarga como imagen; varias, en ZIP. Todo en tu navegador. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/pdf-a-jpg ## About Convierte cada página en un JPG o PNG listo para diapositivas, chats o formularios. Todo ocurre en tu dispositivo. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: elige el PDF, selecciona JPG o PNG y la calidad, y descarga. Los documentos de varias páginas llegan como un único ZIP — el PDF nunca se sube. ## Elige las páginas y la resolución La herramienta convierte el documento completo. Para exportar solo algunas páginas, usa primero [Extraer páginas PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/extraer-paginas-pdf). La resolución 2× duplica el ancho y el alto en píxeles frente a 1×; no recupera detalle que no exista en el original. PNG guarda los píxeles sin pérdida, pero no conserva el texto como texto ni los vectores del PDF. ## Cómo convertir páginas de PDF a imágenes 1. **Añade el PDF** — el número de páginas se detecta en tu navegador. 2. **Elige formato y calidad** — JPG suele pesar menos; PNG guarda los píxeles renderizados sin pérdida adicional. 3. **Descarga** — una sola página se guarda directamente; varias llegan en un ZIP. ## Lo que debes saber Cada página se convierte en píxeles: perfecto para compartir y previsualizar, no para editar después. ¿Necesitas volver a tener un PDF? Reconstruye uno con [JPG a PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/jpg-a-pdf.html). Related: [Unir PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/unir-pdf.html) para combinar documentos primero. ## Notes Las páginas se re-codifican como imágenes: el texto dejará de ser seleccionable en los archivos exportados. Los documentos largos pueden tardar un poco; mantén esta pestaña abierta. ## FAQ **¿Se sube el PDF?** No. El documento se abre y se convierte dentro de tu navegador. **¿Cómo se descargan las páginas?** Una página se descarga como JPG o PNG. Varias páginas se guardan en un ZIP con nombres numerados en el orden del documento y con su orientación visible. **¿Puedo convertir solo algunas páginas?** Esta herramienta convierte todo el documento. Usa primero el enlace Extraer páginas PDF para preparar una copia con las páginas necesarias. **¿Qué significa PNG sin pérdida?** Los píxeles renderizados se codifican sin pérdida adicional. El PDF se rasteriza: el texto deja de ser seleccionable y los vectores, formularios y enlaces no se conservan como elementos interactivos de la imagen. **¿Hay límites de tamaño?** Sí: 60 MB de PDF, 16 megapíxeles y 16.384 píxeles por lado de imagen, y 100 MB de imágenes por lote. Un error cancela la descarga del lote; baja la resolución o divide el PDF. --- # PDF a PNG — Convierte las Páginas en Imágenes PNG > Convierte páginas PDF en JPG o PNG con orientación y orden conservados. Una página se descarga como imagen; varias, en ZIP. Todo en tu navegador. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/pdf-a-png ## About Convierte cada página en un PNG a la resolución que elijas. Todo se procesa en tu dispositivo. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: elige el PDF, mantén el formato PNG y la resolución, y descarga. Las páginas se convierten en tu dispositivo; el PDF nunca se sube. ## Elige las páginas y la resolución La herramienta convierte el documento completo. Para exportar solo algunas páginas, usa primero [Extraer páginas PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/extraer-paginas-pdf). La resolución 2× duplica el ancho y el alto en píxeles frente a 1×; no recupera detalle que no exista en el original. PNG guarda los píxeles sin pérdida, pero no conserva el texto como texto ni los vectores del PDF. ## Cómo convertir un PDF a PNG 1. **Añade el PDF** — el número de páginas se detecta localmente. 2. **Elige PNG y la resolución** — 2× duplica el ancho y el alto en píxeles frente a 1×. 3. **Descarga** — una página se guarda directa; varias llegan en un ZIP. ## ¿PNG o JPG? El PNG no pierde calidad: perfecto para capturas, gráficos, logotipos y texto. Pesa más que el JPG, así que si el destino es una foto o una diapositiva, el [PDF a JPG](https://toolpantry.app/es/pdf-a-jpg.html) es más ligero. Para volver a tener un PDF, reconstruye uno con [PNG a PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/png-a-pdf.html). ## Notes Las páginas se rasterizan a la resolución que elijas. PNG conserva esos píxeles sin pérdida adicional de compresión; el texto deja de ser seleccionable. Los documentos largos pueden tardar un momento; mantén esta pestaña abierta hasta que empiece la descarga. ## FAQ **¿Se sube el PDF?** No. El documento se abre y se convierte dentro de tu navegador. **¿Cómo se descargan las páginas?** Una página se descarga como JPG o PNG. Varias páginas se guardan en un ZIP con nombres numerados en el orden del documento y con su orientación visible. **¿Puedo convertir solo algunas páginas?** Esta herramienta convierte todo el documento. Usa primero el enlace Extraer páginas PDF para preparar una copia con las páginas necesarias. **¿Qué significa PNG sin pérdida?** Los píxeles renderizados se codifican sin pérdida adicional. El PDF se rasteriza: el texto deja de ser seleccionable y los vectores, formularios y enlaces no se conservan como elementos interactivos de la imagen. **¿Hay límites de tamaño?** Sí: 60 MB de PDF, 16 megapíxeles y 16.384 píxeles por lado de imagen, y 100 MB de imágenes por lote. Un error cancela la descarga del lote; baja la resolución o divide el PDF. --- # PDF a Texto — Extrae el Texto de un PDF Online > Extrae todo el texto de un PDF localmente en tu navegador. Copia el resultado o descarga un .txt — sin subir el documento y sin cuenta. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/pdf-a-texto ## About Extrae el texto de cualquier PDF con capa de texto, listo para copiar o descargar como .txt — todo en tu dispositivo. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: elige el PDF, pulsa Extraer texto y copia el resultado o descarga el .txt. El documento nunca sale de tu navegador. ## Cómo extraer el texto de un PDF 1. **Añade el PDF** — se detectan las páginas localmente. 2. **Extrae** — cada página se lee en orden de lectura. 3. **Copia o descarga** — el resultado va a un cuadro de texto y a un archivo .txt. ## Lo que debes saber La extracción funciona con PDF que tienen capa de texto (generados por programas, no escaneados). Si un PDF es una foto de un documento, no hay texto que extraer: necesitarías OCR, que esta herramienta no incluye. Relacionado: [PDF a JPG](https://toolpantry.app/es/pdf-a-jpg.html) para convertir páginas en imágenes y [Comprimir PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-pdf.html) para reducir el tamaño. ## Notes El resultado es texto plano en orden de lectura — el diseño, las tablas y las columnas se simplifican. Los PDF escaneados (fotos de páginas) no tienen capa de texto; la herramienta te avisa cuando no encuentra nada. El resultado es texto plano en orden de lectura — el diseño, las tablas y las columnas se simplifican. Los PDF escaneados (fotos de páginas) no tienen capa de texto; la herramienta te avisa cuando no encuentra nada. ## FAQ **¿Funciona con PDF escaneados?** No. Los escaneos son imágenes sin capa de texto; la herramienta te avisa cuando no encuentra texto. **¿Se sube el documento?** No. El texto se extrae en tu navegador y nunca sale de tu dispositivo. --- # PDF a Word — Convierte PDF a DOCX Gratis (Sin Subir) > Convierte un PDF en un archivo Word (.docx) editable, localmente en tu navegador. El texto se extrae con estructura de párrafos — sin subir nada. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/pdf-a-word ## About Convierte un PDF en un .docx que puedes editar de verdad: el texto se extrae con párrafos y saltos de página, todo en tu navegador. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: elige el PDF, pulsa Convertir a Word y descarga el .docx. El texto se lee localmente; nada se sube y no hace falta cuenta. ## Cómo convertir un PDF a Word 1. **Elige el PDF** — el número de páginas se detecta en tu navegador. 2. **Convierte** — el texto de cada página se lee línea a línea y se reconstruye en párrafos. 3. **Descarga el .docx** — ábrelo en Word, Google Docs o LibreOffice y edita. ## Qué convierte bien (y qué no) Informes, contratos, artículos y cartas — cualquier documento de texto — salen perfectos. Los PDF escaneados no tienen capa de texto: son fotos y necesitan OCR, que esta herramienta no hace (te avisa cuando no encuentra texto). Las tablas complejas y las maquetas a varias columnas llegan como párrafos simples. Relacionado: [PDF a texto](https://toolpantry.app/es/pdf-a-texto.html) para texto plano y [Unir PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/unir-pdf.html) para combinar documentos primero. ## Notes El resultado se centra en el texto: los párrafos y los saltos de página se conservan, pero las fuentes, columnas, tablas e imágenes no. Es la herramienta correcta para editar las palabras de un PDF — para conservar un diseño complejo necesitas un conversor de escritorio. El resultado se centra en el texto: los párrafos y los saltos de página se conservan, pero las fuentes, columnas, tablas e imágenes no. Es la herramienta correcta para editar las palabras de un PDF. ## FAQ **¿Se conserva el diseño original?** Se conserva el texto con estructura de párrafos, pero no la maquetación visual: fuentes, columnas, tablas e imágenes no se reproducen. Es ideal para editar el texto, no para preservar un diseño. **¿Convierte PDF escaneados?** No. Un PDF escaneado es una foto de las páginas, sin capa de texto — necesitaría OCR. La herramienta te avisa cuando no encuentra texto. --- # PNG a JPG — Convierte Imágenes con Fondo Blanco > Convierte una imagen PNG a JPG localmente en tu navegador. Elige la calidad y el color de fondo para las zonas transparentes — sin subir nada. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/png-a-jpg ## About Convierte un PNG a JPG en segundos: elige la calidad, decide el fondo para las zonas transparentes y descarga. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: añade el PNG, ajusta la calidad JPEG y el color de fondo, y descarga el JPG. La conversión ocurre en tu dispositivo. ## Cómo convertir PNG a JPG 1. **Añade el PNG** — capturas, logos o exportaciones; la vista previa aparece al momento. 2. **Ajusta calidad y fondo** — 88% va bien para casi todo; el fondo rellena la transparencia. 3. **Descarga el JPG** — un archivo que se abre en cualquier parte y pesa menos. ## Lo que debes saber El PNG es sin pérdida y perfecto para logos, pero pesa mucho para fotos y capturas. Convertir a JPG reduce el tamaño a cambio de una compresión con pérdida leve. Si el fondo debe verse limpio en una web, usa el mismo color que el fondo de tu página. Relacionado: [WebP a JPG](https://toolpantry.app/es/webp-a-jpg.html) para el formato moderno de las webs y [Comprimir imagen a 1MB](https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-imagen-1mb.html) si el JPG sigue pesando demasiado. ## Notes El JPG no admite transparencia, así que los píxeles transparentes se rellenan con el color elegido. Bajar la calidad reduce el peso en fotos, pero revisa textos y bordes antes de compartir. El JPG no admite transparencia, así que los píxeles transparentes se rellenan con el color elegido. Bajar la calidad reduce el peso en fotos, pero revisa textos y bordes antes de compartir. ## FAQ **¿Qué pasa con la transparencia?** El JPG no admite píxeles transparentes: se rellenan con el color de fondo que elijas (blanco por defecto). **¿Pierdo mucha calidad?** A calidad 88% la diferencia es prácticamente invisible; el peso baja mucho en fotos y capturas. --- # PNG a PDF — Combina Imágenes PNG en un PDF > Convierte imágenes PNG en un PDF ordenado, localmente en tu navegador. Sin subir archivos ni crear una cuenta — ideal para capturas y gráficos. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/png-a-pdf ## About Combina capturas, gráficos y logos PNG en un único PDF tamaño A4, con el orden que elijas — todo local. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: añade una o varias imágenes PNG, ordénalas con las flechas y exporta un PDF con una imagen por página A4. La transparencia se vuelve blanca. ## Cómo convertir PNG a PDF 1. **Añade una o varias imágenes** — capturas, gráficos o logos; ordénalas como quieras. 2. **Revisa el orden** — las flechas suben y bajan cada imagen antes de crear el PDF. 3. **Descarga el PDF** — un solo archivo con todas las imágenes. ## Lo que debes saber El PNG es perfecto para capturas y gráficos por su nitidez; al pasarlo a PDF conservas esa calidad en un formato que cualquier portal acepta. Si vienes de fotos JPG, usa [JPG a PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/jpg-a-pdf.html). ¿El PDF resultante pesa demasiado? Pásalo por [Comprimir PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-pdf.html). ## Notes Las imágenes se colocan centradas en páginas A4 conservando su proporción; las zonas transparentes se vuelven blancas. El motor de PDF se ejecuta dentro de esta pestaña. Las imágenes se colocan centradas en páginas A4 conservando su proporción; las zonas transparentes se vuelven blancas. ## FAQ **¿Qué pasa con la transparencia del PNG?** El PDF no maneja transparencia en este flujo: las zonas transparentes se rellenan de blanco. **¿Puedo elegir el orden de las páginas?** Sí. Usa las flechas junto a cada imagen para subirla o bajarla antes de crear el PDF. --- # Recortar Imagen Online — Crop Gratis y Sin Subir > Recorta una imagen JPG, PNG o WebP directamente en tu navegador. Elige proporción, ajusta la selección y descarga — sin subir la foto. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/recortar-imagen ## About Dibuja la zona que quieres conservar, elige una proporción si la necesitas y descarga el recorte — todo en tu dispositivo. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: añade la imagen, arrastra para dibujar la zona y pulsa Recortar y descargar. La foto original nunca se sube ni se modifica. ## Cómo recortar una imagen 1. **Añade la foto** — JPG, PNG o WebP, hasta el límite de tamaño del navegador. 2. **Dibuja la zona** — o elige una proporción (1:1 para avatares, 16:9 para portadas) y ajusta. 3. **Descarga el recorte** — un archivo nuevo con solo la zona elegida. ## Lo que debes saber Recortar no re-codifica más de lo necesario: el JPEG de salida se genera una sola vez con calidad alta. Para recortes de formato fijo como fotos de pasaporte, una proporción bloqueada evita descuadres. Relacionado: [Comprimir imagen a 2MB](https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-imagen-2mb.html) si el recorte queda grande y [PNG a JPG](https://toolpantry.app/es/png-a-jpg.html) para cambiar el formato. ## Notes Arrastra en cualquier parte para dibujar una selección nueva, arrastra dentro para moverla y tira del tirador naranja para redimensionar. Elige una proporción para bloquear la forma. Arrastra en cualquier parte para dibujar una selección nueva, arrastra dentro para moverla y tira del tirador naranja para redimensionar. Elige una proporción para bloquear la forma. ## FAQ **¿Puedo elegir una forma concreta?** Sí. El selector de proporción bloquea el recorte en cuadrado, 4:3, 3:4, 16:9 o 9:16. **¿Se modifica mi imagen original?** No. El recorte se exporta como archivo nuevo; el original no se toca. --- # Rellenar PDF — Rellena Formularios y Descarga > Rellena formularios PDF (AcroForm) directamente en tu navegador: escribe los campos, aplana los valores y descarga — sin subir el documento. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/rellenar-pdf ## About Escribe en los campos de un PDF rellenable, decide si quieres fijar los valores (aplanar) y descarga el documento completo. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: añade un PDF con campos de formulario, rellena las casillas que aparecen y pulsa Guardar. Los valores se escriben en el PDF y el documento nunca se sube. ## Cómo rellenar un formulario PDF 1. **Añade el PDF** — la herramienta detecta los campos rellenables (texto, casillas, listas). 2. **Rellena los campos** — aparecen listados con su nombre original; escribe y marca lo que necesites. 3. **Guarda** — con "aplanar" activado, los valores quedan fijos como si estuvieran impresos. ## Lo que debes saber Aplanar convierte los valores en parte permanente del documento: nadie podrá editarlos después (útil para enviar). Sin aplanar, el PDF conserva campos editables. Los formularios escaneados no tienen campos detectables — usa [Firmar PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/firmar-pdf.html) para escribir o firmar encima. Relacionado: [Comprimir PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-pdf.html) si el resultado queda grande. ## Notes Funciona con PDF AcroForm estándar (los que suelen usar las administraciones, bancos y documentos de RR. HH.). Los PDF escaneados no tienen campos — para esos, coloca una firma o texto con la herramienta de firma. Funciona con PDF AcroForm estándar (los que suelen usar las administraciones, bancos y documentos de RR. HH.). Los PDF escaneados no tienen campos — para esos, coloca una firma o texto con la herramienta de firma. ## FAQ **¿Se sube mi formulario?** No. Los campos se detectan y se rellenan dentro de tu navegador; el documento nunca sale de tu dispositivo. **¿Qué significa aplanar?** Fija los valores en el PDF y elimina los campos editables: el documento queda como si estuviera impreso. --- # Rotar Imagen — Gira o Voltea Fotos Online Gratis > Rota una imagen 90° o 180° y voltéala horizontal o verticalmente, localmente en tu navegador. Descarga al momento — sin subir la foto. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/rotar-imagen ## About Gira una foto 90° o 180° o voltéala como un espejo — con vista previa instantánea y descarga inmediata. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: elige la foto, pulsa los botones de rotación o volteo hasta que quede bien y descarga. Todo ocurre en tu dispositivo. ## Cómo rotar o voltear una imagen 1. **Añade la foto** — la vista previa aparece al momento. 2. **Rota o voltea** — combina giros y espejos hasta que quede bien; la vista previa es en vivo. 3. **Descarga** — el resultado es un archivo nuevo; el original no se toca. ## Lo que debes saber Rotar endereza fotos tomadas de lado o en vertical que se ven giradas; voltear (espejo) sirve para selfies y para corregir fotos escaneadas al revés. Las fotos de iPhone suelen llevar la orientación en los metadatos — esta herramienta la aplica de verdad a los píxeles, así que el resultado se ve bien en cualquier programa. Relacionado: [Recortar imagen](https://toolpantry.app/es/recortar-imagen.html) y [Comprimir imagen a 2MB](https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-imagen-2mb.html). ## Notes Las fotos JPG se re-codifican una vez al 92% de calidad (visualmente idéntico); el PNG se mantiene sin pérdida. El archivo original nunca se modifica. Las fotos JPG se re-codifican una vez al 92% de calidad (visualmente idéntico); el PNG se mantiene sin pérdida. ## FAQ **¿Rotar pierde calidad?** El JPG se re-codifica una vez al 92% — visualmente idéntico. El PNG se mantiene sin pérdida. **¿Cuál es la diferencia entre rotar y voltear?** Rotar gira la imagen (90°, 180°); voltear la refleja como un espejo, horizontal o verticalmente. --- # Rotar PDF — Gira las Páginas 90°, 180° o 270° > Rota todas las páginas de un PDF 90, 180 o 270 grados y descarga el resultado, localmente en tu navegador. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/rotar-pdf ## About Gira todas las páginas 90, 180 o 270 grados y descarga un PDF nuevo sin subir el documento. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: elige el PDF, selecciona el ángulo y pulsa Rotar. El documento nunca sale de tu dispositivo. ## Cómo rotar un PDF 1. **Añade tu PDF** — se queda en tu navegador. 2. **Elige 90°, 180° o 270°** — todo el documento gira junto. 3. **Descarga** — la nueva orientación se guarda en un PDF nuevo. ## Lo que debes saber La rotación se guarda en los metadatos de la página: la calidad del escaneo no se toca y el tamaño apenas cambia. Relacionado: [Unir PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/unir-pdf.html) y [Dividir PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/dividir-pdf.html). ## Notes La herramienta cambia la orientación de las páginas conservando el contenido original. El documento no se sube a ningún sitio. ## FAQ **¿Se suben las páginas?** No. Leer, rotar y exportar ocurre localmente en tu navegador. **¿Puedo rotar solo una página?** Esta versión rota todas las páginas juntas. --- # Rotar Video — Gira MP4 90° o 180° Sin Perder Calidad > Rota un video MP4 o MOV 90° o 180° sin re-codificar, localmente en tu navegador. La rotación se guarda en el archivo — sin subir el video. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/rotar-video ## About Corrige un video grabado de lado: gira 90° o 180° y guarda — la rotación va en los metadatos, así que la calidad queda intacta. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: elige el MP4, gira con los botones (la vista previa se actualiza en vivo) y pulsa Guardar. La rotación se aplica sin tocar los datos del video. ## Cómo rotar un video 1. **Añade el MP4 o MOV** — se reproduce en la vista previa. 2. **Gira con los botones** — 90° a izquierda o derecha, o 180°; combina giros si hace falta. 3. **Guarda** — la rotación se escribe en el archivo sin re-codificar: calidad idéntica. ## Lo que debes saber La rotación se guarda como metadato de orientación, igual que hacen los móviles al girar la cámara: los datos del video no se tocan y el archivo pesa prácticamente lo mismo. La mayoría de reproductores y plataformas respetan esa orientación. Relacionado: [Cortar video](https://toolpantry.app/es/cortar-video.html) y [Comprimir video](https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-video.html). ## Notes La vista previa se actualiza en vivo — la rotación que ves es la que se guarda en el archivo. Tu original nunca se modifica. La vista previa se actualiza en vivo — la rotación que ves es la que se guarda en el archivo. Tu original nunca se modifica. ## FAQ **¿Se pierde calidad al rotar?** No. La rotación va en los metadatos del contenedor: el video y el audio se copian tal cual. **¿Todos los reproductores respetan la rotación?** La gran mayoría (navegadores, móviles, redes sociales) sí. Reproductores muy antiguos podrían ignorarla; en ese caso, comprime el video rotado con Comprimir video , que re-codifica y fija la orientación. --- # Texto a Voz — Lee Cualquier Texto en Voz Alta Gratis > Lee cualquier texto en voz alta con las voces de tu dispositivo. Elige voz, velocidad y tono, y sigue la lectura palabra por palabra — gratis y sin subir nada. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/texto-a-voz ## About Convierte cualquier texto en voz usando las voces integradas de tu dispositivo — sin subir nada, sin cuenta y funciona sin conexión una vez abierta la página. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: pega tu texto, elige una de las voces de tu dispositivo y pulsa Leer. Ajusta velocidad y tono, y sigue la lectura palabra por palabra. ## Cómo leer un texto en voz alta 1. **Pega tu texto** — un artículo, apuntes, un borrador de correo o cualquier documento que puedas copiar. 2. **Elige una voz** — las voces de tu dispositivo aparecen con su idioma; busca las de español. 3. **Pulsa Leer** — ajusta velocidad y tono en vivo, pausa cuando quieras y sigue las palabras resaltadas. ## Para qué sirve **Corregir de oído:** escuchar tu propio texto delata frases torpes que la lectura silenciosa no ve. **Accesibilidad:** escucha documentos largos sin software especial. **Idiomas:** baja la velocidad a 0,7× para oír la pronunciación con claridad. Todo se ejecuta en tu dispositivo y funciona sin conexión tras cargar la página. ## Notes La lectura usa las voces integradas de tu dispositivo — la calidad y los idiomas disponibles dependen de tu sistema operativo. No hay opción de descarga: la voz del navegador suena por los altavoces y no se puede capturar como archivo. Nada de lo que pegues se sube ni se guarda. La lectura usa las voces integradas de tu dispositivo — la calidad y los idiomas disponibles dependen de tu sistema operativo. No hay opción de descarga: la voz del navegador suena por los altavoces y no se puede capturar como archivo. ## FAQ **¿Puedo descargar el audio como MP3?** No — la voz del navegador suena por tu dispositivo y no se puede capturar como archivo. Esta herramienta es para escuchar: corrección, accesibilidad y multitarea. Para audio descargable necesitas un servicio de voz con servidor. **¿Qué voces están disponibles?** Las de tu propio dispositivo. macOS e iOS incluyen voces de alta calidad, Windows incluye las de Microsoft, y Android varía según el equipo. Nada se sube — las voces se ejecutan localmente. --- # Unir PDF — Combina Varios PDF en Uno Solo (Gratis) > Une varios archivos PDF en un solo documento, localmente en tu navegador. Reordena los archivos antes de descargar. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/unir-pdf ## About Combina varios PDF en el orden que quieras. Las páginas se quedan en tu navegador mientras se crea el documento final. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: añade dos o más PDF, ordénalos con las flechas y descarga un único archivo combinado. Sin subir nada. ## Cómo unir PDF 1. **Añade dos o más archivos** — arrástralos y ordénalos como los quieras. 2. **Une** — las páginas se copian a un solo documento sin recomprimirlas. 3. **Descarga el PDF combinado** — la calidad se conserva tal cual. ## Lo que debes saber Unir no vuelve a codificar las páginas: el texto sigue nítido y el tamaño es la suma de las partes. Si el resultado supera un límite de subida, prueba [Comprimir PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-pdf.html) o [Dividir PDF](https://toolpantry.app/es/dividir-pdf.html) primero. ## Notes Los PDF se leen localmente y se copian a un documento nuevo. Los archivos cifrados o dañados pueden no ser legibles. ## FAQ **¿Puedo cambiar el orden de los PDF?** Sí. Usa los controles de subir y bajar antes de pulsar Unir PDF. **¿Unir reduce la calidad?** No. Las páginas se copian a un documento nuevo sin volver a comprimirlas. --- # Unir Videos — Combina Varios Clips en Uno (Gratis) > Une varios clips MP4 o MOV en un solo video, localmente en tu navegador. Ordena los clips y descarga el resultado — sin subir nada. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/unir-videos ## About Combina dos o más clips en un único MP4, en el orden que elijas — todo ocurre en tu dispositivo. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: añade dos o más clips, ordénalos en la lista y pulsa Unir. El resultado usa el tamaño del primer clip; los demás se ajustan sin deformarse. ## Cómo unir videos 1. **Añade los clips** — dos o más MP4/MOV; el orden de la lista es el orden final. 2. **Reordena si hace falta** — sube y baja clips hasta que queden como quieres. 3. **Une y descarga** — un solo MP4 con todos los clips en secuencia. ## Lo que debes saber Los clips con tamaños distintos se ajustan al marco del primero con barras (letterbox), sin deformar la imagen. Unir siempre re-codifica, así que el resultado puede pesar algo distinto que la suma de las partes. Relacionado: [Cortar video](https://toolpantry.app/es/cortar-video.html) para recortar cada clip antes y [Comprimir video](https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-video.html) si el resultado queda grande. ## Notes El resultado usa el tamaño del primer clip — los demás se ajustan con barras, nunca se estiran. Unir re-codifica una vez con una tasa media de tus clips: guarda los originales hasta comprobar el resultado. El resultado usa el tamaño del primer clip — los demás se ajustan con barras, nunca se estiran. Unir re-codifica una vez con una tasa media de tus clips: guarda los originales hasta comprobar el resultado. ## FAQ **¿Puedo cambiar el orden de los clips?** Sí. La lista permite subir y bajar cada clip antes de unir. **¿Qué tamaño tendrá el video final?** El del primer clip de la lista. Los clips con otra proporción se ajustan con barras, nunca se estiran. --- # Video a GIF — Convierte un Clip MP4 en GIF Animado > Convierte un fragmento de video MP4 o MOV en un GIF animado, localmente en tu navegador. Elige inicio, duración, FPS y ancho — sin subir el video. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/video-a-gif ## About Convierte unos segundos de video en un GIF animado listo para chats y redes — todo ocurre en tu dispositivo. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: elige el MP4, marca inicio y duración, elige FPS y ancho, y pulsa Convertir. El video nunca se sube. ## Cómo convertir un video a GIF 1. **Añade el MP4 o MOV** — el video se queda en tu dispositivo. 2. **Marca el fragmento** — inicio, duración (hasta 20 s), fluidez y ancho. 3. **Convierte y descarga** — el GIF se genera localmente con la paleta optimizada. ## Lo que debes saber El GIF es el formato universal de los clips cortos en chats y foros, pero no comprime bien: limita la duración y el ancho para que quepa donde lo necesitas. Para ir en la dirección contraria — un GIF que pese menos como video — usa [GIF a MP4](https://toolpantry.app/es/gif-a-mp4.html). Relacionado: [Comprimir video](https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-video.html) y [Cortar video](https://toolpantry.app/es/cortar-video.html). ## Notes Los GIF son grandes por naturaleza — cada fotograma es una imagen completa con paleta de 256 colores. Un GIF de 5 segundos a 480 px suele pesar 1–4 MB. Si la plataforma acepta video, el video casi siempre es más pequeño y más fluido. Los GIF son grandes por naturaleza. Un GIF de 5 segundos a 480 px suele pesar 1–4 MB. Si la plataforma acepta video, el video casi siempre es mejor. ## FAQ **¿Cuánto puede durar el GIF?** Hasta 20 segundos, pero los GIF cortos (3–6 s) funcionan mejor en chats y pesan mucho menos. Para clips largos, comparte el video. **¿Se sube el video?** No. La conversión se ejecuta dentro de tu navegador. --- # Video a MP3 — Extrae el Audio de Cualquier Video > Extrae el audio de un video MP4, MOV o WebM como MP3, localmente en tu navegador. Elige la calidad y descarga — sin subir el archivo. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/video-a-mp3 ## About Convierte la banda sonora de un video en un MP3 listo para escuchar en cualquier parte — decodificado en tu navegador. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: elige el video, selecciona la calidad MP3 (192 kbps va bien para casi todo) y pulsa Convertir. El archivo nunca se sube. ## Cómo convertir un video a MP3 1. **Añade el video** — MP4, MOV o WebM; también acepta archivos solo de audio. 2. **Elige la calidad** — 128 kbps pesa menos; 320 kbps es el máximo. 3. **Descarga el MP3** — el audio se extrae sin tocar el video original. ## Lo que debes saber El MP3 se genera a partir de la pista de audio original: si el video tenía audio comprimido, convertirlo a 320 kbps no añade calidad real. Relacionado: [Comprimir video](https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-video.html) si lo que quieres es un video más ligero, y [Cortar video](https://toolpantry.app/es/cortar-video.html) para quedarte con un fragmento. ## Notes Los videos largos tardan unos segundos por minuto de audio — el campo de progreso muestra dónde va. Para archivos de más de una hora es mejor usar una computadora: la decodificación carga todo el audio en memoria. Los videos largos tardan unos segundos por minuto de audio — el campo de progreso muestra dónde va. Para archivos de más de una hora es mejor usar una computadora: la decodificación carga todo el audio en memoria. ## FAQ **¿Se sube el video?** No. El audio se decodifica y se re-codifica a MP3 dentro de tu navegador. **¿Qué calidad elijo?** 192 kbps es transparente para uso cotidiano. Usa 320 kbps si vas a editar después, o 128 kbps para ahorrar espacio. --- # WebP a JPG — Convierte Imágenes WebP Online > Convierte una imagen WebP a JPG localmente en tu navegador. Elige calidad y fondo, y descarga un JPG compatible con todo — sin subir la imagen. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/webp-a-jpg ## About Convierte un WebP a JPG para abrirlo en programas antiguos o subirlo donde el WebP no está soportado — todo local. ## Quick answer Respuesta corta: añade el WebP, ajusta la calidad y el fondo, y descarga el JPG. La imagen nunca sale de tu navegador. ## Cómo convertir WebP a JPG 1. **Añade el WebP** — o un PNG/JPG si quieres re-comprimirlo. 2. **Ajusta calidad y fondo** — 88% es un buen equilibrio; el fondo solo afecta a la transparencia. 3. **Descarga el JPG** — compatible con programas antiguos, correo y cualquier portal. ## Lo que debes saber El WebP es más moderno y ligero, pero muchos programas de escritorio antiguos, algunos gestores de correo y ciertos portales no lo aceptan. Convertir a JPG resuelve la compatibilidad a cambio de algo más de peso. Relacionado: [PNG a JPG](https://toolpantry.app/es/png-a-jpg.html) si partes de un PNG y [Comprimir imagen a 2MB](https://toolpantry.app/es/comprimir-imagen-2mb.html) para ajustar el resultado. ## Notes El JPG no puede conservar píxeles transparentes, así que las zonas transparentes usan el color de fondo elegido. El archivo original nunca se sobrescribe. El JPG no puede conservar píxeles transparentes, así que las zonas transparentes usan el color de fondo elegido. El archivo original nunca se sobrescribe. ## FAQ **¿Se sube mi imagen?** No. La conversión se ejecuta por completo en tu navegador. **¿Y si el WebP tiene transparencia?** Las zonas transparentes se rellenan con el color de fondo que elijas, porque el JPG no admite transparencia. --- # Tubería de Arte de Juego con IA — De Prompt a Runtime > Una tubería de producción para arte de juego generado con IA: atlas de sprites con manifiestos, limpieza de croma, generación de mapas, audio y el QA que hace seguros los recursos. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/gamedev/ai-game-art-pipeline ## About Las imágenes de marketing necesitan verse bien. Los recursos de juego necesitan cargar : bordes alfa que limpien bien, anclajes que coincidan fotograma a fotograma y manifiestos en los que el motor pueda confiar. Esta es la tubería que ejecutamos para cada sprite, mapa y sonido de nuestros juegos. ## Quick answer La única regla: elige la tubería por el trabajo de runtime, no por el modelo. Un ciclo de caminar, un icono, un fondo parallax y una cinemática de jefe necesitan cada uno un camino distinto de generación y limpieza — y todos terminan en post-procesado determinista, no en vibras. ## Tubería por trabajo de runtime | Trabajo | Tubería | |---|---| | Props, objetos, iconos de FX | Modelo de imagen + referencias de estilo + eliminación de fondo | | Animación de combate | Keyframe primero: pose → tira de fila → extracción → atlas | | Caminar / correr / cuerpo | Referencia de video de movimiento → extracción de fotogramas | | Bucles ambientales | Generación de video → secuencia de fotogramas en bucle | | Momentos cinemáticos | Video a pantalla completa → fotogramas → sincronización por código | | Fondos de nivel | Pintura maestra primero → cadenas de outpainting → capas parallax | ## La tubería de atlas de sprites, paso a paso 1. **Identidad base primero.** Antes de cualquier animación, fija una imagen canónica del personaje u objeto. Cada fotograma posterior debe coincidir con ella — esa sola restricción mata el 80% de los "¿por qué el fotograma 3 parece otra criatura?". 2. **Tiras de fila por estado.** Genera cada estado de animación como una tira horizontal sobre un fondo de croma sólido — no fotogramas sueltos, que derivan. Una tira mantiene pose, escala y estilo consistentes por construcción. 3. **Limpieza determinista.** Quita el fondo por croma, y luego la *extracción por componentes conectados* encuentra los límites reales de cada fotograma. Esto es lo que arregla el problema clásico del arte de IA: fotogramas que se sangran entre sí o llevan halos. 4. **Atlas + manifiesto.** Los fotogramas se empaquetan en una textura y el motor recibe un manifiesto frame_layout: coordenadas de celda, anclajes, duraciones. El juego lee el manifiesto — nunca adivina dónde vive un fotograma. 5. **QA antes de publicar.** La tubería renderiza una hoja de contactos y verifica: el número de fotogramas coincide, ninguno toca el borde del atlas, el alfa sobrevive a escala de juego. Un desajuste rompe la compilación. ## Mapas y fondos El arte de niveles invierte el problema de los sprites: necesita *menos* precisión por elemento y más control compositivo. Nuestro enfoque es maestro primero: genera una pintura completa en alta resolución como verdad de base, luego deriva capas parallax con outpainting y cortes. Los tilemaps se generan contra una paleta y rejilla estrictas — el motor posee la colisión y la transitabilidad, el arte nunca. Esta separación es la razón de que nuestros mapas se publiquen sin bugs de "muro invisible": la geometría de juego es datos, no píxeles. ## Audio y cinemáticas El audio sigue la misma filosofía: generado, luego medido. Sonoridad normalizada a objetivos de juego, puntos de bucle verificados muestra a muestra, y conversión de formato por plataforma. Las ultimates cinemáticas son el trabajo más exigente de toda la tubería: un video generado se corta en una secuencia de fotogramas con sincronización por código — pausa de impacto, sacudida y destello son código del motor, no video horneado, así se sienten instantáneos y siguen siendo ajustables. ## Lo que todavía necesita un humano - **Aceptación, no generación.** Las verificaciones técnicas pasan mucho más seguido que las estéticas. "¿Este slime pertenece a esta aldea?" es un veredicto humano, siempre. - **Bloqueos de estilo.** Una vez existe un conjunto de referencias, los agentes generan cien recursos consistentes. Elegir la referencia — eso es gusto. - **Cortes.** La mitad del valor de la tubería es hacer barato descubrir malas direcciones. Matar un recurso en el paso 2 cuesta céntimos; en el paso 5 cuesta días. ## Empieza pequeño Si quieres probar esto en tu propio juego: elige una rebanada vertical — un personaje, un estado de animación, una esquina de mapa — y llévala hasta el runtime con un manifiesto. La tubería revela sus propios problemas a esa escala, por unos pocos dólares, antes de que te comprometas con una pasada de arte completa. ## FAQ **¿Qué modelos de imagen funcionan para esto?** La tubería es neutral respecto al proveedor: cualquier modelo de imagen o video que sostenga una referencia de estilo sirve. Lo que importa es el post-procesado determinista — croma, extracción por componentes, empaquetado de atlas — que corre en local y no le importa de dónde vienen los píxeles. **¿Por qué no generar fotogramas sueltos?** Los fotogramas sueltos derivan: escala, iluminación y estilo cambian entre generaciones. Las tiras de fila mantienen una animación completa consistente en una sola generación, y la extracción garantiza que cada celda sea exactamente un fotograma. **¿Cuánto tarda un personaje?** Con la tubería montada: menos de una hora para un set completo de animaciones, incluido QA. Sin ella, días de limpieza manual — la diferencia está en el medio determinista, no en el modelo. --- # El Sistema de Evidencia — QA Honesto para Juegos con IA > El sistema de evidencia que usamos para mantener honesto el desarrollo de juegos con IA: grabaciones de ejecución, capturas de mismo estado, auditorías ligadas al código y puertas de aceptación. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/gamedev/evidence-system-game-qa ## About Los agentes de IA construyen rápido — y también pueden decir "listo" cuando una función apenas compila. Este es el sistema de verificación que ejecutamos para atar cada afirmación de nuestros juegos a algo que puedes ver: grabaciones de la compilación real, capturas de mismo estado antes/después, y auditorías ligadas a revisiones exactas del código. ## Quick answer Por qué existe esto: en el desarrollo con agentes, la frase más barata es "funciona". El sistema de evidencia la vuelve cara: cada función aceptada debe publicarse con una grabación de ejecución, una comparación de mismo estado y una auditoría ligada al código — o se queda en la columna de "no probado" del tablero de estado. ## El modo de fallo que esto arregla Así se pudre en silencio el desarrollo de juegos con IA: un agente implementa una función, ejecuta las pruebas que él mismo escribió, declara éxito y sigue. Tres días después el sistema de guardado se rompe en un camino que nadie grabó. El código parecía correcto. Las pruebas pasaron. La afirmación nunca fue verdad — solo no había sido falsada. Nuestra respuesta toma prestado del QA industrial en lugar del unit testing: **la unidad de verificación es una grabación del juego en ejecución, no una marca verde.** ## Regla 1: ninguna afirmación sin evidencia de ejecución Cada función que cuenta como terminada deja atrás una captura en tiempo real — una grabación sin cortes de una compilación real, recorriendo exactamente el camino que la función dice soportar. No una captura de un buen día; la interacción completa. Cuando decimos "el bucle de decisión de despacho funciona en un teléfono de 844×390", hay un video de 20 segundos donde puedes verlo: las unidades salen, la producción se pausa, las recompensas esperan en el gremio. Esta sola regla cambia el comportamiento de los agentes más que cualquier prompt: un agente que sabe que debe producir una grabación visible deja de recortar esquinas que habrías descubierto una semana después. ## Regla 2: capturas antes/después de mismo estado Para cambios de interfaz y comportamiento, las capturas antes/después deben tomarse del *mismo estado* — mismo guardado, misma pantalla, mismo viewport — o no prueban nada. "Ahora se ve mejor" no significa nada si la foto de antes era partida nueva y la de después a mitad de progreso. | Lo que atrapan las capturas de mismo estado | Lo que las capturas sueltas pierden | |---|---| | Deriva de diseño en otros tamaños de viewport | Todo lo que queda fuera de la única captura | | Renderizado dependiente del estado (bloqueado/disponible/agotado) | Solo el estado "camino feliz" | | Regresiones en interfaz adyacente que comparte el componente | Todo lo que el autor no estaba mirando | En la práctica: congela el estado, captura cada tamaño de teléfono (320 → 430px, más modo de letra grande), cambia, y vuelve a capturar. La revisión del diff es mecánica — que es exactamente por qué funciona a escala de agentes. ## Regla 3: auditorías ligadas al código Evidencia sin revisión es un rumor. Cada lote aceptado recibe una auditoría que ata sus grabaciones y capturas a una revisión exacta del código — un hash, un commit, un manifiesto. Si el código se mueve después, la evidencia vieja no lo bendice en silencio; el lote se re-verifica o la afirmación se retira. Esto también es lo que hace posible el traspaso: un revisor puede comprobar que la compilación que mira es demostrablemente el código que produjo la evidencia. ## El ciclo de vida del contenido (de nuestra propia tubería) Cada pieza de contenido — evento, función, recurso — pasa por estados explícitos, y nada se salta un paso: | Estado | Significado | |---|---| | drafted | Escrito/generado | | validated | Referencias y números verificados | | integrated | Carga en el runtime | | rendered | Aparece en una pasada de render real con aserciones de diseño | | runtime-seen | Alcanzado por la entrada normal del jugador y renderizado | | manually-played | Un humano recorrió las ramas principales | | accepted | Pasó la puerta de calidad del capítulo | Por eso nuestros tableros pueden decir "305 eventos renderizan limpio, y la afirmación de 20 horas de contenido no está aceptada todavía" en la misma frase — los estados son separados, y la tubería se niega a difuminarlos. ## Regresión sobre toda la superficie Todo sistema aceptado se congela como línea base: sus interfaces no pueden cambiar sin una actualización de contrato. Cada lote nuevo vuelve a ejecutar la suite de regresión en todos los viewports de teléfono y ambos modos de letra, y escanea errores de motor y fugas. Las suites son aburridas por diseño — su trabajo es atrapar la milésima rotura pequeña, no ser interesantes. ## Lo que este sistema todavía no ve (sección honesta) - **Diversión.** Nada aquí mide si el juego es disfrutable. La evidencia prueba comportamiento, no deleite. - **Feel.** Los tiempos de animación y el "juice" pasan todas las verificaciones técnicas sintiéndose mal; solo un humano lo nota. - **Exploits nuevos.** Las suites verifican caminos conocidos; los jugadores inventan nuevos. La simulación atrapa algunos; el playtesting atrapa el resto. Por eso el sistema de evidencia es un piso, no un techo: garantiza que nada se publique *roto*, y deja el juicio de *bueno* donde corresponde — con los humanos. ## Cómo empezar pequeño 1. **Elige una función** — algo con un flujo visible, como menú → acción → resultado. 2. **Grábala una vez, sin cortes** — una captura en tiempo real de la compilación real, no un screencast re-timed. 3. **Congela un par antes/después** — mismo estado, dos tamaños de teléfono. 4. **Átala a una revisión** — incluso un nombre de archivo con el hash del commit es mejor que nada. Ese es todo el sistema en miniatura. Todo lo demás — estados de ciclo de vida, líneas base de regresión, auditorías — es este patrón escalado. Pruébalo en tu próxima función; la primera regresión que atrapes pagará el hábito. ## FAQ **¿No es demasiado lento grabar cada función?** Es más rápido que depurar a ciegas. Una grabación de 20 segundos tarda menos en producirse que escribir una suite de pruebas exhaustiva — y a diferencia de las pruebas, no puede pasar mientras el juego está visiblemente roto. Lo lento es hacerlo después de saltárselo. **¿Pueden los agentes revisar la evidencia ellos mismos?** En parte — los agentes pueden mirar grabaciones, comparar capturas y marcar diferencias mecánicamente. Eso es la mayor parte del volumen. La revisión humana se concentra en el gusto y los casos límite, que es exactamente donde vale la pena gastar tiempo humano. **¿Reemplaza esto a las pruebas unitarias?** No — son capas. Las pruebas unitarias verifican la lógica en aislamiento; el sistema de evidencia verifica el juego en ejecución. El código generado por IA se beneficia de ambas, porque pasar pruebas es barato de falsificar por accidente y grabar un juego funcionando no lo es. --- # Cómo Construimos Juegos con Agentes de IA (Tubería Completa) > La tubería completa que usamos para construir juegos reales con equipos de agentes de IA: generación de arte, implementación en Godot, pistas de evidencia de QA — y por qué los demos no son juegos. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/gamedev/how-we-build-games-with-ai-agents ## About Dos juegos reales, una tubería de producción: arte generado con manifiestos exactos, implementación por contrato en Godot, y QA que graba evidencia de cada afirmación. Así funciona de verdad — y dónde todavía se rompe. ## Quick answer La versión corta: los agentes generan arte, escriben y prueban código, y recolectan evidencia de ejecución a una escala que un desarrollador solo no puede igualar. Los humanos conservan tres trabajos: decidir qué construir, juzgar qué se siente bien y aceptar qué se publica. Todo lo demás es tubería. ## Los demos no son juegos — la brecha que esta tubería existe para cerrar En 2026, generar un prototipo jugable lleva una tarde. Los datos de la industria lo muestran: cerca del 20% de las entradas de Steam Next Fest declaran uso de IA generativa, y el vibe coding ayudó a llevar **181.000 juegos móviles** al mercado en seis meses. Pero los lanzamientos y los éxitos se movieron en direcciones opuestas — los juegos que generan ingresos reales apenas crecieron. La brecha no es la generación. Es todo lo que viene después: ¿la interfaz se lee en un teléfono de 390 píxeles? ¿la economía aguanta veinte horas? ¿la pelea contra el jefe se siente como una pelea? Nuestra respuesta es una tubería construida sobre una regla: *ninguna afirmación sin evidencia de ejecución*. ## Caso 1: Linjiang Chronicles — una simulación de vida con 305 eventos *Linjiang Chronicles* (一纸青云·临江志) es una simulación de vida antigua de pago único para iPhone, construida en Godot 4.6. Los números en su etapa actual: **305 eventos, 711 decisiones, 20 finales, 12 personajes, 8 capítulos**, más dieciséis líneas de relación e investigación. Es un juego que se lee primero — decisiones, materiales, consecuencias — con una interfaz de papel y bermellón diseñada para jugar con una mano. Lo que hace esto posible: cada rama de contenido se simula headless. Una corrida de balance recorre el grafo completo de eventos e informa dónde se rompe la economía, dónde un capítulo puede quedar sin salida y cuántos minutos de contenido real tiene cada ruta. Cuando un diseño afirma "veinte horas de contenido", la tubería lo prueba o lo marca. El nuestro está marcado: al menos veinte horas de contenido efectivo por partida *todavía no están aceptadas* — el estado honesto del proyecto. ## Caso 2: Moonlit Kingdom — un RPG idle camino a iOS *Moonlit Kingdom* (月光王国) es un RPG idle sobre reconstruir una aldea con héroes y slimes. Está más avanzado en la cadena de entrega: diseños táctiles horizontales de 780×360 a 932×430, sistemas de expedición y despacho, continuidad de partida entre reinicios, y una tubería de proyecto Xcode para iOS con manifiestos de entrega ligados al código fuente. En un juego idle, "se siente bien" vive en detalles diminutos: ¿el contador de producción avanza cuando lo esperas? ¿la animación de regreso termina antes del aviso de recompensa? ¿un reinicio a mitad de expedición conserva el estado correcto? Cada uno de esos recibió su propia verificación grabada — una captura en tiempo real de la compilación real, revisada fotograma a fotograma, antes de que la función contara como terminada. ## La tubería, capa por capa ### 1. Arte que se ejecuta en el runtime (no imágenes bonitas) El arte de juego falla distinto al arte de marketing: necesita bordes alfa que sobrevivan al croma, anclajes que coincidan entre fotogramas y tamaños de archivo que un teléfono pueda cargar. Nuestra tubería de sprites: identidad base primero → tiras de fila por estado → eliminación de fondo determinista → extracción de fotogramas por componentes conectados → composición de atlas con un manifiesto frame_layout que el motor lee directamente. Si el manifiesto y el atlas no coinciden, la compilación falla — por diseño. ### 2. Implementación bajo contrato Las funciones no son "peticiones"; son contratos con alcance, criterios de aceptación y líneas base congeladas. Un agente que cambia el sistema de despacho debe probar que las otras páginas siguen comportándose igual — la tubería ejecuta suites de regresión sobre cada tamaño de pantalla y marca cualquier deriva. Esta es la disciplina poco glamurosa que separa un juego publicable de un demo: *interfaces congeladas y evidencia para cada cambio*. ### 3. QA que graba en lugar de afirmar Cada función aceptada deja atrás: una captura antes/después del mismo estado, una grabación de ejecución en tiempo real, y una auditoría ligada a una revisión exacta del código. Los revisores (humanos o agentes) miran la grabación, no la promesa. Cuando algo se rompe, la pista de evidencia muestra qué cambio lo hizo. ### 4. Audio y cinemáticas Ambiente, efectos y voces usan audio generado con la misma regla: los archivos se validan en sonoridad, puntos de bucle y formato de runtime antes de entrar a la compilación. Los momentos cinemáticos usan tuberías de video a fotogramas — el video generado se corta en secuencias listas para el motor con sincronización por código, no se envía como un bloque de video que el motor no puede controlar. ## Dónde los humanos siguen importando - **Gusto.** Los agentes pueden hacer una interfaz legible; no pueden decidir que se siente bien. Cada veredicto de "esto es divertido" es humano. - **Cortes.** El mejor resultado de una semana de tubería suele ser la decisión de matar una función. Los agentes rara vez proponen matar su propio trabajo; los humanos deben hacerlo. - **Aceptación de medios.** El arte generado pasa las verificaciones técnicas mucho más seguido que las estéticas. La vara de "este personaje pertenece a este mundo" sigue siendo humana. ## Cuánto cuesta esto Ejecutar esta tubería cuesta llamadas de API, no salarios. Una simulación pesada en contenido como Linjiang Chronicles gasta la mayor parte de su presupuesto en bucles de generación y verificación, no en escribir código. El intercambio es explícito: más cómputo, menos personas — y más disciplina requerida, porque una tubería sin contratos ni evidencia solo produce caos más rápido. ## Sigue la construcción Este laboratorio publica la tubería a medida que evoluciona — incluidos los fracasos, las funciones cortadas y los desgloses de costes. Lo próximo: un análisis profundo de la tubería de atlas de sprites con manifiestos reales, y el bucle completo de QA del sistema de despacho. Los juegos serán jugables aquí antes que en cualquier otro sitio. ## FAQ **¿Qué herramientas usan?** Godot 4.6 para los juegos; modelos de generación de imagen, video y audio para los recursos; y un flujo de trabajo de contratos y evidencia (documentado en estos artículos) para mantener verificable la producción de los agentes. Los enfoques son neutrales respecto al proveedor. **¿Puede un desarrollador solo copiar esta tubería?** Sí, y escala hacia abajo: las ideas centrales son (1) generar la rebanada vertical más pequeña, (2) congelar las interfaces una vez aceptadas, (3) exigir evidencia de ejecución para cada afirmación. El próximo artículo de sprites detalla los pasos exactos. **¿La IA hace todo el trabajo?** No. Los agentes hacen el trabajo de volumen — generación, implementación, pruebas de regresión, recolección de evidencia. Los humanos son dueños de la dirección, el gusto y la aceptación final. La división honesta: los agentes construyen lo que especificas; tú eres responsable de especificar algo que valga la pena construir. --- # AI Game Lab — Juegos Reales Creados por Agentes de IA > Juegos reales creados por equipos de agentes de IA — dos juegos en producción, las tuberías detrás de ellos y guías honestas. Sin hype de 'un prompt, un demo'. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/gamedev/ ## Tools and resources (216) ### Images & design - **Compress images** — Make files lighter for websites, email, and stores. (https://toolpantry.app/image-compressor.md) - **Resize images** — Set a max width, height, or a social media preset. (https://toolpantry.app/image-compressor.md) - **Convert formats** — Turn PNGs into WebP, JPGs into PNGs, and more. (https://toolpantry.app/image-compressor.md) - **Crop for social** — Fill exact Open Graph, LinkedIn, Instagram, or YouTube sizes. (https://toolpantry.app/image-compressor.md) - **Make a favicon** — Turn a logo or image into a clean square icon in seconds. (https://toolpantry.app/image-compressor.md) - **Clean image data** — Re-encode a file locally to remove embedded metadata. (https://toolpantry.app/image-compressor.md) - **Image info** — Check dimensions, aspect ratio, format, and file size instantly. (https://toolpantry.app/image-info.md) - **Color palette** — Pull a useful six-color palette from any image. (https://toolpantry.app/image-palette.md) - **Color blindness simulator** — Preview common color-vision differences before you publish a design. (https://toolpantry.app/color-blindness-simulator.md) - **Color converter** — Translate HEX, RGB, HSL, and CMYK values with a live swatch and contrast hint. (https://toolpantry.app/color-converter.md) - **Image to Base64** — Turn a small image into a copyable data URI for HTML and CSS. (https://toolpantry.app/image-to-base64.md) - **Blur & pixelate** — Hide faces, names, and sensitive details before sharing. (https://toolpantry.app/image-blur.md) - **Split image grid** — Cut a photo into evenly sized tiles for social posts. (https://toolpantry.app/image-splitter.md) - **Add a watermark** — Place a light text mark on a photo and download a PNG. (https://toolpantry.app/image-watermark.md) - **Add text to photo** — Drag styled text onto any photo — no watermark, no upload. (https://toolpantry.app/add-text-to-photo.md) - **Pick image colors** — Sample exact HEX, RGB, and HSL values from any pixel. (https://toolpantry.app/image-color-picker.md) - **DPI calculator** — Convert pixel dimensions into print inches and centimeters. (https://toolpantry.app/image-dpi-calculator.md) - **Black & white** — Make a clean grayscale photo with adjustable contrast. (https://toolpantry.app/image-grayscale.md) - **Rotate image** — Turn or flip a photo 90°, 180°, or 270° locally. (https://toolpantry.app/rotate-image.md) - **Crop image** — Cut any area or lock a 1:1, 4:3, or 16:9 ratio. (https://toolpantry.app/crop-image.md) - **Passport photo maker** — Country sizes, eye-line guides, and a 4×6 in print sheet — all local. (https://toolpantry.app/passport-photo-maker.md) - **Image upscaler** — Enlarge 2×–4× with a classic resampler — no AI, no upload. (https://toolpantry.app/image-upscaler.md) - **Signature maker** — Draw or clean up a photo — transparent PNG for any document. (https://toolpantry.app/signature-maker.md) - **Bulk image resizer** — Resize a whole batch at once — download everything as one ZIP. (https://toolpantry.app/bulk-image-resizer.md) - **AI image checker** — Scan metadata for AI generator signatures and Content Credentials. (https://toolpantry.app/ai-image-checker.md) - **EXIF viewer** — See camera, GPS, and AI tags — then download a clean copy. (https://toolpantry.app/exif-viewer.md) - **Face blur** — Auto-detect or box faces and blur them — locally. (https://toolpantry.app/face-blur.md) - **Aspect ratio calculator** — Find a simplified ratio and calculate the missing image dimension. (https://toolpantry.app/aspect-ratio-calculator.md) - **Compress to 100KB** — Hit a file-size limit for forms, uploads, and email. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-100kb.md) - **Compress to 20KB** — Extreme target size for ID photos and legacy forms. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-20kb.md) - **Compress to 50KB** — Check a 50,000-byte ceiling and any required pixel dimensions. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-50kb.md) - **Compress to 200KB** — Check bytes, required pixels and the preview before uploading. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-200kb.md) - **Compress to 500KB** — CMS and email-sized images with near-original quality. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-500kb.md) - **Compress to 1MB** — The universal upload line — get any photo under it. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-1mb.md) - **Compress to 2MB** — Job, visa, and portal caps with quality intact. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-2mb.md) - **Compress to 5MB** — Print labs and looser portal limits, handled locally. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-image-to-5mb.md) ### Utilities - **JSON formatter** — Format, validate, minify, and copy JSON locally. (https://toolpantry.app/json-formatter.md) - **UTM link builder** — Create campaign tracking URLs for analytics. (https://toolpantry.app/utm-builder.md) - **Password generator** — Make a random password without sending it anywhere. (https://toolpantry.app/password-generator.md) - **QR code generator** — Create a static QR code for a URL, text, email, or phone. (https://toolpantry.app/qr-code-generator.md) - **Time calculator** — Calculate hours, breaks, decimal time, and overnight shifts. (https://toolpantry.app/time-duration-calculator.md) - **Online timer & stopwatch** — Run a precise countdown or stopwatch with presets, pause, laps, and fullscreen. (https://toolpantry.app/online-timer.md) - **Percentage calculator** — Calculate percent of, percent change, increases, decreases, and reverse values. (https://toolpantry.app/percentage-calculator.md) - **Unit converter** — Convert length, mass, temperature, area, volume, speed, time, and data locally. (https://toolpantry.app/unit-converter.md) - **Scientific calculator** — Evaluate trigonometry, logarithms, powers, roots, and factorials locally. (https://toolpantry.app/scientific-calculator.md) - **Mortgage calculator** — Estimate payment, interest, taxes, insurance, PMI, HOA, and payoff time locally. (https://toolpantry.app/mortgage-calculator.md) - **Age calculator** — Find exact years, months, days, total days, and your next birthday locally. (https://toolpantry.app/age-calculator.md) - **Fraction calculator** — Add, subtract, multiply, divide, and compare fractions with reduced answers and working. (https://toolpantry.app/fraction-calculator.md) - **Tip calculator** — Calculate tip, tax, group total, round-up, and each person's share locally. (https://toolpantry.app/tip-calculator.md) - **GPA calculator** — Calculate weighted, unweighted, semester, and cumulative GPA from course credits locally. (https://toolpantry.app/gpa-calculator.md) - **Discount calculator** — Find sale price, savings, stacked discounts, sales tax, and checkout total locally. (https://toolpantry.app/discount-calculator.md) - **Loan calculator** — Estimate fixed-rate payment, total interest, payoff time, extra-payment savings, and amortization locally. (https://toolpantry.app/loan-calculator.md) - **BMI calculator** — Calculate adult BMI in metric or imperial units with category and healthy-weight range. (https://toolpantry.app/bmi-calculator.md) - **Number to words** — Spell out numbers and currency amounts for checks, invoices, contracts, and receipts. (https://toolpantry.app/number-to-words.md) - **Random number generator** — Generate batches with ranges, decimals, unique values, sorting, and copy-ready results. (https://toolpantry.app/random-number-generator.md) - **Time zone meeting planner** — Convert meeting times across cities and find shared working-hour windows with DST-aware local calculations. (https://toolpantry.app/timezone-meeting-planner.md) - **Roman numeral converter** — Convert integers and validate standard Roman numerals with subtractive notation and visible breakdowns. (https://toolpantry.app/roman-numeral-converter.md) - **Random name picker** — Draw winners without repeats, shuffle a list, or split people into balanced teams locally. (https://toolpantry.app/random-name-picker.md) - **Typing speed test** — Measure net and gross WPM, accuracy, errors, and characters per minute with local practice passages. (https://toolpantry.app/typing-test.md) - **Fancy text generator** — Turn plain text into bold, cursive, bubble, gothic, fullwidth, and other copy-ready Unicode styles. (https://toolpantry.app/fancy-text-generator.md) - **Lorem Ipsum generator** — Generate placeholder copy by paragraphs, sentences, words, or characters with plain, HTML, Markdown, and JSON output. (https://toolpantry.app/lorem-ipsum-generator.md) - **YouTube thumbnail downloader** — Preview and save maxres, HD, standard, medium, and default thumbnails from a YouTube URL or video ID. (https://toolpantry.app/youtube-thumbnail-downloader.md) - **EMI calculator** — Estimate monthly EMI, total interest, amortization, and the impact of monthly or one-time prepayments locally. (https://toolpantry.app/emi-calculator.md) - **Barcode generator** — Create Code 128, Code 39, EAN-13, or UPC labels. (https://toolpantry.app/barcode-generator.md) - **Invoice generator** — Calculate line items and print a simple invoice or PDF. (https://toolpantry.app/invoice-generator.md) - **Word counter** — Count words, characters, sentences, and reading time. (https://toolpantry.app/text-counter.md) - **Token counter** — Exact GPT token counts (o200k/cl100k) + Claude and Gemini estimates. (https://toolpantry.app/token-counter.md) - **Meta tag generator** — Create SEO, Open Graph, and Twitter card tags. (https://toolpantry.app/meta-tag-generator.md) - **World clock** — Check the current time in cities around the world. (https://toolpantry.app/world-clock.md) ### Developer - **UUID generator** — Generate v4 UUIDs in batches and copy or download them. (https://toolpantry.app/uuid-generator.md) - **Check API (docs)** — Free keyless API: score any site’s AI readiness, bulk up to 6. (https://toolpantry.app/api-docs.md) - **JWT decoder** — Inspect JWT header and payload claims locally without verification. (https://toolpantry.app/jwt-decoder.md) - **URL encoder / decoder** — Encode query values or decode URL text without sending it anywhere. (https://toolpantry.app/url-encoder-decoder.md) - **JSON ↔ CSV converter** — Convert arrays and tabular data locally, with quoted CSV support. (https://toolpantry.app/json-csv-converter.md) - **Regex tester** — Test JavaScript patterns, flags, captures, and replacements. (https://toolpantry.app/regex-tester.md) - **SHA hash generator** — Create SHA-256, SHA-384, or SHA-512 hashes from text locally. (https://toolpantry.app/hash-generator.md) - **Zip & unzip** — Create or open ZIP archives in your browser — no upload, no cap. (https://toolpantry.app/zip-tool.md) - **XML formatter** — Validate and pretty-print XML with readable indentation. (https://toolpantry.app/xml-formatter.md) - **Markdown preview** — Render headings, lists, links, and code into clean HTML locally. (https://toolpantry.app/markdown-preview.md) - **Cron expression tool** — Parse five-field cron syntax and see the next scheduled runs. (https://toolpantry.app/cron-expression-tool.md) - **IPv4 subnet calculator** — Calculate network ranges, masks, broadcasts, and usable hosts. (https://toolpantry.app/subnet-calculator.md) ### PDF - **JPG to PDF** — Combine JPG or PNG images into a clean, ordered PDF. (https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-pdf.md) - **PNG to PDF** — One PNG per page, transparency flattened onto white. (https://toolpantry.app/png-to-pdf.md) - **Merge PDF** — Join multiple PDF files in a chosen order directly in your browser. (https://toolpantry.app/merge-pdf.md) - **PDF metadata remover** — See title, author, and scanner tags — then strip them clean. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf-metadata-remover.md) - **Delete PDF pages** — Type page numbers or ranges and download the trimmed PDF. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf-page-delete.md) - **Rotate PDF pages** — Turn one page or all of them — click a thumbnail, save. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf-rotate.md) - **Watermark PDF** — Stamp text on every page — centered or tiled, live preview. (https://toolpantry.app/watermark-pdf.md) - **Fill PDF forms** — Type into form fields and save — no printing, no sign-up. (https://toolpantry.app/fill-pdf-forms.md) - **Text to Speech** — Read any text aloud with your device's voices — no upload. (https://toolpantry.app/text-to-speech.md) - **Image to SVG** — Trace JPG or PNG into real vector paths — local. (https://toolpantry.app/image-to-svg.md) - **Resume Builder** — Live preview, ATS-friendly PDF — draft stays local. (https://toolpantry.app/resume-builder.md) - **PDF to Word** — Editable .docx from any text PDF — local, no upload. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-word.md) - **LLM Token Calculator** — Real token counts + API cost across GPT, Claude, Gemini. (https://toolpantry.app/llm-token-calculator.md) - **Speech to Text** — Live dictation with automatic punctuation — in your browser. (https://toolpantry.app/speech-to-text.md) - **Text Chunker** — RAG-ready token-exact chunks + JSONL export. (https://toolpantry.app/text-chunker.md) - **MCP Config Generator** — Wire MCP servers into Claude Desktop, Cursor, VS Code. (https://toolpantry.app/mcp-config-generator.md) - **AI Background Remover** — On-device AI cutouts — transparent PNG, no upload. (https://toolpantry.app/background-remover.md) - **OCR — Image to Text** — Extract text from screenshots & scans, fully local. (https://toolpantry.app/ocr.md) - **AI Image Detector** — Check C2PA & metadata for AI-generation markers. (https://toolpantry.app/ai-image-detector.md) - **Document Scanner** — Photo → straightened scan → multi-page PDF. (https://toolpantry.app/document-scanner.md) - **PDF to text** — Copy or download the words with page markers. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-text.md) - **Extract PDF pages** — Keep selected pages from a PDF and download a smaller document. (https://toolpantry.app/extract-pdf-pages.md) - **YAML ↔ JSON converter** — Convert configuration data locally without uploading secrets. (https://toolpantry.app/yaml-json-converter.md) - **SQL formatter** — Turn dense SQL into readable clauses and indentation in your browser. (https://toolpantry.app/sql-formatter.md) - **XML ↔ JSON converter** — Move API payloads while keeping attributes and repeated elements visible. (https://toolpantry.app/xml-json-converter.md) - **Code minifier** — Minify JSON, HTML, CSS, or JavaScript locally before you ship. (https://toolpantry.app/minify-tool.md) - **HTML / CSS formatter** — Pretty-print HTML, CSS, or JavaScript with readable indentation in your browser. (https://toolpantry.app/html-formatter.md) - **CSS unit converter** — Convert PX, REM, and EM values, batch-rewrite CSS pixels, and build clamp(). (https://toolpantry.app/css-unit-converter.md) - **Split PDF** — Turn every PDF page into a separate local PDF download. (https://toolpantry.app/split-pdf.md) - **Rotate PDF** — Turn every page by 90, 180, or 270 degrees in your browser. (https://toolpantry.app/rotate-pdf.md) - **PDF to JPG** — Turn every page into a shareable JPG or PNG image. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-jpg.md) - **PDF to PNG** — Render PDF pages as PNG at your chosen resolution. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf-to-png.md) - **Sign PDF** — Draw, type, or upload a signature — locally, no upload. (https://toolpantry.app/sign-pdf.md) - **Compress PDF** — Shrink scans and image-heavy PDFs to fit upload limits. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-pdf.md) ### Creator - **MOSS Image Layout Editor** — Place text and subjects, then export centered layout JSON for MOSS-Image. (https://toolpantry.app/moss-image-layout-editor.md) - **FLUX 3 Bounding Box Generator** — Draw a layout, describe each element, and export a prompt with precise coordinates. (https://toolpantry.app/flux-bounding-box-generator.md) - **Social media sizes** — Check Instagram, TikTok, YouTube, Facebook, LinkedIn, and Pinterest dimensions. (https://toolpantry.app/social-media-size-guide.md) - **Screen recorder** — Record screen, window, or tab in the browser — nothing uploaded. (https://toolpantry.app/screen-recorder.md) - **Photo collage** — Grid layouts, gaps, and social-ready sizes — watermark-free. (https://toolpantry.app/photo-collage.md) - **Images to GIF** — Animate a set of images into a looping GIF locally. (https://toolpantry.app/images-to-gif.md) - **Hashtag generator** — Build a transparent starter set for YouTube, TikTok, or Instagram. (https://toolpantry.app/hashtag-generator.md) - **YouTube tag generator** — Build, review, and copy a focused comma-separated tag list within a visible character budget. (https://toolpantry.app/youtube-tag-generator.md) - **Email signature generator** — Create a clean inline HTML signature for Gmail, Outlook, Apple Mail, or Thunderbird. (https://toolpantry.app/email-signature-generator.md) - **CSS gradient generator** — Build linear, radial, or conic backgrounds and copy the CSS locally. (https://toolpantry.app/css-gradient-generator.md) - **Meme generator** — Add classic captions to an image and download a clean PNG without a watermark. (https://toolpantry.app/meme-generator.md) - **Open Graph image** — Create a 1200×630 social sharing image and copy starter meta tags. (https://toolpantry.app/og-image-generator.md) - **SERP preview** — Preview an SEO title, URL, and description with local character and pixel checks. (https://toolpantry.app/serp-preview.md) - **SVG to PNG** — Rasterize an SVG to PNG or JPG with a scale and background choice. (https://toolpantry.app/svg-to-png.md) ### Text & data - **JSON diff** — Compare two JSON documents and inspect changed paths. (https://toolpantry.app/json-diff.md) - **Remove duplicate lines** — Clean, deduplicate, sort, copy, or download a text list. (https://toolpantry.app/line-tools.md) - **Unix timestamp converter** — Convert epoch seconds or milliseconds to readable dates. (https://toolpantry.app/timestamp-converter.md) - **HTML to Markdown** — Convert headings, links, lists, and basic tables for docs and prompts. (https://toolpantry.app/html-to-markdown.md) - **JSON validator** — Check JSON syntax, inspect parse errors, and copy a formatted result locally. (https://toolpantry.app/json-validator.md) - **JSON Schema validator** — Check types, required fields, properties, arrays, enums, and common limits locally. (https://toolpantry.app/json-schema-validator.md) ### Conversion - **WebP to JPG** — Convert a WebP image to a broadly compatible JPG with quality control. (https://toolpantry.app/webp-to-jpg.md) - **JPG to WebP** — Typically 25–35% smaller than JPG at the same visual quality. (https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-webp.md) - **AVIF to JPG** — Open modern web images in any app, editor, or form. (https://toolpantry.app/avif-to-jpg.md) - **AVIF to PNG** — Lossless output with transparency preserved. (https://toolpantry.app/avif-to-png.md) - **HEIC to JPG** — iPhone photos openable anywhere — converted locally. (https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-jpg.md) - **HEIC to PNG** — Lossless HEIC conversion for editing pipelines. (https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-png.md) - **HEIC to WebP** — iPhone photos to the lightest web format. (https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-webp.md) - **HEIC to PDF** — Turn iPhone photos into one PDF — nothing uploaded. (https://toolpantry.app/heic-to-pdf.md) - **Favicon generator** — Create browser, Apple touch, and app icon PNG sizes from one logo. (https://toolpantry.app/favicon-generator.md) - **PNG to ICO** — Pack 16–256 px into one favicon.ico — transparency kept. (https://toolpantry.app/png-to-ico.md) - **Video to MP3** — Pull audio from MP4, MOV, or WebM — 128–320 kbps, all local. (https://toolpantry.app/video-to-mp3.md) - **Compress video** — Compress MP4 locally and verify the actual output size. (https://toolpantry.app/compress-video.md) - **Video to GIF** — Trim an MP4 clip into a looping GIF — fps and width dials included. (https://toolpantry.app/video-to-gif.md) - **GIF to MP4** — Modern video from an old GIF — smaller, full color, local. (https://toolpantry.app/gif-to-mp4.md) - **Audio trimmer & ringtones** — Cut MP3s on a waveform — export MP3, WAV, or iPhone .m4r. (https://toolpantry.app/audio-trimmer.md) - **Voice recorder** — Record and save MP3/WAV — nothing streamed to a server. (https://toolpantry.app/voice-recorder.md) - **Merge audio** — Join MP3/WAV/M4A files into one track — order your way. (https://toolpantry.app/merge-audio.md) - **Audio converter** — M4A, WAV, OGG, FLAC → MP3 or WAV — local, no upload. (https://toolpantry.app/audio-converter.md) - **Video trimmer** — Cut MP4 without re-encoding — instant, lossless, local. (https://toolpantry.app/video-trimmer.md) - **Video face blur** — Box the faces, export a blurred MP4 — baked in, never uploaded. (https://toolpantry.app/face-blur-video.md) - **Rotate video** — Turn 90°/180° by writing metadata — instant, lossless, local. (https://toolpantry.app/rotate-video.md) - **Mute video** — Remove audio without re-encoding — seconds, zero quality loss. (https://toolpantry.app/mute-video.md) - **Frame extractor** — Grab any moment as a full-resolution PNG or JPG. (https://toolpantry.app/frame-extractor.md) - **Crop video** — Freeform or 9:16 / 1:1 / 4:5 presets for Reels, Shorts, IG. (https://toolpantry.app/crop-video.md) - **MOV to MP4** — Lossless container swap — copies the data, never re-encodes. (https://toolpantry.app/mov-to-mp4.md) - **Merge videos** — Join clips into one MP4 — letterboxed, ordered, watermark-free. (https://toolpantry.app/merge-video.md) - **JPG to PNG** — Convert a JPEG into a lossless PNG copy for editors and upload forms. (https://toolpantry.app/jpg-to-png.md) - **PNG to WebP** — Make a smaller WebP copy while keeping transparent pixels. (https://toolpantry.app/png-to-webp.md) - **WebP to PNG** — Create a lossless PNG copy for editors and forms that reject WebP. (https://toolpantry.app/webp-to-png.md) - **PNG to JPG** — Export a compatible JPG with quality and transparency background controls. (https://toolpantry.app/png-to-jpg.md) ### SEO - **Schema markup generator** — Build Article, FAQ, Product, LocalBusiness, Organization, or WebSite JSON-LD. (https://toolpantry.app/schema-markup-generator.md) - **AI Agent Readiness Checker** — Score any site's AI-search readiness: llms.txt, Markdown, JSON-LD, robots, sitemap. (https://toolpantry.app/agent-ready-checker.md) - **AI Agent Readiness Report 2026** — We tested 184 popular tool sites: only 1.6% can serve Markdown to AI agents. (https://toolpantry.app/ai-agent-readiness-report.md) - **vs iLoveIMG** — Honest comparison: local vs server, breadth vs depth. (https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-iloveimg.md) - **vs TinyPNG** — Local vs cloud compression, limits, and target sizes. (https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-tinypng.md) - **vs Smallpdf** — Free core PDF ops vs advanced server editing. (https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-smallpdf.md) - **vs Adobe Acrobat online** — Core jobs vs the full (paid) PDF editor. (https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-adobe-acrobat-online.md) - **vs Zamzar** — Everyday formats local vs 1,100+ formats in the cloud. (https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-zamzar.md) - **vs CloudConvert** — One-off jobs vs API pipelines and batch scale. (https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-cloudconvert.md) - **vs PDF24** — Core and local vs broad and cloud (Windows app too). (https://toolpantry.app/tool-pantry-vs-pdf24.md) - **File size limits 2026** — Gmail to WhatsApp to portals — every cap, with a local tool for each. (https://toolpantry.app/file-size-limits.md) - **Smallpdf alternatives** — Seven honest picks — free, local, no sign-up. (https://toolpantry.app/smallpdf-alternatives.md) - **iLovePDF alternatives** — Free limits compared; local options included. (https://toolpantry.app/ilovepdf-alternatives.md) - **Acrobat alternatives** — When you need editing — and when you don't. (https://toolpantry.app/adobe-acrobat-alternatives.md) - **PDF24 alternatives** — Free, ad-free routes for the same jobs. (https://toolpantry.app/pdf24-alternatives.md) - **Zamzar alternatives** — Convert without the upload. (https://toolpantry.app/zamzar-alternatives.md) - **CloudConvert alternatives** — Free converters and API options compared. (https://toolpantry.app/cloudconvert-alternatives.md) - **TinyPNG alternatives** — Compress images without batch caps. (https://toolpantry.app/tinypng-alternatives.md) - **iLoveIMG alternatives** — Compress, crop, convert — locally. (https://toolpantry.app/iloveimg-alternatives.md) ### Business - **Quote generator** — Create a clean estimate with line items and a validity date. (https://toolpantry.app/quote-generator.md) - **Quote to invoice** — Turn a completed quote into a printable invoice in one step. (https://toolpantry.app/quote-to-invoice.md) - **Receipt generator** — Make a simple payment receipt and save it as a PDF. (https://toolpantry.app/receipt-generator.md) - **Payment reminder email** — Write a polite follow-up for an unpaid invoice. (https://toolpantry.app/payment-reminder-email.md) - **Contractor estimate** — Prepare a job estimate for repairs, cleaning, or trade work. (https://toolpantry.app/contractor-estimate-generator.md) - **Hourly rate calculator** — Find a sustainable minimum rate from income and business costs. (https://toolpantry.app/hourly-rate-calculator.md) - **Project pricing calculator** — Turn hours, expenses, and a buffer into a project price. (https://toolpantry.app/project-pricing-calculator.md) - **Expense tracker** — Log project expenses, see the total, and download a CSV. (https://toolpantry.app/expense-tracker.md) - **Retainer pricing calculator** — Price a monthly service package from hours, costs, and capacity. (https://toolpantry.app/retainer-pricing-calculator.md) - **Timesheet calculator** — Track weekly hours, billable time, and the value of your work. (https://toolpantry.app/timesheet-calculator.md) - **Keyword cluster tool** — Group a pasted keyword list, remove duplicates, and export CSV. (https://toolpantry.app/keyword-cluster-tool.md) - **Client onboarding checklist** — Build a reusable project kickoff checklist and export Markdown. (https://toolpantry.app/client-onboarding-checklist.md) - **Proposal generator** — Turn a project brief into a clear service proposal. (https://toolpantry.app/proposal-generator.md) - **Statement of work** — Outline scope, deliverables, timeline, and exclusions. (https://toolpantry.app/statement-of-work-generator.md) - **Payment schedule** — Split a project price into deposit and milestone payments. (https://toolpantry.app/payment-schedule-calculator.md) - **Client intake form** — Prepare the questions you need before a project starts. (https://toolpantry.app/client-intake-form.md) - **Meeting agenda** — Create a focused agenda with decisions and action items. (https://toolpantry.app/meeting-agenda-generator.md) ### Ecommerce ops - **Dimensional weight** — Compare actual, DIM, and billable parcel weight. (https://toolpantry.app/dimensional-weight-calculator.md) - **Shipping cost estimator** — Model delivery fees, fuel surcharge, handling, and insurance. (https://toolpantry.app/shipping-cost-estimator.md) - **Landed cost calculator** — Estimate the true import cost per product unit. (https://toolpantry.app/landed-cost-calculator.md) - **Ecommerce profit margin** — Find profit, break-even price, and target-margin price. (https://toolpantry.app/ecommerce-profit-margin-calculator.md) - **Reorder point** — Plan stock replenishment from sales velocity and lead time. (https://toolpantry.app/reorder-point-calculator.md) - **CBM volume calculator** — Calculate carton volume, cubic feet, and volume per unit. (https://toolpantry.app/cbm-volume-calculator.md) - **Packaging fit checker** — Test product rotations, padding, and box utilization. (https://toolpantry.app/packaging-fit-calculator.md) - **Safety stock calculator** — Estimate an inventory buffer from demand and lead-time variability. (https://toolpantry.app/safety-stock-calculator.md) - **Free shipping threshold** — Set a delivery offer while protecting your target margin. (https://toolpantry.app/free-shipping-threshold-calculator.md) - **Inventory coverage** — See days on hand and expected coverage with incoming stock. (https://toolpantry.app/inventory-coverage-calculator.md) - **Inventory spreadsheet** — Generate a clean SKU and stock CSV template. (https://toolpantry.app/inventory-spreadsheet-generator.md) - **Inventory tracker** — Track stock value and flag products at their reorder point. (https://toolpantry.app/inventory-tracker.md) - **Inventory turnover** — Calculate stock turns and days of inventory held. (https://toolpantry.app/inventory-turnover-calculator.md) - **Download time** — Estimate transfer time from file size and connection speed. (https://toolpantry.app/download-time-calculator.md) - **Marketplace fees** — Break down fees, net payout, profit, and margin. (https://toolpantry.app/marketplace-fee-calculator.md) ## FAQ **¿Los juegos ya son jugables?** Ambos funcionan hoy en compilaciones de desarrollo. Linjiang Chronicles tiene flujos completos de un jugador con suites de pruebas headless; Moonlit Kingdom está en entrega para iOS. Los demos web jugables se anunciarán aquí primero. **¿Los juegos están hechos 100% por IA?** No — y esa honestidad es el punto de este laboratorio. Los equipos de agentes manejan generación, implementación, pruebas y recolección de evidencia a una escala que una persona no puede. Los humanos son dueños del gusto: qué se siente divertido, qué se corta, qué se publica. Las guías muestran exactamente dónde está esa línea. **¿Puedo usar estas tuberías en mi propio juego?** Sí — empieza por la guía principal , luego la tubería de arte . Los enfoques son neutrales respecto al proveedor y escalan hacia abajo hasta proyectos en solitario. --- # Linjiang Chronicles — Simulación de Vida Hecha por IA (Godot) > Linjiang Chronicles (一纸青云·临江志) — una simulación de vida antigua con 305 eventos para iPhone, creada por equipos de agentes de IA en Godot. Sistemas, números y estado honesto del desarrollo. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/gamedev/linjiang-chronicles ## About Una simulación de vida antigua de pago único para iPhone — presenta los exámenes imperiales, administra un granero durante la temporada de crecidas y vive con las consecuencias de 711 decisiones. Construida en Godot por equipos de agentes de IA, con cada rama auditada automáticamente. ## Quick answer ¿Qué es? Una simulación de vida centrada en la lectura, ambientada en un condado junto a un río en la China antigua. Diriges una vida a través de 8 capítulos — estudios, familia, socorro en desastres y veinte finales posibles — con una interfaz de papel y bermellón diseñada para jugar con una mano. ## La idea de diseño: decisiones que se pueden leer La mayoría de los juegos móviles de "decisiones" esconden sus sistemas detrás de temporizadores. Linjiang va al revés: cada decisión muestra su coste antes de confirmarla. Una página de decisión es una página de lectura — el plan, los recibos y las consecuencias están todos sobre el papel. El contrato de interfaz es explícito: seleccionar nunca ejecuta; solo el sello de bermellón en la parte inferior confirma. Dos opciones adyacentes siempre caben en pantalla como tarjetas de ancho fijo, y cada paso de preparación es alcanzable con un toque — sin menús ocultos. ## Sistemas que vale la pena conocer ### Tres rutas de vida, un condado Eliges un camino por la vida del condado — los estudios imperiales entre ellos — y el juego rastrea bienes materiales, salud, reputación y las dos relaciones de arco largo (actualmente un ayudante del magistrado y la hija de un comerciante). Las rutas se cruzan: una decisión de examen puede costarte el grano que necesitabas para el socorro de la inundación. ### El problema del granero (capítulo seis) El capítulo seis convierte el socorro en desastres en un puzle de inventario finito: los fondos de cinco hogares compran doce sacos de grano, una sola vez. La primera distribución se divide en tres resultados; la segunda ola te presiona para salvar trabajadores o vender existencias. El socorro de la crecida otoñal exige que *realmente queden* cuatro sacos — el juego audita tus recibos, no tus intenciones. Ninguna cantidad de reputación o descanso conjura grano; las deudas viejas y los registros dañados tienen sus propias salidas de entrega. ### Una tubería de contenido con grado de evidencia Los 305 eventos se renderizan headless en CI. Una corrida de balance recorre el grafo completo y reporta dónde la economía muere. Cada estado de contenido tiene un ciclo de vida — borrador, validado, integrado, renderizado, visto en runtime, jugado a mano, aceptado — y nada se declara terminado antes de probar su etapa. El estado honesto actual: el contenido de una partida se estima en unas 10 horas por ruta según los modelos de simulación, y **el objetivo de "20+ horas" explícitamente todavía no está aceptado**. ## Qué hicieron realmente los agentes - **Contenido a escala:** eventos, ramas, recibos y finales redactados como datos estructurados y validados por recorridos del grafo — las partes de una simulación de vida que son puro volumen. - **Iteración de interfaz bajo restricciones:** seis diseños en cuatro tamaños de teléfono (320→430px) más modo de letra grande, verificados con capturas de mismo estado antes/después. - **Evidencia de ejecución:** grabaciones en tiempo real de compilaciones reales revisadas fotograma a fotograma — la tubería de nuestra [guía principal](https://toolpantry.app/how-we-build-games-with-ai-agents.html). ## Tablero de estado honesto | Área | Estado | |---|---| | Bucle principal y guardado | Jugable en Godot, verificado headless | | 305 eventos / 20 finales | Renderizan limpio, auditados automáticamente | | Arte y audio | Etapa candidata — aceptación humana final pendiente | | Afirmación de 20 horas | No aceptada (la simulación estima ~10h por ruta) | | Pruebas en dispositivo y publicación | Sin comenzar — siguiente: compilación para iPhone | ## Notes Godot 4.6 · iPhone vertical · pago único · sin anuncios, sin gacha, sin ganchos de servicio en vivo. ## FAQ **¿Cuándo puedo jugarlo?** Todavía no — está en desarrollo activo. El flujo completo de un jugador funciona hoy en Godot, y la publicación en iPhone es el próximo hito. Los demos jugables aparecerán primero en este laboratorio. **¿De verdad son 305 eventos?** Sí, y todos se renderizan en pruebas automatizadas. Lo que aún no está probado es el tiempo de juego total: los modelos estiman unas diez horas por ruta y el listón interno es veinte. La brecha es profundidad por rama, no cantidad de eventos. **¿Por qué construir una simulación de vida con agentes?** Las simulaciones de vida son casi puro volumen de contenido — cientos de eventos interconectados donde lo difícil es la consistencia, no el renderizado. Es exactamente el trabajo que las tuberías de agentes hacen bien: generar, validar contra el grafo y grabar evidencia. Ver la guía de tubería . --- # Moonlit Kingdom — RPG Idle Hecho por IA (Godot, iOS) > Moonlit Kingdom (月光王国) — un RPG idle sobre reconstruir una aldea con héroes y slimes, creado por agentes de IA en Godot y camino a iOS. Economía, capítulos, expediciones y estado honesto. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/gamedev/moonlit-kingdom ## About Un RPG idle sobre volver a iluminar un mundo oscuro, aldea a aldea. Empieza tocando un botón de expedición; termina gestionando cuarenta rutas, dieciséis reliquias y una línea de producción de slimes — en un teléfono, en horizontal, construido por equipos de agentes en Godot. ## Quick answer ¿Qué es? Un RPG idle de tocar-para-automatizar. Cada expedición devuelve coraje al instante; los slimes y las posadas convierten ese bucle en producción por segundo. Ocho capítulos, reinicios de prestigio que suben tu tasa para siempre, y un sistema de expediciones que pausa tu economía mientras tus unidades están fuera. ## El bucle central, con fórmulas reales Los juegos idle viven o mueren según si sus matemáticas son legibles. Moonlit Kingdom publica las suyas: el ingreso de coraje por segundo es (0.60 × slimes + 2.5 × posadas) × bonus de capítulo × (1 + 0.15 × fuego estelar). La moneda de prestigio (fuego estelar) escala como max(1, floor(sqrt(ganancias de la partida ÷ meta del capítulo))) — la raíz cuadrada mantiene los reinicios tempranos significativos sin que los tardíos trivialicen la curva. El ritmo: toca expediciones para coraje instantáneo → compra slimes (baratos, lentos) → ahorra para posadas (caras, tasa 4×) → alcanza la meta del capítulo → elige una bendición permanente. *Juramento del Alba* mejora el juego manual un 25%; *Juramento del Hogar* mejora la automatización un 25%. Esa única elección decide qué tipo de próximo capítulo jugarás. ## Progresión de capítulos | # | Zona | Meta de coraje | Eficiencia | |---|---|---|---| | 1 | Aldea Chispa | 250 | 1.00× | | 2 | Bosque Campanaviento | 650 | 1.15× | | 3 | Cañón del Río Estelar | 1.600 | 1.35× | | 4 | Muro Exterior de la Torre | 3.800 | 1.60× | El núcleo de la torre del capítulo cinco es una línea lateral opcional — la campaña continúa por ocho capítulos hasta el final del núcleo estelar, donde un jefe final y una elección de final cierran la partida. ## Expediciones: el sistema anti-idle Cada seis expediciones se activa un encuentro de viaje — escolta una caravana para coraje instantáneo, o sigue a una bestia estelar para un impulso temporal de producción. Más tarde se abre el tablero de expediciones: cuarenta rutas y dieciséis reliquias. El despacho usa una ranura activa, **pausa la producción de las unidades enviadas**, y las recompensas deben reclamarse en el gremio — una fricción deliberada que convierte "déjalo corriendo" en una decisión real. La segunda ranura de reliquia se desbloquea en el capítulo cuatro, y las partidas antiguas migran limpiamente. Los jefes mutan. El bestiario y los sistemas de mutación dan variación a peleas repetidas, para que el grindeo idle nunca se vuelva una única ecuación resuelta. ## Qué hicieron realmente los agentes - **Interfaz táctil bajo restricciones de área segura:** cada diseño verificado a 780×360, 844×390 y 932×430 — incluidos notch e indicador de inicio — con evidencia antes/después para cada arreglo. - **Continuidad de guardado:** reinicios a mitad de expedición, progreso offline y estado de recompensas verificados con reinicios de proceso independientes, no solo pruebas en memoria. - **Tubería de entrega iOS:** un proyecto Xcode ligado al código fuente con hashes de manifiesto — la compilación que pruebas es demostrablemente el código que revisaste. - **Grabaciones en tiempo real:** cada función aceptada incluye un video de la compilación real — el enfoque de QA de la [guía de tubería](https://toolpantry.app/how-we-build-games-with-ai-agents.html). ## Tablero de estado honesto | Área | Estado | |---|---| | Bucle idle central y 8 capítulos | Jugable, compilaciones en marcha | | Expediciones, reliquias, bendiciones | Implementadas y verificadas en runtime | | Proyecto Xcode para iOS | Entrega ligada al código completa (sin firmar) | | Firma, TestFlight, tienda | Sin comenzar | | Aceptación humana del "feel" | En curso — el cuello de botella honesto del diseño idle | ## Notes Godot 4.6 · iPhone horizontal · anti-pilares explícitos: sin combate de alta precisión, sin anuncios forzados, sin aceleración de pago. ## FAQ **¿Cuándo sale?** La compilación jugable funciona hoy; la firma iOS y TestFlight son los próximos hitos. No se anuncia fecha de lanzamiento — este laboratorio publica progreso, no promesas. **¿Por qué horizontal en un teléfono?** Los juegos idle son paneles de control: tasas de producción, temporizadores de despacho y curvas de coste quieren anchura. Cada diseño fue creado y probado para jugar en horizontal con una mano a tamaños reales de dispositivo. **¿Puedo ver las matemáticas?** Sí — las fórmulas de este artículo son las de la compilación. Los jugadores de idle acaban haciendo ingeniería inversa en hojas de cálculo de todas formas, así que el diseño publica su curva con honestidad. --- # Vibe Coding de Juegos: Qué Funciona de Verdad (Guía 2026) > Una guía honesta del vibe coding de juegos en 2026: qué domina la IA (prototipos, volumen de contenido, herramientas), dónde se rompe (diversión, feel, balance) y el flujo que cierra la brecha. Source: https://toolpantry.app/es/gamedev/vibe-coding-games-what-works ## About 181.000 juegos móviles publicados en seis meses. El veinte por ciento de las entradas de Steam Next Fest ya declara uso de IA generativa. ¿Y los ingresos? Apenas se movieron. Aquí está la división honesta entre lo que la IA domina y lo que sigue devorando proyectos. ## Quick answer La versión de un párrafo: la IA es espectacular en prototipos, volumen de contenido, herramientas y velocidad de iteración. Es mediocre en diversión, feel, balance y pulido — exactamente lo que hace que un juego valga la pena jugarlo dos veces. Los equipos que ganan con ella tratan la IA como una línea de producción con controles de calidad, no como una máquina tragamonedas. ## Qué dicen realmente los números de 2026 | Señal | Número | Qué significa | |---|---|---| | Juegos móviles lanzados (6 meses) | 181.000 | Hacer juegos ahora es barato | | Juegos que ganan ≥ 20.000 $ (trimestral) | +14% interanual | Hacer juegos *exitosos* no lo es | | Entradas de Steam Next Fest con IA declarada | ~20% | Los jugadores lo saben — la divulgación es mainstream | | Coste típico de un prototipo con IA | 10–50 $ en llamadas de API | La barrera desapareció; el filtro es el gusto | Leídos juntos, estos números describen un embudo con la boca ancha y el cuello estrecho: la generación está resuelta, la distribución y la retención no. Cada guía que promete "haz un juego exitoso con un prompt" está vendiendo la parte ancha del embudo. ## Lo que la IA domina de verdad - **Prototipos en una tarde.** Mecánicas, esqueletos de interfaz, arte de relleno — el coste de descubrir "¿esta idea es tonta?" cayó 100×. Es la mayor victoria y la más infrautilizada. - **Volumen de contenido.** Cientos de eventos, objetos, ramas de diálogo y niveles — con validación por grafo para mantenerlos consistentes. Los juegos de texto y sistemas se lo comen al desayuno. - **Herramientas y QA.** Suites de pruebas, grabaciones de evidencia, regresiones por tamaños de pantalla. Trabajo aburrido que los humanos se saltan y la IA nunca se cansa de hacer. - **Tuberías de arte.** Sets de sprites consistentes, atlas, mapas y audio — cuando la tubería tiene post-procesado determinista ([nuestra guía completa](https://toolpantry.app/ai-game-art-pipeline.html)). ## Dónde se rompe (la parte que nadie publica) - **La diversión no es un problema de generación.** La IA puede construir tu sistema de combate; no puede decirte que el golpe no se siente bien. "Se siente bien" es un bucle de juicio que corre a velocidad humana. - **El balance es adversarial.** Una economía que "funciona" en papel se rompe cuando los jugadores encuentran la estrategia degenerada. El balance requiere probar contra la creatividad humana, no solo simular. - **Volumen de contenido ≠ profundidad.** Nuestros propios números: 305 eventos, 711 decisiones — y el veredicto interno honesto es que la afirmación de 20 horas *todavía no se ha ganado*. El volumen es barato; el significado por minuto no. - **El pulido son mil juicios pequeños.** Áreas seguras, tiempos de animación, cuándo aparece el aviso de recompensa respecto a la animación de regreso. Cada uno es trivial; el agregado es lo que separa un juego de un demo. ## Géneros donde la IA tiene ventaja real El patrón en los éxitos hechos con IA de 2026: **baja dependencia de arte, alta densidad de sistemas o texto.** Simulaciones de vida, estrategia histórica, ficción interactiva, juegos idle e incrementales, herramientas de simulación. Estos juegos se construyen con decisiones y números — exactamente lo que las tuberías de agentes producen y validan bien. Los juegos de acción de alta fidelidad son el extremo opuesto: cada fotograma es feel hecho a mano. ## El flujo de trabajo que cierra la brecha 1. **Rebanada vertical primero.** Un bucle completo — del menú a la recompensa — antes de expandir contenido. Si la rebanada no es divertida con arte de relleno, más generación no la salvará. 2. **Congela las interfaces.** Una vez aceptado un sistema, su contrato se bloquea. Los agentes cambian implementaciones libremente; no mueven los postes de la portería. 3. **Evidencia sobre afirmaciones.** Cada función se publica con una grabación de ejecución y una captura antes/después. "Funciona" es un video, no una frase. 4. **Puertas humanas en el gusto.** Programa puntos de control explícitos donde un humano juzga feel, aspecto y diversión — y está dispuesto a matar funciones ahí. 5. **Presupuesta cómputo, no esperanza.** Rastrea los costes de generación y verificación por función. Nuestra simulación pesada gasta la mayor parte en bucles de validación — esa es la proporción sana. ## La conclusión honesta El desarrollo de juegos con IA en 2026 no es un atajo alrededor del desarrollo de juegos. Es un multiplicador de producción: multiplica velocidad, volumen y consistencia — y multiplica el juicio que aportes. Aporta gusto y un control de calidad, y podrás publicar cosas que un desarrollador solo nunca podría. No aportes ninguno de los dos, y te sumarás a los 181.000. ## FAQ **¿De verdad una persona puede publicar un juego con IA?** Sí — una persona más una tubería de agentes puede producir hoy lo que antes hacía un equipo pequeño. La trampa es el cambio de rol: te vuelves director y control de calidad, no productor. El trabajo se mueve de hacer a juzgar. **¿Qué motor debería usar?** El que realmente vayas a iterar. Nosotros usamos Godot porque su modo headless abarata las pruebas automatizadas — una ventaja real cuando los agentes ejecutan tus suites. Unity y stacks web también sirven; las ideas de tubería se transfieren. **¿El contenido generado con IA espanta a los jugadores?** Los estudios de 2026 sugieren que el contenido de IA no divulgado puede dañar la confianza — pero los jugadores responden primero a la calidad. La regla práctica: sé honesto con tu tubería (nosotros lo somos) y nunca dejes que la calidad de generación caiga por debajo de lo que el juego necesita.